Catalog

Table of Contents
INDEX PAGES .................................................1

1
NEW
Table of Contents ....................................................................................... 1 Multifunction Relay Selector Guide....................................................... 2 Product Index (Alpha Numeric).............................................................. 4 Single Function by Device Number ....................................................... 6
NEW
SMOR-B Digital-DDS Feeder Management .................................... 179 MDP Digital Overcurrent Protection................................. 183 735/737 Digital-SR Feeder Protection........................................... 187 MIF Digital-M Feeder Protection........................................... 193 MIC Digital-MIDModular Overcurrent..................................... 197
10
GENERAL INFORMATION .............................7

2
NEW NEW NEW NEW
Motor Protection ...........................199

Motor Protection Selector Guide....................................................... 200 469 Digital-SR Motor Management Relay ........................ 201 369 Digital Motor Management Relay ........................ 209 RRTD Digital Remote RTD module...................................... 217 269Plus Digital Motor Management Relay ........................ 219 MPM Digital Motor Protection Meter................................ 227 SPM Digital Synchronous Motor Control ........................ 231 239 Digital Motor Protection ............................................ 239 MM3 Digital Intelligent MCC Controller............................ 247 MM2 Digital Intelligent MCC Controller............................ 255
GE Industrial Systems ............................................................................... 7 Who We Are................................................................................................ 8 Technical Support.................................................................................... 12 Training Courses ...................................................................................... 13 Online Ordering......................................................................................... 15 Website....................................................................................................... 19 Publications Available on the WEB..................................................... 23
NEW NEW
SYSTEMS.......................................................25
3
NEW
NEW
Substation Automation....................25
GE Substation Automation Systems.................................................... 27 Relay Communication Equipment ........... 35 Protocols, FSC, QPJ, ModBus Monitor, FAC, F485, MSP2, FSD
11
Special Functions. .............................263

BUS1000/2000 Analog Modular Bus Bar Protection ....................... 265 C30 Digital-UR Controller.......................................................... 269 C60 Digital-UR Breaker Management Relay ................... 273 DBT Digital Breaker Supervision...................................... 277 DBF Digital-DDS Breaker Failure ............................................... 279 SBC Static Breaker Failure ............................................... 282 DRS Digital-DDS Reclosing System/Sync. Check.................. 283 MCP Digital Capacitor Bank Protection........................... 287 MIV Digital-M Voltage/Frequency Relay ............................. 291
4 5
NEW
Product Families ..............................47

M UR SR MID DDS Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital M family overview............................................ 48 UR family overview .......................................... 49 SR family overview........................................... 57 MID family overview........................................ 58 DDS family overview ....................................... 59
NEW
MULTIFUNCTION RELAYS ..........................61

6
12
Power Quality ................................294

PQM PPQM Digital Digital Power Quality Meter ..................................... 295 Portable Power Quality Meter ................... 303
Generator Protection .......................61

Generator Protection Selector Guide.................................................. 62 489 Digital-SR Generator Management Relay ................. 63 DGP Digital Generator Protection....................................... 71 MGC Digital-MIDSmall Generator Protection ........................... 79 LPS-O Digital Gen. Back up/Out-of-Step Protection ....... 125
SINGLE FUNCTION RELAYS .....................305

13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Overcurrent Relays ...................................................... 306

IAC, DIAC/DIFC/DSFC, IFC, IFCV, CHC, HFC, PJC
Transformer Protection....................81
Transformer Protection Selector Guide ............................................. 82 T60 Digital-UR Transformer Management Relay............. 83 745 Digital-SR Transformer Management Relay............. 87 DTP Digital-DDS Transformer Protection....................................95 DTR Digital-DDS Transformer Tap Changer Controller ........ 101
Synchronizing Relays ............................................... 326

MLJ, SLJ, IJS
Voltage and Frequency Relays .................. 331

MFF, DFF, TOV, MOV, IAV, IFV, ICR, SFF, CFVB, NBV, NGV
Differential and Timing Relays .................. 346

BDD, CFD, PVD, GDC, IJD, SAM, SBD
Transmission Line Protection ........103

Transmission Line Protection Selector Guide ................................ 104 L90 Digital-UR Line Differential Relay ................................... 105 L60 Digital-UR Line Phase Comparison Relay .................... 109 D60 Digital-UR Line Distance Relay ....................................... 113 ALPS Digital Advanced Line Protection............................ 117 LPS-D Digital Line Protection System................................. 125 DLPD Digital Line Protection System................................. 131 MLP Digital Distance Protection....................................... 139
Directional Relays.......................................................... 355

TCCV, TCW, IBC, JBC/JBCG, ICW
Generator Protection Relays......................... 362

CEH, GGP, CEX, SGC
Auxiliary Relays ................................................................ 367

HEA, HAA, HFA, HGA, HSA, HMA, RDB, NGA, NBT, ESA, HGA18, DAR, GXS, JBCV, GSY, CEB, CEYG, CEY, GCX, GCY, NAA
COMPONENTS ..........................................395
20 21
NEW
Switches ........................................................................................396
SB, SB-1, SB-9, SB-10, SBM
Distribution Feeder Protection ......141

Distribution Feeder Protection Selector Guide............................... 142 F60 Digital-UR Feeder Management Relay ...................... 143 F35 Digital-UR Multiple Feeder Management Relay ...... 147 750/760 Digital-SR Feeder Management Relay ...................... 151 DFP200 Digital Feeder Protection........................................... 159 DFP100 Digital Feeder Protection........................................... 167 DMS Digital-DDS Feeder Management System...................... 175
Sensors, Accessories and Services ........ 415

Sensors, 515, PK-2, XCA, XLA, XTM, EBs, Pullout Blocks, ETs, CTs, Instrument Transformers, Custom Solutions
NEW
SALES OFFICES ..........................................426

22
Sales Offices .......................................................................... 427
Indexes
Multifunction Selector
GE Substation Automation
1
27 Custom Panel Solutions 425 DDS Digital Distribution System Family 59 F485 Communication Convertor 43 FAC Communication Convertor 41 FSC Fiber Optic System 37 FSD Fiber Subsystem Datalink 46
GENERATION
C30 C60 DRS DBT DBF SBC
TRANSMISSION
C30 C60 DRS DBT DBF SBC
LPS-O 489 DGP
T60 745 DTP DTR
Bus
1000/2000
L90, L60, D60, ALPS, LPS-D, DLPD, MLP
T60 745 DTP DTR
MCP
GENERATION
Model 489 Generator 745 Transformer DGP Generator DTP Tranfsormer Page 63 87 71 95 Model 745 Transformer ALPS Line Distance BUS 1000/2000 Bus Bar C30 Controller C60 Breaker D60 Line Distance DBF Breaker Failure DBT Breaker Supervision DLPD Transmission Line
TRANSMISSION
Page 87 117 265 269 273 113 279 277 131 283 Model DTP Transformer Page 95
DTR 101 Transf. Tap changer controller L60 Line Phase Comparison L90 Line Differential LPS-D Line MCP Capacitor Bank Control MLP Distance SBC Breaker Backup T60 Transformer 109 105 125 287 139 282 83
DTR 101 Transformer Tap Changer Controller LPS-O Generator Backup/Out-of-step T60 Transformer 125 83
DRS Reclosing Sync. Check
Indexes
Multifunction Selector
ModBus Monitor 40 MSP2 Ethernet Based Serial Port Server 45 QPJ Touchscreen Interface 39 Relay Communications Protocols 36 Sensors 416 UR UR Family Overview 49
DISTRIBUTION
consumers
C30 C60 DRS DBT DBF SBC F35, F60, 735/737, 750/760, DFP200, DFP100, DMS SMOR-B, MDP, MIF, MIC, MIV, D60, MLP, DFF T60 745 DTP DTR 489, DGP, MGC, LPS-O 469, 269+/269, MPM, 369, 239, SPM, RRTD
INDUSTRIAL
F35, F60, 750/760, DFP200, DFP100, C30, C60, 735/737, DMS DRS, DBT, SMOR-B, MDP, MIF, PQM, DBF, SBC MIC, MIV, D60, MLP, PPQM DFF Load C30, C60, DRS, DBT, DBF, SBC T60, 745, DTP, DTR MM2, MM3, 239
Gen
Bus
1000/ 2000
M
(MV)
Bus
1000/2000
M
(LV)
MCP, 750/760, PQM, PPQM, SMOR-B, F60
M
(HV)
469, 369, RRTD
DISTRIBUTION
Model Page Model Page Model Page
INDUSTRIAL
Model Page Model Page
735/737 187 Feeder Protection 745 Transformer 87 750/760 Feeder 151 BUS 1000/2000 265 Bus Bar Protection C30 Controller 269 C60 Breaker 273 D60 Line Distance 113 DBF Breaker Failure 279 DBT 277 Breaker Supervision DFF 334 Load Shedding Frequency DFP100 167 Feeder Protection DFP200 159 Feeder Protection DIAC/DSFC/DIFC 315 Single Phase Overcurrent DMS Feeder 175 DTP 95 Transformer DTR 101 Transformer Tap Changer Controller
F35 Multiple (1-5) Feeder F60 Feeder MCP Capacitor Bank Control MDP Overcurrent MIC Overcurrent MIF Feeder MIV Voltage/Frequency MLP Distance PQM Power Quality PPQM Power Quality SBC Breaker Backup SMOR-B Feeder T60 Transformer
147 143 287 183 197 193 291 139 295 303 282 179 83
239 239 Motor 269/269 Plus 219 Motor 369 209 Motor 469 201 Motor 489 63 Generator 735/737 187 Feeder 745 87 Transformer 750/760 151 Feeder BUS 1000/2000 265 Bus Bar C30 269 Controller C60 273 Breaker DBF 279 Breaker Failure DBT 277 Breaker Supervision
DFP100 167 Feeder DFP200 159 Feeder DGP 71 Generator DMS 175 Feeder DRS 283 Reclosing Sync.Check DTP 95 Transformer DTR 101 Tap Changer Controller F35 147 Multiple Feeder F60 143 Feeder LPS-D 125 Line MDP 183 Overcurrent MGC 79 Small Generator
MIC 197 Overcurrent MIF 193 Feeder MIV 291 Voltage/Frequency MM2 255 Intel. MCC Controller MM3 247 Intel. MCC Controller MPM 227 Motor Meter PQM 295 Power Quality PPQM 303 Power Quality RRTD 217 Remote RTD SBC 282 Breaker Backup SMOR-B 179 Feeder SPM 231 Synch. Motor Controller T60 83 Transformer
Indexes
Alpha Numeric Index

ALPHA INDEX
1
Model Description Page Model Description Page
116B407 239
Pullout Fuse Blocks ..................................................419 Motor Protection ......................................................239
DRS DSFC DTP DTR EB-1 EB-2 EB-4 EB-25 EB-26 EB-27 ESA ET F35 F485 F60 FAC FSC FSD GCT5 GCT16 GCX GCY GDC
Reclosing System/Sync. Check..............................283 Single Phase Overcurrent ......................................315 Transformer Protection ............................................95 Transformer Tap Changer Controller ....................101 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Terminal Block ..........................................................419 Auxiliary Relay ..........................................................393 Indicating Lights & LEDs ........................................420 Multiple Feeder Management Relay ..................147 Communication Convertor ........................................43 Feeder Management Relay ..................................143 Communication Convertor ........................................41 Fiber Optic System......................................................37 Fiber Subsystem Datalink..........................................46 Ground Fault CT ........................................................422 Ground Fault CT ........................................................422 Phase Reactance Distance ....................................394 Phase Mho Distance................................................394 Restricted Earth Ground Fault ................................353
269Plus/269 Motor Management Relay ....................................219 369 469 489 515 735/737 745 750/760 ALPS BDD Motor Management Relay ....................................209 Motor Management Relay ....................................201 Generator Management Relay ............................63 Blocking and Test Module ......................................417 Feeder Protection ....................................................187 Transformer Management Relay ........................87 Feeder Management Relay ..................................151 Advanced Line Protection ......................................117 Transformer Differential ..........................................347

BUS 1000/2000 Modular Bus Bar Protection ..............................265 C30 C60 CEB CEH CEX CEY CEYG CFD CFVB CHC Controller....................................................................269 Breaker Management Relay ..............................273 Phase Offset Mho Distance ....................................394 Loss of Excitation......................................................363 Angle Impedance ....................................................366 Phase Mho Distance................................................394 Ground Mho Distance..............................................394 Machine Differential ................................................349 Voltage Balance ......................................................345 Instantaneous Overcurrent ....................................325
Communications Protocols ..............................................................36 CTs CTs Ground Fault CTs ......................................................421 Phase CTs ..................................................................423
GE Industrial Systems ......................................................................7 GE Substation Automation ............................................................27 GGP GSY GXS HAA HEA HFA HFC HGA HGA18 HGF3 HGF5 HGF8 HMA HSA IAC Sensitive Power Directional ..................................365 Mho Distance ............................................................394 Auto Synchronizing ..................................................394 Auxiliary or Annunciator ........................................373 Multicontact Auxiliary ............................................368 Multicontact Auxiliary ............................................375 Multicontact Auxiliary ............................................325 Hinged Armature Auxiliary......................................379 Single Shot Reclosing ..............................................394 Ground Fault CT ........................................................421 Ground Fault CT ........................................................421 Ground Fault CT ........................................................421 Hinged Armature Auxiliary......................................387 Multi-contact Hand Reset Auxiliary ......................384 Time Overcurrent......................................................306
Custom Panel Solutions ................................................................425 D60 DAR DBF DBT Line Distance Relay..................................................113 Modular Reclosing Relay ........................................394 Breaker Failure..........................................................279 Breaker Supervision ................................................277
DDS Family Overview ....................................................................59 DFF DFP100 DFP200 DGP DIAC DIFC DLPD DMS Load Shedding Frequency ......................................334 Feeder Protection ....................................................167 Feeder Protection ....................................................159 Generator Protection ................................................71 Single Phase Overcurrent ......................................315 Single Phase Overcurrent ......................................315 Line Protection System............................................131 Digital Multifunctional System, ..............................175
Indexes
Alpha Numeric Index

ALPHA INDEX
Model Description Page Model Description Page
IAV IBC ICR ICW IFC IFCV IFV IJD IJS
Time Over/Under Voltage ........................................344 Phase Directional Overcurrent ..............................361 Phase Sequence/Undervoltage ............................344 Time Overpower........................................................361 Time Overcurrent......................................................319 TOC with Voltage Restraint ....................................323 Time Overvoltage......................................................344 Machine Differential ..............................................354 Synchronism Check ................................................330
Online Ordering ................................................................................15 PCT PJC PK-2 PPQM PQM Phase CTs ..................................................................423 Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays........................325 Test Blocks and Plugs ............................................417 Portable Power Quality Meter................................303 Power Quality Meter ................................................295
Publications Available Online ........................................................23 PVD QPJ RDB86 Bus Differential ........................................................351 QuickPanel Jr User Interface ..................................39 High Speed Trip and Lockout Relay ......................389
Instrument Transformers ................................................................424 JBC JBCG JBCV L60 L90 LPS-D LPS-O Phase Directional Overcurrent ..............................361 Directional Overcurrent ..........................................361 Directional Overcurrent ..........................................394 Line Phase Comparison Relay ................................109 Line Differential Relay..............................................105 Line Protection System............................................125 Generator Backup/Out of Step Protection ..........125
Relay Communications Protocols Reference ................................36 RRTD Remote RTD module ................................................217
Sales Offices....................................................................................427 SAM SB SB-1 SB-9 SB-10 SBC SBD SBM Timing Relay ..............................................................354 Control and Transfer Switches ..............................396 Control and Transfer Switches ..............................401 Master Control Switches ........................................406 Control and Transfer Switches ..............................408 Breaker Backup ........................................................282 Bus Differential ........................................................354 Control and Transfer Switches ..............................410
M Family Overview ..........................................................................48 MCP MDP MFF MGC MIC Capacitor Bank Protection......................................287 Overcurrent Protection............................................183 Frequency Relay ......................................................332 Small Generator Protection ......................................79 Modular Overcurrent ..............................................197
Sensors ............................................................................................416 SFF SGC SLJ SMOR-B SPM Underfrequency ......................................................344 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ..........................366 Static Synchronism Check Relay ..........................329 Feeder Management ..............................................179 Synchronous Motor Control ..................................231
MID Family Overview......................................................................58 MIF MIV MLJ MLP MM2 MM3
Feeder Protection ....................................................193 Voltage/Frequency Relay ........................................291 Synchronism Check ................................................327 Distance Protection ................................................139 Intelligent MCC Controller ......................................255 Intelligent MCC Controller ......................................247
SR Family Overview ........................................................................57 T60 TCCV TCW TOV Transformer Management Relay ............................83 Directional Overcurrent ..........................................357 Directional Power ....................................................359 Modular Voltage Relay ............................................338
ModBus Monitor ............................................................................40 MOV MPM MSP2 NAA NBT NBV NGA NGV Voltage Relay ............................................................340 Motor Protection Meter ..........................................227 Ethernet Based Serial Port Server ..........................45 Pilot/Distance Auxiliary ..........................................394 Breaker Trip Circuit Supervision............................392 Voltage Unbalance Relays ......................................345 Auxiliary Relays ........................................................391 Instantaneous Voltage ............................................345
Training Courses ..................................................................................13 UR Family Overview ........................................................................49 Website..............................................................................................19 Who We Are ............................................................................................9 XCA XLA XTM Test Probes and Plugs ............................................418 Test Plugs ..................................................................418 Test Plug and Card Extender ..................................418
Indexes
Single Function Index

SINGLE FUNCTION INDEX BY DEVICE NUMBER
1
Device No. Description GE Relay Model
2 8 21 25 27 30 32 37 40 46 47 49(+) 50 51 50/51 50/51(+) 50BF 59 60 61 64 67 68 69 74 76 78 79 81 85 86 87 87(+) 94 ( )
Time-delay Starting or Closing Relay Control Power Disconnecting Device Distance Relay Synchronizing or Synchronism-Check Device Undervoltage Relay Annunciator Relay Directional Power Relay Undercurrent or Underpower Relay Field Relay Reverse-phase or Phase-balance Current Relay Phase-sequence Voltage Relay Thermal image protection (Small Generator/Motor Relay Systems) Instantaneous Overcurrent or Rate-of-Rise Relay AC Time Overcurrent Relay Instantaneous and Time Overcurrent Relay Overcurrent Relay System Breaker Failure Relay Overvoltage Relay Voltage or Current Balance Relay Machine Split Phase Current Balance Ground Detector Relay AC Directional Overcurrent Relay Blocking Relay Circuit Breaker Supervision and Control Device Alarm Relay DC Overcurrent Relay Phase Angle Measuring or Out-of-Step Protective Relay AC Reclosing Relay Frequency Relay Carrier or Pilot-wire Receiver Relay Lockout Relay Differential Protective Relay Differential Relay System Tripping or Trip-free Relay Auxiliary Relay
SAM, IAV PK-2 CEB, CEY, GCX, GCY, GXS, CEYG IJS, GXS, MLJ, SLJ IAV, NGV, HGA, HMA, TOV HAA GGP, ICW, TCW ICW CEH SGC ICR, NBV MGC*, MIF* CHC, HFC IAC, IFC, IFCV IAC, IFC, DIAC/DIFC/DSFC MIC*, MDP*, MCP*, MIF* SBC, DBF* IAV, NGV, TOV, MIV* NBV IFC, IAC IAV, IFV, TOV IBC, JBC, JBCG, JBCV, TCCV CEB MOV* HAA, HGA, HMA, DBT*, NBT PJC CEX + GSY, CEX HGA18, DRS, DAR SFF, DFF, MFF, MIV* NAA HEA, HFA, HSA, RDB BDD, CFD, IJD, PVD, SBD, GDC DTP*, BUS, STD HFA, HGA, HMA, NGA, ESA, RDB HAA, HEA, HFA, HGA, HMA, HSA, NGA
* These devices can also be found under the appropriate multifunction selector guides in this catalog.
Indexes
GE Industrial Systems
Total Solutions...
Aircraft Engines Appliances Capital Services
From Electrical Equipment to Enterprise Systems

2
GE is one of the worlds largest diversified technology, manufacturing, and services companies with a commitment to achieving worldwide leadership in each of its 11 global businesses: Information Services Industrial Systems Lighting Medical Systems NBC Plastics Power Systems Transportation Systems
As one of the major GE businesses, GE Industrial Systems is a global leader in providing electrical products, systems, and services. As part of GE Industrial Systems, GE Power Management is a leading global supplier of relays and associated systems for the utility and industrial markets.
GE Power Management... Part of GE Industrial Systems
Aircraft Engines
NBC
Appliances
Information Services
Plastics Transportation Systems Power Systems Industrial Systems

Power Management
Medical Systems Capital Services Lighting
Systems/Drives Motors Components
Power Equipment GE Fanuc Power Controls
For more information on GE Global Businesses products and services please call: Worldwide Tel: (518) 869-5555 Fax: (518) 869-2828 USA and Canada Tel: (800) 626-2004 Mexico Tel: +800-626-2004
For information on GE Industrial Systems products and services please call: USA and Canada (800) 431-7867 From U.S. enter group #052 Worldwide (704) 561-5600 Enter group #052
www.ge.com
www.GEindustrial.com/pm
7
Who We Are
GE Power Management - Your ideal strategic partner for protection relays and associated automation systems.
NEW
GE Power Management
Who We Are
Global Manufacturing
I I I
Markham, Ontario, Canada Bilbao, Spain Aasco, Puerto Rico
Areas of Expertise
I I I I I
Substation automation Utility relays and systems Industrial relays and systems Power quality devices Protection, control, and monitoring
Customer Base
I I I I I
Utilities Industrial facilities OEMs Consultants Contractors
OVERVIEW
With extensive resources in design, manufacturing, and technical support, GE Power Management is your ideal strategic partner for protection relays, control, and monitoring equipment. Whether its a stand alone component or part of a complete system, GE Power Management can provide a solution that meets your performance and value needs. As part of GE Industrial Systems, GE Power Management is an industry leader in the business of monitoring, controlling, and protecting capital equipment. Our system installations ensure the daily safe and reliable operation of thousands of utility substations and industrial plants around the world. Protecting and ensuring the uptime of our customers motors, generators, feeders, transformers, bus systems, and transmission lines within the electrical supply chain is our prime goal. As a provider of innovative and high-tech solutions, GE Power Management realizes that reliability, flexibility, and value represent the concepts that guarantee the worldclass level of customer service we are proud to offer. To support its global customer base, GE Power Management has established over 150 representative companies around the world. These experienced representative companies have been carefully selected to provide strong technical, applications, and sales assistance for our customers. GEPM understands that not all customers needs are alike and have maintained their ability to remain flexible to customer needs.
Support
I I I I I
Call center Website Customer training center Application engineering Over 150 regional representatives
Design & Manufacturing

I I I I I
Design For Six Sigma (DFSS) Real Time Digital Simulator (RTDS) Highly Accelerated Life Testing (HALT) Highly Accelerated Stress Screening (HASS) Just-In-Time manufacturing
GE Power Management
GE PM - Who We Are
WHO WE ARE
GE Power Management - Part of GE Industrial Systems
QUALITY
Six Sigma Quality Initiative
Six Sigma starts and ends with the customer. It is a business strategy focused on one objective: Make all customers at each level of the interface realize that GE is a supplier who truly cares about making their customers more successful! GEs commitment to quality may be summarized as follows: I A new way of doing business I Focus on customer quality to elimGE Power Management joins a growing number of other RTDS installations worldwide. Given the advanced features and test capabilities of the RTDS, we can only improve the quality of our existing and future protection, control, and monitoring products and substation automation systems.
HALT/HASS Testing
HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing) is a testing methodology utilized by GE Power Management for building robustness into our designs during the prototype stage.
The HALT process consists of temperature step stress, rapid temperature transitions, omniaxial random vibration, and a combined environment of temperature and vibration.
As part of GE Industrial Systems, GE Power Management designs, manufactures, and supports protection, control, and monitoring systems, products, and components for industrial and utility customers worldwide. With consistent annual growth, GE Power Management has established itself as a world leader in the supply of protective relays and associated systems.
GE Power Managements operation centers
inate defects I Customer CTQs (Critical To Quality) items I Wing-to-Wing measurements I Rigorous analytical methods I DMAIC (Define, Measure, Analyze, Improve, Control) methodology for improvement of existing products and processes I DFSS (Design For Six Sigma) for designing new products and processes I Company quality training commitment: I Full-time quality BBs (Black Belts) in every business unit and function I All employees are required to be quality GB (Green Belt) trained
HALT enables us to: I Determine operating and destruct

limits of design
RTDS - Real Time Digital Simulator

In use since July of 1999, the RTDS has significantly expanded our test procedures in the following areas: To support its rapidly growing customer base, GE Power Management has established over 150 Regional Support offices. Experienced representative companies have been carefully selected to provide strong domestic and international assistance.
Strong global presence with over 150 support offices.
I Identify weak links of design I Improve design margin by rapid

stress application until failure
HALT yields the widest possible margins between product capabilities and the environment in which it will operate, thus increasing the products reliability, reducing the number of field returns, and realizing long-term savings.
I Production release acceptance testing I Modeling/testing complex algorithms in development I Customer model verification
Of paramount importance is the fact that the RTDS works in continuous real time. This means that the RTDS can solve power system equations fast enough to continuously produce output conditions that realistically represent conditions in the real world network.
The RTDS offers superior accuracy and allows for comprehensive product and/or configuration tests
GE Power Management employs empowered high performance product teams with computerized testing, electronic data interchange, and Just In Time manufacturing technologies to deliver superior products, services, and support. Housed in a modern facility with highly motivated staff, GE Power Management is equipped and committed to meeting the needs of all of its customers.
HASS (Highly Accelerated Stress Screening) is used as a firewall to stop latent defects from reaching our customers and at the same time, not reduce the products service life. This test involves a combination of temperature, vibration, and voltage during a functional test. An effective HASS test cannot be created without first performing a HALT.
10
Company Profile
GE PM - Who We Are
PLANT OPERATIONS
Research & Development
I Over 100,000 hours per year spent
on R&D I Commitment to the latest testing methods such as RTDS (Real Time Digital Simulation) and HALT (Highly Accelerated Life Testing)/HASS (Highly Accelerated Stress Screening) I Numerous yearly product improvements and new product introductions as a result of R&D
Product support personnel continually improve products and processes through R&D.
SUPPORT
Training Center
GE Power Management courses stress real world applications through lectures and practical lab exercises. The student is provided with a strong theoretical foundation, which is reinforced through hands on exercises. This teaching approach promotes self-confidence, and a thorough understanding of how to properly apply GE Power Management products to take full advantage of product features in real world applications.
GE Power Management is committed to bringing customers the highest quality training on a global scale
LEADING TECHNOLOGY
Industry Commitment
As part of its industry commitment to high providing the best possible customer solutions, GE Power Management is proud to be on the forefront of the UCA2 protocol development. UCA Version 2 was born of the joint efforts of a group of selected North American utilities and intelligent electronic device (IED) manufacturers coordinated by EPRI. Their goal was to achieve a "next generation" common protocol for high-speed peer-to-peer communications between devices in the substation as well as back to the utility enterprise.
Next Generation IEDs for Utility & Industrial Customers Customer Service
One of GE Power Managements key successes has been its ability to offer sophisticated products accompanied by professional product support and a seasoned team of application and design engineers. GE Power Management has realized that not all customer needs are alike. In living out its commitment to customer satisfaction at every level of the business, GE Power Management has maintained its ability to remain completely flexible to customer requests. In fully leveraging its commitment to the UCA2 open standard protocol, GE Power Management has created a powerful and robust family of IEDs the (UR) Universal Relay family. The UR family of IEDs is a new generation of modular relays built on a common platform. Designed to serve as the engines for substation automation, all products in the family feature high performance protection, control, monitoring, and fault diagnostics with high speed peer-to-peer communications.
GEs Universal Relay Family of products - The engine for substation automation.
New Product Introduction

As a natural result of its substantial commitment to R&D, GE Power Management introduces a number of new products. These products stem from a combination of R&D and customer requests. Whether its a customer demand or a discovery made from R&D, GE Power Management is committed to supplying its customers with the latest and greatest technological solutions.
Website
The GE Power Management website provides 24/7 access to: I I I I I I I
Detailed product information Product manuals Technical & support documents Online ordering Product presentations Interactive content ...and much more
Manufacturing
All of GE Power Managements manufacturing is done in work cells, incorporating world class manufacturing techniques such as: Just-in-Time (JIT), Lean Manufacturing, and Six Sigma processes. These cells allow rapid introduction of new products and customer-focused support. All GE Power Management employees are experts in their respective fields and embody the core values of: I I I I I I I I I I I
Integrity Vision Accountability Excellence Speed Empowerment/Involvement Teamwork/Diversity Receptivity to change Quality Boundarylessness Simplicity
A wealth of information is conveniently available from our website.
Scalable Substation Automation Offerings

As a leader in the protective relay business, GE Power Management can also offer scalable substation automation systems that provide comprehensive automated power management, protection, control, and monitoring solutions. Systems are scalable and upgradable, allowing for a minimal capital investment while maintaining the ability to upgrade or implement future technological advancements.
Be sure to visit our website at: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
Company Profile
11
CALL CENTER TECHNICAL SUPPORT

INTERNATIONAL
(905) 294-6222 FAX: (905) 201-2098 EMAIL: info.pm@indsys.ge.com WEBSITE: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
NORTH AMERICA
(800) 547-8629 FAX: (905) 201-2098 EMAIL: info.pm@indsys.ge.com WEBSITE: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
EUROPE
+ 34 94 485 88 54 FAX: + 34 94 485 88 38 EMAIL: gepm.help@indsys.ge.com WEBSITE: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
For other GE products and services contact:
GE Business Center
Worldwide Tel: (518) 869-5555 Fax: (518) 869-2828 U.S./Canada Tel: (800) 626-2004 Mexico Tel: +800-626-2004 www.ge.com
12
Maximize product and application knowledge quickly and thoroughly.

NEW
GE PM Course
Descriptions and Schedule
Features
I I I I I I I I I I
Factory trained instructors Fully equipped labs Product and course manuals Dedicated classroom facilities Hands on exercises Limited class size Length from 3 to 5 days Can be customized to application On site courses available Various languages
Visit www.GEindustrial.com/pm or contact us for the current course schedule.
OVERVIEW
GE Power Management courses stress real world applications through lectures and practical lab exercises. The student is provided with a strong theoretical foundation, which is reinforced through hands on exercises. This teaching approach promotes confidence, and a thorough understanding of how to properly apply GE Power Management products to take full advantage of product features in real world applications. GE Power Management trained instructors conduct all courses. In each course the student is presented with a logical path of progression from basic theory of operation, installation and configuration through to the most advanced leading edge protection features and technologies offered by GE Power Management.
Class Logistics
All classes run from 8:30 am to 4:30 pm. The tuition fee includes all course manuals. Students are responsible for all travel and living expenses and arrangements. A list of suggested lodgings and transportation are available apon request.
Registration
Course co-ordinator can be reached @ (905) 201-2152 or faxed to @ (905) 201-2417.
On-site Courses
All 4 day courses listed in the current training schedule are available as an on-site package. Please refer to the latest trainning brochure posted @ www.GEindustrial.com/pm for further details, requirements, and pricing.
GE Power Management
13
GE PM Courses
Substation Automation - UR Applications 1: TRNG-UR01
2
The UR Applications course introduces the Application Engineer/Technologist to the hardware and software aspects of the Universal Relay for systems integration. Students will then participate in practical lab exercises to reinforce concepts presented during class lectures including the configuration and implementation of a redundant fiber optic LAN for GOOSE remote I/O message implementation. Topics covered include: I Hardware overview and installation I FlexLogic I Oscillography and event log I Integration of FlexLogic and the
following protection elements: I 27, 50, 51, 52, 59, 67, 81, 25, 79 I UCA2 GOOSE messaging I Creation of single line diagrams (HMI screens) using URPC for monitoring and control
Protection Relays Course: TRNG-7602
The industrial protection course is intended to provide the student with a strong foundation in the most common industrial protective relay applications. The class will cover each protective relay area of application in a systematic approach: beginning with a lecture discussing features, followed by installation and configuration of primary protective elements. The students will then participate in hands-on labs which clearly illustrate the operation of the protective elements discussed before moving on to investigate additional features. Intended to cover the 469, 369, 269, 239, and PQM motor management and metering relays, this course starts with a review of basic motor protection theory and then progresses through the correct selection, installation and configuration of each of the relays. The student will participate in practical lab exercises dealing with real world application issues associated with the correct implementation of the protective relays. Students can configure and monitor the relay using either the keypad and/or computer based software. In this course the class will first review the protective elements required for feeder, transformer, and generator protection and then review the correct installation and configuration procedures for the 750/760, 745 and 489 relays. Students will be given lab assignments to configure the relays in a manner that demonstrates the protective elements discussed in lecture so that a thorough understanding is achieved. To tailor a course to your specific needs, choose the topics from the course matrix on the right. The price for custom courses covers the cost of the instructor, course material, and rental of lab equipment for six students. Travel, living, and shipping expenses will be billed at cost. Customers are responsible for providing a suitable classroom, screen, whiteboard, sufficient power outlets, and assistance with equipment logistics.
The following protective relays will be covered: I Motor protection relays: 469, 369,
and 239
I Feeder protection relays: 760/750 I Transformer protection relay: 745 Some of the topics featured include: I Terminology I Theory of operation I Features and benefits of GEPM
products
I Questions to ask I Demo labs on the installation and

configuration of the product
Motor Management Relays with Metering: TRNG-4691
Some of the topics featured include: I Motor theory I Motor thermal model I Current unbalance, overload, and I I I I I I I I
short circuit Ground fault Stator and bearing RTD Under and overvoltage Backspin detection Incomplete sequence Oscillography Differential Communications
Feeder, and Generator Transformer Management Course: TRNG-7601
Some of the topics featured include: I Time and instantaneous overcurrent I Under and overvoltage I Event recorder I FlexLogic I Oscillography I Adaptive harmonic restraint I Demand I Communications
Custom Course Matrix
COURSE URAPP1 MM2 469 489 369 269 239 *SPM Seminar 750/760 745 PQM
DAYS 4 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
14
Training Courses
how
do you get from here...

I
ORDER ONLINE
User Guide
Start at the GE Power Management home page at:
Enter your customer code and PIN
?
I
Choose the product you wish to order
Advantages
I I I I I I I
Increase accuracy of your orders Simplify ordering and data entry using a customized customer profile Take advantage of any personalized price discounts Order multiple products Submit orders quickly and easily Order 24 hours a day, 7 days a week PIN ensures security
to here...
GE Power Management
15 15
Visit Our Website
Simplify your
2
purchasing processes with
Online Ordering
HOME PAGE
The Online Store provides a fast and easy means to order GE Power Management products online. From the Online Store Page you can find any GE Power Management product by either using the drop down menus available or using the Online Store search engine. Also make sure to take advantage of your Personal Home Page which is accessible from the Online Store, if you logged in with your Customer Code & PIN. If you currently do not have a Customer Code & PIN you can register for one online.
Order Systems, Relays, Components, Accessories & Parts
16
GE Power Management Online Store
Visit Our Website
Your Personal Home Page

Take advantage of your Personal Home Page which is available once you register and receive a Customer Code & PIN. The Personal Home Page provides you with the ability to customize your page by adding a variety of links to the page itself and also provides you with a variety of essential tools. Tools currently available include: Order History, Retrieving Saved Orders, Profile Editing, & Subscriptions.
2
Subscriptions
Check Order History
Check Saved Order
TOOLS AVAILABLE Edit Profile
Customize This Page
Ordering Process
Customize Product Add to Shopping Cart Send in Order Request
17
Things to Come
Things to Come ...

Order Tracking Interactive Presentations
New features + tools are constantly being developed to improve our customers online experience. Features and tools coming soon include: real-time order tracking, lead time availability, interactive product presentations and help modules.
Approx. lead time = 2 day(s)
LeadTime Availability Interactive
Help Modules
Visit www.GEindustrial.com
Providing leading edge technology, process and application knowledge supported by customer service. GEindustrial.com brings you the power of the package
Residential
Commercial
Industrial
18
Utility
Visit Our Website
where
can you find our latest
press releases, instruction manuals, technical drawings, application papers, service bulletins, brochures, software, videos,
GE Power Management Home Page
and
a store full of
GE Power Management
products and parts that is
open 24 hours-a-day 7 days-a-week
?
19
Visit Our Website
www.GEindustrial.com/pm everythings online

CAUTION
OPTIONAL TRANSDUCER TO 4-20 mA INPUT FOR OVEREXCITATION
PHASE a
EXCITER AND AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR DC Amps mA FIELD
WYE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

PHASE A
UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

DO NOT INJECT OVER RATED CURRENT ON G10 & H10. (See pg. 2 - 10)
PHASE b
C(B) A
PHASE B
PHASE c
B(C)
PHASE C
GENERATOR
LOAD
LOAD
Product Page
a valuable resource of product information including brochures, technical drawings, guide form specifications and manuals.
INDUCTIVE/HALL EFFECT SENSOR FOR TACHOMETER CAUTION + 24 DO NOT INJECT VOLTAGES TO DIGITAL INPUTS (DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY) KEYSWITCH FOR SETPOINT ACCESS
E10 F10 G9 H9 G10 H10 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5

AUTOMATIC CT SHORTING TERMINALS
G6 H6 G7 H7 G8 H8 G2 H1 H2 G1
G2 H1 H2 G1
NEUTRAL
GROUND
INPUTS
PHASE a PHASE b PHASE c
NEUTRAL END CT's
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C OUTPUT CT's
PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTS
B1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 C1 C2 C3 C4
RTD SHIELD HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT
RTD #1
CONTROL POWER SAFETY GROUND
H12 H11 G12 G11
489 POWER SUPPLY CAUTION
Technical Drawings
many technical drawings are available for download in either AutoCAD or CorelDRAW format
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
COM
Vcom
Vcom
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
HGF
ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 2 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 3 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 5 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 6 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 7 COMMON SWITCH + 24Vdc ACCESS BREAKER STATUS COMPUTER RS485 COM
FRONT PANEL LOCAL PROGRAMMING PORT
RS232
DCS
UNIT BREAKER STATUS (52a)
RS232 INTERFACE
AUXILIARY RS485
ANALOG I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS

SHIELD
ANALOG INPUTS 24 Vdc 1 2 3 4 COM
COM COM 1
D25 D26 D27

120 1nF 120 1nF
B2
B3
B4 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27
RELAY 1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9 9 PIN CONNECTOR
COMPUTER 1 8 2 3 RXD 3 2 TXD 4 20 5 7 SGND 6 6 7 4 8 5 9 22
25 PIN CONNECTOR
120 1nF
GROUND COMMUNICATION PORTS ONLY AT MASTER DEVICE
PERSONAL COMPUTER RS232 489PC
SELF POWERED BEARING VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS 120 1nF
RS485 PORT
COMMON
COMMON WATTS VARS STATOR RTDs
#1+
4 20mA ANALOG INPUT
#2+ #3+ #4+
PLC or COMPUTER
808752EG.dwg
BEARING RTDs
Guide Form Specifications

the guide form specifications for many products can be saved as text files for insertion into specifications
Digitial Product Selector

easily find the products you are looking for with this visual map
Videos
browse through our growing list of videos
Order Codes
generate accurate order codes with easy-to-use drop down menus
20
GE Power Management Website
9 WIRE RS232
1A
Va
Vc
Va
Vc
Vb
Vb
RTD #2 RTD #3
GE Power Management
FILTER GROUND
489
RTD #4 RTD #5 DRAWOUT INDICATOR RTD #6 RTD #7 TRIP COIL SUPERVISION
Generator Management Relay

E12 F12 E11 F11
CHECK VOLTAGE RATING OF THE UNIT BEFORE APPLYING POWER. (SEE Pgs.2-8) CONTROL POWER
GROUND BUS
UNIT BREAKER TRIP CONTROL RTD #8 RTD #9 R2 AUXILIARY RTD #10 RTD #11 R3 AUXILIARY R1 TRIP
RTD #12
R4 AUXILIARY
R5 ALARM
R6 SERVICE DIGITAL INPUTS
E2 F1 E1 F2 E3 F3 E5 F4 E4 F5 E6 F6 E8 F7 E7 F8 E9 F9
52a UNIT SHUTDOWN CIRCUIT
UNIT TRIP COIL
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER
Visit Our Website
Press Releases
keep up to date on the official word from GE Power Management
Articles & Application Papers

an archive of inernal and 3rd party articles and application papers that discuss GE Power Management products
Personal Homepage
look for many new features in this section of our site, and enjoy the benefits of a customizable Home Page
2
Online Store E-mail Subscriptions

automatic updates sent right to your desktop with the latest product information! Take advantage of 24 hours a day, 7 days-a-week service. Ordering online is fast, accurate, and easy try it today!
Digital Products CD
All of the information on our web site is also available on our Digital Products Info CD. This fast, useful reference is a snap shot of the GE Power Management website. If you do not have access to the Internet, or if speed is an issue, our CD can provide you with the information that is on the site.
Sales Offices
find the closest sales office to you with our sales office listings, searchable by geographic location
Technical Support
get in touch with our technical support with a complete listing of phone numbers, fax numbers, mailing addresses, and email addresses
21
Visit Our Website
Come visit us at
We are always updating our site, so bookmark us and come back often!
Contact us if you have any questions: email: websales.pm@indsys.ge.com
22
Publications Available Online

GE Home GE Industrial Home GE Power Management Online Store About Us Feedback 2
www.GEindustrial.com/pm Technical Publications Available Online

REF # ANSINUMS APC_951 ARTSCI CIRCPROT CURRDIFF DATALINK DEREGCOM FSCCONFG G703SPEC GER2309A GER2540 GER2540A GER2622A GER2681B GER3055 GER3061 GER3178 GER3179 GER3180 GER3181 GER3182 GER3183 GER3184 GER3204 GER3205 GER3224 GER3660 GER3678 GER3735 GER3736 GER3742 GER3743 TITLE/DESCRIPTION ANSI Device Numbers Table of standard ANSI device numbers for protection relays. Inter and Intra Substation Communications: Requirements and Solutions The Art & Science of Protective Relaying Textbook on protective relaying, useful for a novice or an experienced power systems engineer. Circuit Protection: Detecting High Impedance Ground Faults A New Approach to Current Differential Protection for Transmission Lines High-Speed Utility Data Link Promises to Save Millions Excerpt from Sept. 1998 issue of Electrical Review. Author: Tony Sacks. Reprinted by permission. Role of Utility Communications in a Deregulated Environment UR Fiber Optic System Communication, Ether & RS422 Configuration L90 Communication Specification Test for the G.703 Interface Power Relays Application Guide Automatic Reclosing of Distribution and Transmission Line Circuit Breakers Automatic Reclosing of Distribution and Transmission Line Circuit Breakers Synchronism Check Equipment Phase Comparison Relaying Consideration of Speed, Dependability, and Security in Pilot Relaying Schemes Control Circuit Transients Local Back-up Protection for an Electric Power System Out-of-step Protection for Generators Application of Out-of-step Blocking and Tripping Relays Generator Protection with a New Static Negative-Sequence Relay Polarizing Sources for Directional Ground Relays Loss-of-excitation Protection for Synchronous Generators High-Impedance Differential Relaying Substation Transients and Solid State Controls Theory of Shielding & Groundings of Control Cables to Reduce Surges High-Speed Reclosing System and Machine Considerations Digital Relay Software Quality Comparative Testing Using Analog Model Power Systems, Digital Model Power Systems and Portable Test Sets Relaying Short Lines Series Compensated Line Protection: Evaluation Solutions Dynamic Characteristics of Mho Distance Relays Effects of Load Flow on Relay Performance
General Information
23
Publications Available Online

GER3793 GER3796 GER3798 GER3961 Ground Distance Relaying: Problems and Principles A Microprocessor-Based Digital Feeder Monitor with High-Impedance Fault Detection Variable Digital Filter Response Time in a Digital Distance Relay Bus Differential Protection Advancements in Adaptive Algorithms for Secure High Speed Distance Protection Evaluation of a Phasor-Based Fault Location Algorithm Application of Phase and Ground Distance Relays to Three Terminal Lines Evaluating Line Relaying Schemes in Terms of Speed, Security and Dependability Distance Relay Fundamentals Upgrading and Enhancing the Generator Protection System Document for the upgrade and enhancement of the generator protection system by making use of digital systems. Series Compensated Line Protection Issues Use of the R-X Diagram in Relay Work Relay Testing and Maintenance - Periodic Relay Testing Load Shedding, Load Restoration and Generator Protection Using Solid-state and Electromechanical Underfrequency Relays Distribution System Feeder Overcurrent Protection Application of PVD Relays Using Different Ratio Current Transformers Application Guide AC Pilot Wire Relaying System SPD and SPA Relays Generating Station Protection CT Accuracy Classification High Voltage Transmission Line Protection with Single Pole Tripping and Reclosing Power System Protection for Transmission Lines PLS1 Polyphase Line Relaying System Relay Communication Channels Application guide for using relay communication channels in the protection of high voltage transmission lines (print version only). DLP - Digital Line Protection TLS1B Modular Relay System Relay Selection Guide Medium voltage relay selection by protective zone. FSC Fiber Optic System Communication Index by Application Use device numbers and application as a reference for selecting specific relays. L90 Inter-relay Communications Specification L90 Fiber Interface Margin Calculator L90 Fiber Interface Specifications L90 Communication Specification Test, for RS422 interface L90 Line Drivers Design and Interoperability Testing of a Network IED: A Manufacturers Perspective This paper describes the evolution of communications in Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs). Developing a Common Language for Intelligent Electronic Device Communication in the Substation High Impedance Fault Detection on Distribution Systems SB Control and Transfer Switches Catalog Selection and Application Guide for SB Control and Transfer Switches. Single Function by Device Number Select a Single Function Relay by Device Number. The Universal Relay: The Engine for Substation Automation UCA 2.0: The GE Experience
GER3962 GER3963 GER3964 GER3965 GER3966 GER3967A GER3972 GET2230B GET3473 GET6449 GET6450 GET6455 GET6462A GET6497A GET6498 GET6555 GET6651A GET8031 GET8034
GET8037A GET8044 GET8048 GET8368 INDEXAPP L90COMSP L90FCALC L90FIBER L90RS422 LINEDRIV NETWKIED OOM REPC1 SBCAT SINGLE URENGINE UCAPROT
24
General Information
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION
GE SUBSTATION AUTOMATION
Flexible automation solutions for retrofits and new substations.
Comprehensive automated power management, protection, control and monitoring solutions for substation automation.
UR FAMILY
The engine for substation automation.
The Universal Relay family is a new generation of modular relays built on a common platform. Designed to serve as the engines for substation automation, all products in the family feature high performance protection with high speed open standard peer to peer communications - the necessary components of a successful 21st century power system.
DDS FAMILY
Integrated protection and control system for electrical substations.
The DDS system integrates distribution and transmission substation protection and control features. The DDS basic field units, or level 1 units, provide metering, protection and both remote and local control at the position level. All these units can be linked in a network thanks to their communication capabilities, so that all the information is transferred to a central substation computer.
SECTION 3: SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SUBSTATION AUTOMATION .........................27 UR FAMILY ...............................49 T60 ........................................83 L90 ......................................105 L60 ......................................109 D60 .....................................113 F60 ......................................143 F35 ......................................147 C30......................................269 C60......................................273 DDS FAMILY.............................59 DTP .......................................95 DTR .....................................101 DMS....................................175 SMOR-B .............................179 DBF .....................................279 DRS.....................................283 DFF .....................................334 MOV ...................................340 QPJ............................................39 COMMUNICATIONS ................35 F485 ......................................43 FAC .......................................41 FSC .......................................37 FSD .......................................46 MODBUS MONITOR..........40 MSP2 ....................................45 RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ...........36 SENSORS ...............................416 CUSTOM PANEL SOLUTIONS...............425
QPJ
Practical and cost effective user interface for control and display.
The QuickPanel family of slim profile (less than 3") touchscreen graphical operator interfaces is a practical, cost-effective alternative to a variety of discrete devices from push buttons and pilot lights to message centers.
SENSORS
LTC-MAP 1525 Load Tap Changer Maintenance Action Planner
GE provides products, systems, and services to monitor your system remotely and diagnose problems that may arise in real time.
25
26
Flexible automation solutions for retrofits and new substations.
Applications
I I I I I
Substation automation & integration Powerhouse solutions Retrofits & new stations Industrial & utility solutions Protection, control, & monitoring System responsibility Integration services Turnkey solutions & project management Consulting services Custom engineering & drawings Custom rackups & panels Equipment supply Manufacturing Screen programming Startup & commissioning Training Technical support Maintenance services Remote monitoring & diagnostics Long term full service agreements Project financing Partnerships Reduced total cost of ownership Deferred capital expenditures Improved service Improved performance Increased uptime Improved maintenance productivity High speed peer-to-peer LAN control Reduced wiring Hassle free integration Common modular platform Reduced training GE scope of supply MMS/UCA2 for interoperability DNP 3.0 over serial or ethernet Legacy IED & SCADA protocols SDH/SONET based systems Control/monitoring over the LAN System scalability Configurable schemes using FlexLogic URPC software for setting, monitoring, & graphical system representation Open architecture design IED interoperability World class security & reliability Programmable logic control Powerful diagnostics viewers for DFR & PQ analysis
System Solutions
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
When it comes to managing your substation, the challenges can be tough. Anything from unknown equipment status to unexpected outages can turn decision making into guesswork. Now, GE is bringing you an improved solution for your substation automation needs. With integrated solutions from GE Power Management and GE Harris Energy Control Systems, the total return on investment for your substation automation project can be even greater. GE Substation Automation systems provide comprehensive automated power management, protection, control, and monitoring solutions for substation automation. Systems are scalable and upgradable, allowing for a minimal initial capital investment while maintaining the ability to upgrade or implement future technological advancements. In combining the hardware and software components required to efficiently integrate various power system IEDs, the GE Substation Automation system can seamlessly integrate IEDs of many sources with different protocols to the substation LAN. Additional substations may be added to the LAN to further leverage remote access and control, and by using a modular approach and common data structure for integration, the system is easily expandable. The GE Substation Automation system provides standard network interfaces, open-layered multi-protocol support, and centralized network management to efficiently communicate between generating plants, substations, and operation centers. Legacy protocol devices can be combined with MMS/UCA2 and DNP 3.0 compliant IEDs or a host of other protocols including open ModBus /TCP and ModBus RTU over a high speed fiber optic communication network to accommodate the optimum combination of devices. Comprised of communication equipment, protocols, gateways, HMIs, engineering tools, GEs multilingual UR (Universal Relay) family of IEDs and the D25 IED, the GE Substation Automation System directly interfaces with EMS and SCADA systems incorporating GUIs (Graphical User Interfaces) for local and remote control, application development, database management, and enterprise connectivity.
System Benefits
I I I I I I I I I I I I
Communications
I I I I
Features
I I I I I I I I I
GE HARRIS Energy Control Systems
GE Power Management
27
DESCRIPTION
Software applications are designed to provide efficient enterprise wide power management, flexible substation automation, and effective IED integration. Not only is the software capable of automating substation fault detection and notification, it is designed to make diagnostic information easily accessible to minimize down time. Application software is available to meet the separate requirements of station operators and engineering maintenance staff. Automating your station with GE Substation Automation can significantly reduce the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership). From concept to commissioning to operation, GE can provide solutions for managing, integrating, and maintaining new and existing installations. GE can also provide remote diagnostics, maintenance agreements, energy management systems, and long-term service agreements.
Reduced Operating & Maintenance Costs
GE RELIABILITY
I Lower costs via remote access to one

or multiple remote substations
I Use one common database for

predictive maintenance, volt/VAR control, self-diagnostic programs, and substation automation programs I Leverage web-enabled remote access
GE has thousands of satisfied customers around the globe. Our proven technology and commitment to ongoing research and development have placed us at the forefront of our industry. Our durable equipment works and keeps working in conditions that range from the Egyptian desert to the Canadian North.
Deferred Capital Expenditures

I Achieve tighter system control by
implementing transformer and feeder load balancing systems I Enhance equipment monitoring to extend the economic life and capacity of primary equipment I Eliminate redundant equipment, panels, displays, and switches by implementing a local user interface I Flexible design enables you to add one substation this year, another next, year, and others in the future as required
TYPICAL BENEFITS (% REDUCTION)

Volt/VAR Losses Substation Equipment Manintenance Reduced Trips to Substation Reduced Customer Outage Minutes New Construction Cost Equipment Costs Deferment of Capital Expenditures
4% 6% 10% 10% 25% 30% 50%

typical benefits.eps
Improved Performance
GLOBAL REMOTE ACCESS
Bringing it All Together

SCALABLE AND UPGRADABLE OFFERINGS
SYSTEM BENEFITS
With maintenance budgets tightening and power demands changing, realtime remote access to your substation equipment can save you time and money without necessarily having to replace what youve got. Around the world, GE Substation Automation systems are providing the answer for cost-conscious utilities in several important ways.
I Bring substation operations online,

into a central office or remote control room, from across town or across the country I Immediate web access allows a local or remote user to connect transparently from a single physical location and connection, to a configuration port on any LAN node or supported IED I Virtual connection is user friendly and secure
DECREASED REACTION TIME
I Solutions for substation retrofits or

green field projects
I Scalable and upgradable, allowing

for a minimal capital investment while maintaining the ability to implement future technological advancements I Advanced family of IEDs that allow for a quicker learning curve and reduced wiring, the system can be used for one substation or one hundred depending on your needs. I Broad range of products and Services, providing complete solutions for substation automation
Improved Service Reliability
I Improve power system quality by

correcting system problems as needed I Enhance system reliability and safety I Monitor the status of all station primary equipment, protection and control devices I Reduce customer outages by implementing fault detection, autosectionalizing, auto-restoration, and other advanced automation solutions
I With web access you can fine-tune

operations from a remote location I Operators can adjust the voltage, transformer loads, and feeders loads from a PC at the office or even from a laptop computer, rather than just at the substation
INSTANT ACCESS TO USEFUL INFORMATION
I Gather information that needs to be

extracted and analyzed seamlessly I Information is accessed quickly key information on load management, load shedding, and reactor and capacitor switching reaches you almost instantaneously I Historical information can be stored or overwritten
Be it a retrofit or green field project... GE has a substation automation solution that will deliver value.
28
Substation Automation
ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
The GE Substation Automation is unique among substation automation solutions. Thanks to its ease of integration, standard and well defined system components, and the power of its modular and proven IED platform, GE Substation Automation is your ideal solution.
At The Bay Level...

GE IEDs also support power management functions at the local level through a touch screen and/or remote access via the URPC engineering software. The touch screen is a flexible interface that eliminates much of the hardwiring, switches, and annunciators. URPC provides an engineering level of access to the overall system from a PC or portable laptop.
At The Enterprise Level...

GE also offers solutions for enterprise level system-wide management, providing access to common information in a broad range of disciplines within the utility organization to ensure increased uptime and system optimization.
Communications
Information is communicated to the different levels of the system. To a computer at the station level, to a computer at the enterprise level or to an energy management system using the most standard open protocols. GE Substation Automation systems are MMS/UCA2 and DNP 3.0 compliant. Communications can be done through a high-speed fiber optic LAN using hubs and gateways as required. For legacy devices, RS485 is normally used. Inter-substation communications can be done through a SONET WAN. IED communication through a web browser is also available.
The Family of IEDs

The building blocks of the system start with the IEDs. The UR family of IEDs is used for intrinsic protection, control, monitoring, and measurement. There is no need for additional interfaces. In addition to protection, The UR family can provide the user with information on events, oscillography, phasors, current and voltage values, and status alarms. When there is need to include legacy devices or other station items the D25 IED can provide a solution.
At The Station Level...

PowerLink, the Human Machine Interface software gives the user the possibility to have full control over all the substation devices. The user can also access settings, remotely develop single line displays, manage alarms, manage redundancy, support virtual connections and make connections to SCADA.
GE Substation Automation architecture
ENTERPRISE
Remote Workstation
CORPORATE WAN System Control Center
EMS/ DMS/ SCADA
SCADA
56K V90 Data Faxmodem
Regional Control Center SONET WAN Engineering Planning

D25 Multifunction IED
GEHARRIS Energy Control Systems
D25 IED
SUBSTATION
SONET Multiplexer
Historian
Local HMI
G G G G
Ethernet Remote Access Server
56K V90 Data Faxmodem

10/100 Mbps Ethernet LAN (Redundant Hubs)
Local control Analysis SOE Alarm Annunciator Metering
LEGEND:
Copper Fiber Dual Fiber Hub Telco
SUBSTATION
ModBus/RS485
L60 LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
UR - D60 Distance
L90 Line Current Differential
D25 IED
Sensors
D25 IED
C60
T1 220kV \ 13.8kV
L60 LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
T60
UR - F60 Feeder
L60 Line Phase Comparison
13.8kV - Bus
L60 LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY L60 LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
F60
F60
UR - F35 Multiple Feeder

D60 Distance Relay
Sensors Other UCA or ModBus TCP/IP IEDs

RS485
DFP200
Feeder 1
Feeder 2
Touch Screen Bay Level HMI (Optional)
Ethernet
UR - T60 Transformer
T60 Transformer Management Relay
D25 Multifunction IED
RS232
HARLEY
DFP200 Feeder
UR - C60 Breaker
F60 Feeder Protection Relay
DFP200
Digital Feeder Protection
UR - C30 Controler
F35 Multipule Feeder Protection Relay
HARLEY
DFP10 0
UR - L60 Line Phase Comparison

C30 Controller
DFP100 Other Legacy IEDs

IED
SYPROTEC
UR - L90 Line Differntial

IED
C60 Breaker Failure
SYPROTEC
Engineering/Maintenance
Discrete I/O
Transducer I/O
Virtual I/O (via LAN)
Discrete I/O
Transducer I/O
UR - T60 UR - G60 TMMS PROTECTION SINGLE LINE
Bus
UR - L60/L90 UR - D60 UR - C30/C60
UR - L60/L90 UR - D60 UR - C30/C60

Transmission
Bus
UR - T60 TMMS
Bus
UR - F60 UR - C30/C60
Distribution
Feeder
UR - C30/C60
UR - C60
UR - C60
Generation
craig poster 4.cdr
OPEN PROTOCOL - MMS/UCA2 COMPLIANT IEDs
PROPRIETARY PROTOCOLS LEGACY DEVICES
29
SUBSTATION IEDs
Universal Relay Family IEDs
The Universal Relay family is a new generation of modular relays built on a common platform. Designed to serve as the engines for substation automation, all products in the family feature high performance protection, control, monitoring, and fault diagnostics with high speed open standard peer to peer communications.
GEs Universal Relay Family of products The Engine for substation automation
INTEROPERABILITY
D25 IED
The GE D25 IED solves one of the biggest challenges in integrating relays from the existing substation into a new substation system. While most IEDs cannot connect directly to the LAN, the D25 allows this connection, as well as connection to SCADA systems.
The GE D25 IED connects directly to the substation LAN and serves as a gateway for legacy devices
MMS/UCA2 (Manufacturing Message Specification/Utility Communications Architecture) protocol allows for the seamless connection of IEDs from multiple vendors. In addition to device interoperability, MMS/UCA2 is designed to control the substation via LAN instead of through discrete wiring to an RTU. Peer to peer communications over Ethernet enables distributed control with a few IEDs and eliminates the need for an RTU to remote SCADA. High speed message transfer eliminates the need for large and costly hard-wired interconnections.
DATA ACQUISITION
The UR Family consists of the following IEDs: L90 LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY I High speed differential protection of
transmission lines
L60 LINE PHASE COMPARISON RELAY I Phase comparison protection for HV

and EHV transmission line for three phase tripping applications
Deregulation is creating increasing demands for information to be used in billing, power quality analysis and documentation. Trending, exception reporting, and data capture are powerful preventative maintenance tools. Fault analysis using time stamped SOE (Sequence Of Event) records and oscillography files assists engineering staff in restoring power faster after an outage. Powerful IEDs with GUI software connected to the station LAN makes all these benefits attainable at an affordable cost.
FLEXIBLE DISTRIBUTED CONTROL
Another of the D25s functions is digital fault recording (DFR). Once the DFRs are captured by the D25, they automatically transfer via the LAN to the substation computer. The D25 can also be used as an analytical tool for measuring and recording power quality information, total harmonic distortion (THD), harmonic spectrum, RMS trending, RMS profiling, sags and swells, and interruptions. There is an optional metering module for the D25 that can provide demand metering and load profiling. In addition to the D25, the D200 is also available for substation control beyond the sphere of contemporary intelligent RTUs.
PROTOCOL SUPPORT
D60 LINE DISTANCE RELAY I High speed transmission line protection for three phase tripping
T60 TRANSFORMER MANAGEMENT RELAY I High speed, three phase, two winding transformer relay
F60 FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY I Three phase, neutral, and ground

protection with metering and event analysis for feeder applications
F35 MULTIPLE FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY I Feeder current, bus voltage, and
underfrequency for multiple feeder applications
C60 BREAKER MANAGEMENT RELAY I Breaker management relay with

synchrocheck, auto-reclosure, and event analysis for breaker applications
Protection and control logic including signalling interlocks, blocking and supervision is traditionally hard wired using inputs and contact outputs. This fixed approach to design using multiple devices and complex wiring is expensive and difficult to change. Protection and control logic are field programmed in UR series IEDs using FlexLogic which reduces design time, wiring, and enables modifications to meet changing requirements. Logic equations are used to determine the interaction of inputs, elements, and outputs for implementation of complex schemes. Virtual inputs and outputs from other relays can be used for distributed control over the substation LAN. I/O modules can be added to accommodate input/output expansion.
GE has developed a library of D25 supported IED protocols that includes ABB SPA-BUS, DNP 3.0, MMS/UCA2, Alstom Courier, ModBus RTU, and more than 70 other protocols. The D25 can communicate with IEDs at the substation, including protection relays, meters, RTUs, digital fault recorders, sequence of events recorders, and programmable logic controllers used in traditional substation control panels.
C30 CONTROLLER I I/O control, event recording , and

digital oscillography for bay control and substation automation.
COMMON MODULAR PLATFORM
MMS/UCA2 enables high speed trip and control via the substation LAN without complex fixed wiring to many auxiliary devices.
Station LAN Trip Message FlexLogic FlexLogic MMS/UCA2 / Ethernet Blocking Message FlexLogic
In using a common modular hardware and software platform, the UR offers the following benefits: I Reduced wiring I Reduced integration costs I Reduced detailed engineering I Reduced spares cost I Reduced learning curve I Reduced maintenance I Upgradable hardware I Reduced obsolescence I Flexible functionality
L90 Line Differential Relay
RELAY #1
RELAY #2 Trip Output
RELAY #3
Trip Time
UCA2 LAN Control Solid State Output Hardwire Control Relay Output Legacy Device Communications
52
4 mS 8 mS
Breaker
500 mS
Trip Time
841704A8.cdr
30
INTER SUBSTATION COMMUNICATIONS
Network Components
In order to transfer the wealth of information available from GEs IEDs to the station, a very secure and reliable communications media is required. A range of network components are provided to tie the new and legacy IEDs together into one unified system.
MSP MULTIPLE SERIAL PORT
the FSC system which eliminates the need for expensive two stage multiplexing schemes. The system can be configured in a self healing ring arrangement to provide complete redundancy which greatly increases system availability. Having all channel equipment integrated into the FSC network provides the capability for a centralized network management system that can monitor and control the communications network down to the individual channel level. Designed specifically for the power utility communications application, the FSC provides a full featured communications network that enables reliable and cost effective intersubstation communications in a single integrated system.
The FSC can be configured to provide intersubstation communications via SONET fiber optics.
Intelligent Sensors
SYPROTEC TRANSFORMER DIAGNOSTICS
GEs Syprotec line is used for the detection and monitoring of failure conditions in oil-filled electrical transformers. Features of the Syprotec offering include: I Systems for monitoring critical new
or sick transformers, fault gas detection, and early warning failure detection I Diagnostics and recommendations based on dissolved gas-in-oil measurements
HARLEY LTC AND TRANSFORMER MONITORS
I Ethernet network connection to

provide multiple RS232 serial ports to RS485 to fiber
F485 CONVERTER I Isolated RS232
optic converter
10BASEFL HUB
I 6-port 10BaseFL Ethernet hub ETHERNET TCP/IP MODBUS RTU GATEWAY

I
Connects RS232 or RS485 ModBus RTU devices directly to the Ethernet LAN
FSC FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM
The FSC (Fiber optic System Communications) is a fully integrated system based on the latest SDH/SONET (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy/Synchronous Optical Network) technology. FSC with its unique modular architecture can be configured to provide all intersubstation communications requirements; including LAN/WAN (serial or Ethernet), protective relaying, SCADA, telemetry, voice, and data. All channel interface modules are integrated into
As a premier manufacturer of real-time monitoring and diagnostics systems for power transformers and high voltage circuit breakers, GEs Harley product line can reduce forced outages and maintenance costs while increasing system reliability. Features of the Harley offering include: I Comprehensive LTC monitor including thermal and mechanical diagnostics I Contact wear and neutral switch inactivity measurement I Maintenance alerts and operational alarms through SCADA
ENTERPRISE NETWORK COMMUNICATION
TYPICAL SUBSTATION COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE

Station HMI
NT Pentium
Other Regional Control Centers
SCC
10/100 Mb Ethernet Substation Hub
SS SS SS
RCC RCC
Differential Signal
ETHERNET GATEWAY F60 Feeder L90 Line T60 Transformer D60 Distance Ethernet
RS485 ModBus RTU
Other IEDs
ALPS Distance
UCA/MMS/Ethernet Serial Link
SS
SS
SS SS
R
Voice
SS
155 Mbps Self Healing Ring SONET - Dual Fiber
Radio Data
D20 RTU Other Relays 745 Transformer 760 Feeder Other IEDs
SS
Serial Link
ire 2W
Se y rit cu eo d Vi
SS SS
SS
SS
RS 232 Transfer Trip
2 Wire FXS
RS 232 64 Kb Data
Power Supply #2
Ethernet
4 Wire
Video
Multiplexer Common Equipment Multiplexers Optics Network Management Power Supply #1

To Next Site
827785AH.AI
LEGEND:
SCC RCC
SS
System Control Center Region Control Center Substation Fiber Optic Repeater Digital Microwave Copper Dual Fiber 1300/1550 nm
Communication Channel Cards
To Next Site
SONET 155 Mbps WAN
31
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SOFTWARE & HMIs
L60INEDIFFERENTIALREL L AY
ModBus/ RS485
L60INEDIFFERENTIALREL L AY
C60
URPC
ENGINEERING SOFTWARE
I
T1 220kV\13.8kV
T60
Software
Appli
catio
ns
URPC
ModBus RTU TCP/IP RS232 RS485 Ethernet
RS485
Engineering/ Maintenance URPC
URPC Engineering Software

The Windows based URPC program runs on a PC with the Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program may be used locally, remotely, or as part of the substation LAN over Ethernet. URPC provides full engineering level access to the relay data with the following features: I I I I
View actual values View relay status View/edit settings on-line/off-line View event recorder for troubleshooting I View oscillography and phasors for fault diagnosis I URPC tutorial for step-by-step help I Relay firmware programming for upgrades
All status information such as target messages and digital input/output states may be viewed with the URPC program.
URPC software allows easy viewing and editing of relay settings.
EL 1
QuickPanel Touch Screen HMI

The QuickPanel touch screen provides a stand alone "point and execute" interface useful for bay/local control and monitoring, or in substations where the functions of a Host computer are not required. The touch screen can be connected to the devices of interest either through the LAN connecting these devices or alternatively through a parallel RS485 connection to the devices. The user can create customized pages of graphic display that can be used to: I I I I I
Display alarms / Events Summarize analog values Display substation 1-line Control breakers/switches Lock-out / tag-out a breaker or a recloser
Metered parameters that may be viewed with the URPC program include current, voltage, apparent power (VA), real power (W), reactive power (var), and power factor.
The tools available with the URPC software combined with other higher level control and monitoring software/hardware offers differing levels of settings and analysis functionality. These can be combined to meet specific system requirements.
QuickPanel touch screen interface
Current and voltage can be displayed in a graphical phasor format to analyze pre/post fault conditions
The QuickPanel family of slim profile (less than 3") touch screen graphical operator interfaces is a practical, cost effective alternative to a variety of discrete devices from push buttons and pilot lights to message centers. Free form static and dynamic graphics can be added to represent an information-rich picture to the operator in a single glance. Available in various screen sizes, the QuickPanels screen provides a sharp display in either color or monochrome.
32
RS232
Protocols Tran sport
Engineering I Commissioning I Fault Analysis I Maintenance I Historical Data
BAY
13.8kV-Bus
L60INEDIFFERENTIALREL L AY L60INEDIFFERENTIALREL L AY
F60
F60
Feeder1
Feeder2
Touch Screen Bay Level HMI (Optional)
Local HMI
STATION
SCADA/Enterprise - Energy Management System(EMS)

33
PowerLink Full Control Software

The GE PowerLink software gives your operators "full control" over all substation devices either locally through an on-site computer or from a remotely located host. It replaces or complements traditional mimic control panels and gathers all the substations raw data into a single database. It can feed detailed information directly into the companys business system such as critical information on transformer loads, key customer power demands, and pending maintenance information. Standard and customized reports can also be generated.
RELIABILITY
I supports redundant and nonredundant systems with automatic failover
CONFIGPRO
I configures the hardware and

software of the GE Substation Automation system if required
SCADA SUPPORT
I configures and displays standard SCADA data types
Hardware and software is configurable.
I displays scanned or calculated

data, as required
I displays diagnostic statistics for

each scanned device
I performs supervisory control

operations, as directed
WEBACCESS
I allows for all displays to be

viewed over the internet
I authorized personnel can gain

read-only access to PowerLink through their web browser
APPLICATIONS EDITOR
I allows an individual company to

customize the system to a substations components I Windows application with online help and pull-down menus
LOGICLINX
I collects and organizes the data

needed to create graphical user interfaces that have been configured for operations personnel
I allows the user to create

customized control schemes and applications that reside in the various IEDs distributed throughout the substation or plant I can eliminate the cost of hardwired automation schemes
Additional PowerLink Application Programs

VIRTUAL CONNECTION
I allows the protection engineer

or other authorized personnel to work from the office or from a remote location
PowerLink provides the repository for archived data such as oscillography and sequence of events (SOE). Both oscillography and SOE data is automatically captured by PowerLink and saved in their respective databases in COMTRADE format. PowerLink provides the following:
ALARM MANAGEMENT
Accessible from any location.
LogicLinx can eliminate the cost of hardwired automation schemes.
I allows personnel to use existing

third-party configuration tools I off site system planning and support are more convenient and personnel can access the station IEDs safely and conveniently from a control room or office across the network rather than onsite I secure use authentication assures operator permission levels
I logs all historical events and

alarms
I displays alarm summary I configures events to generate

operator alarms
TAGGING
I locks out a point or takes if

offline, as needed
TRENDING
I graphically displays real time

and historical data
GE CAPABILITIES
System Responsibility
GE can take full responsibility for system design, installation, and commissioning. GE works closely with the client to define the scope of supply and deliverables. The power of the package allows GE to pull together all our resources to make your project a success.
Custom Rackups & Panels

Panel solutions with high quality design engineering, materials and workmanship for custom rack ups or modifications, GE can suit your needs.
Maintenance Services
When preventive or regular maintenance are required, we have the expertise to carry out a complete maintenance program for you, with specific check points and reports. This will ensure the correct operation and prolong the life of your system.
Equipment Supply
IEDs, gateways, hubs, communication equipment, computers, software and all necessary components for substation automation as well as the electrical equipment for your whole substation at the transmission and distribution level. Let GE show you the value of the power of the package.
Integration Services
GE can help you with your integration challenges from concept to operation. Our team of experts has the experience and resources to integrate legacy devices, IEDs from various manufacturers, different protocols, and different communication equipment. Our integration solutions ensure that legacy investments will not be stranded or lost.
Remote Monitoring & Diagnostics

We provide products, systems, and services to monitor your system remotely and diagnose problems that may arise in real time. This increases the availability, reliability, and longevity of your investment.
Manufacturing
GEs equipment meets demanding international manufacturing and engineering standards such as ISO, UL, CSA, and CE Mark.
Long Term Full Service Agreements

This service goes above and beyond traditional offerings. What we can do for you is service all aspects of your system without you having to think about specialized equipment or expertise. We have it all.
Turnkey Solutions & Project Management

We can coordinate your project from order to commissioning. We can manage all phases of the project and meet your project milestones on time and on budget.
Startup & Commissioning

Our commissioning engineers have experience in solving problems under difficult situations, in different geographical areas and for a diverse range of projects. They can take responsibility or complement your team when you wish to ensure that the start up will be as smooth as possible.
Project Financing
When financing is required GE Capital can help you with very competitive rates and payment terms.
Consulting Services
Need help to solve a specific problem? Our years of experience and in-house applications expertise in substation automation provide us with the resources to help you solve your problems.
Training
We are committed to bringing customers the highest quality training on a global scale. A combination of classroom lectures and hands-on lab exercises ensure knowledge that students can apply immediately.
Partnerships
We want our customers to benefit from our capabilities which in turn makes us stronger. This allows us to continue to help our customers, creating a win-win circle of growth and competitiveness for both.
Custom Engineering & Drawings

When you need expert engineering help to complement your team, we have the experince to help you bring your ideas to executable designs.
Technical Support
We know our products intimately and we are available 24hrs a day 365 days a year to help you any time you need it.
For the latest updates on Substation Automation, please visit our websites:
GE HARRIS Energy Control Systems
GE Power Management www.GEindustrial.com/pm
www.strongthinking.com
34
RELAY COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

FSC
A synchronous SDH/SONET digital multiplex communications system for the electric utility industry.
The FSC equipment is a synchronous digital multiplex equipment with integrated drop and insert multiplexer module and application/ interface modules designed for the electrical utility industry.
QPJ
The QuickPanel family of slim profile (less than 3) touchscreen graphical operator interfaces is a practical, cost-effective alternative to a variety of discrete devices from push buttons and pilot lights to message centers.
MODBUS MONITOR
GE Power Leader ModBus Monitor
The ModBus Monitor reads monitoring and status information collected by GE Power Leader power management devices as well as standard ModBus RTU devices.for industrial motors and their associated mechanical systems.
FAC
Multiplexer with RS232 or fiber optic input, for fiber optic communication with up to 24 devices.
The FAC 1000 is a multiplexer oriented to multi-point communication with several devices using fiber optic.
F485
Isolated RS232 to RS485 to fiber optic converter.
The F485 is a self-contained device for converting between RS232, RS485 and fiber optic signals. The F485 is electrically isolated to improve communications in noisy environments.
MSP2
Ethernet network connection to provide multiple RS232 serial ports.
The MSP2 product provides an enhanced port server capability through the mapping of the individual serial ports on the MSP to "COM" ports in the host computer running Windows NT. 3.51 and 4.0.
FSD
Fibre subsystem datalink
Fibre datalink between a computer host and an IED not equipped for optical communication.
SECTION 4: RELAY COM EQUIPMENT RELAY COMM. CROSS REFERENCE ................36 FSC ............................................37 QPJ............................................39 MODBUS MONITOR ..............40 FAC............................................41 F485...........................................43 MSP2.........................................45 FSD............................................46
35
Communication Protocols Reference

DIGITAL RELAY COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS REFERENCE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
MMS/UCA2 Ethernet TCP/IP & ISO DNP 3.0/Ethernet/ TCP/UDP/IP D20 Comm Driver
ModBus RTU
IEC-870-5-103
PRODUCT
4
ModBus TCP/IP over Ethernet
DNP 3.0/RS485
M-Link Plus
Motorcom Proprietary
GE Modem
Commnet
Procome
Proprietary with 269Plus
Profibus x x
M-Link
239 269Plus 369 469 489 735/737 745 750/760 ALPS/LPS BUS 2000 C30 C60 D25 D60 DBF DBT DFF DFP100 DFP200 DGP DLPC/D DMS DTP DTP-B DTR DRS F60 L60 L90 MCP MDP MGC MIC MIF MIV MLJ1000 MLP MM2 -PD MM3 MOV MPM PQM/PPQM RRTD SBC SMOR-B SPM T60
p Protocol pending x Existing Protocol * via CIO Gateway
x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x p p p p p x p p x x x x x x x x x x x p p p p x x x
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x p p
p x x x x
x* x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x
+ Rev A only, Rev B pending Not available for LPS-O
x x x x p x p x x p p x
36
Relay Communications
ASCII x
A synchronous SDH/SONET digital multiplex communications system for the electric utility industry.
FSC
Applications
I I
Fiber Optic System Communications
Full SONET/SDH based multiplexer Harsh electrical environments
Features
I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The FSC is a synchronous digital multiplexer with integrated drop and insert multiplexing modules and application interface modules designed for the electrical utility industry. The system provides an optical interface operating at a 51.84 Mb/s rate with up to 672 DS-0 channels, or a 155.52 Mb/s rate with up to 2016 DS-0 channels. The system can provide communication of voice, data, telemetry, and teleprotection (transfer-trip and differential) communication. The FSC system can be arranged to operate in many different configurations, all using the same modular assemblies. These configurations include point to point terminals, linear add/drop multiplexing, rings plus spurs, and multiple interconnected rings. A sub-set of the FSC equipment, FSC-1R, provides a system without the multiplexer to perform functions such as digital transfer tripping. Fiber optic communications provide natural immunity to electrical and magnetic fields. This eliminates many of the noise problems encountered with metallic wires. Four independent transfer trip circuits can be carried over one of the channels of a FSC system. Typical trip response time is 2 ms. A current differential relaying unit has been designed to replace the metallic pilot wire connecting existing relays. An independent high speed transfer trip channel is also included to provide trip blocking. An Ethernet bridging unit is available to interface LANs into Ethernet WANs. Other modules are available to interface E1 or T1 circuits, provide analog telemetry, and various voice and data circuits. The FSC uses a modular design for ease of maintenance, configuration flexibility, and future expansion capability. Refer to GEZ-8368 for further information.
I I I I I I I I
SDH/SONET synchronous communications 51.84 Mbps or 155.52 Mbps rate SCADA, protective relaying, telemetry, voice, LAN and data user interfaces Modular architecture Self-healing bi-directional rings, multiple rings and ring plus spur configurations Optional full redundancy for common modules Local PC and alarm monitoring capability Remote PC monitoring capability Optional network configuration from any node Continuous transfer-trip self-testing Current differential relay self-testing Secure four circuit transfer trip unit 100 percent temperature cycles Meets ANSI/IEEE SWC, RFI standards
More information is available at: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
I Functions as a synchronous based system

with drop and insert capabilities.
I Supports self-healing bi-directional rings, I I I I I I

multiple rings and ring plus spurs configurations. Can drop DSO and E-l / DS-1 payloads with full time slot interchange (TSI) crossconnect. Optional full redundancy for common units. Extensive local PC or remote alarm monitoring capability for enhanced reliability and easy trouble shooting. Total network monitoring and configuration via software from any / all nodes. Continuous self-testing of transfer trip and current differential relaying units to ensure secure operation. Super secure four circuit transfer-trip unit with programmable source address for protection against data crossings.
FEATURES
I Provides synchronous communications for SDH or SONET.
I Provides communication of voice,

data, telemetry and teleprotection (transfer trip and current differential) traffic for the electric utilities use.
GE Power Management
37
FSC Fiber Optic System

FEATURES
I Modular design for ease of maintenance, configuration flexibility and future expansion capability. I Meets ANSI/IEEE SWC, RFI standards. I 100% temperature cycled which minimizes infant mortality of components.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MONITORING Network Management Capabilities: Network visibility at every node Remote provisioning (monitor and configure) of the network Alarm logging and time stamping Manual path switching POWER SUPPLY POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24, 48, 125, 250 VDC, or 115 VAC OUTPUTS ALARMS System: Major and minor alarms: LED indicators (Yellow alarm and AIS) and alarm relay Power supply: SSR with one form B contact Application Modules: Alarm LED Teleprotection modules also provide alarm relay Alarm Relays: SSR with one form C contact OPTICAL INTERFACE System Rate: 51.84 Mbps (672 DS-0 channels) or 155.52 Mps (2016 DS-0 channels) Connector: FCPC Wavelength: 1300 or 1500 nm (optional) Type of Fiber: SingleMode or MultiMode Optical Specs: Tx Rx Optical Typical Power Power Gain Range 51.84 Mbps 1300 nm -5dBm -37dBm 32 dB 70 km 51.84 Mbps 1550 nm 0dBm -40dBm 40 dB 110 km 155 Mbps 1300 nm 5dBm -36dBm 31 dB 65km 155 Mbps 1550 nm TBD TBD TBD TBD ELECTRICAL Connector: Type of Cable: Transmit Power: INTERFACE (STS-1 ) BNC Coaxial Per TR-NWT-253 Bellcore standard
APPLICATIONS
4
The FSCIS common equipment can be applied as a full SONENT/SDH based multiplexer operating at 51.84 Mbps or 155.52 Mbps over fiber optic cables. By adding expansion equipment FSC2E the system can handle up to 672 or 2016 DS0 channels.
SYNCHRONIZATION Internal: Internal clock @ headend node, Stratum 3 Line timing @ any other node per Bellcore standard External: System can be synchronized to an external BITS clock (e.g. Stratum 1) NODE THROUGH DELAY 14 s PROTECTION SWITCHING TIME <3 ms CONNECTORS Screw type terminal blocks for application (channel) modules, power and alarm relay connections CONSUMPTION 10 W for add/drop node common equipment TYPE TESTS Diagnostics:
Online ordering is available for this product.

See pages 15 - 18.
EMI/RFI: Surge Withstand:
RS232 Craft Interface, front panel RJ11 jack running @ 9600 baud at every node for system diagnostics, monitoring, trouble-shooting and maintenance Meets ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 RFI Meets ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 SWC
Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide below.
Fiber Optic Multiplexer Common Equipment
Expansion Equipment
FSC1S
FSC1S
*
02 04 12 25 AC
*
FSC1S Shelf with multiplexer, 4 RU high 12 VDC main power supply 48 VDC main power supply 110/125 VDC main power supply 220/250 VDC main power supply 115 VAC main power supply 12 VDC redundant power supply 48 VDC redundant power supply 110/125 VDC redundant power supply 220/250 VDC redundant power supply 115 VAC redundant power supply None Multiplexer / FO unit #1 51.84 Mpbs, 1300 nm laser 51.84 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (DSF fiber) 155 Mpbs, 1300 nm laser 155 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (DSF fiber) 155 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (std. fiber) Local node service unit Multiplexer / FO unit #2 51.84 Mpbs, 1300 nm laser 51.84 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (DSF fiber) 155 Mpbs, 1300 nm laser 155 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (DSF fiber) 155 Mpbs, 1550 nm laser (std. fiber) None Intermediate format unit #1 JIF, 3 VT1.5 access JIF-TIE, 3 VT1.5 access JIF-DS1, 3 DS1 access JIF-E1, 3 E1 access JIF-FDM, FDM access JIF-Ether, 10 Mbps, ethernet access JIF-Share, 4 VT1.5 access Intermediate format unit #2 JIF, 3 VT1.5 access JIF-TIE, 3 VT1.5 access JIF-DS1, 3 DS1 access JIF-E1, 3 E1 access JIF-FDM, 3 FDM access JIF-Ether, 10 Mbps, ethernet access JIF-Share, 4 VT1.5 access None Revision letter
FSC2E
FSC2E
* * *
02 04 12 25 02 04 12 25 99 A
FSC2S Shelf with multiplexer, 4 RU high Main power supply 12 VDC 48 VDC 110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC Redundant power supply 12 VDC 48 VDC 110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC None Revision letter
02 04 12 25 AC 99 M2 M4 M5 M6 M7 S1 M2 M4 M5 M6 M7 N9 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 N9 A
FSC2E Nomenclature Guidelines I the FSC2E shelf has 13 slots available for optional modules I one CDR or one DRC module can be selected (not both) per shelf I a redundant power supply is recommended when CDR is selected FSC1S Nomenclature Guidelines I one CDR or one DRC module can be selected (not both) I a redundant power supply is recommended when CDR is selected Shelf Arrangement I the nomenclature defines the common modules; the optional modules can be installed into any remaining slot I the FSC1S shelf has 8 slots available for optional modules
38
QPJ
QuickPanel Junior
4
Applications
I I
QPJ Monochrome
I I I
Local bay display/control Single line system monitoring Discrete device replacement Real time and historical alarm display Metering display
QPJ Color
Features
I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The QuickPanel family of slim profile (less than 3") touchscreen graphical operator interfaces is a practical, cost-effective alternative to a variety of discrete devices from push buttons and pilot lights to message centers. Free form static and dynamic graphics can be added to represent an information-rich picture to the operator in a single glance. Despite its small size, the QuickPanels 5" or 6" diagonal screen with 320W x 240H pixel format provides a sharp display in color or monochrome. Each unit communicates with all major IEDs via ModBus RTU protocol through either an RS485 or RS232 port at 19.2 kpbs. The industrially designed QuickPanel is rated NEMA 12/4X. QuickDesigner is a friendly Windows based graphic editor that is common to all of the QuickPanel models. QuickDesigner offers a comprehensive set of panel operators including pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, text and numeric data displays, bar graph displays, static and dynamic bitmapped or object oriented images, and more. Each of these operators function as naturally as its discrete counterpart push buttons toggle on and off at a touch, pilot lights glow to indicate active status and so forth. The QuickPanel, combined with the QuickDesigner software provides a simple yet versatile user interface that will increase your access to information and control functions at a low installed cost.
Color or monochrome LCD Slim 3" panel profile ModBus RTU communications RS485 and RS232 ports Touchscreen graphical interface Free form static and dynamic graphics
Graphical Software Options

I I I I
Windows based editor Library of graphical symbols Bar graphs, trends, alarm windows, analog metering Ability to create custom symbols and libraries
ORDERING
QPJ
QPJ
*
M5 M6 C5 C6
*
Basic unit Basic unit with 5" monochrome LCD, 24 VDC 6" monochrome LCD, 24 VDC 5" STN Color LCD, 24 VDC 6" STN Color LCD, 24 VDC Including QuickDesigner Software, full documentation, download cable, 120VAC/24VDC Power Supply, 1.3 A

See pages 15 - 18.
GE Power Management
39
Displays monitoring and status information collected by GE POWER LEADER power management and ModBus RTU devices.
ModBus Monitor
Application
I
Centralized viewing of data and status from remote devices
User Interfaces
I I I I
10.4" VGA electroluminescent display 10 key membrane keypad Tabular screen menu User friendly Windows software setup
Features
I I I I I I
Connects to 1 or 2 ModBus networks Monitors up to 246 devices per network Baud rates up to 19,200 bps Works with PMCS software Rear RS485 port Front RS232 port
DESCRIPTION
The ModBus Monitor reads monitoring and status information collected by GE Power Leader power management devices as well as standard ModBus RTU devices. It connects to one or two ModBus RTU networks implemented on RS485 wiring, and operates at baud rates up to 19,200 bps. It can monitor up to 246 devices on a single network, or up to 492 devices on two networks. It provides convenient, centralized viewing of data from remote devices. A local event log is maintained and a global event log may be viewed when a GE Power Management Control System is present. The ModBus Monitor is capable of acting as a master on one or two ModBus RTU networks of Power Leader power management devices, collecting data from the devices for local display. It is also capable of acting as a secondary master to GEs Power Management Control System (PMCS). In this role the ModBus Monitor resides on the RS485 network with other Power Leader devices, acting as a slave to the PMCS master. If the master is disabled for any reason the ModBus Monitor will immediately and transparently assume the role of master. The monitor works as a ModBus RTU master. It will also work seamlessly with the GE PMCS software present. However, it will not work with any other type of dual master, such as PLC present on the same network segment. The monitor is supplied with a Windows based software program which has been designed to be easy to use and includes on-line help. This program is used as a configuration tool to create a profile of the monitor which consists of all configurable attributes, such as communications settings, information on devices connected to the RS485 network, the register map for these devices, etc. The profile can be downloaded to the monitor via the RS232 port supplied on the front panel. The data collected may be viewed locally on the large 10.4" diagonal VGA electroluminescent (EL) display. A 10 key membrane keypad has been provided to navigate through a complete easy to use menu of tabular screens. Function keys are located at the bottom of the screen. The function of each key at the current time is displayed on the screen above the key.
ORDERING
To order select the model number from the Selection Guide below.
PLMNTR *
PLMNTR 1 2
ModBus Monitor Single port Two port

See pages 15 - 18.
40
GE Power Management
Multiplexer with RS232 or fiber optic input, for fiber optic communication with up to 24 devices.
FAC 1000/2000
Fiber Optic Multiplexer
Application
I
Multiplexer RS232 or fiber optic with up to 24 outputs
Features
I I I I
Plastic fiber optic outputs: 6, 12, 18 or 24 Glass fiber optic outputs: 4, 6, 12 or 16 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140 m fibers 48/125 or 110/250 VAC/VDC auxiliary voltage
DESCRIPTION
The FAC 1000/2000 is a multiplexer oriented to multi-point communication with several devices using fiber optic. It provides one or two inputs and multiple outputs. The input can be of one of the following types: RS232, plastic or glass fiber optic. The outputs can be of two types: plastic or glass fiber optic. FAC models are available with 6, 12, 18, or 24 plastic fiber optic outputs, and 4, 8, 12 or 16 glass fiber optic outputs. The equipment connected to the FAC1000/2000 use a full-duplex communication.
The FAC provides Data Broadcasting communication. Using a FAC1000/ 2000, one equipment can transmit data simultaneously to N different devices connected to the outputs. In the same way, any of the equipment connected to an output can communicate with the main equipment. FAC1000/2000 provides redundancy to the system. Should one of the input fail, the unit will continue to maintain communication via the second port. An example of application is the connection between a computer and several digital protection and control equipment. This way of connection provides galvanic isolation between all the equipment, avoiding the noise in the line. The FAC1000/2000 can also be used as physical media converter, allowing the interconnection between heterogeneous devices: RS232 to glass or plastic fiber optic, glass fiber optic to plastic fiber optic.
APPLICATION
The versatility of this equipment allows its connection with a wide range of devices: computers, protection and control equipment, communications equipment...
GE Power Management
41
FAC Fiber Optic Multiplexer

FAC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
POWER SUPPLY Model G: 48-125 VDC/VAC Model H: 110-240 VDC/110-220 VAC Consumption: Less than 1 W (model with 6 plastic fiber optic links) OUTPUTS ISOLATION Between each terminal and chassis 2000 VAC during 1 min. COMMUNICATIONS FIBER OPTIC TYPES Plastic: 1mm Glass: 50/125 - 62.5/125-100/140-200 PCS DISTANCE RECOMMENDED LINK TYPE Up to 15 m: RS232 Plastic F.O. Glass F.O. 15 m to 80 m: Plastic F.O. Glass F.O. 80 m to 1 km: Glass F.O. Note: The most used types of glass fiber optics are 50/125 and 62.5/125. There are no significant differences between them. ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Range: Operation: -5C to +55C Storage: -10C to +65C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing
TYPE TESTS Dielectric: Radiointerferences: Fast Transients:
IEC-255-5 (except for RS232) IEC 801-3 IEC 801-4
*Specifications subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
6.30" (160mm) A B
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RIGHT SIDE VIEW

3.74" (95mm) C
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
NUTS FOR FIXING MOUNTING PIECES
A
1 2 3
NUTS FOR FIXING MOUNTING PIECES
READY TX RX
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
U.S.A.
TX
2
FIBER OPTIC DATA BROADCAST
RX TX
5.71" (145mm)
3 4
RX TX RX TX
4 5 6 7
MODEL
RATINGS:
Vaux
Vac/dc
5 6
RX TX RX
TRADEMARK OF GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, USA
MADE IN SPAIN
dimenfac.ai
ORDERING
FAC*000
1 2
A * 0 * * 00
Basic unit One input Two inputs 6 1 mm plastic fiber optic outputs 12 1 mm plastic fiber optic outputs 18 1 mm plastic fiber optic outputs 24 1 mm plastic fiber optic outputs 4 50/125 glass fiber optic outputs 8 50/125 glass fiber optic outputs 12 50/125 glass fiber optic outputs 16 50/125 glass fiber optic outputs RS232 input 1 mm plastic fiber optic input 100/140 or 200 PCS glass fiber optic 50/125 or 62.5/125 glass fiber optic 48 - 125 VAC/VDC auxiliary voltage 110 - 250 VAC/VDC auxiliary voltage
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 G H

See pages 15 - 18.
42
Isolated RS232 to RS485 to fiber optic converter.
F485
Communication Converter
4
Applications
I I
DESCRIPTION
The F485 is a self-contained device for converting between RS232, RS485 and fiber optic signals. The F485 is electrically isolated to improve communications in noisy environments. The converter uses internal switches to select the signal conversion type and communication rates up to 57600 bps. The F485 converter uses the data on the serial ports to determine direction and therefore requires no hardware handshaking signals from the computer. The F485 converter can be powered via the power adapter supplied or by connecting an external 9VAC/VDC source to the power supply terminals located at the back of the case. The F485s versatility and simple design makes it ideal for use with all GE Power Management products in direct and modem communications.
Converts between RS232/RS485/fiber optic Fiber optic communication for data transmission in noisy environments
Features
I I I I I I I I I
F485 simplifies communication between Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs), computers and a broad range of other combinations.
Computer
RS232 FIBER OPTIC
Direct or modem communications Electrically isolated for reliable communications 1,200-57,600 bps baud rates 50/125, 62.5/125 & 100/140 m multimode fibers Front panel LEDs for power, RS232 and RS485 transmit and receive 120 or 220 VAC adapter included Additional power supply terminals supplied to accept 9VAC/9VDC Two mounting configurations 9-9 & 9-25 pin interface cables included
F485
RS485 POWER POWER
OPTIONS
Tx COMPUTER Rx + - COM GND + COM PORT 9VAC/9VDC 9VAC/ 9VDC
RS232 RS232
Fiber Optic Transmitter/Receiver

The fiber optic transmitter and receiver used in the F485 converter utilize 820nm wavelength technology and are designed to operate with multimode fiber sizes 50/125m, 62.5/125m and 100/140m using ST terminated cables. The ST connections provide repeatable connections with low attenuation.
Electromagnetically transparent fiber optic cables
Noisy plant environment
F485
RS232 FIBER OPTIC RS485 POWER POWER Tx COMPUTER Rx + - COM GND + COM PORT 9VAC/9VDC 9VAC/ 9VDC
Control Voltage
The F485 converter can be powered by the 120 or 220 VAC power adapter supplied, or by connecting an external 9 VAC/9 VDC source. The 120 VAC adapter has a standard North American plug. The 220 VAC adapter has been designed for European markets where voltage is 220 VAC.
RS485 Up to 32 relays 2 wire shielded twisted pair

A = 0 B = 0 C = 0 AMPS
A = 0 B = 0
C = 0 AMPS
A = 0 B = 0
C = 0 AMPS
489 Generator Management Relay
805751A5.CDR
GE Power Management
43
F485 Communication Converter

FEATURES
RS485 direction control
Two-wire RS485 is by nature half duplex and requires a means for switching between a receive or transmit state. The F485 converter uses the incoming data to control the direction and therefore requires no control signals from the master device (RS232 or fiber) to switch from transmission to receive mode after the last character has been transmitted. The length of time is fixed at the time of 3.5 characters at the selected baud rate making it suitable for use with ModBus RTU protocol.
ISOLATED RS485 CONVERTER BAUD RATE SWITCHES TIMER DIRECTION DATA RS485 + SHIELD GND
GE Power Management
WIRING DIAGRAM
TERMINATION AND LINE BIAS
1 2 3 4
TO RELAYS
F485 CONVERTOR
CONFIGURATION SWITCH
RS485 LED Rx RS485 LED Tx FIBER Tx Rx
ST CONNECTOR
DATA VOLTAGE INPUT

9VAC/9VDC
5 6
+ -
DTE/DCE Control
The DTE/DCE setting reverses the transmit/receive data lines on the RS232 side. For communications between a computer and a slave device, such as an IED, DTE (direct) should be selected. When connecting the F485 converter to a modem or other data communications equipment, DCE should be selected.
DATA POWER SUPPLY ~ 9VAC/ 9VDC POWER JACK ~ + 5V +5V POWER 9VDC RS232 DRIVER
RS232 LED Rx RS232 LED Tx DTE/DCE RELAY
50/125 m fiber 62.5/125 m fiber 100/140 m fiber

RS232 INTERFACE COMPUTER F485 1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 1 8 2 3 TXD 3 2 RXD 4 20 5 7 SGND 6 6 7 4 8 5 9 20
+5V
DTE/DCE SWITCH
9 9 PIN CONNECTOR
25 PIN CONNECTOR
COMPUTER TO GROUND TERMINAL (4) 110/220 VAC RS232
9VAC
POWER ADAPTER
805752A7.CDR
Configuration
The converter box is configurable via two internal dip switch banks which are accessible by removing the converter box cover. Switches set the baud rate for RS485 communications, whether the converter is DTE (RS232 direct) or DCE (RS232 modem with transmit and receive reversed) and the converter conversion mode.
DIMENSIONS
REAR VIEW
RS232 FIBER OPTIC RS485 POWER POWER
1.30" (33mm)
COMPUTER Tx Rx
1 2 3 4 5 6
- COM GND +
9V AC/DC
Mounting
Two different mounting arrangements are possible. The first is by using the two mounting holes inside the plastic case along with the mounting screws supplied. The second and less permanent method is to use the Velcro material supplied for attachment to the side of a computer or desk. Visible LEDs on the front panel show transmit/receive activity.
BOTTOM VIEW
4.13" (105mm) 4.72" (120mm)
0.29"ref. (7mm)
2 x 0.109"(2.8mm) Dia. hole
3.29" (83mm)
ORDERING
1.46" (74mm)
F485 * *
F485
Standard unit with RS485RS232 ports plus a 9-9 pin & a 9-25 pin interface cables plus a 120 V or 220 V power supply adapter. With fiber optic interface 120 V power supply voltage 220 V power supply voltage
Inches" (mm)
805750A5.DWG
F 120 220
Online ordering is available for this product. See pages 15 - 18.

44
Dual redundant ethernet network connection to provide multiple RS232 serial ports.
MSP2
Ethernet Based Serial Port Server
4
Applications
I I I I I
High density serial port I/O Remote serial communication Highly distributed serial I/O High reliability ethernet connections Redundant ethernet connection Configurable from 2-16 COM ports with either RS232, RS485, or Fiber Supports baud rates up 115 kb on all ports simultaneously Additional front port for configuration by PC for field applications Dual redundant ethernet with failover protection and alarm Autodetect ethernet fail with failover switching Ethernet either 10 MB or 10/100 MB Dual power supplies with failure alarm Supports up to 256 COM ports with 16 MSP2s All ports appear as COM ports on host computer IRIG-B interface card available with selectable inputs of TTL or Fiber. TTL output supports up to 16 devices. Etherconnect allows user to redirect comports to run IED native sotfware Control and configuration may be done using Telnet command or using a standard Browser (Internet Explorer or Netscape)
Features
I
DESCRIPTION
The MSP2 is a powerful port server device designed to cater to the high availability requirements that electric power substation automation, and industrial automation systems. The MSP2 product provides an enhanced port server capability through the mapping of the individual serial ports on the MSP2 to COM ports in the host computer running Windows NT 4.0 and Windows '95/'98. The MSP2 ports can then be utilized by software packages running on configured host computers by addressing each port as a distinct COM port. By networking multiple MSPs (which come in 2 to 16 port densities), the number of COM ports on the host computers can be incrementally expanded to 256. Network communication from the host computers to the MSP2s is accomplished via standard Ethernet architecture. 10Base-T, 10Base2 and 10Base-FL network connections are available on the MSP. Optionally, network interfaces can be upgraded to 100Base-FL. Serial communication channels on the MSP2 are grouped as 2 port modules. RS232, RS485 (2 wire and 4 wire), and fiber optic modules are available. Fiber Optic modules are available with ST, and SMA connectors. In addition HP-Versalink is also available. Fiber optic channels help insure noise immunity and electrical isolation. The MSP2 can be configured to redirect its serial ports to up to 8 substation host PCs. At run time, any one of the confugured host PCs can take control of the MSP2 ports. This switching of the Active PC is accomplished via DDE on the host PCs. This scheme allows you to build 8 levels of redundancy at the PC level of the substation automation scheme in the event of hardware or software failure on the active host PC, up to 7 other PCs can dynamically take control of the MSP2 serial ports. This Active PC switching is typically accomplished under 10 seconds. Dual redundant network links are available on the MSP2. When the unit detects loss of communication with the Active PC, or a loss of communication to all the configured Hosts, the MSP2 automatically switches to the 2nd link to re-establish network communication with the host computers. This switching is typically accomplished in 3 seconds. Status of ethernet links to the MSP2 are available via DDE on the host computers.
I I I I I I I I I
Software
I I
As a standard feature, redundant power supplies provide high up-time operation to meet critical field application requirements. Built in Form-C contacts provide power supply status for monitoring. The wide range power supply input voltages (90-264 VAC/120-370 VDC) allows this product to operate from station batteries, as well as typically available line voltages. The IRIG-B interface card is designed to distribute demodulated IRIG-B signals to Intelligent Electronic Devices (fan out = 16).
Intelligent Internet Port Server
NEW IN 2000
GE Power Management
45
MSP2 Multiple Serial Port

DESCRIPTION
The interface accepts demodulated signals over a fiber optic interface (ST connector), or a Coax cable. The interface redistributes the IRIG-B signals over 1 fiber channel, and 4 TTL channels. Up to 4 devices may be daisy chained on each TTL channel, to allow for easy and economical time synchronization of the automation scheme. For applications that require a high number of serial ports, different communication media types, and a high degree of distribution, the MSP2 provides a reliable, flexible and economical solution.
Online ordering is available for these products.

See pages 15 - 18.
MSP2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

POWER SUPPLY RATINGS Rated Voltage Range: 90-264 VAC/120-370 VDC 85-264 VAC min - max Rated Power: 75 VA Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz PACKAGING PHYSICAL Weight: Net: Shipping: Dimensions: Overall Height: Width: Depth: COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS Media Single Fiber Redundant Fiber Single Twisted Pair 12 lbs (5.457 kg) 15 lbs (6.821 kg) 5.188" (131.77 mm) 19" (482.6 mm) to edge of mounting flanges 16.25" (412.75 mm) Reduntant Twisted Pair Designation 10Base-FL 10Base-FL 10Base-T 10Base-T Cabling 62.5/125 m duplex fiber cable 62.5/125 m duplex fiber cable UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair Connection 2 ST Connectors 4 ST Connectors RJ45 2-RJ45 Example Order # MSP2XXXXST MSP2XXXXSRT MSP2XXXXSSU MSP2XXXXSRU
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature: -10C to +60C
INSTRUCTION BOOK GEK-106263
ORDERING
This is only an example to explain how to compose a model for a typical MSP2. You must change each of the digits in the model number to match what you really need.
MSP2
MSP2
* * * * * *
3 1 4 0 SRT 2 H T 2 A
Basic unit multiple serial port number of RS232 (DB9P) output cards (2 ports per card) number of RS485, 2/4 wire Phoenix terminal board output cards (2 ports per card) number of glass fiber 62.5/125 um, 820 nm, multi-mode (ST) output cards (2 ports per card) number of plastic fiber (versatile link) output cards (2 ports per card) SRT = 2 ST LAN output, SRU = 2 UTP LAN output, SST = 1 ST output, SSU = 1 UTP output 0 = UTP LAN, 2 = 2 KM Fiber Optic LAN, 4 = 4 KM LAN H = External Hub interface, X = no External Hub interface, see note 1 T = Fiber to TTL interface for IRIG-B, X = no interface Redundant range 88-300 VDC/110 VAC/220 VAC power supply, 4 for 48 VDC dual redundant power supply Revision level
NOTE 1 : An external Fiber Hub can be connected to the MSP2 so that the External HUB will have redundant fiber uplink to the PC. This option is not available at this time.
FSD Fiber Subsystem Datalink

Fiber datalink between a computer host and an IED not equipped for optical communication. Application
I When an IED is not equipped for opti-
Features
I I I I I
cal communication I Applications where RS232 cable is unsuitable
Compatible with baud rates up to 9.6 k 5 or 12 VDC selectable input power Reverse DC input power protection DTE/DCE switch SMA connector for 820 nm signal interface
46
PRODUCT FAMILIES
M FAMILY
A new generation of economical modular relays based on a common platform.
The M Family offers a competitive solution that combines advanced protection, monitoring, widely accepted communications standards, and flexible configuration tools for many applications.
UR FAMILY
The engine for substation automation.
The Universal Relay family is a new generation of modular relays built on a common platform. Designed to serve as the engines for substation automation, all products in the family feature high performance protection with high speed open standard peer to peer communications - the necessary components of a successful 21st century power system.
SR FAMILY
Comprehensive industrial relays for motors, generators, transformers, and feeders.
The SR family of protection relays represents a microprocessor based and multi-functional line of products. By providing protection, control, monitoring, metering, and both local and remote user interfaces in one assembly, the SR relays effectively eliminate the need for expensive discrete components.
SECTION 5: PRODUCT FAMILIES M FAMILY .................................48 MIF .....................................193 MIV .....................................291 UR FAMILY ...............................49 T60........................................83 L90 ......................................105 L60 ......................................109 D60 .....................................113 F60 ......................................143 F35 ......................................147 C30 .....................................269 C60 .....................................273 SR FAMILY ...............................57 489 ........................................63 745 ........................................87 750/760 ..............................151 735/737 ..............................187 469 ......................................201 MID FAMILY .............................58 MGC .....................................79 MIF .....................................193 MIC .....................................197 MLJ ....................................327 MFF ....................................332 TOV ....................................338 TCW....................................359 DDS FAMILY.............................59 DTP .......................................95 DTR.....................................101 DMS ...................................175 SMOR-B .............................179 DBF .....................................279 DRS ....................................283 DFF .....................................334 MOV ...................................340
MID FAMILY
Modular protection systems for low and medium voltage industrial installations.
The MID system can be used in all low and medium voltage industrial installations. Typical applications are interconnection systems for customer-power company connection, minicenters, cogeneration, and equipment including generators, motors, transformers, and capacitor banks.
DDS FAMILY
Integrated protection and control system for electrical substations.
The DDS system integrates distribution and transmission substation protection and control features. The DDS basic field units, or level 1 units, provide metering, protection and both remote and local control at the position level. All these units can be linked in a network thanks to their communication capabilities, so that all the information is transferred to a central substation computer.
47
A new generation of modular microprocessor relays based on a common platform.

NEW
M Family 4 Unit Rack
M Family
Modular Microprocessor Relays
Applications
I I I
5 MIF - Feeder MIV - Voltage
DESCRIPTION
The M relay Family is a new generation of modular microprocessor protective relays based on a common platform. The M Family offers a competitive solution that combines advanced protection, monitoring, widely accepted communications standards, and flexible configuration tools for many applications. Each product within the M Family may be used as a stand alone unit or as a component of an automated substation or industrial protection and control system. The M Family of products have two user configurable digital inputs and six digital outputs. Two of the outputs are fixed (for trip and service purposes), while the other four are user configurable to accommodate complex control schemes defined by configurable logic. They also include 6 target LEDs (4 configurable and 2 fixed) located on the front panel along with a three key keypad and a 3.5 digit LED dot matrix display that provides an easy to use user interface. The front keypad allows the user to set the baud rate and address for PC communication. For this purpose, two communication ports are provided. An RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay and a rear RS485 port can be converted to an RS232 or fiber optic port by using an external GE DAC300 converter. Both ports support ModBus RTU protocol and are capable of baud rates up to 19.2 kbps. The Windows based M+PC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. The M Family of products utilize flash memory that allows future upgrading of the relays to follow the technology curve without replacing the complete relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
I I I I I I I I
Feeder protection, any voltage level Main protection for small generators and motors Backup/Auxiliary protection for transformers, motors, generators and busbars Overload protection Automatic transfer equipment Load shedding and restoration schemes Backup directional overcurrent protection Reverse power protection Bus or line synchrocheck Generator and network synchrocheck Three phase reclosing Current, voltage Analog/digital oscillography (optional) Event recording (optional) Self-diagnostics M+PC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) RS485 rear port (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) LED dot matrix display and keypad Target LED indicators Configurable logic Configurable curve Flash memory for field upgrades Two setting tables Modular package for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost)
Monitoring and Metering

I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I I
Features
I I I I I I
DIMENSIONS
The M Family of products have a drawout construction in 4" wide modules for relays including current channels or in 2" wide modules for relays including only voltage channels. These drawout modules may be mounted in standard 19" racks, half racks, individual cases, or supplied with depth reducing collar for space efficiency.
CASE - FRONT VIEW CASE - SIDE VIEW
10.24 (260) Optional depth reducing collar
A
7.30 (185)
COLLAR* FRONT VIEW

6.14 (156) 4.33 (110)
COLLAR* SIDE VIEW

2.48 (63)
CASE - CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN

0.28 Dia. (7) 4 PL.
6.66 (169)
9.14 (232) Item Description MIV Dimensions (Inches/(mm)) B A C 4.20 3.46 2.52 (107) (88) (64) 6.36 5.61 4.67 (162) (143) (119) 10.67 (271) 19.05 (484) 9.92 (252) 18.30 (465) 8.98 (228) 17.35 (441)
B C
Inches (millimeters)
8.134 (206) 0.28 Dia. (7) 4 PL. 4.00 (102)
7.00 (178) 4.00 (102) 150 (38)
MIF Half Rack M050 Full Rack M100 * MIF only
CUTOUT
CASE - CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN
6.66 (169)
9.14 (232)
832755a6.ai
48
GE Power Management
The engine for substation / plant automation.
UR
105 109 113 83 143 147 273 269
I I I I I
L90 Line Differential L60 Line Phase Comparison D60 Distance T60 Transformer
SETTINGS OSCILLOGRAPHY
Universal Relay Family IEDs

5
F60 Feeder F35 Multiple Feeder
EVENTS
C60 Breaker
PHASORS
Applications
Substation/plant automation Protection and control Metering and power quality Digital fault recorder Predictive maintenance Common modular platform I Common look and feel I Reduced integration costs I Reduced detailed engineering I Reduced spares cost I Reduced learning curve I Upgradable hardware Configurable schemes using FlexLogic Expandable AC channels (Sources) Expandable transducer inputs Expandable I/O Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Analog/digital oscillography Data logger (load profiles) Event recording of last 1024 events IRIG-B time synchronization Test mode for forcing contact I/O states Flash memory for field upgrades Self diagnostics Easy access to information Low total cost of ownership Proven installed base Drawout modules for serviceability URPC software for setting, monitoring, graphical system representation RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet Port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols High speed peer to peer communications on ethernet reduces wiring costs 2 x 20 character display and keypad User programmable target LEDs
URPC
FLEXLOGIC
C30 Controller
SINGLE LINE
EDITORS CHOICE
Design Engineering
www.design-engineering.com
Features & Benefits

I
DESCRIPTION
The Universal Relay family is a new generation of modular relays built on a common platform. Designed to serve as the engines for substation automation, all products in the family feature high performance protection with high speed open standard peer to peer communications - the necessary components of a successful 21st century power system. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). Remote inputs and outputs that can be sent through the LAN when combined with hardware I/O enable complex scheme logic while reducing auxiliary components and wiring. Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The UR has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus /TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the UR include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags. The URPC software is used to view these records. The UR utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I I
GE Power Management
49
UR Universal Relay Family IEDs

FLEXLOGIC
With GEs extensive experience in the development of protection products and thoroughly tested algorithms, the UR family of relays offer unparalleled high performance protection. FlexLogic significantly simplifies the use of these algorithms while enabling powerful but flexible protection and control solutions. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited and simplistic. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hardwired using contact inputs and outputs if the requirement could be met at all. This would entail significant expense in implementation and troubleshooting. Alternately, the only other option was to approach a manufacturer for a feature enhancement. If this approach was possible, it was rarely completed in a timely manner as the new feature had to be designed, implemented, and thoroughly tested.
Traditionally, protection logic was hardcoded and relatively inflexible Programmable FlexLogic in UR family IEDs reduces cost with fewer devices and wiring while making complex schemes and future changes easy to implement
Computed Parameters
CTs VTs Analog Analog Inputs
A/D DSP
Protection
25 50
FlexLogic
87
Virtual Outputs
Physical Outputs Mechanical
Auxiliary Outputs
Control Solid State Digital Inputs Keypad All Comm. Links/ Protocols Digital Inputs Remote Outputs (GOOSE) Power Supply
52 Breaker
All Comm. Links/ Protocols
Virtual Inputs
Remote Inputs (GOOSE) Ethernet LAN
UR IED ARCHITECTURE
HARDWARE FIRMWARE PROGAMMABLE
48-250VDC
Relay 2 UR C60 Breaker
Relay 1 UR F60 Feeder
Relay 3 UR T60 Transformer
High-Speed Peer-to-Peer LAN (UCA2/Ethernet)
841705AE.cdr
Traditional hard wired control versus UR FlexLogic
Traditional
Multiple relays/transducers Complex wiring Fixed wired logic Rack space and real estate Local targets, panel indicators
FlexLogicTM
Few multifunction IEDs Control via LAN Programmable logic Fewer panels, smaller building Computer display, more information
841708A4.cdr
Contact Inputs
Elements
Contact Outputs
flexdoc1.ai
MMS/UCA2 enables high speed trip and control via the substation LAN without complex fixed wiring to many auxiliary devices.
Station LAN MMS/UCA2 / Ethernet Blocking Message FlexLogic FlexLogic
FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making complex schemes easy to implement. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of remote inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (Distributed FlexLogic). Also, the UR contact input/output capability is expandable. The contact inputs can accept wet or dry contacts and contact outputs can be trip rated Form-A, trip rated Form-C, or Fast Form-C.
UR family IEDs utilize field programmable FlexLogic
Trip Message FlexLogic
RELAY #1
RELAY #2 Trip Output
RELAY #3
Trip Time
UCA2 LAN Control Solid State Output Hardwire Control Relay Output Legacy Device Communications
52
4 mS 8 mS
Breaker
500 mS
Trip Time
841704A8.cdr
High Speed LAN Control

With the advent of the high-speed peer-to-peer communications LAN, a great deal of inter-device control wiring can be eliminated by performing interdevice control signalling via remote I/O over the LAN. As performance and functional requirements evolve to take advantage of the new possibilities brought about by high speed peer-topeer communications, the UR can just as easily evolve to remain in-step with user requirements and budgets.
Interoperability
MMS/UCA2 (Manufacturing Message Specification/Utility Communications Architecture) protocol allows for the seamless connection of IEDs from multiple vendors. In addition to device interoperability, MMS/UCA2 is designed to control the substation via LAN instead of through discrete wiring to an RTU. Peer to peer communications over Ethernet enables distributed control with a few IEDs and eliminates the need for an RTU to remote SCADA master. High speed message transfer eliminates the need for large and costly hard-wired interconnections.
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Remote Inputs
FlexLogic (Gates) (Timers) (Latches)
TM
Elements Virtual Outputs Contact Outputs

flexdoc2.ai
50
UR Overview

UR MODULES
Scalable/Upgradable
Modularity is achieved through a plugin card system similar to that found in programmable logic controllers as well as PCs. I Modular hardware for fast replacement/upgrades/expansion I Plug in cards accommodate changes to network interface (eg. 100 Mbps Ethernet) I Upgradable software (flash memory) reduces obsolescence, maintains latest technology I Integrated family, common look and feel for quicker learning curve and understanding of tools
I Scalable - grow from simple to

complex systems with experience I Fewer spares reduces maintenance costs
With the UR series IEDs only a few interchangeable modules are needed for the spares of a complete substation
Front Panel
I Detachable display with local
programming and status display
I Common look/operation for all

models reduces learning curve
Front panel, configurable for each UR
LED panels can be customized to suit customer specific applications.
FEATURES Ground Distance Phase Distance Synchrocheck Phase Undervoltage Transformer Instantaneous Differential Negative Sequence IOC Breaker Failure Ground IOC Neutral IOC Phase IOC Negative Sequence TOC Ground TOC Neutral TOC Phase TOC Phase Overvoltage Negative Sequence Directional OC Neutral Directional OC Phase Directional Autoreclose (4 Shot, 3 Pole) Underfrequency Restricted Ground Fault Line Differential Phase Comparison Transformer Percent Differential Breaker Arcing Current (I2t) Breaker Control Cold Load Pickup Contact Inputs (up to 96) Contact Outputs (up to 64) Data Logger Demand Digital Counters (8) Digital Elements (16) Event Recorder Fault Reporting FlexLogic Equations L90 Channel Tests Line Pickup Metering: Current, Voltage, Power MMS/UCA Communications MMS/UCA Remote I/O (GOOSE) ModBus Communications ModBus User Map DNP 3.0 Oscillography Pilot Schemes Setting Groups (8) Transducer I/O User Programmable LEDs Virtual Inputs (32) Virtual Outputs (64) VT Fuse Failure
DEVICE 21G 21P 25 27P 50/87 50_2 50BF 50G 50N 50P 51_2 51G 51N 51P 59P 67_2 67N 67P 79 81U 87G 87L 87PC 87T
L90 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
L60 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
D60 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
T60
F60 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
F35
C60 I I
C30
I I I I I I I I I
PROTECTION
I I I I I I
I I I
I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
CONTROL
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
METERING
I I I I I I I I I I I
UR Overview
51

COMMUNICATIONS
The UR has a variety of communications options. The RS232 port on the faceplate is intended for local interogation and programming using the URPC program. The RS485 port on the rear of the UR supports ModBus RTU protocol and baud rates of up to 115 kbps (six times faster than 19.2 kbps). The second port on the rear of the unit may be ordered as a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port (five hundred times faster than 19.2 kbps). The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP protocols and may be ordered as a redundant fiber optic port with ST connector for use with 820nm multi-mode fiber optic cable. The high baud rates coupled with the superior response time of the UR communications ports permits implementation of a system that is truly real-time. The open protocols make integration of the UR much simpler and cost effective.
URPC software allows easy viewing and editing of relay settings Automatic logic diagram generation from FlexLogic equations can eliminate expensive drafting and engineering time
urpc.eps flexdraw.eps
URPC Program
The Windows based URPC program may be run on a PC with the Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program may be used locally on the RS232 serial port or remotely on the other ports. It provides full access to the relay data with the following features: I I I I
View actual values View relay status View/edit settings on-line/off-line View event recorder for troubleshooting I URPC tutorial for step-by-step help I Relay firmware programming for upgrades
Each UR has a sequence of events recorder which combines the recording of oscillography data. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including pickups, trips, contact operations, alarms, and self test status. Each UR stores up to 1024 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest microsecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which can reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of system faults.
Oscillography screens with flexible trigger settings assist in fault analysis.
In the event of a control scheme change, existing FlexLogic schemes may be conveniently modified within URPC via an insert/delete feature and uploaded to the UR. This significantly reduces the reconfiguration effort, saving time, money, and other valuable resources.
Single line diagram feature within URPC simplifies the generation of complete substation schemes
Metered parameters that may be viewed with the URPC program include current, voltage, apparent power (VA), real power (W), reactive power (var), and power factor.
Current and voltage can be displayed in a graphical phasor format to analyze pre/post fault conditions
osc.tif
The oscillography records captured by the UR consist of current and voltage waveforms at 64 samples/cycle (up to 128 cycles), and digital parameter states. The number of pre-trigger and post-trigger cycles may also be selected. The oscillography feature of the URPC software is used to provide a visual display of power systems data and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events, and may be used for subsequent analysis. In addition to its automatic generation of scheme logic diagrams, the URPC FlexLogic software interface simplifies control scheme programming. With its user friendly design, individual equation definition parameters are entered on a line by line basis where they are easily defined and configured.
Analyzing System Needs

The tools available with the URPC software combined with other GE Power Management control and monitoring software/hardware offer differing levels of settings and analysis functionality. These can be combined to meet specific system requirements. IED programs like URPC are powerful tools that are regularly updated and provided at no charge. They can be downloaded from the GE Power Management website at www.GEindustrial.com/pm.
phasorsszd.eps
All status information such as target messages and digital input/output states may be viewed with the URPC program.
52
UR Overview

FEATURES
STATUS LED INDICATORS
IN SERVICE: TROUBLE: TEST MODE: TRIP: ALARM: PICKUP: The relay is operating normally Self-test detected a problem The relay is in test mode A trip command had been issued An alarm condition is present Pickup condition detected
EVENT CAUSE LED INDICATORS

VOLTAGE: event caused by voltage CURRENT: event caused by current FREQUENCY: event caused by frequency OTHER: event caused by other PHASE A indicates which PHASE B phase was PHASE C involved NEUTRAL/GROUND
sample only sample only
DISPLAY
I 40 character vacuum fluorescent display visible in dim lighting or at any angle I Used for programming, monitoring, status, fault diagnosis, user programmable messages and settings
HOT KEYS
RESET: Resets latched conditions USER 1 - 3: Open/close breakers
RS232 SERIAL PORT
I Connect to a PC to run URPC I Use for downloading settings, monitoring data, sequence of events reports, oscillography
PROTECTIVE COVER
I Protects keypad when not in use I Can be fitted with a seal
CUSTOMIZABLE LED PANEL
KEYPAD
I Compliments customizable programming feature I Multi-format templates available
I Numeric keypad and command keys allow full access to the relay I Rubber keypad is dust tight and splash-proof with door I Website address via HELP key for technical support
Rear View Example Configuration
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATION
I Fiber optic ELED and LASER I G.703 (1 or 2 terminals) @ 64 kbps I RS422 (1 or 2 terminals) @ 64 kbps
POWERFUL PROCESSORS
Numerical data processing using a 32 bit CPU and 16 bit DSP (CT/VT)
CONTACT INPUTS (Expandable)

Configurable inputs may be used for: I Breaker status I Oscillography trigger I Control inputs
COMMUNICATIONS
I ModBus RTU on RS485 @ 115 kbps I MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, and DNP 3.0 on 10BaseF options
CONTACT OUTPUTS (Expandable)
I Trip rated Form-A relays with circuit monitors I Form-C relays that may be programmed for auxiliary functions I Fast Form-C relays for signalling
PROGRAM UPDATING
Flash memory storage of firmware for field updating via communications port. Enables product updating on-site for latest features.
MODULAR DESIGN
Facilitates upgrades and replacement of units
UR Overview
53

UR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION LEGEND THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS REPRESENT THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS. F60 I F35 C30 C60 o D60 # L60 L90 p T60 G G60 L M60 n Available on all UR models Not yet available PROTECTION ELEMENTS o#pI PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE Voltage: Fundamental Pickup Level: 0.00-250.00V in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 102 to 103 % of Pickup Level Ac uracy: 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Curve Shapes: GE IAV Inverse Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Timing Accuracy: at < 0.90 x Pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) # LOW-SET FAULT CURRENT DETECTOR (FDL) Pickup Level: 0.1[0.02] to 15.0[3.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup # LOW-SET POSITIVE SEQ. CURRENT DETECTOR (FDM) Pickup Level: 0.1[0.02] to 15.0[3.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup # HIGH-SET FAULT CURRENT DETECTOR (FDH) Pickup Level: 0.1[0.02] to 15.0[3.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup o# LOW-SET CURRENT SUPERVISION (IT) Pickup Level: 0.1[0.02] to 15.0[3.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup o# BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT SUPERVISION (50BF) Pickup Level: 0.25[0.05] to 115.0[23.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Reset Time Delay: less than one half cycle o# NEGATIVE SEQUENCE IOC (50_2) Pickup Level: 0.25[0.05] to 115.00[23.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Operate Time Delay: 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Reset Time Delay: 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s o# NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC (51_2) Pickup Level: 0.25[0.05] to 115.00[23.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Curve Shape: Same as Phase TOC Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous/Linear/Electro-mechanical Timing Accuracy: at [1.03 x PU: 3% of trip time or 20 ms (whichever is greater) POSITIVE SEQ. UNDERVOLTAGE DETECTOR (27_1) Pickup Level: 0.1 [0.02] to 150.0 in steps of 0.1 Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup NEGATIVE SEQ. OVERVOLTAGE DETECTOR (59_2) Pickup Level: 0.1 [0.02] to 150.0 in steps of 0.1 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup ZERO SEQ. OVERVOLTAGE DETECTOR (59_0) Pickup Level: 0.1 [0.02] to 150.0 in steps of 0.1 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup p RESTRAINED DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION Operating Current Pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup SLOPE-1 range: 15% to 100% in steps of 1 SLOPE-2 range: 50% to 200% in steps of 1 BP (SLOPE-1 Breakpoint): 1 to 20 in steps of 0.1 x CT Harmonic Restraint: 0.1% to 65% of fundamental in steps of 0.1 p INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURRENT Pickup Level: 5 to 20 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of Pickup Time Delay: 0 to 2000 in steps of 25 ms Level Accuracy: Per current Input p PHASE/NEUTRAL (3I0)/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT Pickup Level: 0.05 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of Pickup Curve shape: (see curve shapes) Curve multiplier (time dial): 0.5 to 30 for ANSI, IAC & FlexCurve in steps of 0.1 0.05 to 1.00 for IEC curves in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous or Linear Level Accuracy: Per current Input pI FREQUENCY Underfrequency: Pickup Level: 45.00 to 59.99 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.0 to 10.0 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Signal Source: winding 1 Phase A current or voltage Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz PROTECTION ELEMENTS LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION Current Tap 4[0.8] to 20[4]A in steps of 0.1 Phase Current Differential Sensitivity: 0.20[0.04] to 4.00[0.80]A in 0.1[0.02]A steps Ground Current Differential Sensitivity: 0.20[0.04] to 4.00[0.80]A in 0.1[0.02]A steps Percent Restraint, Slope 1: 1 to 50% in 1% steps Percent Restraint, Slope 1: 1 to 50% in 1% steps Dual Slope Breakpoint: 2.0 to 50.0 multiples of pickup in 0.1 steps o PHASE DISTANCE Characteristics: Mho Positive sequence angle: 45 to 90 degrees Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4 reach: 0.02 to 250 ohms Time delay: 0 to 100 sec PHASE - PHASE SUPERVISION Pickup: 0.05 to 115 A Dropout: 97 - 98% o GROUND DISTANCE Characteristics: Mho Positive sequence angle: 45 to 90 degrees Zero sequence angle: 45 to 90 degrees Z1,Z2,Z3,Z4 reach: 0.02 to 250 ohms Time delay: 0 to 100 sec GROUND DISTANCE SUPERVISION Pickup: 0.05 to 115 A o PHASE AND GROUND HIGH SET IOC Pick up: 0.05 to 115 A Drop out: 97 -98% Overreach: < 2% o LINE PICKUP Phase IOC: 0.05 to 115 A Phase UV: 0 - 250V Phase O/V delay: 0 - 600 sec
PROTECTION ELEMENTS Note: Values in square brackets are for 1A secondary CT, other values are for 5A secondary CT DIGITAL ELEMENTS n Pickup Delay: 0.000 to 999999.99 in steps of 0.001 s Reset Delay: 0.000 to 999999.99 in steps of 0.001 s Timing Accuracy: 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) #pIo PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC Current: Fundamental (or RMS for phase) Pickup Level: 0.25 [0.05] to 115.00 [23.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Level Accuracy: 0.75% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating 1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse Curve Shapes: IEC (and B.S.) A/B/C and Short Inverse GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/Extremely Inverse I2t FlexCurve (Programmable) Definite Time (0.01s base curve) Curve Multiplier: Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Timing Accuracy: at > 1.03 x Actual Pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) #pI SENSITIVE GROUND TOC Current: Fundamental Pickup Level: 0.025 [0.005] to 11.50 [2.30] A in steps of 0.001 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Level Accuracy: 0.75% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 0.2 x CT rating 1.5% of reading > 0.2 x CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse Curve Shapes: IEC (and B.S.) A/B/C and Short Inverse IAC Inverse, Short/Very/Extremely Inverse I2t FlexCurve (Programmable) Definite Time (0.01s base curve) Curve Multiplier: Time Dial=0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Timing Accuracy: at > 1.03 x Actual Pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) o#pI PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC Current: Fundamental only Pickup Level: 0.25 [0.05] to 115.00 [23.00] A in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Level Accuracy: 0.75% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating 1.5% of reading > 2.0 x CT rating Overreach: < 2% Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Operate Time: < 20 ms at 1.5 x Pickup at 60 Hz Timing Accuracy: Operate at 1.5 x Pickup 3% of operate time or 4ms (whichever is greater) o#p SENSITIVE GROUND IOC Current: Fundamental only Pickup Level: 0.025 [0.005] to 11.50 [2.30] A in steps of 0.001 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Level Accuracy: 0.75% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 0.2 x CT rating 1.5% of reading > 0.2 x CT rating Overreach: < 2% Pickup Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Reset Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s Operate Time: < 20 ms at 1.5 x Pickup at 60 Hz Timing Accuracy: Operate at 1.5 x Pickup 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater)
METERING Accuracies based on less than 2 x CT and 50 to 130 V inputs FS = Full Scale = 2 x CT @ 1 x VT Full Scale x 3 o#pI RMS CURRENT Accuracy: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) from 0.1 to 2.0 x CT rating 1.0% of reading @ > 2.0 x CT rating o#I RMS VOLTAGE Accuracy: 0.25% of reading from 10 to 208V o#I APPARENT POWER VA Accuracy: 1.0% of reading o#I REAL POWER W Accuracy: 1.0% of reading @ PF between 0.8 and 1.0 o#I REACTIVE POWER VAR Accuracy: 1.0% of reading @ PF between 0.2 and 0.0 o#I POWER FACTOR Accuracy: 0.02 o#I WATT-HOUR Range: -2 x 109 to 2 x 109 Mwh Accuracy: 0.5% of reading per hour o#I VAR-HOUR Range: -2 x 109 to 2 x 109 Mvarh Accuracy: 0.5% of reading per hour o#I CURRENT PHASOR MAGNITUDE Current Accuracy: 0.5% of FS SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS Current Level Accuracy: 1.5% of FS FREQUENCY Range: Accuracy: DEMAND Phase A/B/C Current Range: Accuracy: DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT Accuracy: o#I
o#I 3 to 90 Hz; 0.02 Hz o#I 0 to 65535 A 2% of FS p 1.5% of FS
54
UR Overview

MONITORING n OSCILLOGRAPHY Records: 1 x 128 to 31 x 8 cycles(configurable) 64 samples per power frequency cycle Sampling Rate: Triggers: Any element pickup or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state FlexLogic equation Data: AC input channels Digital input state Element state Digital output state EVENT RECORDER n Capacity: 1024 events Time-tag: To 1 microsecond Triggers: Any element pickup, operate or reset Digital input change of state Digital output change of state Self test events POWER SUPPLY LOW RANGE Nominal DC Voltage: 24 - 48 Min./Max. DC Voltage: 19 / 60 n HIGH RANGE Nominal DC Voltage: 125 - 250 Min./Max. DC Voltage: 88 / 300 Nominal AC Voltage: 100 - 240 @ 48-62 Hz Min./Max. AC Voltage: 88 / 288 @ 48-62 Hz n ALL RANGES Volt Withstand: 2 x Highest Nominal Voltage for 10ms Voltage Loss Hold-Up: 100 ms Power Consumption: Typical = 35 VA OUTPUTS FORM-A RELAY Make and Carry for 1.0 sec: 30 A @ 300 VDC (ANSI) Carry Continuous: 6 A @ 300 VDC. Break @ L/R of 40 ms: 0.25 ADC Max. Operate Time: < 4 ms. Contact Material: Silver alloy FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY Make and Carry for 0.2 sec: 30 A @ 300 VDC (ANSI) Carry Continuous: 6 A @ 300 VDC. Break @ L/R of 40 ms: 0.1 ADC Max. Operate Time: < 8 ms Contact Material: Silver alloy FAST FORM-C RELAY Make and Carry: 40 mA @ 48 VDC Operate Time: < 0.6 ms INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR Power: 2W Resistance: 100 CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (for Dry Contact Input) Capacity: 100 mA DC @ 48 VDC Isolation: 300 Vpk COMMUNICATIONS n RS232: Front Port (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) RS485: 1 or 2 Rear Ports (up to 115 kbps, ModBus RTU)Isolated together @ 36Vpk Ethernet port: 10 BaseF, or redundant 10 BaseF; MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP (10BaseF: 820 nm, multi-mode, fiber optic with ST connector) INPUTS AC CURRENT CT Rated Primary: CT Rated Secondary: Frequency Range: Relay Burden: Conversion Range: Current Withstand: INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS (3) General Purpose Input: Type: Ranges: Input Impedance: Conversion Range: Accuracy: Tap Position Input: Type: Ranges: Bias Current: Accuracy: RTD Input: Type: 3-wire: Sensing Current: Range: Accuracy: Isolation: dcmA 0-1, 0-5, 0-10, 0-20 or 4-20 mA (programmable) 375 10% 0 to 21 mA 1% of full scale resistance (ohms) 0-500 or 0-5 k (programmable) 1 mA or 10 mA (based on input range) 1% of full scale 100 Platinum (DIN.43760) 100 & 120 Nickel 10 Copper 5 mA -50 to +250C 2C 36 V peak-peak
o#pI 1 to 50 000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 65 Hz. < 0.2 VA at rated secondary 0.01 to 46 x CT rating RMS symmetrical 1 sec. @ 100 times rated Cont. @ 3 times rated AC SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT o#pI CT Rated Primary: 1 to 50 000 A CT Rated Secondary: 1 A or 5 A by connection Frequency Range: 20 to 65 Hz. Relay Burden: < 0.2 VA at rated secondary 0.001 to 4.6 x CT rating RMS symmetrical Conversion Range: Current Withstand: 1 sec. @ 100 times rated Cont. @ 3 times rated o#pI AC VOLTAGE VT Rated Secondary: 50.0 to 240.0 V VT Ratio: 0.1 - 24000.0 Frequency Range: 20 to 65 Hz. Relay Burden: < 0.25 VA at 120 V Conversion Range: 1 to 275 V Voltage Withstand: Cont. @ 260 V to neutral 1 Min./Hr @ 420 V to neutral n CONTACT INPUTS Dry Contacts: 1000 Maximum Wet Contacts: 300 VDC Maximum Selectable Thresholds: 16 V, 30 V, 80 V, 140 V Recognition Time: < 4 ms
PRODUCTION TESTS Dielectric Strength: ANSI/IEEE C37.90 (CT, VT, Control Power & Contact Inputs, & Contact Outputs) ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Range: Ambient Storage Temperature: Humidity (noncondensing):
5
n
-10 C to +60 C -40 C to +60 C Up to 95%
APPROVALS UL Certification applied for CSA Certification applied for CE-Mark in process Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered system TYPE TESTS Electrical Fast Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 BS EN 61000-4-4 Oscillatory Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Insulation Resistance: IEC 255-5 Dielectric Strength: IEC 255-6, Series C 2240V ANSI/IEEE C37.90 Electrostatic Discharge: EN 61000-4-2 Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5 RFI Susceptibility: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 EN 61000-4-3 Note: Type test report available upon request. *Specifications subject to change without notice.

See pages 15 - 18.
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS

No. DESCRIPTION
Time-delay Distance Synchronism-check Undervoltage Annunciator Directional power Undercurrent Bearing Loss of Field Reverse-phase Phase-sequence voltage Thermal Instantaneous overcurrent AC time overcurrent Overvoltage Voltage balance Pressure switch Apparatus ground detector AC directional overcurrent Blocking Permissive control Alarm DC overcurrent Out-of-step AC reclosing Frequency Carrier or pilot-wire Lock out Differential Tripping 2 21 25 27 30 32 37 38 40 46 47 49 50 51 59 60 63 64 67 68 69 74 76 78 79 81 85 86 87 94
DIMENSIONS
VERTICAL FRONT VIEW
FRONT OF PANEL 7.00" (177.8) FRONT BEZEL
VERTICAL SIDE VIEW

PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET
HORIZONTAL TOP VIEW (19" 4RU)
UR SERIES
8.97" (228)
10.90" (277) 9.80" (249)
13.75" (349.3) 13.50" (342.9)
17.52" (445) HORIZONTAL FRONT VIEW
Brackets repositioned for switchgear mtg.
VERTICAL CUTOUT VERTICAL BOTTOM VIEW

1.85" (47.0) 7.13 (181.1) 1.57 (39.9) 4.00 (101.6) 0.46 (11.7)
7.00" (178)
19.00" (483)
PANEL SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY 14.40 (365.8)
9.00" (228.6)
MOUNTING BRACKET
CUT-OUT
13.65 (346.7)
HORIZONTAL PANEL MOUNTING 18.37" (467)
4x0.28"Dia. (7)
TERMINAL BLOCKS 7.00" (177.8)
7.13" (181)
CUTOUT
4.00" (102)
INCHES MILLIMETERS
0.213" (5.4) 4 PLACES
843755A3.DWG
17.75" (451)
1.57" (40)
827704B4.dwg
UR Overview
55

COMMON UR GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
The relay shall be provided in one integrated package suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The relay shall be housed in a horizontal, 4 RU, 19 inch rack chassis configuration. It shall be a modular design to easily facilitate upgrading or repair by replacement of modules. The faceplate interface shall include an alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display, keypad, and LED target indicators.
Multiple software drivers enable IEDs with different protocols and speeds to be mixed on the Legacy and UCA2 compliant network.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs shall be re-configurable through the use of FlexLogic equations. The use of remote inputs and outputs in addition to hardware shall be available on the communications ports using the UCA2 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) mechanism to minimize the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring. The contact inputs shall accept wet or dry contacts. Contact outputs shall be trip rated Form-A with current and voltage circuit monitors, Form-C, or Fast Form-C for signalling. Hardware input/output capability shall be expandable. The relay shall have three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port shall be accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The second port shall be RS485 supporting ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port shall be either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0 protocols. The physical port shall be 10BaseF, or redundant 10BaseF.
NT Pentium
Substation Ethernet LAN
F60
Feeder
F60 Feeder Management Relay
745
745 Transformer Management Relay
Transformer
L90
Line Differential
L90 Line Current Differential
760
ModBus RTU
760 Feeder Management Relay
Feeder
L60
Line Phase Comparison
L60 Line Phase Comparrison
TM Advanced Line Protection SYSTEM
ALPS
ALPS
Line Protection
T60
Transformer
Digital Line Protection
DLPD
Distance Protection
DFP100
MMS/UCA2 or ModBus RTU
DFP100
Feeder
D60
Distance Protection
D60 Distance Protection Relay
DFP200
DFP200
DFP200
Feeder
C60
Breaker
C60 Breaker Failure
PQM
PQM Power Quality Meter
STATUS
ALARM
PROGRAM SIMULATION SELF TEST
COMMUNICATE RELAYS
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
Power Quality Meter
The relay shall be supplied with supporting application software for use on a PC with Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program shall be capable of retrieving Comtrade oscillography files from the relay to display, save, or print when troubleshooting. The software shall provide the capability of editing and managing settings files to store to the relay or disk backup, while on-line or off-line. The software shall also permit the updating of new relay firmware and viewing of all trip and alarm target messages, and the 1024 time stamped events recorded by the relay. The relay clock shall be capable of being synchronized with an IRIG-B signal to allow synchronism with other connected devices. For individual product guideform specifications or the UR Family overview section, please refer to the following pages of this catalog: L90 Page 105 L60 Page 109 D60 Page 113 F60 Page 143 F35 Page 147 C60 Page 273 C30 Page 269 T60 Page 83 UR Page 49
C30
Controller
C30 Controller
F485 Communication Converter
F485
RS232/485
Enterprise Network
Other Substations Energy Control System
Other Vendor IEDs Router
MSP
Ethernet to Serial Gateway
Fiber Copper
Internet
Hub Bridge
827793A3.cdr
UCA2 COMPLIANT UR FAMILY
PROPRIETARY PROTOCOLS LEGACY DEVICES
ORDERING
GE can supply substation automation from individual components to complete substations and energy management systems. Visit out website or contact us to discuss how GE components and devices can best match your needs. Complete product brochures, instruction manuals, application papers, software, and on-line ordering are available from our website at www.GEindustrial.com/pm.
NEW UR RELAYS
B30
Small Bus Differential Relay
NEW UR FEATURES
Single Pole Reclose IEC 870 Protocol
M60
Motor Management Relay
COMING SOON
Visit www.GEindustrial.com/pm for the Latest New Product and New Features Releases
56
UR Overview
Comprehensive industrial power management systems for motors, generators, transformers, and feeders.
489
Generator
SR
Relay Family
750/760
Feeder
745
Transformer
735/737
Feeder
5
469
Motor
Applications
I I I I
Motor management Generator management Transformer management Feeder Management
DESCRIPTION
The SR family of protection relays represents a microprocessor based and multi-functional line of products. By providing an economical system, protection, control, monitoring and metering, and both local and remote user interfaces in one assembly, the SR relays effectively eliminate the need for expensive discrete components. In addition to both current and voltage inputs offered by traditional electromechanical and electrostatic relays, the SR family also offers several analog and digital inputs. These inputs are used to provide the relay with vital information such as vibration, pressure, temperature, and breaker status as a small example. Couple these inputs with several additional output relays for flexibility in creating custom schemes and the SR family offers a level of protection traditionally unheard of. The SR family also offers analog outputs which eliminate the requirement for external transducers. When connected to a PLC for process control, the result is truly real time. With the exception of the 735/737, all other SR relays have three independent communications ports: a rear RS485 port, a second rear RS485 or RS422 port and a front panel RS232 port for easy local computer access. The rear ports can be used for remote communications or for connection to a DCS, SCADA, or PLC. All three ports support the ModBus RTU protocol. In addition, the 489, 745, 750, 760, and PQM all support DNP (Distributed Network Protocol) 3.0 Level 2. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 9600, while the RS485 ports are variable from 300 to 19.2 kbps. All communications ports may be active simultaneously without adversely affecting the response time of the relay. With the exception of the 735/737, all relays utilize software that runs under the Windows environment. These programs can be used to establish communication with the relays and to provide product information. They can also be used to simulate the operation of the relay for analysis, training, and testing purposes. Actual values, setpoints, status, trending, and waveform capture information may all be viewed via the software. A graphical display of actual values over time may be particularly useful in troubleshooting situations. All units have a drawout construction. When the units are drawn out, the CT secondaries will automatically be connected together by the internal shorting fingers for the sole purpose of preventing dangerous high voltages from open CTs.

I I I I
Digital oscillography capture Digital status HMI Event record Self diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I I
SRPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) Second RS485 or RS422 port 2x20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I
Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout construction for serviceability DNP 3.0 Level 2 support IRIG-B time synchronization
GE Power Management
57
Modular protection systems for low and medium voltage industrial installations.
MID
Application
I I I I I I I
Modular Industrial Protection System

5
Low and medium voltage industrial installations
Protection Modules
DESCRIPTION
The MID system provides modular protection units that can be configured according to the users needs. It can be used in all low and medium voltage industrial installations. Typical applications are interconnection systems for customer-power company connection, minicenters, cogeneration, and equipment including generators, motors, transformers, and capacitor banks. The modules are independent 2" or 4" units with their own power supply and setting and signalling elements. These drawout relays may be mounted in standard 19" racks, half racks, or supplied in individual cases. Any excess rack space is covered with empty modules to leave space for future expansion. The composition of modules in each system is user configurable. A description of each component relay is provided in instruction books. The protective functions of the system depends on the component relays selected. There are seven available types of protection relays. MFF provides underfrequency and over frequency functions. MGC provides small generator protection with unbalanced current, thermal protection, and protection against phase and ground faults. MIC provides non-directional phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground overcurrent protection. Both instantaneous and inverse or definite time overcurrent protection are provided. The MIC performs primary circuit protection on distribution networks at any voltage level and back-up/auxiliary protection for transformers, generators and motors. MLJ provides a synchronism check for bus and line voltage. MMC provides motor protection with unbalanced current, thermal protection, protection against phase and ground faults, locked rotor, undercurrent unit, and successive starts. TCW is a directional power relay. TOV provides undervoltage and overvoltage functions. This modular system provides a high level of quality and reliability as well as easy installation.
MFF frequency relay MGC generator relay MIC & MIF overcurrent relay MLJ synchronism check relay MMC motor relay TCW power reversal relay
User Interfaces
I I I
Front panel programming LED indicators 2 or 3 digit displays for most modules
Features
I I I I I
Modular system Independent 2" or 4" modules Modules have their own power supply and signalling elements Mounting in standard 19" rack or half rack Available in individual cases
DIMENSIONS
CUTOUT
58
GE Power Management
Integrated protection and control IEDs for electrical substations.
DDS
Applications
I I I I
MOV
Digital Distribution System Family

DBF
5
SMOR-B
DMS
DTP-B
Multifunction Protection and Control Devices for feeders, transformers, busbars Substation Automation Distributed RTUs for Control Automation Management of power distribution equipment
DRS
Protection and Control

DTR I I I I I DFF I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The DDS family of devices provide economical protection, control, metering and monitoring functionality to electrical utilities and industrial customers. The DDS family substitute just by one box a complete set of discrete devices like electromechanical relays, meters, annunciator panels, pushbuttons, transducer, auxiliary relays, mimic drawings etc. All the members of the family share a common look and feel. The local HMI is composed of an LCD display, twenty-button keypad, configurable LEDs and in the case of the DMS a configurable graphic display. This common look reduces considerably the costs incurred in training the maintenance personnel. The DDS devices provide remote communication capabilities. Besides the front RS232 local communication port it includes two other ports at the back of the relay. Those two other ports can be selected between a choice of different physical communication standards: RS232, RS485, Plastic fiber optics or glass fiber optics. The familiy supports two different communication protocols: GE M-Link and ModBus RTU. Both protocols are opened and widely documented. M-Link is faster (115200 bps) and preferably used in applications where only GE devices are used. ModBus RTU is slower (19200 bps) and widely used in combination with third-party ModBus devices. The units are housed in two different types of 19" racks with a modular construction (4 U and 2 U high). Alternatevely there is a half 19" 4U high SMOR box.
DMS: Bay Protection and Control Unit SMOR-B: Multifunction feeder protection DTP-B: Digital Transformer Protection DBF: Digital Breaker Failure Protection MOV: Digital Voltage and Synch Check Protection DRS: Digital Reclosing System DTR: Digital Tap Changer DFF: Digital Frequency Protection I Alarm management Remote device status and operations
Metering and Monitoring

I I I I I
System metering Oscillography recording Reports and trends Remote device status and operations Substation RTU
User Interface
I I I
LCD Display and keypad for local communications M-Link and ModBus protocols for PC communications User defined graphical information
Features
I I I
Distributed protection and control per bay, through graphic display IRIG-B time synchronization Common GE_NESIS software platform
GE Power Management
59
DDS Digital Distribution System Family

DESCRIPTION
Each type of unit may contain a wide range of protection and/or control modules, as well as input and output cards, an optional redundant power supply (DMS units only), a magnetic module, independent CPU cards for protection, control and communications and a HMI with includes a keypad, a two line LCD and a graphical LCD control display (DMS models). GE_LOCAL is used for online connection with the device. It allows to view the status of the unit, view and change the settings, retrieve the events and the oscillography and produce commands (opening and closing of the breaker, blocking and unclosing the recloser etc.). GE_POWER is the on-line software for HMI and level 1-3 communication that allows real time communication and system operation. It allows to view the substation on-line diagrams, including status and measures, as well as the individual bays. It provides access to the settings and operations, and integrates data from the different bays in a common substation database.
All the elements of the DDS family can be combined among themselves to create a GE_Nesis-DDS integrated protection and control system. This scheme will provide a complete substation HMI plus an open link to the dispatch center in several SCADA protocols (IEC 870-5/101, DNP 3.0, Indactic 20-33, Wisp + etc). The GE_NESIS-DDS architecture is simple and highly efficient. The complete system is divided in three levels, connected via communications. Level 1 includes protection, or protection and control units at bay level. Level 2 includes the concentrator (one or several PCs), controller at substation level, and level 3 is the dispatch or control center of the Utility Company or industrial plant.
GE_INTRO is normally used offline, it allows the user to configure the I/O logic by using and, or and not gates. In the DMS module it also permit to create custom screens in the graphic display and program operation interlockings. For all of them the LEDs are configured with this tool.
GE_CONF is the off-line software package that allows user configuration of HMI screens, databases and Level 2 functionality, including users management, access levels and passwords.
GE_NESIS (General Electric NEtwork Substation Integration Software)

There is one unique suite of software programs for remote comunication. It is composed of different applications: GE Local, GE Intro and GE Osc for device configuration and communication, and GE_POWER, GE_CONF and GE_FILES for system management at substation or plant level. Finally the GE Osc is the oscillography tool. It allows visualization of the waveform (both in sine form or as phasors) and post-fault studies.
GE_FILES is a system recording configuration and analysis tool that allows to create custom-made event, log, alarm and metering reports.
At a substation or plant level, a computer running Windows NT, uses GE_CONF, GE_POWER, and GE_FILES, which offer an easy way to monitor and control the complete substation, as well as the individual bays.
60
Product Families
GENERATOR PROTECTION
489
Protection for small and medium generators.
The 489 Generator Management Relay provides economical protection, metering, and monitoring functions. It can be used as primary or backup protection on synchronous or induction generators of 25, 50, or 60 Hz. It may be applied in primary, backup and co-generator applications.
DGP
Comprehensive protection and monitoring for generation applications.
The DGP is a digital system which provides a wide range of protection, monitoring, control and recording functions for AC generators. It can be used on generators driven by steam, gas and hydraulic turbine. Any size of generator can be protected with the DGP.
MGC
Three phase protection for small generators.
The MGC1000 are microprocessor based, digital type, generator protection relays which provide thermal protection for three phase generators, phase fault, ground fault, and unbalanced current protection.
SECTION 6: GENERATOR PROTECTION SELECTOR GUIDE....................62 489.............................................63 DGP ...........................................71 MGC ..........................................79
61
Generator Selector Guide

KVA
MGC 489 DGP
MVA
DEVICE 87G 40 32 51V 59GN/27TN/64G 50/51GN 24 59 27 21 50 67 81 O/U 60FL 50/27 50BF 46 I I I 51 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 2 ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0 2 0 GE modem, ModBus I I I I 5-90 1 40 64 cycles 1 22 I I I 40 9 I I 4/4 38/49 12 39 47 12 I I I I I I I 30-79 Hz 3 120 cycles 4 18 I I 100 6 I I I I I I I I I I I 51G MGC 1 489 1 I 40-1, 40-2 I I I 50/51GN I I I I I I 2 STEP I I I I 6 I I 16 4 STEP/2 STEP I I DGP fast/5 I 40-1, 40-2 I I I 51GN I I I
FEATURES Speed/number of processors Stator differential Loss of excitation Anti-motoring (reverse power) Time overcurrent -voltage restrained 100% stator ground Ground overcurrent Overexcitation Overvoltage PROTECTION METERING COMM. OTHER FEATURES Undervoltage Distance High-set phase overcurrent Ground directional Over/underfrequency Voltage transformer fuse failure Accidental energization Breaker failure Negative sequence current Output relays Thermal image protection Positive sequence Time overcurrent Sequential trip logic Currents and voltages Angles (I and V) Negative sequence current (% I2) 3rd harmonic voltage Watts (3 phase) vars (3 phase) Frequency Demand (amps, watts, kvar, kva) Thermal image Positive sequence current Negative sequence current RS232 port RS485 port Protocol Printer port Redundant power supply IRIG-B time synchronism Test plugs Dedicated test output relays (pickup/trip) Adaptive sampling (system frequency) Fault reports (number stored) Waveform capture Trip coil supervision Targets Drawout design PC program for setup and monitoring Sequence of events Digital inputs Flash memory (for upgrading firmware in the field) Statistical data logging Analog inputs/outputs RTDs (stator/bearing thermal) Overspeed (digital input) Bearing vibration (4-20 mA analog inputs) Voltage phase reversal
62
Generator Protection
Economical protection, metering, and monitoring functions for generators.
489
Applications
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Synchronous or induction generators Primary, backup, and co-generator

Phase differential 100% stator ground Ground directional overcurrent Anti-motoring (reverse power) Loss of field Negative sequence overcurrent High-set overcurrent Voltage restrained phase overcurrent Overexcitation, V/Hz Undervoltage and overvoltage Voltage phase reversal Underfrequency and overfrequency Distance element Stator overtemperature Bearing overtemperature, vibration Inadvertent generator energization Breaker failure detection Overspeed VT fuse failure detection Trip coil supervision 4 analog outputs, 4 analog inputs 7 digital inputs, 12 RTD inputs
DESCRIPTION
The 489 Generator Management Relay provides economical protection, metering, and monitoring functions. It can be used as primary or backup protection on synchronous or induction generators of 25, 50, or 60 Hz. It may be applied in primary, backup and co-generator applications. The 489 offers comprehensive generator protection features. These features include phase differential, 100% stator ground, ground directional overcurrent, negative sequence overcurrent, high-set overcurrent, voltage restrained phase overcurrents, over and undervoltage, over and underfrequency, distance element and reverse power. To accommodate synchronous generators, the protection features include overexcitation, loss of field, and inadvertent generator energization. Monitoring functions include RMS current, negative sequence current, voltage, three phase power and temperature via 12 RTD inputs. VT fuse and breaker operation are monitored and failures reported. Four analog inputs may be used for monitoing vibration or control transducers. The four analog output channels can be configured to reflect any measured parameter. They may be used to eliminate costly transducers. Digital inputs may be used to route signals through the 489 for protection, control, or diagnostic functions. The user interface includes a 40 character display and a keypad. Twenty two LED indicators on the front panel indicate status of the 489, generator, and the output relays. A front panel RS232 port allows easy local computer access. Two rear panel RS485 ports provide remote access. Data communication rates range from 300 to 19,200 bps. All data can be transmitted simultaneously through the three communications ports to a DCS, SCADA, PLC, or PC. Windows based software is provided.

I I I I
Metering: A V W var VA Wh varh PF Hz Demand values: A W var VA Event record, last 40 events Waveform capture: 64 cycles
User Interfaces
I I I I
40 character display, full keypad One RS232 port, two RS485 ports ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0 IRIG-B input
GE Power Management
63

PROTECTION
Machine Fault Protection
Stator Ground Protection

In addition to a ground overcurrent element (51GN), the 489 has a VT input to monitor the machine neutral voltage. The 489 can detect ground directional (67) by comparing the angle between neutral voltage and ground current to determine whether a ground fault is within the generator. 100% stator ground fault protection is provided through an overvoltage element (59GN) that operates on fundamental neutral voltage only and an adaptive element (27TN) that operates on third harmonic voltage ratio at the generator terminals and the generator neutral.
Bearing Protection
Any of the 12 RTD inputs may be configured to monitor and protect against bearing overtemperature conditions (38). A voting feature allows two RTDs to vote for high reliability. The four programmable analog inputs may be configured to monitor bearing vibration transducers. Alarm or trip functions may be configured for vibration protection (39). On smaller machines, this type of simple vibration protection is very cost effective.
The dual slope percentage differential element (87G) is the primary protection against machine faults.
Dual slope percentage differential
1 0.9
I OPERATE (multiples of CT)
0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
OPERATE REGION
Slope 2 = 20%
Slope 1 = 10%
Minimum Pickup = 0.10 x CT
Excitation System
Protection elements associated with the operation of the excitation system include overexcitation (24, V/Hz) undervoltage (27), and overvoltage (59). Definite time or inverse time curves may used to activate alarm or trip functions. Loss of field protection may be accommodated using loss of excitation (40) and reactive power (40Q).
I RESTRAINT (multiples of CT)
808790A2.cdr
Stator Thermal Protection

In addition to the differential element, the instantaneous overcurrent element (50) that is only active when the generator is offline protects the machine against faults during startup. Since there is no need to differentiate between system and machine faults when the generator is offline, this element may have a setting which is significantly more sensitive than the differential protection. Monitoring of stator RTDs provides thermal protection for the stator (49) during running overload conditions. A voting feature allows two RTDs to vote for high reliability. The 489 thermal model incorporates an overload curve that may be biased by the current unbalance and/or the hottest stator RTD. Machine cooling is simulated using exponential decay of the thermal capacity used register. The thermal overload curve may also be used to provide start-up protection for an induction generator.
ronou s tion
489 Application
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

489
52
Trip Coil Supervision 27 47 59 810 81U 40 24 21 32 40Q 50/27 51V 60FL Output relays
Synch
12 21 24 27 50/27 32 38 39 40 40Q 46 47 49 50 50BF 50 50/51GN 51V 59 59GN/27TN 60FL 67 76 81 86 87G
Overspeed Distance Volts/Hz Undervoltage Inadvertent generator energization Reverse power/low forward power Bearing overtemperature (RTD) Bearing vibration (analog inputs) Loss of excitation (impedence) Loss of field (reactive power) Negative sequence overcurrent (I22t) Voltage phase reversal Stator thermal (RTD/thermal model) High-set phase overcurrent Breaker failure detection Offline overcurrent Ground overcurrent Voltage restrained phase overcurrent Overvoltage 100% stator ground VT fuse failure Ground directional Overexcitation (analog input) Overfrequency/underfrequency Electrical lockout Percentage differential Sequential tripping logic Trip coil supervision
Induc
41
GENERATOR
38 12 49
39 76
46
49 50BF 50
86
Output relays
87G
RS232 RS485 RS485
+ + 4 4
67 50/51GN 59GN
27TN
Analog outputs Analog inputs
808783E6.cdr
64
Rotor Thermal Protection

Rotor heating in generators due to negative sequence current is a well defined concept. Generators have very specific capability limits where unbalanced current is concerned. A generator should have a rating for both continuous and also short time operation when negative sequence current components are present as defined by the equation: K=I2t. The 489 has a definite time alarm and inverse time overcurrent curve trip to protect the generator rotor from overheating due to the presence of negative sequence currents. A variable reset rate provides a thermal memory of previous unbalance conditions.
Negative sequence inverse time overcurrent
1000 K=1.0 4.0 15 40 100
Sequential Tripping Logic

During routine shutdown, and for some of the less critical trips, it may be desirable to use the sequential trip function to prevent overspeed. A digital input may be used to monitor the turbine valve status. When the valve is closed, either a low forward power or reverse power trip feature will trip the breaker once the generator output has fallen below the level programmed.
ity any time that the breaker status input indicates that the breaker is closed. If that continuity is broken, a trip coil monitor alarm will occur. VT fuse failure (60FL) is detected when there are significant levels of negative sequence voltage without the correspondingly significant levels of negative sequence current. An alarm will occur and features that use voltage measurements will be disabled.
Abnormal Frequency (81)

Alarm functions for both overfrequency and underfrequency conditions are provided. Operator action may be taken to correct the situation. Tripping functions are also provided if conditions persist or become more severe.
MONITORING AND METERING

Metering
The 489 is provided with complete monitoring functions. These include: I current I voltage I power: kW kvar kVA I energy use: MWh Mvarh I power factor I frequency I 4 analog inputs Demand and peak demand functions include: I current I power: kW kvar kVA All measured quantities can be viewed on the front panel display, through the communications ports, or through one of the 4 analog outputs.
Operational Failures
On a total or partial loss of the prime mover if the power generated is less than the no-load losses of the machine real power will start flowing into the generator. The reverse power function (32) may be used to trip the generator when it begins motoring. Inadvertent energization protection (50/27) may help to limit the damage that can occur if the generator is accidentally placed online while it is shutdown.
Time (Seconds)
100
10
0.1 0.01
0.1
10
100
808791A2.cdr
Negative Sequence Current / Rated Current
System Backup Protection

Three voltage restrained overcurrent elements (51V) provide backup protection for system faults. The pickup level for the inverse time curves are adjusted in a fixed relationship with the measured phase-phase voltage.
Voltage restraint characteristic
1 0.9
Overspeed (12)
The speed is monitored by mounting an inductive proximity probe, or Hall effect sensor, near the shaft key or keyway. The 489 provides 24 VDC power for the sensor. The output of the sensor sends a pulse to an assignable digital input which has been configured as a tachometer.
The 489 can monitor speed via an assignable input
ROTATING SHAFT
Event Record
The 489 captures and stores the last 40 events, recording the time, date, and cause. All tripping functions are classed as events. Alarm functions may be selectively chosen as events. A snapshot of measured parameters immediately prior to the event are stored with each event. All of the 489 event data may be read through any of the three communications ports or viewed on the front panel display. When troubleshooting an event the event record can be a valuable tool. The sequence of events can be an indicator of what really happened while the snapshot of measured data allows for complete diagnosis of the problem.
Curve Pickup Multiplier
0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
SENSOR
TO 489 DIGITAL INPUT

0.1 0.2 0.3
Phase-Phase Voltage / Rated Phase-Phase Voltage
808792A2.cdr
High-set phase overcurrent (50) also provides backup protection to other elements. If any individual phase current exceeds the pickup level a trip will occur. The element will operate in both online and offline conditions. Distance protection (21) implements two zone of mho phase to phase protection (total of six elements), which is intended as backup for primary line protection. The elements, make use of the neutral end currents and the generator terminal voltage to provide some protection for internal and unit transformer faults.
808755E2.dwg
Monitoring Protection
If breaker failure (50BF) is enabled when the 489 initiates a trip it will monitor the breaker status input and the generator current. If the breaker status contacts do not change state or generator current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, a breaker failure alarm will occur. The trip coil supervision circuitry will monitor the trip coil circuit for continu-
Waveform Capture
The 489 samples the current and voltage inputs at a rate of 12 times a cycle. These samples are stored in a configurable buffer up to 64 cycles long. The trigger position setpoint allows the user to define how much of the buffer cycles are pre and post trigger.
65

The trace memory may be extracted from the relay through the communications ports. It may be displayed using the 489PC software provided with the relay. This allows the user to examine magnitudes and phase relationships of the measured signals when troubleshooting.
Waveform capture data can be displayed using the 489PC program
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The 489 has a 40 character vacuum florescent display on the front panel. It has a keypad that includes full numeric keys and control keys. SCADA system which would enable continuous on-line monitoring by the operation personnel. The second RS485 port could be wired to a modem, which would be used for off-site interrogation of the 489 by engineering personnel.
LED Indicators
The 489 has 22 LED indicators located on the front panel. Eight of these indicate 489 status, eight indicate generator status, and six indicate the output relay status.
489PC Software
The 489PC software is provided with each 489. It runs under Windows on a personal computer. All the information that may be accessed through the front panel keypad and display may also be accessed with a PC. This includes actual values, setpoints, status, event records, and waveform capture information. The 489PC software may be used to display actual values over time in a graphical format. This may be particularly useful in troubleshooting situations.
489 setpoint files may be saved to a disk, printed, and downloaded to the 489
METER SETTINGS
489 Windows Application-489 F ile S etpoint A ctual C ommunication H elp Actual-ChartRecorder
IRIG-B Input
An IRIB-B input is provided for time synchronization using a satellite time signal.
Communications
The 489 is equipped with three communications ports: a front panel RS232 port and two rear panel RS485 ports. These ports support ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocol. The RS232 port data transmission rate is fixed at 9600 bps, while the two RS485 ports are variable from 30019,200 bps. Data may be accessed from all three ports simultaneously and independently without adversely affecting response time. In addition any measured parameter is also available through the four isolated analog outputs.
Data is available from the 489 via three communications ports and 4 analog inputs
SCADA/DCS
Self Test
The 489 does a complete self-test at power up and in the background during operation. A self-test failure triggers an alarm.
OK
RUN
Cancel
PRINT
save on disk
send to 489
SR489 STATUS
SR489 IN SERVICE SETPOINT ACCESS
GENERATOR STATUS
BREAKER OPEN BREAKER CLOSED HOT STATOR NEG. SEQUENCE GROUND LOSS OF FIELD VT FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE
OUTPUT RELAYS
R1 TRIP R2 AUXILIARY
COMPUTER RS232
COMPUTERR S485 AUXILIARY RS485 ALT. SETPOINTS
RESET POSSIBLE
R3 AUXILIARY
R4 AUXILIARY R5 ALARM R6 SERVICE
TrendingChart
RESET
Seconds(ElapsedTime)
ForHelp,pressF1
MESSAGE
NEXT
PROGRAM PORT
SETPOINT MESSAGE
7 4 1
VALUE
ACTUAL
5 2 0
6 3
HELP
ESCAPE
ENTER
print
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Analog Inputs and Outputs
The 489 has 4 analog inputs and 4 analog outputs. The four analog inputs are monitored by the 489 and can be used for functions such as the protection and monitoring of bearing vibration. The 4 output channels can be configured to any measured parameter.
808765E3.cdr
The intuitive click and point software simplifies setpoint programming and relay interrogation. Setpoint files for each generator may be stored, printed for verification, and downloaded to the 489 for error free setpoint entry. The entire 489 manual is included in the 489PC program in the form of a help file. This allows the user to quickly lookup information while programming the relay. The documentation and illustrations can be printed or pasted into other Windows applications.
489 PC
Digital Inputs
The 489 has 7 assignable digital inputs. These can be used for such functions as tachometer which may be used for overspeed control.
SR489 STATUS
COMPUTER RS485
AUXILIARY RS485
MODEM
GENERATOR STATUS
BREAKER OPEN BREAKER CLOSED HOT STATOR NEG. SEQUENCE GROUND LOSS OF FIELD VT FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE
OUTPUT RELAYS
R1 TRIP R2 AUXILIARY
COMPUTER RS232
COMPUTERR S485 AUXILIARY RS485 ALT. SETPOINTS
RESET POSSIBLE
R3 AUXILIARY
R4 AUXILIARY R5 ALARM R6 SERVICE
RESET
MESSAGE
NEXT
Product Upgrades
FRONT RS232
PROGRAM PORT
SETPOINT MESSAGE
7 4 1
VALUE
ACTUAL
5 2 0
6 3
HELP
ESCAPE
ENTER
RTD inputs
The 489 has 12 RTD inputs. This allows the user to monitor the temperature of both stator and bearings. A voting feature allows two RTDs monitoring the same device to vote for high reliability.
489 PC
4 ANALOG OUTPUTS
The 489 uses flash memory technology to allow product upgrades without unit disassembly. Firmware upgrades may be downloaded to the unit via the RS232 serial ports.
Drawout Mechanism
The 489 consists of a drawout unit and a companion case. The case has a front door with a large window so that the display and LED indicators can be seen with the door closed.
Output Relays
The 489 has 6 output relays: 1 trip, 3 auxiliary, 1 alarm, and 1 self-test relays. LEDs on the front panel show the status of each output.
PLC
808766E3.cdr
A typical communications set up could include a programmable logic controller (PLC) using the 4 analog outputs for control functions. The front panel RS232 port could be used for local interrogation and troubleshooting. One of the 485 ports could be used to connect a DCS or
66

FEATURES
Front View
489 STATUS Indicates when the 489 is in service, if setpoint access is allowed, any communication port activity, if alternate setpoints are in use, if any latched alarm or trip may be reset, and if Next key should be pressed to display diagnostic messages. OPERATOR KEYS Once the 489 is programmed, normal operation requires only two keys. The Reset key is used to reset latched trips or alarms. The Next key is used to scroll through diagnostic messages in the event of an alarm or trip. PROGRAM PORT The front panel RS232 port may be connected to a PC for local interrogation, downloading setpoint files, and upgrading product firmware.
489 STATUS
489 IN SERVICE SETPOINT ACCESS COMPUTER RS232
COMPUTER RS485
GENERATOR STATUS
BREAKER OPEN
OUTPUT RELAYS
R1 TRIP R2 AUXILIARY R3 AUXILIARY R4 AUXILIARY R5 ALARM R6 SERVICE
DISPLAY Forty character vacuum fluorescent display for setpoint programming, monitoring, status, and fault diagnostics. Up to twenty scrolling messages may be defined as the default display.
BREAKER CLOSED HOT STATOR NEG. SEQUENCE

GROUND LOSS OF FIELD VT FAILURE
OUTPUT RELAYS Indicates any operation of the 489 output relays.
AUXILIARY RS485 ALT. SETPOINTS RESET POSSIBLE MESSAGE
RESET
NEXT
BREAKER FAILURE
GENERATOR STATUS Indicates if the generator is online or offline. Also indicates pickups of several protective features.
7 8
PROGRAM PORT
SETPOINT
9
6 3
HELP
MESSAGE
ACTUAL
4 1
VALUE
5 2 0
ESCAPE
ENTER
KEYPAD Numeric keys allow for simple entry of setpoint values. Control keys allow simple navigation through setpoint and actual value message structures. Help key provides context sensitive help messages.
Rear View
RTD INPUTS Twelve RTD inputs are individually field programmable to measure platinum, nickel, or copper type RTDs.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 RTD1 RTD2 RTD SHD B2 + AUX. B3 - RS485 B1 B4 COM RTD7 RTD8 RTD9 RTD10 RTD11 RTD12
ASSIGNABLE INPUTS
RTD3
RTD4
RTD5
RTD6
COM
#1+ #2+ #3+ #4+ ANALOG OUTPUTS
AN +24 #1+#2+#3+#4+-COM SHO Vdc ANALOG INPUTS
RS485 COMMUNICATIONS Two independent RS485 communication ports may be accessed simultaneously using Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocol at baud rates up to 19200 bps. OUTPUT RELAYS Six, trip duty, form C output relays may be assigned to trip, alarm and control functions.
E F G H
LOW VOLTAGE INPUTS, DO NOT HI-POT!
GENERATOR MANAGEMENT RELAYTM
489
+ C1 ACCESS - C2 + C3 BREAKER STATUS - C4

#6 #7
SW com
ANALOG SIGNALS Four isolated 4-20 mA analog outputs may be used to replace costly transducers. They may be field programmed to reflect any measured parameter. Four 0-1 or 4-20 mA analog inputs may be used to monitor any transducer signal. Possible applications include vibration and field current monitoring. DIGITAL INPUTS Access jumper input provides setpoint programming security. Breaker status input tells 489 if the generator is online or offline. Seven assignable digital inputs may be field programmed for a variety of functions including tachometer. TRIP COIL SUPERVISION Monitors the trip circuit for continuity when the generator is online and alarms if that continuity is broken.
LOWER
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
+24 COMP RS485 - COM Vdc +
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27
R1 TRIP NC
R1 TRIP COM PHASE VT COM PHASE B VT
R1 TRIP NO
R2 AUX NO
R2 AUX COM
R2 AUX NC
R3 AUX R3 AUX R4 AUX. R5 ALARM R5 ALARM R6 SERVICE COM COM NC NO NO NC

R3 AUX COM R4 AUX NO R4 AUX. NC R5 ALARM R5 SERVICE NO COM IB OUT CT IB OUT CT IC OUT CT IC OUT CT
R6 SERVICE NC
NUETRAL VT COM
TRIP COIL SUPERVISION+
IRIG-B+
NUETRAL TRIP COIL SUPERVISIONVT
IRIG-B-
PHASE A Ia NEUTRAL Ib NEUTRAL Ic NEUTRAL IA OUT VT CT CT CT CT PHASE C Ia NEUTRAL Ib NEUTRAL Ic NEUTRAL IA OUT CT CT CT CT VT
1A GROUND GROUND (HGF)CT CT
FILTER SAFETY GROUND GROUND
1A GROUND GROUND CONTROL CONTROL (HGF)CT POWER - POWER + CT
10 11 12
VT INPUTS Four VT inputs provide wye or open delta system voltage sensing as well as neutral voltage sensing.
LOWER
E
UPPER
E
UPPER
F
UPPER
F
UPPER
GROUND Separate safety and filter ground. All inputs meet C37.90 EMI, SWC, RFI interference immunity. AC/DC CONTROL POWER Universal power supply 90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC CT INPUTS Seven CT inputs provide 3 phase output, 3 phase neutral and ground current sensing.
808784E8.cdr
G
LOWER
G
LOWER
67
TYPICAL WIRING
CAUTION
EXCITER AND AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR DC Amps mA FIELD
OPTIONAL TRANSDUCER TO 4-20 mA INPUT FOR OVEREXCITATION

PHASE a
WYE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

PHASE A
OPEN DELTA VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION

DO NOT INJECT OVER RATED CURRENT ON G10 & H10. (See pg. 2 - 10)
PHASE b
C(B) A
PHASE B
PHASE c
B(C)
PHASE C
GENERATOR
LOAD
LOAD
6
E10 F10 G9 H9 G10 H10 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5
G6 H6 G7 H7 G8 H8 G2 H1 H2 G1
G2 H1 H2 G1
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
1A / 5A
COM
Vcom
Vcom
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
HGF
1A
Va
Vc
Va
Vc
Vb
Vb
NEUTRAL
GROUND
INPUTS
PHASE a PHASE b PHASE c
NEUTRAL END CT's
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C OUTPUT CT's
B1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
INDUCTIVE/HALL EFFECT SENSOR FOR TACHOMETER CAUTION + 24
RTD SHIELD HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT
RTD #1
CONTROL POWER SAFETY GROUND
H12 H11 G12 G11
489 POWER SUPPLY CAUTION
RTD #2 RTD #3
GE Power Management
FILTER GROUND
489
RTD #4 RTD #5 IRIG-B RTD #6 RTD #7 TRIP COIL SUPERVISION

E12 F12 E11 F11
CHECK VOLTAGE RATING OF THE UNIT BEFORE APPLYING POWER. (SEE Pgs.2-8) CONTROL POWER
GROUND BUS
UNIT BREAKER TRIP CONTROL RTD #8 RTD #9 R2 AUXILIARY RTD #10 RTD #11 R3 AUXILIARY R1 TRIP
RTD #12
R4 AUXILIARY
ACCESS BREAKER STATUS COMPUTER RS485 COM AUXILIARY RS485 ANALOG I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS
SHIELD
RS232
DO NOT INJECT VOLTAGES TO DIGITAL INPUTS (DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY) KEYSWITCH FOR SETPOINT ACCESS
DCS
UNIT BREAKER STATUS (52a)
RS232 INTERFACE
ANALOG INPUTS 24 Vdc 1 2 3 4 COM
COM COM 1
D25 D26 D27

120 1nF 120 1nF
B2
B3
B4 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27
25 PIN CONNECTOR
120 1nF
PERSONAL COMPUTER RS232 489PC
SELF POWERED BEARING VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS 120 1nF
RS485 PORT
COMMON
COMMON WATTS VARS STATOR RTDs
#1+
4 20mA ANALOG INPUT
#2+ #3+ #4+
PLC or COMPUTER
808752EG.dwg
BEARING RTDs
68
9 WIRE RS232
D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 C1 C2 C3 C4
ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT ASSIGNABLE INPUT COMMON SWITCH + 24Vdc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R5 ALARM
R6 SERVICE DIGITAL INPUTS
52a UNIT SHUTDOWN CIRCUIT
UNIT TRIP COIL
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER

489 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CT Ratio: 10000:1 for 1 A secondary, 5:0.0025 for HGF CT Secondary: 1 A, 2.5 mA for HGF Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at rated load for 1 A Less than 0.02 VA at rated load for HGF Conversion Range: 0.02 - 20 x CT for 1 A 0.0 - 100 A primary for HGF Accuracy: at < 2 x CT: 0.5% of 2 x CT for 1 A at 2 x CT: 1% of 20 x CT for 1 A HGF: at < 10 A: 0.1 A at 10 - 100 A: 1.0 A 150 mA continuous CT Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 times rated current for 1 A 2 sec @ 40 times rated current for 1 A continuous @ 3 times rated current for 1 A MONITORING TRIP COIL SUPERVISION Applicable Voltage: 20-300 VDC/VAC Trickle Current: 2-5 mA METERING PHASE & DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 10 - 50000 A CT Secondary: 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at rated load Conversion Range: 0.02 - 20 x CT Accuracy: at < 2 x CT: 0.5% of 2 x CT at 2 x CT: 1% of 20 x CT CT Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 times rated current 2 sec @ 40 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current INPUTS PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTS VT Ratio: 1.00240.00:1 in steps of 0.01 VT Secondary: 200 VAC (full scale) Conversion Range: 0.02 - 1.00 x full scale Accuracy: 0.5% of full scale Max. Continuous: 280 VAC NEUTRAL VOLTAGE INPUT VT Ratio: 1.00240.00:1 in steps of 0.01 VT Secondary: 100 VAC (full scale) Conversion Range: 0.005 - 1.00 x full scale Accuracy: 0.5% of full scale Max. Continuous: 280 VAC DIGITAL INPUTS Inputs: 9 opto-isolated inputs External Switch: dry contact < 800 or open collector NPN transistor from sensor 6 mA sinking from internal 4 K pullup @ 24 VDC with Vce < 4 VDC 489 Sensor Supply: +24VDC @ 20 mA max RTD INPUTS RTDs: 3 wire type 100 Platinum (DIN.43760) 100 Nickel field programmable 120 Nickel 10 Copper RTD Sensing Current: 5 mA Isolation: 36 Vpk (isolated with analog inputs and outputs) Range: -50 to +250C Accuracy: 2 C for Pt and Ni, 5C for Cu Lead Resistance: 25 Max per lead No Sensor: >1000 Short/Low Alarm: < -50C ANALOG CURRENT INPUTS Current Inputs: 0-1 mA, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (setpoint) Input Impedance: 226 10% Conversion Range: 0-21 mA Accuracy: 1% of full scale Type: passive Analog Input Supply: +24 VDC @ 100 mA max POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Options: LO / HI (must be specified when ordering) Range: LO: DC: 20 to 60 VDC AC: 20 to 48 VAC @ 48 to 62 Hz HI: DC: 90 to 300 VDC AC: 70 to 265 VAC @ 48 to 62 Hz Power: 45 VA (max), 25 VA typical Voltage Loss-ride Through Time: 30 ms
PRODUCTION TESTS Thermal Cycling: Operational test at ambient, reducing to -40C and then increasing to 60C Dielectric Strength: 2.0 kV for 1 min from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST TERMINALS Low Voltage (A, B, C, D terminals): 12 AWG max High Voltage (E, F, G, H terminals): #8 ring lug, 10 AWG wire standard ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Operating Temperature: -40C to +60C Ambient Storage Temperature: -40C to +80C. Humidity: Up to 90%, noncondensing. Altitude: Up to 2000 m Pollution Degree: 2 NOTE: It is recommended that the 489 be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors in the power supply.
COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS PORTS RS232 Port: 1, Front Panel, non-isolated RS485 Ports: 2, Isolated together @ 36 Vpk Baud Rates: RS485: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps RS232: 9600 bps Parity: None, Odd, Even Protocol: ModBus RTU / half duplex, DNP 3.0
OUTPUTS ANALOG CURRENT OUTPUT Type: Active Range: 4-20 mA, 0-1 mA (must be specified with order) Accuracy: 1% of full scale 4-20 mA Maximum Load: 1200 0-1 mA Maximum Load: 10 k Isolation: 36 Vpk (isolated with RTDs and analog inputs) 4 Assignable Outputs: phase A, B, C output current, 3 phase average current, negative sequence, generator load, hottest stator RTD, hottest bearing RTD, hottest other RTD, RTD # 1-12, phase AB voltage, phase BC voltage, phase CA voltage, 3 average phase-phase voltage, V/Hz, frequency, 3rd harmonic neutral voltage, Power factor, 3 phase real power (kW), 3 phase apparent power (kVA), 3 phase reactive power (kvar), analog inputs 1-4, current demand, kvar demand, kW demand, kVA demand, thermal capacity used, tachometer OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration: 6 Electro-Mechanical Form C Contact Material: silver alloy Operate Time: 10 ms Max Ratings for 100000 operations
VOLTAGE DC Resistive 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC DC Inductive 30 VDC 125 VDC (L/R = 40 ms) 250 VDC AC Resistive 120 VAC 250 VAC AC Inductive 120 VAC PF=0.4 250 VAC MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 sec 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A 10 A 30 A BREAK 10 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 5A 0.25 A 0.15 A 10 A 10 A 4A 3A MAX LOAD 300 W 62.5 W 75 W 150 W 31.3 W 37.5 W 2770 VA 2770 VA 480 VA 750 VA
TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength:
Per IEC 255-5 and ANSI/IEEE C37.90 2.0 kV for 1 min from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST Insulation Resistance: IEC255-5 500 VDC, from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5 kV/1 MHz) ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5k V/10 ns) Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 impulse/high frequency disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15 W transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle Vibration: Sinusoidal Vibration 8.0 g for 72 hrs PACKAGING Shipping Box: Shipping Weight:
12" W x 11" H x 10" D (30.5cm x 27.9cm x 25.4cm) 17 lbs max (7.7 kg)
CASE Fully drawout (automatic CT shorts) Seal provision Dust tight door Panel or 19" rack mount APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered system. UL: UL approved CSA: CSA approved : Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN 50082-2, Conforms to IEC 947-1, 1010-1 *Specifications subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
8.80" Max (224) 7.52" (191) Panel
REAR VIEW
8.52" (216)
PANEL CUTOUT
Inches (mm)
7.25" (184)
9.00" (229) 9.93" (252)

E F
UPPER
CUT-OUT
E F G H
H
LOWER
Panel
808750E5.DWG
69
GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Generator management shall be provided using a relay with complete protection, metering, and monitoring functions. The relay may be applied on synchronous or induction generators of 25, 50, or 60 Hz. The protection functions shall include: I instantaneous overcurrent when I I I I I I I I I I I I
offline (50) high-set overcurrent (50) distance (21) ground directional (67) instantaneous and definite time overcurrent for ground (50/51GN) stator thermal modeling and RTD (49) negative sequence overcurrent (46) bearing overtemperature (38) phase differential (87G) over and undervoltage (59/27) reverse power for anti-motoring (32) inadvertent generator energization (50/27) overspeed (12)
I voltage restrained phase overcurrent I

(51V) 100% stator ground protection (59GN/27TN) bearing vibration (39) voltage phase reversal (47) VT fuse failure detection (60FL) breaker failure detection (50BF) trip coil supervision sequential tripping logic
I an event record which shall maintain

a record of the last 40 events
I I I I I I Synchronous generator protection shall include: I overexcitation (24) I loss of field (40 & 40Q) I over and under frequency (81) Monitoring and metering functions shall include: I RMS current, negative sequence
current, voltage, three phase power, temperature (via the 12 RTDs), and four analog inputs I four analog output channels which can be configured to any measured parameter
The current and voltage inputs shall be sampled 12 times a cycle. The relay shall store these waveforms into a user definable buffer (up to 64 cycles long) in the event of a trip. The protective relay shall include the following user interfaces: I a 40 character vacuum flourescent I
display, control keys and full numeric keypad located on the front panel LED indicators located on the front panel which shall indicate the status of the protection relay, generator, and output relays an RS232 port located on the front panel with a baud rate of 9600 bps two RS485 ports located on the rear of the unit with baud rates from 300 to 19,200 bps the communications ports shall allow simultaneous independent access using Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocol Windows based PC software which enables setpoint programming, file storage, on-line help, and real time display of status and measured data
I I I
ORDERING
489
489
*
P1 P5
*
Base unit generator management relay Current Transformer Inputs: 1 A CT secondaries Current Transformer Inputs: 5 A CT secondaries Control Power: DC: 20-60 V; AC: 20-48 V @ 48-62 Hz Control Power: DC: 90-300 V; AC: 70-265 V @ 48-62 Hz 0-1 mA Analog Outputs 4-20 mA Analog Outputs
The protective relay shall be provided with drawout construction to facilitate testing, maintenance, and interchange flexibility.
Generator Management Relay is a trademark of GE Power Management
LO HI A1 A20
Accessories
489PC Software: DEMO: 19-1 PANEL: 19-2 PANEL: SCI MODULE: Phase CT: HGF3, HGF5, HGF8: 1 3/8" Collar: 3" Collar: Shipped free with 489 Metal carry case in which 489 unit may be mounted Single cutout for 19" panel Double cutout for 19" panel RS232 to RS485 converter box, designed for harsh industrial environments 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 For sensitive ground detection on high resistance grounded systems For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 1 3/8" For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 3" Dual mounting available with the 19-2 panel
7

See pages 15 - 18.
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
4 1
.
4 1
.
808785E3.cdr
70
Comprehensive protection, monitoring, control, and recording functions for AC generators.
DGP
Digital Generator Protection
Applications
I I
AC generators (steam, gas, hydraulic) Any size of generator

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Stator differential Current unbalance Loss of excitation Anti-motoring Time overcurrent, voltage restraint 100% stator ground fault Ground overcurrent Over excitation Over and undervoltage Over and underfrequency Voltage transformer fuse failure Accidental energization Eight configurable output relays Up to three configurable inputs Strategic modification of internal logic

DESCRIPTION
The DGP is a digital system which provides a wide range of protection, monitoring, control and recording functions for AC generators. It can be used on generators driven by steam, gas and hydraulic turbine. Any size of generator can be protected with the DGP. A high degree of dependability and security is achieved by extensive self diagnostic routines and an optional redundant power supply. The DGP provides the commonly used protective functions in one package, including 100% stator ground faults and accidental energizing logics. It has adaptive sampling frequency for better protection during startup. The DGP has eight configurable output relays, four trip and four alarm relays. It allows strategic modifications of the internal logic to favor either security or dependability. It has extensive metering, including negative sequence current and third harmonic voltages. The DGP can record the last 100 events, the last 3 fault reports, and 120 cycles for oscillography. An integral keypad, 16 character display, and target LEDs allow easy local user interface. Front and rear RS232 serial ports allow remote computer access. An optional serial printer port can also be supplied on the rear. The DGP is a compact, space saving, multi-function protection system. It's modular construction allows for easy maintenance. It can be used with wye-wye or open-delta connected VTs and any phase rotation.
I I I I I I
Extensive self-test diagnostics Trip circuit monitor Metering: A V W vars Hz Events - last 100 Fault reports - last 3 Oscillography - 120 cycles
User Interfaces
I I I I I I
20 button keypad 16 character LED display Over 18 target LEDs Two RS232 serial ports One printer port IRIG-B time synchronization
GE Power Management
71
DGP Digital Generator Protection

PROTECTION AND CONTROL
Current Unbalance
There are several causes of unbalance in the generator including unbalanced loads, unbalanced system faults, and open circuits. The negative-sequence component of the stator current (I2) is directly related to this unbalance and sets up a counter rotating flux field in the machine. This causes local heating in the rotor iron. The capability of machines to withstand this heating is typically expressed in terms of an I22t constant, and this constant is used by the DGP to provide operating time characteristics. A linear reset is used to approximate machine cooling following an intermittent current unbalance condition. The DGP also includes a current unbalance alarm with an adjustable pickup and time delay which is operated by the negative sequence component I2.
The DGP can protect the generator from heating caused by current unbalance
to the sequential trip. If the sequential trip is not enabled the two devices can be used as two step reverse power functions with independent timers.

TO POWER SYSTEM 52G DGP
81 27 59 40
Ground Overcurrent
This inverse overcurrent function can be used to detect stator ground faults in a high or low resistance grounded generator system. Since this function is independent of the phase current inputs it can alternately be connected to a CT in the neutral of the generator step-up transformer.
GSU Transf.
32
64G2 51V 24 VTFF TRIP ALARM 46 40 32

RS232 RS232
Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint

A system must be protected against prolonged generator contribution to a fault on the system. A time-overcurrent function with voltage restraint is part of the DGP system, primarily to provide a part of the system backup protection. This function is controlled by a fault detector and a Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VTFF) condition. A separate algorithm is processed for each phase, with the restraint provided by corresponding phase voltage. The restraint is proportional to the magnitude of the voltage and is independent of phase angle. A linear reset characteristic is incorporated for this function.
GEN.
51V VTFF 87G
To LAPTOP PC
Stator Differential
This function provides high speed protection of the generator during internal phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults. It uses a productrestraint algorithm with dual-slope characteristics. This function can provide phase-to-ground protection provided the neutral of the machine is grounded or another machine operating in parallel is grounded.
64G1 64G2 27TN

51GN
To MODEM
Stator Ground
This function consists of two overlapping zones to detect stator ground faults in a high impedance grounded generator system. Normally a generator stator neutral has a potential close to ground. With the occurrence of a stator ground fault a potential increase will occur on the neutral for all faults except those near the neutral. Zone 1 uses a fundamental frequency neutral overvoltage to cover about 95% of the stator winding, depending on the pickup voltage setting. Zone 2 (64G2) is based on computation of third harmonic voltage at the generator neutral, compared to the total third harmonic voltage generated. This function is designed to cover 15% of the neutral end of the stator windings, and is controlled by fundamental and third harmonic voltage thresholds. Wye-wye connected VTs on the generator terminals are required for proper operation of 64G2. 3rd harmonic neutral undervoltage function (27TN) can be used as the zone 2 if delta connected VTs are used. Together the two zones cover 100% of the stator windings. DEVICE PROTECTION
87G 46 40 32 51V 64G 51GN 27TN 24 59 27 81 50/27 VTFF
704750A8.CDR
Anti-motoring
If a total or partial loss of prime mover results in the power generated being less than no-load losses of the machine, real power will start flowing into the generator. Actual motoring power can be as low as 0.5% of generator rating for steam turbines to 100% for gas and hydraulic turbines. The DGP includes a one or two step anti-motoring reverse power function with individual time delay adjustments. One of the reverse power steps can be used for sequential tripping of the generator, in which the turbine is tripped first. This step is enabled when closing of turbine inlet valves is indicated by digital input. The trip sequence is then continued when its delay time elapses. The second step is primarily intended to provide backup
Generator differential Current unbalance Loss of excitation Anti-motoring TOC with voltage restraint 100% stator ground Stator ground overcurrent 3rd harmonic neutral undervoltage Overexcitation Overvoltage Undervoltage Over and underfrequency Accidental energization Voltage transformer fuse failure
72

Alternately, zone 1 can be used as a generator-bus ground detector in a high impedance grounded or ungrounded system.
The DGP uses two overlapping zones to detect stator ground faults
Terminal end
The over-excitation protection includes trip and alarm functions. The trip function consists of an inverse function and an instantaneous function with time delay characteristics. Both trip and alarm functions are computed for each of the three phase voltages. The trip function incorporates a user configurable linear reset characteristic to mimic machine cooling.
Configurable Inputs/Outputs
The DGP includes two general purpose contact converter inputs. These inputs allow easy connection of external trip or alarm contacts to take advantage of the sequence of events log and configurable outputs of the DGP. An optional configuration is also available for an additional input to disable all protections by the input. The DGP offers a total of eight configurable output relays, four trip and four alarm relays. These outputs allow the user to select any desired combination of the functions. Control functions of the DGP can selectively operate any of the output relays either locally or remotely. This requires a password to minimize unauthorized action. The remote control can also be disabled by a hardwire jumper.
The control functions of the DGP can operate output relays locally or remotely
Over and Undervoltage

Zone 1 (64G1)
95%
Zone 2 (64G2)
15%
704757A3.CDR
Neutral end
Loss of Excitation
This feature is used to detect the loss of excitation on synchronous machines. When a synchronous generator loses excitation it will tend to act as an induction generator. It will then run above normal speed, operate at reduced power, and receive its excitation (vars) from the system. The impedance detected by a relay connected to a generator will depend on the machine characteristics, the load flow prior to the loss of excitation, and the type of excitation failure. The loss of excitation function includes two mho characteristics, each with adjustable reach, offset, and time delay. The DGP will block this function if it detects a negative sequence voltage, which would indicate a voltage transformer fuse failure (VTFF), or an external VTFF signal. The first zone mho function can be set to detect severe cases of excitation failure with a short time delay. The second zone mho function can be set to detect all the excitation failure cases with a longer time delay setting. This permits system security during stable power system swing conditions.
The undervoltage function consists of a positive sequence undervoltage with a user selectable inverse or definite time characteristic. The overvoltage function consists of a positive sequence overvoltage with an inverse characteristic. A linear reset characteristic is incorporated for both functions. The overvoltage function can be considered as a backup to the over-excitation. The undervoltage function inherently provides voltage phase reversal protection.
Over and Underfrequency

This function provides up to four steps of over and under frequency protection, each with an adjustable time delay. The over and under frequency steps are controlled by an adjustable positive sequence voltage level.
Configurable Logic
The DGP allows strategic modification of internal logic to favor either security or dependability. This can be accomplished either by software settings or automatically by a "Generator Off-line" contact input. This feature allows disabling of selected functions when the generator is off-line and modifying of the Accidental Energization logic.
Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VTFF)

The loss of excitation function and the time overcurrent with voltage restraint function may operate for a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. When a fuse failure is detected the DGP will block tripping by these functions.
Accidental Energization
The DGP system uses internal logic to detect accidental energization of the generator. When a generator is energized while at standstill or reduced speed it will behave and accelerate as an induction motor and this can be very damaging to the machine. The machine terminal voltage and current during such an event will be a function of generator, transformer, and system impedance.
Contact Expansion Unit

The DEC 1000 unit is an intelligent contact expansion unit. When this optional accessory is connected to the DGP serial printer port it provides an additional 11 output relays, 5 with contacts in C configuration, and 6 with normally open contacts. Eleven LED indicators are provided to register the operation of all contacts. A reset button is provided to test and reset the indicators. Available for CA model only.
The DEC 1000 expands the number of outputs controlled by the DGP
Over-excitation
To detect the over-excitation condition the DGP uses the quantity Volts/Hertz, which is proportional to magnetic flux in the generator and step-up transformer cores.
73

Self-Tests and Diagnostics
Extensive self-test routines are performed by the DGP during powerup and continue to run in the background while the unit is in service. Any failure detected is categorized as either a critical or non-critical alarm. Appropriate protective functions are automatically disabled during a critical alarm, helping to maintain the high security of the DGP. The DGP also has a RELAY TEST menu item available via the front panel keypad and display. This facilitates installation by allowing testing of individual protective functions and output relays for effective trip testing of the protection system.
The DGP stores the last 100 events
GEN Simulator DGP Events Station ID:MALVERN Generator ID:MODEL GENERATOR 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/29/93 10/28/90 10/28/93 14:40:42.276 14:39:54.971 14:33:35.661 14:33:35.660 14:33:35.639 14:33:34.396 14:33:31.997 14:33:28.423 14:33:26.452 14:33:26.451 14:27:09.878 14:27:04.968 14:26:54.263 14:26:54.262 14:26:50.911 14:26:47.584 14:26:42.604 14:26:42.603 14:25:44.444 14:25:38.202 16:32:31.642 16:32:30.882 94G TRIP CIRCUIT OPEN ALARM OFF 94G TRIP CIRCUIT OPEN ALARM ON 94G2 TRIP SIGNAL RESET 32-1 OFF 32-2 OFF 32-1 ON TURBINE INLET VALVE CLOSED GENERATOR OFF-LINE 94G2 TRIP SIGNAL ON 32-2 ON GENERATOR ON-LINE TURBINE INLET VALVE OPEN 94G3 TRIP SIGNAL RESET 64G1 OFF TURBINE INLET VALVE CLOSED GENERATOR OFF-LINE 94G3 TRIP SIGNAL ON 64G1 ON GENERATOR ON-LINE TURBINE INLET VALVE OPEN REMOTE - SETTINGS CHANGE DONE REMOTE - SETTINGS CHANGE STARTED
704756A1.CDR
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
A twenty button keypad and a 16 character LED display allow the user to easily interrogate the DGP and to change settings. Metering data, trip event information, and settings can be displayed. To minimize unauthorized setting changes or control action two distinct security passwords are required.
A keypad and display are provided for local user interface
Fault Reports
The DGP stores up to the last three fault reports in its memory. A fault report is generated by any protective function trip or by an externally triggered input.
Trip Circuit Monitor

The trip circuit monitor consists of the trip voltage monitor (TVM) and the trip current monitor (TCM) for up to four trip output contacts. The TVM detects any discontinuity in the external trip circuit and produces a non-critical alarm. The TCM confirms energizing of the trip circuit when a trip is issued by the DGP. To protect the output contacts the TCM is also used to seal-in the trip output as long as the trip current is flowing.
Oscillography
The DGP can capture and store 120 cycles of oscillography data which can be divided in to 1, 2, or 3 partitions. Prefault cycles captured can be set up to 20 cycles. In addition to 12 analog waveforms (currents and voltages) the DGP captures internal logic flags and the status of the contact inputs and outputs. The DGP settings at the time of the capture as well as the fault report are also stored as part of the data.
The DGP can store 120 cycles of oscillography
File Graphs Reports Setup eXit F1=Help
LED Indicators
Over eighteen LEDs are provided on the front of the DGP for easy and immediate indication of the fault type and faulted phases. A two color LED (red and green) is also provided to indicate the relay status.
Communication
Two RS232 serial ports are provided on the DGP, one on the front and one on the rear. The port on the front allows easy local user interface via a laptop computer. The rear port can be used to interface with a remote computer via a modem. There are three levels of security password provided for remote communications. For added security hard wire jumpers can disable setting changes and control actions from a computer. For remote link communications, DGP offers choices of **GE-Modem or *ModBus protocol. Each protocol is supplied with a copy of GE-LINK remote communication software. In addition to the GE-LINK, a copy of the DGP-DATA software is also supplied with the relay for oscillography data analysis. It can be used to plot and analyze data files retrieved from the DGP.
* Modbus available with CA model only. Requires an optional RS485 to RS232 converter. ** New Windows version of GE-LINK for Modbus protocol.
Metering
The DGP provides the following metering values: I currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) I voltages (Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc, Vca) I angles of I and V I negative sequence current (%I2) I third harmonic voltages (Ph./Neut.) I watts (3 phase) I vars (3 phase) I frequency I contact inputs (status) The currents, voltages, watts, and vars can be metered as either primary or secondary values and have an accuracy of 3%.
TEST_LOF.OSC: Quit LEFT SAMPLE: 136 VALUE: IAS +004.79 IBS -010.05 ICS +005.50 VA -0035.9 VB +0020.7 VC +0016.4 20.0 AMPS IAS -20.0 AMPS IBS ICS 100.0 VOLTS VA -100.0 VOLTS VB VC RIGHT 231 ELAPSED TIME: 132.7 MS (59.68 HZ) SEC AMPS -000.96 DIFF: +005.75 +008.64 -001.41 +003.31 +002.19 SEC VOLTS +0012.9 -0048.8 +0014.5 +0035.2 +0002.3 +0014.1
704755A1.CDR
HARDWARE
The DGP system is packaged in a 8 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Models are available with and without the test blocks. The drawout construction of the DGP case allows for all of the printed circuit boards, power supplies, and the magnetic modules to be withdrawn from the front of the relay.
Sequence of Events Recording

The last 100 events are time tagged to the nearest millisecond and stored in the DGP's memory. The event list includes protective function operations, self-test alarms, and operator actions. The event data is available via the RS232 ports as well as via the optional printer port. The extensive list of events with accurate time stamping provides the data for fast and effective analysis of trip events to help minimize the down time.
Time Synchronization
An IRIG-B input is available which permits the relay to synchronize its clock to the satellite time clock. This insures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
74

FEATURES
Front View
MAN MACHINE INTERFACE MODULE (MMI) I 16 digit alpha-numeric LED display for fault report, metering values, alarm messages, setting parameters etc. I keypad includes 20 keys for user friendly local interface with the DGP I dual color LED indicates relay status I RS232 port facilitates connection of lap-top PC POWER SUPPLY MODULES are located behind the cover plate. Module PS2 is optional. MODULES System Procesor (SSP), Analog Interface (ANI), Data Acquisition (DAP), & Digital Signal Processor (DSP) modules are plug-in type for ease of maintenance and trouble-shooting.
MMI301
57A
57B
57C
51V-A 51V-B 51V-C 24A 24B 24C
40G1 40G2
DIGITAL INPUT & TARGET MODULE (DIT) LED targets indicate ALL the functions that operated during a trip event.
PS1 PS2 PS2 TPM1 1 2 15 16 17 MGM781
64G1 64G2 81-U 32 59 46 VTFF 81-O
DIT101 DIT101
MMI301 MMI301
SSP301 SSP301
ANI301 ANI301 MGM781
DAP201 DAP201
DSP401 DSP401 TPM2 1 2 15 16 17
MAGNETIC MODULES (MGM) Two identical modules contain CTs, VTs, output relays, etc. and are interchangeable. OPTIONAL TEST BLOCKS facilitate injection of analog input signals and monitoring of DGP outputs for test purpose without disturbing field wiring.
PS1
RATINGS IN 5 AMP VN 100/140 VOLTS FREQ50/60 Hz
RATINGS IN 5 AMP VN 100/140 VOLTS FREQ50/60 Hz
11 12 13 14 27 28
11 12 13 14 27 28
Rear View
RS232 PLUG (PL-1) provides connection to modem for remote communications or an interface to station integration system. OPTIONAL SERIAL PORT (PL-2) Can be used to connect a printer for automatic/manual printout of data or a Contact Expansion Unit DEC1000. OPTIONAL PLUG (PL-3) Available for IRIG-B signal input to synchronize the DGP internal clock to a common reference clock e.g. GPS receiver.
PL-1
PL-2
PL-3
OUTPUT RELAY CONTACTS I 8 configurable relays I 8 predefined relays CONTROL POWER DC control power input
10
11
12
13 14
10
11
12
13 14
AE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BE
DIGITAL INPUTS: I 3 configurable contact inputs I 3 predefined contact inputs
10
11
12
13 14
AF
BF
10
11
12
13 14
10
11
12
13 14
AG
BG
CT INPUTS I 6 phase CT inputs I 1 residual CT input I 1 residual/neutral CT input
AH
BH
VT INPUTS: I 3 phase VT inputs, wye or delta I 1 neutral VT input

704752A8.CDR
75

TYPICAL WIRING
A
C(B)
B(C)
A
B C
AH 12
AH 11
AH AH AH AH AH AH AH AH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BH BH BH BH BH BH BH BH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BH BH BH BH AH AH 9 10 11 12 9 10
GND VOLT
IAR
IBR
ICR
INR
IAS
IBS
ICS
I NS
VA
VB VOLTAGE
VC
CURRENT INPUTS
AG 1 AG 2 BH 14
CONTROL POWER
TRIP A (DRY) 94G TRIP A
GROUND BUS
TRIP B (DRY)
94G1 TRIP B
GE Power Management
DGP
Digital Generator Protection
94G2
TRIP C (DRY)
TRIP C
EXT. VTFF/ DISABLE PROT.
OUTPUTS
BG 8 BG 7 BG 6 BG 5 BG 4 BG 3 BG 2 BG 1 BE 4 BE 3 BE 2 BE 1
TRIP D (DRY)
GENERATOR OFF LINE 94G3
TRIP D
TURBINE INLET VALVE LIMIT SWITCH

74A INPUTS
EXTERNAL TRIP 1
ALARM A
BE 10 BF 10 BE 14 BF 14 BE 9 BF 9 BE 13 BF 13 BE 8 BF 8 BE 12 BF 12 BE 7 BF 7 BE 11 BF 11 AG 14 AF 14 AE 14 AG 13 AF 13 AE 13 AG 12 AF 12 AE 12 AG 11 AF 11 AE 11 AG 10 AF 10 AE 10 AG 6 AF 6 AE 6 AG 5 AF 5 AE 5 AG 9 AF 9 AE 9 AG 8 AF 8 AE 8 AG 7 AF 7 AE 7 BF 5 BE 5 BF 6 BE 6
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+) (-)
EXTERNAL TRIP 2
74B
ALARM B
OSCILLOGRAPH TRIGGER
74C
ALARM C
74D
ALARM D
74FF
VT FUSE FAIL
DB9
(FRONT)
DOR 12
TEST PICKUP
RS-232
(REAR) PL1
DB25
DOR 13
TEST TRIP
RS-232 PRINTER or DEC1000 Contact Expansion Unit PRINTER

(REAR) PL2
DB25
DOR 9
SPARE
74 NC
SELF TEST NON CRITICAL
IRIG-B
(REAR) PL3
74 CR
SELF-TEST CRITICAL
POWER SUPPLY ALARM 1 POWER SUPPLY ALARM 2
704753A7.CDR
76

DGP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION In = 1 A In = 5 A General Differential (87G): Differential current pickup: 0.04 - 0.2 A 0.2 - 1.0 A % Slope factor: 1 - 10 1 - 10 Current Unbalance (46A, 46T): Neg. seq. current pickup: 0.01 - 0.60 A 0.5 - 2.99 A Machine constant (46T): 1 - 45 1 - 45 Alarm time delay (46A): 1 - 9 sec 1 - 9 sec Loss of Field (40): Zone 1 & Zone 2 Center: 12.5 - 300 2.5 - 60 Zone 1 & Zone 2 Radius: 12.5 -300 2.5 - 60 Zone 1 & Zone 2 Timer: 0.01 - 9.99 sec 0.01 - 9.99 sec Anti-Motoring (32-1 & optional 32-2): Reverse power: 0.1 - 20.0 W 0.5 - 99.9 W Time delay: 1 - 120 sec Stator Ground (64G1 & optional 64G2): Neutral OV pickup: 4 - 40 V Time delay (for 64G1): 0.1 - 9.9 sec Time delay (for 64G2): 0.1 - 9.9 sec 3rd Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage (27TN): U/V setpoint: 0.1 - 9.9 V Time delay: 0.5 - 99.9 sec Overexcitation, (24T, 24I, 24A): V/Hz Pickup: 1 - 1.99 PU Time factor (24T-Inverse): 0.1 - 99.99 Time delay (Instantaneous): 0 - 9.9 sec Time delay (24A-alarm): 0 - 9.9 sec Rate of reset: 0 - 999 sec Undervoltage, optional (27): U/V set point: 40 - 120 V Time factor: 0.1 - 99.99 sec Curve select: Inverse/Definite Time Overvoltage (59): O/V set point: 100 - 225 V Time factor: 0.1 - 99.99 sec Over & Underfrequency, up to 4 steps (81): O/F set point (each step): 45 -0 79.9 Hz U/F set point (each step): 40 - 65 Hz Time delay (each step): 0.05 - 99.99 sec Time delay (U/F step 1): 0.1 - 999.9 sec System Backup (51V): Overcurrent pickup: 0.1 - 3.2 A 0.5 - 16 A Time factor: 0.1 - 99.99 sec 0.1 - 99.99 sec *Specifications subject to change without notice. METERING RATINGS Nominal Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Frequency Tracking: 30 - 80 Hz Nominal Voltage (phase-phase): 100 - 210 VAC Rated Current: In = 1 or 5 A Maximum Permissible Current: Continuous 2 x In Three Sec 50 x In One Sec 100 x In Maximum Permissible AC Voltage: Continuous 280 VAC One Min (once per hour) 490 VAC ACCURACY RMS Measurements: 3% Phase Angle Measurements: 1 degree Frequency Measurements: 0.01 Hz Timers: 3% of setting Data Time Tag Resolution: 1 ms POWER SUPPLY DC Control Voltage: 48 VDC 110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC INPUTS BURDENS Current Circuits: OUTPUTS CONTACT DATA Trip Outputs (4 programmable relays, 2 contacts each) Trip Contacts: Continuous Rating = 3 A Make and Carry 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Interrupting = 60 VA inductive, maximum 250 V or 0.5 A Alarm Outputs (4 programmable & 5 predefined relays, 1 contact each) Alarm Contacts: Continuous Rating = 3 A Make and Carry 5 A for 30 sec Interrupting = 60 VA inductive, maximum 250 V or 0.5 A Trip Current Monitor Sensitivity: 150 mA Trip Voltage Monitor: 38 - 300 VDC Digital Inputs: 38 - 300 VDC, 1 - 3 mA
6
38.5 - 60 VDC 88 - 150 VDC 176 - 300 VDC ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: Operation: Humidity: TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage: Impulse Voltage Withstand: Interference Test Withstand: Vibration Test Withstand: 19 W with 1 supply 25 W with 2 supplies 2.5 mA at rated voltage PACKAGING Net Weight: Dimensions: Height: Width: Depth: APPROVALS UL File No. -30C to +70C -20C to +55C 95% without condensation
Voltage Circuits: DC Battery: Power Supply: For Contact Converters:
0.022 , 5 for In = 5 A 0.12 , 30 for In = 1 A @ 60 Hz 0.0507 < 4.738 0.30 VA, 60 Hz 0.40 VA, 50 Hz
2kV 50/60 Hz, one min 2.8k VDC, one min 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 sec, 0.5 J SWC, per ANSI C37.90.1 & IEC 255-5 IEC255-21-1
51 lbs (23 kg) 14" (352 mm) 8 rack units 19" (484 mm) standard 19" rack 14" (356 mm)
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE DATA System Interface: DB25, RS232 port - rear panel DB9, RS232 port - front panel IRIG-B port - rear panel (optional) Printer port - rear panel (optional)
E57838
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 8 REQ'D. 0.28" Dia. (7) PLUG PANEL CUTOUT
13.94" (354) 4.00" (102) CUTOUT 2.94" (75)
13.88" (352)
*3.375" (86) TERMINAL BLOCKS
4.00" (102)
LATCH 19.00" (483) Inches (mm) 0.31" (8) 13.03" (331) * minimum to remove cable when req'd. 1.0" (25) 17.25" (438) 18.38" (467) 1.50" (38)
704751A3.DWG
DEC1000 MOUNTING
CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN FRONT VIEW
19.00" (483) 3.40" (87)
SIDE VIEW
10.35" (263) 1.20" (31)
0.28" Dia. (7) 4 Pl.
18.32" (465) 17.32" (440)
3.52" 3.00" (89) (76) 0.26" (7) INCHES (mm)

704759A1.DWG
77

The primary protection for the AC generator shall be an integrated digital protection system including protection functions, control, monitoring, diagnostic and communication capabilities. A high degree of dependability and security shall be provided by extensive self-diagnostic routines and an optional redundant DC power supply. The protection functions shall operate over the range of at least 31-79 Hz with the same accuracy as at nominal system frequency. Alarm functions shall be provided for: I current unbalance I over-excitation I self-test failure I AC potential failure (VT fuse failure) I DC power supply failure The protection equipment shall have six contact converter inputs including three configurable inputs. Also it shall have eight configurable relays and six assigned alarm relays which shall include: I 4 configurable trip relays with 2 I 4 configurable alarm relays with one I I I I I The protection equipment shall have monitoring and metering functions which include: I the last 100 events, time tagged to I fault report for the last three faults I user configurable oscillography
which captures up to 120 cycles with a waveform sampling rate of at least 12 samples per second I metering of currents, voltages, angles, negative sequence current, within one ms contact each 1 critical self-test alarm 1 non-critical self-test alarm 1 VT fuse failure 1 for loss of each power supply 2 for individual protection function test contacts each 3rd harmonic voltages, watts, vars, frequency, status of contact inputs
The protection equipment shall include the following user interfaces: I individual target LEDs for each I I
protection function, with a common reset bush button on the front panel 20 button keypad to enter settings, access data, and test outputs 16 character LED display used with the keypad for the above functions, and the display of event summary information and scrolled present AC values. front and rear RS232 serial data ports for local and remote communication, setting, data retrieval, and optional breaker control local printer data port IRIG-B time synchronization port test and connection plugs for current and voltage injection testing
The protection functions shall include: I high speed generator stator differenI I I I I I I I I I
tial (87G) negative sequence current unbalance (46) loss of excitation (40) with two independent zones anti-motoring (32) with two independent steps 100% stator ground (64G) stator ground overcurrent (51GN) over-excitation (24) overvoltage (59) and undervoltage (27) over and underfrequency (81) with four independent steps each system backup (51V) via time overcurrent with voltage restraint accidental energization of the generator while on turning gear
I I I
The protection equipment shall use drawout or plug-in modular construction for ease of maintenance. It will be suitable for standard 19 inch rack mounting.

See pages 15 - 18. www.GEindustrial.com/pm
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide below. Note that DGP relay with special configuration of printer port is required for the DEC1000 to function properly.
DGP
DGP
* * * * * *
*DGP Selection Guide

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES Stator differential 87G Current unbalance 46 Loss of excitation 40-1, -2 OC voltage restraint 51V Stator ground 64G1 (fundamental OV) Overexcitation 24 (Volts/Hz) Overvoltage 59 Accidental energization logic Sequential trip logic VT fuse failure Oscillography capture IRIG-B input Anti-motoring 32 Stator ground 64G2 (3rd Harm. UV) Neutral OC 51GN Undervoltage 27 Stator GND 27TN Underfrequency 81-U Overfrequency 81-0 Printer output DEC1000 compatible Communication ports A X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 setpoints X 4 setpoints 4 setpoints X 2-RS232
FUNCTION GROUP
B X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 setpoint X X X 2 setpoints 2 setpoints 2-RS232 C X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 setpoints X X X X 4 setpoints 2 setpoints X X 2-RS232
Digital Generator Protection 1 1 A rated 5 5 A rated 0 One power supply, 48 VDC 1 One power supply, 110/125 VDC 2 One power supply, 220/250 VDC 3 Two power supplies, 48 VDC 4 Two power supplies, 110/125 VDC A With test blocks, gray case B Without test blocks, gray case A GE-MODEM communication protocol B ModBus communication protocol (not available with Function Group A/B) A Function Group A See DGP B Function Group B Selection C Function Group C Guide* A Revision level Optional RS485 to RS232 converter available for use with ModBus version
Example: DGP54BBCA - DGP rated 5 amperes, 50/60 Hz, 110/125 VDC redundant power supplies, no built-in test blocks, ModBus protocol, function group C, revision A. The following special DGP systems are also available. Refer to factory for other special requirements. DGP***AAA-0101 - Similar to "AAA" except single-voltage rated Digital Inputs, special logic for function 51V and separate terminals for power supply inputs.
DEC 1000A
DEC
*** * 00C
***
Select the three digit code from the DEC Selection Guide below or fill in desired function assignment for the DEC1000 output relays R1-R11 using Table 1 and submit with the order. Codes 001 to 005 are already assigned and are available as described. Any protection function available in the companion DGP relay can be selected for the DEC output relay assignment
DEC Selection Guide

CODE 001 002 003 004 005 R1 32-2 32-1 87G 46T 46T R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 46-1 87G-C 51GN 81O1 R10 32-1 46-2 24 81U1 R11 40-2 32-1 40-1 59 81O1 81-2 81U1 81U2 40 46-2 64G2 46-1 32-2 64G1 40-1 87G-A 87G-B 64G 32-2 51GN 24 87G 64G 32-2 51V 59 81O1 81U1 46T 51V 59 51V 59 64G1 87G DI3 DI4 32-1
F H
Vps = 24-48 VDC Vps = 110-250 VDC
Indicates any phase A, B, or C Indicates any zone 1 or 2
Code assigned by GE
78
Three phase protection for small generators.
MGC
Digital Generator Protection Relay
Applications
I I
Small generators Component for bigger generator packages

I I I
Unbalance or current reversal Thermal protection Phase and ground faults
Features
DESCRIPTION
The MGC1000 are microprocessor based, digital type, generator protection relays which provide thermal protection for three phase generators, phase fault, ground fault, and unbalanced current protection.
CONSTRUCTION
I accurate and reliable, with low
power consumption
I I I I I
I1, I2, I0 metering and last trip data Part of a modular system Independent 4" modules 1/4 standard 19" rack cases available 3 digit display and reset button
I rack mounting (case is 1/4 of a

rack wide, or 6.33")
I LED indicators for Pick-Up, Trip,

and System Availability
STANDARD FUNCTIONS
Thermal Image Unit
Adjustable between 0.55 and 1.3 times In in steps of 0.05 times In, through microswitches located on the front of the relay. Selectable operating curves as a function of the time constant (t1), adjustable between 1 and 20 min in steps of one min. Negative Sequence compensation (K1), adjustable from 1 to 6. Cold time constant (t2) adjustable from 1 to 6 times the warm time constant.
I three digit display, where the

following information is displayed: F0. present state of the equipment F1. thermal state (%) F2. positive sequence current (xIs) F3. negative sequence current (xIs) F4. zero sequence current (xInGRN) F5. last trip (cause) F6. positive sequence current during the trip F7. negative sequence current during the trip F8. zero sequence current during the trip anti-shock, flame resistant, sealed plastic cover, which allows the trip indicator to be reset from outside the cover elevated anti-seismic waveform response of the output relays high reliability, solid state components microprocessor system
APPLICATIONS
The basic functions performed by the MGC are:
46 - protection against unbalanced current or current reversal (negative sequence) 49 - thermal protection 51 - protection against phase faults 51G - protection against ground faults
The thermal image unit also provides protection against excessive starts, given that once a trip has been produced, the thermal unit does not reset until the temperature of the generator decreases below a given value.
Positive Sequence Unit (I1)

Adjustable between 1 and 8 times the value selected for the thermal image unit. Time delay of 0.05 to 10 sec in 0.05 sec steps.
I I I
Negative Sequence Unit (I2)

The unit can operate either as an instantaneous (adjustable time delay) or according to an inverse time curve; where the operating mode can be selected by the user.
GE Power Management
79
MGC Digital Generator Protection Relay

STANDARD FUNCTIONS
Instantaneous Mode (adjustable time delay): 0.5-8 x Is in steps of 0.1 x Is with time delay of 0.05 to 10 sec in 0.05 sec steps. Inverse Time Mode: Per the family of curves in Fig. 3, truncated for selectable pick up settings between 0.1-1.0 x Is in steps of 0.1 x Is.
TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
C B A
(+) 52
SYSTEM READY
A1 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B1 (-) A2
GE Power Management
A3 A4 A5 MANUAL TRIP
MANUAL CLOSE
Digital Generator Protection Relay
TRIP
MGC
A6 A7 A8 52/a
Adjustable between 0.06 and 0.24 x I n GRN in steps of 0.01 x I n GRN (InGRN = 5, 1 or 0.02 A). Time Delay: 0.05 - 10 sec, adjustable in steps of 0.05 sec.
THERMAL ALARM
Zero Sequence Unit (I0)
A9 A10 A11 A12

720754A5.CDR
52/b 52/CC
52/TC
CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS
MGC relays have two trip contacts, one is normally open, and the other, electrically separate, is normally closed. The relays incorporate two pre alarm temperature contacts, electrically separate and with the same characteristics as the trip contacts. They also include a normally closed contact for equipment alarm.
MGC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MONITORING REPEATABILITY Operating Value: 1% Operating Time: 2% or 0.025 sec, whichever is greater RATINGS Nominal Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz, selectable by the user Nominal Phase Current (In): 1 A or 5 A Nominal Ground Current (InGRN): 5, 1 or 0.02 A (This last setting is recommended when used with toroidal current transformers) METERING ACCURACY Operating Value: 5% Operating Time: 5% or 0.025 sec, whichever is greater Class E Error Index, Per BS142 for Current and Operating Times: Class E-5 INPUTS BURDENS Burden: Less than 1.5 W at all voltages THERMAL CAPACITY OF THE CURRENT CIRCUITS Current Capacity: Continuous: 2 x In 3 Sec: 50 x In 1 Sec: 100 x In Burdens: For Models: In = 5 A: 0.3 VA In = 1 A: 0.3 VA 0.08 VA In = 0.2 A: POWER SUPPLY Auxiliary Voltage: 24-48 VDC/VAC, 48-125 VDC/VAC, 110-240 VDC/110-220 VAC (three models) ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Operating: -10 to +55C Storage: -40 to +70C Relative Humidity: to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS Insulation: Between Each Terminal and the Chassis: 2000 VAC for one min at industrial freq. Between Independent Circuits: 2000 VAC for one min at industrial freq. Between Terminals of Each Output Circuit: 1000 VAC for one min at industrial freq. Interference Test: 2.5 kV longitudinal, 1 kV transversal, class 111, per IEC 255-4 Impulse Test: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J, per IEC 255-4 Electrostatic Discharge: Per IEC 801-2, class III Radio Interference: Per IEC 801-3, class III PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: 8.8 lbs (4 kg) Shipping: 11 lbs (5 kg) APPROVALS Compliant *Specifications subject to change without notice.
Trip Contacts
Closing: 3000 W resistive for 0.2 sec with a max of 30 A and 300 VDC. Opening: 50 W resistive, with a max of 2 A and 300 VDC. Continuous: 5 A.
Alarm Contacts
Closing: 5 A DC for 30 sec, at 250 VDC maximum. Opening: 25 W inductive and 250 VDC max. Continuous: 3 A.
ORDERING
SETTINGS
With the exception of the current tap Is, the rest of the settings can be made through three push buttons located on the front of the relay: ENTER; +; -; the selected setting value can be seen on the display. A feature common to all the units is the possibility for the user to disable them.
MGC10
MGC10
* 0D010 * 00 *
0 1 2 3 F G H C S
Three-pole tripping; 8 rack unit case 5 phase sec, 5 ground sec 5 phase sec, 1 ground sec 5 phase sec, 0.02 ground sec* 1 phase sec, 1 ground sec* 24 - 48 VDC/VAC place auxiliary voltage 48 -125 VDC/VAC place auxiliary voltage 110 - 240 VDC/110-220 VAC place auxiliary voltage Individual drawout housing As part of a MID drawout system

* This model should be used only with toroidal current transformers for the neutral current signal. For more details, refer to the instruction book. Modular Industrial Protection System Example: Microprocessor generator protection relay, with nominal phase current of In = 5 A, ground current InGRN = 1 A, standard type, with thermal alarm contact, and auxiliary voltage of 48-125 V.
80
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
T60
High speed, 3 phase, two winding transformer relay.
The T60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a 3-phase, multiple winding, transformer relay intended for the primary protection and management of small, medium and large power transformers.
745
Two or three winding transformer management.
The 745 is a high speed, multi-processor based, 3-phase, two or three winding, transformer management relay intended for the primary protection and management of small, medium and large power transformers. The 745 combines percent differential, overcurrent, frequency and overexcitation protection elements along with monitoring of individual harmonics, and THD in one economical package.
DTP
High speed, 3 phase differential protection for transformer faults.
The DTP-B is a digital three phase relay which provides high speed differential and instantaneous protection for internal transformer faults. The special characteristics of the DTP-B are necessary to provide current differential protection for imbalances caused by high magnitude external faults. The three phase percentage restraint current differential function is provided with two, three, or four restraint windings. Harmonic restraint is used to prevent the differential function from operating during transformer energization or overexcitation.
DTR
Automatic voltage regulation, analysis, and control functions for transformer applications.
The transformer tap changer controller DTR controls automatically the transformer on load tap changer, so that the power supply voltage is practically constant, independently from the load. In order to achieve this, the DTR is able to increase and decrease the OLTC in the power transformer.
SECTION 7: TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SELECTOR GUIDE....................82 T60 ............................................83 745.............................................87 DTP............................................95 DTR .........................................101
81
Transformer Selector Guide

VA
DTP 745 T60
MVA
DEVICE 87 DTP I 15-50 yes - internal 2nd and 5th (6-12) x tap 2-3 2,3 or 4 windings 2.5 - 50 16 745 I 15-100 & 50-200 yes - internal programmable I 2-3 2 or 3 windings dynamic mismatch correction 64 I I 16 I optional I I optional I 16 programmable I 1 optional 8 EM 4 3 1 1 solid state 7 optional I I I I 5-60 minutes 0.25 I I I I 1 optional I I ModBus T60 I 15-100 & 50-200 yes - internal 2nd and 5th I 1-2 2 to 6 windings D.M.C. 64 I I 16 I
FEATURES Percent current differential Percent restraint range (dual slope SR745) Phase shift compensation Harmonic restraint (harmonics) Unrestrained differential IOC-highset Operating time (cycles) Applicable to transformers CT ratio (5 A) matching tap range Sampling rate (# samples/cycle) Instantaneous overcurrent Time overcurrent TOC curve shapes Underfrequency & rate of change Loss of Life Negative sequence IOC & TOC Overexcitation Restricted Ground Fault Overfrequency Digital inputs Setpoint access keyswitch input Analog inputs Output contacts Trip output contacts Auxiliary outputs Self test output Signalling contacts (type C) High speed output Analog outputs Programmable protection logic Multiple setpoint groups (4) Through currents Ia, Ib, Ic Differential currents Ia, Ib, Ic Demand interval Ia Accuracy (percent full scale) Fundamental RMS currents Running and maximum current demand Ambient temperature RTD Tap position Analog transducer input Harmonic level detectors & THD Fiber optics port RS232 serial port Protocol RS232 fixed 19.2 K RS485 up to 115 Kbps Ethernet 10 Mb ModBus RTU (115 Kbps) ModBus TCP/IP (10 Mbps) MMS/UCA2 Baud rate RS485 and RS422 serial ports PC program supplied Sequence of events (# events stored) Oscillography (# events/duration in cycles) Fault reporting Keypad Display (# lines/type) Testing Mounting Temperature range (operating) Auto configuration of CTs Waveform Capture and Playback Field Upgradeable Option
87/50
PROTECTION
50G, 50N, 50P 51G, 51N, 51P 81U 46/50, 46/51 59/81 87TG 81O 5 fixed
I I 80 program max 24 max 40 max 40 max 40 max 1 40 max
13 EM 4 8 1 5
CONTROL
METERING
I I 30 minutes 5 I
I I GE communication
I 8 groups I I 5-60 minutes 0.25 I I I I 24 max I optional I I I I I I I 300-115,200 I I 1024 1/128 - 31/8 I I 2/VFD I 19" horiz. 4 ru high -10C to 60C I I I
COMM.
300 - 19,200 GE_LOCAL 255 8/16 - 30 I I 2/LCD test plugs (optional) 19"horiz., 4 ru high -20C to 55C
300 - 19,200 I 745PC 128 1/16 I 2/VFD simulation drawout case -40C to 60C I I I
OTHER FEATURES
82
Transformer Protection
High speed, 3 phase, multiple winding transformer relay.
T60
Applications
Transformer Management Relay
Small, medium, and large power transformers Up to 4 restraint windings Percent differential Instantaneous Differential Dynamic Inrush Inhibit Overexcitation Inhibit Low impedance biased restricted ground fault Phase, ground and neutral O/C Phase overvoltage Underfrequency Multiple setting groups Current, voltage, power metering Current, voltage phasors 64 samples/cycle oscillography 1024 Event record Self diagnostics URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2 x 20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators FlexLogic Distributed FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost) Test mode for forcing contact I/O states IRIG-B time synchronization

DESCRIPTION
The T60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a 3-phase, multiple winding, transformer relay intended for the primary protection and management of small, medium and large power transformers. The T60 combines percent and instantaneous differential with overcurrent protection along with a whole suite of current, voltage and frequency protection elements, and multiple settings groups in one easily configured, economical package. An innovative improvement to the traditional harmonic inrush inhibit of the percent differential element increases security while maintaining fault response performance. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The T60 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0 and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based URPC soft-ware allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation.

I I I I I
Diagnostic features of the T60 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger digital oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of waveforms, analog values and digital flags. The URPC software is used to view these records. The T60 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
Features
I I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
83

Auto Configuration
The T60 simplifies transformer CT configuration issues by having all CTs connected in a wye configuration. All phase and magnitude corrections as well as zero-sequence current compensation are performed automatically based upon user entered transformer information. transformer, when magnetizing inrush current into the transformer would be interpreted as a trip condition. The overexcitation inhibit feature allows inhibiting the percent differential element during intentional overexcitation of the system. The T60 employs a new inrush inhibit algorithm that is an improvement to the traditional second harmonic restraint instead of measuring the ratio between the magnitudes of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency component, the algorithm considers a ratio between the phasors of the second and the fundamental frequency components of the differential signal, i.e. both the amplitude and phase relations. By making use of the additional dimension that was neglected until now, the new algorithm is capable of making more robust classification of differential currents caused by the magnetizing inrush phenomenon and those caused by true internal faults.
Operating region for the new decision signal
90 120 60
Restricted Ground Fault

Restricted ground fault (RGF) protection is intended to provide sensitive ground fault detection for low magnitude fault currents. This protection is often applied to transformers having impedance grounded Wye windings. It is intended to provide sensitive ground fault detection for low magnitude fault currents which would not be detected by the percent differential element.
Percent Differential
The T60 relay has three (one per phase) differential current relays capable of handling up to 4 restraint windings. Restraint for external faults is provided by a dual slope percent differential approach, with a programmable smooth transition between the two slope regions.
Percent differential restraint definitions
MONITORING
Data Logger
A configurable memory provides the ability to record 16 channels of any measured or calculated parameter. In continuous mode, this feature can be programmed to store data at a programmable interval from 1 second to 1 hour.
I1
V1
V2
I2
i1
Percent Diff Element
i2

TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
Winding 1
C3
Winding 2
Ir = Irestraint = Max(i1, i2)

150
Id = Idifferential = |i1+ i2| %SLOPE = Id x 100% t60-percent diff.ai Ir Irestraint = maximum per-phase scalar of the total through current after ratio correction
C2
30
()
C1
50P -1
0
50G -1 51G -1
Amps
50G -2 51G -2
Amps
50P -2 51P -2
Amps
180
OPERATE OPERATE
51P -1
Amps
Idifferential = per-phase vector sum of currents after phase, ratio and zero sequence correction i1 and i2 = the true winding currents.
Percent differential restraint operating characteristics
35.000 30.000 25.000 20.000 15.000 10.000 5.000 0.000 0 Differential Current Slope 2 BP #2 BP #1 4
210
330
87G -1
Harmonics Amps
87G -2
Amps Harmonics
240 270
300
T60 diagram2.w
51N -1 50N -1
51N -2 50N -2
Calculate 3I_0
Instantaneous Differential
The T60 contains three (one per phase) unrestrained instantaneous differential overcurrent elements which allow for the handling of high magnitude internal faults.
Calculate 3I_0
Slope 1 2
Transition Region 6 8 10 Restraint Current 12 14 16

t60operating.ai
Calculate Restraint Amps
Calculate Operate Amps
Overcurrent Elements
The T60 provides two instantaneous and one time overcurrent elements for each phase winding, calculated neutral (3I 0), and ground current. Each time overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics: I I I I
pickup current level 14 curve shapes curve multiplier (time dial) instantaneous or linear reset time characteristic
Amps
Amps
Calculate Harmonics 2&5 Harmonic Restraint
50/ 87 87T Block
Improved Inrush and Overexcitation Inhibit

The T60 provides two independent harmonic inhibit features: INRUSH INHIBIT and OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT. The inrush inhibit feature is meant to inhibit the percent differential element during energization of the
Metering 81 59P 27P1 27P2

828713A7.cdr
84

TYPICAL WIRING
WINDING 1
A B C
(5 amp CTs)
WINDING 2
(5 amp CTs)
A B C
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 5b
F 6b
F 7b
F 4b
F 8b
IG
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 4a
F 8a
F 1c
F 2c
F 5c
F 6c
F 3c
F 4c
F 7c
IG5
IG1
IG5
IA5
IA1
IA5
IA1
IC5
IC1
IC5
IB5
IB1
IB5
IB1
IC1
IG1
IG
IA
IA
IB
IC
IB
IC
F 8c
VOLT & CURRENT SUPV.
CIRCUIT ~ CURRENT INPUTS 8C / 8D

H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b H 8b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
CIRCUIT ~
6H
H1
V I
H2
V I
H3
V I
GE Power Management
H4
V I
H5
H6
W1
V I
W2
W 7a W7c W 8a W 8c W7b W 8b
U 1a U 1c U 2a U 2c U 1b U 3a U 3c U 4a U 4c U 3b U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 5b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b
CONTACT IN W 7a CONTACT IN W 7c CONTACT IN W 8a CONTACT IN W 8c COMMON W7b SURGE CONTACT IN U 1a CONTACT IN U 1c CONTACT IN U 2a CONTACT IN U 2c COMMON U1b CONTACT IN U 3a CONTACT IN U 3c CONTACT IN U 4a CONTACT IN U 4c COMMON U3b CONTACT IN U 5a CONTACT IN U 5c CONTACT IN U 6a CONTACT IN U 6c COMMON U5b CONTACT IN U 7a CONTACT IN U 7c CONTACT IN U 8a CONTACT IN U 8c COMMON U7b SURGE DIGITAL I/O 6D 6C
W3
W4
P1
( DC ONLY )
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
DIGITAL I/O
P7
P8
6K
RS-232 DB-9
M1
DC AC or DC
Shielded twisted pairs
B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B 5a MED B5b HI B 6b LO B 6a B 8a B 8b
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
(front)
M2
POWER SUPPLY
M3
M4
M5
D2a D3a D4a D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
RS485 COM 1
COM
9A
M6
COM
CPU
IRIG-B SURGE
CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER
DIGITAL I/O
RS485 COM 2
M7
Ground at Device end
M8
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
GROUND BUS
828712A7.CDR
F
8 CT
X W V
6 I/O * 6
U T
S R
6
P N M
6 I/O *
J
6
H G
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
I/O *
I/O *
I/O
(Rear View)
* Optional
W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b
CONTACT IN W 5a CONTACT IN W 5c CONTACT IN W 6a CONTACT IN W 6c COMMON W 5b
DIGITAL I/O
6A
T60
H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b
DIGITAL I/O
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c
TC1
VOLTAGE SUPV.
TC2
W1a W1b W1c W2a W2b W2c W3a W3b W3c W4a W4b W4c
P 1a P 1b P 1c P 2a P 2b P 2c P 3a P 3b P 3c P 4a P 4b P 4c P 5a P 5b P 5c P 6a P 6b P 6c P 7a P 7b P 7c P 8a P 8b P 8c
UR
COMPUTER
1 2 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9
TXD RXD 9 PIN CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECTOR
M1a M1b M1c M2a M2b M2c M3a M3b M3c M4a M4b M4c M5a M5b M5c M6a M6b M6c M7a M7b M7c M8a M8b M8c
PERSONAL COMPUTER
85
Protection, monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on small, medium, or large two or three winding power transformers and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The differential protection shall provide restraint for external faults using a dual slope approach. Restraint on transformer energization shall be provided by an adaptive harmonic restraint characteristic. The inrush restraint characteristics shall be selectable as 2nd or 2nd+5th, an independent 5th, and an inhibit feature that temporarily defines a lower restraint level when energization is detected. The relay shall have an auto configuration feature that allows simplified CT configurations with all CTs connected wye. All phase and magnitude corrections as well as zero sequence current compensation shall be performed by the relay based on the user entered transformer information. Protection and control functions shall include: I a dual slope percent differential
scheme with adaptive harmonic restraint I time overcurrent elements: two for phase, one for neutral, one for ground, two for negative sequence
I time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for precise or difficult coordination I instantaneous overcurrent elements: two for phase, two for neutral, two for ground, two for negative sequence I 16 digital elements
UR Family Guideform Specifications

The UR family has been designed on a common platform. Please refer to the Common UR Guideform Specifications section on page 56 of this catalog for the common features.
ORDERING
T60 T60 T60
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC VF
* *
F8C F8C
H ** H **
M** M**
P** P**
U**
W**
HC VF H L 8C 8A 8C 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT 8 RTD 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD 8 dcmA inputs 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module
Transformer Management Relay is a trademark of GE Power Management

See pages 15 - 18.
86
High speed, 3 phase, two or three winding transformer management relay.
745
Application
Small, medium & large transformers 7

Percent/instantaneous differential Adaptive harmonic restraint Multiple overcurrent elements Adaptive time O/C elements Underfrequency/overfrequency Frequency rate-of-change Overexcitation Multiple setpoint groups Restricted ground fault (optional) 1 analog transducer input (optional) 16 digital (logic) inputs 7 analog transducer outputs (optional) 9 control outputs Loss of life (optional)
DESCRIPTION
The 745 is a high speed, multiprocessor based, 3-phase, two or three winding, transformer management relay intended for the primary protection and management of small, medium and large power transformers. The 745 combines percent differential, overcurrent, frequency and overexcitation protection elements along with monitoring of individual harmonics, and total harmonic distortion (THD) in one economical package. The 745 provides a variety of adaptive relaying features. Adaptive harmonic restraint addresses the problem of false tripping during inrush. Adaptive time overcurrent elements adjust their pickup settings based on the calculated transformer capability when supplying load currents with high harmonic content. Multiple setpoint groups allow the user to enter and dynamically select from as many as four groups of relay settings to address the protection requirements of different power system configurations. Dynamic current transformer (CT) ratio mismatch correction monitors the on-load tap position and automatically corrects for CT ratio mismatch. FlexLogic allows programming logic controller (PLC) style equations based on logic inputs and protection elements to be assigned to any of the 745 outputs. A powerful testing and simulation feature provided by the 745 is the simulation mode. This allows the protection engineer the ability to test the relay operation based on captured or computer generated waveform data.This data can be converted to a digitized format and downloaded into the 745s simulation buffer for playback. The 745 also provides its own waveform capture function which will record waveform data for faults, inrush or alarm conditions. The auto-configuration function eliminates the need for any special CT connections by having all CTs connected in wye.

I I I I I I I I I I
All currents THD and harmonics Demand Harmonic analysis Voltage Calculated 3 Phase Power Tap position Ambient temperature Waveform capture and playback Simulation mode
Features
I I I I I I I I
FlexLogic (programmable logic) Auto-configuration Dynamic CT ratio mismatch correction RS232, RS485 and RS422 ports Drawout construction IRIG-B input ModBus RTU/DNP 3.0 level 2 Field upgradeable option
GE Power Management
87

Differential Current
The 745 has the equivalent of three single-phase differential current relays capable of handling two or three winding transformers. Restraint is provided by using dual-slope percentage differential restraint and harmonic restraint. This is necessary during periods of transformer energization where misoperation due to magnetizing inrush current must be prevented. Each differential element has programmable dual-slope percentage restraint with adjustable slope breakpoint (BP) and differential sensitivity. Each element also has adaptive harmonic restraint with 3 programmable methods.
Percent differential restraint definitions
LOAD FLOW
1.HARMONIC INHIBIT allows the user to set a harmonic restraint level of 2nd or 2nd+5th which, if enabled remains active all the time. 2.An independent 5TH HARMONIC INHIBIT is also provided to allow restraint for systems that allow intentional overexcitation (overfluxing) during energization. 3.ENERGIZATION INHIBIT is a dynamic inrush restraint element designed to address the decreased harmonic content of newer transformer core designs and sympathetic inrush resulting from parallel transformer banks being energized. Energization Inhibit allows the user to define a temporary lower restraint level which will be automatically enabled upon detection of transformer de-energization or parallel transformer energization. Each of the restraint methods can also have cross-phase averaging applied as desired by the user.
Typical Application of 745 FlexCurves
745 FlexCurve 1
1 745 FlexCurve
TIME
2 2 3 3 CURRENT
814771A2.cdr
Instantaneous Differential O/C

The 745 contains three (one per phase) unrestrained instantaneous differential overcurrent elements which allow for the handling of high magnitude internal faults.
V1 CT 1
V3 CT 2
CT 3
Negative Sequence O/C

The 745 provides negative sequence instantaneous and time overcurrent elements for increased sensitivity to phase faults. Each winding is given its own element with the same programmable characteristics as the phase and neutral time overcurrent elements.
I1
745
V2
I2
I3
Percent Differential Element
Overcurrent Elements
The 745 provides two instantaneous and one time overcurrent elements for each phase winding, calculated neutral (3I 0), and ground current. Each time overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics: I I I I
pickup current level 16 curve shapes curve multiplier (time dial) instantaneous or linear reset time characteristic
Basic operating principle (3-winding)

I2 I3 3 I d = I differential = I1 I2 I3 I % SLOPE = differential x 100% Irestraint Ir = Irestraint = I1
Adaptive Time O/C Curves

The 745 calculates the transformer capability when supplying nonsinusoidal load currents (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1986) with a given Harmonic Factor. It then automatically compensates the operational time overcurrent curves to maintain the desired protection margin with respect to the transformer thermal damage curve.
Adaptive Time O/C Curves
Percentage differential restraint characteristics

200% Idifferential(x CT)
Curve Shapes
OPERATE REGION 100% 50% 1.00 PICKUP 0.30 0.05 SLOPE 1 25% 15% 2.0 KNEEPOINT RESTRAINT REGION Irestraint(x CT) SLOPE 2 100%
ANSI
IEC (BS142)
Adaptive Harmonic Restraint

Traditional relays have often provided blocking during inrush periods via harmonic restraint. The result has at times been false tripping during inrush due to one or more of the phase currents having low harmonic content or delayed operation for fault currents with high levels of harmonics. The 745 offers great flexibility in dealing with energization conditions by providing three programmable restraint methods, each of which can be enabled or disabled by the user: IAC
Curve A Curve B Curve C Short Inverse Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse FlexCurveTM A FlexCurveTM B FlexCurveTM C
TIME
Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Normally Inverse Moderately Inverse Definite Time
Transformer Thermal Damage Curve
Selected Relay Time Overcurrent Curve
Transformer Thermal Protection Margin
CURRENT
Custom
Overcurrent Pickup Setting - based on rated load capability.
Adjusted Overcurrent Pickup Setting - based on calculated load capability due to Harmonic Factor.
88
Frequency
The 745 calculates and maintains a running average of the system frequency and the frequency rate-ofchange (df/dt). For traditional load shedding schemes two underfrequency elements are provided. In order to implement more advanced load shedding schemes four rate-of-change elements are provided. All the elements have as programmable setpoints a minimum operating current, a frequency pickup threshold, and a set rate-of-change threshold. In addition to these elements, the 745 has an overfrequency element which can be used at a generating location to trigger a turbine ramp down in an overfrequency condition.
Multiple Setpoint Groups

The 745 supports four in-service setpoint groups. Only one group of settings can be active at any one time. This feature allows the user to define setpoint groups for different power system configurations and then select which group becomes active. This selection can be done from the Logic (digital) inputs, from the front panel, or from the communications port.
Programmable Logic (FlexLogicTM)

The 745 provides the user with maximum flexibility in implementing protection logic. FlexLogicTM allows any combination of protection elements, logic inputs and timers to be assigned to any output. Boolean logic gates such as NOT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR and XOR are provided for use along with 10 internal timers. Equations can be created with up to 20 parameters; longer equations are possible through the use of virtual outputs.
Restricted Ground Fault (Optional)

Restricted ground fault protection (differential ground) is intended to provide sensitive ground fault detection for low magnitude fault currents which would not be detected by the percent differential element. It is often applied to transformers having impedance grounded wye windings.
Output Relays
The 745 provides one high-speed solid state electronic output for general purpose use which can be activated via any protection element according to user defined FlexLogic equations. The 745 has eight electro-mechanical relay outputs, any seven of which can be activated by the protection elements according to the user defined FlexLogic equations. One output is factory programmed as a failsafe internal self-test failure alarm relay.
Overexcitation
The 745 provides protection elements to deal with transformers subjected to overvoltage conditions and overfluxing of unit generator-transformers. Two types of elements are available: I 5th HARMONIC LEVEL which can
protect the transformer from overvoltage conditions resulting from power system disturbances. I VOLTS/Hz which provides protection to unit generator-transformers when the generator speed is being changed and overvoltage protection must be a function of the ratio of voltage to frequency. Two levels are provided, each having setpoints for minimum operating voltage, Volts/Hz pickup, and time delay.
Loss of Life (Optional)

This feature of the 745 is based on the computational methods presented in IEEE Standards C57.91-1995, IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Transformers, and C57.96-1989, IEEE Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers. It provides an estimate of how much of the transformers total insulation life has elapsed.
Analog Outputs (Optional)

The 745 provides 7 transducer output channels with user selectable output ranges. The user can individually program outputs for ranges of 0-1 mA, 0-5 mA, 1-10 mA, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA. Channels are assignable to any measured parameter.
Logic Inputs
The 745 provides a total of 16 logic inputs. These digital inputs can be assigned to a variety of predefined functions.

VOLTS 3 T.C. WINDING 3
(Intermediate Voltage)
DEVICE COMMON PROTECTION ELEMENTS

50/46 50/87 50G 50N 50P 51/46 51G 51N 51P 59/81 81-H5 81O 81U 81U-R 87 87TG AD AN-1 AN-2 Negative Sequence Instantaneous O/C Instantaneous Differential Ground Instantaneous O/C Neutral (3I0) Instantaneous O/C Phase Instantaneous O/C Negative Sequence Time O/C Ground Neutral (3I0) Time O/C Phase Time O/C Volts-Per-Hertz 5th Harmonic Level Overfrequency Underfrequency Frequency Decay Rate Differential (Percent) Ground Differential Current Demand Analog Input Level 1 Analog Input Level 2 Insulation Aging Aging Factor Limit Hottest-Spot Limit Loss of Life Limit Tap Changer Failure Total Harmonic Distortion Level
WINDING 1
(Highest Voltage)
WINDING 2
(Lowest Voltage)
3 3
VOLT
59 81
81
HERTZ
TAP POSITION
50G1
50G2
51G
AMPS
250/46
350/46
RTD 1 AMBIENT TEMP . dcmA ANALOG INPUT (0-20 mA)
150/46 187TG 151/46 51N Extract 2nd & 5th Harmonic

Block
251/46
351/46
250P1
350P1
150P1 INSULATION AGING

- Aging Factor Limit - Hottest - Spot Limit - Loss of Life Limit
50N2
87 50/87 AMPS
745
250P2
350P2
150P2
50N1
251P
AMPS AMPS THD & SPECTRUM & HARMONIC FACTOR
351P
151P
Calculate 3Io
THD & SPECTRUM & HARMONIC FACTOR
AMPS AMPS THD & SPECTRUM & HARMONIC FACTOR

814825A5.cdr
THD
89

Currents
The 745 accurately meters and calculates the following currents: I phase A, B, C residual (3I0) and
ground fundamental currents.
FEATURES
Auto CT Configuration
The 745 simplifies transformer CT configuration issues by having all CTs connected in a wye configuration. All phase and magnitude corrections as well as zero-sequence current compensation are performed automatically based upon user entered transformer type. The 745 provides a selection of over 100 transformer types to choose from.
Waveform Capture (Oscillography)

The 745 synchronously digitizes all system input signals at a sampling rate of 64 times the power cycle. Because all the signals are sampled at the same instant in time the magnitude and phase relationship of each can be compared. Data is saved to a file following a trip or a user defined trigger condition. The number of pre-trigger and post-trigger cycles comprising the total of 16 saved cycles is user programmable.
The 745 saves 16 cycles of waveform data
I running and maximum current

demand on each phase of each winding I positive, negative, and zero sequence currents and phase angles for all windings I differential and restraint currents for all phases I ground differential currents (optional)
Dynamic CT Ratio Mismatch Correction

The 745 can monitor the on-load tap position output and dynamically correct for CT ratio mismatch as the tap position varies.
Harmonics
The 745 provides harmonic level detectors on all of the current inputs. With a sampling rate of 64 times the power cycle the 745 can recover up to the 21st harmonic. Total Harmonic Distortion (IEEE.519-1986) or Harmonic Derating Factor (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.110-1986) are calculated for each winding and compared against user adjustable setpoints.
Field Upgradeable Option

This feature of the 745 allows the user to upgrade their relay with the available options in the field. A passcode key is provided when the option is purchased.
Event Recorder
The 745 captures and stores the last 128 events, recording the time, date, cause, and system parameters at the moment of each event. All event information can be read from a computer over any of the communication ports or viewed from the front panel display.
Self-testing
The 745 performs various self-checks, both at power-on and those scheduled automatically during normal operation. Tests are performed on all volatile and non-volatile memories, power supply voltages, real-time clock, analog to digital converter, as well as other electronic components, ensuring proper functioning of the relay. The self-test relay operates and an alarm message is generated if any failure is detected.
USER INTERFACES
Display
The 745 has a 40 character vacuum fluorescent display, from which all setpoint and actual value messages can be viewed. Diagnostic messages are displayed when any feature generates a trip or alarm condition. After a period of inactivity on the keypad, the 745 sequentially displays up to 30 userselectable default messages.
Tap Position, Ambient Temperature, Analog Transducer Input

The 745 will monitor and display the tap-position and ambient temperature. The tap position is monitored by feeding the transformer tap position output (variable resistance) directly into the relay. Ambient temperature can be monitored through a resistance temperature detection (RTD) sensor. An optional general purpose transducer input is provided to allow a user defined quantity to be monitored and be used as part of the protection scheme through the use of FlexLogic.
DRAWOUT MECHANISM
The 745 consists of a drawout unit and a companion case.
Indicators
The 745 has 20 LED indicators. This gives a quick visual indication of relay status, system status, and trip and alarm conditions.
IRIG-B Input
An IRIB-B input is provided for time synchronization using a satellite time signal.
Simulation Mode
The 745 provides a powerful simulation feature for testing the functionality of the relay without the need for any external AC waveforms. Simulation Mode allows the user to input arbitrary waveform data into the relays simulation buffer for playback as sampled current input signals.
Front Panel Serial Port

The 745 can be connected to a portable computer via the front panel RS232 communications port. Using the 745PC program (included with the 745) the user can display and monitor actual
90

USER INTERFACES
values as well as modify, update, download, save and print all relay setpoints.
Software
Each 745 is supplied with a free setup program called 745PC which runs on a personal computer running Windows. It allows the user to enter setpoints and view actual values of all measured parameters. Once setpoints have been entered they can be downloaded to the 745 or stored in a file. As well as displaying measured and monitored parameters on the screen, individual harmonics can be monitored in bar graph format and currents can be displayed as waveforms.
Rear Serial Ports

The 745 provides two RS485 communication ports, one of which can be configured as a RS422 port. A SCADA, PLC or remote computer can be connected as part of a daisy chain network consisting of up to 32 devices. This can be accomplished using either the RS422 port or one of the RS485 ports. The RS485 port configuration allows for one of the ports to be used as a redundant communications channel or an expansion port for interfacing to other GE Power Management devices. Data rates up to 19,200 baud are supported.
Communications
All ports may use the ModBus RTU protocol. One of these ports may be selected for the DNP 3.0 Level 2 protocol.
FEATURES
STATUS INDICATORS I Relay status I System status I Conditions
DISPLAY 40 character display for viewing setpoints and actual value messages. Diagnostic messages are displayed when there is a trip or alarm condition. Default messages are displayed after a period of inactivity.
LOCAL CONTROL KEYS I Reset I Next (to scroll messages)
Setpoint entry and monitor keys for complete control without a computer
COMMUNICATIONS RS232 serial port for interface to local computer up to 19,200 bps
Numerical keypad
Help key provides context sensitive help messages
DRAWOUT HANDLE with provision for a wire lead seal to prevent unauthorized removal
91
TYPICAL WIRING
H1 G1 H2 G2 H3 G3 H10 G10 1A 1A 1B 1B 1C 1C G1/2 G1/2
WINDING 1
CONTROL POWER FILTER GND SAFETY GND
CONTROL H12 POWER H11 G11 SEPARATE WIRES G12
1A
1B
1C
G1/2
GE Power Management
WINDING 3 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
WINDING No. 1 (Highest Voltage) WINDING No. 2 WINDING No. 3 (Lower Voltage) (Lower Voltage)
2a 2b 2c 3a 3b 3c G2/3
745
IRIG-B + IRIG-B RTD TRIP/ SOLID STATE 1 TRIP 2 TRIP 3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS TRIP 4 TRIP 5 AUXILIARY 6 AUXILIARY 7 AUXILIARY 8 SELF-TEST B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 E6 F6 E7 F7 E8 F8 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11
GROUND BUS IRIG-B SIGNAL TEMPERATURE
F12 G2/3 E12 G2/3
G7 H7 G8 H8 G9 H9
3a 3a 3b 3b 3c 3c 2a 2a 2b 2b 2c 2c
52a 52a 52a 52a
TRIP COIL TRIP COIL TRIP COIL TRIP COIL
G4 H4 G5 H5 G6 H6
SETPOINT ACCESS KEY SWITCH WINDING 1, 2 OR 3 Phase A, B or C
RS232
COMMUNICATIONS
COM 1 COM 2 RS485 RS485 RS422Tx ANALOG On Load Tap INPUTS Changer
ANALOG OUTPUTS
RS232 INTERFACE
COM
- +
(MASTER)
COM - + EXTERNAL GE PM (32 MAX) DEVICE (SLAVE #3)
COM - + EXTERNAL GE PM DEVICE (SLAVE #1)
COM A RS485 B OUTPUT CHANNEL COMMON INPUT CHANNELS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SCADA OR COMPUTER COMMON HV Phase A Amp HV Phase B Amp HV Phase C Amp LV Phase A Amp LV Phase B Amp LV Phase C Amp TAP POSITION
25 PIN CONNECTOR
RS232 745PC PROGRAM
COMMUNICATION GROUND
NOTE CABLE SHIELDS TO BE GROUNDED AT PLC/COMPUTER END ONLY.
814761B2.dwg
92
9 WIRE R232 PERSONAL COMPUTER
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12
LOGIC INPUT 1 LOGIC INPUT 2 LOGIC INPUT 3 LOGIC INPUT 4 LOGIC INPUT 5 LOGIC INPUT 6 LOGIC INPUT 7 LOGIC INPUT 8 SETPOINT DEDICATED INPUT ACCESS LOGIC POWER OUT (+) LOGIC POWER OUT (COM) LOGIC INPUT 9 LOGIC INPUT 10 LOGIC INPUT 11 LOGIC INPUT 12 LOGIC INPUT 13 LOGIC INPUT 14 LOGIC INPUT 15 LOGIC INPUT 16 RESERVED RESERVED VT VT COM
LOGIC INPUTS LOGIC INPUTS VT SPARE INPUT
WINDING 2
OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER

SEE INSTALLATION CHAPTER FOR CONNECTION DETAILS
SEE COMMUNICATION CHAPTER FOR COMMUNICATION DETAILS
7 A12 6 A11 5 A10 A9 5 A8 3 A7 2 A6 1 COM A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B1 B2 COM B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 TAP POSISTION (FROM ONLOAD TAP CHANGER)

PROTECTION Note: [x] indicate 1A secondary CT specifications, other values are for 5A secondary. PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION Operating Current Pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of pickup SLOPE-1 range: 15% to 100% in steps of 1 SLOPE-2 range: 50% to 200% in steps of 1 KP (SLOPE-1 Kneepoint): 1 to 20 in steps of 0.1 x CT Harmonic Restraint: 0.1% to 65% of fundamental in steps of 0.1 Operate Time: Solid State Output: Pickup < 1 x CT: 42 to 52 ms 1 x CT < pickup < kneepoint: 34 to 44 ms Pickup > kneepoint: 26 to 36 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: Pickup < 1 x CT: 46 to 56 ms 1 x CT < pickup < kneepoint: 38 to 48 ms Pickup > kneepoint: 30 to 40 ms INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURRENT Pickup Level: 3 to 20 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of pickup Level Accuracy: Per current input Operate Time: Solid State Output: @ 1.2 x pickup: 22 to 30 ms @ 2.0 x pickup: 18 to 26 ms @ 4.0 x pickup: 11 to 19 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: @ 1.2 x pickup: 28 to 36 ms @ 2.0 x pickup: 24 to 32 ms @ 4.0 x pickup: 17 to 25 ms PHASE/NEUTRAL (3I0)/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT Pickup Level: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of pickup Curve Shape: (see curve shapes) Curve Multiplier (Time Dial): 0.5 to 30 for ANSI, IAC & FlexCurve in steps of 0.1 0.05 to 1.00 for IEC curves in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous or linear Level Accuracy: Per current input Timing Accuracy: at 1.03 x pickup: 3% of trip time or 20 ms (whichever is greater) PHASE/GROUND/NEUTRAL (3I0)/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT Pickup Level: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97% to 98% of pickup Time Delay: 0 to 60,000 in steps of 1 ms Level Accuracy: Per current input Operate Time: Solid State Output: @ 1.2 x pickup: 22 to 30 ms @ 2.0 x pickup: 18 to 26 ms @ 4.0 x pickup: 11 to 19 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: @ 1.2 x pickup: 28 to 36 ms @ 2.0 x pickup: 24 to 32 ms @ 4.0 x pickup: 17 to 25 ms UNDERFREQUENCY (2 ELEMENTS) Operating Current Pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Pickup Level: 45.00 to 59.99 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Signal Source: Winding 1 Phase A current or voltage Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz Operate Time: The operate time of the frequency friend element is variable and is dependent on the decay rate setting and the supervision frequency. FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (4 ELEMENTS) Operating Current Pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Pickup Level: 45.00 to 59.99 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz Rate 1/2/3/4: 0.1 to 5.0 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/sec Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.07 Hz/sec Signal Source: Winding 1 Phase A current or voltage Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz The operate time of the frequency trend element is variable and is dependent on the decay rate setting and the supervision frequency. OVERFREQUENCY (1 ELEMENT): Operating Current Pickup: 0.05 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Pickup Level: 50.01 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup-0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Signal Source: Winding 1 Phase A current or voltage Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz Operate Time(Delay set to 0.0 sec): Solid State Output: @ 3% beyond pickup: 120 to 150 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: @ 3% beyond pickup: 125 to 155 ms OVEREXCITATION ON 5TH HARMONIC LEVEL Definite Time Element: Operating Current Pickup: 0.03 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Pickup Level: 0.1 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1% Dropout: 95% of pickup Time Delay: 0 to 60,000 sec in steps of 1 sec Signal Source: All phase currents Operate Time(Delay set to 0.0 sec): Solid State Output: @ 1.10 x pickup: 20 to 120 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: @ 1.10 x pickup: 25 to 125 ms OVEREXCITATION ON V/HZ (2 ELEMENTS) Operating Voltage Pickup: 0.10 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01 x VT Pickup Level: 1.00 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 V/Hz Curve Shape: Definite Time (0.1 sec base curve) IEC Curve A/B/C Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Reset Delay: 0.0 to 6000.0 sec in steps of 0.1 sec Signal Source: Voltage Range: 10 to 65 Hz Level Accuracy: 0.02 V/Hz PROTECTION Operate Time(Delay set to 0.0 sec): Solid State Output: @ 1.10 x pickup: 165 to 195 ms Relay Outputs 2-5: @ 1.10 x pickup: 170 to 200 ms INSULATION AGING/HOTTEST-SPOT LIMIT Pickup Level: 50 to 300 in steps of 1 C Delay: 0 to 60,000 in steps of 1 min INSULATION AGING/AGING FACTOR LIMIT Pickup Level: 1.1 to 10.0 in steps of 0.1 Delay: 0 to 60,000 in steps of 1 min INSULATION AGING/LOSS OF LIFE LIMIT Pickup Level: 0 to 20,000 in steps of 1 x 10 hrs. METERING HARMONICS Individual: Range: Accuracy: THD: Range: Accuracy:
OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUTS (7) Output Range: 0-1, 0-5, 0-10, 0-20 or 4-20 mA Maximum Load: 0-1 mA 10 k 4-20 mA 600 Isolation: fully isolated Accuracy: 1% of full scale OUTPUTS (1 SOLID STATE) Max Ratings: Make & Carry 15 A @ 250 VDC for 500 ms OUTPUT RELAYS 2-5 Trip: Form A (breaker TRIP rated) 6-8 Auxiliary: Form C 9 Self-Test: Form C Contact Material: silver alloy Max Ratings: 300 VAC, 250 VDC, 15 A, 1500 VA RELAYS: 2-5 TRIP VOLTAGE DC Resistive 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC DC 30 VDC Inductive 125 VDC L/R = 40 ms 250 VDC AC 120 VDC Resistive 240 VDC AC 120 VAC Inductive 240 VAC PF=0.4 MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 SEC 20 A 40 A 20 A 40 A 20 A 40 A 20 A 40 A 20 A 40 A 20 A 40 A 20 A 80 A 20 A 80 A 20 A 80 A 20 A 80 A BREAK 10 A 0.8 A 0.4 A 5A 0.3 A 0.2 A 20 A 20 A 8A 7A MAX LOAD 300 W 300 W 300 W 150 W 150 W 150 W 5000 VA 5000 VA 5000 VA 5000 VA
0.00 to 99.9% 1% of Full Scale @ 0.5 x CT 0.00 to 99.9% 1% of Full Scale @ 0.5 x CT
INPUTS PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUT CIRCUITS Source CT: 1 to 50,000 A / 1 or 5 A Relay Input: 1 A or 5 A (specified when ordering) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA @ rated load Conversion Range: 0.02 to 46 x CT Accuracy: at <4 x CT: 0.25% of 4 x CT at 4 x CT: 0.5% of full scale Overload Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 x rated current 2 sec @ 40 x rated current continuous @ 3 x rated current ANALOG INPUTS (4) General Purpose Input: Type: dcmA Ranges: 0-1, 0-5, 0-10, 0-20 or 4-20mA (programmable) Input Impedance: 375 10% Conversion Range: 0 to 21 mA Accuracy: 1% of full scale (based on input range) Tap Position Input: Type: resistance () Ranges: 0-500 or 0.5-5 k (programmable) Bias Current: 1 mA or 10 mA (based on input range) Accuracy: 1% of full scale (based on input range) RTD Input: Type: 3-wire: 100 Platinum (DIN.43760) 100 & 120 Nickel Sensing Current: 5 mA Range: -50 to +250C Accuracy: 2C IRIG-B Input: Amplitude Modulated: 1.0 to 10 Vpp DC Shift: TTL LOGIC (SWITCH) INPUT CONTACTS (16) Dry Contacts: 1000 maximum "ON" resistance 32 VDC @ 2 mA provided by 745 Wet Contacts: Inputs 1 to 16: 30 to 300 VDC @ 1.5 mA VOLTAGE INPUT CIRCUIT Source VT: 2 to 600 kV / 60 to 120 V Source VT Ratio: 1 to 5000:1 in steps of 1 Relay Input: 60 to 120 V phase-neutral Max Continuous: 273 V phase-neutral (F.S.) Accuracy: 1% of 2 x VT POWER SUPPLY Options: LO/HI (specified when ordering) LO Range: DC = 20 to 60 V AC = 20 to 48 V @ 48 - 62 Hz HI Range: DC = 88 to 300 V AC = 70 to 265 V @ 48 - 62 Hz Power: 30 VA nominal 40 VA maximum PRODUCTION TESTS Dielectric Strength: IEC 255-5 & ANSI/IEEE C37.90 (2kV @ 60Hz for 1 min) *Specifications subject to change without notice.
RELAYS: 6-8 AUXILIARY, 9 SELF-TEST VOLTAGE MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 SEC DC 30 VDC 10 A 30 A Resistive 125 VDC 10 A 30 A 250 VDC 10 A 30 A DC 30 VDC 10 A 30 A Inductive 125 VDC 10 A 30 A L/R = 40 ms 250 VDC 10 A 30 A AC 120 VDC 10 A 30 A Resistive 240 VDC 10 A 30 A AC 120 VAC 10 A 30 A Inductive 240 VAC 10 A 30 A PF=0.4 ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Range: Ambient Storage Temperature: Humidity (noncondensing): -40 C to +60 C -40 C to +80 C Up to 90%
BREAK 10 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 5A 0.25 A 0.15 A 10 A 10 A 4A 3A
MAX LOAD 300 W 62.5 W 75 W 150 W 31.3 W 37.5 W 2770 VA 2770 VA 480 VA 750 VA
TYPE TESTS Fast Transients: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Insulation Resistance: IEC 255-5 (500 VDC, 2000 MW) Surge Withstand Capability:IEC 255-22-1 & 255-4 Class 3 (fast transient common mode 2.5 kV, differential modes 1 kV) IEC 255-4 & ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (2.5 kV @ 1 MHz, 400/sec for 2 sec, Ri = 200 ) Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 801.2 Class 4 (15 kV, 150 PF, 150 ) Impulse Voltage: IEC 255-5 (5 kV @ 1.2 x 50 s, 0.5 J, Ri = 500 common mode & differential) Current Withstand: ANSI/IEEE C37.90 (40 x rated amp for 2 sec, 80 x rated amp for 1 sec) RFI: 50 MHz 15 mobile transmitter @ 25 cm CASE Fully drawout unit (automatic CT shorts) Seal provision Dust tight door Weight (Case and Relay): 18 lbs, 6 oz APPROVALS CSA: CSA approved UL: UL listed ISO: Manufactured under ISO9001 registered program : Conforms to IEC 947-1
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
8.80" Max. (224) 7.52" (191)
Panel
UPPER
REAR VIEW
8.52" (216)
A B
PANEL CUTOUT
7.25" (184)
9.93" (252)
E F G H E F
UPPER
9.00" (229)
CUT-OUT
G H
LOWER
Inches (mm)
996871AB.dwg
93
Protection for small, medium, and large power transformers shall be provided by a high speed multi-processor based relay. Models are available for two or three restraint windings. The following protection functions shall be included: I three phase differential current
relays with dual slope percentage differential restraint and harmonic restraint unrestrained differential overcurrent two instantaneous overcurrent elements for each phase winding, calculated neutral, and ground current one time overcurrent element for each phase winding, calculated neutral, and ground current negative sequence overcurrent underfrequency and rate-of-change elements for load shedding overfrequency element
I overexcitation to protect against

overvoltage and overfluxing
Metering and monitoring shall include: I metering of currents, running and I I I I

maximum current demand oscillography data sampled at 64 times per power cycle simulation mode for testing harmonic level detectors event recorder for up to the last 128 events tap position, ambient temperature analog transducer input (optional)
Enhanced flexibility of the protection system shall be provided by the following: I auto-configuration of transformer I
CTs to wye configuration programmable protection logic using FlexLogic to allow any combination of protection elements, logic inputs, and timers to be assigned to any output. adaptive harmonic restraint to prevent false tripping during inrush offers three programmable restraint methods multiple setpoint groups dynamic CT ratio mismatch correction adaptive time overcurrent curves which take into account the transformer capability when supplying nonsinusoidal load currents
I I
I I The following inputs and outputs shall be provided: I 16 logical inputs I 1 analog input (optional) I 1 high speed electronic output I 8 electro-mechanical relay outputs I 7 analog output channels (optional) I an IRIG-B input FlexLogic shall be provided to define configurable outputs. The user interface shall include a 40 character display and a keypad with control keys and a full numerical keypad. Twenty four LED indicators shall be provided to indicate relay status, system status, and trip or alarm conditions. Remote communications shall be provided via two RS485 ports, one of which can be configured as a RS422 port. ModBus RTU/DNP 3.0 Level 2 protocol shall be used, and data transmission rates of up to 19,200 bps shall be supported. A front panel RS232 communications port shall be provided for local PC access. Software shall be provided with the relay. The relay shall consist of a drawout unit and a companion case. The case shall have a front door with a large window.
7
I I I I
I I I
ORDERING
745
745
*
W2 W3
* * * *
Base unit transformer management relay 2 windings per phase 3 windings per phase Phase current input rating 1 A for all windings 5 A for all windings 1 A for winding 1, 5 A for winding 2 5 A for winding 1, 1 A for winding 2 1 A for winding 1, 1 A for winding 2, 5 A for winding 3 1 A for winding 1, 5 A for winding 2, 1 A for winding 3 1 A for winding 1, 5 A for winding 2, 5 A for winding 3 5 A for winding 1, 1 A for winding 2, 1 A for winding 3 5 A for winding 1, 1 A for winding 2, 5 A for winding 3 5 A for winding 1, 5 A for winding 2, 1 A for winding 3 Ground current input rating 1 A for windings 1 & 2, 1 A for windings 2 & 3 5 A for windings 1 & 2, 5 A for windings 2 & 3 1 A for windings 1 & 2, 5 A for windings 2 & 3 5 A for windings 1 & 2, 1 A for windings 2 & 3 24-60 VDC, 20-48 VAC @ 48-62 Hz 90-300 VDC, 70-265 VAC @ 48-62 Hz Analog input/outputs option Loss of Life Restricted ground fault option
P1 P5 P15 P51 P115 P151 P155 P511 P515 P551 G1 G5 G15 G51 LO HI A L R
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Transformer Management Relay is a trademark of GE Power Management
Accessories
Dual mounting available with the 19-2 Panel
808785E3.cdr

See pages 15 - 18.
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
4 1
.
4 1
.
94
High speed, 3 phase differential protection for transformer faults.
DTP
Digital Transformer Protection
Application
I
Main transformer protection

I I I I I I I I
Current differential protection 2, 3 or 4 windings Dual-slope percentage restraint 2nd & 5th harmonic cross-restrained Internal phase shift compensation 7 configurable digital inputs 4 trip contacts 8 configurable outputs

I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The DTP-B is a digital relay that provides high-speed differential (87) and backup instantaneous differential (87B) three phase protection functions for power transformers. Different models of the DTP are available for protecting and monitoring transformers with two, three or four windings. The special characteristics of the DTP-B are necessary to provide differential protection for transformer internal faults and avoid tripping for unbalances caused by high magnitude external faults. Harmonic restraint is used to prevent the differential function from operating during transformer energization or overexcitation. For each phase a high-set, unrestrained, differential function provides back-up protection for those high magnitude internal faults that produce sufficient current transformer saturation to cause harmonic restraint of the differential protection. The DTP has 7 digital inputs (with a common), all of them configurable by the user with the GE-INTRO configuration software. The DTP has 13 outputs, 4 of them are trip contacts, 1 is an alarm contact and the rest of them, 8, are configurable outputs. The DTP has metering and monitoring functions. It displays the line current with module and argument for each phase and winding, the differential and through current for each phase and the second and fifth harmonic current for each phase. The DTP keeps a record of the last 166 events, which are time tagged to 1/100 of a second. Four oscillography records can be stored in memory with a sampling rate of 16 samples per cycle.
All currents Event recorder Oscillography recorder Self-Checking functions Settings tables
User Interfaces
I I I I I
20 key keypad Alphanumeric 2-line LCD 16 LED indicators RS232, plastic or glass fiber optic Time synchronization
Features
I I I I
GE-LOCAL software GE-INTRO configuration software IRIG-B input DDS system compatible
GE Power Management
95
DTP Digital Transformer Protection

Differential Protection
For high magnitude external faults, the impossibility of obtaining a completely balanced differential circuit due to the differences in the CT outputs makes the special characteristics provided in the DTP necessary. To prevent operation on these unbalances, a current differential with percentage restraint is used. The differential current is defined as the difference of the currents in both ends of the circuit. Through current is defined as the smallest among the primary and secondary currents (the energy that effectively crosses the power transformer). As the through current increases the level of differential current must increase to operate the relay. The DTP differential unit has programmable dual-slope percentage restraint with adjustable slope breakpoint. The fundamental component of the differential current is obtained via a Discrete Fourier Transformation (DFT). This DFT provides excellent frequency filtration, making the differential current measurement immune to noise, DC components and wave distortion. This gives the digital DTP relay a clear advantage over other analog and hybrid (analog measurement and microprocessor support for other functions) models. Through current is computed as an RMS value. This takes into account not only the fundamental value but also all of the harmonics up to fifth. The algorithm used to calculate the RMS value permits a high level of accuracy in the through current measurement.
Harmonic Restraint
For each phase a harmonic restraint current is calculated proportionally to the second and fifth harmonics of the differential current. The harmonics are extracted using DFTs. The total harmonic restraint is an RMS value equal to the square root of the sum of the squares of the second and fifth harmonics. The magnitude of the harmonic restraint current is used to discriminate between fault conditions and the inrush of exciting current to the transformer when it is energized. This value is used to restrain the differential function from operating during conditions of transformer energization and overexcitation. Harmonic cross restraint is used, where if the harmonic content of one phase is sufficient to restrain that phase, then the other two phases are also restrained from operating.
The Buchholz and Overtemperature inputs are contacts from sensing devices located on the power transformer. They cause either an alarm or trip contact to close and an event to be stored.
Digital Outputs
The DTP system has 8 user configurable outputs and 5 non-configurable outputs, 4 of them are trip contacts and the other one is an alarm contact. The configurable outputs can be programmed using logic based on the internal protection states (pick-up, trip, alarms, etc.) The internal states of the DTP can be used to carry out logical operations NOT, AND, and OR. The output configuration is done using the different levels. At the first level it is possible to use AND gates of up to 16 signals. The output is incorporated into the states matrix so that it can in turn be used in next AND gates of up to 16 inputs. This process can continue until the 16 ANDs are used. Once the AND gates have been configurated, it is possible to create a second level with OR gates of 16 inputs limited to the established groups of bytes, and whose logical outputs are assigned to physical outputs of the unit.
Unrestrained Instantaneous Overcurrent

For each phase a high set unrestrained differential function is provided. This acts as a backup protection for those high magnitude internal faults that produce sufficient CT saturation to cause harmonic restraint of the differential protection. The instantaneous trip function uses the fundamental component of the differential current.
Digital Inputs
The DTP has 7 digital inputs (with a common), all of them configurable by the user with the GE-INTRO configuration software. One of the following values can be assigned to each input: I I I I I I I I I
Unused input External Trigger (P) Table 0 selection (L) Table 1 selection (L) Buchholz Alarm (L) Buchholz Trip (L) Overtemperature Alarm (L) Overtemperature Trip (L) Trip Block (L) (P) means that the function assigned to the input is activated by pulse, and (L) means that the function is activated by level.
Phase Shift Compensation

The DTP allows internal compensation to be selected to adjust for the phase shift across the protected transformer. This is accomplished by settings that define the connection group of each power transformer winding as well as the connections of the current transformers (CT). With this approach all of the external CTs can be wye connected. When the internal compensation is selected the DTP makes the proper phase adjustments to the applied currents and eliminates the zerosequence component of the current. Conventional external compensation can also be selected. In this case the phase shift adjustment and elimination of the zero-sequence component of the current are brought about by the proper connections of the external CTs. This setting is useful for testing the relay with single phase and three phase test sources that supply in-phase currents.
DTP
87B 87
703750A6.CDR
Besides these possibilities, the configurable inputs can also be used for implementing different schemes performing logic ANDs with the inputs, and assigning them to the outputs.
96

Measurement
The DTP relay can measure the following magnitudes: I Line current (module and argument
for each phase and winding)
The possible causes to perform the oscillography triggering are the following: I 87B phase A Trip I 87B phase B Trip I 87B phase C Trip I 87 phase A Trip I 87 phase B Trip I 87 phase C Trip I Buchholz Trip I Overtemperature Trip I Input Trigger I Communications Trigger There is a mask that can be configured and that determines which functions or internal trips start the oscillography. It also can either be started by a configurable digital input, by communications or directly from the MMI. The oscillography records are retrieved and converted into a COMTRADE IEEE standard format file using the GELOCAL communications program. They can be visualized using the GEOSC program, or any other program that accepts the COMTRADE IEEE C37.111-1991 International Standard format.
In addition there is a hardware test for the LED indicators, which light them all up when the button TARGET RESET is pressed.
I Differential and through current for

each phase I Second and fifth harmonic current for each phase
Setting Tables
The DTP has three independent setting tables, stored in non-volatile memory. Only one setting table is active each time, and this is the one used by the system for performing the different functions. Of all the existing settings in a DTP unit, there are several generic groups (General Settings, Active Table, Self Settings, Oscillography Masks and Permissions for each Function), which are common to all the settings tables, while the Differential Function Settings Group, is accessed separately for each table.
These measurements can be accessed either locally, on the liquid crystal display (LCD) on the front of the relay, or via the GE-LOCAL communication software, in the measurements screen.
Event Recorder
The DTP equipment keeps a record of the last 166 events and stores the following information: I Date and time (1 millisecond resolution)
I Type of event I Value of the differential and through

currents I Internal states matrix of the unit
USER INTERFACES
Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
The DTP unit includes a 20 key keyboard and a 2-line liquid crystal display (LCD) with 16 characters per line. This display has highly reliable LED diode back lighting. By means of this interface the user can change the settings, visualize measurements, carry out operations and access information stored in the unit.
A keypad and display allow local communication with the DTP-B
This event recorder is stored in a nonvolatile memory and can be maintained indefinitely, even with no power supply. The generated events are associated to the internal protection and communication states.
DTP oscillography
Self Checking Functions

As an advantage of its digital technology, the DTP system incorporates self-checking functions, which guarantee the correct performance of the unit and will block the operation in case of internal errors. These self-monitoring checks are carried out both when the unit is started up and during normal operation. The checks are carried out on the internal power supply, program memory (ROM), working memory (RAM), oscillographic memory (RAM) and settings and calibration memory (EEPROM).
READY
SET
1/Y
3/N
CLR
INF
7 +/ -
9 .
ACT
END
Oscillography Recorder
The DTP unit stores up to 4 oscillography records, with a resolution of 16 samples per cycle. Each record has a maximum capacity of 66 cycles. The number of prefault cycles can be selected from 2 to 10 cycles. Each of the records includes the following information: I Instantaneous values for current I I I I
inputs Digital information Date and time Causes that generated the oscillography record Active settings in the moment of the record
BLOCK DIAGRAM
I1 i
ABS
I2 i 4 WINDINGS I3 i
ABS
PHASE i= 0 , 120, 240
M
ABS
I4 i
ABS
GIS
CALCUL.
THROUGH
FINS.
DIF.
f1
ABS
f2
G2
ABS
M
f
5
+ -

ENT
INST. TRIP I VV
FDIF. DIF. TRIP IV
blockdtplai
G5
ABS
97

USER INTERFACES
LED Indicators
The DTP unit has a total of 17 LED indicators, one fixed bicolor assigned to the critical alarm function of the unit and 16 red LED indicators, arranged in one column. They can be configured using the GE-INTRO configuration software to any of the user definable alarms assigned from among the protection and communication states. Each LED can be configured to have memory in the absence of auxiliary power supply. They can also be configured to blink when turned on.
Table 1: Default LED Configuration
Communication Software
Two Windows based software packages are included with the DTP: I GE-LOCAL enables the user to visualize the protection settings, alarms, LEDs, measurements and status, to retrieve oscillography records, to retrieve event record I GE-INTRO enables the user to configure the inputs, outputs and LEDs
GE-INTRO software
LED No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Description
87 A Trip 87 B Trip 87 C Trip 87B A Trip 87B B Trip 87B C Trip Buchholz Alarm Buchholz Trip Temperature Alarm Temperature Trip Out of service Trip not permitted EEPROM Alarm Date&Time Alarm Internal Communication Error Remote Mode
As an option, GE-OSC software enables the user to study the oscillography records. These software packages are part of the GE-NESIS software (GE Network Substation Integration System) used by the DDS system.
GE-LOCAL software
Communication Ports
The DTP has 2 serial gates and 3 connectors. Gate 1 can be reached from the front of the relay in connector 1 (PORT 1) or from the back (PORT 3). The second gate can be reached from connector 2 (PORT 2) which is located on the rear. PORT 1 connector has priority over PORT 3 connector and is selected when the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal is activated. Gate 1 (PORT 1 and PORT 3 connectors) and 2 (PORT 2 connector) are independent and the unit can serve them simultaneously. There are different models each with a different physical connection for the PORT 2 connector. In the RS232 models the two connectors are RS232 (PORT 3 does not exist). In the RS232 and RS485 models, PORT 1 is RS232, while PORT 2 is RS485 (PORT 3 does not exist). In the RS232 and fiber-optic models the PORT 1 and PORT 3 connectors are RS232 while a fiber-optic connector replaces the PORT 2 connector (see ordering guide for clarification). The communications protocol is the same as that used for the rest of the DDS system GE Digital Protections, and requires the use of the GE-LOCAL software. The protocol is reliable and allows communication with different protection systems. It guarantees very efficient data transfer (especially for the oscillography and other large files) along with error detection and automatic communication recovery.
a b c a b c
TYPICAL WIRING
A B C A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12
READY INSTANTANEOUS SIGNALLING CONTACT TRIP SIGNALLING CONTACT COMMON DIF OR INST. SIGNAL CONTACT PH A DIF OR INST. SIGNAL CONTACT PH B WINDING 2 CURRENT INPUTS WINDING 1 CONTROL POWER
+ -
B5 A6
SAFETY GROUND B6
GE Power Management
SURGE GROUND
DTP
Digital Transformer Protection
OPTIONAL FOR 3/4 WINDING CONFIGURATIONS
F1 F2 F3 F4 D1 D2 D3 D4
WINDING No. 1
WINDING No. 2
F11 D11 F12 D12 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9
WINDING No. 4 a b c
WINDING No. 3 a b c
C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

WINDING 4 OUTPUTS WINDING 3
DIF OR INST. SIGNAL CONTACT PH C BUCHHOLZ ALARM SIGNAL OVERTEMP. ALARM SIGNAL TRIP 1 TRIP 2 TRIP 3 TRIP 4 TRIP 5
F10 D10
E10 C10 E11 C11 E12 C12

PLASTIC
E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
G7 G6 G5 G4 G3 G2 G1
+ OVERTEMP. TRIP
COMMON
(HEWLETT PACKARD) LOGIC INPUTS
HFBR4516 GLASS
+ OVERTEMP. ALARM + BUCHHOLZ TRIP + BUCHHOLZ ALARM - INPUT COMMON - LATCHING RELAY COMMON + LATCHING RELAY RESET
(OPTIONAL ALL CONFIGURATIONS)

FIBRE OPTICS SMA RS232-C DB25 (OPTIONAL ALL CONFIGURATIONS)
703752A8.CDR
(OPTIONAL ALL CONFIGURATIONS)
RESET
98

DTP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION General Settings: Frequency: Winding CT ratio: Protection Settings: Winding tap: Winding configuration: Winding time group: Winding CT configuration: Differential Function Settings: Sensitivity: K1 percentage restraint: K2 percentage restraint: K1-K2 inflexion: 2nd harmonic restraint: 5th harmonic restraint: 87B tap: POWER SUPPLY Auxiliary Voltage: 50 or 60 Hz 1-4000 in 1 steps 0.5-20 x In Y, D, ZZ 0 - 11 Y0, Y6, D1, D5, D7, D11 0.2 - 0.4 x Itap 15 - 100% 15 - 100% 0 - 10 x Itap 12 - 100% 12 - 100% 4 - 12 x Itap INPUTS Digital Input Voltage: Thermal Capacity: Current circuits: Continuous: During 3 sec: During 1 sec: DC Burden: Burden Per Active Input: OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS Rated Voltage: Maximum Opening Voltage: Rated Current: Closing Current: Operating Power: Mechanical Life: PACKAGING Weight: Net: Shipping: Dimensions: 48/125 VDC 110/250 VDC TYPE TESTS The DTP equipment complies with the following standards, which include the GE insulation and electromagnetic compatibility standard and the standards required by Community Directive 89/336 for the EC market, in line with European standards. It also complies with the European directive requirements for low voltage, and the environmental and operating requirements established in ANSI standards C37.90, IEC 255-5, IEC 255-6 and IEC 68. Insulation Test Voltage: IEC 255-5, 600V, 2kV 50/60 Hz, 1 min Impulse Voltage Withstand: IEC 255-5, 5 kV, 0.5 J 1 MHz Interference: IEC 255-22-1, Class III Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 255-22-2, Class IV Immunity to Radio Interference: IEC 255-22-3, Class III Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Amplitude Modulation: ENV 50140, 10 V/m Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Amplitude Modulation: Common mode: ENV 50141, 10 V/m Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Frequency Modulation: ENV 50204, 10 V/m Fast Transients: IEC 255-22-4, EN 61000-4-4, Class IV Magnetic Fields at Industrial Frequency: EN 61000-4-8, 30 Av/m RF Emission: EN 55011, Class B ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Operation: -20C to +55C Storage: -40C to +85C Humidity: Up to 95% noncondensing CASE Metal Casing IP52 grade protection (as per IEC 529)
As auxiliary voltage
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In 12W 8mA per input
COMMUNICATIONS Mode: Half Duplex Speed: 1200 to 19200 bps Physical Media: RS232 (ports 1,2) Plastic fiber optic (port 2 optional) Type of connector: HFBR-4516 Power supplied: -8 dBm Receivers sensitivity: -39 dBm Wave length: 660 nm Glass fiber optic (port 2 optional) Type of connector: STA Power supplied: -17.5 dBm Receivers sensitivity: -24.5 dBm Wave length: 820 nm
250 VAC 440 VAC 16 A 25 A 4000 VA 30 x 106 ops.
26.4 lbs (12kg) 28.6 lbs (13kg) NEED INCH EQUIVALENTS 437 x 200 x 176 mm (19" rack 4 units high)
DIMENSIONS
TOP VIEW
17.13" (435)
PANEL MOUNTING
17.38" (441) 4 x 0.28" Dia. (7)
10.25" (260)
7.00" (178)
CUTOUT
4.00" (102)
1.17" (29) 18.38" (467)
FRONT VIEW
19.00" (484) INCHES (mm) 7.30" (185)
703751A3.ai
99

The main transformer protection shall be supplied as an integrated digital system. Standard current transformers shall be used to supply the AC inputs. Models shall be available with 2, 3, or four restraint windings. The following protection functions shall be included: I three phase percentage restraint
current differential function I harmonic restraint which uses the 2nd and 5th harmonic of the differential current to prevent trips during transformer energization or overexcitation I high-set, unrestrained, instantaneous differential function which acts as backup protection
I internal or external settings for

phase shift compensation and zerocurrent elimination
Monitoring functions shall include: I sequence of events recording with

the last 166 events stored
As well as the analog inputs for currents, the relay shall have seven digital inputs. A trip mask shall determine which of trip signals will activate the four trip contacts. Eight signalling outputs are provided. Metering functions shall include: I line current for each phase and
winding
I oscillography with a sampling rate of

16 samples per cycle, 4 records stored I self-test diagnostics
I differential current for each phase I through current for each phase I second and fifth harmonic current for
each phase
The man machine interface shall include a 20 button keypad and a 2 line backlit LCD. Sixteen red LEDs each can be separately programmed to indicate any of the user definable alarms assigned from among the protection and communication states. Two serial gates and 3 connectors shall be included for remote or local access by a personal computer. Fiber optic connections and RS485 shall be available. The relay shall be packaged in a single 7 inch high (4 rack unit) 19 inch rack mount case.
ORDERING
DTP
DTP
* * * * * 0 1 0 * * * B
1 2 3 0 2 1 5 A B C 0 1 2 3 M D G H * *
Basic unit Restraint windings: 2 windings Restraint windings: 3 windings Restraint windings: 4 windings P1, P2, P3: M-Link protocol P1, P3: M-Link protocol; P2: ModBus RTU protocol Nominal current rating In = 1 A all windings Nominal current rating In = 5 A all windings Nominal current rating In = 5 A for 1st winding, 1 A for all others Nominal current rating In = 1 A for 1st winding, 5 A for all others Nominal current rating In = 1 A for 1st & 2nd windings, 5 A for windings 3 & 4 2 RS232 communication ports 2 RS232 + plastic fiber optic communication ports See 2 RS232 + glass fiber optic communication ports RS232 + RS485 communication ports Spanish language English language 48/125 VDC supply voltage 110/250 VDC supply voltage Code for special model definition
0 P1: RS232 P2: RS232 P3: Not available 1 P1: RS232 P2: Plastic Fiber Optic P3: RS232 2 P1: RS232 P2: Glass Fiber Optic P3: RS232 3 P1: RS232 P2: RS485 P3: Not available NOTE: P1 (front) is switched with P3 (rear) P2 (rear) is independent

See pages 15 - 18.
DTP revision level A

For ordering information and features on the earlier DTP (Revision A) more information is available at www.GEindustrial.com/pm
100
Automatic voltage regulation, analysis, and control functions for transformer applications.
DTR
Transformer Tap Changer Controller
Applications
I I
Control power transformer OLTCs to regulate voltage Integrated Systems
DESCRIPTION
The transformer tap changer controller DTR controls automatically the transformer on load tap changer, so that the power supply voltage is practically constant, independently from the load. In order to achieve this, the DTR is able to increase and decrease the OLTC in the power transformer. The DTR can be applied to any existing tap changer, as its settings and operation ranges, as well as its inputs and outputs, are fully compatible with all the OLTC available in the market. The DTR has been designed using the same hardware architecture as the DDS protection and control system. This means that, besides being a powerful individual element, the DTR is completely compatible with the system, and can be fully integrated in a substation. The DTR also provides analysis and control functions, such as event recording. The internal memory allows storing up to 165 events. It also includes measuring functions for I, V, frequency, etc. As all the units part of the DDS family, the DTR provides easily configurable inputs and outputs. The user can program these inputs and outputs by means of userfriendly software programs, part of GE-NESIS (GE-INTRO, GE-LOCAL). This software package is Windows based and it is the same for all the DDS family.
CONTROL
Operation
The DTR is used to maintain a constant voltage level at feeders busbar. The unit gives commands to increase and decrease the transformer OLTC. As these differences in the tap position are usually discrete, the DTR allows the user to set the percentage of change between taps. In addition, a time delay is provided by setting, to allow matching the OLTC time required to change from one tap to the closest next.
Control
I I I I I I
Automatic voltage regulator Automatic/manual operation Three setting tables Configurable inputs and outputs BCD format inputs to detect tap changer position Control pulse outputs

I I I I
Automatic/Manual Operation
Using one of the configurable digital inputs, the DTR can receive an order for automatic or manual operation. Manual operation has priority over automatic, in order to avoid performance failures in the case of manual operations. This command can also be sent to the unit by means of the communications software, or the MMI.
I, V, P, Q, cos , frequency measurement Transformer OLTC position Event recording Counter of the tap position increases and decreases for rise and lower operations of tap changer
User Interfaces
I I I I I I I
Blockings
The transformer tap changer controller DTR blocks its operation in case that voltage falls below user defined limits, (undervoltage blocking), and also when voltage or current exceeds another user defined limit (overvoltage or overcurrent blocking).
Two communications ports on the rear (plastic or glass fiber optic, RS232 or RS485) RS232 port, faceplate accessible GE-NESIS Windows based programming software Mimic for increasing/decreasing commands and tap displaying Graphic display and keypad ModBus, M-Link, and M-Link Plus communications protocols DDS system compatible
GE Power Management
101
DTR Automatic Voltage Regulator

CONTROL
Settings
The unit provides three setting tables. The user can move from one table to another using a digital input or through communications. This feature allows the use of different settings in different system situations to better maintain the actual system needs of security, etc.

Measures
The voltage regulator DTR displays instantaneous values of I, V, P and Q (three-phase), frequency and cos values. resolution), type of event, voltage and current, and a relay status snapshot are stored.
Digital inputs
The DTR system has 42 digital inputs; they can be configured by the user by means of GE-INTRO configuration software.
Event recorder
165 events are recorded in non-volatile EEPROM memory. Date and time (1 ms
DTR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

METERING Frequency: Nominal Phase Current: Nominal Voltage: Auxiliary Voltage: 50/60 Hz 1 or 5 A 100/3 - 220/3 VAC 24-48 VDC, 20% 110-250 VDC, 20% OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS Contact Capacity: Maximum Operating Voltage: 440 VAC Continuous Current: 16 A Make and Carry: 30 A Breaking: 4000 VA ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Storage: -40 to +85C Operation: -20 to +70C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Metallic package in 19 rack and 2 units high. Frontal MMI with LCD display and keypad. Four rear terminal blocks (six in models with expansion board) including connector for IRIG-B time synchronization. Protection class IP52 (according to IEC 529) TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radiointerference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radiofrequency Emission:
TYPICAL WIRING
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
D11 C11 Q11 P11

B3 B4 A1 A2 A7 A8
CURRENT INPUTS
G Q12
I1 I1 I5 I5
CONTROL POWER
INPUTS 4
COMMUNICATIONS Local Communication: LCD alphanumeric display with two lines of 16 characters per line; 20 button frontal keypad Remote Communication (local or remote PC and communications net): Mode: half duplex Speed: 1,200 to 115,000 bps Physical media: RS232 (ports 1, 2 and 3) RS485 (port 3 optional) Plastic Fiber Optic (port 3 optional): Type of connector: HFBR-4516 Power supplied: 8 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -39 dBm Wave length: 660 nm Glass Fiber Optic (port 3 optional) Type of connector: STA Power supplied: 17.5 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -24.5 dBm Wave length: 820 nm Synchronization: IRIG-B DB9 connector for RS232 ports on the front (1) and on the rear (2). DB9 connector for RS232 port on the rear (3), with 1 mm plastic fiber optic or 50/125 glass fiber optic option. INPUTS THERMAL CAPACITY Current Circuits: Continuously: During 3 Sec: During 1 Sec: Voltage Circuits: Continuously: During 1 Min: BURDENS Current Circuits:
GE Power Management
VOLTAGE
V
V
DTR
Automatic Voltage Regulator
INCREASE COMMAND O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9
P1 Q1 P2 Q2 P3 Q3 P4 Q4 J1 K1 J2 K2 J3 K3 J4 K4 J5 K5 J6 K6 J7 K7 J8 K8 J9 K9 J10 K10 J11 K11 J12 K12 L1 M1 L2 M2 L3 M3 L4 M4 N1 O1 N2 02 N3 O3 N4 O4
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7
TAP 1 (BCD) TAP 2 (BCD) TAP 3 (BCD) TAP 4 (BCD) TAP 5 (BCD) TAP 6 (BCD) COMMON INPUTS 1
DECREASE COMMAND AUTOMATIC/ MANUAL LOCAL / REMOTE STOP SYSTEM READY
I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15 I16
INTERLOCKING REGULATOR ALARM INPUTS 2
STOP COMMAND COMMAND NOT EXECUTED PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS IRREGULAR TAP CHANGE
COMMON
2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to CEI 255-22-1 Class IV according to CEI 255-22 2 Class III according to CEI 255-22-3 Class IV according to CEI 255-22-4 Class II according to CEI 255-21-1 Class I according to CEI-22521-2 according to CEI 41B (Sec) 81 and EN55022 class B
UNDERVOLTAGE O10 OVERVOLTAGE OVERCURRENT O11 O12 O13 O14 O15 O16 O17 O18 O19
I19 I20 I21 COMMON I22 I23 I24 I25 I26 I27 I28 COMMON I29 I30 I31 I32 I33 I34 I35 I36 I37 I38 I39 I40 I41 I42 COMMON INCREASE DECREASE AUTOMATIC MANUAL REMOTE LOCAL STOP COMMON TABLE 1 TABLE 2
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In 2 x Vn 3,5 x Vn 0.5 VA for In = 5 A 0.1 VA for In = 1A 0.2 VA, Vn= 63.5 V 12 W 8 mA / 1 W, Vaux: 125 VDC
INPUTS 5
PACKAGING Dimensions:
INPUTS 3
I17 I18
17.12" x 7.95" x 3.46" (435 mm x 202 mm x 88 mm)
O20 O21 O22
Weight: Not Packaged: 13.2 lbs (6 kg) Packaged: 15.4 lbs (7 kg) APPROVALS Compliant
Q5 P5 Q6 P6 Q7 P7 Q8 P8 Q9 P9 Q10 P10 L5 M5 L6 M6 L7 M7 L8 M8 L9 M9 L10 M10 L11 M11 L12 M12 N5 O5 N6 O6 N7 O7 N8 O8 N9 O9 N10 O10 N11 O11 N12 O12
Voltage Circuits: DC Burden: During Operation: Per Each Activated Input:
INPUTS 6
737750A1.ai
ORDERING
DTR 1 * 0* * 000 * 00 A
DTR 0 1 2 3 0 2 M D G H
Automatic Voltage Regulator RS232 communications interface Plastic fiber optic + RS232 communications interface Glass fiber optic + RS232 communications interface RS485 communications interface P1, P2, P3: M-Link protocol P1, P2: M-Link protocol; P3: ModBus RTU protocol Spanish language English language 48 - 125 VDC auxiliary voltage 110 - 250 VDC auxiliary voltage

See pages 15 - 18.
102
TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION

L90
High speed differential protection of transmission lines.
The L90, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital current differential relay system which provides protection for transmission lines. It may be applied on or adjacent to series compensated lines for three phase tripping. The L90 utilizes an innovative current differential scheme with adaptive restraint that allows the relay to operate correctly even when the percentage restraint is removed.
L60
Phase comparison protection for HV and EHV transmission lines for three phase tripping applications.
The L60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital line phase comparison relay system which provides protection for HV and EHV transmission lines. It may be applied on, or adjacent to, series compensated lines for three phase tripping applications.
D60
High speed transmission line protection for three phase tripping.
The D60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital line distance system which provides protection for transmission lines. It is available for three phase tripping applications. Typical operating times are 1 cycle.
ALPS
Protection of series compensated lines.
The ALPS relay is a multi-function digital protective relay system intended to provide 4 zones of distance protection for HV or EHV transmission lines. It may be applied on or adjacent to series compensated lines. It is available for single or three phase tripping applications.
LPS-D
High speed transmission line protection for single or three phase tripping.
The LPS-D is a multi-function digital protective relay system intended to provide distance protection for transmission lines.
LPS-O
Generator backup with out of step protection.
The LPS-O is a multi-function digital protective relay system intended to provide system phase backup protection for generators/transmission lines.
DLPD
Distance protection for transmission lines.
The DLPD provides distance protection for HV and EHV transmission lines. It may be used for single or three phase tripping applications. It includes four zones of distance protection. User selectable pilot schemes are provided with step distance backup. Ground instantaneous and time overcurrent functions are independently selectable to be directional or non-directional. Phase overcurrent backup consists of a non-directional instantaneous function. Undervoltage is provided as well as potential fuse failure detection logic. The DLPD has high speed tripping, typically 0.75 to 1.5 cycles, and out of step blocking.
SECTION 8: TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION SELECTOR GUIDE..................104 L90...........................................105 L60...........................................109 D60 ..........................................113
MLP
Digital distance protection, control, metering and analysis.
The MLP is a digital distance protection system. This powerful protection system is more cost effective than an installation using conventional equipment. Its main application is in subtransport and distribution lines.
ALPS ....................................117 LPS-D...................................125 LPS-O ..................................125 DLPD .......................................131 MLP .........................................139
103
Transmission Selector Guide

V
DLPD LPS ALPS D60 L60 L90
KV
FEATURES Typical operating time (cycles) Trip mode (phase) Series compensated line protection Zones of distance protection (phase) Zones of distance protection (ground) Out of step blocking logic Out of step tripping logic PTFF logic Ground directional OC Overcurrent backup Instantaneous phase OC Phase IOC directional control Instantaneous ground OC Ground IOC directional control Ground time overcurrent Ground TOC directional control Ground TOC curves (inverse, very inverse, definite) Ground TOC curves (extremely inverse, custom) Analog distance to fault output Breaker failure (by configurable logic) Settings groups Sampling rate (samples/cycle) Recloser option Maximum number of attempts Synchronism check option Programmable logic Line pickup/switch onto fault logic Contact converters (digital inputs) Number (3p/1p) Number configurable (3p/1p) Number of trip outputs (3p/1p) SCR trip output option Contact outputs Total number (3p/1p) Number configurable (3p/1p) Accuracy (percent of full scale) Scroll display Currents (Ia, Ib, Ic, In) Voltages (va, vb, vc) Phase angle Watts, vars, frequency Number of ports GE-modem protocol ports ASCII protocol ports Data rates (bps) Plug-in protocol converter Fault location Breaker health monitoring Oscillography (# events/cycles duration)* Fault reports (# of faults stored) Mounting IRIG-B time synchronism Continuous security monitoring Flash memory DEVICE DLPD 0.75-1.5 1&3 4 4 I I I I I I I I I I I 4 16 I 2 LPS 0.75-1.0 1&3 4 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4 64 I 4 I I I 12 12 6 I ALPS 0.5-1.0 1&3 O 4 4 I O I I I I I I I I I I I I 4 64 I 4 I I I 8/12 8/12 4/6 I D60 1.0-2.0 3 4 4 L60 0.5-1.5 3 1 1 L90 0.5-1.5 1&3 1 1
PROTECTION
21 21G 68B 68T 27 57-67N 50 67 50G 67N 51N 67N
I I I I I I I I I I I 8 64 I 4 I I I I 80 max 80 max 40 max
I I I I I I I I 8 64 I 4 I I I I 80 max 80 max 40 max
I I I I I I I I I I I 8 64 I 4 I I I I 80 max 80 max 40 max
50-62
CONTROL
I 6/13 3/3 2/6 I 14/28 7/7 3% I I I I I 3 2 1 (limited) 300 - 9600
16/20 18/24 40 max 15/20 16/22 40 max 1% 1% 1% I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2/3 2/3 3 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 300 - 9600 300 - 9600 300-115,200 I I I I I I I 2/72 - 14/9 6/72* - 36/12 6/72* - 36/12 1/128 - 31/8 3 - 14 6 - 36 2 - 36 horiz. or vert. horiz. or vert. H & V in 1 pkg. horiz. or vert. I I I I I I I I I I
40 max 40 max 0.5% I I I I 3
40 max 40 max 0.5% I I I I 3
COMM.
METERING
300-115,200 300-115,200 I I 1/128-31/8 I I 1/128-31/8
MISC.
horiz. or vert. horiz. or vert. I I I I I I
O option * with expanded memory
104
Transmission Line Protection
High speed current differential protection of transmission lines.
L90
Applications
I I I I I I
Line Differential Relay
DESCRIPTION
The L90, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital current differential relay system which provides protection for transmission lines. It may be applied on or adjacent to series compensated lines for three phase tripping. The L90 utilizes an innovative current differential scheme with adaptive restraint that allows the relay to operate correctly even when the percentage restraint is removed. Models are available for application on transmission lines with 2 or 3 terminals. The relay may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FIexLogic). Remote inputs and outputs that can be sent through the LAN when combined with hardware I/O enables complex scheme logic while reducing auxiliary components and wiring. Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The UR has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus /TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the UR include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. this precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags, as well as a snapshot of protection settings. The URPC software is used to view these records. The UR utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
Overhead lines and cables Lines with 2 or 3 terminals EHV, HV, sub-transmission With/without series compensation Single or three pole tripping Fiber optic and electrical (RS422, G703) interface via direct or multiplexed fiber optic Current differential, adaptive restraint Directional phase and neutral Phase, ground and neutral O/C Negative sequence overcurrent Direct transfer trip Autoreclose and synch check Phase overvoltage and undervoltage Configurable inputs and outputs Stub bus protection High speed tripping, typically 1 cycle Integrated metering Event reporting of last 1024 events Current unbalance alarm logic Flexible oscillography capture Fault location URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus /TCP protocols 2 x 20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators FlexLogic and distributed FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost) Test mode for forcing contact I/O states IRIG-B time synchronization

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
Features
I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
105

Current Differential Function
The L90 uses a digital current differential relay system with an integral communications channel interface which is based on innovative patented techniques developed by GE. It is similar to a traditional percentage differential scheme, but the restraint is adaptive based on relay measurements. The L90 current differential protection can initiate a trip output in typically one cycle. The adaptive statistical approach used gives both more sensitive and more accurate fault sensing. The L90 can also detect relatively high resistance single line to ground faults.
Phase Selection
The L90 includes phase selection algorithms to provide faulted phase identification. The phase selection function is included to provide faulted phase identification for any overcurrent trips for which the differential scheme has not operated.
Fault Location function. The information is then used in a lumped-parameter differential equation algorithm to implement a fault location estimate, which is not significantly effected by fault resistance. A time and date stamp, together with a fault type and fault location (in kilometers or miles) are stored for subsequent access.
Direct Transfer Trip

The relay can send a direct transfer trip (DTT) (either individual phases or three phases) signal via the pilot communications channel. The user can initiate the DTT internally via configurable logic signals, or externally via a contact input. The signal can trip any of the L90 output contacts.
CT Failure / Current Unbalance Alarm

The L90 has current unbalance alarm logic. The unbalance alarm may be supervised by a zero sequence voltage detector. The unbalance alarm will not operate during the open pole period in a single phase tripping scheme. The user may block the relay from tripping when the current unbalance alarm operates.
Pilot Communications Channels 8

The L90 functions in a peer to peer architecture, in which the relays at all terminals are identical. This allows both replication of protection (where each relay can provide protection for the entire system) and distributed synchronization. Terminals are time synchronized using a patented Ping-Pong technique, which enhances relay sensitivity. The number of bi-directional channels required for the L90 current differential scheme will depend on the number of line terminals.
Current phasors communicated from each relay to every other relay
L90-1 L90-2
Stub Bus Protection

In the L90 stub bus protection is provided by the overcurrent backup units. Stub bus protection may be enabled by a keypad command, a communications command, or a contact input. When it is enabled, the user may program the non-critical alarm to respond to the function.
Channel Monitor
The L90 includes logic to detect if the communications channel is deteriorating or has failed. If either of these conditions is detected, an alarm is activated and the user switch to another set of protection settings. An LED is provided on the front panel to indicate a channel failure.
Breaker Failure Protection

The L90 has a breaker failure protection scheme which uses individual phase overcurrent functions and a neutral overcurrent function. If the L90 is ordered with the optional additional current inputs, one set of 50BF functions is provided for each set of current inputs to provide per breaker current measurement for the breaker failure logic.
Autoreclose
The recloser provides up to four reclose shots for three pole operation. The recloser provides outputs that can be used to modify circuit protection between reclose shots.
Data Logger
L90-3
831730A1.CDR

Fault Location
The phase selector in the L90 identifies the appropriate input quantities for the
Relays communicate through fiber optic interface or electrical RS422 and G703 interfaces at 64 kbps via direct fiber optic cable or multiplexing networks.
Distances.

Typical (km) 1.65 3.8 11.4 64
52
Emitter Type 820 nm LED 1300 nm LED 1300 nm ELED 1300 nm LASER
79
3V_0
Monitoring
CLOSE
51P 51_2
TRIP
50BF 87L 67P
50N-1&2
Backup Overcurrent Functions

The L90 has complete backup overcurrent functions which include: I Current disturbance detector (50DD) I Overcurrent to provide trip bus sealing phase IOC (50P) protection, neutral and negative sequence IOC (50N, 50_2), phase TOC (51P), and negative sequence TOC
50DD
50P-1&2 50_2-1&2
51N
67N
50NBF
Data From Remote End (via Dedicated Communications)

50G-1&2
Metering
59P 51G
27P-1&2
25

831706AN.CDR
106

TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL ONLY A B C
(5 AMP) TRIPPING DIRECTION
52
OPTIONAL
F1a F1b F1c F2a F2b F2c F3a F3b F3c F4a F4b F4c IA5 IA IA1 IB5 IB IB1 IC5 IC IC1 IG5 IG IG1 CURRENT INPUTS 8A/8B H5a H5c H6a H6c H5b H7a H7c H8a H8c H7b H8b U7a U7c U8a U8c U7b H8b CONTACT IN H5a CONTACT IN H5c CONTACT IN H6a CONTACT IN H6c COMMON H5b CONTACT IN H7a CONTACT IN H7c CONTACT IN H8a CONTACT IN H8c CONTACT IN H7b SURGE CONTACT IN U7a CONTACT IN U7c CONTACT IN U8a CONTACT IN U8c CONTACT IN U7b SURGE DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O
VA VA VB VB VC VC VOLTAGE INPUTS
F5a F5c F6a F6c F7a F7c
TC 1
6G H1 H2 H3 H4 6H U1 U2 U3
V V
I V I V I V
H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c U1a U1b U1c U2a U2b U2c U3a U3b U3c U4a U4b U4c U5a U5b U5c U6a U6b U6c N1a N1b N1c N2a N2b N2c N3a N3b N3c N4a N4b N4c N5a N5b N5c N6a N6b N6c N7a N7b N7c N8a N8b N8c S1a S1b S1c S2a S2b S2c S3a S3b S3c S4a S4b S4c S5a S5b S5c S6a S6b S6c S7a S7b S7c S8a S8b S8c
TC2
VOLTAGE SUPV.
I V I V I V I V I V
GE Power Management
L1a L1c L2a L2c L1b L3a L3c L4a L4c L3b L5a L5c L6a L6c L5b L7a L7c L8a L8c L7b L8b
CONTACT IN L1a CONTACT IN L1c CONTACT IN L2a CONTACT IN L2c COMMON L1b CONTACT IN L3a CONTACT IN L3c CONTACT IN L4a CONTACT IN L4c COMMON L3b CONTACT IN L5a CONTACT IN L5c CONTACT IN L6a CONTACT IN L6c COMMON L5b CONTACT IN L7a CONTACT IN L7c CONTACT IN L8a CONTACT IN L8c COMMON L7b SURGE FIBER CHANNEL 1 FIBER CHANNEL 2
L90 LINE DIFFERENTIAL U5 RELAY

U6
U4
( DC ONLY )
6D
6K DIGITAL I/O
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6
UR
COMPUTER
TXD RXD
SGND
TX1
RX1
L90 COMM. W7A
TO REMOVE L90
TX2 RX2
DIGITAL I/O
N7 N8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 2 20 7 6 4 5 22
RXD TXD
SGND
9 PIN CONNECTOR
25 PIN CONNECTTOR
DC AC or DC
B1b CRITICAL B1a FAILURE B2b B3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B3b B5b HI+ CONTROL B6b LO+ POWER B6a B8a SURGE B8b FILTER D2a D3a D4a COM D3b D4b D5b COM D5a D6a D7b RS485 COM 1 RS485 COM 2
POWER SUPPLY
RS-232
6C
DB-9
(Front)
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
PERSONAL COMPUTER
SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR
DIGITAL I/O
GROUND AT DEVICE END
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
9A
GROUND BUS
S7 S8
MODULE ARRANGEMENT X W V U T S R P N M L K J H G F 6 6 6 6 6 8 7 COM I/O * * OPTION I/O * I/O * I/O I/O * ( Rear View ) CT/VT
D 9 CPU
B 1 POWER SUPPLY
831702BV.dwg
107

Transmission line protection, fault location, control monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on transmission lines with 2/3 terminals and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The protection system shall be available with three phase tripping logic or single phase tripping logic. The relay shall be self-synchronizing, operating without an external clock signal, and use dedicated fiber optic communication facilities with loss of communications detection and alarming. The communications channel shall have a facility to determine the health of the communications channel. I an adaptive sensitive current disturI I
bance detector (fault detector) time overcurrent elements: two for phase, one for neutral, one for ground, two for negative sequence time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for difficult or precise coordination instantaneous overcurrent elements: two for phase, two for neutral, two for ground, two for negative sequence four shot, three pole autoreclose 2 undervoltage elements synchrocheck 16 digital elements 2 breaker failure elements
I phase selection (for detecting the

faulted phase for fault location and single pole tripping) I CT failure detection for open or shorted CTs I VT fuse failure detection
Protection and control functions shall include: I a current differential scheme with
adaptive restraint
I I I I I
Voltage inputs shall be included to provide voltage level detectors, fault location, and additional metering data. Metering functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor.

Monitoring features shall include: I open pole detection
ORDERING
L90 L90 L90
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F** H ** F** H **
L** N** L** N**
S** U** W** R **
HC VF H L 8A 8B 8C 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 7A 7B 7C 7D 7H 7I 7J 7K 7R 7S 7T 7W
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel inter-relay communications 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channel inter-relay communications 1310 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel inter-relay communications G.703, 1 Channel inter-relay communications G.703, 2 Channel inter-relay communications RS422, 1 Channel inter-relay communications RS422, 2 Channel inter-relay communications
Online ordering is available for this product. See pages 15- 18.
108
Phase comparison protection for HV and EHV transmission lines for three phase tripping applications.
L60
Applications
Line Phase Comparison Relay
Phase comparison protection for EHV lines Three phase tripping Retrofits earlier SLD relays 8 Pilot protection with overcurrent backup Tripping or blocking phase comparison logic Single or dual phase comparison Phase, ground and neutral O/C Negative sequence overcurrent Autoreclose and synch check Phase overvoltage and undervoltage Configurable inputs and outputs Current, voltage, power metering Current, voltage phasors 64 samples/cycle oscillography Protection settings snapshot 1024 Event record Self diagnostics URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2x20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators FlexLogic Distributed FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost) Test mode for forcing contact I/O states IRIG-B time synchronization

DESCRIPTION
The L60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital line phase comparison relay system which provides protection for HV and EHV transmission lines. It may be applied on, or adjacent to, series compensated lines for three phase tripping applications. Protection features include phase comparison with user selectable tripping and blocking schemes. It has phase, ground, and negative sequence instantaneous/time overcurrent backup functions. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The L60 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF, or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based PC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the L60 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags, as well as a snapshot of protection settings. The PC software is used to view these records. The L60 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.

I I I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
Features
I I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
109
L60 Line Phase Comparison Relay

Phase Comparison
Models of the L60 are available using a composite current signal, I 2-KI 1, and using zero sequence current, 3I0. The L60 may be used in both single and dual phase comparison schemes, with both blocking and tripping logic. The phase comparison logic includes two overcurrent detectors; a low set fault detector and a high set fault detector. These overcurrent functions measure the level of the local phase comparison signal, I2-KI1 or 3I0. I Instantaneous phase, ground, and
negative sequence overcurrent functions (50P, 50G, and 50_2). I Phase, ground and negative sequence time overcurrent functions (51P, 51G, and 51_2). The time overcurrent functions include all popular curves. I Per phase and 3I0 overcurrent functions (IA, IB, IC, and 3I0) for use in Breaker Failure protection. I Unbalanced current alarm to detect open or shorted CT leads.
Multiple Settings Groups

Eight separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the L60s non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, via remote communications, or contact inputs.
MONITORING
Data Logger
Overcurrent Backup
The L60 has complete overcurrent backup functions including:
Pilot Channels
The L60 uses a 5 volt, 20 milliampere interface to the pilot channel transmit. L60 can receive a pilot channel either using 5V or 125V, 20 milliamphere interface. Typical channels include AM and FSK via PLC (Power Line Carrier), FSK via microwave, and multiplexed fiber optic.
I Sensitive current disturbance detector (fault detector) using I2, I0, and I1.
I Overcurrent supervision and trip bus

seal-in
52
79
Monitoring
50P-1&2 50_2-1&2 51P
CLOSE
51_2
TRIP
50BF 87PC 21P 50N-1&2 51N 50NBF 21N
Data From Remote End (via Communications)
Metering
27P-1&2 50G-1&2 51G 59P
25

831707AN.CDR
110

TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
(5 Amp CT)
52
OPTIONAL
F 2b
F 4b
F 1b
F 3b
F 5a
F 6a
F 1a
F 3a
F 4a
F 2a
F 2c
F 3c
F 7a
VC
F 6c
F 1c
F 4c
VA
VA
IG5
IA5
IA1
IC5
IB5
IB1
IC1
IG1
VB
IG
IA
VB
VC
IB
IC
F 7c
F 5c
CIRCUIT ~ CURRENT INPUTS 8A / 8B
CIRCUIT ~ VOLTAGE INPUTS

I
H2
V I
H4
DIGITAL I/O 6H
H 8b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b
SURGE CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
V I
U2
V I
U3
V I
GE Power Management
( DC ONLY )
U4
V I
L60 LINE PHASE COMPARISON RELAY

L 1a L 1c L 2a L 2c L 1b L 3a L 3c L 4a L 4c L 3b L 5a L 5c L 6a L 6c L 5b L 7a L 7c L 8a L 8c L 7b L 8b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON
U6
L3a L3c L4a L4c L3b L5a L5c L6a L6c L5b
DIGITAL I/O
6K
N1
N2
N3
N4
CONTACT IN L7a CONTACT IN L7c CONTACT IN L8a CONTACT IN L8c COMMON L7b SURGE
Tx Tx Rx Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx
N5
N6
CHNL.2
6C
SURGE
L60 COMM.
TO REMOTE L60
W 2a W 3b W 5a W 6b W 3a W 4b W 6a W 7b W 8a
W7Z
CHNL.1
DIGITAL I/O
N7
5V/20mA
N8
DC AC or DC Shielded twisted pairs
B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B5b HI B 6b LO B 6a B 8a B 8b
RS-232
S1
DB-9 (front)
S2
POWER SUPPLY
S3
S4
RS485 COM 1
COM
9A
S5
DIGITAL I/O
RS485 COM 2
COM
S6
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
S7
S8
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
GROUND BUS
X W V U T
7 COM. 6 I/O * 6
S
I/O *
P N M L
6 I/O * 6 I/O *
J
6
H G
8 I/O
D
9 CPU
CT/VT
(Rear View)
* Optional
L1a L1c L2a L2c L1b
U5
6D
U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U7b
U1
H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON
H3
DIGITAL I/O
6G
H1
H 1a H1b H1c H 2a H2b H2c H 3a H3b H3c H 4a H4b H4c U 1a U 1b U 1c U 2a U 2b U 2c U 3a U 3b U 3c U 4a U 4b U 4c U 5a U 5b U 5c U 6a U 6b U 6c

N1a N1b N1c N2a N2b N2c N3a N3b N3c N4a N4b N4c N5a N5b N5c N6a N6b N6c N7a N7b N7c N8a N8b N8c
TC1
UR
VOLTAGE SUPV.
TC2
COMPUTER
1 2 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECTOR
S 1a S 1b S 1c S 2a S 2b S 2c S 3a S 3b S 3c S 4a S 4b S 4c S 5a S 5b S 5c S 6a S 6b S 6c S 7a S 7b S 7c S 8a S 8b S 8c
831708B7.CDR
PERSONAL COMPUTER
B
1 Power Supply
111

L60 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission line protection, control monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on transmission lines with 2 terminals and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The protection system shall be available with three phase tripping logic. The relay shall be suitable for use with power line carrier communication channels with a 5VDC - 20mA interface for transmitting, and either a 5VDC or 125VDC - 20mA interface for receiving and shall be equipped with both tripping and blocking schemes. The communications channel shall have facilities for loss of communications detection and alarming. The communications channel shall have a channel test facility to determine the health of the communications channel. Protection and control functions shall include: I phase comparison scheme I an sensitive current disturbance
detector (fault detector)
I time overcurrent elements: two for I

phase, one for neutral, one for ground, two for negative sequence time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for precise or difficult coordination instantaneous overcurrent elements: two for phase, two for neutral, two for ground, two for negative sequence 2 undervoltage elements four shot, three pole autoreclose 16 digital elements trip bus seal-in
I synchrocheck I breaker failure I VT fuse failure detection Voltage inputs shall be included to provide voltage level detectors, fault location, and additional metering data. Metering functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor.

I I I I
ORDERING
L60 L60 L60
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F8A H ** F8A H**
L** N** S** U** W** L** N** R **
HC VF H L 8A 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 7Y 7Z
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module 125V input, 5V output, 20mA channel interface 5V input, 5V output, 20mA channel interface

See pages 15 - 18.
112
High speed transmission line protection for three phase tripping.
D60
Line Distance Relay
Application
I
High speed distance protection for medium to EHV transmission lines 8

I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The D60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital line distance system which provides protection for transmission lines. It is available for three phase tripping applications. Typical operating time is between 1 and 1 1/2 cycles up to an SIR of 30. The D60 uses waveform sampling of current and voltage inputs with protection algorithms to provide complete transmission line protection. It includes four zones of phase and ground mho distance functions, together with phase and ground instantaneous and timed overcurrent, breaker failure and autoreclosing. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable by the user through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The D60 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF, or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. Diagnostic features of the D60 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system, Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags, as well as a snapshot of protection settings. The PC software is used to view these records.
Four zones of distance protection Pilot schemes and step distance backup Directional phase and neutral Phase, ground and neutral O/C Negative sequence overcurrent Autoreclose and synch check Line pickup Breaker failure

I I I I I I
Current, voltage, power metering Current, voltage phasors 64 samples/cycle oscillography Protection settings snapshot 1024 Event record Self diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2 x 20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I I I I I
FlexLogic Distributed FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost) Test mode for forcing contact I/O states IRIG-B time synchronization
GE Power Management
113
D60 Line Distance Relay

Distance
The D60 provides four zones of phase and ground distance protection. The phase functions use a memorized positive sequence voltage polarizing signal. The ground distance elements use memorized positive sequence polarization augmented by a voltage polarized ground directional element, for improved directional response.
Hybrid permissive over reaching transfer trip (Hybrid POTT)

This class of scheme is suited for three terminal and weak infeed applications because of its use of reverse looking Z4 elements for the transient blocking and weak infeed implementation.
DC offset is removed from the input signal to prevent overreach. Each instantaneous overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics: I Pickup level I A time delay during which current
must exceed the pickup for operation
Time over current element curve shapes provided
Blocking scheme
The common blocking scheme generally will use an on/off rather than a frequency shift carrier, and requires the use of some form of reverse looking, or non directional, block initiate.
Z LINE
Z4 REACH Z1 REACH
adzone.ai
IEEE
Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Moderately Inverse Curve A (BS142) Curve B (BS142) Curve C (BS142) Short Inverse Extreme Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse I2t Definite Time
IEC
Manual Breaker Control

The relay allows the user to manually trip or close either of two circuit breakers both locally or remotely.
Zone 4 is reversible for use as a block/initiate element in a directional comparison scheme. Zones 2, 3 and 4 each have independent timers for phase and ground step distance implementations. Overcurrent supervision of distance directional functions is included. Both trip and block units are available for use in ground directional overcurrent pilot schemes.
GE IAC
Voltage
A line pickup function provides tripping if the breaker is closed into a zerovoltage bolted fault when line-side potential is used. Faults other than close-in faults can be identified satisfactorily by the distance elements, recognizing the necessity of a dependable voltage polarising signal.
Custom
FlexCurve A FlexCurve B
Scheme (Pilot) Logic

Five common types of protection signalling (pilot) schemes are implemented in the D60. The over-reaching schemes can all use neutral or negative sequence directional elements to improve fault resistance coverage. Special attention to the algorithm design has resulted in a fast and secure directional implementation. This element can also be used as a auxiliary function to add directional control to an inverse time back-up function.

Eight separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the D60's non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, remote communications or contact inputs.

The D60 can check for the presence of DC battery voltage across each open trip contact and triggers an alarm when the voltage becomes virtually zero. It also has a current sensor in series with each trip contact to give a series seal-in function.
Three Phase, Neutral and Ground Time Overcurrent

The D60 instantaneous overcurrent protection includes: I Three individual phase instantaneous
overcurrent elements (all with identical characteristics) I Neutral instantaneous overcurrent elements I Ground instantaneous overcurrent elements
Data Logger
Direct Under-reaching transfer trip (DUTT)

This scheme requires a dependable and secure protection signalling system and when this can be satisfied it is probably the simplest scheme to implement.
Permissive under-reaching transfer trip (PUTT)

The PUTT scheme can utilise a less secure protection signalling system because its logic uses a transfer trip receive monitored by the local Z2.

52

Monitoring
50DD 79
25
CLOSE
TRIP
3V_0
Permissive over-reaching transfer trip (POTT)

This class of scheme provides coverage for faults at the end of the protected section, and is often used to augment a DUTT scheme.
50P-1&2
50_2-1&2
51P
51_2
50BF
21P
67P
50N-1&2
51N
67N
21N
Data From Remote End (via Communications)

50G-1&2
Metering
51G
59P
27P
837709AA.CDR
114

TYPICAL WIRING
TRIPPING DIRECTION
TYPICAL ONLY
A
(5 Amp)
52
C
52
CURRENT POLARIZATION SOURCE
F 2b
F 1b
F 3b
F 4b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 4a
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4c
F 8a
VX
F 7c
F 2c
F 3c
F 5c
F 6c
F 1c
VA
VA
VB
IG5
IA5
IA1
IC5
IB5
IB1
IC1
IG1
VB
VC
IG
IA
VC
VX
IB
IC
F 8c
CIRCUIT 1 CURRENT INPUTS
CIRCUIT 1 VOLTAGE INPUTS

I V I V I V I V I V I V V I V
8A / 8B DIGITAL I/O
6H
H1
H2
H3
H4
GE Power Management

W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b W 7a W7c W 8a W 8c W7b W 8b
( DC ONLY )
H5
H6
CONTACT IN W 5a CONTACT IN W 5c CONTACT IN W 6a CONTACT IN W 6c COMMON W 5b CONTACT IN W 7a CONTACT IN W 7c CONTACT IN W 8a CONTACT IN W 8c COMMON W7b SURGE 6C DIGITAL I/O 6A
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c W1a W1b W1c W2a W2b W2c W3a W3b W3c W4a W4b W4c
P 1a P 1b P 1c P 2a P 2b P 2c P 3a P 3b P 3c P 4a P 4b P 4c P 5a P 5b P 5c P 6a P 6b P 6c P 7a P 7b P 7c P 8a P 8b P 8c M1a M1b M1c M2a M2b M2c M3a M3b M3c M4a M4b M4c M5a M5b M5c M6a M6b M6c M7a M7b M7c M8a M8b M8c
TC1
8
TC2
VOLTAGE SUPV.
W1
W2
W3
W4
P1
P2 U 1a U 1c U 2a U 2c U 1b U 3a U 3c U 4a U 4c U 3b U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 5b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b
CONTACT IN U1a CONTACT IN U1c CONTACT IN U2a CONTACT IN U2c COMMON U1b CONTACT IN U3a CONTACT IN U3c CONTACT IN U4a CONTACT IN U4c COMMON U3b CONTACT IN U5a CONTACT IN U5c CONTACT IN U6a CONTACT IN U6c COMMON U5b CONTACT IN U7a CONTACT IN U7c CONTACT IN U8a CONTACT IN U8c COMMON U7b SURGE DIGITAL I/O 6D
P3
P4
P5
P6
DIGITAL I/O
P7
P8
6K
M1
RS-232 DB-9
M2
DC AC or DC Shielded twisted pairs
(front)
POWER SUPPLY
M3
M4
M5
RS485 COM 1
COM
9A
M6
COM
SURGE
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X W V
GROUND BUS
U T
6
CPU
IRIG-B
DIGITAL I/O
RS485 COM 2
M7
M8
R
6 I/O *
P N M L
6 I/O *
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
837712A6.CDR
6 I/O *
I/O *
I/O
CT/VT
(Rear View)
* Optional
PERSONAL COMPUTER
9 PIN CONNECTOR
25 PIN CONNECTOR
1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9

UR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22
COMPUTER
115

D60 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission line distance protection, control, monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on transmission lines and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. Protection and control functions shall include: I four zones of phase distance protection with memorized positive sequence voltage polarization I four zones of ground distance protection with memorized positive sequence voltage polarization augmented by a voltage polarized ground directional element I distance characteristics shall include: mho or lens characteristic I zones 2, 3, and 4 have independent timers for phase and ground step distance implementations
I overcurrent supervision I line pickup element for close-ontofault conditions
I time overcurrent elements: two for I

phase, one for neutral, and one for ground time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for precise or difficult coordination 2 undervoltage elements 16 digital elements breaker failure for two breakers four shot, three pole autoreclose synchrocheck fault locator
tion of the protection elements to adapt to changing conditions such as line configuration changes, seasonal requirements, testing, etc. The relay shall also provide voltage level detectors, fault location, and additional metering data. Metering functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor.
I I I I I I All elements shall have a blocking input that allows supervision of the element from other elements, contact inputs, etc. The relay shall have eight setting groups for protection elements. This allows for dynamic reconfigura-

ORDERING
D60 D60 D60
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F** F**
H ** M** H ** M**
P** P**
U** W**
HC VF H L 8A 8B 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module

See pages 15 - 18.
116
EHV transmission line protection of series compensated lines for single phase or three phase tripping.
ALPS
Advanced Line Protection System
Applications
I I I I
Distance protection for EHV lines Series compensated lines High speed tripping (half cycle) Single and three phase tripping

DESCRIPTION
ALPS is a multi-function digital protective relay system intended to provide distance protection for HV or EHV transmission lines. It may be applied on or adjacent to series compensated lines. It is available for single or three phase tripping applications. Typical operating times are to 1 cycle. ALPS uses waveform sampling of current and voltage inputs with protection algorithms to provide complete transmission line protection. It includes four zones of phase and ground mho distance functions. It has user selectable pilot schemes with step distance backup. Out of step blocking is provided and out of step tripping is an available option. It has phase and ground overcurrent instantaneous backup and ground time overcurrent backup as well as under and over voltage functions. An optional four shot recloser is available, with synchronization voltage check. There are 12 user configurable inputs and 24 user configurable outputs. Four separate groups of protection settings are available. ALPS has integrated RMS metering of currents, voltages, watts, vars, and frequency. It stores up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. Reliable fault location displays the distance to the fault in miles, kilometers, or percent line impedance. High resolution oscillography is provided with data storage from 6 events of 72 cycles each to 36 events of 12 cycles each. User interface includes a 20 button keypad and a 4 line LCD located on the front of the unit. An RS232 port is also located on the front of the unit. Rear RS232 and RS485 serial ports are provided for remote communication from 300 to 9,600 bps. All ports can be set to either ASCII or GE modem protocols. ALPS is packaged in a compact 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case with drawout capability. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting.
Four zones of distance protection Pilot protection, step distance backup Out of step blocking and tripping Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Ground time overcurrent backup Over and under voltage functions Optional four shot recloser Configurable inputs and outputs Fully configurable relay logic 4 zones of ground quadrilateral characteristics (Rev B only)

I I I I I I
Integrated metering Fault location Event reporting of last 150 events Fault reports High resolution oscillography Self test diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I
LCD and keypad RS232 and RS485 serial ports ASCII or GE modem protocols ModBus RTU (Rev A only) and DNP 3.0 support IRIG-B input
Features
I I
Multiple functions in one package Horizontal and vertical models
GE Power Management
117
ALPS

Distance
ALPS provides four zones of phase and ground distance functions. Functions are positive sequence voltage polarized mho characteristics. In addition Ground Zone 1 functions may be set as adaptive reactance characteristics. The reactance characteristics include an independent supervising mho characteristic with a load compensating adaptive reach. Zone 4 is reversible for use as a blocking zone. Zones 2, 3, and 4 each include independent timers for phase and ground step protection. The ALPS relay (Rev B only) has been modified to include 4 zones of quadrilateral ground characteristics. An unbalanced current alarm is provided to detect open or shorted CT leads.
Pilot Channels
The relay may be applied with a wide variety of pilot channel equipment. Typical channels include AM and FSK via power line carrier (PLC), FSK via microwave, and FSK via multiplexed fiber optic.
Voltage
Three single phase under and over voltage detectors are provided. As well, a positive sequence overvoltage detector is provided along with an optional compensated positive sequence overvoltage detector. ALPS has potential fuse failure detection logic to detect a full or partial loss of AC potential and to block tripping of the distance and directional functions. A line pickup function provides tripping if the breaker is closed into a zero-voltage bolted fault when line-side potential is used. The unit also has an optional synchronization check voltage for use with the recloser.
Four Shot Recloser

An optional four shot recloser is provided with reclose programs for both single phase and three phase tripping applications. Reclosing may be initiated from ALPS protection functions, or via external contact inputs. In addition to a reclose initiation input ALPS recloser also has inputs for reclose inhibit, reclose cancel, and recloser reset. Output contacts are provided for breaker close, reclose in progress, and recloser in lockout.
Out of step blocking is present to detect a swing condition and either block tripping or block reclose initiation. Optional out of step tripping logic using mho type characteristics is also available. A choice of two or three characteristics are provided, with adjustable characteristic shapes.

The relay allows the user to manually trip or close a circuit breaker both locally or remotely.
Scheme Logics
The scheme logics provided in the unit include: I blocking I permissive underreach transfer trip
(PUTT) I permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT1 and POTT2) I hybrid (POTT plus echo and weak infeed tripping) I step distance backup (non-pilot)
Directional Ground Overcurrent

Ground directional overcurrent functions can be used either in place of or in conjunction with the overreaching ground distance functions in a pilot scheme. The ground directional functions are forward and reverse negative sequence current and voltage operated with both instantaneous and TOC functions. These functions will be disabled during an open pole period.

Four separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the ALPS's non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, remote communications or contact inputs.
Configurable I/O
All contact converter inputs and all contact outputs (except for alarms) in ALPS are configurable by the user. The unit has 12 configurable inputs and 24 configurable outputs, or 20 for single phase tripping.
In addition, ALPS provides user programmable logic with up to 40 gates and 8 timers.
Overcurrent Backup
ALPS provides instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent functions. The phase overcurrent backup consists of an instantaneous function. This function can be controlled by the Zone 2 distance functions. Ground overcurrent backup consists of instantaneous and time overcurrent (TOC) functions. The TOC function includes four curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and definite time) plus a programmable curve. The ground overcurrent functions can be controlled by the directional functions. Both instantaneous and TOC functions can be independently selectable to be non-directional or directional. ALPS also provides an adaptive sensitive current disturbance detector (fault detector) using I2, I0 and I1. Overcurrent supervision of distance functions is included. Both trip and block units are available for use in ground directional overcurrent pilot schemes.

BUS
ALPS
Metering
50P 21P
21G 67N
68
50/ 51G
27
59
OPTIONS
Recloser
Synchrocheck
25
705751A4.CDR
118
ALPS
Fault Location
Proven algorithms provide reliable fault location reporting. ALPS will display the fault location in miles, kilometers, or percent of line impedance. The fault location estimate is shown on the LCD along with the trip targeting, and is included in the fault reports and oscillography files. ALPS stores up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the user with the information needed to determine the sequence of events, speeding diagnosis and system recovery. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences including pickup, trips, contact operations, alarms, setting changes, and self test status.
The ALPS can store up to 150 events
Oscillography can be triggered either by internal signals or external signals. Internal signals include a trip output or a programmable logic signal. If the optional out of step trip logic is supplied ALPS will have a 3 second oscillography data file consisting of phasor values of the currents and voltages captured at a rate of one per cycle.
The ALPS can store oscillography data for 2 to 36 events

ALPS can monitor the continuity of the breaker trip circuit. It checks for the presence of DC battery voltage across each open trip contact (or SCR) and triggers and alarm when the voltage becomes virtually zero. It also has a current sensor in series with each trip contact (or SCR) to log an event message indicating whether or not DC trip current was flowing following a relay trip.
Metering
The ALPS provides the following RMS metering values: I current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In) I voltage (Va, Vb, Vc) I watts (3 phase) I vars (3 phase) I frequency The currents and voltages are calculated for each phase, the accuracy is 1% of reading. The phasor value (magnitude and angle) of the phase currents and voltages are also displayed.
Oscillography
ALPS captures current and voltage waveforms and selected internal logic signals at 64 samples per cycle. The unit can store from 2 events of 72 cycles each to 12 events of 12 cycles each. The time, date, active settings, and fault report are stored with the data capture. Prefault data can be set from 1 to 8 cycles. An optional memory expansion allows the user to store from 6 events of 72 cycles each to 36 events of 12 cycles each.
Breaker Health
'Just in time' maintenance is achieved by using the breaker health function. ALPS calculates and stores the cumulative I*t or I2*t value of each of the three phase currents. A breaker health threshold is established by a setting. If the cumulative value exceeds the threshold setting a breaker health alarm condition is initiated. Since the user can set the value the ALPS can monitor a breaker with prior duty.
Event Reporting
ALPS-LINK is one of four Windows based software packages included with the relay
Self Test Diagnostics

Comprehensive self test diagnostics occur both at power up and continuously in the background while the unit is operating. Upon relay initialization a complete self test is performed which includes checking the magnetics calibration, A-D converters, RAM, ROM, serial ports, input/output contacts, and MMI. During operation self tests are performed and any problem causes an alarm and an event log.
119
ALPS
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The front of ALPS has a twenty button keypad and a 4 line backlit LCD. This allows the user to easily interrogate the relay, change settings, display metering data, and display event information.
The keypad and display allow easy local access
Rear Serial Ports

Three serial ports can be provided on the rear of the unit. Port 2A (for RS232) and 2B (for RS485) are standard on all models. Port 3 is optional and can be set as either an RS232 or an RS485 port. All ports are completely independent. ASCII, GE-MODEM or DNP 3.0 protocols can be selected independently for each port. The ports may be set independently for different data rates from 300 to 9,600 bps. In revision A relays Port 2 can be set for Modbus Protocol.
Two independent rear serial ports are standard, with a 3rd port optional
Software Tools
Four Windows based software packages are included in the ALPS instruction book. I ALPS-LINK is a communication
program which allows the user to communicate with the relay using GE protocol. I ALPS-SET aids the user in calculating the settings and creates a settings file that may be down loaded to the ALPS. I ALPS-TEST may be used to calculate the expected operating voltages for the mho distance functions for the applied settings and test conditions. I XPRESSION BUILDER allows the user to graphically design programmable logic and I/O assignments. It creates the logic settings files used by the relay.
STATUS
GE Protection & Control Malvern, PA
ALPS
MODEL In Vn Vpa GEK
SET STATUS
1/V
4
2
5
3/N
CLR ON
POWER
I O
TARGET RESET
8
TRIP
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX
INF
TRIP
6 9 .
ENT
OFF
METERING ACT
END 7 8
MLO
ON OFF I O
NOT
STATUS
GREEN RED PROTECTION ON CHECK STATUS
Security LED Indication

ALPS has 2 LED indicators on the front panel. One is a two color LED (red and green) that indicates the relay status. Under normal conditions the LED is green. If the unit detects a self test critical failure the LED will turn red, indicating that the relay is out of service. A second red LED is used to indicate that the relay has issued a trip, and that the trip targets have not been reset. Three levels of remote password protection are provided to prevent unauthorized communications with the relay. There are separate passwords which permit view only, view and settings changes, or view, settings, and control capability.
In addition the user may purchase GEDATA, a general purpose oscillography data analysis program.
HARDWARE
ALPS is packaged in a compact 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting. The drawout construction of the case allows for all of the printed circuit boards to be withdrawn from the front of the relay with only the highly reliable magnetics remaining in the case. The magnetics module can easily be removed from the case if necessary.
An IRIG-B input is provided which permits the relay to synchronize its clock to the satellite time clock. This insures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
Xpression Builder creates the logic settings files used by the ALPS relay
Expression - [Exp1 : ALPS] F ile Edit View Options Entity Window Help
Front Serial Port

A nine pin RS232 serial port (Port 1) is located on the front of the relay. It allows the user easy access with a laptop computer. Both ASCII and GE protocols are available.
A serial port is located on the front panel for local computer access
USE CONNECTION TOOL TO CONNECT GATES, INPUTS, ETC. Group2 TRIP A TRIP B TRIP C RI 1P RI 3P SELECT INPUT T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 SELECT OUTPUT AND OR TIMER PD TIMER COUNTER T1 T2 SELECT LOGIC GATE T3

GE Protection & Control Malvern, PA
ALPS
MODEL In Vn Vpa GEK XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXX
SET STATUS
1/V
4
2
5
3/N
CLR ON
POWER
I O
TARGET RESET
TRIP A TRIP B TRIP C
INF
TRIP
6 9 .
ENT
OFF
METERING ACT
END 7 8
MLO
ON OFF I O
NOT
STATUS
For Help, press F1
120
ALPS
FEATURES
Front View
LEDs STATUS: relay status TRIP: trip has been issued
DISPLAY 4 line, backlit LCD display for viewing data & settings
Relay power
Target reset/metering push button
TM Advanced Line Protection

SYSTEM
GE Power Management
ALPS TM
MODEL In Vn Vpa IB ALPSDA350A122HEON 5A 115 VAC 125 VDC GEK-105556
SET
STATUS
1/V 4 7
2 5 8 0
3/N 6 9 .
CLR
ON
POWER
I O
TARGET RESET
INF
TRIP
OFF
METERING
ACT
END NOT
STATUS
ENT
KEYPAD 20 button keypad allows the user to interrogate the relay, change settings, display metering data, and display event information
COMMUNCATION RS232 serial data port for local computer access
Rear View
TERMINAL BLOCK A *4 or 6 configurable trip contacts 8 configurable alarm contacts
TERMINAL BLOCK B *0 or 4 configurable alarm contacts 4 high speed configurable contacts 2 auxiliary configurable contacts 1 critical alarm 1 power supply alarm
DC+
CASE GND
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
16
B
(+) (-)
* A9
* A10
* A11
* A12
XT1
N.O.
XT2 N.C.
XT3
N.O.
XT4 N.C.
C1
C2 N.O. N.C.
CRIT. P.S. ALARM ALARM N.O. N.C.
16
17 DC-
SURGE GND
32 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
PL2A
17 A9 A10 A11 A12
N.O.
C
IA IAA IB IBA IC ICA VA VB VC
PL3
*+VSYNC-
D
1 (+)
PL2B
*IRIG B CC1 CC2 CC3
N.C. XT1
XT2
N.O.
N.C. XT3
XT4
N.O. C1
N.C.
C2
P.S. N.C. N.O. CRIT. ALARM ALARM
32
CC4
CC5
CC6
CC7
CC8
VN
* CC9
* CC10
* CC11
* CC12
* I/V
16
(-)
GE Power Management
17 IRIG B CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4 CC5 CC6 CC7 CC8 CC9 CC10 CC11 CC12 I/V
32
TERMINAL BLOCK C current and voltage inputs
PL3 optional serial port, RS232 or RS485
PL2A RS232 serial port
TERMINAL BLOCK D IRIG-B input *8 or 12 configurable inputs fault location I/V
PL2B RS485 serial port

705753A8.CDR
*Note: Lower number for three phase: higher number for single phase
121
ALPS
TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
TRIPPING DIRECTION
52
CONNECTION AS REQUIRED
C1
C(B) A B(C)
C2
C3
C4
C5
CONTROL POWER CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS
GROUND SURGE
I A I AR I B I BR I C I CR Vs
C6 C13 C14 C9 C10 C11 C12 Vs Va Vb Vc Vn
A1 A17
A8
A2
GROUND BUS
T1
GE Power Management
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 C1
ALPS
D2 D18 D3 D19 D4 D20 D5 D21 D6 D22 D7 D23 D8 D24 D9 D25 D10 D26 D11 D27 D12 D28 D13 D29 D1 D17 CC1 CC2 CC3
CONFIGURABLE (38.5 TO 300 VDC)
CC4 CC5 CC6 CC7 CC8 CC9 CC10 CC11 CC12
C2 A1
INPUTS
A2
CONFIGURABLE (SHOWN WITH DEFAULT SETTINGS)
A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
UNMODULATED IRIG-B
DB-9 RS232
PL1 (FRONT)
KT1
DB-25 RS-232
PL2A (REAR)
KT2
KT3
4 WIRE / 2 WIRE RS-485 PL2B (REAR)
KT4
FAULT LOCATION
FIXED
I/V
CRITICAL ALARM POWER SUPPLY ALARM
DB-25 RS-232 RS-485
PL3 (REAR) OPTIONAL OPTIONAL SINGLE POLE MODEL
A3 A19 A4 A20 A5 A21 A6 A22 A7 A23 A8 A24 B27 B11 B28 B12 B29 B13 A9 A25 A10 A26 A11 A27 A12 A28 A13 A29 A14 A30 A15 A31 A16 A32 B1 B17 B2 B18 B3 B19 B4 B20 B21 B5 B22 B6 B23 B7 B24 B8 B25 B9 B26 B10 D16 D32 B30 B14 B31 B15 B32 B16
OUTPUTS
705750AB.CDR
122
ALPS
ALPS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION Positive Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Current Compensation (K0): Zone 1, 2, 3 & 4 Reach: Zone 4 Offset Reach: (Zone 4 is reversible) Zone 2 Timer: Zone 3 & 4 Timers: Phase Instantaneous OC: Ground Instantaneous OC: Ground TOC: TOC Curves: RECLOSER (OPTIONAL) Reclose Attempts: Synchronism Check: In = 1 45 - 90 45 - 90 1.00 - 7.00 0.05 - 250 0.00 - 0.40 In = 5 45 - 90 45 - 90 1.00 - 7.00 0.01 - 50 0.00 - 0.40 INPUTS Contact Converter Inputs: 38.5 - 300 VDC BURDENS Current Circuits: In = 1: 0.02 at 5 In = 5: 0.12 at 30 Voltage Circuits: 50 Hz: 0.20 VA 60 Hz: 0.15 VA DC Battery: Power Supply: < 20 W Contact Converters: 2.5 mA each
POWER SUPPLY Control Voltage: Range: 48 VDC 38.5 - 60.0 VDC 110/125 VDC 88 - 150 VDC 220/250 VDC 176 - 300 VDC
0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.4 - 32 A 2.0 - 160.0 A 0.1 - 16.0 A 0.5 - 80.0 A 0.04 - 3.00 A 0.20 - 15.00 A Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse, Definite and Custom 4 Optional
INSTRUCTION BOOK GEK 105555
OUTPUTS CONTACT RATINGS Trip Contact (T1 - T6):
METERING Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Voltage (ph-ph): 100 - 120 VAC Current (In): 1 or 5 A Maximum Permissible Current: Continuous: 3 A for In = 1 A 15 A for In = 5 A Three Sec: 50 x In One Sec: 100 x In Maximum Permissible AC Voltage: Continuous: 138 VAC (ph-n) One Min: 3.5 x Rated RMS Values: 1% of reading MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Records: Record Length: Pre-fault Cycles: Samples Per Cycle:
Trip SCR (T1 - T6): Auxiliary (A1 - A12) (C1, C2)
Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Interrupting: 25 VA Pickup < 4 ms Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A Interrupting: 25 VA Pickup < 8 ms Continuous = 0.5 A Max. Voltage = 280 VDC = Pickup < 0.5 ms
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -30C to +75C Operation: -20C to +65C Humidity: 95% without condensation
High Speed (KT1 - KT4)
TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage: (High-Pot)
2 - 12 72 - 12 cycles 1-8 64
OSCILLOGRAPHY WITH EXTENDED MEMORY Records: 6 - 36 Record Length: 72 - 12 cycles
COMMUNICATIONS Protocol: ASCII, GE-modem, DNP 3.0 Modbus (optional on revision A relays on Lg) Ports: Front: 1 DB9, RS232 Rear: 1 DB25, RS232 and 4 pin Phoenix, RS485 (Standard): 1 DB25, RS232 or RS485 optional Display: 4 Line Liquid Crystal Display Standard Keypad: Full numeric keypad Standard
2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute ANSI C37.90 IEC 255-5 Impulse Voltage Withstand Fast Transient: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 joules IEC 255-4 ANSI C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 255-22-1 Radio Frequency Interference Withstand (RFI): ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 255-22-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): IEC 255-22-2
DIMENSIONS
TOP VIEW
ALLOW 3" (76mm) CLEARANCE AT REAR OF RELAY FOR CABLE CONNECTIONS 18.91" (462) 4 x 0.28" Dia. (7)
PANEL MOUNTING
MOUNTING EARS MAY BE MOUNTED IN ONE OF 3 POSITIONS AND ROTATED 180 IN ANY DIRECTION 13.63" (346)
5.31" (135)
CUTOUT
2.25" (57)
17.25" (438)
1.53" (39)
2 x mounting ears
18.81" (478)
Inches (mm)
FRONT VIEW
ALPS 5.19" (132) 705752A2.DWG 19.00" (483)
123
ALPS
Transmission line protection, fault location, control, monitoring, and metering shall be supplied as a numeric digital relay system. It shall use one or more microprocessors and waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs. The sampling rate of the relay shall be at least 64 samples per cycle. The typical operating time of the relay (excluding output relay) shall be 0.5 - 1.0 cycle. The protection system shall be available with three phase tripping logic or single phase tripping logic. With single phase tripping logic the relay shall trip only the faulted phase for a singlephase-to-ground fault. The relay shall trip three-phase for all other fault types. Protection functions shall include: I four zones of phase and ground
distance functions I out of step blocking and optional out of step tripping
I ground directional overcurrent funcI I I I I

tions ground overcurrent backup, both IOC and TOC with 4 time curves phase overcurrent backup, instantaneous function overvoltage and undervoltage potential fuse failure setting selectable scheme logics: step distance, POTT, PUTT, blocking, hybrid user programmable logic functions
the outputs shall be configurable. For single phase tripping at least 12 of the inputs and 20 of the outputs shall be configurable. Monitoring and metering functions shall include: I fault location provided by a singleended fault location algorithm
I a trip circuit monitor which shall I

monitor the continuity of the breaker trip circuit RMS metering which shall include individual phase currents and voltages (magnitude and angle), watts, vars and frequency flexible oscillography storage with sufficient memory to permit storage from 6 events of 72 cycles each to 36 events of 12 cycles each self tests performed at start-up and run in the background during operation an events log containing the last 150 events time stamped to the nearest millisecond a fault report generated for each detected fault breaker health which shall be monitored by calculating the I*t or I2*t interrupter operational data
I An optional built-in four shot reclosing function shall be available. Provision to manually trip and close up to two local breakers via the relay shall be provided. Four separate groups of settings shall be provided with one active group. Configurable digital inputs and outputs shall be provided. For three phase tripping at least 8 of the inputs and 15 of
I I I I
ORDERING
ALPS * * * * * * * * * * * * - *
ALPS D A B 1 3 1 5 U C 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 2 3 H V S E 0 1 2 3
Basic unit Advanced Line Protection System Distance Relay Revision Level A Revision Level B Single phase tripping logic Three phase tripping logic 1 A rated current 5 A rated current For applications without Series Capacitors For applications with Series Capacitors 48 VDC battery voltage 110/125 VDC battery voltage 220/250 VDC battery voltage SCR trip outputs & contact channel interface Contact trip outputs & contact channel interface SCR trip outputs & 5V/20mA channel interface Contact trip outputs & 5V/20mA channel interface Front RS232 port & 1 settable RS232/RS485 rear port (GEmodem/ASCII/DNP 3.0) Front RS232 port & 2 settable RS232/RS485 rear ports (GEmodem/ASCII/DNP 3.0) Horizontal mounting Vertical mounting Standard Oscillography Memory Extended Oscillography Memory No Out of Step Tripping or Positive Sequence Overvoltage With Out of Step Tripping With Positive Sequence Overvoltage units With Positive Sequence Overvoltage units & Out of Step Tripping N No recloser R Recloser without sync-check option S Recloser with sync-check option AC Modbus communication
The user interface shall include: I a 20 button keypad and 4 line LCD on
the front of the unit
I an RS232 serial port on the front of

the unit
I RS232 and RS485 ports on the rear

of the unit
I communication software shall be

provided
I an IRIG-B input for time synchronization
The relay shall be packaged in a 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Vertical and horizontal models shall be available.
These options are applicable to Revision A models only.

See pages 15 - 18.
Example: ALPSDA35U122VE1N = ALPS Digital Line Protection Distance Relay; revision A; three phase tripping logic; rated at 5 amperes; without series capacitor protection; 110/125 VDC supply; contact ttripping outputs; 2 communications ports; vertical mounting; with extended memory; without OST functions; and no recloser.
124
LPS-D: High speed transmission line protection for single or three phase tripping. LPS-O: Generator backup with out of step protection.
LPS
Line Protection System
Applications
I I I I
Distance protection for transmission lines (LPS-D) System phase backup for generators/ transmission lines (LPS-O) High speed tripping Single and three phase tripping
DESCRIPTION
The LPS is a multi-function digital protective relay system intended to provide distance protection for transmission lines. It may be also applied where system backup is required. It is available for single or three phase tripping applications. Typical operating times are within 1 cycle. The LPS uses waveform sampling of current and voltage inputs with protection algorithms to provide complete transmission line protection. It includes four zones of phase and ground mho distance functions. It has user selectable pilot schemes with step distance backup. Out of step blocking is provided. It has phase and ground overcurrent instantaneous backup and ground time overcurrent backup as well as under and overvoltage functions. An optional four shot recloser is available with synchronization check. The LPS relay can also provide system backup protection, which includes four zones of phase step distance protection, out of step tripping and blocking, phase and ground overcurrent, overvoltage and undervoltage protection. There are 12 user configurable inputs and 20 user configurable outputs. Two or four separate groups of protection settings are available. The LPS has integrated RMS metering of currents, voltages, watts, vars, and frequency. It stores up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. Reliable fault location displays the distance to the fault in miles, kilometers, or percent line impedance (LPS-D models). High-resolution oscillography is provided with data storage from 6 events of 72 cycles each to 36 events of 12 cycles each. User interface includes a 20 button keypad and a 4 line LCD located on the front of the unit. An RS232 port is also located on the front of the unit. Rear RS232 and RS485 serial ports are provided for remote communication from 300 to 9,600 bps. All ports can be set to either ASCII or GE modem protocols. An optional ModBus RTU protocol card is available for rear communications (LPS-DA only). The LPS is packaged in a compact 3 RU high 19" rack mount case with drawout capability. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting.

Four zones of distance protection Pilot protection, step distance backup (LPS-D) Out of step blocking Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Ground time overcurrent backup Over- and undervoltage functions Optional four shot recloser (LPS-D) Out of step tripping (LPS-O) Configurable inputs and outputs Fully configurable relay logic 4 zones of ground quadrilateral characteristics (LPS-DB only)

I I I I I I
Integrated metering Fault location (LPS-D) Event reporting of last 150 events Fault reports High resolution oscillography & playback Self test diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I
LCD and keypad RS232 and RS485 serial ports ASCII or GE modem protocols Optional ModBus RTU protocol card (LPS-DA only) IRIG-B input
Features
I I
Multiple functions in one package Horizontal and vertical models
GE Power Management
125
LPS
PROTECTION AND CONTROL (LPS-D MODELS)

Distance
The LPS-D provides four zones of phase and ground distance functions. Functions are positive sequence voltage polarized mho characteristics. In addition, Ground Zone 1 functions may be set as adaptive reactance characteristics. The reactance characteristics include an independent supervising mho characteristic with a load compensating adaptive reach. Zone 4 is reversible for use as a blocking zone. Zones 2, 3, and 4 each include independent timers for phase and ground step protection. Out of step blocking is present to detect a swing condition and either block tripping or block reclose initiation. A choice of two or three characteristics are provided, with adjustable characteristic shapes. The LPS-DB has been modified to include 4 zones of quadrilateral ground characteristics.
Voltage
Three single phase under- and overvoltage detectors are provided. As well, a positive sequence overvoltage detector is provided. The LPS-D has potential fuse failure detection logic to detect a full or partial loss of AC potential and to block tripping of the distance and directional functions. A line pickup function provides tripping if the breaker is closed into a zerovoltage bolted fault when line-side potential is used. The LPS-D has a four-wire voltage input suitable for wye connected VTs. The unit also has an optional synchronization check voltage for use with the recloser.
via power line carrier (PLC), FSK via microwave, and FSK via multiplexed fiber optic. Optional 5V/20mA hardware is available for connection to older GE carrier sets.
Four Shot Recloser

An optional four shot recloser is available with reclose programs for both single phase and three phase tripping applications. Reclosing may be initiated from LPS-D protection functions, or via external contact inputs. In addition to a reclose initiation input, the recloser also has inputs for reclose inhibit, reclose cancel, and recloser reset. Output contacts are provided for breaker close, reclose in progress, and recloser in lockout.

Scheme Logics
The scheme logics provided in the unit include: I blocking I permissive underreach transfer trip
(PUTT)

Four separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the LPS-D non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, remote communications or contact inputs.

Ground directional overcurrent functions can be used either in place of or in conjunction with the overreaching ground distance functions in a pilot scheme. The ground directional functions are forward and reverse negative sequence current and voltage operated.
I permissive overreach transfer trip

(POTT1 and POTT2)
I hybrid (POTT plus echo and weak infeed tripping)
I step distance backup (non-pilot) In addition, LPS-D provides user programmable logic with up to 40 gates and 8 timers.
Configurable I/O
All contact converter inputs and all contact outputs (except for two fixed alarms) in LPS-D are configurable by the user. The unit has 12 configurable inputs and 24 configurable outputs. SCR tripping outputs are available for high speed operation.
Overcurrent Backup
The LPS-D provides instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent functions. The phase overcurrent backup consists of an instantaneous function. This function can be controlled by the Zone 2 distance functions. Ground overcurrent backup consists of instantaneous and time overcurrent (TOC) functions. The TOC function includes four curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and definite time) plus a programmable curve. The ground overcurrent functions can be controlled by the directional functions. Both instantaneous and TOC functions can be independently selectable to be non-directional or directional. The LPS-D also provides an adaptive sensitive current disturbance detector (fault detector) using I 2 , I 0 and I 1 . Overcurrent supervision of distance functions is included. Both trip and block units are available for use in ground directional overcurrent pilot schemes. An unbalanced current alarm is provided to detect open or shorted CT leads.
Pilot Channels
The relay may be applied with a wide variety of pilot channel equipment. Typical channels include AM and FSK
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (LPS-D MODELS)

BUS
LPS-D
Metering
50P 21P
21G 67N 67P 51G 27 59
50/
OPTIONS
Recloser
Synchrocheck
25
lpsd_fbd.ai
126
LPS
PROTECTION AND CONTROL (LPS-O MODELS)
Distance
The LPS-O provides four zones of phase step distance protection. Functions are positive sequence voltage polarized mho characteristics. The reach of the three forward looking zones can be compensated for a delta-wye transformer. Zone 4 is reversible and disregards the presence of any transformer between the relay and the fault in the forward or reverse direction. Zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 each include independent timers for phase step distance protection. Out of step blocking is present to detect a swing condition and either block tripping or block reclose initiation. Out of step tripping logic using mho type characteristics is also provided. A choice of two or three characteristics are provided, with adjustable characteristic shapes. Forward and reverse reach along a common maximum reach angle. Loss of synchronism or a power swing between two areas of the power system is detected by measuring the positive sequence impedance seen by the relay over a period of time as the power swing delvelops. time) plus a programmable curve. The ground overcurrent functions can be controlled by the directional functions. Both instantaneous and TOC functions can be independently selectable to be non-directional or directional. The LPS-O also provides an adaptive sensitive current disturbance detector (fault detector) using I2, I0 and I1. An unbalanced current alarm is provided to detect open or shorted CT leads.

Fault Location (LPS-D only)
Proven algorithms provide reliable fault location reporting. The LPS-D will display the fault location in miles, kilometers, or percent of line impedance. The fault location estimate is shown on the LCD along with the trip targeting, and is included in the fault reports and oscillography files.

The LPS can monitor the continuity of the breaker trip circuit. It checks for the presence of DC battery voltage across each open trip contact (or SCR) and triggers and alarm when the voltage becomes virtually zero. It also has a current sensor in series with each trip contact (or SCR) to log an event message indicating whether or not DC trip current was flowing following a relay trip.
Voltage
Three single phase under and over voltage detectors are provided. As well, a positive sequence overvoltage detector is provided. The LPS-O has potential fuse failure detection logic to detect a full or partial loss of AC potential and to block tripping of the distance and directional functions. The LPS-O has a three-wire voltage input suitable for either delta or wye connected VTs.
Metering
The LPS provides the following RMS metering values: I I I I I
current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In) voltage (Va, Vb, Vc) watts (3 phase) vars (3 phase) frequency
Scheme Logic
The LPS-O provides user programmable logic with up to 40 gates and 8 timers.

Ground directional overcurrent functions are provided. The ground directional functions are forward and reverse negative sequence current and voltage operated. The ground instantaneous and TOC functions can be independently set with directional control.


Two separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the LPS-O non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, remote communications or contact inputs.
Overcurrent Backup
The LPS-O provides instantaneous phase and ground overcurrent functions. The phase overcurrent backup consists of an instantaneous function. Ground overcurrent backup consists of instantaneous and time overcurrent (TOC) functions. The TOC function includes four curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and definite
The currents and voltages are calculated for each phase. The accuracy is 1% of rated current and voltage. The phasor value (magnitude and angle) of the phase currents and voltages are also displayed.
Event Reporting
The LPS stores up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the user with the information needed to determine the sequence of events, speeding diagnosis and system recovery. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences including pickup, trips, contact operations, alarms, setting changes, and self test status.
Configurable I/O
All contact converter inputs and all contact outputs (except for alarms) in LPS-O are configurable by the user. The unit has 12 configurable inputs and 20 configurable outputs. SCR tripping outputs are available for high speed operation.
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (LPS-O MODELS)

G
Metering
Oscillography
The LPS captures current and voltage waveforms and selected internal logic signals at 64 samples per cycle. The unit can store from 6 events of 72 cycles each to 36 events of 12 cycles each. The time, date, active settings, and fault report are stored with the data capture. Prefault data can be set from 1 to 8 cycles.
50P 21P
78
50/ 67N 67P 51G
LPS-O
27
59
lpso_fbd.ai
127
LPS

Oscillography can be triggered either by internal signals or external signals. Internal signals include a trip output or a programmable logic signal. In LPS-O models, the out of step trip logic supplied will have a 3 sec oscillography data file consisting of phasor values of the currents and voltages captured at a rate of one per cycle. The LPS has the capability to store the oscillography files in Comtrade format. The LPS relay has the capability to playback stored waveform files through the relays processor. This allows the user to playback faults with different settings.
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The front of the LPS has a 20 button keypad and a 4 line backlit LCD. This allows the user to easily interrogate the relay, change settings, display metering data, and display event information. The keypad has three levels of passwords for settings, control function and master access.
The keypad and display allow easy local access
communications module that may be used to support additional communication protocols. An optional ModBus RTU protocol card is available for rear RS232 or RS485 communications on LPS-D models via Port 3. The ports may be set independently for different data rates from 300 to 9,600 bps.
Security
Four levels of remote password protection are provided to prevent unauthorized communications with the relay via communication Port 1, 2 or 3. There are separate passwords which permit view only, view and settings changes, view and control functions, and all privileges (view, set and control) or master access.
The LPS can store oscillography data for 6 to 36 events
STATUS
Software Tools
TRIP
Four Windows based software packages are included in the LPS instruction book. I ALPS-LINK is a communication
program, which allows the user to communicate with the relay using GE protocol. I ALPS-SET aids the user in calculating the settings and creates a settings file that may be downloaded to the LPS. I ALPS-TEST may be used to calculate the expected operating voltages for the mho distance functions for the applied settings and test conditions. I XPRESSION BUILDER allows the user to graphically design programmable logic and I/O assignments. It creates the logic settings files used by the relay.
LED Indication
The LPS has 2 LED indicators on the front panel. One is a two color LED (red and green) that indicates the relay status. Under normal conditions, the LED is green. If the unit detects a self test critical failure, the LED will turn red, indicating that the relay is out of service. A second red LED is used to indicate that the relay has issued a trip, and that the trip targets have not been reset.
Breaker Health
Just in time maintenance is achieved by using the breaker health function. The LPS calculates and stores the cumulative I*t or I2*t value of each of the three phase currents. A breaker health threshold is established by a setting. If the cumulative value exceeds the threshold setting, a breaker health alarm condition is initiated. Since the user can set the value, the LPS can monitor a breaker with prior duty.
An IRIG-B input is provided which permits the relay to synchronize its clock to the satellite time clock. This ensures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
ALPS-SET and ALPS-TEST are for LPS-D models only. In addition the user may obtain GE-DATA or GE-OSC, oscillography data analysis programs to view the recorded waveforms in the LPS relay.
Xpression Builder creates the logic settings files used by the LPS relay
Expression - [Exp1 : LPS] F ile Edit View Options Entity Window Help

Comprehensive self test diagnostics occur both at power up and continuously in the background while the unit is operating. Upon relay initialization, a complete self test is performed which includes checking the magnetics calibration, A-D converters, RAM, ROM, serial ports, input/output contacts, and MMI. During operation, self tests are performed and any problem causes an alarm and an event log. Critical and non-critical alarm outputs are available.
Front Serial Port

A nine pin RS232 serial port (Port 1) is located on the front of the relay. It allows the user easy access with a laptop computer. Both ASCII and GE modem protocols are available.
Rear Serial Ports

Two configurable communication ports can be provided on the rear of the unit. Port 2 is selectable between RS232 (Port 2A) and RS485 (Port 2B) and is standard on all models. Port 3 is standard and can be set as either an RS232 or an RS485 port. All ports are completely independent. ASCII or GE protocols can be selected independently for each port. Port 3 uses a plug-in
USE CONNECTION TOOL TO CONNECT GATES, INPUTS, ETC. Group2 TRIP A TRIP B TRIP C RI 1P RI 3P SELECT INPUT TRIP A TRIP B TRIP C AND OR TIMER PD TIMER COUNTER T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 SELECT OUTPUT T1 T2 SELECT LOGIC GATE T3
For Help, press F1
128
LPS
TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
TRIPPING DIRECTION
52
C1
C(B) A B(C)
C2
C3
C4
C5
CONTROL POWER CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS
GROUND SURGE
I A I AR I B I BR I C I CR Vs
C6 C13 C14 C9 C10 C11 C12 Vs Va Vb Vc Vn
A1 A17
A8
A2
GROUND BUS
T1
GE Power Management
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 C1
LPS
D2 D18 D3 D19 D4 D20 D5 D21 D6 D22 D7 D23 D8 D24 D9 D25 D10 D26 D11 D27 D12 D28 D13 D29 D1 D17 CC1 CC2 CC3
CONFIGURABLE (38.5 TO 300 VDC)
CC4 CC5 CC6 CC7 CC8 CC9 CC10 CC11 CC12
C2 A1
INPUTS
A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
UNMODULATED IRIG-B
DB-9 RS232
PL1 (FRONT)
KT1
DB-25 RS-232
PL2A (REAR)
KT2
KT3
4 WIRE / 2 WIRE RS-485 PL2B (REAR)
KT4
FAULT LOCATION
FIXED
I/V
CRITICAL ALARM POWER SUPPLY ALARM
DB-25 RS-232 RS-485
PL3 (REAR) OPTIONAL OPTIONAL SINGLE POLE MODEL
A3 A19 A4 A20 A5 A21 A6 A22 A7 A23 A8 A24 B27 B11 B28 B12 B29 B13 A9 A25 A10 A26 A11 A27 A12 A28 A13 A29 A14 A30 A15 A31 A16 A32 B1 B17 B2 B18 B3 B19 B4 B20 B21 B5 B22 B6 B23 B7 B24 B8 B25 B9 B26 B10 D16 D32 B30 B14 B31 B15 B32 B16
CONFIGURABLE (SHOWN WITH DEFAULT SETTINGS)
OUTPUTS
730750A1.CDR
129
LPS
HARDWARE
The LPS is packaged in a compact 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting. The drawout construction of the case allows for all of the printed circuit boards to be withdrawn from the front of the relay with only the highly reliable magnetics remaining in the case. The magnetics module can easily be removed from the case if necessary. The front faceplate is reversible and designed for a quick change between vertical and horizontal orientations. Optional vertical mounting flanges are available for L2 or KD panel cutout mounting.
LPS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PROTECTION Positive Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Current : Compensation (K0): Zone 1, 2, 3 & 4 Reach: Zone 4 Offset Reach: Zone 2 Timer: Zone 3 & 4 Timers: Phase Instantaneous OC: Ground Instantaneous OC: Ground TOC: TOC Curves: In = 1 45 - 90 45 - 90 In = 5 45 - 90 45 - 90 INPUTS Contact Converter Inputs: BURDENS Current Circuits: 5 - 300 VDC (jumper selectable) COMMUNICATIONS Protocol: ASCII, GE modem, ModBus RTU (opt. card) Ports: Front: 1 DB9, RS232 Rear: 1 DB25, RS232 and 4 pin Phoenix, RS485 (Standard): 1 DB25, RS232 or RS485 optional Display: 4 line liquid crystal display standard Keypad: Full numeric keypad standard INSTRUCTION BOOK 1 Pole GEK 106202 LPS-D GEK 106159 3 Pole GEK 106159
8
RECLOSER (OPTIONAL) Reclose Attempts: Synchronism Check:
1.00 - 7.00 1.00 - 7.00 0.05 - 250 0.01 - 50 0.00 - 0.40 0.00 - 0.40 (Zone 4 is reversible) 0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.4 - 32 A 2.0 - 160.0 A 0.1 - 16.0 A 0.5 - 80.0 A 0.04 - 3.00 A 0.20 - 15.00 A Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse, Definite and Custom 4 Optional
In = 1 In = 5 Voltage Circuits: 50 Hz 60 Hz DC Battery: Power Supply: Contact Converters: OUTPUTS CONTACT RATINGS Trip Contact (T1 - T6): <20 W 2.5 mA each
0.02 at 5 0.12 at 30 0.20 VA 0.15 VA
METERING Frequency: Voltage (ph-ph): Current (In): Maximum Permissible Current: Continuous:
50 or 60 Hz 100 - 120 VAC 1 or 5 A
Trip SCR (T1 - T6): Auxiliary (A1 - A12): (C1, C2):
Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Interrupting: 25 VA Pickup < 4 ms Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A Interrupting: 25 VA Pickup <8 ms Continuous = 0.5 A Max. Voltage = 280 VDC = Pickup <0.5 ms
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -30C to +75C Operation: -20C to +65C Humidity: 95% without condensation TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage:
3 A for In = 1 A 15 A for In = 5 A Three Sec: 50 x In One Sec: 100 x In Maximum Permissible AC Voltage: Continuous: 138 VAC (ph-n) One Minute: 3.5 x Rated MONITORING Records: Record Length: Pre-fault Cycles: Samples Per Cycle:
High Speed (KT1 - KT4):
6 - 36 72 - 12 cycles 1-8 64
POWER SUPPLY Control Voltage: 48 VDC 110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC
Range: 38.5 - 60.0 VDC 88 - 150 VDC 176 - 300 VDC
2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 minute (High-Pot) ANSI C37.90 IEC 255-5 Impulse Voltage Withstand Fast Transient: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J IEC 255-4 ANSI C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 255-22-1 Radio Frequency Interference Withstand (RFI): ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 255-22-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): IEC 255-22-2 *Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING
Accessories:
252B3523G1 ModBus RTU Protocol Card (LPS-D models only) 158D7358P1 L2 Flange for Vertical Mounting 158D7359P1 KD Flange for Vertical Mounting NOTE: For dimensions see ALPS brochure.
available for rev A only.
LPS
LPS
* * * * * * * * * * **-*
D O A B 1 3 1 5 U 0 1 2 1 2 3 4
Line protection system Phase & ground distance relay Phase distance relay with out-of-step tripping (system phase backup) Revision level A (LPS-D only) Revision level B Single phase tripping logic (LPS-D only) Three phase tripping logic 1 A rated current 5 A rated current For applications without series capacitors 48 VDC battery voltage 110/125 VDC battery voltage 220/250 VDC battery voltage SCR trip outputs and contact channel interface Contact trip outputs and contact channel interface SCR trip outputs and 5 V/20 mA channel interface (LPS-D only) Contact trip outputs and 5 V/20 mA channel interface (LPS-D only) 2 Front RS232 com port and 1 selectable RS232/RS485 rear port (LPS-DA only) 3 Front RS232 com port and 2 selectable RS232/RS485 rear port (GE-modem/ASCII) H Horizontal mounting V Vertical mounting E Extended oscillography memory 0 Use for LPS-D (no out-of step tripping) 1 Use for LPS-O (with out of step tripping) N No recloser R Recloser without sync-check (LPS-D only) S Recloser with sync-check (LPS-D only) AC ModBus communications option (LPS-DA only)

See pages 15 - 18.
130
Digital transmission line relaying system for single and 3 pole tripping applications.
DLPD
Digital Line Protection System
Applications
I I
Distance protection for transmission lines Single and three phase tripping 8

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The DLPD provides distance protection for HV and EHV transmission lines. It may be used for single or three phase tripping applications. It includes four zones of distance protection. User selectable pilot schemes are provided with step distance backup. Ground instantaneous and time overcurrent functions are independently selectable to be directional or non-directional. Phase overcurrent backup consists of a non-directional instantaneous function. Undervoltage is provided as well as potential fuse failure detection logic. The DLPD has high speed tripping, typically 0.75 to 1.5 cycles, and out of step blocking. Four separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the DLPDs non-volatile memory. A two shot recloser can be provided for single pole or three pole models. Three of the inputs and six of the outputs are user configurable. Two breakers may be tripped manually. The DLPD provides metering values based on the phasor value of the phase currents and voltages. The unit provides reliable fault location and fault reports. The last 100 events are stored in memory time stamped to the nearest millisecond. The DLPD captures oscillography data at 16 samples per cycle. Two to fourteen oscillography records can be stored in the memory, with each record from 72 to 9 cycles depending on the number of events selected. Self-tests are run at power up and during operation. Any selftest problem causes an alarm. Local user interface is provided by a 20 button keypad and a 16 character LED display. A front RS232 port provides easy local computer access. Two rear RS232 ports are provided for remote communication. Data transmission rates are from 300 to 9600 bps. GE and ASCII protocol are provided. Communication and control software is included with each relay. The DLPD is packaged in a compact 3 RU 19" drawout case. Models are available for horizontal or vertical mounting.
Four zones of distance functions Pilot protection, step distance backup Out of step blocking and tripping Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Time overcurrent backup Ground directional overcurrent Potential fuse failure function High speed tripping Optional two shot recloser Protection schemes user selectable Configurable inputs (3) and outputs (6) 4 settings groups Manual breaker control

I I I I I I I I
Integrated metering Fault location Fault reporting of last 5 faults Event reporting of last 100 events Trip circuit monitor Flexible oscillography Self-test diagnostics Continuous monitoring
User Interfaces
I I I I I
Keypad and LED display Two color LED for relay status Three RS232 communication ports GE and ASCII protocols IRIG-B time synchronization input
Features
I
Compact 19" drawout case
GE Power Management
131
DLPD Digital Line Protection System

Step Distance
The DLPD provides four zones of phase and ground distance functions. Functions are positive sequence voltage polarized mho characteristics. In addition ground Zone 1 functions may be set as adaptive reactance characteristics. The reactance characteristics include an independent supervising mho characteristic with a load compensating adaptive reach. Zone 4 is reversible for use as a blocking zone. Zones 2, 3, and 4 each include independent timers for phase and ground step distance protection. Out of step blocking logic is present to detect a swing condition and either block tripping or block reclose initiation. Ground overcurrent backup consists of instantaneous overcurrent (IOC) and time overcurrent (TOC) functions. The TOC function includes four curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and definite time) plus a programmable curve. The ground overcurrent functions can be controlled by the directional functions. Both IOC and TOC functions can be independently selectable to be non-directional or directional. These functions provide an adaptive sensitive current disturbance detector (fault detector) using I 2 , I 0 and I 1 . They also allow the DLPD to provide overcurrent supervision of distance functions. Both trip and block units are available for use in ground directional overcurrent pilot schemes. An unbalanced current alarm is provided to indicate sustained unbalanced current conditions such as an open or shorted current transformer.
Scheme Logics
The scheme logics provided in the DLPD include: I zone 1 extension I blocking I permissive underreach transfer trip
(PUTT)
I permissive overreach transfer trip

(POTT)
I hybrid (POTT plus echo and weak infeed tripping)
I step distance backup (non-pilot)
Pilot Channels
The DLPD uses contact interface to the pilot channel so that the relay may be applied with a wide variety of pilot channel equipment. Typical channels include AM and FSK via power line carrier (PLC), FSK via microwave, and FSK via multiplexed fiber optic.

Ground directional overcurrent functions can be used either in place of or in conjunction with the overreaching ground distance functions in a pilot scheme. The ground directional functions are forward and reverse negative sequence current and voltage operated with both instantaneous and TOC functions. These functions will be disabled during an open pole period.
Two Shot Recloser

An optional two shot recloser is provided with reclose programs for both single phase and three phase tripping applications. Reclosing may be initiated from the DLPD protection functions, or via external contact inputs. In addition to a reclose initiation input the DLPD recloser also has inputs for reclose inhibit, reclose cancel, and recloser reset. Output contacts are provided for breaker close, reclose in progress, and recloser in lockout. Units are provided with a recloser manual lockout feature. A toggle switch for this function is supplied on the front of the unit.
Voltage
A positive sequence undervoltage detector is provided. The DLPD has potential transformer fuse failure (PTFF) detection logic to detect a full or partial loss of AC potential and to block tripping of the distance and directional functions. A line pickup function provides tripping if the breaker is closed into a zero-voltage bolted fault when line-side potential is used.
Overcurrent Backup
The phase overcurrent backup consists of a non-directional instantaneous function.

BUS
DLPD
Metering
50P 21P
21G 67N
68
50/ 51G
DEVICE
21P, 21G 27 50P, 50G 51G 67NT, 67NB 68 79
PROTECTION
Phase & Ground Distance Undervoltage (V1) Instantaneous Overcurrent Time Overcurrent Directional Overcurrent Out of Step Recloser
27
OPTION Recloser
79
706753A4.CDR
132

Fault Location
Proven algorithms provide reliable fault location reporting. The DLPD will display the fault location in miles, kilometers, or percent of line impedance. The fault location estimate is shown on the LCD along with the trip targeting, and is included in the fault report and oscillography files.
The DLPD can store up to 100 events

[]
Relay functions
DLPD COMMUNICATIONS Local functions Setup Help

Four separate groups of protection settings may be stored in the DLPDs non-volatile memory. The active settings group may be selected via the keypad, remote communications or contact inputs.
Fault Report
When a fault occurs pertinent information is stored in memory. The five most recent fault events are stored. The information includes: I unit ID I date and time I operating time I prefault currents I fault currents and voltages I fault type I trip type I distance to fault I selected events
Phone connected
Inputs and Outputs

The DLPD has 7 fixed inputs for the three phase tripping model and 10 fixed inputs for the single phase model. It also has three configurable inputs. Nine possible combinations of settings determine how these inputs are used. These inputs are: I receiver for a pilot scheme I stop carrier signal I block pilot tripping It has 11 fixed outputs for the three phase model and 22 fixed outputs for the single phase model. It also has 6 configurable outputs. Each output has a unique settings category comprising nine settings. These outputs are: I 2 reclose initiate I 2 breaker control I 1 reclose cancel I 1 line overload
Oscillography
The DLPD captures current and voltage waveforms, DLPD measuring functions, and selected internal logic signals at 16 samples per cycle. The unit can store from 2 events of 72 cycles each to 14 events of 9 cycles each. The time, date, active settings, and fault report are stored with the data capture. Prefault data can be set from 1 to 8 cycles. Oscillography can be triggered either by internal signals or external signals. Internal signals include a trip output or a user configurable signal.
The DLPD can store oscillography data for 2 to 14 events

The DLPD can monitor the continuity of the breaker trip circuit. It checks for the presence of DC battery voltage across each open trip contact (or SCR) and triggers and alarm when the voltage becomes virtually zero. It also has a current sensor in series with each trip contact (or SCR) to log an event message indicating whether or not DC trip current was flowing following a relay trip.
Metering
The DLPD provides the following metering values: I current (Ia,Ib, Ic, In) I voltage (Va, Vb, Vc) I watts (3 phase) I vars (3 phase) The DLPD metering values are based on the phasor value (magnitude and angle) of the phase currents and voltages.

Comprehensive self test diagnostics occur both at power up and continuously in the background while the unit is operating. Upon relay initialization a complete self test is performed which includes checking the magnetics calibration, A-D converters, RAM, ROM, serial ports, input/output contacts, and MMI. During operation self tests are performed and any problem causes an alarm and an event log.
Event Reporting
The DLPD stores up to 100 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the user with the information to determine the sequence of events, speeding diagnosis and system recovery. Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences including pickup, trips, contact operations, alarms, setting changes, and self test status.
133

USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The front of the DLPD has a 20 button keypad and a 16 character LED display. This allows the user to easily interrogate the relay, change settings, display metering data, and display event information.
A keypad and display are provided for local user interface
allows the user to access the DLPD with any general purpose PC communications program. The ports use the same data rates which can be set from 300 to 9,600 bps.
Two remote computers can be hooked up, one with full access, and one which only allows data retrieval
I DLP-SET aids the user in calculating

the settings and creates a settings file that may be down loaded to the DLPD. I DLP-TEST may be used to calculate the expected operating voltages for the mho distance functions for the applied settings and test conditions.
In addition the user may purchase DL-DATA, an oscillography data analysis program.
Software packages with easy to use pull down menus are provided with the DLP
[]
Relay functions
DLPD COMMUNICATIONS Local functions Setup Help Settings. . . Load settings from file Print local settings Graph Oscillography view/change Category of local settings Custom TOC curve view/change Individual local setting Save local settings to file go to DOS Model/version number station/Line ID Download local settings to dlpd End setting changes
LED Indication
The DLPD has a two color LED (red and green) that indicates the relay status. Under normal conditions the LED is green. If the unit detects a self test failure the LED will turn red, indicating that the relay is out of service.
Phone connected
SCADA Digital to Analog (DTA) Interface

An internal DTA function provides an analog output proportional to the distance from the relay to the fault and four contact outputs that provide faulttype information. The output can be connected to the analog port of a SCADA RTU to provide remote indication of the distance to the fault.
An IRIG-B input is provided which permits the relay to synchronize its clock to the satellite time clock. This insures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
Front Serial Port

A nine pin RS232 serial port is located on the front of the relay. It allows the user easy local access with a laptop computer. This port uses GE modem protocol. A communications program using this protocol is supplied with every DLPD.
A front serial port allows easy local computer access
Security
Changing settings and initiating control functions from the keypad are protected from unauthorized access via two levels of password protection. Metering and fault data may be viewed without a password. All computer communication with the relay is protected from unauthorized access by three levels of password protection. There are separate passwords which permit view only, view and settings changes, or view and control capability.
HARDWARE
The DLPD is packaged in a compact 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting. The drawout construction of the case allows for all of the printed circuit boards to be withdrawn from the front of the relay with only the highly reliable magnetics remaining in the case. The magnetics module can easily be removed from the case if necessary.
The printed circuit boards can be easily withdrawn from the case
Rear Serial Ports

Two serial ports are provided on the rear of the unit. One is a full function GE modem communications port. The other uses an ASCII protocol and offers access to retrieve event data, fault reports, and metering data. The ASCII port does not allow settings changes or control capability. The ASCII protocol
Software Tools
Three DOS based software packages are included in the DLPD instruction book. I DLP-LINK is a communications
program which allows the user to communicate with the relay using GE modem protocol.
134

FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY 16 Character LED display for viewing data, events and settings.
Two color LED for indicating relay status.
Relay control power.
GREEN: PROTECTION ON RED: CHECK STATUS
GE Power Management
TR I P
AG
1/Y
4 7
Z1 50
DLPD Digital Line Protection

MODEL Ratings: In Vn Freq GEK DLP3512CDH
MLO ON
SET
2
5 8
3/N CLR
POWER ON
INF ACT
5 AMPS 120 VAC 60 Hz 99300 OFF
6 9
END NOT
OFF
ENT
COMM
MLO TOGGLE SWITCH Manual recloser lockout (for DLPD with recloser).
KEYPAD 20 button keypad to interrogate relay, change settings, display metering data and display event information.
COMMUNICATION RS232 serial port for local computer access. 300 - 19,200 bps
Rear View
BLOCK A Power Surge ground 6 configurable outputs 2 auxiliary outputs Non-critical alarm Critical alarm 2 trip outputs 2 channel keying outputs BLOCK B 4 trip outputs 6 auxiliary outputs Reclose in progress Reach reset 3 pole trip enable Lockout alarm
PL2 (ASCII) serial port for remote data access.
TRIP \C1
TRIP B1
REACH RESET
R1-1P2
R1-1P1
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
BFI-C2
BFI-C1
BFI-B2
BFI-B1
RI-3P1
RI-3P2
TRIP 2 (A2)
TRIP 1 (A1)
3PTE
BFI-1 (A1)
BFI-2 (B2)
CRIT ALARM
TRIP C2
TRIPB2
LOA
+DC
BC1
BC2
KT1
KT2
RIP
NC ALARM
RC
LO
PL3 (SCADA) Analog output for SCADA DTA fault location.
A C
-DC
PL3(SCADA)
IRIGB CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4
PL2 (ASCII)
SPARE CC10 CC12 CC13 CC14 CC11 CC9 CC8 CC5 CC6
PL1 (GE MODEM)

SPARE
D
(+) (-)
SPARE SPARE CGND SGND IB+ IC+ IA+ VN VC VB VA IB IC IA
BLOCK C Current and voltage inputs.
BLOCK D 3 configurable inputs 8 fixed inputs 2 reclose initiate inputs IRIG-B input
PL1 (GE MODEM) serial port for full remote access.

706752A7.CDR
135

TYPICAL WIRING
TRIPPING DIRECTION
A B C
A 52
C A
B CONTROL POWER SUPPLY C GROUND BUS
PHASE ROTATION SELECTABLE
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
Ia N Ib N Ic N
C7 C8
Va Vb
C9 C10
Vc V COM
A1 A17 A2 A18 C11 C12

PER ANSII C37.90 AT RATED VOLTAGE
(+) (-) SURGE GROUND CONTROL POWER
TRIP 1
+ + + + + + -
TRIP 2
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
TRIP 3
TRIP 4
TRIP 5
GE Power Management
DLPD
1 POLE WITH RECLOSER (K)
TRIP 6
BFI-A1
BFI-A2
D2 D18 D3 D19 D4 D20 D5 D21 D6 D22 D7 D23 D9 D25 D10 D26 D11 D27 D12 D28 D13 D29 D14 D30 D15 D31 D1 D17
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + IRIG-B RI-3P1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 RCVR 2 STOP CARRIER BLOCK PILOT TRIPPING 52-A1 b 52-B1 b 52-C1 b RECLOSE INHIBIT RECLOSE CANCEL RECLOSE RESET 3 POLE TRIP ENABLE 3 2 RI-3P RCVR 1 Z1RR BFI-B2 1 RI-1P BFI-B1
BFI-C1
BFI-C2
RI-1P1
OUTPUTS
RI-1P2 CHANNEL KEY 1 CHANNEL KEY 2 REACH RESET ZIRR 3 POLE TRIP ENABLE LOCKOUT ALARM RECLOSE IN PROGRESS RECLOSE CANCEL
RI-3P2
PL-1
RS-232
(REAR)
OUTPUTS SCADA
BC-1
NEUTRAL
PHASE B
PHASE C
PHASE A
BC-2 LINE OVERLOAD NON-CRITICAL ALARM CRITICAL OR POWER SUPPLY ALARM
PL-2
RS-232 ASCII
(REAR)
PL-4
RS-232
(FRONT)
13 12 10 9
(REAR)
7
PL3
A9 A25 B16 B32 B15 B31 A10 A26 B14 B30 B13 B29 A11 A27 A12 A28 B8 B24 B7 B23 B6 B22 B5 B21 B4 B20 B3 B19 A15 A31 A16 A32 B10 B26 B11 B27 B12 B28 B9 B25 A8 A24 A13 A29 A14 A30 A3 A19 A4 A20 A5 A21 A6 A22 A7 A23
CONFIGURABLE INPUTS (38.5 TO 300 VDC)
SCADA DTA FAULT LOCATION I/V TRIP DISTANCE SIGNAL
CONFIGURABLE
RS-232
706757A5.CDR
136

DLPD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION Positive Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Angle: Zero Sequence Current: Compensation (K): Zone 1, 2, 3, 4 Reach: Zone 4 Offset Reach: (Zone 4 is reversible ) Zone 2 Timer: Zone 3 & 4 Timers: Phase Inst. O/C: Ground Inst. O/C: Ground TOC: TOC Curves: RECLOSER (OPTIONAL) Reclose Attempts: Modes of Operation: In = 1 45 - 90 45 - 90 1.00 - 7.00 0.05-250 0.00 - 0.40 In = 5 45 - 90 45 - 90 1.00 - 7.00 0.01-50 0.00 - 0.40 INPUTS Contact Converter Inputs: BURDENS Current Circuits: In = 1 In = 5 Voltage Circuits: 50 Hz 60 Hz DC Battery: Power Supply: Contact Converters: 38.5 - 300 VDC POWER SUPPLY Control Voltage: Range: 48 VDC 38.5 - 60.0 VDC 110/125 VDC 88 - 150 VDC 220/250 VDC 176 - 300 VDC
0.12 at 30 0.02 at 5 0.20 VA 0.15 VA < 20 W 2.5 mA each
0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 3.00 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.10 - 10.0 sec 0.4-20 A 2.0-100.0 A 0.1-16.0A 0.5-80.0 A 0.04-3.00 A 0.20-15.00 A Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse, Definite, and Custom 2 8 for single pole, 4 for three pole
PACKAGING Weight: Dimensions: Vertical: Horizontal:
23 lbs (10.4 kg) 16.9" x 5.15" x 13.75" (42.92 cm x 13.08 cm x 34.92 cm) 5.15" (3RU) x 19" x 13.75" (13.08 cm x 48.26 cm x 34.92 cm)
METERING Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Voltage (ph-ph): 100 - 120 VAC Current (In): 1 or 5 A Maximum Permissible Current: Continuous: 2 A for In = 1 A 10 A for In = 5 A Three Sec: 50 X In One Sec: 100 X In Maximum Permissible AC Voltage: Continuous: 2 x rated One Min: 3.5 x rated Metering (at rated voltage and current): current 5%, voltage 2V MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Records: Record Length: Pre-fault Cycles: Samples Per Cycle:
OUTPUTS CONTACT RATINGS Trip Contact: Continuous = 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Interrupting = 180 VA resistive at 125/250 VDC 60 VA inductive at 125/250 VDC Pickup < 5 ms Trip SCR: Continuous= 5 A Make & Carry = 30 A per ANSI C37.90 Auxiliary: Continuous = 3 A Make & Carry = 30 A Interrupting = 25 VA inductive at 125/250 VDC Pickup < 8 ms Maximum Control: Maximum = 50 mA Max. Voltage = 280 VDC Pickup < 0.5 ms COMMUNICATIONS Protocol: ASCII and GE-modem Ports: Front: I DB9, RS232 GE-modem protocol Rear: 1 DB25, RS232 GE modem protocol 1 DB25, RS232, ASCII protocol Display: 16 character LED Display Standard Keypad: Full numeric keypad Standard
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -30 C to +75 C Operation: -20 C to +55 C Humidity: 95% without condensation
2 - 14 72 - 9 cycles 1-8 16
TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage: 3 kV DC, 1 min (Hi-Pot) ANSI C37.90 Impulse Voltage Withstand Fast Transient: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 Joules IEC 255-4 ANSI C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 255-22-1 Radio Frequency Interference Withstand (RFI): ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 255-22-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): IEC 255-22-2 *Specifications subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
PLAN VIEW - KD PLAN VIEW PLAN VIEW - L2
9.37" (238) 13.75" (349) 13.75" (349) 16.90" (429) FRONT VIEW - KD 17.08" (434) FRONT VIEW 18.84" (479)
9.37" (238) 13.75" (349)
16.90" (429) 20.03" FRONT VIEW - L2 (509) 6.56" (167)
19.25" (489) 6.38" (162)
5.15" (131)
0.28"Dia. (7) 5.56" (141) 5.88" (149) 0.16" (4)
PANEL CUTOUT AND DRILL PATTERN FOR MOUNTING - KD 17.88" (454) 4x0.28"DIA. (7) 2.25" (57) 1.50" (38)
HORIZONTAL / VERTICAL PANEL CUTOUT AND DRILL PATTERN 18.38" (467) 17.25" (438)
PANEL CUTOUT AND DRILL PATTERN FOR MOUNTING - L2 19.88" 9.94" (505) 6x0.28"Dia. (252) (7) 5.25" (133) 5.69" (144) 6.12" (156) 0.22" (6)
CUTOUT
18.50" (470) MTG. FLANGE - KD FRONT
CUTOUT
CUTOUT
7.78" (198)
19.25" (489)
MTG. FLANGE - KD SIDE
MTG. FLANGE - L2 SIDE
15.56" (395) MTG. FLANGE - L2 FRONT 20.03" (509)
6.38" (162) 1.00 (25) 2 PL
Inches (mm) 1.00 (25) 2 PL
6.56" (167)
706750A3.DWG
137

Transmission line protection, fault location, control, monitoring, and metering shall be supplied as a digital relay system. It shall use one or more microprocessors and waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs to provide the features described below. The sampling rate of the relay shall be at least 16 samples per cycle. The typical operating time of the relay (excluding the output relay) shall be 1.5 cycles or less. Three phase tripping logic or single phase tripping logic shall be available. With single phase tripping logic the relay shall trip only the faulted phase for a single-phase-to-ground fault. The relay shall trip three-phase for all other fault types. Protection functions shall include: I four zones of phase and ground
distance functions
An optional built-in reclosing function shall be available. The reclosing function shall provide one or two reclosing attempts and allow the selection of eight different modes of operation for single pole and four modes of operation for three pole. Provision to manually trip and close up to two local breakers via the relay shall be provided. Four separate groups of settings shall be provided, with the active group selectable either locally or remotely. To provide flexible use of the relay user configurable digital inputs and outputs shall be provided. At least 3 of the inputs and 6 of the outputs shall be user configurable. Fault location shall be provided by a single-ended fault location algorithm which shall display the distance from the relay to the fault in miles, kilometers, or percent of line impedance. A digital to analog interface shall be available to provide an analog output proportional to the fault location estimate. Four normally open contacts shall be provided to indicate the phases involved in the fault. A trip circuit monitor shall be provided which shall monitor the continuity of the breaker trip circuit. RMS metering shall include: I individual phase currents and voltages (magnitude and angle)
Flexible oscillography (instantaneous values of current and voltage) storage shall be provided. Sufficient memory shall be present to permit storage from 2 events of 72 cycles each to 14 events of 9 cycles each. Oscillography storage shall always be triggered when the relay trips and can also be triggered via other internal signals or an external contact. Self tests shall be performed at start-up and run in the background during operation. Self test failures shall be split into critical failures, which shall disable the relay, and non-critical failures. The two types of failures will operate separate alarm contacts. An events log shall be maintained containing the last 100 events time stamped to the nearest millisecond. A fault report shall be generated for each detected fault. A 20 button keypad and 16 character LED display shall be located on the front of the unit. Three RS232 serial ports shall be provided, one on the front and two on the rear of the unit. The front port and one of the rear ports use GE Modem protocol, and communication software shall be provided. The second rear port uses ASCII protocol and shall be used to retrieve fault and metering data and to view settings. Password protection shall be provided for both keypad and computer communication. An IRIG-B input shall be available for time synchronization. The relay shall be packaged in a 3 RU high 19 inch rack mount case. Vertical and horizontal models shall be available. The unit shall be available with drawout construction.
I phase selector function to determine I I I I I I I

the faulted phases out of step blocking ground directional overcurrent functions ground overcurrent backup, both IOC and TOC with 4 time curves phase overcurrent backup, instantaneous function overvoltage and potential fuse failure line pickup function setting selectable scheme logics: step distance, POTT, PUTT, blocking, hybrid
I watts I vars
ORDERING
DLP
DLP
* * * * * * *
1 3 1 5 0 1 2 1 2 C J K D H V
Basic unit digital line protection system Single phase tripping logic Three phase tripping logic 1 Amp rated current 5 Amp rated current 48 VDC battery voltage 110/125 VDC battery voltage 220/250 VDC battery voltage SCR trip outputs and contact channel interface Contact trip outputs and contact channel interface Three phase tripping without recloser Single Phase tripping without recloser Single or three phase tripping with recloser Revision Level Horizontal mounting Vertical mounting

See pages 15 - 18.
138
Digital distance protection, control, metering and analysis.
MLP
Digital Distance Protection
Applications
I I I
Sub-transmission & distribution lines Three pole tripping Generator backup protection 8

I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The MLP is a digital distance protection system. This powerful protection system is more cost effective than an installation using conventional equipment. Its main application is in subtransport and distribution lines of up to 66 kV and 132 kV for lines with three phase tripping, at distances of up to 150 km. Its capacity to register events, along with its control and monitoring capabilities, make it especially suitable for use in unattended substations, as it eliminates the need to send technicians to the site to collect data and reset the relay. The protection functions include three phase directional distance protection zones for phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground faults with an additional zone dependent function on zone I (extended zone I). Measuring units are provided with the characteristics selectable between reactance with negative sequence polarization and variable mho for the detection of phase-toground faults in zone I, extended zone I, and zone II. Variable mho measuring units are provided for the detection of phase-to-phase faults in zone I, extended zone I, zone II, and all types of zone III faults. The MLP offers three-phase tripping in all zones. The relay has three selectable protection schemes: step distance, zone I extension, and zone II acceleration (requires a communication channel). A three phase recloser is available. A fuse failure detector is provided in the voltage measuring circuits. An out of step blocking unit is provided. A remote open pole detector is available. The MLP meters the instantaneous current and voltage values. It monitors local breaker operations, allowing breaker maintenance. It has a selectable current or power demand register which can store hourly values for up to 7 days. It has an event record that can store up to 240 events. A fault report is generated for each fault detected, and a fault locator is included. An oscillograpic register is included which can store up to 7 records of 30 cycles each. Local interface is via a 20 button keypad and a 2 line LCD display. Remote communication is available via an RS232 port or fiber optics. M-LINK software is provided with the relay. The standard MLP comes with a test block. It is packaged in a 19 inch rack-mount case.
Three zones of distance functions Step distance protection zones Zone I extension protection scheme Zone II acceleration Out of step blocking Line pick-up Remote open pole detector Fuse failure 3 shot programmable recloser 3 protection schemes

I I I I I I I I
Fault locator Fault reports Oscillography: 7 records, 30 cycles each Event record: up to 240 events Hourly power or current register: up to 7 days Supervision functions for breaker maintenance Real time monitoring of main quantities and states Self test functions
User Interfaces
I I I
Keypad and display Communications via RS232 or fiber optics M-Link software provided
Features
I
19 inch drawout case
GE Power Management
139
MLP Digital Distance Protection

MLP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
METERING Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (selectable) Rated Current: 1 or 5 A Rated Phase to Phase Voltage: 110 VAC at 50 Hz 120 VAC at 60 Hz Auxiliary Voltage: 48/125 VDC, 20% 110/250 VDC, 20% INPUTS THERMAL CAPACITY Current Circuits: Continuous: Three sec: One sec: Voltage Circuits: Continuous: One min: OUTPUTS CONTACTS Trip and Close: Make and Carry: Carry Continuously: Break: ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature: Operation: -20C to + 55C Storage: -40C to + 65C Ambient Humidity: up to 95% without condensation
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In 2 x Vn 3.5 x Vn
COMMUNICATIONS 1 mm plastic Fiber Optics 100/140 or 50/125 Glass Fiber Optics
Make/Break Delay: AUXILIARY CONTACTS Max Operating Power: 1760 VA Max Operating Current: 8A Rated Current: 8A Max Operating Voltage: 250 VDC/380 VAC Connection Time: 12 ms Reclose Time: 10 ms TRANSMISSION START CONTACT (REED RELAY) Max Operating Voltage: 500 VDC Max Operating Current: 0.5 A Max Operating Power: 20 W Make Delay: 0.5 ms
3000 W during 0.2 sec with a max of 35 A and 300 VDC 8A 150 W with a max of 8 A or 380 VDC max 10 ms/4 ms
TYPE TESTS Dielectric Test: Voltage Withstand Test: 1 MHz Interference Test: Electrostatic Discharge: Radio Interference: Fast Transient:
2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak 0.5 J Class III (IEC 255-22-1) Class IV (IEC 255-22-2) Class III (IEC 255-22-3) Class III (IEC 255-22-4)
APPROVALS Compliant *Specifications subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW 19.05 (484) SIDE VIEW 10.25 (260)
TYPICAL WIRING
A 52
B
C A
B
C CONNECT AS REQ'D.
GROUND BUS
7.30 (185)
B12 B11 B10 B9

Ia Ia Ib Ib
B8
Ic
B7
Ic
A2
A3 A4
A5
A6
A7
C1
C2
A1
Va COM Vb COM Vc COM
G
CONTROL POWER
Ia
Ic
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
INCHES (mm) CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN 0.28 Dia. (7) 4 Pl. 7.00 (178) 4.00 (102) 1.50 (38)
727700A2.DWG
EQUIPMENT ALARM
GE Power Management
C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 D11 D12 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
TRIP TRIP
CLOSE CLOSE OUTPUTS
MLP3000
E1 E2
E4 E5 E6 CC - 1 52b
18.30 (465) 17.35 (441)
INPUTS
CC - 2 TRIP BLOCK CC - 3 MANUAL CLOSE
CC - 4 INITIATE RECLOSE
CC - 5 CANCEL RECLOSE CC - 6 CHANNEL RCVR CC - 7 PULLBACK Z1 EXT.
KEY CARRIER COMMON FUSE FAIL BFI Z2 TIMER Z3 TIMER COMMON COMMON Z1 PULLBACK RECLOSING 79 LOCKOUT
CUTOUT
CC - 8 INHIBIT RECLOSE
COMMON
E3
REAR PL - 1 RS232 (Modem) or Fiber optics
* Selectable relays can be factory programmed as: Reclose intitiate Z2 timer Reclose cancel Z3 timer Fuse failure Reclosing BFI Reclose lockout Line PU trip Pullback Z1 extension Zone switching Remote open pole detector Z1 timer Any measuring unit
727701A6.ai Any ground measuring unit Any Z1 Ground measuring unit Any Z3 ground measuring unit Any phase measuring unit Any Z1 phase measuring unit Any Z3 phase measuring unit
ORDERING
MLP3000: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
three distance protection zones step distance protection scheme zone I extension protection scheme out of step blocking fuse failure detection line pick-up event register current/power log fault report remote communications automatic reclosure remote open pole detector zone II acceleration fault locator oscillographic register
MLP
MLP
3 * * * M0 * 0 * 00 *
0 1 1 5 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 G H B
Without test block (optional) With test block (standard) In = 1 A In = 5 A With keyboard and RS232 With keyboard and 1 mm plastic fiber optic With keyboard and 100/140 glass fiber optic With keyboard and 50/125 glass fiber optic 48 VDC Vaux inputs 125 VDC Vaux inputs 220 VDC Vaux inputs Vaux = 48/125 VDC Vaux = 110/250 VDC Revision level
140
* SELECTABLE (FACTORY DEFAULTS)
E7 E8 E9 E10
DISTRIBUTION FEEDER PROTECTION

F60
Three phase, neutral, and ground protection with metering and event analysis for feeder applications.
The F60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides feeder protection and power metering in one integrated package. It may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system.
F35
Feeder current, bus voltage, and underfrequency for multiple feeder applications.
The F35, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides feeder protection and power metering for up to 5 feeders with busbar voltage measurement or 6 feeders without busbar voltage in one integrated package. It may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated sub-station control system.
750/760
Complete protection and monitoring of industrial and utility feeders.
The 750/760 Feeder Management Relay is a digital relay intended for the management and primary protection of distribution feeders. It can also be used for management and backup protection of busses, transformers, and power lines.
DFP200
Comprehensive feeder protection, control and monitoring with high impedance fault detection.
The DFP200 is a digital relay system that provides distribution feeder protection, control, metering, and monitoring. It uses waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs at 32 times per cycle.
DFP100
Digital relay system that provides comprehensive distribution feeder protection.
The DFP100 is a digital protection, control, metering, and monitoring system. It uses waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs together with appropriate algorithms to provide feeder protection.
DMS
Protection and control numerical system.
The DMS Feeder Management System is a microprocessor based multifunction protection, control, and measurement unit part of GEs DDS Product Family. The DMS uses a set of algorithms to create a general purpose protection and control unit for electrical power systems.
SMOR-B
Protection, monitoring, analysis and energy management numerical system.
The SMOR Feeder Management System is a microprocessor based multifunction protection, control and measurement unit.
MDP
Three phase and ground overcurrent protection with communication capability.
The MDP is a digital non-directional overcurrent relay that protects against three phase and ground faults. Remote control and monitoring of the breaker enables control room breaker operation.
SECTION 9: DISTRIBUTION FEEDER PROTECTION SELECTOR GUIDE..................142 F60...........................................143 F35...........................................147 750/760 ...................................151 DFP200 ....................................159 DFP100 ....................................167 DMS ........................................175 SMOR-B ..................................179 MDP ........................................183 735/737 ...................................187 MIF ..........................................193 MIC ..........................................197
735/737
Three phase and ground feeder protection relay.
The 735/737 is a microprocessor based relay used to perform primary circuit protection on distribution networks at any voltage level. Protection features include three phase timed overcurrent, phase instantaneous overcurrent and ground timed overcurrent.
MIF
Complete numerical economical feeder protection relay.
The MIF relay is a microprocessor based relay used to perform primary circuit protection on distribution networks at any voltage level.
MIC
Non-directional, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground overcurrent protection for AC systems.
The MIC 1000 is a digital, microprocessor-based overcurrent relay that provides nondirectional phase to phase and phase to ground overcurrent protection.
141
Distribution Selector Guide

V
MIF MDP 737/735 SMOR-B F35
KV
735/737 SMOR-B DFP100 I I I I I I I I I I I I 3+N I 3+N I I I I I I I I I I 3+N I I I I I I I I I DFP200 I I I I 3+N I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8 I 8 750/760 I I I I 3+N I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4 I 14 1 5 8 8 3 4(760) I I I 1 14 8 I I I I I I I I 0.5% I F35 I I I I 3+N I I F60 I I I I 3+N I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8 I I I I
DFP100
DFP200
750/760
F60
FEATURES Phase time overcurrent Ground time overcurrent Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Dual Element IOC Number of phases protected Definite time overcurrent Hiset and lowset instantaneous overcurrent Negative sequence time overcurrent Negative sequence overcurrent Voltage phase sequence Undervoltage Undervoltage DC Overvoltage Negative sequence overvoltage Underfrequency Overfrequency Negative sequence directional Zero sequence directional Phase directional Phase distance Slow reset TOC option Programmable TOC curves High impedance fault monitor Breaker failure Settings groups Trip circuit supervision Thermal Image Protection Configurable inputs (digital) Fixed Inputs Analog inputs Configurable outputs (digital) Analog outputs E/M outputs Fixed outputs Multi-shot reclosing Sequence coordination Cold load pickup logic Programmable logic Programmable input & outputs Transducer inputs Contact converters (digital inputs) Contact outputs Power quality monitoring Metered values: Ia, Ib, Ic, In I0, I1, I2 Va, Vb, Vc Watts (1 phase and 3 phase) VARS (1 phase and 3 phase) VA Frequency Power factor KWH, KVARH, or MWH, MVARH Metering (I & V accuracy) Demand profiling:Ia, Ib, Ic Watts (1 phase and 3 phase) VARS (1 phase and 3 phase) VA Peak demand recording (above demand values) Oscillography (samples/cycles) Data logger (channels) Events RS232/RS485/fiber optic ASCII protocol set Protocol flexibility IRIG-B port ModBus protocol Fault location Fault reporting Frequency rate of change Breaker health
DEVICE 51 51N 50 50N
62 50H/50L 46 46L 47 27 27 DC 59 59O 81U 81O 67N 67G 67P 21
MIF I I I I O 3+N I I
MDP I I I I 3+N I
PROTECTION
O(7) 64HiZ 50/62 74TC I O(2) 2 O(4) 6 4/O(2) 79 O O 2 8 (737) (3)735/(11)737 3 O 2 I 3 I 12 I 6 I 5
8 I I
I/O
12 5 5 4 I I I
4 8 4 4 I I I 6 8 I I2 I 3PH 3PH I O O 1% I
8 10 2 4 I I I I 8 10 I I I2 I I I I I I I 1% I I I I I 32
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 0.25% I I I I I 64 I I I I I I I I
CONTROL
I I I I I I I I I I I I 0.5% I I 3PH 3PH I 64 I I I I I I I
3 2 81THD I I
3 I
12 17 I I2 I 3PH 3PH I I
MONITORING & METERING
3%
5%
3%
3%
16/22(O) O(24) 232/485
16 8 232/485 I
I 16
I 16 8
I I O
MISC.
485 or 422 232/485/FO 232/485/FO I I I I I I I I I
255 (max) 232/485 232/485/422 I I I I I I I I I I
COMM
O option
142
Distribution Feeder Protection
Comprehensive protection, control and metering for feeder applications.
F60
Feeder Management Relay
Applications
I I
Feeder protection and metering Component in control system Phase, neutral, ground IOC Phase, neutral, ground TOC Voltage restrained TOC Sensitive ground IOC and TOC 13 Standard curve shapes: (IEEE/IEC/IAC/I2t) or FlexCurve Phase, neutral and negative sequence directional Phase overvoltage Phase undervoltage Underfrequency Autoreclose and synch check Breaker failure Current, voltage, power metering Demand metering 64 samples/cycle oscillography 1024 Event record Data logging (8 channels) URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2 x 20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators FlexLogic Distributed FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability Common modules (reduce spares cost) IRIG-B time synchronization
Protection
I
DESCRIPTION
The F60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides feeder protection and power metering in one integrated package. It may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system. Protection functions include phase, neutral, & ground overcurrent, under and over voltage, and underfrequency elements. Other functions include power metering, phasor representation of current and voltage, as well as contact input and output status. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The F60 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus /TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the F60 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of waveforms, analog valves and digital flags. The URPC software is used to view these records. The F60 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
Features
I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
143

The F60 time overcurrent protection includes: I Three individual phase time overcurrent elements (all with identical characteristics) I Neutral time overcurrent element I Ground time overcurrent element
IEC
IEEE
Typical applications for undervoltage protection are: I Protection for sensitive loads such as
induction motors
I Permissive functions such as blocking of elements or external devices I Automatic re-energization schemes
GE IAC
Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring

The DC voltage across the open contact of selected outputs is continuously measured by the relay to indicate whether the associated external breaker trip or close circuit is intact. If this voltage becomes virtually zero, then the trip circuit has opened.
Neutral elements operate on the calculated 3I 0 current; ground elements operate on the ground input current. Each time overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics: I Pickup level I Choice of 13 standard curve shapes,
Custom
MONITORING
Data Logger
2 FlexCurve protection curves and curve multipliers I Instantaneous and electromechanical reset time characteristic
Typical application of a UR FlexCurve: When the protection curves used for lateral taps 2 and 3 differ, a custom FlexCurve can be constructed to coordinate with both
Three Phase, Neutral and Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent

The F60 instantaneous overcurrent protection includes: I Three individual phase instantaneous
overcurrent elements (all with identical characteristics) I Neutral instantaneous overcurrent elements I Ground instantaneous overcurrent elements
2
1 FlexCurve TIME
Metering
2
The F60 provides the following metering values:

3 CURRENT
D30_flex.ai
I Current Ia, Ib, Ic, In I Busbar Voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn, or I I I I I

Vab, Vbc, Vca1 Watts Vars Power factor Volt Amps Demand
must exceed the pickup for operation and for resetting
Phase Undervoltage
The F60 has three individual phase undervoltage elements (all with identical programmable characteristics): I Pickup level I Definite time or inverse time curve I Minimum operating voltage
1 Phase to ground quantities not available with open delta VT Connection.
Sensitive Ground Input

The F60 CT/VT module may be ordered as sensitive ground. The sensitive ground CT input is ten times more sensitive than the regular ground CT input. This enables the F60 to provide ground fault protection on high impedance grounded or un-grounded systems and may be especially important when using a residual CT connection to detect ground faults.

52
79
CLOSE
TRIP
3V_0
81U 81U
Monitoring
50P-1&2 50_2-1&2
51P
51_2
50BF
51P/V
67P
50N-1&2
51N
67N
50NBF
27P-1&2
METERING
59_1
50G-1&2
51G 59_2
25
F60

R
832727A8.CDR
144

TYPICAL WIRING
POSITIVE WATTS
A B C
(5 Amp CT)
52
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION (ABC)
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 8a
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 4b
IG
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4a
F 2c
F 3c
F 1c
VA
VA
VC
VB
VB
VC
VA
VA
VC
VB
VB
VC
VX
VX
IG5
IA5
IA1
IC5
IB5
IB1
IC1
IG1
IA
IB
IC
F 4c
F 8c
CIRCUIT 1 VOLTAGE INPUTS 8A / 8B
CIRCUIT 1 CURRENT INPUTS

I V I V V I V
DIGITAL I/O
6B
H1
H2
H3
H4

W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b W 7a W7c W 8a W 8c W7b
( DC ONLY )
H5
H6
CONTACT IN W 5a CONTACT IN W 5c CONTACT IN W 6a CONTACT IN W 6c COMMON W 5b CONTACT IN W 7a CONTACT IN W 7c CONTACT IN W 8a CONTACT IN W 8c COMMON W7b SURGE 6C CONTACT IN U1a CONTACT IN U1c CONTACT IN U2a CONTACT IN U2c COMMON U 1b CONTACT IN U3a CONTACT IN U3c CONTACT IN U4a CONTACT IN U4c COMMON U3b CONTACT IN U5a CONTACT IN U5c CONTACT IN U6a CONTACT IN U6c COMMON U5b CONTACT IN U7a CONTACT IN U7c CONTACT IN U8a CONTACT IN U8c COMMON U7b SURGE DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O 6A
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c W1a W1b W1c W2a W2b W2c W3a W3b W3c W4a W4b W4c P 1a P 1b P 1c P 2a P 2b P 2c P 3a P 3b P 3c P 4a P 4b P 4c P 5a P 5b P 5c P 6a P 6b P 6c P 7a P 7b P 7c P 8a P 8b P 8c
TC1
9
VOLTAGE SUPV. TC2
W1
W2
W3
W4
W 8b
U 1a U 1c U 2a U 2c U 1b U 3a U 3c U 4a U 4c U 3b U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 5b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b
P1
6D
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
DIGITAL I/O
P7
RS-232 DB-9
P8
DC
AC or DC
(front)
6K
M1
POWER SUPPLY
M2
M3
M4
M5
Ground at Remote Device
COM
CPU
Co-axial
IRIG-B SURGE
DIGITAL I/O

No. 10AWG Minimum GROUND BUS
RS485 COM 1
COM
9A
M6
RS485 COM 2
M7
M8
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X W V
6 I/O 6
U T
S R
6
P N M
6 I/O I/O
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
I/O
I/O
CT/VT
*
(Rear View)
* Optional
UR
COMPUTER
1 2 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECTOR
B
1 Power Supply
832710B2.cdr
145
Feeder protection, control, monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on feeders and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. Protection and control functions shall include: I time overcurrent elements: two for
phase, one for neutral, one for ground I time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for precise or difficult coordination I instantaneous overcurrent elements: two for phase, two for neutral, two for ground
I 2 undervoltage elements (instantaI I I I I I

neous or timed) 2 overvoltage elements underfrequency element cold load pickup 4 shot, three pole autoreclose synchrocheck breaker control feature for manual control of one or two breakers 16 digital elements
changing conditions such as cold load pickup, feeder configuration changes, seasonal requirements, testing, etc. Voltage inputs shall be included to provide voltage level detectors and additional metering data. Metering functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor.
I All elements shall have a blocking input that allows supervision of the element from other elements, contact inputs, etc. The relay shall have eight setting groups for protection elements. This allows for dynamic reconfiguring of the protection elements to adapt to

ORDERING
F60 F60 F60
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F** H ** M** P** U** W** F** H ** M** P**
HC VF H L 8A 8B 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT 8 RTD 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD 8 dcmA inputs 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module
Feeder Management Relay is a registered trademark of GE Power Management

See pages 15 - 18.
146
Feeder current, bus voltage, and underfrequency for multiple feeder applications.
F35
Multiple Feeder Management Relay
Applications
I I
Multilple Feeder protection & metering I 5 circuits with busbar voltage I 6 circuits without busbar voltage Component in control system 9
DESCRIPTION
The F35, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides feeder protection and power metering for up to 5 feeders with busbar voltage measurement or 6 feeders without busbar voltage in one integrated package. It may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system. Protection functions include phase, neutral, ground overcurrent, undervoltage, and underfrequency elements. Other functions include power metering, phasor representation of current and voltage, as well as contact input and output status. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The F35 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the F35 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags, as well as a snapshot of protection settings. The URPC software is used to view these records. The F35 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
Protection
I I I I I I I
Phase, neutral IOC Phase, neutral, ground TOC Sensitive ground TOC 13 Standard curve shapes: (IEEE/IEC/IAC/I2t) or FlexCurve Underfrequency (6 levels) Undervoltage 4 shot configurable recloser/feeder

I I I I I I I
Current, voltage, power metering Current, voltage phasors Demand metering 64 samples/cycle oscillography 1024 Event record Self diagnostics Data logging (8 channels)
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 Port (115kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet Port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2x20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I I
FlexLogic Virtual I/O (reduce hardware cost) Expandable I/O Flash memory for field upgrades Drawout modules for serviceability IRIG-B time synchronization
GE Power Management
147
F35 Multiple Feeder Management Relay

The F35 time overcurrent protection includes: I Three individual phase time overcurrent elements (all with identical characteristics) I Neutral time overcurrent element I Ground time overcurrent element
Sensitive Ground Input

The F35 CT/VT module may be ordered as sensitive ground. The sensitive ground CT input is ten times more sensitive than the regular ground CT input. This enables the F35 to provide ground fault protection on high impedance grounded or un-grounded systems and may be especially important when using a residual CT connection to detect ground faults.
Phase Undervoltage
The F635 has three individual phase undervoltage elements (all with identical programmable characteristics): I Pickup level I Definite time or inverse time curve I Minimum operating voltage Typical applications for undervoltage protection are: I Protection for sensitive loads such as
induction motors
Neutral elements operate on the calculated 3I 0 current; ground elements operate on the ground input current. Each time overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics:
I Pickup level I Choice of 13 standard curve shapes, 2
FlexCurves and curve multipliers
IEEE
I Permissive functions such as blocking of elements or external devices I Automatic re-energization schemes
IEC
Trip and Close Circuit Monitoring

The DC voltage across the open contact of selected outputs is continuously measured by the relay to indicate whether the associated external breaker trip or close circuit is intact. If this voltage becomes virtually zero, then the trip circuit has opened.
I Instantaneous and electro-mechanical

reset time characteristic
GE IAC
Three Phase and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent

The F35 instantaneous overcurrent protection includes: I Three individual phase instantaneous
overcurrent elements (all with identical characteristics) I Neutral instantaneous overcurrent elements
Custom
Metering
The F35 provides the following metering values: I Current Ia, Ib, Ic, In I Busbar Voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn, or I I I I I
Vab, Vbc, Vca1,2 Watts1 Vars1 Power factor1 Volt Amps1 Demand1
must exceed the pickup for operation and for resetting
Typical application of a UR FlexCurve: When the protection curves used for lateral taps 2 and 3 differ, a custom FlexCurve can be constructed to coordinate with both
1 FlexCurve TIME
1 Available only with busbar voltage input (5 feeders). 2 Phase to ground quantities not available with open delta VT Connection.
The voltage and current accuracy is 0.5% of full scale.

3 CURRENT

1 2 3 4
Average and maximum demand data is stored per phase for current, watts, vars, and volt-amps. The demand period is adjustable from 1 to 60 minutes in steps of 1 minute.
Data Logger
Same Functions as Breaker 1 For Breaker 1
50P 2
51P 1
50N 2 79
51N 1 27 1 2
81 6
51G
METERING
F35
Multiple Feeder Management Relay
832738A2.CDR
148

TYPICAL WIRING
POSITIVE WATTS
P 1a P 1b P 1c P 2a P 2b P 2c P 3a P 3b P 3c P 4a P 4b P 4c P 5a P 5c P 6a P 6c P 5b P 7a P 7c P 8a P 8c P 7b P 8b
F 1a IA5 F 1b
IA
6G
P1
I V I V I V I V
F 1c IA1 F 2a IB5 F 2b
IB
P2
P3
CIRCUIT ~
F 2c IB1 F 3a IC5 F 3b
IC
P4
F 3c IC1 F 4a IG5 F 4b
IG
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CURRENT INPUTS 8C / 8D CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN
P 5a P 5c P 6a P 6c P5b
F 5a IA5 F 5b
IA
DIGITAL I/O
F 4c IG1
P 7a P 7c P 8a P 8c COMMON P7b
SURGE
F 5c IA1 F 6a IB5 F 6b
IB
GE Power Management
CIRCUIT ~
F 6c IB1 F 7a IC5 F 7b
IC
F35
MULTIPLE FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

I V I V I V I V
H1
F 7c IC1 F 8a IG5 F 8b
IG
H2
F 8c IG1
H3
M 1a IA5 M 1b
IA
H4
M 1c IA1 M 2a IB5 M 2b
IB
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE CIRCUIT ~
H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H5b H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b H 8b
6G
UR
COMPUTER
M 3a IC5 M 3b
IC
M 3c IC1 M 4a IG5
CURRENT INPUTS 8C / 8D
DIGITAL I/O
M 2c IB1
1 2 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECTOR
M 4b
IG
RS-232 DB-9 (front)
M 4c IG1 M 5a IA5 M 5b
IA
M 5c IA1 M 6a IB5 M 6b
IB
W1
I V I V I V I V
W2
CIRCUIT ~
M 6c IB1 M 7a IC5 M 7b
IC
W3
M 7c IC1 M 8a IG5 M 8b
IG
W4
M 8c IG1
CONTACT IN W 5a CONTACT IN W 5c CONTACT IN W 6a CONTACT IN W 6c COMMON W5b CONTACT IN W 7a CONTACT IN W 7c CONTACT IN W 8a CONTACT IN W 8c COMMON W7b SURGE
W1a W 1b W 1c W 2a W 2b W 2c W 3a W 3b W 3c W 4a W 4b W 4c W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b W 7a W 7c W 8a W 8c W 7b W 8b
U 1b
IA
U 1c IA1 U 2a IB5 U 2b
IB
CIRCUIT ~ CURRENT INPUTS
U 2c IB1 U 3a IC5 U 3b
IC
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER HI LO
U 3c IC1 U 4a IG5 U 4b
IG
B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B5b B 6b B 6a B 8a B 8b
DC
POWER SUPPLY
8A / 8B
AC or DC
U 4c IG1 U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 7a U 7c
VA VA VB VB VC VC
9D
NORMAL COM ALTERNATE 1 TEST ONLY RS485 COM 2
Tx1 Rx1 10BaseF Tx2 Rx210BaseF
Fibre *Optic
CIRCUIT ~ VOLTAGE INPUTS
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER CPU
COM
IRIG-B
SURGE GROUND
Co-axial
832735A4.CDR
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X W V
6 I/O 8
U T
S R
6
P N M
8 CT/VT I/O
J
6
H G
8
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
GROUND BUS No. 10AWG Minimum
CT/VT
I/O
CT/VT
(Rear View)
( DC ONLY )
U 1a IA5
DIGITAL I/O
6G
149
F35 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

Feeder protection, control, monitoring and metering for up to 5 feeders with busbar voltage measurement or 6 feeders without busbar voltage shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on feeders and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. Protection and control functions per feeder shall include: I time overcurrent elements: one for
phase, one for neutral, one for ground I time overcurrent curve characteristics: IEEE, IEC, IAC, I2t, definite time, and custom curve for precise or difficult coordination I instantaneous overcurrent elements: two for phase, two for neutral
I four shot, three pole autoreclose The relay shall also include: I 2 undervoltage elements (instantaneous or timed) I underfrequency element with six operating levels I 16 digital elements
location, and additional metering data. Metering functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, and power factor.

All elements shall have a blocking input that allows supervision of the element from other elements, contact inputs, etc. The relay shall have eight setting groups for protection elements. This allows for dynamic reconfiguring of the protection elements to adapt to changing conditions such as cold load pickup, feeder configuration changes, seasonal requirements, testing, etc. Voltage inputs shall be included to provide voltage level detectors, fault
ORDERING
F35 F35 F35
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC VF
* *
F ** F **
H ** M** H ** M**
P** P**
U**
W**
HC VF H L 8A 8B 8C 8C 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 8C 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V DC power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT 8 RTD 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD 8 dcmA inputs 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module
Multiple Feeder Management Relay is a registered trademark of GE Power Management

See pages 15 - 18.
150
Complete protection and monitoring of industrial and utility feeders.
750/760
Application
I
Industrial and utility feeders

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The 750/760 Feeder Management Relay is a digital relay intended for the management and primary protection of distribution feeders. It can also be used for management and backup protection of busses, transformers, and power lines. The relay tracks the power system frequency and adjusts the sampling rate to maintain accuracy at all times. The relay is specifically designed to be an economical feeder management system, incorporating the requirements for protection, control, metering, and both local and remote user interfaces in one assembly. This eliminates the need for expensive discrete components. Complete overcurrent protection is provided. This includes phase, neutral, ground, sensitive ground, and negative sequence protection for time and instantaneous overcurrent, and directional control. Overvoltage, undervoltage, and underfrequency functions each have two independent stages. For the 760 control includes a four shot recloser. With programmable logic inputs and outputs the 750/760 can be easily configured for the users specific applications. The relay has extensive monitoring and metering functions. It has an internal memory which allows it to record the last 128 events, the last 10 faults, and a total of 256 cycles of oscillography data. The relay performs self-tests in the background during operation. A simulation function allows the user to test the relay without the need for external AC voltage and current inputs. The relay has a 2 line display and keypad as well as three serial ports for computer interface. A PC program is provided which allows a computer to communicate with the relay for a variety of functions including monitoring and control.
Complete time overcurrent Complete instantaneous overcurrent Directional overcurrent control Undervoltage and overvoltage Negative sequence voltage Undervoltage automatic restoration Bus underfrequency Underfrequency automatic restoration Breaker failure Manual close control Cold load pickup control 4 setting groups Syncrocheck - V, , Hz, & dead-source 20 Programmable logic inputs Bus transfer Four shot recloser (SR760 only)

Fault locator, record of last 10 Breaker operation & trip failure VT Failure Power factor - two independent stages Analog input - level and rate Total breaker arcing current Event recorder - last 128 events Oscillography - 128 cycles Metering: V I Hz W var VA PF Demand: Ia, Ib, Ic, MW, Mvar, MVA Data Logger
User Interfaces
I I I
Numeric keypad & 40 character display 24 LED indicators RS232, RS485 & RS422 ports
GE Power Management
151
750/760 Feeder Management Relay

Time Overcurrent
The 750/760 has two phase time overcurrent elements. Each phase time overcurrent element has level detectors for each phase. The 750/760 also has two neutral time overcurrent elements, and one time overcurrent element each for ground, sensitive ground, and negative sequence. Each time overcurrent element has the following programmable characteristics: I pickup current level for trip, alarm, or
control I choice of 15 curve shapes (including FlexCurves) and curve multipliers I instantaneous or linear reset time characteristic I voltage restraint
sensitive ground, and negative sequence. Each instantaneous overcurrent element has a programmable pickup current, a time delay during which current must exceed the pickup for operation, and the minimum number of phases required for operation.
Neutral Directional Control

For neutral directional sensing, the residual current of the phase CTs is used as the operating current. This unit can be voltage, current or dual polarized. The current element uses a CT in the ground return path for polarizing.The voltage element uses the calculated zero sequence voltage as the polarizing voltage. The maximum torque angle is programmable.
Phase Directional Control

Directional overcurrent relaying is necessary for the protection of multiple source feeders, when it is essential to limit relay tripping to faults in only one direction. Fault directional control is incorporated into the relay for each phase. If directional control is enabled, overcurrent elements are blocked if current is in the non-trip direction.
Phase Directional (for Phase A)
Van Typical Fault Angle 60 Lag
Bus Under, Over, Negative Sequence, and Neutral Displacement Voltage

When the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay, the undervoltage protection features can cause a trip, generate an alarm, or signal an external control system. The undervoltage elements are inhibited from operating unless voltages are above a programmed level. The overvoltage protection features can either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage exceeds a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay. The negative sequence voltage element operates as the overvoltage element, on the calculated Bus V2. The neutral displacement voltage element operates as the overvoltage element, on the calculated 3V0.
Curve Shapes
Ze
ANSI
Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Normally Inverse Moderately Inverse Definite Time Curve A (BS142) Curve B (BS142) Curve C (BS142) Short Inverse Extreme Inverse Very Inverse Inverse Short Inverse FlexCurve A FlexCurve B
82675A1.CDR
r To
ro ine
Ia
Operating Current
um e xim Lin Ma rque To
qu eL
MTA set at 30 lead Polarizing Voltage Vbc (or Vcb)
IEC
Vcn (or Vbn)

FO A RW RD
Vbn (or Vcn)
IAC
RE
VE
SE
996698AH.dwg
Custom

SOURCE
Typical application of FlexCurves
OUTPUTS
N dcmA Level : Bus VT Rate

81U 1+2 81
Decay
Trip Relay Close Relay 5 Auxiliary Relays Self-Test Warning Relay 8 Analog Outputs
760/750 1 FlexCurve
Breaker 52
: 27 1+2 Trip Coil Monitors Close Line VT 1 27 3+4 3 Calc. 3Io Calc. I2 50 BF 50P Level 50P
Demand
59 1+2 Breaker Operation
810
25
Calc. 3Vo
CONTROL
Synchrocheck Cold Load Pickup Manual Close Undervoltage Restoration Underfrequency Restoration Transfer Auto Reclose (760)
Phase A only Calc. V2 Calc. V1 59N VT Fail 51V Current Supervision Zone Coordination Calc. I2 79X 760 Only 50P 1+2 Control 51P 1+2 67P 47
TIME 2
55 1+2
MONITOR
Power Factor Demand Tripping Arcing Fault Locator Analog Input Over Frequency VT Failure Event Recorder Oscillograph Data Logger
Calc. I1
3 CURRENT
826751A2.cdr
50N
Level
46/50
46/51
46/67
Calc. V2
Control 50N 1+2 Control POLARIZING CURRENT* GROUND OPERATING CURRENT 51N 1+2 Calc. -Vo
67N
Instantaneous Overcurrent
The 750/760 has two phase instantaneous overcurrent elements. Each phase instantaneous overcurrent element has level detectors for each phase. The 750/760 also has two neutral instantaneous overcurrent elements, and one instantaneous overcurrent element each for ground,
COMMUNICATIONS
1 x RS232 2 x RS485 OR 1 x RS422 Modbus RTU DNP 3.0
50G
51G
67G
Control SENSITIVE GROUND OPERATING CURRENT
50SG
51SG
67SG
Control
* POLARIZING CURRENT AND GND CURRENT 818840AD.dwg ARE MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE SINCE BOTH USE THE SAME RELAY CT INPUT TERMINALS
152

This element operates when the frequency falls below a programmed threshold for a programmed interval. Underfrequency elements are inhibited from operating unless the voltage in phase A is above a programmed threshold.
ANSI
27 47 50
PROTECTION / CONTROL
Bus / Line Undervoltage Negative Sequence Voltage Phase/Neutral/Gnd/Neg Seq/Sens Gnd Inst O/C Phase/Neutral/Gnd/Neg Seq/Sens Gnd Time O/C Bus Overvoltage/Neutral Displacement Phase/Neutral/Neg Seq/Sens Gnd/Gnd Directional Control Bus Underfrequency/Rate of Change Undervoltage Automatic Restoration
Overfrequency
The relay monitors the system for overfrequency conditions. Upon detection, the relay can be used to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal.
51 59 67 81

Four groups of protection settings are provided. The active group can be selected by setpoint or logic input.
Underfrequency Automatic Restoration Breaker Failure with Current Superv. Bus Transfer Programmable Logic Inputs
Synchrocheck
Breaker closing can be supervised by V, f and Hz setpoints. Dead-source alternatives are provided.
ED ER Ca pac ito r Ra dia l Tw o-e nd ed BU S Ba cku p Tra nsf er TR AN SF O Ba cku R M E R p LIN E Ba cku p
Underfrequency
FE
MONITORING / CONTROL
Cold Load Pickup Control

When a feeder is closed after a prolonged outage, the feeder inrush and motor accelerating current may be above some protection feature settings. These protection features are not required to trip the feeder for a time, so they may be automatically or manually blocked or raised for a period after the breaker is closed.
Cold load pickup
500
25 50 55 79 81
Synchrocheck Phase/Neutral Current Level Power Factor Autoreclose (760 only) Overfrequency Breaker Open/Close Manual Close Feature Blocking Cold Load Pickup Feature Blocking Breaker Operation Failure Trip/Close Circuit Failure Total Breaker Arcing Current VT Failure
Current (% of normal)
400
300
NORMAL TRIP SETTING

200
Demand (A, MW, Mvar, MVA)

PICKUP
X
PICKUP
100
Analog Input Event Recording
OUTAGE
0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
LOAD ENERGIZED
Time (seconds)
818846A2.cdr
Analog Output Fault Locator
Manual Close Control

The inrush current on some feeders may cause an overcurrent element to trip. It may be necessary to block or alter particular overcurrent protection features for an interval. After the breaker is closed manually, the relay can block any instantaneous overcurrent element or raise the pickup value of any time overcurrent element, each for a programmable time delay, after which normal operation is restored.
Trip Counter
FEATUR60/50.AI
Automatic Restoration
The relay can be programmed to automatically close the breaker after it has been tripped from undervoltage or underfrequency and after these parameters return to normal.
Recloser (760 only)

Reclosing can be initiated externally or from overcurrent protection. Up to four reclosure operations are possible, each with a programmable dead time. For each reclosure shot, the relay can be programmed to block any instantaneous overcurrent element, and to adjust the curve characteristics of any time overcurrent element. The number of shots can be reduced by high currents.
Bus Transfer
A set of three relays, two on incoming and one on a normally open bus tie breaker can perform transfers on lossof-source.
153

Breaker Conditions
A traditional breaker failure scheme with a timer supervised by current through the breaker is available. An alarm can be generated if the relay detects that the supervisory trickle current is not present. Also a failure to respond to an open or close signal in a programmed time can be used to generate an alarm. The relay also calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by integrating the arcing current passing through the contacts while they are opening. When the breaker maintenance threshold is exceeded the relay can trigger an alarm.
Trip Counter
The relay records the number of breaker trip operations. This value can be displayed for statistical purposes, especially for units that are not equipped with operation counters.
The trace memory can be configured to store 2, 4, 8, or 16 records
Metering
The 750/760 performs accurate measurement of the following: I I I I I
actual V A Hz W Wh var varh VA PF watthour cost phasor presentation of V & I symmetrical components of V & I line (synchro) voltage: RMS voltage, frequency, and differentials I percent of load-to-trip I analog input I running and maximum demand: A, MW, Mvar, MVA
Data Logger
A configurable memory block provides the ability to record 8 channels of any measured or calculated parameter. In continuous mode, this feature can be programmed to store from 68 seconds of data captured every power frequency cycle to 24 weeks of data captured every hour.
VT Failure 9
The VT failure feature monitors each phase of input voltage. If a failure is detected, an alarm condition is generated and the programmed output relays signal an output. A condition in which all phase voltages have fallen below 10% of nominal is not considered a VT failure, as it can simply be a de-energized source circuit.
Setpoints are provided to allow the user to simulate three common electrical utility demand measuring techniques.
Fault Locator
A calculation determines the type of fault from captured data, the distance to the fault and the impedance to the fault. Records of the last 10 faults are stored.
Simulation
The relay provides a powerful simulation feature for testing the functionality of the relay in response to programmed conditions, without the need for external AC voltage and current inputs. System parameters such as currents and voltages are entered as setpoints. Pre-fault, fault, and post-fault conditions can be simulated to exercise relay features.
Power Factor
The relay monitors power factor and allows two stages of capacitance switching for power factor compensation. Two independent elements monitor power factor, each with programmable pickup, dropout and time delay.
By monitoring the power factor the 750/760 can help minimize both costs and voltage excursions
SWITCH CAPACITOR 1 IN CIRCUIT SWITCH CAPACITOR 2 IN CIRCUIT SWITCH CAPACITOR 2 OUT OF CIRCUIT SWITCH CAPACITOR 1 OUT OF CIRCUIT
Event Recorder
The relay captures and stores the last 128 events, recording the time, date, cause, and system parameters. Events may be recorded selectively by category, so that only events of interest are recorded. Multiple relays can be coordinated within one millisecond when IRIG-B is available.
Self-Testing
The 750/760 performs self-diagnostics after power-up, and continuously in a background task. Self-test failures are divided into major failures, which can disable protection features, and minor failures, which just trip indicators.
leading (-)
Trace Memory
POWER FACTOR 1 DROPOUT POWER FACTOR 2 DROPOUT
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
POWER FACTOR 1 PICKUP POWER FACTOR 2 PICKUP
POWER POWER FACTOR 1 FACTOR 2 DELAY DELAY
818847A2.cdr
Analog Input
Any external quantity may be monitored via an auxiliary current input. Two analog input level monitoring elements and two rate-of-change elements are available. When the measured quantity exceeds the pickup level, the relay can be cause an alarm or signal an output.
A block of configurable volatile memory is provided for recording samples of the AC input voltages and current, and the status of logic inputs and output relays. This memory can be configured between the ranges of 2 to 16 blocks with 128 to 16 power frequency cycles of data respectively. The amount of data captured before the time of triggering is programmable. Trace memory recording can be triggered by operation of selected features or logic inputs.
POWER FACTOR
Logic Inputs
The relay has 14 contact and 20 serial inputs which can be programmed to perform any of 60 predefined functions, including remote tripping, resetting, feature blocking, etc.
(+) lagging
154

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Outputs
The 750/760 has eight electro-mechanical relay outputs. I 2 are factory programmed for breaker control
USER INTERFACES
Communications
There are three independent communications ports. A rear RS485/422 port, a rear RS485 port and a front RS232 port. All ports may use the AEG Modicon ModBus protocol. One of these ports may be selected for DNP 3.0 use. All ports can be used simultaneously to retrieve actual values, change setpoints, or execute commands.
The 750/760PC program has easy to use pull down menus
I 5 can be configured to operate as

either failsafe or non-failsafe, and either latching, self-resetting, or pulsed; these relays can be programmed to be operated by any feature I 1 of the relays is factory programmed as a failsafe internal failure alarm relay
Access Security
The 750/760 can be protected against unauthorized setpoint changes. A jumper must be installed on the rear terminals to allow setpoint changes from the front panel. An optional passcode restricts setpoint changes from both the front panel and communications ports.
The 750/760 has one high-speed SCR solid state output. The 750/760 has 8 analog output channels. Any of 31 measured parameters can be selected to drive these outputs.
Keypad & Display

The relay has control keys and a numerical keypad which can be used to control and program the relay without a computer. The relay has a 40 character vacuum fluorescent display, from which all setpoint and actual value messages can be viewed. It also displays user selected default messages after a period of inactivity. Diagnostic messages are displayed when any feature generates a trip or alarm condition.
IRIG-B Input
An IRIG-B input is provided for time synchronization using a satellite time signal.
Setup Program
The 750/760 comes with a disk containing the 750/760PC program. This program can be used to communicate with the relay to detect status, read actual values and view and modify setpoints. It can also be used to monitor data, control the breaker, download and upload setpoint files, update the firmware, and to test the relay.
SCHEME LOGIC
The 750/760 instruction manual provides complete descriptions of the operation of each feature in the relay, both in written descriptions and in block diagrams. The diagrams are sequential logic diagrams illustrating how each setpoint, input parameter, and internal logic is used in a feature to obtain an output. Logic is described using basic AND and OR gates, and cross-references to other block diagrams are clear and precise.
Setpoints block diagram
SETPOINT PHASES REQUIRED FOR OPERATION: A B C Any One Operate for programmed Any Two combination All Three OR
LED Indicators
The 750 has 20 LED indicators. These include indicators for relay status, breaker status, and output status. The 760 has the same 20 LED indicators plus 4 additional LEDs to indicate the status of the recloser.
FEATURES
40 character vacuum fluorescent display
Status indicators and local control keys for relay status, breaker status, and output status
818848A2.cdr
Level Detectors block diagram

50N-2 SETPOINT GROUND O/C PICKUP:
AND
RUN
Control and programming keys
Program port interface to local computer

Ig PICKUP
818849A2.cdr
Handle to draw out relay Numerical keypad
155
TYPICAL WIRING
DIRECTION OF POWER FLOW FOR POSITIVE WATTS POSITIVE DIRECTION OF LAGGING VARS PHASE CTs BUS VT LINE VT
SOURCE Select ABC or ACB Phase Sequence
1A OR 5A
L O A D
WYE VT CONNECTION SEE VT WIRING IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
THIS CONNECTION PROVIDES THE RESIDUAL (310) CURRENT FOR NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT
SEE GROUND INPUT WIRING IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CONTROL POWER
G7 H7 G8 H8 G9 H9 G3 H3 G10 H10
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION A B C C A B V AB V CB
SEE LOGIC INPUT WIRING IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND CURRENT INPUTS IA N IB N IC N I sg I sg IG N
G5
VA
H5
VB
G6 H6
VC VCOM
G4
V1
H4
V2
H11 H12 G11 G12

FILTER GROUND
CONTROL POWER
PHASE SYNC. VOLTAGE INPUTS COIL MONITOR 1
9
G5 H5 G6 H6
VA VB VC VCOM
SETPOINT ACCESS KEYSWITCH
C1 LOGIC INPUT 1 C2 LOGIC INPUT 2 C3 LOGIC INPUT 3 C4 LOGIC INPUT 4 C5 LOGIC INPUT 5 C6 LOGIC INPUT 6 C7 LOGIC INPUT 7 C8 RESERVED C9 RESERVED C10 SETPOINT ACCESS C11 SETPOINT ACCESS C12 + 32VDC D1 LOGIC INPUT 8 D2 LOGIC INPUT 9 D3 LOGIC INPUT 10 D4 LOGIC INPUT 11 D5 LOGIC INPUT 12 D6 LOGIC INPUT 13 D7 LOGIC INPUT 14 D8 RESERVED D9 RESERVED D10 RESERVED D11 RESERVED D12 DC NEGATIVE
COIL MONITOR 2
GE Power Management
G1 H1 G2 H2 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 F6 E6 E8 F7 E7 F8 F9 E9 E11 F10 E10 F11 F12 E12
GROUND SAFETY
GROUND BUS SEE SUPERVISION WIRING IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
750/760
SOLID STATE TRIP 1 TRIP
52a 52b
TRIP COIL
TRIP CIRCUIT CLOSE CIRCUIT
2 CLOSE
CLOSE COIL
LOGIC INPUTS
3 AUXILIARY OUTPUT RELAYS
4 AUXILIARY
5 AUXILIARY
6 AUXILIARY
FRONT PANEL LOCAL PROGRAMMING PORT RS232
7 AUXILIARY

NOTE THE SELF-TEST WARNING OUTPUT RELAY IS FAILSAFE. E12 & F12 ARE OPEN WHEN CONTROL POWER IS APPLIED AND NO SELF-TEST WARNINGS ARE PRESENT.
9 WIRE RS232 PERSONAL COMPUTER
SELFTEST 8 WARNING
RS232
RS232 INTERFACE
COMMUNICATIONS IRIG B COM2 RS485

COM
750 / 760 PC SETUP
COM1 RS422
TX TX
ANALOG INPUT
SLD
B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

SEE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SHIELD
RS485
COM
OUTPUTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
25 PIN CONNECTOR
COM A RS485 B OUTPUT CHANNEL COMMON 1 INPUT CHANNELS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 COMMUNICATION GROUND SELECTED PARAMETERS COMMON
SCADA OR COMPUTER
NOTE CABLE SHIELDS TO BE GROUNDED AT PLC / COMPUTER END ONLY.
996007EL.dwg
156

750/760 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Pickup Level: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Curve Shape: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/ Normally Inverse Definite Time (0.1 s base curve) IEC Curve A/B/C and Short FlexCurve A/B (programmable curves) IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier: 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous/Linear Level Accuracy: Per current input (I2 is 3 x input error) Timing Accuracy: at 1.03 x PU: 3% of trip time or 20 ms (whichever is greater) SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Pickup Level: 0.005 to 1.000 in steps of 0.001 x CT Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Curve Shape: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/ Normally Inverse Definite Time (0.1 s base curve) IEC Curve A/B/C and Short FlexCurve A/B (programmable curves) IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier: 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01 Reset Type: Instantaneous/Linear Level Accuracy: Per current input (I2 is 3 x input error) Timing Accuracy: at 1.03 x PU: 3% of trip time or 20 ms (whichever is greater) PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Pickup Level: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 x CT Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Level Accuracy: Per phase/neutral/ground current input (I2 is 3 x phase input error) Timing Accuracy: at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): relay contacts = 50 ms max solid state output = 45 ms max at non-zero time delay: delay accuracy = 0 to +20 ms Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmable) phases have to operate for output (Not for I2) BUS UNDERVOLTAGE 1/2 AND LINE UNDERVOLTAGE 3/4 Minimum Voltage: > programmable threshold from 0.00 to1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 Pickup Level: 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT Dropout Level: 102 to 103% of Pickup Curve: definite time or inverse time Time Delay: 0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1 s Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmed) to operate for output (bus undervoltage only) Level Accuracy: Per voltage input Timing Accuracy: 100 ms OVERVOLTAGE 1/2 Pickup Level: 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay: 0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1 s (definite time) Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmable) phases have to operate for output Level Accuracy: Per voltage input Timing Accuracy: 100 ms NEGATIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Pickup Level: 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay: 0.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1 (definite or inverse time) Level Accuracy: 3 x voltage input error Timing Accuracy: 100 ms UNDERFREQUENCY 1/2 Minimum Voltage: 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT in Phase A Pickup Level: 20.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s (definite time) Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz Timing Accuracy: at 60 Hz: 25 ms at 50 Hz: 30 ms BREAKER FAILURE Pickup Level: 0.05 to 20.0 x CT in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level: 97 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay: 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 10 Timing Accuracy: 20 ms error Level Accuracy: per CT input CONTROL UNDERVOLTAGE RESTORATION Initiated By: Trip from Undervoltage 1, 2, 3 or 4 Minimum Voltage Level: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 Time Delay: 0.1 to 100.0 in steps of 0.1 s Incomplete Sequence Time: 1 to 10000 in steps of 1 min. Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmable) phases have to operate for output Level Accuracy: Per voltage input Timing Accuracy: 100 ms UNDERFREQUENCY RESTORATION Initiated By: Trip from Underfrequency 1 or 2 Minimum Voltage Level: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 Minimum Frequency Level: 20.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz. Time Delay: 0.1 to 100.0 in steps of 0.1 s Incomplete Sequence Time: 1 to 10000 in steps of 1 min. Level Accuracy: Per voltage and frequency input Timing Accuracy: 100 ms MONITORING VT FAILURE Programmable to inhibit features. TRIP / CLOSE COIL MONITORS Detect open trip and close circuits. PULSE OUTPUT Pulse output is 1 second on time and one second off time after the programmed interval. LAST TRIP DATA Records cause of most recent trip, 4 RMS currents, and 3 RMS voltages with a 1 ms time stamp. TRIP COUNTERS Accumulates all ground, sensitive ground, neutral, negative sequence, and phase overcurrent trips. EVENT RECORDER (128 EVENTS) Records event cause, 3 phase current phasors, 1 ground current phasor, sensitive ground current phasors, 3 voltage phasors, system frequency, synchronizing voltage, synchronizing frequency, and analog input level with a 1 ms time stamp. WAVEFORM CAPTURE Data Channels: 4 currents, 3 voltages, 14 logic input states and 8 output relays Sample Rate: 16 per cycle Trigger Source: Element pickup/trip/dropout, control/alarm event, logic input or manual command Trigger Position: 0 to 100% Storage Capacity: 2 to 16 events with 2048 to 256 samples of data respectively DATA LOGGER Data Channels: 8 channels; same parameters as for analog outputs available Sample Rate: Per Cycle / Per second / Per Minute / Every 5,10,15, 20, 30, or 60 min Trigger Source: Pickup/trip/dropout, control/alarm event, logic input, manual command, or continuous Trigger Position: 0 to 100% Storage Capacity: 2 to 16 events with 2048 to 256 samples of data respectively (4096 if continuous) OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUTS Type: Active Outputs: 8 Channels; specify one of the following output ranges when ordering: Output Range Maximum Load 0-1 mA 12 k 0-5 mA 2.4 k 0-10 mA 1.2 k 4-20 mA: 600 Isolation: Fully isolated Accuracy: 1% of full scale Response Time: 100% indication in less than 3 power system cycles (50 ms @ 60 Hz) SOLID STATE TRIP Make and Carry Output Relays Configuration: 15 A @ 250 VDC for 500 ms Form A Form A Form C Form C
INPUTS PHASE CURRENT INPUT Source CT: 1 to 50000 A primary / 1 or 5 A secondary Relay Input: 1 A or 5 A (specified when ordering) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at 1 or 5 A Conversion Range: 0.01 to 20 x CT (fundamental frequency only) Accuracy: at < 2 x CT: 0.5% of 2 x CT at 2 x CT: 1% of 20 x CT Overload Withstand: 1 second @ 80 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current Calculated Neutral Current Errors: 3 x phase inputs GROUND CURRENT INPUT Source CT: 1 to 50000 A primary / 1 or 5 A secondary Relay Input: 1 A or 5 A (specified when ordering) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at 1 or 5 A Conversion Range: 0.01 to 20 x CT (fundamental frequency only) Accuracy: at < 2 x CT: 0.5% of 2 x CT at 2 x CT: 1% of 20 x CT Overload Withstand: 1 second @ 80 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT Source CT: 1 to 50000 A primary / 1 or 5 A secondary Relay Input: 1 A or 5 A (specified when ordering) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at 1 or 5 A Conversion Range: 0.005 to 1.000 x CT (fundamental frequency only) Accuracy: at < 0.1 x CT: 0.2% of 1 x CT at 0.1 x CT: 1% of 1 x CT Overload Withstand: 1 second @ 80 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current BUS AND LINE VOLTAGE INPUTS Source VT: 0.12 to 600 kV / 50 to 240 V Source VT Ratio: 1 to 5000 in steps of 0.1 Relay Input: 50 V to 240 V phase-neutral Burden: Less than 0.025 VA at 120 V or > 576 K Max. Continuous: 273 V phase-neutral (Full Scale) CT (fundamental frequency only) Accuracy (0-40C): 0.25% of full scale (10 to 130 V) 0.8% of full scale (130 to 273 V) (for open delta, the calculated phase has errors 2 times those shown above) LOGIC INPUTS Inputs: 14 contact and / or virtual, 6 virtual only (Functions assigned to logic inputs) Dry Contacts: 1000 maximum ON resistance (32 VDC @ 2 mA provided by relay) Wet Contacts: 30 to 300 VDC @ 2.0 mA (External DC voltage only) ANALOG INPUT Current Input: 0-1 mA, 0-5 mA, 0-10 mA, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA (programmable) Input Impedance: 375 10% Conversion Range: 0 to 21 mA Accuracy: 1% of full scale TRIP AND CLOSE COIL MONITORING INPUTS Acceptable Voltage Range: 20 to 250 V DC Trickle Current: 2 mA to 5 mA IRIG-B INPUT Amplitude-Modulated: 2.5 to 6 Vp-p @ 3:1 signal ratio DC Shift: TTL PRODUCTION TESTS Thermal Cycling: Operational test at ambient, reducing to -40 C and then increasing to 60 C Dielectric Strength: On CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Switch inputs, Coil Supervision outputs, and Relay outputs (2 kVac for 1 minute) to Safety Ground. TYPE TESTS Fast Transient: Per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 and IEC 801.4 (Level 4) (5 kV @ 5x50 ns, RI = 50 ) Insulation Resistance: Per IEC 255-5 (500 VDC, 2000 M ) Dielectric Strength: Per IEC 255-5 and ANSI/IEEE C37.90 (2 kV @ 60 Hz for 1 min) Surge Withstand Capability: Per IEC 255-22-1 and 255-4 Class 3 (fast transient common mode 2.5 kV, differential modes 1 kV) Per IEC 255-4 and ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (2.5 kV @ 1 MHz, 400/sec for 2 sec, RI = 200 ) Electrostatic Discharge: Per IEC 801.2 Class 4 (15 kV, 150 pF, 150 ) Impulse Voltage: Per IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV (5 kV @ 1.2 x 50 s, 0.5 J, RI = 500 common and differential modes) Current Withstand: Per ANSI/IEEE C37.90 (40 x rated A for 2 sec, 80 x Ir for 1 sec) RFI: Per Ontario Hydro (150 & 450 MHz, 5 W transmitter @ 25 cm and 50 MHz, 15 W mobile transmitter@25 cm) EMI: Per ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: Per IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Stress Vibration: Per IEC 68-2-6 and IEC 255-21-1 APPROVALS UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Approved under LR 41286-56 : Conforms to IEC 947-1 ISO: Manufactured to an ISO9001 registered program.
1 TRIP: 2 CLOSE: 3-7 AUXILIARY: 8 SELF-TEST WARNING: Contact material: Silver alloy
COMMUNICATIONS All Ports: 300-19200 baud, programmable parity, ModBus RTU or DNP 3.0 protocol POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Options: LO/HI (specified when ordering) LO Range: DC = 20 to 60 V AC = 20 to 48 V @ 48-62 Hz HI Range: DC = 88 to 300 V AC = 70 to 265 V @ 48-62 Hz Power: 25 VA nominal, 35 VA maximum Voltage Loss Hold-Up Time: 30 ms
ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Range: Ambient Storage Temperature: Ambient Shipping Temperature: Humidity: Pollution Degree: IP Rating:
-40 C to +60 C -40 C to +80 C -40 C to +80 C up to 90% noncondensing 2 40-X
157

DRAWOUT MECHANISM
The feeder management relay shall provide primary protection and management of distribution feeders. Protection shall include: I complete time overcurrent I complete instantaneous overcurrent I directional overcurrent I undervoltage and overvoltage I negative sequence voltage I undervoltage automatic restoration I bus underfrequency I underfrequency automatic restoration Control shall include manual close control, cold load pickup control, 4 settings groups, 20 programmable logic inputs, 2 breaker control relay outputs, 1 internal failure relay output, 5 programmable relay outputs, 1 solid state trip output, and 8 analog transducer outputs. Control shall also be available with a 4 shot auto recloser. The relay shall provide complete monitoring and metering functions. These shall include: I a fault locator with a record of the
last 10 faults
The 750/760 consists of a drawout unit (with automatic CT shorts) and a companion case. The case has a front door with a large window, for visual access to the front panel while the door is closed.
I an event recorder with a record of the

last 128 events
I waveform capture with storage of

128 cycles of data
A powerful simulation feature shall be included to allow testing without the need for external voltage and current inputs. User interfaces shall include: I a 40 character display and a keypad I indicator LEDs on the front panel
which shall provide a quick visual indication of status I a front panel RS232 serial port which shall provide easy computer access I two rear RS485 ports, one of which can be configured as a RS422 port I an easy to use PC program
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
8.80" Max. (224) 7.52" (191)
Panel
UPPER
REAR VIEW
8.52" (216)
A B
PANEL CUTOUT
7.25" (184)
9.93" (252)
E F G H E F
UPPER
9.00" (229)
CUT-OUT
G H
LOWER
Inches (mm)
996871AB.dwg
ORDERING
Accessories:
750/760 PC 19-1 Panel 19-2 Panel Software provided free Single cutout 19" panel Dual cutout 19" panel Dual mounting available with the 19-2 panel
808785E3.cdr
***** *
750 760 P1 P5
*
Base unit Base unit with autorecloser 1 A phase current inputs 5 A phase current inputs 1 A zero sequence current inputs 5 A zero sequence current inputs 1 A sensitive ground current input 5 A sensitive ground current input 20-60 VDC, 20-48 VAC @ 48-62 Hz 88-300 VDC, 70-265 VAC @ 48-62 Hz Eight 0-1 mA analog outputs Eight 0-5 mA analog outputs Eight 0-10 mA analog outputs Eight 4-20 mA analog outputs Red breaker closed LED Green breaker closed LED
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
4 1
.
4 1
.
G1 G5 S1 S5 LO HI A1 A5 A10 A20 R G
MOD 009 (D1) MOD 009 (D5)
1A Polarizing ground current input 5A Polarizing ground current input

See pages 15 - 18.
Feeder Management Relay is a registered trademark of General Electric Company
158
Comprehensive feeder protection, control and monitoring with high impedance fault detection.
DFP200
Applications
I I I
Primary feeder protection Detection of high impedance faults Available for underground systems (DFP300)

DESCRIPTION
The DFP200 is a digital relay system that provides distribution feeder protection, control, metering, and monitoring. It uses waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs at 32 times per cycle. Incorporating multiple functions in one package eliminates the need for expensive discrete components. The DFP200 provides comprehensive protection functions. A high impedance fault detection function is available which is able to distinguish between downed conductors and other arcing faults. Time overcurrent functions include a unique load-adaptive feature. Eight separate groups of settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. A four shot recloser can be programmed by the user. There are eight configurable inputs and eight configurable outputs. Output contacts can be used for local or remote manual breaker operation. The DFP200 stores up to 255 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest 1/10 of a millisecond. Oscillography data is stored for up to 240 cycles. A trip circuit monitoring function, just in time breaker health maintenance, and fault location are included in the DFP200. Easy local computer interface is provided via a front-mounted RS232 port. A rear-mounted RS232 port is standard, and a second rear mounted RS485 port is also available as an option. ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0, and ModBus protocols are supported in all models. An optional front mounted plug-in LCD display and keypad is available for local access without a computer. The DFP200 is packaged in a compact 19 inch rack-mount drawout case. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting. The 7 inch depth makes it easy to mount in metal clad switchgear.
High-impedance (HiZ) fault detection Instantaneous overcurrent Time overcurrent (adaptive) Negative sequence overcurrent Directional overcurrent Under and overvoltage Under and overfrequency 8 protection setting groups Cold load pickup logic Breaker failure protection Flexible phase rotation selection Four-shot configurable recloser Configurable inputs/outputs Sync-check (option)

I I I I I I I I
Reliable fault location Breaker health Trip circuit monitor Failure to close/open detection Metering: A V W Wh var varh demand 255 event record Waveform capture of I and V Self-test diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I
12 target/alarm LEDs Optional LCD and keypad Front and rear RS232 ports Optional rear RS485 port ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0 and ModBus protocols
Features
I I I I
Drawout construction for servicing Wye-wye, open-delta, or single-phase Horizontal or vertical mounting Flash upgradeble
GE Power Management
159
DFP200 Digital Feeder Protection

High Impedance Fault Detection
A high impedance (Hi-Z) fault is characterized by having an impedance sufficiently high that it is not detected by conventional overcurrent protection. The Hi-Z fault detection function is intended to detect high impedance arcing faults, and to differentiate between downed conductors and other arcing faults. Electrical signatures are used to identify the presence of arcing. This function can detect a high percentage of high impedance faults on a distribution feeder. The TOC functions can be selected to have a fast reset or to emulate the slow reset of electromechanical induction disk overcurrent relays. under and overvoltage functions with separate adjustable time delays.
Under and Over Frequency

A significant under or over frequency condition can be detected and used to reduce or increase the total load to within the capability of the available generation. The DFP200 provides over and underfrequency features for this purpose. There are two overfrequency units and two underfrequency units, each with a separate adjustable time delay. One restore function is provided.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent

An instantaneous and time overcurrent function are provided for negative sequence overcurrent. The curve choices for the time overcurrent are the same as described above for the phase and ground TOC functions.
Directional Overcurrent
A phase directional function and a negative-sequence directional function are standard. A dual polarized zerosequence directional function is available as an option.
Three Phase and Ground Overcurrent

The phase and ground instantaneous overcurrent functions include adjustable time delays.

Eight separate groups of settings are stored in the DFP200's nonvolatile memory, with only one group active at a given time. Certain settings are common to all eight setting groups. Selection of the active group is through the communications ports or by configuring three digital inputs for group selection.
Phase and ground time overcurrent functions are also available. Five predefined time overcurrent (TOC) characteristics curves are provided: inverse, BS142 inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and definite time. In addition there are four user defined TOC curves. A unique load-adaptive feature may be used to automatically change the TOC pickup as a function of the average load current. This allows the TOC function to be more sensitive when feeder loading is light.
Torque Control of Overcurrent Functions

Two separate torque control signals can be defined. For each signal a selection 'mask' can be used to determine which overcurrent functions are controlled.
Cold Load Pickup

When a feeder is re-energized after being de-energized for a prolonged time higher load currents can result due to a loss of load diversity. Cold load pickup is provided to prevent operation of the overcurrent functions under these conditions.
Under and Over Voltage

For voltage sensitive loads, a drop in line voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause dangerous overheating. Sustained overvoltage conditions can also cause overheating. The DFP200 provides

BUS
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS
27 Undervoltage 46 Negative Sequence TOC 50/51 Phase IOC/TOC 50N/51N Neutral IOC/TOC 50G/51G Ground IOC/TOC 59 Overvoltage 67P Phase Directional 67N Neutral Directional 67G Ground Directional 810/U Over/Under frequency Hiz High Impedance Faults
52
27 59 81O/ 81U
A B
C
3
50/51
50N/ 51N
46
67P
67N
HiZ
67G
50G/ 51G
DFP200
702753A3.CDR
LOAD
160

Cold load pickup
500
Fault Location
Reliable fault location is provided by proven algorithms. This is functional only when wye-wye connected voltage transformers are used. The distance from the fault to the relay is displayed as miles or kilometers.
Event Recording
Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including pickup, trips, contact operations, alarms, setting changes and self-test status. The DFP200 stores up to 255 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest 1/10 of a millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which facilitates diagnosis of relay operation.
The DFP200 stores up to 255 events
400
300
NORMAL TRIP SETTING

200
X
PICKUP PICKUP
100
OUTAGE
0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
LOAD ENERGIZED
Time (seconds)
818846A1.CDR
Breaker Health
"Just in time" breaker maintenance is achievable by using the breaker health function. The DFP200 calculates and stores the cumulative I x* t value for each of the three phase currents, where 1x2 in 0.01 steps. A breaker health threshold is established by a setting. If the cumulative value exceeds the threshold setting, a breaker health alarm is initiated.

A predefined breaker failure function is provided. The breaker failure timer is started by any DFP200 trip or by an external trip via a digital input. The timer is stopped when a low-set overcurrent function drops out. The user can program unique breaker failure logic or modify the predefined logic using Xpression Builder PC software.
Trip Circuit Monitoring

The voltage across the open contact of Output 1 and Output 2 is continuously monitored by the DFP200 to indicate whether the associated external trip circuit is intact. If the monitored DC voltage becomes virtually zero, then the trip circuit has failed to open or the breaker 52/a contact, which is normally wired in series with the trip coil, has opened. To avoid false indications of an open trip circuit, when the breaker is opened by any means other than a DFP200 trip a 52/b contact wired to a configurable digital input will disable the trip circuit monitor function.
Flexible Phase Rotation Selection

Phase rotation (A-B-C or C-B-A) is selected by a setting. This allows the same external connections to the CTs and VTs regardless of phase rotation.
Oscillography
The DFP200 captures current and voltage waveforms at 32 samples per cycle. Sampled values of current and voltage are stored for up to 240 cycles. Two cycle RMS values of current and voltage are stored for up to 3 minutes (5400 samples). Oscillography is triggered either by internal signals or an external contact.
The DFP200-LINK program allows the user to save the oscillography data to a file for analysis by a program such as GE-DATA
Recloser
Pre-defined one, two, three and four shot recloser are provided with instantaneous and time delayed reclose shots. The user can program a unique recloser or modify the predefined recloser using Xpression Builder PC software.
RMS Metering Values

The DFP200 provides the following metering values: I current Ia, Ib, Ic, In & I2 I voltage Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc, Vca I watts and watt-hours (3 phase) I var and var-hours (3 phase) I power factor The voltage and current accuracy is 1% of full scale. Average and maximum demand data is stored per phase for currents, watts, and vars and 3-phase for volt-amps. The demand period is adjustable from 1 to 60 minutes in steps of one minute. With an optional memory expansion, 35 days of demand data may be stored.
Manual Breaker Operation

The DFP200's output contacts can be used to trip or close the breaker by a command via the remote communications interface, by a keypad sequence via the optional plug-in module, or by an external contact wired to a configurable digital input.
Configurable Inputs & Outputs

There are eight configurable digital inputs and eight configurable output contacts. Each output contact is driven by a configurable logic equation determined by Xpression Builder PC software.
Self-Test Diagnostics
Comprehensive self-test diagnostics occur at power up and continuously thereafter. During operation any problem found by self-tests causes an alarm and an event is logged.
Sync-check (Option)
Relay monitors phase angle difference across open breaker contacts and issues a sync-check signal to supervise reclosing function.
Optional Power Quality Monitoring

Power quality is monitored by calculating the total harmonic distortion (THD) on each of the phase currents and voltages.
161

USER INTERFACES
Twelve Target/Alarm LEDs
Twelve target/alarm LEDs are provided on all models. The targets identify trips as instantaneous (INST), phase a (A), phase b (B), phase c (C), ground (N), downed conductor (DOWN COND), frequency (FREQUENCY), and voltage (VOLTAGE). LEDs also indicate the power supply status (POWER), self-test status (SELF TEST), state of breaker failure (BREAKER FAIL), and state of the recloser (RECLOSE).
The front panel LEDs allow the user to quickly identify the cause of trips
Front Serial Port

A front-mounted RS232 (DBG) serial port (Port 2) allows easy user interface via a PC. ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0, and ModBus protocols are included, and all communication ports may be set to any protocol.
A front panel serial port allows easy local computer access
For ASCII communications terminal emulation programs can be used, such as PROCOMM PLUS, Windows Terminal, or Reflections.
Xpression Builder Software

Xpression Builder allows the user to graphically design programmable logic and I/O assignments. It creates the logic settings files used by the relay.
Xpression Builder software has an easy to use graphical interface
Rear Serial Ports

Port 3 and an optional Port 4 are located on the rear of the DFP200.
Port 3 is an RS232 port and is driven by the same UART as Port 2. Port 4 is driven by its own UART and is available as an RS485 port only. The relay supports baud rates from 300 to 19200 bps.
A rear serial port for remote communications is standard; a second rear port is optional
Keypad and Display Module (Optional)

A plug-in twenty button keypad and 4 x 20 line LCD display allows the user to easily communicate with the relay and change settings. Metering data, event information and settings are displayed on the 4 line backlit LCD. This removable module plugs into Port 1, located on the front of the DFP200.
Display Software
The oscillography data retrieved from the DFP200 is stored in a binary format file compatible with GE-DATA. GEDATA is a display and analysis program that may be purchased separately. With this program it is possible to display the sampled current and voltage values graphically as waveforms. It is also possible to display the "digital flags" data as on-off waveforms versus time.
Communication Protocols
The DFP200 includes ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0, and ModBus protocols. DFP200 has three communication ports which can be independently set to any of the four protocols. Also, for increased system integration efficiency, the ports can be dynamically switched.
Security
Serial port communication security is maintained with four levels of password protection. The optional keypad and display are controlled by three levels of password protection.
Communication Software
DFP200-LINK communication software is provided for GE protocol communication. For ease of use it has pull-down menus with help instructions at the bottom of the screen. It allows the user to use a PC to enter a passive viewing mode or a control mode, or a settings mode.
DFP200-LINK communication software is provided for GE protocol models
The relay's clock can be synchronized to an IRIG-B signal. This insures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
The keypad and display can be easily removed to help prevent unauthorized access
HARDWARE
The DFP200 comes in a 19 inch rack mount package that can be mounted horizontally or vertically. The shallow 7 inch depth makes it ideal for mounting in switchgear. A drawout design allows the printed circuit boards to be withdrawn from the front. Only the highly reliable magnetic components are attached to the chassis.
162

FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY The optional 4 line LCD display is plugged into port 1 via a six wire modular jack. The 20 button keypad can perform virtually all relay communication functions. PORT 2 Front panel PC RS232 port connection supports ASCII GE modem, DNP 3.0, or ModBus protocols. Full featured relay communications port. INDICATORS 12 Target/Alarm LEDs The targets identify trips as: phase a (A) phase b (B) phase c (C) ground (N) instantaneous (INST) downed conductor (DOWN COND) frequency (FREQUENCY) voltage (VOLTAGE) LEDs also indicate: power supply status (POWER) self-test status (SELF TEST) breaker failure (BREAKER FAIL) recloser (RECLOSE) TARGET RESET BUTTON resets indicators and trip outputs
Rear View
8 fully configuarable digital outputs driven by configurable logic equations PORT 4 Optional RS485 Port driven by its own UART PORT 3 RS232 Port driven by same UART as Port 2
8 assignable digital inputs
OUT 2+
OUT 1+
OUT 4
OUT 5
OUT 8
OUT 7
OUT 6
OUT 3
PIN # PORT 283 PORT 4 NC PIN 1 PIN 2 RD PIN 3 TD COMM PIN 4 DTR CARD PIN 5 GND DEPENDENT PIN 6 NC PIN7 NC NC PIN 8 NC PIN 9
CC4
CC5
CC8 32 16 CC8 15 CC7
CC7 31 14 CC6
CC6 30 13 CC5
CC3
CC2
CC1
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
PORT 4
12 CC4
11 CC3
10 CC2
9 CC1
8 OUT 8
7 OUT 7
6 OUT 6
5 OUT 5
4 OUT 4
3 OUT 3
2 OUT 2-
1 OUT 1-
PORT 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
SURGE GND
VA
VB
VC
IA
IB
IC
IN
3IO SYNC
IRIG B
SELF TEST
PWR FAIL INPUT PWR
Voltage inputs Current inputs
3Io or Sync check input. Depending on the model selected this will be either the 3Io input or the sync-check input.
IRIG B Time Synchronization port
Dedicated self test and power failure alarms
Input power terminals
Port louver plate for future communication options

702752B1.cdr
163

TYPICAL WIRING
TRIP DIRECTION FOR 67, 67N, 67G BUS
PHASE CTs
C A B
Wye VTs
A B
C LOAD
GROUND POLARIZING
CONTROL POWER
AA15 AA16 AA7 AA8 AA9 AA10 AA11 AA12 AA13 AA14 In In N IC IP IP IA IB N N
AA1 AA2
Va Vn
AA3 AA4 AA5 AA6

Vb Vn Vc Vn
AA23 AA24
(+) (-)
9
DELTA VTs
A B
C C A B
CONTROL POWER
POLARIZE
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C CURRENT INPUTS
NEUTRAL VOLTAGE INPUTS
GROUND BUS
GE Power Management
DFP200
AB9 AB25 AB10 AB26 AB11 AB27 AB12 AB28 AB13 AB29
No. 5
No. 4
No. 1
No. 1
AB1 AB17 AB2 AB18 AB3 AB19 AB4 AB20 AB5 AB21 AB6 AB22 AB7 AB23 AB8 AB24 AA19 AA20 AA21 AA22
No. 2
OUTPUTS CONFIGURABLE AS (A OR B)
No. 2 No. 3
AA1 AA2 AA3 AA4 AA5 AA6

Va Vn Vb Vn Vc Vn
No. 3
CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
No. 4
No. 5
VOLTAGE INPUTS
AB14 AB30 AB15 AB31 AB16 AB32 AA17 AA18

No. 6
No. 6
ALTERNATE WIRING FOR OPEN-DELTA VTs
No. 7
No. 7
No. 8
No. 8 SELF TEST ALARM POWER SUPPLY FAIL
IRIG-B
DB-9
REAR RS-485 COMM PORT 4
DB-9
REAR RS-232 COMM PORT 3
DB-9
FRONT RS-232 COMM PORT 2
FRONT MODULAR JACK COMM PORT 1
702751A6.CDR
164

DFP200 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION RECLOSER: Programmable reclose times: 1-4 INPUTS Digital Inputs: BURDENS Current Circuits: In = 1 A: In = 5 A: Control Power: 38.5 - 300 VDC/VAC ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -30C to +80C Operation: -25C to +65C Humidity: 95% without condensation
METERING RATINGS Rated Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Rated Voltage (phase to phase): 120 VAC Rated Current: In = 1 or 5 A Maximum Current: Continuous: 2 x In Three Sec: 50 x In One Sec: 100 x In Maximum AC Voltage: Continuous: 2 x rated voltage One Min: 3.5 x rated voltage METERING (AT RATED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT) Current: 1% Voltage: 1% Watts: 2% Vars: 2% Frequency: 0.1 Hz
@ 50 Hz 0.0507 3.95 @ 60 Hz 0.0507 4.738 @ 50 Hz 0.0058 4.76 @ 60 Hz 0.0058 5.71 17 VA (PF =0.98) and/or < 15 W
TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage:
OUTPUTS Trip Output Contacts: Continuous 5 A Make and Carry 30 A IEC ANSI C37.90
POWER SUPPLY Control Voltage: 24 to 60 VDC 88 to 300 VDC, VAC
2 kV 50/60 Hz, one min IEC 255-5 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC): Fast Transient: C37.90.1 (1989) IEC 255-22-4 Oscillatory: C37.90.1 (1989) IEC 255-22-1 Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 255-22-2, Class III Radio Frequency: ANSI C37.90.2 (1987) Interference: IEC 255-22-3, Class III (1987)
MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Samples Per Cycle: Record Length: Two Cycle RMS Values:
32 200 cycles 5400 samples
COMMUNICATIONS Protocols: ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0, and ModBus protocols Optional plug-in keypad and display module: 20 key keypad 2 line x 16 character display Connectors: Front DB-9 (RS232) Rear DB-9 (RS232) Rear DB-9 (RS485 only)
PACKAGING Weight: Net: Shipping: Dimensions: Overall Height: Width: Depth:
12 lbs (5.443 kg) 14 lbs (6.35 kg) 5.25" (131.25 mm) 19" (482 mm) to edge of mounting flanges 7.127" (182.17 mm) to rear of terminals
DIMENSIONS
TOP VIEW PANEL CUTOUT
4 x 0.25 Dia. (6.3) 17.38 (441) 5.25 (133) 7.172 (182)
CUTOUT
4.75 (121)
PANEL
.972 (25)
18.31 (465)
FRONT VIEW
19.00 (483)
DFP200
PORT 1
TARGET RESET P O W E R S E L F B R K R R A E C L O S E B C N I N S T D F O R W E N Q U C E O N N C D Y V O L T A G E
INCHES (mm)
5.19 (132)
702750A5.DWG
T F E A S I T L
165

Feeder protection, control, metering, and monitoring shall be supplied as an integrated digital system. Standard current transformers and voltage transformers shall be used to supply the AC inputs and the internal power supply shall be connected to a DC battery or an AC control power source. The following protection functions shall be included: I phase overcurrent with TOC and IOC
high and low (51P, 50PH, 50PL)
I two separately definable torque

(directional) control signals which can be selected from 67N, 67G, 67P, 27, or digital input high impedance fault detection which shall differentiate between downed conductors and other arcing faults cold load pickup eight settings groups breaker failure phase rotation selection (abc or cba)
I demand data with demand period

from 1 to 60 minutes in 1 minute steps
Monitoring functions shall include: I fault location when wye-wye I I

connected voltage transformers are used oscillography with 32 samples per cycle, up to 240 cycles stored sequence of events with last 255 events recorded and time stamped to the nearest 1/10 of a millisecond fault reports trip circuit monitor self diagnostics breaker health (Ix*t accumulation) optional power quality monitoring
I ground overcurrent with TOC and I I I I I I

IOC high and low (51N, 50NH, 50NL) negative sequence overcurrent with TOC and IOC (46T, 46I) five pre-defined TOC curves shall be provided, and four user defined curves TOC functions shall be able to be set to a fast reset or a slow reset which emulates an electromechanical relay directional phase, negative sequence, and optional dual-polarized zero-sequence (67P, 67N, 67G) under and overvoltage (27, 59) two underfrequency and overfrequency functions and frequency restore (81U, 81O, 81R)
I I I I The control functions shall include a four shot recloser and manual trip/close capability. Eight configurable digital inputs and eight configurable outputs shall provide flexible operation. Configurable logic shall be available with a PC program to aid the user in defining the logic for each output. Metering functions shall include: I I I I I
current Ia, Ib, Ic,In voltage Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc, Vca watts and watt-hours (3 phase) vars and var-hours (3 phase) frequency
I I I I I User interface shall include:
I optional plug-in 20 button keypad I I I

and 4 line 20 character LCD display front RS232 serial port rear RS232 and optional RS485 serial ports with 300 to 19,200 bps ASCII, GE modem, DNP 3.0 and ModBus protocols IRIG-B time synchronization input
I There shall be a choice of wye-wye, open-delta, or single-phase VT connections. Horizontal or vertical mounting shall be available in a 19" rack mount package.
ORDERING
DFP2
DFP2
* * * * * * * *
1 5 0 1 N M L H A B C E 0 1 2 3
Base unit (TOC/IOC, present value monitoring, demand monitoring, event reporting, oscillography, breaker health, breaker failure, configurable logic, recloser) 1 A rated current 5 A rated current 24 - 60 VDC control power 88 - 300 VAC, VDC control power No keypad and display With keypad and display No HiZ monitoring HiZ monitoring Basic unit Full protection (TOC/IOC and 46, 67N, 27, 59, 81) Full protection and zero-sequence directional, 3IO Full protection and synchronization check Basic unit Power quality and 35 day demand data Power quality 35 day demand A Front & rear RS232 (GE modem, ASCII, DNP 3.0, & ModBus) B Front & rear RS232 & rear RS485 (GE modem, ASCII, DNP 3.0, & ModBus) B Revision level

See pages 15 - 18.
166
Digital relay system that provides comprehensive distribution feeder protection.
DFP100
Digital Feeder Relay
Applications
I I I
Primary feeder protection Backup bus, transformer line protection Switchgear or rack mounting

I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The DFP100 is a digital protection, control, metering, and monitoring system. It uses waveform sampling of the current and voltage inputs together with appropriate algorithms to provide distribution feeder protection. The DFP100 incorporates the protection, control, metering, and both local and remote human interfaces in one assembly. This eliminates the need for expensive discrete components. The DFP100 can be used for a variety of applications such as, primary feeder protection, fast bus protection, backup protection for transformers and subtransmission or transmission lines. The DFP100 stores up to 200 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which facilitates diagnosis of relay operation. The DFP100 also captures current and voltage waveforms at 16 samples per cycle. Six oscillography records can be stored in memory. There are six digital inputs, five of which are configurable. There are eight output contacts, four of which are configurable. Each configurable output has user-defined logic and an individual timer for pickup and drop out. The user-defined logic includes AND, OR and NOT gates in which all pickup and trip flags, as well as, the current state of any of the six digital inputs can be used as inputs. Easy user interface is provided via a front-mounted RS232 port. Two rear-mounted ports are also provided, and one of these can be an RS485 port. A direct fiber optic connection can be supplied, and in this case Port 3 is disabled. Different models are available for ASCII, GE or ModBus protocol. A changeable communication card allows one of the rear-mounted ports to be configured to a unique protocol. An optional front mounted LCD display and keypad is available for GE protocol models. The twenty button keypad allows the user to easily interrogate the relay and make settings. The 2 line backlit LCD displays metering data, event information and settings. The DFP100 is packaged in a compact 19 inch rack-mount drawout case. Models are available for either horizontal or vertical mounting, and the 7 inch depth makes it easy to mount in metal clad switchgear.
Low-set and high-set overcurrent Directional overcurrent Under and overvoltage Under and overfrequency 6 protection setting groups Cold load pickup Breaker failure protection Four-shot recloser (optional) Configurable inputs/outputs Direct operation of configurable outputs through digital inputs

I I I I I I I
Reliable fault location Breaker health Metering: A V W var Hz Demand ammeter 200 event record Waveform capture of I and V Self-test diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I
10 target/alarm LEDs Optional display and keypad RS232 and RS485 Fiber optics ASCII, GE Modem, ModBus RTU
Features
I I I I
Drawout construction Horizontal or vertical mounting Fully programmable Multiple communication protocols for easy system integration
GE Power Management
167

Three Phase and Ground Overcurrent
The DFP100 has low-set and high-set phase and ground instantaneous overcurrent functions with adjustable time delays. Phase and ground time overcurrent functions are also available. Two definite time functions and three pre-defined time overcurrent characteristics curves are provided: inverse, very inverse, and extremely inverse. and underfrequency features for this purpose. There are two overfrequency units and two underfrequency units, each with a frequency range of 40 to 80 Hz and a time delay of 3 to 600 cycles.
The four frequency units are identified by the display when showing data
Four Shot Recloser

An optional four shot recloser can be provided with one instantaneous and three time delayed reclose shots. The user can program which functions are allowed to initiate reclosing for each of the reclose shots and which functions are allowed to trip after the shot.
Manual Breaker Operation

The DFP100s output contacts can be used to trip or close the breaker by a command via the remote communications interface, by a keypad sequence via the optional MMI, or by an external contact wired to a configurable digital input.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent

A definite time and time overcurrent function are provided for negative sequence overcurrent. The curve choices for the time overcurrent are the same as described above for the phase and ground TOC functions.

Six separate groups of settings are stored in the DFP100s nonvolatile memory, with only one group active at a given time. Certain settings are common to all six setting groups.
Configurable Inputs and Outputs

There are six digital inputs, five of which are configurable. The one fixed input is assigned to the breaker 52/b contact. There are eight output contacts, four of which are configurable. The four fixed outputs are Trip1, Trip2, Close and Alarm. A trip mask determines which protective functions operate Trip1 and Trip2. The four configurable outputs are programmed with AND/OR/NOT logic. Each configurable output has an individual timer for pickup and dropout.
Cold Load Pickup

Cold load pickup
500
Directional Overcurrent
The 21P phase mho distance function can be used to torque control the phase overcurrent functions. The 67N negative-sequence directional function can be used to torque control the ground overcurrent functions. 21P and 67N operate correctly with either wyewye or open-delta VT connections. There are separate choices for torque (directional) control of the phase overcurrent versus the ground overcurrent functions.
400
300
NORMAL TRIP SETTING

200
X
PICKUP PICKUP
100
OUTAGE
0 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Under and Overvoltage

For voltage sensitive loads, a drop in line voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause dangerous overheating. Sustained overvoltage conditions can also cause overheating. The DFP100 provides under and overvoltage functions with adjustable time delays. The pickup level for both units range from 40 to 150 Vrms.
The display uses the ANSI device number 59 to show the overvoltage time delay

BUS
LOAD ENERGIZED
Time (seconds)
818846A1.CDR

Through the use of a digital input, configurable output logic and a programmable timer (all items standard in the DFP100), a breaker failure scheme can easily be implemented.
52
27
59
81O/ 81U
Flexible Phase Rotation Selection

Phase rotation (A-B-C or C-B-A) is selected by a setting. This allows the same external connections to the CTs and VTs regardless of phase rotation.
50/51
50N/ 51N
46
21P
67N
50N/ 51N
DFP100
700753A3.CDR
LOAD
Under and Over Frequency

A significant under or over frequency condition can be detected and used to reduce or increase the total load to within the capability of the available generation. The DFP100 provides over
168

DFP100 APPLICATION
ANSI 46PT, 46PD 51PT, 51NT 50PL, 50NL 50PH, 50NH 51PD, 51ND 21P 67N 27 59 81U 81O 79 PROTECTION
Negative Sequence TOC, Definite Time Phase/Ground TOC Phase/Ground Lowset IOC Phase/Ground Highset IOC Phase/Ground Definite Time mho Phase Distance Negative-sequence dir. Undervoltage Overvoltage Under-frequency Over-frequency
Failure to Open Detection

This function reports when a breaker fails to open following a DFP100 trip. At that time a timer is started and can only be stopped if the 52/b contact closes. The associated time delay is a user setting, and if properly selected this function may be used to implement a breaker failure scheme by programming its signal to an output contact.
Radia l Loop Backu p Backu p Backu p
RMS Metering Values

The DFP100 provides the following metering values: I current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In) I demand ammeter (Ia, Ib, Ic) I voltage (Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc, Vca) I watts (3 phase) I vars (3 phase) I frequency The voltage and current accuracy is 1% of full scale. The demand ammeter function allows selection of 15, 30, or 60 minute intervals for 2, 4 or 8 days respectively. The peak and average values for each phase is stored.
CONTROL & MONITORING

Automatic Recloser Manual Breaker Control Metering Fault Location Cold Load Pickup Breaker Health Monitor Failure to Close Detection Failure to Open Detection Configurable Digital Inputs Configurable Outputs Demand Ammeter Event Recording Oscillography Fault Reports Multiple (6) Settings Groups Phase Rotation Selection Self-Test
700752A5.cdr
Event Recording
Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including pickup, trips, contact operations, alarms, setting changes and self-test status. The DFP100 stores up to 200 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine a sequence of events, which facilitates diagnosis of relay operation.
The event record may be accessed via the front panel display or with a computer

Fault Location
The proven algorithms used in GEs digital line protection offerings are implemented in the DFP100, providing reliable fault location. This is functional only when wye-wye connected voltage transformers are used.
External Trip Circuit Monitoring

When a connection is made from a trip contact to one of the configurable digital inputs the external breaker trip circuit is monitored. Loss of dc voltage across the monitored contact indicates an open trip circuit. This function will not operate when the trip circuit is opened by the 52/a contact following an external breaker trip, if a breaker 52/b contact is wired to the DFP100.
Oscillography
The DFP100 captures current and voltage waveforms at 16 samples per cycle. Six oscillography records can be stored in memory. Each record consists of 34 cycles of current and voltage samples together with digital flags indicating relay response. Oscillography is triggered either by internal signals or an external contact.
Breaker Health
Just in time breaker maintenance is achievable by using the breaker health function. The DFP100 calculates and stores the cumulative I*t or I2*t, value for each of the three phase currents. A breaker health threshold is established by a setting. If the cumulative value exceeds the threshold setting, a breaker health alarm is initiated. The user can access the data either via the local MMI or the serial ports.
Failure to Close Detection

This function reports when a breaker fails to close or takes an excessive time to close. A user defined close time is compared to the time it takes the 52/b contact to open after the close signal is given.
Self-Test Diagnostics
Comprehensive self-test diagnostics occur at power up and continuously thereafter. During operation any problem found by self-tests causes an alarm and an event is logged.
169

USER INTERFACES
Ten Target/Alarm LEDs
Ten target/alarm LEDs are provided on all models. The targets identify trips as instantaneous (INST), phase a (A), phase b (B), phase c (C), ground (N), negative sequence (NEG SEQ), and frequency (FREQ). LEDs also indicate the state of the recloser as lockout or reset (REC LO/RES), alarm status (ALARM), and relay status (ENERGIZED). RS485 is only available with GE or ModBus protocol models. Alternatively a direct fiber optic connection can be supplied, and in this case Port 3 is disabled.
The relay supports baud rates from 300 to 57,600 bps
For ASCII models a general purpose PC communications program, such as PROCOMM or Windows Terminal, may be used.
Keypad and Display (Optional)

A twenty button keypad allows the user to easily interrogate the relay and make settings. Metering data, event information and settings are displayed on the 2 line backlit LCD. Note that the keypad and display are only available on the GE protocol models.
Security
Serial port communication security is maintained with password protection. ASCII models use three levels of password protection. GE and ModBus protocol models use two levels of password protection.
Display Software
The oscillography data retrieved from GE protocol models is stored in a binary format file compatible with GE-DATA, a display and analysis program that may be purchased from GE. With GE-DATA it is possible to display the sampled current and voltage values graphically as waveforms. It is also possible to display the digital flags data as on-off waveforms versus time. The oscillography data retrieved from ASCII or ModBus protocol models is also stored in a binary format file, but it is not compatible with GE-DATA. Utility programs are provided for converting ASCII or ModBus data to GE-DATA format or GE-DATA files to ASCII or ModBus format for importing data into a spreadsheet program.
LEDs provide a quick visual check of relay status and the optional keypad and display allow for quick local access
The relays clock can be synchronized to an IRIG-B signal. This insures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
Communications Software
The DFP100 comes with a CD containing the GE LINK software program. This program can be used with GE protocol models to communicate with the relay to detect status, read actual values and view and modify settings.
Front Serial Port

A front-mounted RS232 serial port (Port 1) allows easy user interface via a PC. Different models offer a choice of ASCII or GE communication protocol. For ASCII protocol models a general purpose PC communications program may be used. For GE protocol models a unique PC communication program, GE LINK, is required. The GE LINK program is provided on a CD with each DFP100.
The front serial port allows easy user interface
Waveforms are displayed with GE-DATA; if GE-DATA is not available the values may be imported into a spread-sheet program
Two Back Serial Ports

Port 2 and Port 3 are located on the back of the DFP100. Port 2 is an RS232 port and is driven by the same UART as Port 1. It is available with the same ASCII or GE protocol options as Port 1. The relay supports baud rates from 300 to 57,600 bps. Port 3 is driven by its own UART and is available as RS232 or RS485. Note that
170

FEATURES
Front View
PORT 1 RS232 serial port permits easy local user interface. Supports baud rates from 300 to 57,600 bps INDICATORS 10 Target/Alarm LEDs Trip LEDs: instantaneous INST phase a A phase b B phase c C ground N negative sequence NEG SEQ frequency FREQ Status LEDs: recloser state: lockout or reset LO/RES alarm status ALARM relay status READY KEYPAD Optional 20 button keypad for interrogating relay and entering setpoints RESET Target reset push button resets indicators and trip outputs
PORT 1
I N S T A B C N N E G S E G F R E Q R E C L O / R E S A L A R M E N E R G I Z E D
SET 1/Y INF ACT 4 7
2 5 8 0
3/N CLR 6 9 ENT
DFP100
MODEL DFP100
In Vn Vps GEK 5 AMP 120 VAC 125 VDC 105545
TARGET RESET
END PRT
DISPLAY Optional 2 line backlit LCD for displaying metering data, event information and settings
Rear View
P1 8 output relays 4 fixed outputs 4 configurable outputs PORT 2 RS232 serial port supports baud rates from 300 to 57,600 bps FIBER OPTICS Fiber optic connection glass or plastic (disables Port 3)
P1 1
TRIP 1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P2 1
CC1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FIBER OPTIC RX TX
PORT 2
OUT 1
CLOSE
TRIP 2
OUT 2
OUT 4
ALARM
OUT 3
DC + IRIG B +
CC2
CC3
CC6
CC5
CC4
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
P3
10
11
12
13
14
15 16
IGND
PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6
DCD RX TX DTR GND NC
DCD RX TX DTR GND +5V
DCD RX TX DTR GND NC
PORT 3
SURGE GND
VB
P3 3 voltage inputs 4 current inputs
VA
VC
P2 6 digital inputs: 5 configurable 1 fixed (breaker 52/b) IRIG-B input for time syncronization
IA
IB
IC
IN
Communication ports pin outputs table
PORT 3 RS232 or RS485 serial port driven by its own UART

700755A6.CDR
171

TYPICAL WIRING
TRIP DIRECTION FOR 21P & 67N
WYE-WYE VT CONNECTION A B C
A B C
ALTERNATE OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION A B C
C A
REFERS TO SETTING "PHASE DESIGNATION"

3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 I a COM I b COM I c COM I gn COM 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Va Vn Vb Vn Vc Vn 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Va Vn Vb Vn Vc Vn
9
CURRENT INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS
TRIP 1
CONTROL POWER -
2.16
SURGE GRND
CONTROL POWER
125 VDC +
2.15
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16
RS232 INTERFACE DFP100 1 COMPUTER 1 2 3 8 3 TXD 2 RXD 7 SGND 6 4 5
GE Power Management
DFP100
Feeder Protection Relay
SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS
OUTPUTS RELAYS
2.1 CC1 2.2 2.3 CC2 2.4 CC3 2.6 2.7 CC4 2.8 2.9 CC5 2.10 2.11 CC6 2.12
OPTIONAL FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE
OUT 2
OUT 1
CLOSE
TRIP 2
TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9 9 PIN CONNECTOR
4 20 5 6 7 8
DIGITAL INPUTS
2.5
OUT 4
OUT 3
9 20
ALARM
25 PIN CONNECTOR
PORT 3 REAR PORT 2 REAR PORT 1 FRONT
R232-DB9 R232-DB9 R232-DB9 LAPTOP COMPUTER

700757A5.CDR 700750.DWG
RS232
IRIG-B 2.13 2.14
TX
RX
172

DFP100 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION RANGES OF OVERCURRENT ADJUSTMENT: Phase Time Overcurrent: 1.0 to 12 A or 0.2 to 2.4 A Phase Instantaneous: 1.0 to 160 A Ground Time Overcurrent: 1.0 to 12 A or 0.2 to 2.4 A Ground Instantaneous: 1.0 to 160 A Phase and Ground Time Overcurrent Operating Curves: Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse RECLOSER Programmable Reclose Times: Programmable from 1 to 4 MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY Captures: 1-6 Record Length: 34 cycles 2 Prefault, 32 Post Fault Samples/Cycle: 16 POWER SUPPLY Control Power: 24 to 48 VDC Range 19 to 60 VDC 110/250 VDC or AC Range 88 to 300 VDC or AC ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -40C to +85C Operation: -40C to +70C Humidity: 95% without condensation TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage:
METERING RATINGS Rated Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Rated Voltage (phase to phase): 120 or 208 VAC Rated Current: In = 1 or 5 A Maximum Current: Continuous: 2 x In Three Sec: 50 x In One Sec: 100 x In Maximum AC Voltage: Continuous: 240 VAC One Min: 420 VAC METERING (AT RATED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT) Current: 1% Voltage: 1% Watts: 2% Vars: 2% Frequency: 0.1 Hz *Specifications subject to change without notice.
INPUTS Configurable Inputs: 38.5 -300 VDC BURDENS Current Circuits: In = 1 A: @ 50 Hz 0.0507 4.0 @ 60 Hz 0.0507 4.7 In = 5 A: @ 50 Hz 0.0058 4.8 @ 60 Hz 0.0058 5.7 Control Power: < 15 W
OUTPUTS Trip Outputs Contacts:
Continuous 5 A Make and Carry 30 A IAW ANSI C37.90
3 kV DC, one min IEC255-5 5 kV Peak, 1.2/50 ms IEC255-5 Interference Test Withstand: SWC and Fast Transient ANSI C37.90.1 Interference Tests: IEC 255-22-1 Class III Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 255-22-2 Class III Radio Frequency Interference: ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 255-22-3 Class III Impulse Voltage Withstand: PACKAGING Weights (Approximate): Net: 10.5 lbs (4.76 kg) Shipping: 12.5 lbs (5.67 kg) Dimensions: Overall Height: 3.5" (88.9 mm) Width: 19" (482 mm) to edge of mounting flanges Depth: 7" (177.8 mm) to rear of terminals APPROVALS UL, CUL: File no. E57838
COMMUNICATIONS Protocols: GE Modem or ASCII Optional Local MMI: 20 key keypad 2 line x 16 character display Connectors: RS232: 1 - Front DB - 9 2 - Rear DB - 9 RS485: Rear Optional Glass Fiber Optic: Optional Plastic Fiber Optic: Optional Baud Rate: 300 - 57,600 bps
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
TARGET RESET
S E Q N
MODEL In Vn Vpa GEK
DFP 100 5 AMP 120 VAC 125 VDC 106545
19.0" (483)
7.19" (183)
PANEL CUTOUT
Rotate 90 for vertical mounting 18.313" (465) 17.375" (441)
0.47" (12)
3.0" (76)
INCHES
4 x 0.25" (6.4)
CUTOUT FOR SEMI FLUSH MOUNTING FRAME

14.0" (356)
19.13" (486)
2.563" (65) 3.88" (98) 4.375"
CUTOUT
(111)
3.50" (89)
CUTOUT
(mm)
700756A6.DWG
4 x 0.25" (6.4)
3.44" (87.4)
PORT 1
I N S T
N E G
F R E Q
L O / R E S
A L A R M
R E A D Y
DFP 100
173

Feeder protection, control, metering, and monitoring shall be supplied as an integrated digital system. Standard current transformers and voltage transformers shall be used to supply the ac inputs. The internal power supply will be connected to a DC battery or an AC control power source. Protection features shall include: I phase overcurrent (50PH, 50PL, 51PT, I I I
51PD1, 51PD2) ground overcurrent (50NH, 50NL, 51NT, 51ND1, 51ND2) negative-sequence overcurrent (46PT, 46PD) the TOC curves for overcurrent functions shall be separately selectable to be inverse, very inverse, or extremely inverse distance (21P) to torque control the phase overcurrent functions directional (67N) to torque control the ground overcurrent functions over and under voltage with adjustable time delays (59, 27) over and under frequency with adjustable time delays (81O1, 81O2, 81U1, 81U2)
I phase torque control signal can be I

selected ground torque control signal can be selected cold load pickup failure to close failure to open (breaker failure)
Monitoring functions shall include: I fault location (with wye-wye VTs) I oscillography (currents, voltages,
and digital flags)
I I I Control functions shall include:
I sequence of events (up to 200 I I I I

internal events) fault reports trip circuit monitor self diagnostics breaker health (I*t or I2*t accumulation)
I recloser (4 shot) with one instantaneous and three time delayed reclose shots I manual trip/close
Metering functions shall include: I current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In) I voltage (Va, Vb, Vc, or Vab, Vbc, Vca) I watts (3-phase value) I vars (3-phase value) I frequency I demand ammeter Man-machine interface (MMI) shall be in the form of a 2 line by 16 character backlit LCD alpha numeric display and a keypad to accommodate programming and viewing of parameters. RS232 and RS485 communication ports shall be provided for remote or local access via a personal computer.
The six inputs shall include five configurable digital inputs and one digital input which shall be dedicated to a breaker 52/b contact. The seven outputs shall include four configurable outputs, two trip outputs, and one close output. Additional features shall include: I six setting groups I phase rotation selection (abc or cba) I choice of communication protocol
(ASCII, GE or ModBus RTU) I choice of VT connections (wye-wye or open-delta) I choice of horizontal or vertical mounting
I I I I
ORDERING
DFP1
DFP1
* * * * * * * * *
0 1 2 3 4 A B C 0 1 N M 0 1 0 1 0 1 F G B
Basic unit RS232 RS232 (Port 1 and Port 2) Fiber Optic (Versatile Link Connector) Port 3 RS232 (Port 1 and Port 2) Fiber Optic (SMA906 Connector) Port 3 RS233 & RS485** RS232 GE Modem Protocol (Port 1 & Port 2) & RS485 ModBus (Port 3)** 1.0 - 12A phase 1.0 - 12A ground (In = 5 A) 0.2 - 2.4A phase 0.2 - 2.4A ground (In = 1 A) 1.0 - 12A phase 0.2 - 2.4A ground (In = 5 A) ASCII Protocol GE Protocol Without MMI With MMI** (option) Without oscillography With oscillography (option) Without recloser With recloser (option) Horizontal mounting Vertical mounting 24/48 VDC 110/250 VDC or AC Revision level

See pages 15 - 18.
Note:**RS485 and MMI are only available with GE Protocol
Also Available: GE-DATA display and analysis software
174
Protection and control numerical system.
DMS
Digital Multifunctional System
Applications
s s s s s s
HV lines HV Busbar coupler and metering Power transformer, HV or LV MV lines and capacitor banks MV Busbar coupler and metering Auxiliary Services 9

s s s s s s s s s s
DESCRIPTION
The DMS Feeder Management System is a microprocessor based multifunction protection, control, and measurement unit part of GEs DDS Product Family. The DMS uses a set of algorithms to create a general purpose protection and control unit for electrical power systems. DMS modules are specifically designed to operate as DDS system distributed field units. They include all the required functionality to perform protection, control, measuring and monitoring functions for a substation bay (medium or low voltage feeder, transformer, bus bar, coupler, auxiliary services, etc.). Each DMS module includes several boards for protection and control functions (eg. analog and digital data acquisition, outputs, etc.) which are controlled by separate CPUs. For each bay, the protection submodule of the DMS unit receives analog inputs through current and voltage transformers, and the digital signals of the bay through its digital inputs. It performs the protection algorithms and functions for that bay and provides the required trip and signaling contacts. The protection functions included in a particular model will depend on the application desired for that particular bay. The control sub-module of the DMS unit receives analog inputs for metering and monitoring as well as digital inputs. It performs the programmed control algorithms and provides the required digital outputs to operate switching devices, signaling or interlocking outputs. The analog inputs of the control module can come either through the protection transformers, or through transducers. Both protection and control submodules perform monitoring and recording functions. The recorded information can be accessed in local or remote mode through the communication sub-module. DMS units are comprised of modular protection and control units in standard 19" racks. There is a common hardware platform for all DMS units. The application firmware will define the different functionality of each module.
Phase and ground TOC Phase and ground Instantaneous O/C Directional phase and ground O/C units Negative sequence O/C Three-phase under and overvoltage Ground overvoltage Under/overfrequency 14 configurable op commands and interlocks 4 programmable combinational circuits Configurable I/O

s s s s s s s
Up to 7 switching equipment monitor Alarm monitoring Breaker health Trip & closing circuits supervision Event recorder Oscillography recorder Metering: Ia, Ib, In, I2, Vab, Vbc, Vca, kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh, power factor, frequency, etc.
User Interfaces
s s s
Separate local MMIs for P & C RS232 port, faceplate accessible for local communication Rear RS232, RS485, or F.O. for remote communication
Features
s s s s
3 selectable time/I operating curves Drawout modules for easy servicing Separate modules for P & C 19" wide, 4RU high flush rack mounting
GE Power Management
175
DMS Digital Multifunctional System

DESCRIPTION
DMS units include two different submodules, one for protection functions and the other for control functions (DMS units with only one of the sub-modules are also available). For each submodule, the number of boards can be defined up to a maximum given by three different limiting sources: a logic limit given by the addressing capability (a maximum of 15 identical boards in the same sub-module), the I/O limitation of the firmware, and the physical limitation due to the case size (19" rack).
Ground Overvoltage (59N & 64)

For function 59N, the operating voltage is calculated as the sum of the voltage values of the three phases. For function 64, the operating voltage must be provided through an additional independent voltage input. This function responds only to the fundamental frequency since the voltage input is filtered and the harmonics eliminated.

Monitoring of Switching Equipment
DMS units monitor the status of switching equipment (line breaker, line disconnecting switch, busbar switches, ground switches, etc.) related to the bay. When an operation (open or close) is performed over one of the monitored switches, the DMS system monitors the correct opening and closure by means of programmable timers.
Frequency Functions (81U/81O)

The frequency for underfrequency and overfrequency units in the DMS system is always measured over a single phase voltage (phase B).
PROTECTION
Each protective function can be programmed independently to trip, trip after manual closing, or enable a reclosing.
Alarms
DMS units incorporate alarm monitoring and management functions. Up to 96 alarms can be configured in one DMS module (32 protection alarms, 48 control alarms and 16 communication alarms). Alarms are defined from the different protection and control statuses. It is possible to define logical combinations of several statuses for defining an alarm.
CONTROL
Operations & Interlocks
The control sub-module of the DMS units allows the user to configure (using the GE-INTRO configuration software) and perform up to 16 operations. Two of them are predefined (Control Blocking and Control Unblocking) and the other 14 are fully configurable. The operation commands are sent to the relay through local communications (graphic display or local keypad), through remote communications or via digital inputs (conventional RTU).
Overcurrent Units
The following overcurrent functions are provided: Time and instantaneous overcurrent for phase (51P, 50P) and ground (51N, 50N) with only one instantaneous level. The time overcurrent units can be separately selected to follow Inverse, Very Inverse or Extremely Inverse curves or Definite Time.
Breaker Health Monitor

For each operation, DMS units calculate and store the cumulative values for I2t on each of the three phases. If the rated current is not exceeded as in the case of a manual opening command with no fault current, the relay stores the rated current value instead of the measured value. The value I2t is accumulated and stored independently for each phase. These values can be accessed either via local MMI or GE-LOCAL communications software.
Directional Units (67, 67N)

DMS modules provide the capability to supervise overcurrent functions with directional units. The directional supervision can be adjusted independently for each of the overcurrent units, so that each unit can become independently directional if desired.
Combinational Circuits
Besides the interlocks mentioned above, which are related to the operations, the user can define "static" type interlocks given by the so-called combinational circuits. With these circuits, the user can define actions related to different signals received by the DMS unit, remaining active while those signals are as defined. The DMS has 4 programmable combinational circuits. The user can program each circuit using logical AND, NOT and OR gates. The input of these gates can be selected from the 64 control states. Combinational circuits 1 and 3 allow the user to define OR gates where the inputs are up to 4 AND gates. Combinational circuits of 2 and 4 allow the user to define OR gates where up to 3 AND gates are permitted.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46)

This function can be used in feeders or lines to limit the load unbalance or to detect extreme fault conditions such as the breaking of a cable without ground contact. The unit measures the negative sequence component of the line current, that is directly related with the unbalance. This function can also be used in generator protection systems to avoid rotor heating due to the presence of negative sequence currents.
Supervision of Trip and Closing Circuits

As an option, DMS units can have two complete supervision circuits for breaker trip and closing coils. These supervision inputs monitor both the battery voltage level and the continuity of the trip and/or closing circuits, applying current through those circuits and checking that it flows properly.
Event Recorder
DMS units keep a record of the last 150 events. These events can be generated in the protection sub-module by a trip or pickup of one of the different protection units, self-check or monitoring function alarms, setting changes, etc.
Configurable I/O
All the inputs and outputs of DMS units are configurable, except for the trip and reclose contacts included in the power supply boards. Inputs and outputs may be configured with GE-INTRO software.
Three Phase Voltage (59 & 27)

The three phase under and overvoltage units can be adjusted to act on phaseto-phase voltage values, calculated from phase-to-ground voltages applied to the unit. The undervoltage unit is supervised by the breaker status and will not activate when the breaker is open.
176

Oscillography
DMS units store up to 4 oscillography records with a resolution of 16 samples per cycle. Each oscillography record has a maximum capacity of 66 cycles. The number of pre-fault cycles can be selected from 2 to 10 cycles. The information stored in each record depends on the DMS model but will always include all analog waveforms available in the unit plus a set of digital status information.
Software
Two Windows based software packages are included with the DMS: s GE-LOCAL enables the user to view
the units settings, alarms, measurements and statuses, and retrieve event and oscillographic records. s GE-INTRO enables the user to configure inputs and outputs, alarms, operations and interlockings and configurable screens in the graphic display.
Optionally, GE-OSC enables the user to analyze the oscillography records. These software packages are part of the GE-NESIS software (GE NEtwork Substation Integration System) used by the DDS system.
Metering
DMS units perform accurate metering of I, I 2, V, VA, VAR, kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh, cos phi, and f. These measurements can be accessed directly on the two line liquid crystal display (LCD) on the front of the equipment, the graphical LCD (if this option is requested), or via the GE-LOCAL communication software. There are two possibilities regarding metering accuracy: a basic unit and an enhanced option that gives 1% accuracy in voltage and current.
TYPICAL WIRING
DIRECTION OF POWER FLOW FOR POSITIVE WATTS POSITIVE DIRECTION OF LAGGING VARS
A B
C VB
L O A D
A
GROUND BUS
USER INTERFACES
Local HMIs
The local HMI in DMS units is developed through two keyboard/display sets, one for protection functions and another for control functions.
A7 A8 B9 B10 A9 A10 B7 B8 A1 A2 B1 B2 A3 A4 B3 B4 Va V b Vb Vc Vc 1A 1A 1B Vx Vx Va 1B 1C 1C 1N 1N
D11 C11 (+) (-)

CONTROL POWER
Q11 P11 (+) (-)

CONTROL POWER
(REDUNDANT)
A12
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS TRIP

TRIP
E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 J1 K1 J2 K2 J3 K3 J4 K4 J5 K5 J6 K6 J7 K7 J8 K8 J9 K9 J10 K10 J11 K11 J12 K12 L1 M1 L2 M2 L3 M3 L4 M4 L5 M5 L6 M6 L7 M7 L8 M8 L9 M9 L10 M10 L11 M11 L12 M12
EP1 EP2 EP3 EP4 EP5 EP6 EP7 COMMON P1 EC1 EC2 EC3 EC4 EC5 EC6 EC7 COMMON C1 EC8 EC9 EC10 EC11 EC12 EC13 EC14 COMMON C2 EC15 EC16 EC17 EC18 EC19 EC20 EC21 COMMON C3 EC22 EC23 EC24 EC25 EC26 EC27 EC28 COMMON C4 EC29 EC30 EC31 EC32 EC33 EC34 EC35 COMMON C5 EC36 EC37 EC38 EC39 EC40 EC41 EC42 COMMON C6
GE Power Management
RECLOSE RECLOSE READY
DMS
Digital Multifunctional System
C5 D5 C6 D6 C7 D7 C8 D8 C9 D10 C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4 E5 F5 E6 F6 E7 F7 E8 F8 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11 E12 F12 N1 O1 N2 O2 N3 O3 N4 O4 N5 O5 N6 O6 N7 O7 N8 O8 N9 O9 N10 O10 N11 O11 N12 O12
PROTECTION INPUTS
COIL SUPERVISION No. 1 No. 2

CONTROL INPUTS
PROTECTION OUTPUTS CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS CONTROL OUTPUTS
Protection HMI
The protection HMI incorporates a keyboard (with 20 keys) and alphanumeric LCD with two rows of 16 characters each, allowing access to all the information available in the protection system. The user can view and modify settings, display status and measurement information, command protection operations, etc.
OUTPUTS (FIXED)
52/a 52/b
52/a
52/b
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8
Control HMI
The control HMI incorporates a functional keyboard (6 keys) and graphical LCD. This graphical LCD shows bay, alarm, measurement, and I/O status screens.
CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4
Communication Ports
Each DMS unit is provided with two communication ports, one RS232 front port for local communication and a rear port for remote communication (where the Level 2 system is connected). The rear port can be RS232, RS485 or Fiber Optic type. Both ports allow the user to establish communication with the DMS unit using the different programs included in the GE-NESIS software.
CONTROL INPUTS
SC5 SC6 SC7 SC8 SC9 SC10 SC11 SC12
721751A4.cdr
177

The Level 1 field units shall be microprocessor based providing protection, control, monitoring, metering, and complete register functionality for a substation bay. Separate CPU boards shall handle protection, control, and communication tasks, thus increasing system dependability and security. A redundant power supply shall be optionally available for each unit. Unit architecture shall be a PLC-like modular architecture allowing a flexible number of analog and digital I/O by the addition of single card modules. Minimum functionality included in Level 1 field units shall be as follows: s Breaker failure units s Selectable setting tables s Configurable inputs and outputs
Control Functions:
s Programmable operations for up to 7
elements ( programmable operate, fail and success conditions and operation timers) s Programmable interlockings s Configurable inputs and outputs s Configurable one line diagram for the substation bay
Metering:
s Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I2 , Vab, Vbc, Vca, P, Q, f,
cos real time metering
s Current maximeter s Demand register s Analog (several mA scales)

programmable metering s Pulse counting for energy metering
HMI and Communications

s Local alphanumeric LCD for protection operation
Monitoring:
s Real time monitoring of up to 7
switchgear elements (breakers, switches,...) s Alarm generation and treatment s Breaker supervision (I2t) s Breaker coil supervision
s Local graphical LCD for bay informas s s s s s

tion shall include as a minimum user programmable screens for: One line diagram displaying Switchgear operation Access to metering information Alarm panel display I/O status display Front (RS232) and rear (RS232, Fiber optic or RS485 selectable) communication ports with 115kb maximum communication speed
Protection:
s Available units for different bay
applications (feeder, transformer, busbar, bus coupler, auxiliary services...) including selected combinations of protection functions: 50/50N, 51/51N, 67/67N, 46, 27, 59, 59N, 81U, 81O, 87T, 64, 25, 79 s Cold load pickup
Register and Analysis Functions:

s Event register s Oscillographic register
ORDERING
DDS system is composed of DMS modules. To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide below.
Table 1. Application Variant Feeders Variant Protection

50/51 50N/51N 46 67 67N 67N ungrounded 27 59F 81 Recl.
L1
q q q q q
L3
q q q q q q q q q
L4
q q q q q
Aux Serv. L7 S2
q q
DMS * * ** * * * * * *** * *
DMS 2 3 L S ** * 0 1 2 3 * * G H J M 000 100 A B I
Digital distribution system Control functionality Protection and control functionality Line application (only model 3) Auxiliary services application (only model 2) Application variant (see table 1) Ranges depend on model RS232 communication 1 mm plastic fiber optic communication 62.5/125 glass fiber optic communication Point to point RS485 communication Protection inputs and outputs depend on model Control inputs and outputs depend on model 48-125 VDC single source auxiliary voltage 110-250 VDC single source auxiliary voltage 48-125 VDC redundant source auxiliary voltage 110-250 VDC redundant source auxiliary voltage Power measurement by pulse count Direct power measurement (1% error in V, I, and 2% in P, Q, Power) M-Link communications protocol M-Link and ModBus RTU communications protocol Spanish language English language
q q q q q q q q q q
q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q
Control
Operations Interlocks 25
Measures
Phase current Ground current Phase voltage Bars 1 voltage Negative sequence Power Cos Frequency q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q q
q q q q q q q q q q q q q
q q
Monitor
Circuit breaker status Disconnecting switches status Events Breaker maintenance Trip circuit superv. q q q

Analysis
Events Oscillography q q q q
Others
Multiple setting tables Cold load pick-up Time synchron.
178
Protection, monitoring, analysis and energy management numerical system.
SMOR-B
Feeder Management System
Applications
I I I I
Medium voltage lines and feeders Power transformers, main or backup Capacitor banks, busbars and motors IED in substation automation Ground and phase TOC Hiset/loset f instantaneous O/C Hiset/loset ground instantaneous O/C Negative sequence TOC Under and overfrequency Directional phase and ground unit TOC 3 phase under and overvoltage Zero sequence overvoltage Cold load pickup logic Breaker failure logic Phase rotation selection Multiple settings groups Configurable I/O and logic 4 shot configurable recloser Breaker health Trip circuit monitor Failure to close detection Metering: A V W var Hz and cos Demand ammeter Peak and average I with date and time 165 event record Oscillography available Fault reporting, last 4 stored Self test diagnostics Energy metering (optional) 17 LED indicators LCD display and keypad Front and rear RS232 ports Optional rear fiber optic or RS485 port M-Link + ModBus protocols IRIG-B synchronization 3 selectable time/I operating curves Drawout modules for easy servicing Selectable 19" wide, 3.5" high or 9'5" wide, 7" high, flush rack mount

DESCRIPTION
The SMOR Feeder Management System is a microprocessor based multifunction protection, control, and measurement unit. The SMOR uses a set of algorithms to create a general purpose protection and monitoring unit for power electrical systems. The SMOR is a device that provides protection, monitoring, analysis and control functions. It has been designed to be applied as main protection in medium voltage lines and distribution feeders, and as main or backup protection in power transformers, capacitor banks, busbars, motors and transmission lines, and also as integral protection for interconnections in small stations and co-generations. Complete overcurrent protection is provided. This includes phase, ground and negative sequence protection for time overcurrent, hiset overcurrent, loset overcurrent and directional control. Under and overvoltage, as well as under and overfrequency protection are also provided. Four shot recloser is also available. With programmable logic inputs and outputs, the SMOR can be easily configured for the users specific applications. The relay has extensive monitoring and metering functions. It has an internal, non-volatile, memory which allows it to record the last 165 events, the last 256 alarms, and 4 registers (66 cycles each) of oscillography data. The relay performs background self-tests during operation. All the information and settings of the unit are accessible by means of a computer connected to one of the three serial ports (RS232, RS485 or fiber optic) or by using the man-machine interface (MMI). The MMI includes a 20 character keypad and a 32 character (2 line) LCD display situated on the front of the relay.

User Interfaces
I I I I I I
Features
I I I
GE Power Management
179
SMOR-B
DESCRIPTION
The wide range of SMOR-B models cover the majority of applications and variations of electrical systems. The remote communication capability of the SMOR can be integrated in a centralized system to supervise and manage power in the electrical system. The SMOR system represents a great advance in functions integration concept focused in power system management optimization.
Three Phase Voltage (59 and 27)

The three phase under and overvoltage units can be adjusted to act on phaseto-phase voltage values, calculated from phase-to-ground voltages applied to the unit. The undervoltage unit is supervised by the breaker status and will not activate when the breaker is open.

Monitoring
The SMOR performs the following monitoring functions: I associated circuit breaker status I alarms and operations optical indication
I associated breakers tripping and

closing circuits supervision (except for SMOR-0) I breaker health monitoring (I2t) I phase sequence selection (ABC or CBA) I protection status self-checking
Ground Overvoltage (59NH and 59NL)

High and low voltage is calculated from the phase to ground inputs. The SMOR7000 has a dedicated open delta input.

Each protective function can be programmed independently to trip, trip after manual closing or enable a reclosing.
Breaker Control
The SMOR has incorporated functions for breaker control which can be accessed from the keypad or through the remote communications port.
Metering
The SMOR performs accurate measurement of I, I2, V, VA, VAR, cos , and f. Optional energy metering (kwh, kVarh)
Overcurrent Units
The SMOR includes the following overcurrent elements: I phase and ground time delay (51PT
and 51NT)
Operation Failure Detection

Breaker opening and closure are supervised by separate opening and closing failure detectors.
Load Profile Recorder

The average and RMS current are calculated for a 15, 30 or 60 min period for each phase.
I hiset and loset phase and ground

instantaneous (50PH, 50PL, 50NH and 50NL) I negative sequence time delay (46P)
Recloser
The SMOR system recloser allows up to 4 shots and up to 50 trips per hour. Dead time is programmable for each shot. Programmable logic is also available. Special logic for sequence coordination with downstream protection available as an option.
Event Recorder
165 events are recorded in non-volatile EEPROM memory. Date and time (1 ms resolution), type of event, voltage and current, and a relay status snapshot are stored.
Time delay units (51PT, 51NT and 46PT) can use inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse and definite time curves.
Oscillography Recorder
The Oscillography recorder can be triggered by any of the protective functions pickup or trip or by an external input. Each of these records stores, with a resolution of 16 samples per cycle, the following data:
1) analog signals: Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Va, Vb, and Vc 2) digital signals: unit pickup and trip I inputs and outputs I signals from the recloser I date and time I protection settings
Directional Units (67/67N)

Directional supervision of the phase and ground units, polarized by phaseto-phase voltage and zero-sequence respectively, with adjustable torque angle. The directional supervision is also adjustable independently for each overcurrent unit. Programmable performance logic for polarization voltage loss is included.
Cold Load Pickup

This function is provided to prevent operation of the breaker overcurrent functions during breaker re-energization.
Settings Tables
Three alternative settings tables are available. The active table at each moment is selectable by setting or input, the input having priority over the setting value.
Frequency Units (81U and 81O)

The under and overfrequency units are measured over a single phase (preset to phase B).
Synchronization can be controlled through the keypad, communication software or the IRIG-B input.
The relay stores a up to 4 records of 66 cycles each (pre-fault cycles are adjustable between 2 and 10) which can be stored in Comtrade file format, and visualized and analyzed using the GE-OSC software.
Alarm Recorder
In addition to the event recorder, the SMOR can record up to 255 alarms labeled in time. Alarms can be sent to a digital control system or upper levels, grouped using programmable logic and their text defined by the user.
180
SMOR-B
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Digital Inputs
The SMOR system has 12 digital inputs, (6 in SMOR-0 models) they can be configured by the user by means of the GE-INTRO configuration software.
USER INTERFACES
Communications
The SMOR system has 1 front RS232 and 1 rear RS232 communications ports. A third port on the rear can be selected to be RS485 or fiber optic. The GE-LOCAL software allows local or remote communications with a computer for a variety of functions including monitoring and control. The GE-POWER software can connect the SMOR to a communications net allowing it to be part of an integrated system.
Man Machine Interface (MMI)

The SMOR has a 20 key keypad which can be used to control and program the system without a computer. A 2 line (16 character per line) LCD display is illuminated and controlled by a potentiometer situated on the rear of the front board.
Outputs
The SMOR 1000 system has 17 configurable outputs: 2 trip, 2 closing, 1 alarm, 2 groups of 4 configurable outputs, and 4 auxiliary outputs.
LED Indicators
One of the LEDs is two-colored for the system alarm, and 16 are red, configurable to any of the 32 alarms available. Each LED can be configured with or without memory.
TYPICAL WIRING
C
A B C
for SMOR 1/2/4/7-B (19" rack model)

52
A5 VAN A6 VAN B5 VBN B6 VBN

1
A10 B10
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CONTROL POWER
TRIP 1
GE Power Management
TRIP 2 RECLOSE 1 RECLOSE 2 SYSTEM READY
A7 VCN A8 VCN
1
SMOR-B
A1 A2 B1 B2 A3 A4 B3 B4
IA
IA
CURRENT INPUTS
51/67P PICKUP
O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8
IB IB IC
IC
51/67N PICKUP 46 TRIP 81O/u TRIP COMMON 27/59 TRIP RECL. LOCKOUT
RECL. IN PROGRESS
RECLOSER BLOCKED
IN
IN
COMMON 51/67P TRIP
O9 O10 O11 O12
BUS V
B7 VBN B8
GROUND AT RELAY LOCATION 1 (NOT CT & PT LOCATION)
VBN
50/67P TRIP
51/67N TRIP 50/67N TRIP
+ C9 D9 C10 D10 C11 D11 C12 D12 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11 E12 F12
A11 B11 A12 B12 C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4 C5 D5 C6 C7 D7 C8 D8 D6 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E6 F5 E5 F6 E8 F7 E7 F8

1
GROUP 2
OUTPUTS GROUP 1
CONTROL POWER
IRIG-B
TRIP VOLTAGE SUPERVISION
52a 52b
INPUTS 4 INPUTS 3 INPUTS 2 INPUTS 1 DEFAULT SETTINGS. USER CONFIGURABLE
PI1 52/b PI2 RECLOSER BLOCK (P) PI3 RECLOSER UNBLOCK (P) COMMON PI4 50P BLOCK PI5 50N BLOCK PI6 RECLOSE INHIBIT COMMON PI7 RECLOSE INITIATE PI8 PI9
PHASE DIRECTIONAL BLOCK GROUND DIRECTIONAL BLOCK
COIL 1 SUPERVISION
COIL 1
TRIP VOLTAGE SUPERVISION COIL 2 SUPERVISION
52a 52b
COIL 2
RS-232
FRONT 2
RS-232
REAR 3 PORT 3 IS INDEPENDENT FROM PORTS 1 AND 2

729702A2.ai
COMMON PI10 OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGER PI11 ACTIVE TABLE SELECTION PI12 ACTIVE TABLE SELECTION COMMON
RS-485 OR REAR FIBER-OPTIC (GLASS OR PLASTIC)
PORT 1 HAS PRIORITY OVER PORT 2
181
SMOR-B
SMOR-B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

METERING Frequency: Nominal Phase Current: Nominal Ground Current: Nominal Voltage: Auxiliary Voltage: 50/60 Hz 1 or 5 A (depending on model) 1 or 5 A (depending on model) 100/3-220/3 VAC 24-48 VDC, 20% 110-250 VDC, 20% INPUTS THERMAL CAPACITY Current Circuits: Continuously: During 3 Sec: During 1 Sec: Voltage Circuits: Continuously: During 1 Min: BURDENS Current Circuits: ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Storage: -40 to +85C Operation: -20 to +70C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Metallic package in 19" rack and 2 units high or 1/2 19" rack 4 units high. Frontal MMI with LCD display and keypad. Four rear terminal blocks (six in models with expansion board) including connector for IRIG-B time synchronization. Protection class IP52 (according to IEC 529) TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radiointerference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radiofrequency Emission:
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In 2 x Vn 3,5 x Vn 0.5 VA for In = 5 A 0.1 VA for In = 1A 0.2 VA, Vn= 63.5 V 12 W 8 mA / 1 W, Vaux: 125 VDC
COMMUNICATIONS Local Communication: LCD alphanumeric display with two lines of 16 characters per line; 20 button frontal keypad Remote Communication (local or remote PC and communications net): Mode: half duplex Speed: 1200 to 19200 bps Physical media: RS232 (ports 1, 2 and 3) RS485 (port 3 optional) Plastic Fiber Optic (port 3 optional): Type of connector: HFBR-4516 Power supplied: 8 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -39 dBm Wave length: 660 nm Glass Fiber Optic (port 3 optional) Type of connector: STA Power supplied: 17.5 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -24.5 dBm Wave length: 820 nm Synchronization: IRIG-B DB9 connector for RS232 ports on the front (1) and on the rear (2). 3 pin Phoenix type connector for RS485 port on the rear (3) with 1 mm plastic fiber optic or 50/125 glass fiber optic option.
Voltage Circuits: DC Burden: During Operation: Per Each Activated Input:
OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS Contact Capacity: Maximum Operating Voltage: 440 VAC Continuous Current: 16 A Make and Carry: 25 A Breaking: 4000 VA SIGNALLING CONTACTS Contact Capacity: Maximum Operating Voltage: 380 VAC, 250 VDC Continuous Current: 8A Make and Carry: 8A Breaking Capacity: 1760 VA
2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to IEC 255-22-1 Class IV according to IEC 255-22 2 Class III according to IEC 255-22-3 Class IV according to IEC 255-22-4 Class II according to IEC 255-21-1 Class I according to IEC-22521-2 according to IEC 41B (Sec) 81 and EN55022 class B
PACKAGING Dimensions:
Mod 04B: Weight: Not Packaged: 13.2 lbs (6 kg) Packaged: 15.4 lbs (7 kg)
17.12" x 7.95" x 3.46" (435 mm x 202 mm x 88 mm) 271 mm W x 260.3 mm D x 176 mm H
APPROVALS Compliant Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING
Special Models
MOD 03B: Energy metering +sequence coordination
SMOR
SMOR
* * * * * 21 * * * * B
0 1 4 7 1 2 3 B C D E F G H B C 1 2 M D 0 1 F G H 0 0
3 x Iph + In (without voltage function) 3 x Iph + In + 3 x V 3 x Iph + In + 3 x V - isolated ground 3 x Iph + In + 3 x V + V0 (dedicated) Plastic F.O. + RS232 communications Glass F.O. + RS232 communications RS232 + RS485 SMOR-0/1/7-B: phase: 0.2-2.4 A, ground: 0.2-2.4 A phase: 1-12 A, ground: 0.2-2.4 A phase: 1-12 A, ground: 0.5-6 A phase: 1-12 A, ground: 0.1-1.2 A phase: 0.5-6 A, ground: 0.2-2.4 A phase: 0.5-6 A, ground: 0.1-1.2 A phase: 2-16 A, ground: 0.2-2.4 A SMOR 4-B: phase: 0.2-2.4 A, ground: 0.005-0.1 A phase: 1-12 A, ground: 0.005-0.1 A P1, P2, P3: M-Link protocol P1, P2: M-Link protocol; P3: ModBus RTU protocol HMI language: Spanish HMI language: English SMOR 0-B SMOR 1/2/4/7-B 24-48 VDC auxiliary voltage 48-125 VDC auxiliary voltage 110-250 VDC auxiliary voltage Options (special models)
MOD 04B: 1/2 rack case MOD 06B: Energy metering + 1/2 rack case
In the ordering code, the last three digits are to be replaced by the MOD code. Example: SMOR-B in 1/2 rack case SMOR*****21**04B

See pages 15 - 18.
182
Three phase and ground overcurrent protection with communication capability.
MDP
Overcurrent Protection
Applications
I I
Protection of feeders, transmission lines, alternating current machines Control room breaker operation

I I I I I I I
Phase and ground time overcurrent Instantaneous overcurrent Four user selectable TOC curves Four values of definite time protection Four output relay contacts Three external inputs Remote breaker control

I I I I
Current measured every millisecond Built in self test with alarm Event data Time of trip to 0.01 second
DESCRIPTION
The MDP is a digital non-directional overcurrent relay that protects against three phase and ground faults. Time overcurrent relays are used for the protection of feeders, transmission lines, alternating current machines, and for many other applications where accurate measurement of current and timing are necessary. The MDP relays have control inputs and outputs that can be used for a zone interlocking scheme. Remote control and monitoring of the breaker enables control room breaker operation. The MDP includes four measuring units, one for each of the three phase currents and one for ground or residual current. The phase and ground units contain settings for time overcurrent (TOC) and instantaneous overcurrent (IOC). The instantaneous unit can be disabled or blocked. The MDP has four output relay contacts, including two which can be configured to distinguish between phase and ground or between time and instantaneous trips. Three external inputs are provided to block tripping by the ground unit, block tripping by the instantaneous functions, and indicate the breaker status. Local user interface is provided via a scrolling display and 8 LEDs. Modular communication interface provides an easy field upgrade of communications protocols and physical interface. The available protocols are GE-modem, Commnet, and ModBus RTU. Physical interface via an RS232 or an RS485 port is an upgradeable option. The MDP comes in a space saving S2 drawout case construction. The case is suitable for semi-flush mounting on panels.
User Interfaces
I I I I I
Eight LEDs on the front of the relay Seven segment display with scrolling Modular communications card RS232 and RS485 available Three available protocols
Features
I I I
Compact S2 drawout case Wide range AC/DC power supply Meets ANSI C37.9, IEC255, BS.142 standards
GE Power Management
183
MDP Overcurrent Protection

Three Phase Time Overcurrent and Instantaneous Overcurrent
The MDP relay includes four measuring units, one for each of the three phase currents and one for ground (residual) current. Each one of the units includes a time and instantaneous overcurrent unit. All phase units share the same setting. The inverse time overcurrent (TOC) unit contains four characteristic curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and long time inverse) and four values of definite time protection. A time dial setting provides a selection of operating times. The instantaneous overcurrent (IOC) unit can be adjusted between 1 and 31 times the TOC unit's setting. It can be delayed by 0.05 to 1.55 seconds to enable coordination flexibility. The unit can also be set to 0 times the TOC to disable the instantaneous unit. The MDP may be ordered with one of seven different current ranges.
Outputs
The MDP relay has four outputs. Two overcurrent outputs can be configured to allow the user to distinguish either between phase and ground or between time delay and instantaneous. The choice can be made via the output selection switch (A or B) located on the face plate. The other outputs are a control/power self test failure alarm, and an output contact to close the breaker.
USER INTERFACES
LED Targets
The MDP has eight LEDs on the front of the relay. A green Ready LED indicates that the relay is in service. An amber Pickup LED indicates that one of the protection units has picked up. Six red LEDs indicate the trip was produced by phase A, B, C or ground units and TOC or IOC units. The trip LEDs can be reset with the reset lever.
LEDs provide a quick visual check of relay status
Inputs
Three external inputs are provided. When the first is energized it blocks tripping by the ground units. The second blocks tripping by the phase and ground instantaneous units. The third indicates that the breaker status is closed. Diode bridges are provided on all inputs. These inputs can be energized by either AC or DC.
READY PICKUP
TRIP TARGETS
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 STATUS IA/PICKUP IB/PICKUP IC/PICKUP IN/PICKUP F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 LAST TRIP IA LAST TRIP IB LAST TRIP IC LAST TRIP IN LAST TRIP TIME
GROUND TOC IOC
Display
The 2 digit seven-segment display can be scrolled through by pushing the reset lever. The display indicates the status of the relay, the phase A, B, C, and ground current in multiples of pickup, the phase A, B, C, and ground current for the last trip in multiples of pickup, and the operating time for the last trip to a maximum of 199 seconds.
Ground Time Overcurrent and Instantaneous Overcurrent

The ground measuring unit includes a time and instantaneous overcurrent unit similar to the phase overcurrent unit. The use of a separate ground overcurrent function is advantageous because it can be adjusted to provide faster and more sensitive protection for single-phase-to-ground faults than the phase-overcurrent functions. The ground TOC unit has a number of available setting ranges including a sensitive setting for detecting residual ground currents. Typical connections for ground residual sensing and for a well grounded system are shown in the Typical Wiring diagrams.

Metering
Phase and ground line current measurements are made every millisecond. Each phase and ground measurement is recorded separately in groups of ten, and the average of the maximum value of these groups is taken. The MDP displays these phase and ground measurements on a 2 digit display. The currents are displayed in multiples of setpoint and the operation time of last trip is displayed in seconds.
Communications Port
The MDP can be supplied with various communications interface modules. The communication interface card is modular and can be installed in the field. This enables the user to add or change communications protocols. There are currently two physical interfaces available, RS232 and RS485. The data communication rate is 2400 baud. MDP-LINK software is provided for PC communication.
Event Record
The MDP stores the phase and ground currents and the last trip operating time. They can be displayed on the 2 digit display by toggling through the functions F5 through F9. Access via a computer or computer network gives additional event log details such as the date, time to the nearest 1/100 of a second, and type of trip.
Zone Selective Interlocking

Zone selective interlocking allows instantaneous operation of upstream and downstream devices, while blocking instantaneous operation of upstream devices for faults below the downstream device.
Communications Protocols
The three communications protocols available are GE modem, Commnet, and ModBus RTU. I GE modem enables the user to save
fault files, read actual parameters, and close and trip the breaker. I Commnet enables the MDP to interface to Power Leader's Distribution Software. This system interface allows control and monitoring of the distribution system. I ModBus RTU is a widely accepted protocol that provides active control and monitoring of the components on a distribution system. The MDP relay accepts commands to monitor actual values and force outputs.
Testing
Test and connection plugs are provided for current injection testing. The MDP performs a complete self test check when powered up. Once in operation partial checks are made. If the system detects a critical failure of one of its components it gives a fatal error order and disables the trip outputs.
184

TYPICAL WIRING
ALTERNATIVE CT WIRING FOR RESIDUAL GROUND SENSING
1
1A
8
1G
1A 1B
1B 1C
1C 1G
CURRENT INPUTS ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND SENSING CONNECTION
CIRCUIT BREAKER
B
C
CONTROL POWER
52a
TRIP COIL
52a
10 20
POWER SUPPLY
1
1A
8
1G
1A 1B
1B 1C
1C 1G
CURRENT INPUTS
T
TRIPS
13 12 11
SWITCH GEAR GROUND BUS
GE Power Management
14
CURRENT INPUTS
MDP
CP4
LOGIC INPUTS
15 16 17 18
SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR COMMUNICATIONS
CP6 CP7 CP8 CP5
TX RX
COM
CP1 CP3 CP2 9 19
RS232
OUTPUT
707754A3.CDR
MDP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

METERING Frequency: 20/50/60 Hz Current: 1 or 5 A Max Permissible Current: Continuous: 2 x In Three Sec: 50 x In One Sec: 100 x In POWER SUPPLY Control Voltage: 24 - 48 VDC 48 - 125 VDC 110 - 250 VDC COMMUNICATIONS Protocol: ModBus RTU, Commnet, and GE Modem Ports: RS485 or RS232 rear connector Display: Two digit LED display Reset Switch: Used to toggle through the display values and reset trips OUTPUTS Output and Trip Contacts: Closing: 30 A, 300 VDC for tripping duty Rated for capacitor trip Interrupting: 50 W resistive @ 2 A, 300 VDC Continuous: 5 A @ 300 VDC ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -20C to +70C (-40C also available) Operation: -40C to +65C Humidity: up to 95% without condensation TYPE TESTS Insulation Withstand Tests: Impulse Voltage: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 Joules per: ANSI C37.90.1, IEC 255-5, Class III 2.5 kVDC
CLOSE
DC Hipot Surge Withstand Capability: Fast Transient:
0.009 , 2.8 @ 60 Hz (2.25 VA @ 5 A) (0.1 - 0.875)/(0.3 - 2.65) = 0.009 , 2.4 @ 50 Hz (2.25 VA @ 5 A) (0.5 - 4.375)/(1.5 - 13.25) = 0.01 , 11.5 @ 60 Hz (0.25 VA @ 5 A) (0.5 - 4.375)/(1.5 - 13.25) = 0.01 , 9.7 @ 50 Hz (0.25 VA @ 5 A) Power Supply: < 3 W @ quiescent < 4.5 W @ VDCmax Specifications subject to change without notice.
INPUTS Contact Converter Inputs: BURDENS Current Circuits AC: (0.1 - 0.875)/(0.3 - 2.65) =
38.5 - 300 VDC
5 kV Crest, < 10 ns rise time, > 50 pulses per sec, 2 sec duration each polarity per: ANSI C37.90.1 per: IEC 255.22.4, Class III Oscillatory: 3 kV Crest, >50 test per sec, 2 sec duration each polarity decay < 6 s per: ANSI C37.90.1 per: IEC 255.22.1, Class III Radio Frequency Interference: 20 MHz to 1 GHz keyed every 1 MHz for 2 sec per: ANSI C37.90.2, IEC 801.3 Electrostatic Discharge: per: IEC 801.2 APPROVALS UL Approved
185

The relay shall be an integrated digital protection system including overcurrent protection, current monitoring, diagnostic, and communication capabilities. Protection functions shall include: I phase and ground time overcurrent I
(TOC 51/51N) four characteristic curves (inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and long time inverse) and four values of definite time protection ground TOC unit includes a sensitive setting for detecting residual ground currents phase and ground instantaneous overcurrent (IOC 50/50N) IOC functions include an adjustable timer the IOC functions can be disabled with a 0 time setting
The relay shall have three external inputs which shall block IOC trips, block ground trips, and indicate breaker status. Four output relay contacts shall be provided. Two can be configured by an output selection switch to distinguish either between phase and ground trips, or between time delay and instantaneous trips. The other two outputs are a control power/self test failure alarm, and a contact to close the breaker. The monitoring functions shall include: I phase and ground current metering
with a sampling rate of 20 samples per cycle, displayed in 5 second intervals I fault currents for the last trip I operating time for the last trip to within 1/100 of a second
I self test User interfaces shall include: I LEDs to indicate the relay is in I I I I I
service and if a protection device has picked up six individual target LEDs to indicate each protection function relay settings controlled by front panel dip switches 2 digit scrolling display test and connection plugs for current injection testing rear serial data interface for communication and data retrieval, including choice of RS232 or RS485, and choice of GE-modem, Commnet, or ModBus RTU protocols software for PC communication
I I I I
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
SEMIFLUSH MTG.
SURFACE MTG.
PANEL MOUNTING
10 32 STUDS 2x5 / 16 18 STUDS.

FOR SURFACE MTG.
10.31" (262mm)
5.56" (142mm) 10 32 STUDS

GLASS
10.00" (254mm) CUTOUT
4 x 0.25"Dia. (6mm) 6.63" (168mm) 1.13" (29mm) 10.31" (262mm) INCHES (mm) 5.69" (144mm)
707751A1.DWG
ORDERING
MDP * * * 0 000 * A
MDP 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 D
Base unit with 50/51 overcurrent protection No Communications or control inputs (Block Ground, Block Instantaneous, Breaker Status) Control inputs and communications upgrade socket Commnet ModBus RTU RS232 RS485 5 A Nominal, 1.5 to 13.125 A Phase, 0.5 to 4.375 A Ground 5 A Nominal, 1.5 to 13.125 A Phase, 1.5 to 13.125 A Ground 5 A Nominal, 1.5 to 13.125 A Phase, 0.1 to 0.875 A Ground 1 A Nominal, 0.3 to 2.625 A Phase, 0.1 to 0.875 A Ground 1 A Nominal, 0.3 to 2.625 A Phase, 0.3 to 2.625 A Ground 1 A Nominal, 0.3 to 2.625 A Phase, 0.05 to 0.4375 A Ground 5 A Nominal, 0.5 to 4.375 A Phase, 0.5 to 4.375 A Ground 24-48 VDC (19 to 60 VDC) 48-125 VDC/AC (38.5 to 150 VDC/AC) 35 to 120 AC See pages 110-250 VDC (88 to 285 VDC) 85 to 240 AC 15 - 18. Revision Levels www.GEindustrial.com/pm
186
735/737
Feeder Relay
Application
I
Feeder protection, any voltage level

I I I I I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The 735/737 is a microprocessor based relay used to perform primary circuit protection on distribution networks at any voltage level. Protection features include three phase timed overcurrent, phase instantaneous overcurrent, ground timed overcurrent, and ground instantaneous overcurrent. Each protection element can be selectively enabled by the front panel dial settings. Flexible settings and selectable curve shapes enable accurate coordination with other devices. Installation and maintenance costs are lower when the 735/737 is used instead of the 8 separate overcurrent protection devices it has been designed to replace. The 735 has three output contacts: trip, auxiliary trip, and service required. The auxiliary trip may be set to follow the main trip relay, act as an 86 Lockout relay, or to respond only to ground overcurrent faults while the main trip responds only to phase overcurrent faults. The 737 has eight additional output relays to provide a separate output for each protection element. This can accommodate more complex control schemes. The 735/737 has eight trip indictors on the front panel along with a clear button to reset the relay. Four status indicators provide a quick visual check of relay status. A bar graph indicates current load as a percent of CT. Communications switches on the front panel allow the user to set baud rate, relay address, and to enter the simulation mode for testing. A RS485 connection is provided for computer access. Software is provided with the relay to allow setup and simulation testing. Computer access allows the display of a trip record, which contains the pre-trip currents and the last five trip conditions. Computer access also allows the user to display metered current values as a % of CT, output relay status, status indicators, and dial settings. The 735/737 has a drawout construction and can be panel or 19" rack mounted.
3 phase time overcurrent Ground time overcurrent 5 curve shapes 4 curve shift multipliers per curve 10 time multipliers per curve ANSI, IAC, or IEC/BS142 curves Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Pickup level for each overcurrent Outputs: trip, aux trip, service Aux trip: 86 lockout, ground trip 737 has 8 additional output relays Block instantaneous on autoreclose
Monitoring
I I I I
Trip record of last 5 trips Pre-trip data includes currents True RMS sensing Monitor currents, output relays, status, settings
User Interfaces
I I I I I I I
8 LED trip indicators 4 LED status indicators Current bar graph, % of CT RS485 or RS422 communications ModBus RTU protocol Baud rate up to 19,200 bps Software for setup and simulation
Features
I I I I
1 amp or 5 amp CT input 20-260 V AC/DC control power Drawout case Switchgear panel or 19" rack mount
GE Power Management
187
735/737 Feeder Relay

PROTECTION
Three Phase & Ground Time Overcurrent (51) & (51N, 51G)
The 735/737 provides time overcurrent protection. Five separate time overcurrent curve shapes can be selected. For each curve shape 10 different time multipliers and 4 different curve shifts may be set. Three different curve types can be selected: ANSI, IAC, and IEC/BS142. This allows the selection of the optimum curve for coordination with fuses, feeders, motors, transformers, etc. The front dials allow the user to select the curve shape, the percent of CT to use as the pickup value, and the time multiplier (1-10). The option switches located on the side of the unit select the frequency, the curve shift (0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.1) and enable the custom scheme curve type. If the pickup dial is set to OFF the time overcurrent is disabled. ANSI
moderately inv. normal inverse very inverse extremely inv. definite time
Block Instantaneous on Autoreclose

When the 735/737 is used with an autoreclose scheme it may be desirable to block instantaneous trips after an autoreclose operation. This prevents nuisance trips due to the high inrush currents typically experienced in these situations. The custom scheme switch located on the side of the unit allows this function to be enabled once it is programmed using the setup program. A programmable phase and ground instantaneous trip block time can be set from 0 to 180 seconds. If this setpoint is used it disables instantaneous trips for the duration of the time setting, but time overcurrent protection is still enabled.
breaker closed. When a trip occurs the main trip contacts will momentarily pulse to trip the breaker, while the lockout contacts will latch open, preventing the close coil contacts from being activated and keeping the breaker open. To reset the lockout contacts either the front panel CLEAR key must be pressed, or a trip reset command must be received via the communications serial port.
Outputs
The 735/737 has three standard outputs. The main trip output is used to activate the breaker trip coil in the event of a fault. The auxiliary trip output can follow the trip relay, act as an 86 Lockout, or trip only on ground faults while the main trip output trips only on phase faults (as detailed above). The relay service output is used to provide the relay status. The 737 has 8 additional output relays to provide a separate dry contact output for each overcurrent protection element.
Lockout
The custom scheme switch located on the side of the unit can be used to set the auxiliary trip relay to act as an 86 Lockout relay once it is programmed using the setup program. When untripped the contacts are normally closed, enabling the breaker close coil circuit to keep the
IAC
short time inverse very inv. extr. inv. def. time
IEC/BS142
short time IEC A IEC B IEC C definite time

BUS
Phase & Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) & (50N, 50G)

The 735/737 has a separately adjustable instantaneous overcurrent function. No intentional delay (35 ms maximum) is added to the instantaneous trip. A front dial allows the instantaneous overcurrent setpoint to be set or disabled. Ground level and time delay can be selected for coordination with upstream devices. The ground signal is normally derived as the residual sum of the three phase CTs, eliminating the need for an additional ground sensor. Alternately, for more sensitive detection, an additional core balance (zero sequence) ground sensor encircling the 3 phase conductors, can be used.
52
735/737
OUTPUTS TRIP
3 50/51 AUX. TRIP
Ground Trip/Phase Trip Separation

The custom scheme switch located on the side of the unit can be used to separate ground trips from phase trips. This feature must first be programmed into the relay via the setup program. If this option is selected the auxiliary trip relay will only respond to ground faults and the main trip relay will only respond to phase faults.
SERVICE 1 8 PICK-UP AND CAUSE OF TRIP RELAYS (SR737 ONLY) COMMUNICATION RS422/485 LOAD
803666A2.cdr
50G/ 51G
188

USER INTERFACES
Status LEDs
When the relay is operating normally the RELAY IN SERVICE LED is on. If the test switch is on this LED will flash. If a fault is detected by the relays self-tests the SERVICE REQUIRED LED will go on to indicate a problem. When either the phase or ground instantaneous or time overcurrent threshold is exceeded a separate indicator flashes. The SETUP software has easy to use pull down menus. All the necessary information is provided for users to create their own interface communication software using the ModBus protocol of the relay.
Monitoring
The SETUP software can be used to monitor the current, output relays, status indicators, and dial settings. If the relay is in simulation mode the displayed current will be the programmed simulation current.
Trip Record and Pre-Trip

The 735/737 has the ability to sequentially display the last five trip conditions.
Simulation for Testing

Fault simulations can be run using a computer to enter required currents via the simulated currents menu of the SETUP program.
Latched Trip LEDs

To help determine the cause of a trip eight separate indicators are provided for phase and ground instantaneous and time overcurrent. These latched indicators remain set after a breaker trip. They can be reset with the front panel CLEAR push button.
FEATURES
Front View
Current Indicator
To monitor load current a front panel bar graph indicator is provided. It gives an indication of 10% CT rating to 100% of CT rating in steps of 10%.
Option Switches on side of unit: I TOC curve shift multiplier I System frequency I 737 option selection I Custom scheme
STATUS
Latched trip indication for fault diagnosis
RS485/RS422 communications
TRIP
TIME 51 INST 50 A
COMMUNICATION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CURRENT
100%
Communications
Either a 2 wire RS485 or a 4 wire RS422 configuration is available for relay communication. This allows a remote computer or SCADA system to monitor status, currents, settings, and values present at the time of a trip. ModBus RTU protocol is used. Up to 31 relays (slaves) can be connected on a twisted pair communications link to a single master. A unique address must be assigned to each relay via front panel switches when multiple relays are connected. Baud rates of up to 19,200 bps are selected using switches on the front panel. A TEST switch is provided which allows the 735/737 to accept communication commands to simulate different dial settings with computer controlled phase and ground currents for testing and training purposes. The TEST switch also disables protection for simulation tests.
Self check fail monitor and output contacts
RELAY IN SERVICE SERVICE REQUIRED PHASE PICKUP
BAUD
90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10%
+1 +2 +4 +8 +16 ADDRESS
2400 9600 19200
TEST
Load indicator 10 - 100% of CT rating
1200
Phase/ground pickup indicators for calibration testing Flexible phase time overcurrent (51P): 3 phase time overcurrent I 20 - 220% of CT I 5 curve shapes I 40 curves for each shape (10 Time Multiplier, 4 Curve Shift Multiplier) Flexible ground time overcurrent (51G/51N): Residual or zero sequence sensing I 15 - 100% of CT I 5 curve shapes I 40 curves for each shape (10 Time Multiplier, 4 Curve Shift Multiplier) Release catch and pull handle for easy drawout operation
(% OF CT)
GROUND PICKUP
G CLEAR
Simulation mode for testing from a computer

PHASE
TIME MULTIPLIER INSTANTANEOUS (x CT)
PICKUP (% OF CT)
VE RS
CURVE SHAPE
AL I N V E R NORM SE
150
14
130
50
MODERAT
HI
ELY
70
IN
60
16 0
LO
HI
IN RY VE
5
4
10
12
LO
40
LO
20 0
90
HI
180
14
80
V E RS E
30
20
OFF
FI
IN
11 0
0 22
LO
IT
ET
IM
E
HI
EXT
VE
OFF
10
0
DE
LO
VE RS
IN
130
50
MODERAT
HI
ELY
40
LO
20 0
90
HI
OFF
FI
IN
11 0
0 22
LO
IT
ET
IM
E
HI
EXT
VE
OFF
10
0
DE
LO
20
2
1
RE
Y EL
10
4
OFF
20
16
737 Feeder Protection Relay
120 120
2
1
RE
Y EL
10
4
OFF
20
16
HI
GROUND
PICKUP (% OF CT)
0 14
150
60
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50P) 4 - 20 x CT

INSTANTANEOUS (x CT)
5
CURVE SHAPE
AL I N V E R NORM SE
TIME MULTIPLIER
16 0 70
180
80
LO
HI
IN RY VE
10
8
12
14
LO
VERSE
30
Rear View
737 Only 8 additional form C output relays (1 for each of the individual overcurrent protection elements)
HI
Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G/50N) 0.1 - 16 x CT
803665A3.cdr
Provision for wire seal to prevent drawout
Software
The 735/737 comes with a disk with the SETUP program. This program can be used to establish communication with the relay, read and save setpoints to a computer file, configure computer settings, and provide product information. It can also be used to simulate the operation of the relay for training and testing purposes.
Aux Trip output I Non-failsafe, form A I Set to follow the main trip relay, act as an 86 lockout relay, or to respond only to ground overcurrent faults while the main trip responds only to phase overcurrent faults Main Trip output I Non-failsafe, form A CT inputs I 3 phase CT inputs I 1 neutral/ground CT input
Service output I Failsafe, form C I Indicates relay and control power status
Optional RS422 communication
AC/DC Control Power I Universal power supplies I LO: 20 - 60 VDC 20 - 48 VAC I HI: 90 - 300 VDC 70 - 265 VAC RS485 communication (or optional RS422)
803664A2 .CDR
189

TYPICAL WIRING
PHASE 1 CT PHASE 2 CT PHASE 3 CT
LOAD
G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4
PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
GROUND
CURRENT INPUT
ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND SENSING CONNECTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER
PHASE 1 CT PHASE 2 CT PHASE 3 CT ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT
9
LINE
B C
52a 52a
TRIP
LOAD
TRIP COIL CONTROL POWER
TRIP COIL
G5 H5 G6
G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4
AUX. TRIP
PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
GROUND
* TERMINATION 120 Ohm RESISTOR 1nF/50V BI-DIRECTIONAL CAPACITOR.
H6 G7
CURRENT INPUT
PHASE A TIMED
SERVICE
A2 B1 A1 B2 B3 A3 A5 B4 A4 B5
PICKUP & CAUSE OF TRIP RELAYS
INPUT INPUT
H7 G8
GE Power Management
735/737
Feeder Relay
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
B A
PHASE B TIMED
H10 H8 G9
4000 FEET MAX./ MAX. OF 32 RELAYS
GROUND
SHIELD
RS485 (RS422 RX)
H9
PHASE C TIMED
GND TIMED
B6 A6
RS422TX OPTION
G10 H12 H11
PHASE A INST
A8 B7 A7 B8 B9 A9 A11 B10 A10 B11
RELAY CONTROL POWER

HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR OR BRAIDED WIRE
CONTROL POWER FILTER FGND GROUND SAFETY SGND GROUND CHASSIS GROUND SCREW
PHASE B INST
737
ONLY
G11 G12
PHASE C INST
GND INST
B12 A12
804600D9.dwg
NOTE:
1) BREAKER 52a CONTACTS SHOWN FOR BREAKER OPEN. 2) RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER TO RELAY. 3) CTs MAY BE PLACED ON EITHER LINE OR LOAD SIDE OF CIRCUIT BREAKER TO SUIT APPLICATION.
190

735/737 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51) Pickup Level: LO: 20 - 100%/OFF HI: 110 - 220%/OFF % of CT rating Curve Types: ANSI, IAC, IEC/BS142 Curve Shapes: definite time, moderately inverse, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse; see time/ overcurrent curves; curves apply up to 20 x pickup or 20 x CT, whichever is less. Time Multiplier: 10 curves 1 - 10 for each shape, 4 shift multipliers 0.5/0.8/1/1.1 Definite Time: 100 ms to 1 sec (100 ms steps) Reset: Time reset to zero each time current level falls below pickup threshold Accuracy: Level: 3% of setting Time: Greater of 3% or 20 ms @ > 150% of pickup GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51G/51N) Pickup Level: LO: 15 - 55%/OFF HI: 60 - 100%/OFF % of CT rating in steps of 5% Curve Types: ANSI, IAC, IEC/BS142 Curve Shapes: Definite time, moderately inverse, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse; see time/ overcurrent curves; curves apply up to 20 x pickup or 20 x sensor, whichever is less. Time Multiplier: 10 curves 1 - 10 for each shape, 4 shift multipliers 0.5/0.8/1/1.1 Definite Time: 100 ms to 1 sec (100 ms steps) Reset: Time reset to zero each time current level falls below pickup Accuracy: Level: 3% of setting Time: Greater of 3% or 20 ms @ >150% of pickup PHASE INSTANTANEOUS (50) Pickup Level: 4/5/6/8/10/12/14/16/20/OFF x CT Accuracy: Level: 3% of setting Time: 35 ms max @ > 150% of pickup setting GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50G/50N) Pickup Level: 0.1/0.2/0.4/0.8/1/2/4/8/16/OFF x CT Accuracy: Level: 3% of setting Time: 35 ms max @ >150% of pickup setting OUTPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS SERVICE, CAUSE OF TRIP/PICKUP MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 S BREAK 10 30 10 10 30 0.5 10 30 0.3 10 30 5 10 30 0.25 10 30 0.15 10 30 10 10 30 10 10 30 4 10 30 3 FORM C NO/NC SILVER ALLOY SR735: 1 RELAY SR737: 9 RELAYS MAX LOAD 300 W 62.5 W 75 W 150 W 31.3 W 37.5W 2,770 VA 2,770 VA 480 VA 750 VA TRIP1, AUX TRIP MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 S BREAK 20 80 16 20 80 0.8 20 80 0.4 20 80 5 20 80 0.3 20 80 0.2 20 80 20 20 80 20 20 80 8 20 80 7 FORM A NO SILVER ALLOY 2 RELAYS MAX LOAD 480 W 100 W 100 W 150 W 375 W 50 W 2,400 VA 5,000 VA 960 VA 1,750 VA
VOLTAGE DC Resistive
DC Inductive L/R=40 ms AC Resistive AC Inductive PF=0.4 CONFIGURATION CONTACT MATERIAL NUMBER
30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 120 VAC 250 VAC 120 VAC 250 VAC
MONITORING INDICATORS Phase time overcurrent trip A,B,C (latched) Phase instantaneous overcurrent trip A,B,C (latched) Ground fault time overcurrent trip (latched) Ground fault instantaneous overcurrent trip (latched) Relay in service Service required Phase pickup Ground pickup Current level LED bargraph: 10-100% of CT INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS Withstand Phase/Ground CTs: 4 times rated current: continuous 20 times rated current: 5 sec 40 times rated current: 2 sec Sensing: True rms; 16 samples/cycle Secondary: 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order) Accuracy: Greater of 3% of CT primary or 3% of displayed Drift: No greater than 0.5% over 10 years CT BURDEN 1 A Inputs: 0.02 VA @ 1 A, 0.2 VA @ 5 A, 10 VA @ 20 A 5 A Inputs: 0.02 VA @ 5 A, 0.2 VA @ 20 A, 10 VA @ 100 A Conversion Range: 0-20 times CT primary Frequency Response: 48-300 Hz 3 dB COMMUNICATIONS RS485/RS422 Port (using ModBus Protocol) *Specifications subject to change without notice.
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Options: LO/HI (specified when ordering) LO Range: DC = 20 to 60 V AC = 20 to 48 V @ 48-62 Hz LO DC Supply: 48 VDC nominal HI Range: DC = 88 to 300 V AC = 70 to 265 V @ 48-62 Hz HI DC Supply: 125 VDC, 250 VDC nominal Power: 10 W nominal, 25 W maximum ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Range: -40C to +60C TYPE TESTS Oscillatory/Fast Risetime Transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance: IEC 255.4 Class III Level RFI: Ontario Hydro Test C-5047-77, 150 MHz, 450 MHz, 5W transmitter @ 25 cm 50 MHz, 15W transmitter @ 25 cm Static Discharge: IEC 801-2 Electromagnetic Interference Withstand Capability: ANSI/IEEE C37 90.2 Insulation Test: IEC 255-5 5kV PACKAGING Weight: 15 lbs (6.8 kg) Shipping Dimensions: 15" x 14" x 14" (38.1 cm x 35.6 cm x 35.6 cm) APPROVALS CSA: Approved under LR41286 UL: Recognized under E83849
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
8.80" Max (224) 7.52" (191) Panel
REAR VIEW
8.52" (216)
PANEL CUTOUT
7.25" (184)
737 only 737 only 9.93" (252) 9.0 0" (229)
CUTOUT
Inches (mm)
804607A9.dwg
191

DRAWOUT MECHANISM
The 735/737 has a front door with a large window to permit the user to view settings and status with the door closed. The door has a friction catch to permit easy access. A wire seal may be used to prevent access to settings. The front door has a gasket to provide a dust tight seal. The unit has a drawout construction with an easy to use pull up handle. A wire seal may be used to prevent the relay from being drawn out. When the unit is drawn out the CT secondaries will automatically be connected together by the internal shorting fingers to prevent dangerous high voltages from open CTs.
Feeder protection shall be provided using a single static drawout relay. Protection features shall include: I three phase (51) and ground (51G) I I
time overcurrent three phase (50) and ground(50G) instantaneous overcurrent independent phase and ground curves; ANSI, IAC or IEC/BS142 curve shapes: definite time, moderately inverse, normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse 40 time dials for phase and ground time overcurrent curves separate pickup level and output relay for each protection element three outputs: trip, auxiliary trip, and service eight additional output relays shall be an option, one for each protection element trip record: display of last five trips 86 lockout available
The relay shall have front panel LED indicators for: I cause of trip, pickup, relay in service,
relay malfunction
A clear key shall be available to clear the cause of trip indicators. A phase current indicator will be provided on the front panel. The relay shall be able to communicate via an RS485 port using the ModBus RTU protocol. Communication software shall be provided. The information available over this port shall include: I settings, phase and ground current
as a % of CT, status
I I I I
9
I I
I simulation of trips The relay shall comply with surge withstand capability (SWC) standards such as ANSI C37.90 and IEC 255.4.
ORDERING
*
735 737
*
1 5
*
Standard relay with 50/51, 50G/51G protection Relay with 8 additional outputs 1 A phase CT secondaries 5 A phase CT secondaries 1 A ground CT secondaries 5 A ground CT secondaries 20-60 VDC; 20-48 VAC @ 50, 60 Hz control power 90-300 VDC; 70-265 VAC @ 50, 60 Hz control power RS485 2-wire communications (standard) RS422 4-wire communications (optional)
1 5 LO HI 485 422
Accessories
19-1 PANEL 19-2 PANEL SCI 735/737-DEMO 1 3/8" Collar: 3" Collar: Single cutout panel Dual cutout panel RS232 to RS485 convertor 737 Demo/Test case For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 1 3/8". For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 3". Dual mounting available with the 19-2 Panel
808785E3.cdr

See pages 15 - 18.
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
4 1
.
4 1
.
192
MIF
Applications
I I I I I
NEW
Digital Feeder Relay M Family
Feeder protection, any voltage level Backup/auxiliary protection for transformers, motors, and generators

Phase, ground TOC Phase, ground IOC (Hiset and Loset) 4 preconfigured overcurrent curves (ANSI or IEC) Thermal image protection Cold load pickup function Configurable breaker failure to open Configurable I/O 6 outputs: trip, service reqd, auxiliary 9
DESCRIPTION
The MIF, a member of the M Family of protection relays, is a microprocessor based relay that provides primary circuit protection on distribution networks at any voltage level and backup/auxiliary protection for transformers, generators and motors. Basic protection features include three phase time delayed overcurrent, phase instantaneous overcurrent (two levels Hiset and Loset), ground time delayed overcurrent, ground instantaneous overcurrent (two levels Hiset and Loset) and thermal image protection. An optional protection offering is also provided for cold load pickup, breaker failure protection, breaker health, and configurable logic. Each protection element can be selectively enabled either via the front panel or via communication. Flexible settings, selectable ANSI or IEC curves, plus the choice of a user configurable overcurrent curve enable accurate coordination with other devices. The basic MIF has two fixed digital inputs and six fixed digital outputs. An option is provided allowing the two inputs and four of the outputs to be user configurable. The basic MIF has six fixed status LEDs. An option is provided allowing four of these LEDs to be user configurable. The front panel also features a three key keypad and a 3.5 digit LED dot matrix display that provides an easy to use user interface. The front keypad allows the user to set the baud rate and relay address for communication. A front RS232 and a rear RS485 communication port are provided for computer access using ModBus RTU protocol. The rear RS485 can be converted to a RS232 or fiber optic port (plastic or glass fiber optics) by means of using an external DAC 300 converter. Windows based M+PC software is provided free of charge with the relay to allow setup and configuration of MIF units. Computer access allows setting and configuration (inputs, outputs, LEDs and configurable logic) of the units, display of metering information, and real time status of the unit. An option is provided allowing the display of event records and oscillography record for the last fault. The MIF has a drawout construction in a 1/4 of a 19" rack case and can be flush or 19" rack mounted.
I I I I I

I I I I
32 Event record Analog/digital oscillography KI2 counter for breaker maintenance Per phase current metering
User Interfaces
I I I I I
M+PC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) RS485 rear port (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) LED dot matrix display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I I I
Configurable logic Configurable curve Flash memory for field upgrades Two setting tables Drawout case AC/DC power supply Switchgear flush or 19" rack mounting
GE Power Management
193
MIF Digital Feeder Relay

PROTECTION
Three Phase Time Overcurrent (51P)
The MIF provides time overcurrent protection that can be set from 0.1 to 2.4 times In. Four separate ANSI or IEC time overcurrent curves can be selected in addition to a user configurable curve. ANSI and IEC curves include: definite time, normal inverse, very inverse, and extremely inverse. For each curve, different time multipliers may be set. Three different curve types can be selected: ANSI, IEC/BS142, and one user configurable. This allows the selection of the optimum curve for coordination with fuses, feeders, motors, transformers, etc. ANSI IEC/BS142
normal inverse very inverse extremely inv. definite time IEC A IEC B IEC C definite time

Two separate settings groups are stored in MIF nonvolatile memory, with only one group active at a given time. Switching between setting groups 1 and 2 can be done by means of a setting, a communication command or digital input activation. Settings are divided in 2 categories, main and advanced settings. This allows users to have access to main relay functionalities in an extremely simple, user friendly way by entering only main settings, while having access to complete functionality for more complex use through advanced settings.
Each configurable output can be independently latched. The first LED has a fixed assignment (relay in service), the second fixed for trip, and the remaining four LEDs are user configurable in function, memory and/or blinking/fixed indication.
Input, output and LED configurations are performed using M+PC software.
Inputs and Outputs

Two fixed inputs are provided for block 50P functions and block 50N functions. Four fixed outputs are provided for phase trip, ground trip, instantaneous trip, and thermal image alarm. In addition, two other outputs for general trip and service required are provided.
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Units (50PH, 50PL)

The MIF includes two separately adjustable phase instantaneous overcurrent units. Each one can be independently enabled. Settings allow the pickup setpoint to be set from 0.1 to 30 times In and a time delay from 0 to 100 seconds to be set.
OPTION 2 FEATURES
(Plus Option 1 features)
Cold Load Pickup
Metering
MIF provides metering values for phase and ground currents. The accuracy is 3% in the complete range.
OPTION 1 FEATURES
(Plus Basic Features)
Events Recording
Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including pickups, trips, contact operations, alarms and self test status. The MIF stores up to 32 events time tagged to the nearest millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine sequence of events which facilitates diagnosis of relay operation. Each event can be individually maskable in order to avoid the generation of undesired events.
Ground Time Overcurrent (51N)

The ground time overcurrent protection has the same curve selection choices and settings as the phase time overcurrent unit. The ground signal is normally derived as the residual sum of the three phase CTs eliminating the need for an additional ground sensor. Alternatively, for more sensitive detection, an additional core balance (zero sequence) ground sensor encircling the 3 phase conductors can be used.

A fail to open unit is provided in the MIF relay basic configuration. A more complex breaker failure scheme can be easily implemented through the use of a digital input and configurable output logic (logic gates and timers).
Breaker Health
Just in time breaker maintenance is achievable by using the breaker health function. The MIF calculates and stores the cumulative I2t value for the breaker. A breaker health threshold is established by a setting. If the cumulative value exceeds the threshold, a breaker health alarm is initiated.
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent units (50NH, 50NL)

The ground instantaneous overcurrent protection has the same settings and features as the phase instantaneous overcurrent unit.
Oscillography
MIF captures current waveforms and digital channels at 16 samples per cycle. One oscillography record with a maximum length of 0.24 seconds is stored in memory. Oscillography is triggered either by internal signals or an external contact.
Thermal Image Unit

A thermal image unit is included to protect equipment against overheating due to excessive load. Several operating curves can be set as a function of heating time constant T1 (adjustable between 30 and 600 minutes). Cool down time constant T2 is adjustable from 1 to 6 times the heating constant.
Configurable Logic Configurable I/O and LEDs

There are two configurable digital inputs in the MIF. Out of the MIF`s six digital outputs, two have a fixed function (trip and service required), while the other four are user configurable. Those configurable outputs can be assigned either to a set of pre-configured values, or an OR/NOT combination of the same values. Up to a maximum of 4 configurable logic schemes can be implemented into the MIF by means of using a set of 4 pre-configured logic gates and timer cells. A graphical user interface is provided for the configuration of MIF logic. The outputs of the MIF configurable logic can be used to configure digital outputs and LEDs.
194

USER INTERFACES
Status LEDs
The status of the relay is indicated through six LEDs located on the front panel. The first one is green and has a fixed assignment showing that the relay is in service. In option O models, four separate LEDs indicate if a trip, phase trip, ground trip, and/or instantaneous trip has occurred. Another LED is used to indicate if any protection functions have picked up. In option 1 and option 2 models, the last 5 LEDs are user configurable.
Keep track of and react to all relay status data with ease.
the RS485 port. It provides full access to the relay data with the following features: I I I I
View actual values View relay status View/edit settings on-line/off-line View event recorder for troubleshooting I Configure inputs, outputs and LEDs through configurable logic I Utilize a configurable protection curve I Relay firmware programming for upgrades
Keypad and Display

A three button keypad allows user access for easy relay interrogation and change of settings. Metering data, last trip information and settings are displayed through the LED dot matrix display. Note that full access to the event and oscillography records is possible only through PC communication.
The M+PC software program may be run on a PC with the Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program may be used locally on the RS232 front serial port or remotely on
All status information such as target messages and digital input/output states may be viewed with the M+PC software.

52
DIMENSIONS
10.24 (260) 6.16 (156)

Comprehensive self test diagnostics occur at power up and continuously during relay operation. Any problem found by self tests causes an alarm and an event is logged.
3
50PH
50PL
51P
49
50NH 50NL
51N
7.30 (185)
50GH 50GL
51G
METERING BREAKER HEALTH OSCILLOGRAPHY EVENT RECORDING I2T MONITORING COLD LOAD PICKUP
MIF
CASE CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN

0.28 Dia. (7) 4 PL. 5.35 (136) 4.33 (110)
COLLAR FRONT VIEW

6.14 (156) 4.33
COLLAR SIDE VIEW

2.48 (63)
Communication Ports
A front mounted RS232 and a rear RS485 port allow easy user interface via a PC. ModBus RTU protocol is used for all ports. The relay supports baud rates from 300 to 19,200 bps. Up to 255 MIF relays can be addressed on a single communications channel. A unique address must be assigned to each relay via a setting when multiple relays are connected.

(*) Alternative Connections Optional Features
50BF
732754A2.ai
(110)
7.00 (178)
4.00 (102) 1.50 (38)
CUTOUT
0.28 Dia. (7) 4 PL.
8.134 (206) 4.00 (102)
mif dims a3.ai
TYPICAL WIRING
NOTE: Only for reference. For particular connections for any MIF model, please refer to its external connections drawing.
ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND SENSING CONNECTION
PHASE A CT PHASE B CT ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT A PHASE C CT

PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT
M+PC SOFTWARE
A single PC software package is required to access, configure, and monitor all relays in the M family regardless of their model, application, or available options. The M+PC software extracts the model number, version, and configuration parameters from the connected relay to display only the relevant data and options for the relay it is communicating with. This eliminates having to manually configure the relay within the software and provides a simple and easy to use operator user interface. All M Family products are supplied with Windows based M+PC software. M+PC allows communication among M Family relays for monitoring, setting changes, information and configuration.
LINE
A B C
<< << <<
>> >> >>
A B C
B C
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A1 +/~
A2 -/~
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 IA N IB N IC N IG N
IA
IB N IC N
IG N
POWER CURRENT INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS SDA B12 SDB A12 GND B11 COM OUT4 OUT3 OUT1/2 OUT1 B7
A B GROUND
GE Power Management
52a
52a
MIF
TRIP COIL CONTROL POWER +
A6 B5 B6
TRIP
<<
TRIP COIL
>>
A5
RS485
INPUT
READY
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
B8
DIGITAL INTPUTS
A8 CC1 A9 CC2 A10 COM

RS232
JX
B9 B10 A7
INPUT
732753A4.ai
SAFETY GND GROUND
195

MIF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51P) Pickup Level: 10 - 240% of CT rating Curve Shapes: Definite time, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, user defined Time Multiplier: 0.05 - 2.00 in steps of 0.01 Definite Time: Up to 99.99 sec (10 msec steps) Accuracy: Level: 3% in the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51N) Pickup Level: 10 - 240% of CT rating Curve Shapes: Definite time, inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, user defined Time Multiplier: 0.05 - 2.00 in steps of 0.01 Definite Time: Up to 99.99 sec (10 msec steps) Accuracy: Level: 3% in the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms PHASE INSTANTANEOUS (50PH & 50PL) Pickup Level: 10 - 3000% of CT rating Definite Time: Up to 99.99 sec (10 msec steps) Accuracy: Level: 3% in the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms GROUND INSTANTANEOUS (50NH & 50NL) Pickup Level: 10 - 3000% of CT rating Definite Time: Up to 99.99 sec (10 msec steps) Accuracy: Level: 3% in the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms THERMAL IMAGE UNIT Tap Current: Cool Rate: T1 T2 K Alarm Level: METERING THERMAL CAPACITY Current Circuits: Continuously: During 3 Sec: During 1 Sec: 10 - 240% of CT rating 3-600 min 1-6 x T1 1-1.2 70-100% OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS Contact Capacity: Max. Operating Voltage: 440 VAC Continuous Current: 16A Make and Carry: 30 A Breaking: 4000 VA OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration: 6 Electro-Mechanical Form C Contact Material: silver alloy suited for inductive loads Operate Time: 8 ms Max Ratings for 100000 operations:
VOLTAGE DC Resistive 24 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC DC Inductive 24 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC (L/R = 40 ms) 250 VDC AC Resistive 120 VAC 250 VAC AC Inductive 120 VAC PF=0.4 250 VAC MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 sec 16 A 48 A 16A 48A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16A 48A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A BREAK 16 A 2.6A 0.6 A 0.5 A 8A 1.3A 0.3 A 0.25 A 16 A 16 A 6A 5A MAX LOAD 384 W 125W 75 W 125 W 192 W 62W 37.5 W 62.5 W 1920 VA 4000 VA 720 VA 1250 VA
POWER SUPPLY Frequency: Nominal Phase Current: Nominal Ground Current: Auxiliary Voltage:
50/60 Hz 1 or 5 A (depending on model) 1 or 5 A (depending on model) 24-48 VDC, 20% 110-250 VDC, 110-220 Vac 20%
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Metallic package in 1/4 19" rack and 4 units high Frontal MMI with display and keypad DB9 connector for RS232 ports on the front (1) and RS485 on the rear Protection class IP52 (according to IEC 529)
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Storage: -40C to +80C Operation: -20C to +60C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radiointerference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radiofrequency Emission:
INPUTS BURDENS Current Circuits:
0.1 VA for In= 5A 0.02 VA for In= 1A DC Burden: During Operation: 10W Per Each Activated Input: 8mA / 1W, Vaux: 125 COMMUNICATIONS Local Communication: Alphanumeric display; 3 button frontal keypad Remote Communication: (local or remote PC and communications net): Mode: ModBus RTU Speed: 300 to 19200 bps
2kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to IEC60255-22-1 Class IV according to IEC60255-22-2 Class III according to IEC60255-22-3 Class IV according to IEC60255-22-4 Class II according to IEC60255-21-1 Class I according to IEC60255-21-2 According to IEC 41B (Sec 81) and EN55022 Class B Oscillatory / Fast Risetime Transient: ANSI/IEEE C 37.90.1 Electromagnetic Interference Withstand Capability: ANSI/IEEE C 37.90.2 PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: Ship:
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In
8.8 lbs (4 kgs) 9.9 lbs (4.5 kgs)
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide below. MIF P * * * E * 00 * 00 *
P A I 1 5 1 5 0 1 2 F H C S D 3 phase + ground relay ANSI curves IEC curves Phase CT In = 1A (0.1-2.4 A) Phase CT In = 5A (0.5-12 A) Ground CT In = 1A (0.1-2.4 A) Ground CT In = 5A (0.5-12 A) No options, basic unit Option 1 (see page 194 for details) Option 2 (see page 194 for details) 24-48 VDC Power Supply 110-250 VDC 110-220 VAC p.s. Individual relay Mounted in an M+ system Depth reducing collar
Feeder protection, control, monitoring and metering shall be provided in one integrated digital package for application on feeders of any voltage level and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. Protection and control functions shall include: I time overcurrent elements: one for
phase, one for ground
I instantaneous overcurrent elements:

two for phase, two for ground
I time overcurrent curve characteristics:

4 pre-configured, one user configurable thermal image protection cold load pickup configurable breaker failure protection 6 outputs, four of which are configurable I two setting tables
configurable I/O, event recording, oscillography I/O, cold load pickup, breaker failure protection, breaker health, configurable logic If relays are to be mounted in an M+system, then either an M050 half 19" rack or M100 full 19" rack case must be ordered.
The M050 and M100 racks are provided at no additional cost based on the number of relays ordered.
I I I I
Monitoring features shall include:

I 32 event record I oscillography I per phase current metering
196
Non-directional, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground overcurrent protection for AC systems.
MIC
Applications
I I I I I
Digital Overcurrent Relay
AC feeders, motors, transformers, etc. Overload protection Rapid short circuit detection

Instantaneous and time overcurrent Phase and ground faults 9
Features
I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The MIC 1000 is a digital, microprocessor-based overcurrent relay that provides nondirectional phase to phase and phase to ground overcurrent protection. The relays overcurrent function can be inverse time, where four families of curves are provided, or definite time with four times offered, as well instantaneous operation with adjustable time delay. All of these features are offered in a single relay. Line current metering, both phase to phase and phase to ground, are provided with a meter. Faults are time tagged and the most recent fault and time are displayed. for the instantaneous unit), and a high drop-out to pick-up ratio (<95%), along with the instantaneous unit adjustment tap, allow optional coordination and reclosing, without compromising selectivity. Operation of the instantaneous unit can be blocked for both phase to phase and phase to ground conditions.
4 inverse and 4 definite time curves Settings with front panel switches Line current metering and last trip data Part of a modular system Independent 4" modules 1/4 standard 19" rack cases available 2 digit display and reset button
CONSTRUCTION
I accurate and reliable, with low I I I I I I I
power consumption fixed rack, 1/3 case, 19" rack drawout, 1/4 case, 19" rack LED starting lamps and system availability indicators shock proof, non-flammable, sealed plastic case, which permits exterior reset of indicating LEDs anti-seismic waveform response high reliability solid-state components microprocessor system
STANDARD FEATURES
Front accessible time delay micro-switches.
Time Unit
The following characteristics are included in every relay: I BS 142 inverse I ANSI inverse I very inverse I extremely inverse I 2 sec definite time I 4 sec definite time I 6 sec definite time I 8 sec definite time
(time dial adjustable from 0.05 to 1 in 0.05 steps)
APPLICATIONS
The MIC relay is applied on alternating current circuits (feeders, motors, transformers, etc.), and provides effective protection against overloads, and rapid detection of short circuits. Negligible overtravel (less than 50 ms for the time unit, less than 25 ms
GE Power Management
197
MIC Digital Overcurrant Relay

STANDARD FEATURES
Instantaneous Unit
Instantaneous unit time delay adjustable between 0 and 3.1 sec in 100 ms steps.
MIC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PROTECTION CURRENT RANGES Rated Current (In) 5A Inverse Time Unit Current Range (Is) 0.5-4.375 A 1-8.75 A 1.5-13.125 A 0.1-0.875 A 0.2-1.75 A 0.3-2.625 A Instantaneous Unit OUTPUTS OUTPUT AND TRIPPING CONTACTS Making Capacity: 3000 W resistive for 2 sec, with a maximum of 30 A at 300 VDC Breaking Capacity: 50 W resistive with a max. of 2 A at 300 VDC Continuous: 5 A with a maximum of 300 VDC ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature: Storage Temperature: Current Carrying Capacity: Continuous: For 3 Seconds: For 1 Second: Relative Humidity: TYPE TESTS Insulation Withstand: Impulse: Interference Test:
1 to 31 times Is
Indicators Include:
1A
-10C to +55C -40C to + 70C 2 x In 50 x In 100 x In To 95% without condensing
I green LED when in service I measuring unit starting LEDs I target LEDs for the measuring units
(two for phase and ground relays)
Reset
Through front mounted push-button.
METERING RATINGS Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz Rated Current: 1 or 5 A DC/AC Auxiliary Voltage (3 Ranges): 24-48 V, 48-125 V, 110-240 V (20%) Power Consumption: Less than 1.5 W at all voltages ACCURACY Accurate to within 5% of operating value Accurate to within 5% of the time value, or 0.025 sec, whichever is greater, E-5 class
Output Contact Selector Switch

Output contacts can be selected from a two position selector switch which allows trip/alarm contact flexibility.
2 kV 50/60 Hz for one min, per IEC 255-5 5 kV peak 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J per IEC 255-4 2.5 kV Longitudinal, 1 kV transversal, Class III, per IEC 255-4 Electrostatic Discharge: Per IEC 801-2, Class III Radio Interference: Per IEC 801-3, Class III Surge Withstand: Per IEC 801-4, Class III PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: 9 lbs (4 kg) Ship: 11 lbs (5 kg) APPROVALS Compliant
Display Sequentially Indicates:

I I I I I I
F0 - relay condition F1 - phase current F2 - neutral current F3 - phase current at last trip F4 - neutral current at last trip F5 - operating time for the last trip
MONITORING REPEATABILITY 1% on operating value 2% on operating time or 0.025 sec, whichever is greater
INPUTS CURRENT CIRCUIT BURDENS Range (A) 1.5-13.125 0.5-4.375 0.3-2.625 0.1-0.875 Frequency (Hz) 50 50 50 50 Minimum Pickup Current 1.5 0.5 0.3 0.1 Burden in for multiples of minimum pickup current Minimum pickup 3 times pickup 10 times pickup R Z Z Z iX 0.04 0.01 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.025 0.055 0.055 0.055 0.3 0.1 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.35 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.4 20 times pickup Z 0.04 0.055 0.33 0.4
SELECTION GUIDE
Phase or ground relays
The information required to provide a complete definition of a model appears in the tables. It is recommended that the model designation is accompanied with its characteristics.
Phase and ground relays

The information required to provide a complete definition of a model appears in the tables. It is recommended that the model designation is accompanied with its characteristics.
MIC 50 * * N011 * 00 *
MIC 1 5 0 1 2 F G H
Microprocessor-based relay In = 1 A In = 5 A Range: 0.1-0.875 x In Range: 0.2-1.75 x In Range: 0.3-2.625 x In Aux. voltage: 24-48 VDC/VAC Aux. voltage: 48-125 VDC/VAC Aux. voltage: 110-250 VDC, 110-220 VAC
MIC * 0 * * N011 * 00 *
MIC 8 2 5 0 3 F G H
Microprocessor-based relay 3 + ground Phase range: 0.3-2.625 Phase range: 1.5-13.125 Ground range: 0.1-0.875 Ground range: 0.5-4.375 Aux. voltage: 24-48 VAC/DC Aux. voltage: 48-125 VAC/DC Aux. voltage: 110-250 VDC, 110-220 VAC C Individual drawout housing
S As part of a MID drawout

system
C Individual drawout housing S As part of a MID system

Example A: Overcurrent microprocessor-based relay, single phase, rated current In = 5 A, range 0.1-0.875 x In, 50 Hz alarm contact, aux. voltage 48-125 DC/AC. Model: MIC 5050 N 011 G 00C Example B: Overcurrent microprocessor-based relay, three-phase and ground, phase range 0.3-2.626 x (In = 5 A), ground range 0.1-0.875 x (In = 1 A), 50 Hz, with display, with alarm contact, aux. voltage 48-125 VCC/AC. Model: MIC 8050 N 011 G 00C

See pages 15 - 18.
198
MOTOR PROTECTION
469
Complete protection and management of medium and large motors.
The 469 Motor Management Relay is intended for protection and management of medium and large horsepower motors and driven equipment. A complete, economical drawout package.
369
Complete motor protection allowing maximum rated output without risk of downtime.
The 369 is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and their associated mechanical systems.
RRTD
Provides remote temperature monitoring of RTDs for metering and protection.
The Remote RTD Module provides additional RTD temperature metering capabilities for GE Multilin relays such as the 369.
269 PLUS
The 269 Plus is a microprocessor based product designed to provide complete and accurate protection for industrial motors and their associated mechanical systems.
MPM
Continuous metering of motors via a 269 Motor Management Relay .
The MPM provides additional metering capabilities such as three phase voltage, pf, real power, reactive power, Wh, and frequency for the GE Power Management 269 or 269 Plus Motor Management Relay.
SPM
Starting protection, synchronization and control for synchronous motors.
The SPM controls starting, synchronizing, and protection of collector-ring or brushless type synchronous motors. The SPMs control functions for starting the synchronous motor include accurate sensing of motor speed and rotor angle.
239
Motor protection and management for small to medium sized motors.
The GE Power Management 239 relay is designed to fully protect three phase AC motors against conditions which can cause damage. The relay can protect associated mechanical equipment and give an alarm before damage results from a process malfunction.
MM3
Integrated process and electrical control with protection for low voltage motors.
The Motor Manager 3 (MM3) combines control functions and comprehensive motor protection in one package. This compact device provides sophisticated control and protective relaying at significant cost savings over the discrete devices normally found in a low voltage motor control center (MCC).
SECTION 10: MOTOR PROTECTION SELECTOR GUIDE..................200 469...........................................201 369...........................................209 RRTD .......................................217 269PLUS .................................219
MM2
The Motor Manager 2 (MM2) combines control functions and comprehensive motor protection in one package. This compact device provides sophisticated control and protective relaying at significant cost savings.
MPM........................................227 SPM.........................................231 239...........................................239 MM3 ........................................247 MM2 ........................................255
199
Motor Selector Guide

VA
MMC MM3 MM2 239 269 Plus 369 469 SPM
MVA
DEVICE 50S 49/51 49/51 49/51 50 37 46 50G/51G 50N/51N 46 47 46 49/39 49 66 86 86 14 27 55 37 81 14 48 MMC I I MM3 I I I I I I I MM2 I I I I I I I 239 I I O I I I I I I 269 PLUS I I I I I I I I I I I O I 10 I I I I I I O O 369 I I I I I I I I I I I I O I O (12) I I I I I I O O O O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O I I I 1 2400 max 1 I I I I I I I 1A/5A 4 O I I I O I O I I I O O O O O O I I I 3 1 19.2k O (4) I I I I I I I I I 1A/5A 4 I I I I I 5 I I I I I 469 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2 I 19.2k 4 I I I I I I I I I 1A/5A 6 I I I I I I I I 4 4 I I I I SPM I I I I I I I
10
FEATURES Locked rotor Acceleration timer Overload curves Custom overload curve Voltage dependent overload curve Mechanical jam/stall Short circuit Short circuit backup Undercurrent Single phase Zero sequence ground fault Residual ground fault Ground fault backup Negative sequence unbalance Voltage phase reversal Average unbalance RTDs (independent) Thermistor Hot motor RTD feedback Starts per hour Time between starts Lock-out on thermal trip Adjustable lock-out on thermal trip Speed switch input Undervoltage Power factor Underpower trip/alarm Frequency trip/alarm Tachometer trip/alarm Incomplete sequence trip Analog input trip/alarm Overload alarm Stator RTD alarm Ground fault alarm Undercurrent alarm Unbalance alarm Bearing RTD alarm Broken RTD alarm Short/low RTD alarm Undervoltage alarm Power factor alarm Field loss protection Field overtemperature protection Alphanumeric display Actual motor values displayed Status indication RS485 port RS232 Port Baud Rate Analog output Windows PC software Learned motor parameters Pre-trip values 40 time/date stamped event records Waveform capture Motor operation historical data Latched fault indications Emergency restart Start inhibit CT inputs Output relays Draw-out case DC control supply Exponential running cooldown Simulation mode for testing Restart block (anti backspin timer) Reduced voltage starting Trip coil supervision Dual overload curves (two speed motor protection) Assignable digital inputs Analog inputs Remote start Remote stop Remote display Self test alarm Flash memory Power factor regulation Synchronization/resynchronization Three seven-segment display
I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I I
I O (3) I O O I
PROTECTION
I I I I I
I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
COMM.
I I
I I I 1 57.6k 1 I I I
I I I 1 19.2k I I I
I I I 1 19.2k O (1) I I I I I O 1A/5A 4 I I I
I I I I I 1
DIAGNOSIS
5 I
I I I I I I I I 250 Amps 5/1 Amps 4 4 I I I 10 1 I I I I I I I 10 1 I I O I I
I I I 3 I I I I
OTHER FEATURES
I 2
I I
O I
I O I
O option
200
Motor Protection
Complete protection and management of medium and large motors.
469
Applications
Medium and large motors Driven equipment Motors with high inertial loads

Thermal model biased with RTD and negative sequence current feedback Voltage compensated acceleration Undervoltage, overvoltage Phase differential protection Under power for load loss Out of step for synchronous motors Dual overload curves for 2 speed motors Reduced voltage starting control Trip coil supervision for breakers 10
DESCRIPTION
The 469 Motor Management Relay is intended for protection and management of medium and large horsepower motors and driven equipment. Motor protection, fault diagnostics, power metering, and communications functions have been integrated into one complete, economical, drawout package. The 469 has integrated every protection feature that could be considered a benchmark for medium and large motor protection. This high degree of integration allows for standardization on one motor protection relay regardless of application. The heart of the 469 is the thermal model. In addition to the current protection elements, RTD inputs are provided for stator and bearing temperature protection. The addition of VT inputs allows for voltage and power protection elements. Phase differential CT inputs are provided for phase differential protection. All of the protection elements are self-contained and may be enabled as required. This design makes programming the 469 simple. The 469 has complete monitoring and metering functions. An event recorder stores 40 time and date stamped records. Oscillography of up to 64 cycles allows the user to set the number of pre-trip and post-trip cycles recorded. Complete metering is provided. The 469 learns the acceleration time, starting current, and thermal capacity required during motor starts. If motor load during starting is relatively consistent these learned values may be used to fine tune the acceleration protection. The 469 can also learn the average motor load over a period of time. A powerful simulation feature is provided for testing the functionality and relay response without the need for external inputs. The relay has complete local and remote user interface capabilities. A 40 character display, keypad, and LED indicators provide a means of local communication. A front panel RS232 port provides convenient computer access. Two rear RS485 ports are provided for remote communication. The 469PC program included with the relay provides easy point and click access to the relay.
Inputs and Outputs

I I I I I I
12 RTDs, programmable 5 pre-defined & 4 assignable digital inputs 4 analog inputs 6 output relays 4 programmable analog outputs Configurable relay pulsed outputs

I I I I I
A V W var VA PF Hz Wh varh demand Torque, temperature Event recorder - last 40 Oscillography - up to 64 cycles Trending
User Interfaces
I I I I I
22 front panel LED indicators 40 character display control keys and numeric keypad RS232 and 2 RS485 ports 469PC program
GE Power Management
201
469 Motor Management Relay

PROTECTION
Motor Thermal Model
Typical custom overload curve

TYPICAL CUSTOM CURVE 6500 HP, 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
10000
The primary protective function of the 469 is the thermal model. It consists of four key elements: I I I I
overload curves unbalance biasing hot/cold motor compensation motor cooling time constants
An example of a voltage dependent overload curve; in this example the user has set the minimum voltage to 80%
HIGH INERTIA LOAD OVERLOAD CURVES 8800 HP, 13.2 kV, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP
1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300
1 2 3 4 5
PROGRAMMED 469 CUSTOM CURVE RUNNING SAFETIME (STATOR LIMIT) ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMIT) MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
OVERLOAD THERMAL LIMIT
1000
ACCELERATION INTERSECTION
@80% V
ACCELERATION THERMAL LIMIT
1
TIME TO TRIP IN SECONDS
200
Overload Curves
The 469 overload curve can take one of three formats: standard, custom, or voltage dependent curves. For all curve styles the 469 retains thermal memory in a thermal capacity used register which is updated every 0.1 second. The overload pickup determines where the running overload curve begins. The 469 standard overload curves consist of a standard curve shape with a multiplier value of 1 to 15.
2
100
ACCELERATION INTERSECTION @100% V

100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
TIME TO TRIP (SECONDS)
CUSTOM CURVE
3
10
20
MOTOR ACCELERATION CURVE SAFE STALL TIME @80% V
4 5
1.0
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
LOCKED ROTOR THERMAL LIMIT SAFE STALL TIME@100% V
10
469 Standard overload curves

100000
0.1 0.5
1.0
10
100
1000
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT

806803A5.cdr
MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD AMPS
10000
When starting high inertia loads the motor acceleration time can actually exceed the safe stall time. When this type of motor and load is encountered each distinct portion of the thermal limit curve becomes critical and must be provided by the motor vendor. The 469 voltage dependent overload curve feature has been provided to protect these types of motors. Voltage is monitored constantly during motor starting and the acceleration thermal limit curve is adjusted accordingly. An acceleration curve is created for both minimum line voltage and 100% line voltage. The 469 then monitors the line voltage and shifts the acceleration protection curve between the two. This method of protection inherently accounts for the change in motor speed as an impedance relay would. The change in impedance is reflected by motor terminal voltage and line current.
806805A3.cdr
TIME IN SECONDS
1000
The 469 measures unbalance as the ratio of negative to positive sequence current. The thermal model is biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by negative sequence current when the motor is running. Motor derating due to current unbalance can be selected via the setpoint unbalance bias k factor.
Medium motor derating factor due to unbalanced voltage. Note that the k=8 curve is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve
1.00
100
10
DERATING FACTOR
0.95
k=2
0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75

k=10 k=4 k=6 k=8
1.00 0.10
1.00
10
100
MULTIPLE OF FULL L0AD AMPS
806804A5.cdr
0.70 0 1 2 3 4 5
derafacta2.ai
The 469 allows the user to create their own custom curve. This can be very useful when the thermal limit curves provided by the manufacturer of the motor have two distinct parts, one for running overloads and one for locked rotor conditions. In such cases smoothing the curves into one homogeneous curve may not leave enough room for motor starting.
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
Hot/Cold Motor Compensation Unbalance (Negative Sequence Current) Bias

Negative sequence current, which has a phase rotation that is opposite to the positive sequence current and the rotor rotation, will generate a rotor voltage that will produce a substantial rotor current. This will cause a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor manufacturer as those curves assume a perfectly balanced supply and motor design that results in positive sequence currents only. The 469 has a unique feature for protecting the motor based on the hot/cold thermal damage information provided by the motor manufacturer. A two part curve is constructed using 3 points: I RTD bias minimum: if the minimum
stator RTD is below this point no biasing occurs (typically 40C)
202
Motor Protection
I RTD bias maximum: if the maximum

stator RTD temperature is above this setpoint the thermal memory is fully biased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used (this is typically at the stator insulation rating) I RTD bias center point: the center point temperature and thermal capacity used values are the rated running temperature and value determined by the hot/cold safe stall ratio respectively

The 469 contains a full range of selectively enabled, self contained protection and control elements as detailed in the following table. The 469 also has the ability to learn motor acceleration time, starting current and thermal capacity.
tial for dual motor drives and cyclic load averaging for reciprocating motors have all been added to the 469 features.
Special Features
Upon request the 469 can also be programmed with the following modifications: undervoltage auto-restart and an experimental broken rotor bar detection system.
New Features
Torque metering and protection, pulsed outputs, analog input differen-
At values between the RTD bias maximum and minimum, the present thermal capacity used created by the overload curve is compared to the RTD bias thermal capacity. If the RTD bias thermal capacity used value is higher it is used from that point forward.
RTD Bias curve
RTD Bias Maximum
Applicability of 469 Features
100
Thermal Capacity Used (%)
90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250 RTD Bias Minimum RTD Bias Center Point
51 86 66 50 37 46 50G/51G 87 49 38
Maximum Stator RTD Temperature (C)

806809A3.cdr
Motor Cooling Time Constants

The 469 thermal capacity used value is reduced exponentially when the motor current is below the overload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants are programmed for both the stopped and running cases as a stopped motor will normally cool slower than a running motor. Since actual motor cooling is exponential the thermal model will track motor heating and cooling cycles accurately and always provide optimum protection.
Exponential cooldown (hot/cold curve ratio 60%)
Thermal Capacity Used 75
27/59 47 81 55/78
14
Iavg @ 100% FLA
50
25
Iavg @ 50% FLA
19 48
0 0 50 100 150 200 250
Time in Minutes
806810A3.cdr
Overload Overload Lockout Starts/Hour & Time Between Starts Restart Block (Anti-Backspin Timer) Short Circuit & Short Circuit Backup Mechanical Jam Undercurrent/Underpower Current Unbalance Ground Fault & Ground Fault Backup Differential Acceleration Stator RTD Bearing RTD Other RTD & Ambient RTD Open RTD Alarm Short/Low RTD Undervoltage/Overvoltage Phase Reversal Frequency Reactive Power Power Factor Analog Input Demand Alarm: A kW kvar k VA SR469 Self-Test, Service Trip Coil Supervision Welded Contactor Breaker Failure Remote Switch Speed Switch & Tachometer Trip Load Shed Switch Pressure Switch Vibration Switch Reduced Voltage Start Incomplete Sequence Remote Start/Stop Over Torque
PROCTLA5.AI
10
Motor Protection
203

Metering
The 469 has accurate metering of: I I I I I
A V W var VA PF Hz Wh varh, torque demand: A W var VA peak temperature (RTDs) speed (if tachometer function is assigned to one of the digital inputs) I analog inputs
52
50 50G
BUS 2 27 59 47 81
METERING V,A,W,Var,VA,PF,Hz
R2 AUXILIARY R3 AUXILIARY
R1 TRIP
74
R4 ALARM
55 78
START
Events Record
The 469 event recorder stores motor and system information with a date and time stamp each time an event occurs for 40 events. Events include all trips, service and not inserted alarms, any additional alarm optionally, loss or application of control power to the 469, emergency restarts, and motor starts when a blocking function is active.
50 51 49 37 66 46 50G 51G
R5 BLOCK START R6 SERVICE
86
3 AMBIENT AIR STATOR RTDs BEARING RTDs
87 49 38
4 ISOLATED ANALOG OUTPUTS
10
RTD
Oscillography
The 469 records up to 64 cycles with 12 samples per cycle of waveform data for 10 waveforms (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Diffa, Diffb, Diffc, Va, Vb, Vc) each time a trip occurs. The record is date and time stamped.
LOAD MOTOR
469
Motor Management
14
4 ANALOG INPUTS
14
TACHOMETER
DCMA
Relay
RS232 RS485 RS485
806807A7.dwg
Simulation
The 469 has a powerful simulation feature for testing the functionality and relay response to programmed conditions without the need for external inputs. Simulated system parameters are entered and when placed in simulation mode the 469 suspends reading of the actual inputs and substitutes the simulated values. Pre-trip and fault conditions can be simulated.
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Current and Voltage Inputs
The 469 has three phase CT inputs. A ground CT allows sensitive detection of ground faults or earth leakage. Three CT inputs for phase differential protection are provided. Voltage transformer inputs allow for numerous protection features based on voltage and power quantities.
Analog Inputs
The 469 has 4 analog inputs. They can be used to monitor any external quantity such as vibration, pressure, flow, tachometers, etc.
Output Relays
The 469 has 6 output relays. Four of these relays are assigned to trip, alarm, start block (to prevent starts that would result in immediate trip or for lockout functions), and service (for an internal failure or loss of power). Two auxiliary relays may be programmed for numerous functions such as trip echo, alarm echo, trip backup, alarm differentiation, control circuitry, in addition to a forced output relay feature.
RTD Inputs
The 469 has 12 field programmable RTDs. They are normally used for stator, bearing, ambient, and other temperature monitoring. The 469 circuitry compensates for lead resistance provided that each of the three leads is the same length.
DRAWOUT MECHANISM
The 469 consists of a drawout unit with automatic CT shorts and a companion case.
Digital Inputs
The 469 has 9 digital inputs, 5 of which are pre-defined and 4 of which are assignable. The 4 assignable inputs can be configured to any one of 14 different functions or turned off.
Analog Outputs
If analog outputs are connected to a PLC, real time process control is possible based on any four parameters that the 469 measures. If the motor is about to trip on overload or hot rotor stator for example, the PLC could reduce the load, preventing any downtime.
204
Motor Protection

USER INTERFACES
Keypad & Display
The 469 has a keypad with control keys and a full numerical keypad which allows local control and programming without a computer. The 469 has a 40 character illuminated vacuum fluorescent display, from which all setpoint, actual value, trip, alarm, or start block messages may be viewed. Messages are clear and do not require any deciphering.
Communications Ports
The 469 is equipped with three communications ports. A front panel RS232 port allows easy local computer access. Two rear RS485 ports could be used for remote communications, or for connection to a DCS, SCADA, or PLC. The three ports support ModBus RTU protocol. The RS232 baud rate is fixed at 9600, while the RS485 ports are variable from 300-19,200 bps. All communications ports may be active simultaneously without adversely affecting response time.
may also be displayed on a PC. These include actual values, setpoints, status, trending, and oscillography information. Graphical display of actual values over time may be particularly useful in troubleshooting situations. The 469PC program uses a simple point and click interface. Setpoint files for each motor may be stored, printed for verification, and downloaded to the 469 for error free setpoint entry. The entire 469 manual is included in the program in the form of a help file. This allows for quick access to information while programming the relay.
Software
The 469PC software that is provided with each 469 runs under Windows on a personal computer. All information that may be accessed from the 469
After a period of inactivity on the keypad the 469 will sequentially scroll through up to 20 user selected default messages. In the event of a trip, alarm, or start block, the display will automatically default to the pertinent message and the Message LED indicator will flash.
SR469 Windows Application - 469PC File Setpoint Actual Communication Help
SR469 HELP FILE
SR469 Help File

INTRODUCTION ACTUAL VALUES
OVERVIEW A1 STATUS A2 METERING DATA A3 LEARNED DATA A4 MAINTENANCE A5 EVENT RECORDER A6 PRODUCT INFO DIAGNOSTICS
SR469 Windows Application - 469PC File Setpoint Actual Communication Help
OVERVIEW ORDER INFORMATION SR469 SPECIFICATIONS
INSTALLATION
Setpoint - System Setup Current Sensing Voltage Sensing
MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL
SR469 OPERATION
OVERVIEW System Frequency Reduced Voltage
COMMUNICATIONS
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE PROTOCOL SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ERROR RESPONSES MEMORY MAP
10
C
PHASE CURRENT SR469 Windows Application - 469PC Phase CT Primary File Setpoint Actual Communication Help Motor Full Load Currents GROUND CURRENT Setpoint / Thermal Model Ground CT Type
100 A 76 A
SR469 FACEPLATE DISPLAY LED INDICATORS RS232 PROGRAM PORT KEYPAD ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT ENTERING + SIGNS SETPOINT ENTRY
OK
Cancel
TESTING
TEST SETUP HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
SETPOINT PROGRAMMING
Multilin 50:0.025
LED Indicators
The 469 has 22 LED indicators on the front panel. These give a quick indication of 469 status, motor status, and output relay status.
Thermal Model Curve Style Standard Custom
Overload Curves
OK
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT Voltage Dependent Cancel 5 A Secondary Phase Differential CT Type MINIMUM LINE VOLTAGE Phase Differential CT Primary 100 A
CUSTOM CURVE Pickup Time to trip
OVERVIEW S1 SR469 SETUP S2 SYSTEM SETUP S3 DIGITAL INPUTS S4 OUTPUT RELAYS S5 THERMAL MODEL S6 CURRENT ELEMENTS S7 MOTOR STARTING S8 RTD TEMPERATURE S9 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS S10 POWER ELEMENTS S11 MONITORING S12 ANALOG 10 S13 SR469 TESTING S14 TWO-SPEED MOTOR
Store
LIST OF FIGURES
Line Voltage
1.01 x FLA 1.05 x FLA 1.10 x FLA 1.20 x FLA 1.30 x FLA 1.40 x FLA
4307.3 s 3414.9 s 1666.7 s 800.0 s 507.2 s 364.6 s See Curve
80 % Store 2-SPEED MOTOR 4.80 x FLA 2-Speed Motor Option Safe Stall Time 20.0 s Speed 2 Phase CT Primary Stall Current Acceleration 3.80 x FLA Speed 2 Full Load Currents
806841A2.CDR
200 A 190 A
100% LINE VOLTAGE For Help, press F1 Stall Current 6.00 x FLA Safe Stall Time Acceleration 10.0 s 5.00 x FLA
806840A2.CDR
For Help, press F1

806842A2.CDR
FEATURES
DISPLAY 40 character display, clear messages which do not require deciphering STATUS INDICATORS I 469 status I Motor status I Output relays
KEYS FOR LOCAL CONTROL I Reset I Next (to scroll messages) PROGRAM PORT INTERFACE RS232 for connection to a computer, 9600 baud DRAWOUT HANDLE with provision for a wire lead seal to prevent unauthorized removal
Numeric keypad
HELP KEY provides context sensitive messages Control and programming keys for complete access without a computer
Motor Protection
205
TYPICAL WIRING
CIRCUIT BREAKER PHASE A CT GROUND CT DIFF. PHASE A CT
A C
PHASE B CT DIFF. PHASE B CT
A B
B
PHASE C CT DIFF. PHASE C CT
MOTOR
469 POWER SUPPLY
CAUTION
G12 G11 H12 H11

CHECK VOLTAGE RATING OF THE UNIT BEFORE APPLYING POWER. (SEE Pgs. 2-8)
SAFETY GROUND FILTER GROUND CONTROL POWER
G2 H1 H2 G1
G6 H6 G7 H7 G8 H8 G9 H9 G10 H10 G3 H3 G4 H4 G5 H5
Va
Vb
Vc
Vcom
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 50:.025 COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM GROUND GROUND PHASE C PHASE C PHASE B PHASE B PHASE A PHASE A CURRENT INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTACTS (52a, 52b) SHOWN FOR BREAKER OPEN.
GROUND BUS
DRAWOUT INDICATOR
E12 F12 E11 F11
CONTROL POWER
MOTOR WINDING 1 MOTOR WINDING 2 MOTOR WINDING 3
10
MOTOR WINDING 4 MOTOR WINDING 5 MOTOR WINDING 6 MOTOR BEARING 1 MOTOR BEARING 2 PUMP BEARING 1 PUMP BEARING 2 PUMP CASE AMBIENT INDUCTIVE/HALL EFFECT SENSOR FOR TACHOMETER
B1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
52a
RTD SHIELD HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN COMPENSATION HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN
RTD #1
TRIP COIL SUPERVISION
RTD #2 RTD #3 R1 TRIP RTD #4 RTD #5 R2 AUXILIARY STOP 52a
RTD #6 RTD #7
R3 AUXILIARY
R4 ALARM RTD #8 RTD #9 R6 SERVICE
R5 BLOCK START
COMPENSATION RTD #10 HOT HOT COMPENSATION RTD RETURN RTD #11
TRIP COIL
ALARM ANNUNCIATOR START 52b CLOSE COIL
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
GE Power Management
COMPENSATION RTD #12 HOT
469
FRONT PANEL LOCAL PROGRAMMING PORT RS232
CAUTION
+24
DO NOT INJECT VOLTAGES TO DIGITAL INPUTS (DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY)

KEYSWITCH FOR SETPOINT ACCESS
DCS
COMPUTER RS485 + COM
AUXILIARY RS485 + -
ANALOG I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS 2+ 3+ ANALOG INPUTS 1+ 2+ 3+ 4+ COM

+24 4+ SHIELD Vdc
COM COM 1+
9 PIN CONNECTOR 25 PIN CONNECTOR
D25 D26 D27

120 1nF 120 1nF
B2 B3 B4 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27
PERSONAL COMPUTER
120 1nF
469PC PROGRAM
120 1nF
COMMONRS485 PORT 4-20mA ANALOG INPUT PLC or COMPUTER #1+ #2+ #3+ #4+ COMMON THERMAL CAPACITY 1 AVG STATOR RTDs KW
MOTOR MOTOR BEARING1 BEARING2 LOAD LOAD BEARING1 BEARING2
SELF POWERED VIBRATION TRANSDUCERS
806751AP.dwg
206
Motor Protection
9 WIRE RS232 RS232
D16 STARTER STATUS D17 EMERGENCY RESTART D18 REMOTE RESET D19 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 1 D20 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 2 D21 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 3 D22 ASSIGNABLE INPUT 4 D23 COMMON D24 SWITCH +24Vdc C1 ACCESS C2 C3 TEST C4
DIGITAL INPUTS
RS232 INTERFACE
RELAY 1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9 COMPUTER 1 8 2 3 RXD 3 2 TXD 4 20 5 7 SGND 6 6 7 4 8 5 9 22

PROTECTION GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 1-5000 A, 25 A for 50:0.025 CT Secondary: 1 A or 5 A (setpoint), 12.5 mA for 50:0.025 Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at rated load for 1 A or 5 A Less than 0.25 VA at rated load for 50:0.025 Conversion Range: 0.02-1 x CT primary Amps Accuracy: 0.5% of 1 x CT for 5 A 0.5% of 5 x CT for 1 A 0.5% of CT primary for 50:0.025 CT Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 times rated current 2 sec @ 40 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current DIFFERENTIAL PHASE CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 1 - 5000 A CT Secondary: 1 A or 5 A (setpoint) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at rated load Conversion Range: 0.02 - 1 x CT Accuracy: 0.5% of 1 x CT for 5 A 0.5% of 5 x CT for 1 A CT Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 times rated current 2 sec @ 40 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS VT Ratio: VT Secondary: Conversion Range: Accuracy: Max Continuous: DIGITAL INPUTS Inputs: External Switch: 1.00 - 150.00:1 in steps of 0.01 273 VAC (full scale) 0.05 - 1.00 x full scale 0.5% of full scale 280 VAC 9 opto-isolated inputs dry contact < 800 , or open collector NPN transistor from sensor 6 mA sinking from internal 4 K pullup @ 24 VDC with VCE < 4 VDC +24 VDC @ 20 mA max
PROTECTION AND CONTROL ELEMENTS NOTE: For Technical Specifications for each protection and control element refer to the 469 instruction manual.
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Operating Temperature: Ambient Storage Temperature: Humidity: Altitude: Pollution Degree: TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength:
-40 C to +60 C -40 C to +80 C Up to 90%, noncondensing Up to 2000 m 2
METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 1-5000 A CT Secondary: 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order) Burden: Less than 0.2 VA at rated load Conversion Range: 0.05-20 x CT Accuracy: at <2 x CT: 0.5% of 2 x CT at 2 x CT: 1% of 20 x CT CT Withstand: 1 sec @ 80 times rated current 2 sec @ 40 times rated current continuous @ 3 times rated current
100 Platinum (DIN.43760) 100 Nickel field 120 Nickel programmable 10 Copper RTD Sensing Current: 5mA Isolation: 36 Vpk (Isolated with Analog Inputs and Outputs) Range: -50 to +250C Accuracy: 2C Lead Resistance: 25 Max per lead for Pt and Ni types 3 Max per lead for Cu type No Sensor: >1000 Short/Low Alarm: 50C ANALOG CURRENT INPUTS Current Inputs: 0-1 mA, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (setpoint) Input Impedance: 226 10% Conversion Range: 0-21 mA Accuracy: 1% of full scale Type: passive Analog Input Supply: +24 VDC @ 100 mA max
469 Sensor Supply: RTD INPUTS RTDs: 3 wire type
MONITORING TRIP COIL SUPERVISION Applicable Voltage: 20-300 VDC/VAC Trickle Current: 2-5 mA
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Options: LO / HI (must be specified when ordering) Range: LO: DC: 20 to 60 VDC AC: 20 to 48 VAC @ 48 to 62 Hz HI: DC: 90 to 300 VDC AC: 70 to 265 VAC @ 48 to 62 Hz Power: 45 VA (max), 25 VA typical Voltage Loss-ride Through Time: 30 ms
OUTPUTS ANALOG CURRENT OUTPUT Type: Active Range: 4-20 mA, 0-1 mA (must be specified with order) Accuracy: 1% of full scale 4-20 mA Max Load: 1200 0-1mA Max Load: 10 k Isolation: 36 Vpk (Isolated with RTDs and Analog Inputs) 4 Assignable Outputs: 24 possible assignments OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration: 6 Electo-Mechanical Form C Contact Material: silver alloy Operate Time: 10 ms Max Ratings for 100000 operations
VOLTAGE MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 SEC BREAK MAX LOAD
Per IEC 255-5 and ANSI/IEEE C37.90 2.0 kV for 1 min from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST Insulation Resistance: IEC255-5 500VDC, from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5 kV/1 MHz) ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5 kV/10 ns) Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance, Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15W Transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -40C to +60C ambient Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle Vibration: Sinusoidal Vibration 8.0 g for 72 hrs PRODUCTION TESTS Thermal Cycling: Operational test at ambient, reducing to -40C and then increasing to 60C Dielectric Strength: 2.0 kV for 1 sec from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground DO NOT CONNECT FILTER GROUND TO SAFETY GROUND DURING TEST PACKAGING Shipping Box: Shipping Weight:
10
12" W x 11" H x 10" D (30.5 cm x 27.9 cm x 25.4 cm) 17 lbs max (7.7 kg)
DC Resistive
COMMUNICATIONS RS232 Port: 1, Front Panel, non-isolated RS485 Ports: 2, Isolated together @ 36 Vpk Baud Rates: RS485: 300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200 RS232: 9600 Parity: None, Odd, Even Protocol: ModBus RTU / half duplex *Specifications subject to change without notice.
30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC DC 30 VDC Inductive 125 VDC L/R = 40 ms 250 VDC AC 120 VAC Resistive 250 VAC AC 120 VAC Inductive 250 VAC PF = 0.4
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A
10 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 5A 0.25 A 0.15 A 10 A 10 A 4A 3A
300 W 62.5 W 75 W 150 W 31.3 W 37.5 W 2770 VA 2770 VA 480 VA 750 VA
CASE Fully drawout (Automatic CT shorts) Seal provision Dust tight door Panel or 19 rack mount APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered system. UL: UL approved CSA: CSA approved : Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN 50082-2 Conforms to IEC 947-1, 1010-1
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
8.80" Max (224) 7.52" (191) Panel
REAR VIEW
8.52" (216)
PANEL CUTOUT
Inches (mm)
7.25" (184)
9.00" (229) 9.93" (252)

E F
UPPER
CUT-OUT
E F G H
H
LOWER
Panel
808750E5.DWG
Motor Protection
207
Motor protection and management shall be provided using a digital relay. The primary protective function shall be the thermal model. It shall consist of 4 key elements: I overload curves I negative sequence unbalance/ single
phase biasing
become dynamic in nature in order to follow the loading and temperature of the motor. The protection shall also include: I I I I I I
stall mechanical jam 12 RTD inputs ground overcurrent short circuit differential protection using CT inputs (6) from both sides of the machine winding I voltage transformer inputs which shall be used to provide overvoltage, undervoltage, voltage phase reversal, overfrequency and underfrequency functions
be stored each time a trip occurs. A simulation feature shall be available for testing the relay. The user interfaces shall include: I a 40 character illuminated vacuum
fluorescent display and associated keypad to provide access to actual values and setpoints a front RS232 serial port for setpoint programming an RS485 serial port which shall use an open protocol with baud rates selectable up to 19,200 bps. an independent auxiliary RS485 port shall be available for added security or for use by maintenance personnel interface software shall be provided in a Windows format
I RTD biasing (hot/cold motor compensation)
I I I I
I motor cooling time constants Special attention shall be given to the protection of the rotor during stall and acceleration. To achieve this the stall/acceleration curve shall be voltage compensated and a speed switch input shall be available. The stator protective thermal model shall combine inputs from positive and negative sequence currents and RTD winding feedback. This will then cause the model to
The motor management relay shall include complete power metering. An events record stores the last 40 events. Sixteen cycles of waveform data shall
The relay shall have a drawout construction to facilitate testing, maintenance and interchange flexibility.
10
ORDERING
Motor Management Relay is a registered trademark of General Electric Company ModBus is a registered trademark of MODICON
469
469
*
P1 P5
*
Basic unit 1 A phase CT secondaries 5 A phase CT secondaries DC: 24 - 60V; AC: 20 - 48 V @ 48 - 62 Hz control power DC: 90 - 300V; AC: 70 - 265 V @ 48 - 62 Hz control power 0 - 1 mA analog outputs 4 - 20 mA analog outputs
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
LO HI A1 A20
Accessories
469PC Program: DEMO: 191 PANEL: 192 PANEL: SCI MODULE: Provided free with each relay Metal carry case in which 469 unit may be mounted Single cutout 19" panel Dual cutout 19" panel RS232 to RS485 converter box designed for harsh industrial environments Phase CT: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 HGF3, HGF5, HGF8: For sensitive ground detection on high resistance grounded systems 1 3/8" Collar: For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 1 3/8". 3" Collar: For shallow switchgear, reduces the depth of the relay by 3".

See pages 15 - 18.
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
4 1
.
4 1
.
Dual mounting available with the 19-2 Panel.

808785E3.cdr
208
Motor Protection
369

Applications
I I I I
Three phase AC motors Pumps, conveyors, compressors, fans, etc. Variable frequency drives Downhole pumps (B) Overload 15 selectable, 1 custom curve Phase short circuit Locked rotor/mechanical jam Variable lockout time Single phase/unbalance Ground fault O/C Overtemperature 12 RTDs (R) Starts/hour, time between starts Undercurrent Phase Reversal (M) Undervoltage/overvoltage (M) Load, current, unbalance display Fault diagnosis Event record, last 40 Voltage/frequency/power display (M) 4 analog outputs (M) Back spin detection (B) Front RS232 port 3-Independent rear RS485 ports, ModBus RTU to 19.2 kbps Fiber optic link (F) 40 character display 10 LED indicators and keypad Profibus port (P) AC/DC control power Flash memory Simulation mode for field testing Trip/Alarm/Aux1/Aux2 Relay Outputs Optional split mounting Optional remote RTD module
Protection
10
DESCRIPTION
The 369 is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and their associated mechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to "learn" individual motor parameters and to adapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates, and acceleration time may be used to improve the 369's protective capabilities. The 369 can offer optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve custom overload curve, or one of the fifteen standard curves. The 369 has one RS232 front panel port, and three RS485 rear ports. ModBus RTU protocol is standard to all ports. Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad, or by using the 369PC software and a computer. Status, actual values, and troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communications. A simulation mode allows testing and verification of correct operation without requiring a relay test set. As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearing, or driven equipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is the remote RTD module which can be linked to the 369 via a fiber optic or RS485 connection. The optional Metering package provides VT inputs, as well as voltage and power elements. It also provides metering of V, kW, kvar, kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Four user configurable analog outputs are included with this option. The Back-spin Detection (BSD) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enable timely and safe motor restarting. 369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgrades are via an option enabling passcode and/or an accessory installation available from GE Power Management.

I I I I I I
User Interfaces
I I I I I I
Features
I I I I I I
Options available: (B), (R), (M), (F), (P) Note: Metering (M) is included in Backspin (B) option.
GE Power Management
209

PROTECTION
Start and Running
Typical FlexCurveTM
6500 HP, 13800 Volt INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
10000
The motor is protected under both acceleration and running conditions. The 369 can trigger an alarm or trip the motor based on the normal acceleration time, the number of starts per hour, the time between starts, or motor over-load conditions.
1 PROGRAMMED MULTILIN 369 CUSTOM CURVE 2 RUNNING SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMITED) 3 ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMITED) 4 MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE 5 MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
current surge will cause the relay assigned to the rapid trip / mechanical jam function to become active. The user may set the pickup level and the trip time delay. An alarm can also be set for early warning.
1000
Stator Overtemperature (Option R)

1
Overload
The 369 protects the motor from overload conditions. One of fifteen standard overload curves may be programmed based on motor manufacturers locked rotor time capability. Alternately the user may program in a custom curve using the built-in FlexCurve function. The motors service factor value is entered as the overload pickup level.
Fifteen standard overload curves
2
100
3
10
Overtemperature protection of the stator winding can be incorporated into the 369 by monitoring up to 12 optional stator RTDs. If less than 12 RTDs are used for stator monitoring, the remaining RTDs may be used for any other temperature monitoring function desired.
Individual RTD alarm, high alarm and trip levels are set by the user.
4 5
1.0
RTD 1 TRIP LEVEL: 130C

Temperature Monitor (Option R)
A total of 12 optional RTD inputs can be provided on the 369. Any RTD inputs not used for stator RTD protection can be used for other temperature monitoring functions. These will commonly be used for motor and load bearings. Separate alarm and trip level temperatures can be selected for each RTD. Alternatively, a remote RRTD module can also be used with the 369 for temperature monitoring.
0.5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 4 5 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
0.1
10
10,000
369flex.ai
Unbalance
Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Induced currents in the rotor can be high, whereas stator current increases can be much lower. To prevent rotor damage unbalance protection must be used. Unbalance alarm, trip and single phase tripping is provided.
1,000
TRIP TIME (seconds)
100
Undercurrent (Minimum Load)

CURVE 15 12 9 7 4 3 2 1 0.1 1 10
Back-Spin Detection (Option B)

The BSD option is used to detect flow reversal of a down hole pump motor when check valves are not functioning or non-existent. Once the pump has stopped rotating, the BSD will allow the pump to safely restart, minimizing downtime and preventing expensive motor damage. The BSD does not require any special sensing modules to function. Sensitive circuits detect the voltage produced by the generator effect of the spinning motor. Digital signal processing techniques determine the direction of rotation and predict the pump stop time. An underpower element trips the motor immediately in case of loss of fluid to the pump (which also cools the motor). The metering option (M) is included in the BSD (B) option.
10
1
Full Load Setpoint
The undercurrent function is used to detect a decrease in motor current caused by a decrease in motor load. This is especially useful for indication of such conditions as loss of suction for pumps, loss of airflow for fans, or a broken belt for conveyors. A separate undercurrent alarm level may be set to provide early warning.
PHASE CURRENT (multiples of full load)

819765A8.CDR
Ground O/C
For ground overcurrent protection, all three of the motor conductors must pass through a separate ground CT. CTs may be selected to detect either high impedance zero sequence ground or residual ground currents. The ground fault trip can be instantaneous or time delayed by up to 255 seconds. A low level of ground fault pickup is desirable to protect as much of the stator winding as possible. A 50:0.025A CT, 1A or 5A CT may be used for ground fault detection.
FlexCurve
The 369 develops a smooth custom overload curve within a selected range when a FlexCurve is programmed. FlexCurve can be used to protect motors which have different rotor damage and stator damage curves, such as motors connected to high inertia drives, allowing total motor design capacity with complete protection. By using custom curves it is no longer necessary to compromise protection, as can be the case with single fixed curve relays.
During programming the 369 allows the selection of a custom curve.
Thermal Modeling
A unique feature of the 369 relay is its ability to compute the motor I2 t value based on actual motor load current. The thermal model calculates this value in terms of thermal capacity used.
Rapid Trip / Mechanical Jam

Quick motor shut down capability allows the 369 to reduce damage to gears, bearings, and other mechanical parts associated with the drive combination. A
SELECT CURVE STYLE Standard 210
Motor Protection

RTD Hot Motor Compensation (Option R)
When hot motor compensation is enabled, the RTDs measuring the stator temperature act as a thermal capacity check to confirm the value calculated by the thermal model. The thermal capacity used is then updated to reflect the higher of the two values. This accounts not only to heat due to I2t, but also to motor heating due to loss of cooling or extreme ambient temperatures. In addition, the 369 offers the unique capability of allowing the user to match the motor thermal characteristics with a dual slope RTD bias curve. The two part curve allows for easy fitting of hot and cold motor damage curves to the RTD bias feature.
RTD bias curve sample
THERMAL CAPACITY USED 100%
Metering (Option M)
A metering option is provided with the 369. This gives the 369 the ability to monitor quantities such as PF, kW, frequency, etc. Several protection functions can be performed based on these parameters, including: I I I I I I
Voltage Watts ( kW, MW ) Vars ( kVar, MVar) Power Factor Frequency MWh
trip are displayed. With this information, the cause and action required to fix the problem can be quickly determined. An event record of the last 40 causes of trip helps identify a persistent problem like an overheating bearing. Alarm functions include immediate overload warning, unbalance, undercurrent, and internal self check fault. Often an alarm can be generated soon enough to enable corrective action to be taken before a trip occurs which would shut down the process.
Analog Outputs (Option M)

Four isolated analog outputs are provided that can be field selected as 0-1, 0-20 or 4-20mA outputs. Each of the analog outputs is programmable to specify a certain parameter. For example, analog output 1 could be motor load, analog output 2 could be volts, etc.
THERMAL CAPACITY USED %
925146A3.cdr
CURRENT UNBALANCE TRIPS: 4

Testing
A simulation is available that enables simulated currents to be used without the need for a relay test set. This is ideal for verification of settings and training.
75%
10
The simulation mode can be run from the front panel display or a PC.
50%
25% RTD BIAS CENTER T.C. 15% MAXIMUM STATOR TEMPERATURE 0% 0C 40C RTD BIAS MIN. VALUE 80C 120C 110C RTD BIAS CENTER VALUE 160C 155C RTD BIAS MAX. VALUE 200C
Fault Diagnosis
After a trip, the cause of trip along with measured values of current, unbalance, and temperature present at the time of
FACTORY PRESET CURVE: Min.= 40C, Center = 110C & Max.= 155C. Center Thermal Capacity = 15%.
968570A6.dwg

BACKUP 52 50 50G OPTIONAL METERING (M) BUS V V 27 47 59
METERING V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz
55
4 ISOLATED ANALOG OUTPUTS
BREAKER OR FUSED CONTACTOR
TRIP
AUXILIARY RELAY
DEVICE
74
ALARM RELAY
METERING A, Celsius
PROTECTION
Speed switch Undervoltage/Overvoltage Undercurrent/Underpower Bearing RTD Current Unbalance Phase Reversal Stator RTD Short circuit & short circuit backup Ground o/c & ground o/c backup Overload Power factor Starts/hour & time between starts Frequency Overload lockout Differential
52b 3 AMBIENT AIR 50 51 37 66 46

CONTROL
OPTION ( B ) BACKSPIN DETECTION
START
BLOCK START
51G 50G 14 SPEED DEVICE INPUTS

LOAD
14
86
14 27/59 37 38 46 47 49 50 50G/51G
RTDs
MOTOR

87
Comm. to RTD module
SERVICE
87
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY CONTACTS
RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485
51 55 66 81 86 87
BEARING STATOR AMBIENT STATOR BEARING AMBIENT

840701B1.cdr
OPTIONAL RTD ( R ) 12 RTD INPUTS
49
38
(Fiber Optic) (Option F)
REMOTE RTD MODULE (12 RTD INPUTS)
Motor Protection
211
USER INTERFACES
Communication
A front RS232 port is provided for downloading setpoints and interrogating the relay. This is done through the free 369PC program, using a personal computer that runs Windows. In addition, 3 independent rear RS485 ports are provided. This unique feature offers the customer flexibility and performance when designating the corresponding communication network. The 369 can communicate at baud rates up to 19200 bps using the industry standard ModBus RTU protocol. Option (F), a 5MBd Fiber Optic Link, is provided for harsh environments. This option disables one of the RS485 ports. Option (P), a Profibus interface port, allows the 369 to communicate on Profibus-DP network.
Enter setpoints directly to the 369 or copy/save relay settings to a file.
Display and Keypad

The 40 character display and keypad provide convenient local communications and control. Motor parameter setpoints can also be entered using the keypad and display. To help prevent unauthorized setpoint changes, a setpoint access input must be shorted before changes can be made. The display module can be separated from the relay and mounted remotely.
Self explanatory messages make programming and monitoring easy
View motor current, temperature, statistics and status.
PHASE CT PRIMARY: 586 A LEARNED ACCELERATION TIME = 0.05

LED Indicators
Ten LED indicators on the front panel provide quick visual indication of status.
10
Future Expansion
GE Power Management relays communicate using an open architecture protocol and hardware interface. Different GE Power Management relays or devices by other manufacturers can be mixed on the same communication link. Even if communications are not required on initial installation, the 369 can be integrated into a plant control system at a later date since communication capability is standard. Flash Memory is used for code storage within the 369. This allows future product upgrades to be installed throughout an existing plant by simply loading new program code via the front serial port.
Read the trip record and pretrip values for quick fault diagnosis.
Digital Inputs
The 369 has 6 dry contact inputs. I Setpoint access: these terminals
must be shorted together in order for the faceplate keypad to have the ability to store new setpoints Emergency restart: momentarily shorting these terminals together when the motor is stopped will cause the thermal memory to discharge to 0% used, allowing for an immediate restart after an overload trip. While this may be necessary for safety or production considerations, it will compromise the thermal protection functions of the 369, making it possible for the motor to be damaged. Reset: this input can be used for remote reset operations. It can also be used for an automatic reset. Speed Switch: connection of this input to an external speed switch allows the 369 to utilize a speed device for locked rotor protection. Differential Relay: an external differential relay can be connected such that a contact closure on this input will result in an immediate differential trip on the 369. Spare Input: this input can be set to provide an alarm or trip after a programmable time delay when a contact closure is sensed on these terminals.
Maximize production throughput and improve preventative maintenance with trend analysis.
369PC
For quick entry of all relay setpoints, 369PC can be used instead of the front panel keypad and display. This software runs under Windows on a personal computer for intuitive point and click entry. The PC connects to the 369 via a standard 9-pin serial cable connected to the front RS232 port, or via a RS232/RS485 convertor through the rear ports. Setpoints for each motor in the plant can be stored in a file and printed for easy reference. When new relays are added, a complete file of settings can be downloaded for error free setpoint entry.
I I
All information that can be accessed from the relay can also be displayed on a PC. This includes actual values, setpoints, status and trip records. The 369PC program can also be used to generate graphical trend reports.
All digital inputs other than setpoint access are fully programmable as general switch inputs.
212
Motor Protection

FEATURES
369 Front View
DISPLAY 40 Character alpha-numeric LCD display for viewing actual values, causes of alarms and trips, and programming setpoints
TRIP BSD RRTD METERING COM 1 COM 2
STATUS INDICATORS 4 LEDs indicate when an output is activated. When an LED is lit, the cause of the output relay operation will be shown on the display. SERVICE LED indicates that a self-diagnostic test failed.
ALARM AUX 1 AUX 2 SERVICE
STATUS INDICATIORS LEDs indicate if motor is backspinning. RRTD is connected, metering is enabled and com. status.
Rugged, corrosion and flame retardent case.

ACTUAL VALUES SET POINTS HELP
KEYPAD Used to select the display of actual values, causes of alarms, causes of trips, fault diagnosis, and to program setpoints
HELP KEY Help key can be pressed at any time to provide additional information
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
10
RESET CLEAR ENTER
COMPUTER INTERFACE RS232 comm port for connecting to a PC. Use for downloading setpoints, monitoring, data collection & printing reports. 4 OUTPUT RELAYS Programmable alarm and trip conditions activated by programmable setpoints, switch input, remote communication control
369 Rear View
CONTROL POWER HI: 50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC LO: 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC
111 112 NC COM TRIP
113 NO
114 NC
115 116 117 118 119 COM NO NC COM NO AUX 1 ALARM OUTPUT RELAYS
120 NC
121 122 COM NO AUX 2
123
124 125 126 L(+) L2/N(-) SG
CONTROL POWER
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING

250 VAC 10A RESISTIVE 1/4 HP 125 VAC 1/2 HP 250 VAC
CE
12 RTDs: BACKSPIN FIBER OPTIC PORT PROFIBUS MOD: INSULATIVE VOLTAGE: 2 NONE
SPARE DIGITAL INPUTS ( DRY CONTACTS ONLY ) EM. RST ACCESS SP. SW. DIFF. 53 52 51
Customer Accessible Fuse
48
POLLUTION DEGREE: 2 IP CODE: XO OVERVOLTAGE CATAGORY: 1
56
55
54
GE Power Management
EX. RES
12 RTD INPUTS ( R ) Field selectable type
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
PROFIBUS
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.ge.com/edc/pm
62
61
60
59
58
57
CHANNEL 2
SHLD 76 75
74
SHLD 73 72
FIBER OPTIC PORTS

RTD11
CHANNEL 1
71
CHANNEL 3
ANALOG OUTPUTS
3 82
2 81
1 SHLD 80 79 78
77
SHLD COM 4
BSD V
BSD V N 91 GROUND 1A CT 102
PHASE A 5A CT 92 GROUND 5A CT 103
PHASE A 1A CT 93 GROUND CT COM 104
PHASE A CT COM 94 PHASE A VT 105
PHASE B 5A CT 95
PHASE B 1A CT 96 PHASE A VT N 106
PHASE B CT COM 97 PHASE B VT 107
PHASE C 5A CT 98 PHASE B VT N 108
PHASE C 1A CT 99 PHASE C VT 109
PHASE C CT COM 100 PHASE C VT N 110
86
85
84
83
36 47 35 RTD9 RTD8 RTD7 RTD3 RTD2 RTD1

90 GROUND 50:0.025 101
RTD12
MODEL: 369-HI-R-B-F-P SERIAL No: M53B99000026 FIRMWARE: 53A700C0.000 INPUT POWER: 50-300 VDC 40-265 VAC 578mA MAX. 50/60Hz or DC
OPTIONS
46
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
45 44 43 RTD11 RTD10 RTD12 RTD10 42 41 40 39 38 37 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
DIGITAL INPUTS
PROFIBUS PORT ( P )
RX
TX
3 x RS485 Ports 3 Independent modbus channels ANALOG OUTPUT ( M ) FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK ( F ) For harsh enviroments and or hook up to RRTD CURRENT INPUTS 3 Phase and ground CT inputs 5A, 1A, taps
BACKSPIN DETECTION ( B ) 0-575V RMS
GROUND CT INPUTS 5A, 1A and 50:0.25 taps
840702BD.cdr
VOLTAGE INPUTS ( M ) 0-240V wye or delta VT connections.
Motor Protection
213
TYPICAL WIRING
HGF-CT
(5 Amp CT)
C(B)
A
A
B C
MOTOR
B(C)
Twisted Pair
OPTIONAL
105 106 107 108 109 110

VA VN VB VN VC VN VOLTAGE INPUTS
WITH METERING OPTION (M)
93
94 92
96 97
95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101

1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A
50: 0.025A
91
N
90
V
1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neut/Gnd
Back Spin Option (B)
CURRENT INPUTS
GROUND BUS
STATOR WINDING 1
STATOR WINDING 2
10
STATOR WINDING 3
STATOR WINDING 4
STATOR WINDING 5
STATOR WINDING 6
MOTOR BEARING 1
MOTOR BEARING 2
PUMP BEARING 1
PUMP BEARING 2
PUMP CASE
AMBIENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
COMPUTER
Com
RTD1
GE Power Management
shld.
369
RTD2
OUTPUT RELAYS
FILTER GROUND LINE + NEUTRAL SAFTY GROUND
123 124 125 126
CONTROL POWER
L
CONTROL POWER
Com
TRIP
shld.
ALARM
Com
RTD3
shld.
AUX. 1
Com
RTD4
AUX. 2
shld.
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
CR
ALARM
RTD ALARM SELF TEST ALARM
NOTE RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN WITH CONTROL POWER REMOVED
Com
RTD5
SPARE
shld.
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY SPEED SWITCH ACCESS SWITCH EMERGENCY RESTART EXTERNAL RESET
Com
RTD6
shld.
Com
RTD7
shld.
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 80 81 82 83 84 85
87
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
14 SPEED SWITCH
KEYSWITCH OR JUMPER
OPTION ( R )
Com
RTD8
ANALOG OUTPUTS
load PF Watts cpmShield
RS485 + -
OPTION (M,B)
shld.
2 3 4
Com-
Com
RTD9
shld.
shld.
METER
Shield
PLC
Com
RTD10 Profibus Option (P) RTD11

CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 RS485
SHLD
shld.
ST CONNECTION
Com
SCADA
CHANNEL 3 RS485
OPTION (F)
shld.
DB-9 (front) RTD12
RS485
SHLD
FIBER
Rx
Com
SHLD Tx
50/125 uM FIBER 62.5/125 uM FIBER 100/140 uM FIBER
71
shld.
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
369
RTD1
5 9
369 PC PROGRAM
1 TD 2 RD 3 4 ND 5 6 7 8 9
9 PIN CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RD 2 TD 20 7 ND 6 4 5 22
25 PIN CONNECTOR
4 8
3 7
2 6
REMOTE RTD MODULE
RTD12
PC
840700B8.cdr
214
Motor Protection

PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES TRIP TIME Curves: 15 curves, fixed shape/prog. FlexCurve Overload Pickup: 1.0 - 1.25 x FLA Accuracy: Pickup: 1% of full scale Time: 100 ms or 2% of total trip time SHORT CIRCUIT & GROUND TRIP Ground Trip Level: 0.25 - 25.00 A (50:0.025 CT) 10 - 100% (1 A/5 A CT) S/C Trip Level: 2 - 20 x CT, OFF Intentional Delay: INST. or 10 ms to 2000 ms (S/C) (GROUND) Instantaneous: 45 ms START PROTECTION Thermal: Separate start & run protection Activation: Inrush current increases 5% to > 101% FLC in 1 sec Deactivation: Current drops < Overload Pickup Level motor running if current > 5% FLC Locked Rotor: 2 - 10 x FLC Stall Time: 1.0 - 600.0 sec THERMAL MODELING Thermal Capacity: Separate stop/run, exponential cool down Cool Rate: Stop: cool time constant 1-500 min Run: cool time constant 1-500 min Hot/Cold: 50 - 100%, hot after 15 min running Lockout: 1 - 500 min programmable 20% power on or off UNBALANCE Range: 4 - 30% Accuracy: 2% Delay: 0 - 255 sec Im - Iav Calculation: Iav IFLC UB% = | | x 100% Iav Im - Iav Iav < IFLC UB% = | I | x 100% FLC where: Iav = average phase current Im = phase with maximum deviation from Iav IFLC = motor full load current setting METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: True rms, sample time 1.04 ms CT Input: 1 A and 5 A secondary Range: 0.05 to 20 x phase CT primary amps Full Scale: 20 x phase CT primary amps Frequency: 20 - 300 Hz Accuracy: @ 2 x CT 0.5% of 2 x CT @ > 2 x CT 1.0% of 20 x CT GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT) CT Input (Rated): 1 A / 5 A secondary and 50:0.025 CT Primary: 1-5000 A (1 A/5 A) Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x CT primary (1 A / 5 A) 0.05 to 16.0 A (50:0.025) Full Scale: 1.0 x CT primary (1 A / 5 A) Frequency: 20 - 300 Hz Conversion: True rms 1.04 ms / sample Accuracy: 1% of full scale (1 A/5 A) 0.07 A @ 1 A (50:0.025) 0.20 A @ 16 A (50:0.025) PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT(VT)(Option M) VT Ratio: 1.00 - 240:1 in steps of 0.01 VT Secondary: 240 VAC (full scale) Range: 0.05 - 1.00 x full scale Frequency: 20 - 300 Hz Conversion: True rms 1.04 ms/sample Accuracy: 1.0% of full scale Burden: > 200 k Max. Continuous: 280 VAC POWER METERING (Option M):
PARAMETER kW kvar kVA mWh kvarh Power Factor Frequency kW Demand kvar Demand kVA Demand Amp Demand ACCURACY (FULL SCALE) 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 1% 0.02 Hz 2% 2% 2% 2% RESOLUTION 1 kW 1 kvar 1 kVA 1 MWh 1 kvarh 0.01 0.01 Hz 1 kW 1 kvar 1 kVA 1A RANGE 32,000 32,000 0 - 50,000 0 - 65,535 0 - 65,535 0.00 - 1.00 20.00 - 300.00 0 - 50,000 0 - 50,000 0 - 50,000 0 - 65,535
INPUTS RTDS INPUTS (OPTION R): Wire Type: 3 wire 100 platinum (DIN 43760) Sensor Type: 100 nickel, 120 nickel 10 Copper RTD Sensing Current: 3 mA Range: -40 to 200 C or -40 to 424 F Lead Resistance: 25 max. for Pt and Ni type 3 max for Cu type Isolation: 36 Vpk BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) Frequency: 2 - 300 Hz Dynamic BSD Range: 30 mV - 575 V rms Accuracy: 0.02 Hz DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTS Inputs: 6 optically isolated Input Type: Dry Contact (<800) Function: Programmable CT INPUTS PHASE CT 1A PHASE CT BURDEN INPUT (A) VA 1 0.03 5 0.64 20 11.7 5 0.07 25 1.71 100 31 GROUND CT BURDEN INPUT (A) VA 1 0.04 5 0.78 20 6.79 5 0.07 25 1.72 100 25 0.025 0.24 0.1 2.61 0.5 37.5 BURDEN () 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.003 0.003 0.003 BURDEN () 0.036 0.031 0.017 0.003 0.003 0.003 384 261 150
OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTION M)

PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT MAX LOAD MAX OUTPUT 0-1 mA 2400 1.01 mA 0-20 mA 600 20.2 mA 4-20mA 600 20.2 mA
Accuracy: Isolation: OUTPUT RELAYS
1% of full scale 50 V isolated active source

RESISTIVE LOAD (PF = 1) INDUCTIVE LOAD (PF = 0.4)(L/R - 7ms) 3.5 @ 250 VAC 3.5 A @ 30 VDC 8A 2000 VA 240 W 380 VAC/125 VDC 8A <10 ms (5 ms typical) silver alloy 875 VA 170 W
Rated Load Carry Current Max Switching Capacity Max Switching V Max Switching I Operate time Contact Material
8 A @ 250 VAC 3.5 A @ 30 VDC
5A
GROUND CT 1A
5A
TYPE TESTS Dielectric: 2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, Insulation: IEC 255-5 500 VDC Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC 255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 Joule 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15 W Transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle Dust/Moisture: IP50 APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered system UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Approved under LR41286-59 : IEC 947-1, IEC 1010-1
10
50:0.025
GROUND/PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND WITHSTAND TIME 1s 2s continuous 1A 100 x CT 40 x CT 3 x CT 5A 100 x CT 40 x CT 3 x CT 50:0.025 10A 5A 150mA CT COMMUNICATIONS RS232: Front port (up to 19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) RS485: 3 rear ports (up to 19.2 kbps, 36 V isolation, ModBus RTU) Fiber Optic: Option F rear port (up to 19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) Profibus: Option P rear port (up to 12 Mbps, Profibus DP) *Specifications subject to change without notice.
PACKAGING Shipping Box: Ship Weight:
12" x 12" x 8" (L x H x D) 305 mm x 305 mm x 203 mm (L x H x D) 10 lbs/4.5 kg
ENVIRONMENTAL Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -40 C to + 60 C ambient
Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions include: I phase overload standard curves (51) I overload by custom programmable
curve (51) I2t modeling (49) unbalance/ single phase (46) phase reversal (47) starts per hour and time between starts (48) I short circuit (50) I ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N) I mechanical jam/stall
I flash memory Optional functions include: I under/overvoltage I stator overtemperature/bearing

overtemperature with 12 independent RTD inputs (49) I underpower & power factor (55) I backspin detection
I I I I
MONITORING WAVEFORM CAPTURE Length: 1 of 64 cycles to 8 of 8 cycles Trigger Position: 0 - 100% pre-trip to post-trip Trigger: trip, manually via communications or digital input POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Input: LO: 20 - 60 VDC 20 - 48 VAC:50/60 Hz HI: 50 - 300 VDC 40 - 265 VAC:50/60 Hz Power: nominal 20 VA maximum 65 VA Holdup: non-failsafe trip: 200 ms failsafe trip: 100 ms
Management functions shall include: I statistical data I pre-trip data (last 40 trips) I ability to learn, display, and integrate critical parameters to maximize motor protection I a keypad and 40 character display
The relay is capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatt, kilovar, power factor, frequency and MWhr. In addition, undervoltage (27) and low power factor alarm and trip levels are field programmable. The communications interface includes one front RS232 port and three independent RS485 ports, with supporting PC software, thus allowing easy setpoint programming, local retrieval of information, and flexibility in communication with SCADA and engineering work stations.
Motor Protection
215

DIMENSIONS
369 MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
369 SPLIT MOUNTING

Inches (mm)
DISPLAY MODULE
6.125" (156) 6.85" (174) 6.125" (156)
8.07" (205)
4.23" (107)
1.35" (34) 8.07" (205)

6.125" (156)
11.67" (296)
10.24" (260)
10.875" (276)
10.45" (265)
10.875" (276)
11.67" (296)
Inches (mm)
10.875" (276)
MOUNTING SURFACE FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
6.65" (169) REAR VIEW
0.218" (6) DIA (4 PLACES)

840703B6.DWG
(4 PLACES) 0.218" (6) DIA. MOUNTING SURFACE
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
REAR MOUNTING
I / O HOUSING
6.12" (156) 4.23" (107) 6.125" (156)
10.875" (276)
10.24" (260)
10.875" (276)
10
6.65" (169) REAR VIEW MOUNTING SURFACE SIDE VIEW
(4 PLACES) 0.218" (6) DIA.
840715B6.dwg
FRONT MOUNTING
ORDERING
Accessories
369PC Program Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay. RRTD Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fiber optic or RS485 connection. Allows remote metering and programming for up to 12 RTDs. Converts communications between RS232 and RS485/fibre optic. Used to interface a computer to the relay. 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1A or 5A secondaries) Ground CTs used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistance grounded systems. Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation.
369
369
*
HI LO R 0
*
Basic unit (no RTD) 50-300 VDC/40-265 VAC Control Power 20-60 VDC/20-48 VAC Control Power Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in) No optional RTD inputs Optional metering package Optional backspin detection (includes metering) No optional metering package or backspin detection Optional Fiber Optic Port No optional Fiber Optic Port Optional Profibus protocol interface No optional Profibus protocol interface
M B 0 F 0
F485
P 0 Note: The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only.
CT
HGF
515

ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Motor Management Relay is a registered trademark of GE Power Management
DEMO Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted.
See pages 15 - 18.

216
Motor Protection
Provides remote temperature monitoring of RTDs for metering and protection.
RRTD
Remote RTD Module
Applications
I I I I I I
Additional RTD inputs Remote metering of RTDs Reduced wiring to main relay Overtemperature Protection Temperature monitoring Additional I/O
User Interfaces
I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The Remote RTD Module provides additional RTD temperature metering capabilities for GE Power Management relays such as the 369. The module can also operate as a stand-alone temperature monitoring transducer and can provide overtemperature protection (I/O). The RRTD module is a black box which monitors up to 12 RTDs and can be polled for this information. All setpoint programming for the RRTD module is accomplished via the 369 over the serial communication link or by other devices using ModBus RTU over a serial link. Communications connections are over a shielded twisted pair RS485 connection or via the fiber optic port. The RRTD module has been designed to be mounted close to the motor to facilitate reduced length of RTD wiring. A 369 Motor Management Relay can then monitor the RTDs from a remote location and use this temperature information for protection/metering purposes.
3 isolated RS485 ports Fiber optic port (F) ModBus RTU to 19.2K baud Profibus port (P) RTD PC program
10
Features
I I I
12 three wire shielded RTD inputs User configurable RTD type AC/DC universal power supply
Options available: (IO) (F) (P)
The module shall be capable of monitoring up to 12 three wire shielded RTDs. Each RTD input is to be individually field programmable as to type (100P, 100N, 120N, 10C). The communication interface shall include 3 independent RS485 ports and a fiber optic port. ModBus RTU is to be the standard protocol. The module shall be accompanied by supporting PC software thus allowing easy programming and monitoring. The module shall be capable of automatically communicating the RTD information to the 369 Motor Management Relay.
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW 4.00" (102) REAR VIEW 7.75" (197) 6.125" (155) MOUNTING 6.125" (156) 11.35" (288)
10.24" (260)
MOUNTING SURFACE
Inches (mm)
6.65" (169)
10.875" (276)
0.218" (6) DIA. (4 PLACES)

813702A2.dwg
10.875" (276)
GE Power Management
217
RRTD Remote RTD Module

TYPICAL WIRING
STATOR WINDING 1
STATOR WINDING 2
STATOR WINDING 3
STATOR WINDING 4
STATOR WINDING 5
STATOR WINDING 6
MOTOR BEARING 1
MOTOR BEARING 2
ANALOG OUTPUTS
Com
OPTION (IO)
PUMP BEARING 1
PUMP BEARING 2
10
PUMP CASE
AMBIENT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Com
RRTD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GROUND BUS
RTD1
shld.
GE Power Management
RRTD
Com
RTD2
Remote RTD Module

FILTER GROUND LINE + NEUTRAL SAFTY GROUND 123 124 125 126
CONTROL POWER
shld.
L CONTROL POWER N
Com
RTD3
OUTPUT RELAYS OPTION(IO) TRIP
shld.
Com
RTD4
ALARM
shld.
AUX. 1
Com
RTD5
shld.
AUX. 2
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
RTD trip
ALARM
RTD HI ALARM SELF TEST ALARM
12 RTDs, stator/bearing programmable 100 Pt (DIN 43760), 100 Ni, 120 Ni, 10 Cu programmable Range: -40 C to 200 C Trip/Alarm Range: 0 C to 200 C Dead Band: 2 C Accuracy: 2 C Lead Resistance: Pt or Ni RTD: 25 max Cu RTD: 3 max 3 wire lead resistance compensation DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTS (OPTION IO) Inputs: 6 optically isolated Input Type: Dry Contact (<800) Function: Programmable COMMUNICATIONS Type: 3 RS485 2 wire, half duplex, isolated. 1 optional fiber optic port Baud Rate: 1,200 19,200 Protocol: ModBus RTU Functions: Read/write setpoints read actual values execute commands OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTION IO)
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT MAX LOAD MAX OUTPUT 0-1 mA 2400 1.01 mA 0-20 mA 600 20.2 mA 4-20mA 600 20.2 mA
INPUTS RTDS Inputs: Type:
Com
RTD6
DIGITAL INPUTS OPTION (IO)
INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 2 INPUT 1
shld.
Com
RTD7
shld.
Com
RTD8
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
1
Flow Value Pressure Value

Hottest Stator RTD1 RTD2 cpmMETER Shield
shld.
RTD9
2 3 4
Com-
shld.
shld.
Com
80 81 82 83 84 85
RS485 + Shield
RTD10
PLC
shld.
Com
RTD11
Profibus Option(P) DB-9

CHANNEL 1 RS485 CHANNEL 2 RS485
SHLD
GE Power Management
SCADA
Accuracy: Isolation:
1% of full scale 50 V isolated active source

RESISTIVE LOAD (PF = 1) INDUCTIVE LOAD (PF = 0.4)(L/R - 7ms) 3.5 @ 250 VAC 3.5 A @ 30 VDC 8A 2000 VA 240 W 380 VAC/125 VDC 8A <10 ms (5 ms typical) silver alloy 875 VA 170 W
shld.
CHANNEL 3 RS485
WITH OPTION (F)
369
OUTPUT RELAYS (OPTION IO)
Com
FIBER
Rx
RTD12
71 72
SHLD
SHLD Tx
FIBER
Tx Rx
shld.
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
Rated Load Carry Current Max Switching Capacity Max Switching V Max Switching I Operate time Contact Material
8 A @ 250 VAC 3.5 A @ 30 VDC
813703A3.cdr
ORDERING
RRTD *
RRTD HI LO
* *
50-300 VDC/40-265 VAC 20-60 VDC/20-48 VAC Optional input and output No optional input and output Optional Fiber Optic Port No optional Fiber Optic Port Optional Profibus protocol interface No optional Profibus protocol interface
POWER SUPPLY Input: LO: 20 - 60VDC 20 - 48VAC:50/60Hz HI: 50 - 300VDC 40 - 265V:50/60Hz Power: Nominal: 20 VA Maximum: 65 VA Holdup: Non-failsafe trip: 200 ms Failsafe trip: 100 ms TYPE TESTS Dielectric: Insulation: Transients:
IO 0 F 0 P 0
Impulse Test: RFI: EMI: Static: Environment: Dust/Moisture:
Note: The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders.

See pages 15 - 18.
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon Windows is a trademark of Microsoft
Accessories
RTDPC Program Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay. F485 Converts communications between RS232 and RS485 fibre optic used to interface a computer to the relay. QPJ Quick Panel Junior Display used to monitor any actual value. Easy to program and configure.
2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, power supply IEC 255-5 500 VDC ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC 255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level IEC 255-5 0.5 Joule 5 kV 50 MHz/15 W Transmitter C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m IEC 801-2 Static Discharge IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle IP20X
ENVIRONMENT Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -40 C to + 60 C ambient PACKAGING Shipping Box: Ship Weight: 12"x 12" x 8" (L x H x D) 305 mm x 305 mm x 203 mm (L x H x D) 10 lbs (4.5 kg)
APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured to an ISO9001 registered program UL: Recognized file no. E83849 CSA: Recognized file no. LR41286-59 : IEC947-1, IEC1010-1 Class I Division II Rating: Pending *Specifications subject to change without notice.
218
Motor Protection
269Plus
Applications
I I
Three phase AC motors Mechanical system protection
Protection
DESCRIPTION
The 269 Plus is a microprocessor based product designed to provide complete and accurate protection for industrial motors and their associated mechanical systems. The 269 Plus monitors the rotor and stator winding temperatures and shuts off the motor when thermal limits are exceeded. It also shuts down the motor when it detects a potentially damaging or hazardous condition. All RTD inputs not used for stator winding protection can have individual settings for temperature monitoring functions. This allows both motor and driven load bearings to be monitored by the relay. A unique feature of the 269 Plus relay is its ability to "learn" individual motor parameters. The relay can adapt itself to each application by "learning" values of motor inrush current, negative sequence current K factor, cool down rates, start thermal capacity and acceleration time. These values may be used to improve the 269 Plus protective capabilities and are continually updated. The 269 Plus can offer optimum motor protection in situations where other relays cannot by using the overload custom curve feature. If one of the eight standard overload curves is not suitable for the application under consideration, the user can enter break-points to form a custom curve. Such applications include induced fan drives where the motor stator and rotor thermal capacities can differ significantly. An optional remote mounted MPM (Motor Protection Meter) allows the 269 Plus to monitor voltages and power and perform several protection functions based on these values. The 269 Plus has a keypad and LCD display for easy local interface. A RS485 communications port allows computer access to all setpoints and actual values. Four LEDs on the front of the unit provide quick visual identification of output relay status and service self test LED. The 269 Plus is housed in a compact, rugged enclosure compatible with all types of motor starters.
Stator winding overtemperature Bearing overtemperature Multiple starts Overloads 8 standard overload curves User defined overload FlexCurve Locked rotor Rapid trip/mechanical jam Unbalance/single phasing Short circuit Ground fault Undercurrent Phase reversal (meter option) Variable lock-out time "Learns" individual motor parameters
10
Control
I I I I I
Latched main trip relay, alarm relay 2 auxiliary relays Emergency restart capability Pre-trip alarm warnings Optional single-shot restart

I I I I I I I I I I
Motor current (amps, % full load) Motor thermal capacity Record of pre-trip motor values Record of motor statistical data Up to 6 stator RTD inputs Four additional RTD inputs Motor ambient air temperature Continual self-test Ground fault current Optional MPM metering of V, W, vars, PF, Hz, MWh
GE Power Management
219
269Plus Motor Management Relay

PROTECTION
Start and Running
The motor is protected under both acceleration and running conditions. The 269 Plus can trigger an alarm or trip the motor based on the normal acceleration time, the number of starts per hour, the time between starts, or motor overload conditions.
During programming the 269 Plus allows the selection of a custom curve.
of the stator winding as possible. A 50:0.025A CT or 5A CT may be used for ground fault detection.
Rapid Trip / Mechanical Jam

Typical FlexCurve
6500 HP, 13800 Volt INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
10000
Overload
The 269 Plus protects the motor from overload conditions. One of eight standard overload curves may be programmed based on motor manufacturers locked rotor time capability. Alternately the user may program in a custom curve using the built-in FlexCurve function. The motors service factor value is entered as the overload pickup level.
Eight Standard Overload Curves
10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000
1 PROGRAMMED 269 Plus CUSTOM CURVE 2 RUNNING SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMITED) 3 ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMITED) 4 MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE 5 MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
1000
1
Quick motor shut down capability allows the 269 Plus to reduce damage to gears, bearings, and other mechanical parts associated with the drive combination. A current surge will cause the relay assigned to the rapid trip / mechanical jam function to become active. The user may set the pickup level and the trip time delay. An alarm can also be set for early warning.
2
100
Stator Overtemperature
3
10
10
4000 3000
4 5
1.0
2000
1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300
Overtemperature protection of the stator windings is incorporated into the 269 Plus by monitoring up to six stator RTDs. If less than six RTDs are used for stator monitoring, the remaining RTDs may be used for any other temperature monitoring function desired. Individual RTD alarm, high alarm and trip levels are set by the user.
200
0.1 6 7 8 9 10 600 700 800 900 1000 0.5 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 500 20 30 40 50 2 3 4 5
TRIP TIME (SECONDS)
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
968588A2.cdr
Temperature Monitor
CURVE 8 CURVE 7 CURVE 6
20
Unbalance (Negative Sequence)

Unbalanced supply voltages means a large increase in the negative sequence current which can result in greatly increased rotor heating. The relay uses the ratio of the negative to positive sequence currents to bias the thermal model. Unbalance and phase loss protection is also provided.
60 70 80 90 100 30 40 50
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
CURVE 5
CURVE 4
CURVE 3 CURVE 2
1 .9 .8 .7 .6 .5 .4 .3
CURVE 1
A total of 10 RTD inputs are provided on the 269 Plus. Any RTD inputs not used for stator RTD protection can be used for other temperature monitoring functions. These will commonly be used for motor and load bearings. Separate alarm and trip level temperatures can be selected for each RTD.
.2
.1
.1
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8.9 1
6 7 8 910
20
Undercurrent (Minimum Load)

The undercurrent function is used to detect a decrease in motor current caused by a decrease in motor load. This is especially useful for indication of such conditions as loss of suction for pumps, loss of airflow for fans, or a broken belt for conveyors. A separate undercurrent alarm level may be set to provide early warning.
FULL
LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT
MULTIPLES OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT

968516A8.cdr
FlexCurve
The 269 Plus develops a smooth custom overload curve within a selected range when a FlexCurve is programmed. FlexCurve can be used to protect motors which have different rotor damage and stator damage curves, such as motors connected to high inertia drives, allowing total motor design capacity with complete protection. By using custom curves, it is no longer necessary to compromise protection as can be the case with single fixed curve relays.
MotorMatch
To obtain maximum use from the protected motor, GE Power Management has developed a unique system called MotorMatch. This system modifies the initially entered relay parameters to match actual measured motor characteristics. The key elements include: I accumulated I2t in the memory I RTD input to the memory I learned cooldown time from run to
stop
Ground Fault
For zero sequence ground fault protection, all three of the motor conductors must pass through a separate ground fault CT. CTs may be selected to detect either high impedance zero sequence ground faults or residual ground faults. The ground fault trip can be instantaneous or time delayed by up to 20 seconds. A low level of ground fault pickup is desirable to protect as much
I learned cooldown time from runoverload to run-normal I learned acceleration time I learned negative sequence contribution (K-factor)
220
Motor Protection
To learn the cooldown time, the 269 Plus tracks the stator RTD temperature and computes the rate of cooling. If an ambient air RTD is also used, the relay uses this value in its calculation. The learned accelerating I 2t value is obtained by measurement of actual inrush currents and acceleration time. This learned value is only accepted by the 269 Plus when sufficient starts have been sampled.
Emergency Restart
When production or safety considerations become more important than motor protection requirements, it may be necessary to restart a faulted motor. To override a start inhibit or overload trip lockout condition, the emergency restart feature can be used. This will clear the thermal memory allowing a manual reset and restart. The 269 Plus can also be programmed to provide a single shot emergency restart following an overload trip. The accumulated I2t value is automatically reduced to a level that would allow a restart. If following the restart attempt the relay again trips the motor on running overload, it will remain latched for the appropriate lock-out time.
the higher of the two values. This accounts not only to heat due to I2t, but also to motor heating due to loss of cooling or extreme ambient temperatures.
RTD Hot Motor Compensation

When hot motor compensation is enabled, the RTD feedback from the actual stator temperature as measured by the RTDs checks the thermal capacity model. In addition, the 269 Plus offers the unique capability of allowing the user to match the motor thermal characteristics with a dual slope RTD bias curve. The two part curve allows for easy fitting of hot and cold motor damage curves to the RTD bias feature.
RTD bias curve sample
THERMAL CAPACITY USED 100%
Start Inhibit with Auto-Timed Lock-Out

By using MotorMatch, the 269 Plus determines the true motor thermal capacity. If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled, a motor start will not be allowed until the thermal memory has discharged sufficiently to make the start possible. The 269 Plus uses the learned start capacity required to determine if sufficient thermal capacity is available for a start. The start inhibit lock-out time is automatically adjusted to allow for optimum motor usage.
Thermal Modeling
A unique feature of the 269 Plus relay is its ability to compute the motor I2t value based on actual motor load current. The thermal model calculates this value in terms of thermal capacity used. The RTDs measuring the stator temperature act as a thermal capacity check to confirm the value calculated by the thermal model. The thermal capacity used is then updated to reflect
75%
10
50%
25% RTD BIAS CENTER T.C. 15% MAXIMUM STATOR TEMPERATURE 0% 0C 40C RTD BIAS MIN. VALUE 80C 120C 110C RTD BIAS CENTER VALUE 160C 155C RTD BIAS MAX. VALUE 200C
FACTORY PRESET CURVE: Min.= 40C, Center = 110C & Max.= 155C. Center Thermal Capacity = 15%.
968570A6.dwg

52 4160V BUS 400A
50
50G
(4) ISOLATED ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTS
COMMUNICATION with METERING OPTION
MPM
METERING OPTION
AMPS FUSED CONTACTOR
DEVICE
48 46 66
3 PHASE CTs
PROTECTION Speed Device Undercurrent/Minimum Load Motor/Load Bearing Overtemperature Unbalance - Negative Sequence Multiple Starts/Locked Rotor Stator Winding Overtemperature Overload Curves/FlexCurveTM Short Circuit Mechanical Jam/Rapid Trip Zero Sequence Ground Fault Residual Ground Fault Breaker One Alarm Relay, Two auxiliary relays Main Trip Latched Relay Auxiliary Relay No. 1 Auxiliary Relay No. 2 Differential Relay Contact Input Starts per Hour Volts Phase Reversal (Meter Option) Undervoltage (Meter Option) Frequency (Meter Option) Power Factor (Meter Option)
968551A8.cdr
50 51 49 37 50G 51G
86
TRIP RELAY
GROUND CT
47 55 27 74
AMBIENT AIR RTD
STATOR RTDs BEARING RTDs
49 38
ALARM RELAY
37
269Plus RELAY
AUXILIARY RELAY #1
MOTOR
LOAD
14 37 38 46 48 49 49/51 50 50G/51G 50N/51N 52b 74 86
14
SPEED DEVICE CONTACTS
14 87
AUXILIARY RELAY #2
SELF TEST ALARM
87
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY CONTACTS
52b
RS485 REMOTE COMMUNICATION
87 66 47 27 55
SPARE INPUT STARTER AUXILIARY B CONTACT
Motor Protection
221

PROTECTION
Exponential Cooldown
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Speed Switch Input
The speed switch input terminals enable the user to use an external speed device. This is typically used to allow a locked rotor condition to be distinguished from a normal start, and to shut down following a short delay. I phase to phase or phase to neutral
voltage (meter option) I W, var, MWhr, PF, Hz (meter option)
10
The 269 Plus has a true, exponential cooldown characteristic to closely mimic actual motor cooling rates. This allows motors to be load cycled more frequently since the initial rate of cooling is very steep. Two setpoints are required to use the exponential cooldown, the full load current (FLC) reduction and the running cool time. The FLC reduction is the amount of thermal capacity used when the motor is running at a constant 100% FLC condition. This represents the constant percentage difference between the cold damage curve and the hot damage curve. The running cool time is the time for the thermal memory to discharge from 100% to 0% with the motor running in a non-overload condition. If the motor comes from an overloaded condition to a light load condition, then the cooling rate is much faster initially and the thermal capacity used would be reduced accordingly.
269 Plus Exponential Cooldown Curve Graph
THERMAL CAPACITY USED 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0.00 0.00 27 55 82 110 137 165 192 220 247 TIME (Seconds X 10)
Prior Alarms
The 269 Plus can trigger an alarm prior to a trip caused by the following conditions: I I I I I I
immediate overload/stall warning ground fault mechanical jam unbalance undercurrent RTD overtemperature, broken RTD sensor, low temperature RTD I self-test - service I under/overvoltage (meter option) I low power factor (meter option)
Differential Relay Input

Terminals are provided to accept contact closure from an external differential relay, and to provide a facility for grouping all protective functions through one main relay.
Spare Input
The spare input terminals can be configured to represent either a standard contact input (such as a pressure switch), or a specific contact input (circuit breaker/contactor status). The 52b contact from a circuit breaker is positive identification of the position of the breaker (open or closed), and should be used when applying the 269 Plus to any synchronous machine or induction machine that may run unloaded.
Fault Diagnosis
In the event of a trip, the 269 Plus will display the cause of the trip and also show the remaining lock-out time if applicable. In addition, the cause of the last trip and pre-trip values can be recalled for rapid fault diagnosis.
Outputs
FLC Reduction Set @ 20% & 100% FLC.
Statistical Data (StatTrac)

Statistical data of motor use for operations monitoring, maintenance, and fault diagnosis is provided by the StatTrac feature on the 269 Plus. Using the keypad, the user can display the running hours and number of starts since last commissioning, the number of all trips, the number of specific types of trips, and the total Mega Watt-hours (with the meter option).
FLC Reduction is 8% @ 40% FLC.
968579A3.DWG
VFD Applications
The 269 Plus is capable of protecting motors fed from variable frequency drives (VFDs), including pulse width modulated (PWM) drives. The 269 Plus has been extensively tested with varying current waveforms and frequencies ranging from 15 to 300 Hz.
The 269 Plus has four output relay contacts. The trip relay acts as the main latched output relay. An alarm and two auxiliary output relays have been provided. The alarm relay and auxiliary 1 relay may be programmed for latched or unlatched modes. The trip, alarm and auxiliary 1 relays may be programmed fail-safe or non failsafe. Auxiliary 2 is set to latched and fail-safe. The 269 Plus also has an analog output which can be used to indicate one of motor thermal capacity used, motor current, hottest stator RTD, bearing RTD or CT secondary current.
Self Test
A continuous self check is maintained with or without the motor running, and an automatic alarm is provided in the event of a relay internal malfunction. The alarm triggers a status indication on the front panel and the signal is directed to a user selectable output relay.
Current Transformers (CTs)

The 269 Plus receives its current input from user installed 5 amp or 1 amp secondary CTs. The CT ratio is programmed into the 269 Plus using the keypad. Maximum CT ratio is 1500:1 or 1500:5. High resistance ground fault sensing can be accommodated using a 50:0.025A zero sequence CT. A 5 amp CT may be used for low resistance or solidly grounded systems.

Actual Values
The user can view actual values for: I average and individual phase I I I I I
currents RTD temperatures (hottest, individual, maximum) unbalance ratio (%In/Ip) ground leakage current thermal capacity remaining / estimated time to trip at present overload level motor load as a percent of full load
MPM Motor Protection Meter

This optional module provides additional measurement and output capabilities to the 269 Plus. It can only be used as an external option module with the 269 Plus. One MPM module is connected to each 269 Plus via a dedicated serial communication link.
222
Motor Protection

USER INTERFACES
Local Interface
The 269 Plus has a display and keypad to control the display and for local programming. The relay is shipped pre-programmed for some applications and only minor field program changes will be necessary to suit the particular motor. Access for programming is gained by placing a jumper across the access terminals. When programming is complete the jumper is removed, making the program secure. A software access code can also be programmed for added security. The 269 Plus has a non-volatile memory and programming remains intact upon loss of control power. In the event of control power loss following a lock-out trip, lock-out time is also saved.
DISPLAY 48 Character alpha-numeric backlit LCD display for viewing actual values, causes of alarms and trips, and programming setpoints STATUS INDICATORS 4 LEDs indicate when an output is activated. When an LED is lit the cause of the output relay operation will be shown on the display Service LED is lit during a selftest alarm HELP KEY Help key can be pressed at any time to provide additional information KEYPAD Used to select the display of actual values, causes of alarms, causes of trips, fault diagnosis and to program setpoints Rugged, corrosion and flame retardent case. Meets IP40X
FEATURES
Front View
TRIP ALARM AUX 1
AUX 2 SERVICE
ACTUAL VALUES
SET POINTS
HELP
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
Communications
The 269 Plus communicates with other computerized equipment using ModBus RTU protocol. Terminals for RS485 communications are provided on the rear of the relay. The 269 Plus has successfully interfaced with many PLCs, such as Modicon, Square D, Allen Bradley and GE Fanuc.
10
RESET CLEAR STORE
269 Plus Motor Management Relay
DRAWOUT CASE OPTION

The 269 Plus can be ordered with a drawout case option. All of the features available for the standard model are included with the drawout model. Shorting contacts across the CT inputs and main trip output relay contacts allow for removal of the relay for bench testing without shutdown of the motor. The relay can also be tested while remaining in the case using a test plug (XLA test plug) connected to test equipment.
CONTROL POWER 120/125 AC/DC, 240/250 AC/DC, 24 DC, 48 DC 4 OUTPUT RELAYS Programmable alarm and trip conditions activated by programmable setpoints, switch input, remote communication control
Rear View
NC
TRIP RELAY
NO
NC
ALARM RELAY
NO
NC
AUX1 RELAY
NO
NC
AUX2 RELAY
NO
CONTROL POWER L(+) G L2/N(-)
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
RTD 7-10 can be assigned to monitor motor and load bearings, and ambient temperature INPUTS/OUTPUTS I Spare input I MPM (meter) com port I Differential relay input I Speed switch input I Access input I Emergency restart I External reset I Analog output I RS485 com port RTD 1-3 Typically used for stator winding protection RTD 4-6 Typically used for stator winding protection
2 8 2 7 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 8 6 8 7
Internet: http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm
4 4 4 5 8 4 8 5 4 8 4 9 5 0 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 4 6 4 7 8 8
SPARE METER
RTD10 RTD9 RTD8 RTD7 RX- RX+ RS422 RTD3 RTD2 RTD1
+ + + + + + +
DIFF. SP.SW. ACCESS EM.RST. EX.RES + RS485
1 2 1 1 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 0 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 7 0 7 1
RTD6 RTD5 RTD4
:1
PHASE 1 COM
:5
:1
PHASE 2 COM
:5
:1
PHASE 3 COM
:5
GROUND FAULT 2000:1 COM :5
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
Phase and ground CT inputs Contrast dial

968178A5.CDR
Motor Protection
223
TYPICAL WIRING
120 / 240VAC 50 / 60Hz.
NOTES
START
269Plus TYPICAL WIRING

RTD10 CAN BE USED FOR AMBIENT SENSING ON THE 269 PLUS RELAY. CR CONTACTOR INTERPOSING RELAY.
STOP
FUSE
1). OUTPUT RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN :

CONTROL POWER APPLIED, NO TRIPS, NO ALARMS & FACTORY CONFIGURATIONS IN EFFECT. TRIP FAILSAFE ALARM NONFAILSAFE AUX.1 NONFAILSAFE AUX.2 FAILSAFE GROUND BUS
CR
ALARM
RTD ALARM
SELF TEST ALARM
2). USE TWISTED PAIR FOR CONNECTIONS TO

TERMINALS 44 THRU 59 ALSO 84 & 85.
ALTERNATE CONNECTION FOR COMMON SHIELD
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
L GND L2 / N
TRIP ALARM AUX. 1 OUTPUT RELAYS AUX. 2 INPUT POWER
3). ALL RTDs MUST BE OF THE SAME TYPE.
10
Available with 4 wire MOD
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 86 87 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shield
Com
RTD10
Shield
Com
RTD9
Shield
RTD8
Com
Shield
Com
RTD7
Rx Rx Shield
RS422
Com
RTD3
Shield
RTD2
Com
Shield
Com
RTD1
44 45 84 METER 85 48 DIFFERENTIAL RELAY 49 50 SPEED SWITCH 51 52 ACCESS 53 54 EMERGENCY RESTART 55 56 EXTERNAL RESET 57 ANALOG GND 58 OUT 59 46 RS485 47 Shield 88 Shield 60 GE Power Management 61 RTD6 269 Plus Com 62 Motor Management Relay 63 Shield 64 65 RTD5 Com 66 67 Shield 68 69 RTD4 Com 70 71
SPARE INPUT PHASE B C /T PHASE C C/ T GROUND C/ T
52b METER COM PORT EXTERNAL CONTACTS EXTERNAL CONTACTS JUMPER OR KEYSWITCH KEYSWITCH EXTERNAL RESET AMMETER OR PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER RS485 COM PORT GROUNDED AT MASTER ONLY
4). USE EITHER RESIDUAL OR ZERO SEQUENCE

CONNEC TION FOR GROUND FAULT INPUT. (NOTE: ZERO SEQUENCE CONNECTION IS RECOMMENDED)
5). USE TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR WHEN USING

THE 2000:1 INPUTTERMINALS 73 & 74 USE TWISTED PAIR WHEN USING THE 5 AMP INPUT TERMINALS 72 & 73
6). THE 2000:1 TERMINALS ( # 73 & 74)

ACCEPT INPUT ONLY FROM A 50:0.025A (2000:1 RATIO) MULTILIN CURRENT SENSOR. THE USE OF THIS CT IS RECOMMENDED FOR RESISTANCE GROUNDED SYSTEMS. TERMINALS 73 & 74 DO NOT ACCEPT INPUT FROM A 1 AMP SECONDARY CT.
PHASE A C /T
1A COM 5A 83 82 81
1A COM 5A 80 79 78
1A COM 5A 77 76 75
COM 5A 74 73 72
TWISTED SHIELDED
2000 :1
7). RTD SHIELD(S) SHOULD NOT BE GROUNDED

EXTERNALLY AS THEY ARE INTERNALLY CONNECTED TO THE RELAY GROUND TERMINAL
#42.
L1 A C A B C B L2
PHASE A CT
MOTOR
PHASE B CT PHASE C CT 50:0.025 GROUND CT
L3
ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CONNECTION

8). THE STARTER AUXILIARY B CONTACT
PHASE A C/T PHASE B C/T PHASE C C/ T GROUND C/ T
2000 COM 5A :1 74 73 72
1A COM 5A 83 82 81
1A COM 5A 80 79 78
1A COM 5A 77 76 75
SHOULD BE CONNECTED ACROSS TERMINALS (44 & 45). THE APPROPRIATE SETPOINT ON P.5 MUST BE PROGRAMMED TO DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE STARTER
L1 C A B C PHASE C CT A L2 B L3 PHASE B CT PHASE A CT
MOTOR
RESIDUAL GROUND CONNECTION

NOTE: Alternative wiring diagrams available
968565B1.DWG
(ALTERNATE)
224
Motor Protection

269 PLUS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION PHASE CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: Calibrated RMS, sample 2 ms Range: 0.05 to 12 x phase CT primary amps setpoint Full scale: 12 x phase CT primary amps setpoint Accuracy: 0.5% of full scale (0.05 to 2 x phase CT primary amps setpoint) 1.0% of full scale (over 2 x phase CT primary amps setpoint) Frequency: 20-400 Hz GROUND FAULT CURRENT INPUT Conversion: Calibrated RMS, sample time 2 ms Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary C.T.) 1.0 to 10.0 A, 50:0.025A (2000:1 ratio) Full Scale: 1 x G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary C.T.) 10 A (2000:1 C.T.) Accuracy: 4% of G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary C.T.) 0.3 A primary (2000:1 C.T.) Frequency: 20-400 Hz OVERLOAD CURVES Trip Time Accuracy: 1 sec up to 13 sec 8% of trip time over 13 sec Detection Level: 1% of primary CT amps RELAY LOCK-OUT TIME Accuracy: 1 min with control power applied 20% of total lock-out time with no control power applied UNBALANCE Display Accuracy: 2 percentage points of true negative sequence unbalance (In/Ip) EXPONENTIAL COOLDOWN Accuracy: 2% of true exponential POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Frequency: 50/60 Hz 24 VDC, Range: 20-30 VDC 48 VDC, Range: 30-55 VDC 120 VAC/125 VDC, Range: 80-150 VAC/VDC 240 VAC/250 VDC, Range: 160-300 VAC/VDC Maximum Power Consumption: 20 VA Holdup: 100 ms (@ 120 VAC/125VDC) 10 copper 100 nickel 120 nickel 100 platinum (specified with order) Display Accuracy: 2C Trip/alarm Setpoint Range: 0-200C Dead Band: 3C Maximum Lead Resistance: 25% of RTD 0C resistance INPUTS RTD INPUTS Sensor Types:
CT BURDEN DUE TO CONNECTION OF 269 PLUS RELAY

CT INPUT (A) 1A 4A 13 A 5A 20 A 65 A 5A 10 A 0.025 A 0.1 A 0.5 A BURDEN (VA) 0.04 0.5 4.8 0.06 1 8.5 0.08 0.3 0.435 3.29 50 (m) 43 31 28 2.4 2.5 2.01 3 3 696 329 200
Phase CT (1 A)
Phase CT (5 A) G/F CT (5 A)
G/F CT (50:0.025)
OUTPUTS RELAY CONTACTS

VOLTAGE DC Resistive 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 120 VAC 250 VAC 120 VAC 250 VAC MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A MAKE/CARRY 0.2 SEC 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A Form C NO/NC Silver Alloy 5 VDC, 100 mA BREAK 10 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 5A 0.25 A 0.15 A 10 A 10 A 4A 3A
ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature Range: Humidity: Altitude: Pollution Degree: TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength:
-25C to +60C Up to 95%, noncondensing Up to 2000m 2
DC Inductive (L/R = 7 ms) AC Resistive
AC Inductive PF=0.4 Configuration: Contact Material: Minimal permissible load:
ANALOG CURRENT OUTPUT (4-20 MA STANDARD)

Output Max Load Max Output 0-1 mA 2000 1.01 mA PROGRAMMABLE 0-20 mA 300 20.2 mA 4-20 mA 300 20.2 mA
Accuracy: Polarity: Isolation: Update Time:
1% of full scale reading Terminal 58 () must be at ground potential (ie. output is not isolated) Non-isolated, active source 250 ms max
2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, power supply Insulation Resistance: IEC255-5, 500 VDC Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15 W Transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -25C to +60C ambient Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle Dust/Moisture: NEMA 12/IP53 PACKAGING Weight: 8.6 lbs (3.9 kg) Shipping Dimensions: 16" x 11" x 7" (40.6 cm x 27.9 cm x 43.2 cm) APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured to an ISO9001 Certified Program UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Approved under LR41286 : Conforms to IEC 947-1, 1010-1 Conforms to EN55011/CISPR11, EN50082-2
10
PRODUCTION TESTS DIELECTRIC STRENGTH TEST 2200 VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 1 sec Ground (Terminal 42) to Output Contacts (Terminals 29 to 40) Control Power (Terminals 41 & 43) Current Transformer Inputs (Terminals 72 to 83)
DIMENSIONS
269 Plus
7.57" (192) 0.50" (13) 4.25" (108)
Inches (mm)
4.80" (122)
6.85" (174) 6.125" (156) (4) 0.218" DIA (6)
TRIP ALARM
11.375" (289)
AUX. 2 SERVICE
ACTUAL VALUES
SET POINTS
HELP
CUTOUT
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
RESET
CLEAR
STORE
FRONT VIEW
MOUNTING SURFACE
SIDE VIEW
REAR VIEW
PANEL CUTOUT
968540A8.DWG
269 Plus Drawout
9.00" (229)
8.125" (206,4) MOUNTING SURFACE

30 33 36 38(40) 42
4.062" (103,2)
29 31 34(32) 37(35) 39
10.875" (276)
AUX. 1
10.20" (259)
10.45" (265)
HOLE LEGEND 0.312" Dia.

TRIP ALARM
15.50" (394)
AUX. 2 SERVICE
ACTUAL VALUES
SET POINTS
HELP
14.125" (359)
12.0" (304,8)
6.0" (152,4)
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
PAGE
LINE
VALUE
RESET
CLEAR
STORE
81(83)
78(80)
75(77)
73
41
82
79
76
74(72)
43
0.70" (18)
FRONT VIEW
7.55" (192)
SIDE VIEW
7.125" (181)
REAR VIEW
3.562" (90,5) 7.125" (181)

CUTOUT
WEIGHT: 26.4 Lb ( 12 Kg ) FULLY PACKAGED. 20.75 Lb ( 9.5 Kg ) UNPACKAGED.
Motor Protection
7.063" (179,4)
965068A4.DWG
14.125" (358,8)
AUX. 1
0.218" Dia. (5 PLACES)
225
Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions shall include: I phase overload standard curves (51) I overload by custom programmable
curve (51)
ORDERING
269 *
269 269PLUS
*
SV D/O
*
269 Motor management relay (SEE NOTE ) 269Plus Motor management relay
Standard version Drawout version Phase CT 1 Ground CT (required for D/O only) :5 2000:1 :5 :5 :1 2000:1 :1 :5 Relay fail safe code2 (required for D/O only) Trip Alarm Aux1 Aux 2 FS NFS NFS FS NFS FS NFS FS FS FS NFS FS NFS NFS FS FS FS NFS FS FS NFS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS NFS NFS NFS FS Relay contact arrangement3 (required for D/O only) Alarm Aux1 Aux2 N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.C. N.C. 100 Ohm platinum RTD 10 Ohm copper RTD 100 Ohm nickel RTD 120 Ohm nickel RTD 120 AC/125 DC control voltage 240 AC/250 DC control voltage 24 DC control voltage 48 DC control voltage
I I2t modeling (49) I stator overtemperature/bearing I I I

overtemperature with 10 independent RTD inputs (49) negative sequence unbalance/ single phase (46) phase reversal (47) starts per hour and time between starts (48) short circuit (50) ground fault (50G/50N/51 G/51 N) undercurrent (37) mechanical jam/stall
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 100P 10C 100N 120N 120 240 24DC 48DC

1 2
10
I I I I Management functions shall include: I statistical data I pre-trip data I ability to learn, display and integrate
critical parameters to maximize motor protection I communication with external devices using a RS485 port and ModBus RTU protocol I a keypad and 48 character LCD display
A metering option shall be available as a separate unit that communicates with the relay which may be field installed without modification to the relay. The metering option can be used with any relay where diagnosis or load measurements are required and shall also provide isolated analog outputs for average RMS amps, kW, kvar and PF. With the meter option, the relay shall be capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatt, kilovar, power factor, frequency and MWhr. In addition undervoltage (27) and low power factor alarm and trip levels shall be field programmable.
For CT ratings greater than 1500:5, consult the factory. FS=Fail safe; A fail safe relay is one that changes state when control power is applied to the 269 Plus. NFS= Non fail safe; A non fail safe relay is one that remains in its shelf state when control power is applied to the 269 Plus. N.O. and N.C. are defined as open and closed contacts of an output relay with control power applied to the 269 Plus and no trips or alarms are present.
EXAMPLE: For a standard 269 Plus: 269PLUS-SV-100P-125DC For a 269 Plus Drawout: 269PLUS-D/O-3-4-7-100P-120AC
Available Enhancements
515 Blocking and Test Module MPM Motor Protection Meter RS232/RS485 Convertor Box or F485 Communication Convertor ERSW Emergency Restart Keyswitch
NOTE for 269 model:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. No communications 8 RTDs vs. 10 No differential input No speed switch input No RTD bias No custom curve Limited statistical data Limited learned data
Modifications
269/269Plus with MOD #239 Remote Display Both 269 and 269 Plus Motor Management Relays are available with a remote display. This special modification should be ordered only when physical limitations make it impossible to properly mount a standard 269/269Plus (i.e. Westinghouse Ampguard switchgear). The connection between the display unit and control unit is via a shielded ribbon cable, which may be ordered as 61 cm (24"), 106 cm (42"), or 198 cm (78") in length.

See pages 15 - 18.
Motor Management Relay is a registered trademark of GE Power Management.
226
Motor Protection
Continuous metering of motors via a 269 Motor Management Relay .
MPM
Motor Protection Meter
Metered data displayed by 269
I I I I I I I
3 phase voltage Average voltage Power factor Real power (kW) Reactive power (kvar) Power consumption (MWh) Frequency (Hz)
10
Protection provided by 269

I I I I I
kvar limit Voltage phase reversal Under/overvoltage alarm/trip Power factor alarm/trip (lead/lag) MPM communication failure alarm
Inputs/Outputs
I
DESCRIPTION
The MPM provides additional metering capabilities such as three phase voltage, pf, real power, reactive power, Wh, and frequency for the GE Power Management 269 or 269 Plus Motor Management Relay. All setpoint programming for the MPM is accomplished via the 269 over the serial communications link. Due to the compact size of the MPM, it is especially practical for applications where mounting space is limited. The MPM is a black box unit which uses serial communications to transmit / receive data to and from the 269. Therefore, it can be mounted inside the switchgear or in a location where there is more room available. A single twisted pair communication wire is routed to the 269. To obtain optimum accuracy metering class CTs should be employed. But in applications where mounting space and/or cost is an issue, the relaying class CTs used with the 269 can be connected in series with the MPM. The MPM comes complete with four isolated 4-20 mA (A20 option) or 0-1 mA (A1 option) analog outputs which are permanently configured to provide an output based average current, real power (kW), reactive power (kvar), and power factor respectively. The MPM also comes complete with a powered form-C failsafe output relay. This relay can be used to indicate if the MPM is on or off. The relay will also change state if a self diagnostic failure is detected on the MPM.
I I I
Four 0-1 mA (A1 option) or 4-20 mA (A20 option) outputs of: I Average current (Amps) I 3 phase real power (kW) I 3 phase reactive power (kvar) I Power factor Failsafe form-C dry contact output relay Isolated RS485 comm port VT wiring configuration selection
Other Features
I I
AC/DC universal power supply Compact size
GE Power Management
227

TYPICAL WIRING
ALTERNATIVE CT/VT CONNECTIONS
3 WIRE DELTA/60 VOLTAGE 2 VTs LINE A B

B
LOAD A B C
4 WIRE WYE/120 VOLTAGE 3 VTs LINE A B C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT
ANY VOLTAGE LOAD A
PHASE C CT
C N
V Tan
V Tbn
V Tcn
VTab VTcb
OBSERVE CT & VT POLARITY

1 2 3 4 9
5A
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM
V1 V2 V3 VN VOLTAGE INPUTS
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
CURRENT INPUTS
Perferrred 4 wire configuration
HI OPTION
4 WIRE WYE DIRECT/120 VOLTAGE NO VT LINE A B C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT 600V MAX LOAD A B C N
90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC 50/60 Hz LO OPTION 20-60 VDC 20-48 VAC 50/60 Hz
9
5A
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
V1 V2 V3 VN VOLTAGE INPUTS
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
CURRENT INPUTS
10
1 V1 2 3 4 VN 9
5A
7
USE HEAVY GAUGE WIRE
L + N_
SAFETY GROUND FILTER GROUND
CONTROL POWER
6 5
GE Power Management
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
V2 V3 VOLTAGE INPUTS
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
MPM
Motor Protection Meter
USE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR WIRE
CURRENT INPUTS
269/269Plus RELAY
SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS RS485

4 WIRE WYE/60 VOLTAGE 2 VTs (2-1/2 ELEMENTS) LINE A B C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT ANY VOLTAGE LOAD A B C N
269
45 NO 44 COM 43 NC
+ _
48 47
85 84
+ -
METER
OUTPUT RELAY
COM 46
VTa n
VTcn
AMP ANALOG OUT

1 V1 2 3 4 VN 9
5A
1+ 2+ 3+ 4+
28 27 26 25 TO PLCs, RTUs METERs OR SCADA SYSTEM ETC.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
KW KVARS PF
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
CURRENT INPUTS
*Note: Accurate only with balanced phase voltages
COM 24 SHIELD 21
ANALOG OUTPUTS OPTION A20 A1 TYPE 4-20mA 0-1mA
3 WIRE DIRECT/120 VOLTAGE NO VTs LINE A B C PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT
600V MAX
SWITCH INTPUTS
LOAD L N
33 32
SW COM
SW1
31 SW2
CONNECTION DELTA
1 V1 2 3 4 VN 9
5A
MPM CONFIGURATION SW1 SW2 OPEN CLOSED OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSED
NOTES: 1) Relay contact state shown with control power not applied.
CAUTION: USE HRC FUSES FOR VT PRIMARY TO ENSURE ADEQUATE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 WIRE, 3VT 4 WIRE, 2VT
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
CURRENT INPUTS
998108A4.cdr
228
Motor Protection

MPM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
METERING CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: CT Input: Burden: Overload: Full Scale: Frequency: MEASURED VALUES
PARAMETER VOLTAGE CURRENT kW kvar kWh POWER FACTOR FREQUENCY ACCURACY (% OF DISPLAY) 1% 1% 2% 2% 2% 2% 0.2%
True RMS, 64 samples/cycle 1 A and 5 A secondary 0.2 VA 20 x CT for 1 sec 100 x CT for 0.2 sec 150% of CT up to 32nd harmonic
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Input: 90-300 VDC/70-265 VAC 50/60 Hz(HI option) 20-60 VDC/20-48 VAC 50/60Hz(LO option) Power: 10 VA nominal 20 VA maximum Holdup: 100 ms typical
RESOLUTION 1V 1A 1 kW 1 kvar 1 MWh 0.01 0.1 Hz
RANGE 20% OF VT TO 100% OF VT 1% OF CT TO 150% OF CT 0 - 65535 kW 0 - 65535 kvar 0 - 65535 MWh 0.0 - 1.0 20.00 - 70.00 Hz
OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUTS Accuracy:
2% of full scale
Max Load Max Output Isolation: OUTPUT RELAY
OUTPUT 0-1 mA (A1 Option) 4-20 mA (A20 Option) 2400 600 1.1 mA 21 mA 50 V isolated, active source
MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 MAKE/CARRY 0.2 sec 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 FORM C NO/NC SILVER ALLOY
TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength: 2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, VTs, power supply Insulation Resistance: IEC255 - 5 500 VDC Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 Impulse / High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15w Transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -10C to +60C ambient Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle
VOLTAGE
BREAK 5 0.5 0.3 5 0.25 0.15 5 5 5 5
INPUTS VOLTAGE INPUTS Conversion: Input Range: Full Scale: Burden: Frequency:
30 VDC RESISTIVE 125 VDC 250 VDC 30 VDC INDUCTIVE (Vr=7ms) RESISTIVE 125 VDC 250 VDC 120 VAC 250 VAC 120 VAC 250 VAC INDUCTIVE PF = 0.4
True RMS, 64 samples/cycle 20 - 250 VAC 150/600 VAC autoscaled <0.1 VA up to 32nd harmonic
PACKAGING Shipping Box: 81/2" x 6"" x 6" (L x H x D) 215 mm x 152 mm x 152 mm (L x H x D) Ship Weight: 5 lbs / 2.3 kg
COMMUNICATIONS COM1 Type: RS485 2 wire, half duplex, isolated Baud Rate: 1,200 Protocol: 269
APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured to an ISO9001 registered program UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Recognized under LR41286 : Conforms to IEC 947-1 *Specifications subject to change without notice.
CONFIGURATION CONTACT MATERIAL
10
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
MOUNTING SURFACE
REAR VIEW
4.07 (103)
4.08 (104)
7.50 (191)
MOUNTING DETAIL
1.73 (44) Inches (mm) (6) - 0.218 DIA. HOLES (6.00) 7.24 (184) 3.47 (88)
998100A2.dwg
Motor Protection
229

FEATURES
ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 isolated 0-1mA(A1 option) or 4-20 mA (A20 option) outputs assigned to average current, real power, reactive power and power factor.
21 NC NC 24 25 26 27 28 NC NC 31 32 33 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 43 44 45 46 47 48 NC NC NC
SWITCH INPUTS
1 2
For VT connection selection
MPM
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING 250 VAC 10A RESISTIVE 1/4HP 250VAC 1/2HP 125VAC
MADE IN CANADA
MODEL NO.: MPM-HI-A20 CONTROL VOLTAGE: CUSTOMER TAG No.:

90-300VDC 20VA 70-265VAC 50/60HZ 20VA
VERSION:
OUTPUT RELAY
One form-c failsafe output relay
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
NC
NC
NC
COMMUNICATIONS
RS485, isolated, communications port to transmit and receive data from the 269
FUSE ACCESS
Control power fuse accessible under sliding door.
10
COMPACT DESIGN CT INPUTS:

3 isolated phase CT inputs 1 Amp or 5 Amp secondary
AC/DC CONTROL POWER

Universal control power 90-300 VDC/70-265 VAC (HI option) 20-60 VDC/20-48 VAC (LO option)
Panel or chassis mount replaces many discrete components with one standard model.
998109A6.cdr
VT INPUTS:
0-600V, 3 wire or 4 wire voltage inputs. Direct (up to 600V) or VT (>600V for isolation) connections.
GROUND:
Separate safety and filter ground All inputs meet C37.90 and IEC 801-2 EMI, SWC, RFI interference immunity.
ORDERING
MPM
MPM
*
LO HI
*
Basic unit, all current/voltage/power measurements, 1 269 comm port, failsafe form-C output relay 25-60 VDC, 20-48 VAC 50/60 Hz 90-300 VDC, 70-265 VAC 50/60 Hz Four 0-1 mA analog outputs Four 4-20 mA analog outputs

See pages 15 - 18.
A1 A20
230
Motor Protection
Starting protection, synchronization and control for synchronous motors.
SPM
Applications
I I
Synchronous Motor Protection & Control
Collector-ring synchronous motors Brushless type synchronous motors
Control
I I I I I
Field application PF regulation maximizes efficiency Reluctance torque synchronizing Re-synchronizing Auto loading/unloading
10
Protection
I
DESCRIPTION
The SPM controls starting, synchronizing, and protection of collector-ring or brushless type synchronous motors. The SPM's control functions for starting the synchronous motor include accurate sensing of motor speed and rotor angle, which allows the unit to apply excitation at optimum speed and angle. This permits closer matching of the motor to the load. Optimum application of excitation also reduces power system disturbance which occurs when the motor goes through a complete slip cycle with the field energized. In addition, the SPM has the ability to take advantage of the extended stall time of a reduced voltage start. It also responds with the proper application of excitation in the event that the motor synchronizes on reluctance torque. The SPM provides the functions necessary to protect the motor during start up and in the event of asynchronous operation. During start up and re-starting the SPM prevents overheating of the cage winding. To protect against asynchronous operation the motor power factor is monitored. Two modes of pull-out protection can trip the motor if resynchronization does not occur after a programmed time delay. Motor run time and the number and type of trips are recorded. The SPM has an optional power factor regulator which has five adjustable set points that can be changed while the motor is running for convenient regulator tune-up. A backlit LCD display and keys allow user configurable setting ranges to meet many applications. The unit comes in a compact S1 drawout case. The SPM can be applied as part of a complete synchronous motor controller. This consists of four parts. A main device switches the motor on and off the power system. Multi-function digital relays (such as the GE 469) provide stator protection. DC field protection and control is provided by the SPM. The control assembly is completed by the field contactor and field discharge resistor.
I I I I I I I I
DC field current loss for collector ring synchronous motors Exciter current loss for brushless type synchronous motors DC field voltage check Incomplete sequence Field winding overtemperature Power factor (pull-out) Stall/acceleration Restart lockout Reduced voltage starting
Features
Automatic phase rotation correction Regulator tuning mode True RMS metering with DFT filtering Motor run time Number and types of motor trips Statistics for improved maintenance Built in self diagnostics 32 character LCD display Compact S1 drawout case ModBus RTU communications over an RS485 link SPMPC program
GE Power Management
231
SPM Syncronous Protection/Control

PROTECTION FEATURES
Stall Protection
An important protective function of the SPM is to prevent overheating of the cage winding during both starting and running out of synchronization conditions. For brushless motors stall/acceleration protection is derived from the stator current inputs. Stall protection is enabled when motor is started and disabled when power factor protection is enabled. Examples of the protection characteristics are shown in the following graph.
Typical cage heating protection for brushless motors
2000 1500
Typical cage heating protection characteristics for collector ring motors

200
150
Incomplete Sequence Protection

If the motor does not synchronize within the programmed time setpoint, the relay will trip the motor.
100
80
60 50
Exciter DC Voltage Protection

Connecting the exciter output to SPM terminals VE+ and VE- through a voltage divider network (VDN) will provide exciter voltage check protection. This function is useful for equipment that have exciters energized prior to starting the motor.
Run Time Allowable Zero Speed Stall Time
40
30 25 20 15
10 8 6 5 4
3.
00
Field Winding Overtemperature

This function emulates a resistance temperature device (RTD) on the field windings. An RTD device's resistance is temperature dependent. As the temperature increases, the resistance of the RTD increases. In this case, the RTD behavior is emulated by looking at field voltage and current and then determining the field ohms. To utilize this feature a separate PG2SPM or PG4SPM accessory package must be ordered.
3
2
1.5 1
A
1000
900
Stall Time - 30 Sec Locked Rotor - 6XFLC Stall Time - 10 Sec Locked Rotor - 6XFLC Stall Time - 2 Sec Locked Rotor - 6XFLC
10
20
30
40
50
60
2. 05
1. 46
1.0
B C
800
700
10
600 500 400
After the motor synchronizes, the SPM tracks motor cooling using a 20 minute time constant. This prevents motor abuse caused by frequent starting.
DC Field Current Loss Protection

300
200 150
This feature trips the motor if the field current drops below the programmed setpoint after the motor has synchronized. To utilize this feature a separate PG2SPM or PG4SPM accessory package must be ordered.
Trip Time (seconds)
100 90
80 70
Reduced Voltage Starting

The SPM has the ability to temporarily extend the stall time during a reduced voltage start. This allows the motor to accelerate to synchronous speed in a longer time period than would be allowed with a full voltage start.
These curves show how the trip characteristic of the amortisseur winding protection is adjusted for reduced voltage starts
200 150
60
50
40
B
30
20
15
10 9 8 7
6
100 80 60 50 40
5 4
3
Run Time Zero Speed Stall Time
30 25 20 15 10 8 6 Voltage 5 50% 4 3
2
2 .8 .9 1
1.5
7 8
10
Trip Current (Multiples of Programmed Full Load Current)

701762A6.cdr
232
Motor Protection
For collector ring motors speed is determined from the frequency of the induced field current. At less than synchronous speed the following typical cage heating protection characteristics are used.
1.5 1
70
80
90 100
701761A8.cdr
% Synchronous Speed

AC BUS
48 86 94
Stator Protection (469)
SPM
IAC VAC
50
55
Calibrator
IDC
37
DC CT MOTOR DC SUPPLY
VDC
27 48 94
95 56
26F
95
CLUTCH COUPLING
LOAD
96
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS

Line
65% 80% 90%

100%
26F 27 37 48 50 55 56 86 94 95 96
20
Field overtemperature Undervoltage Undercurrent or underpower Incomplete sequence Instantaneous overcurrent Power factor Field application Lock out Tripping Reluctance torque sync. / resync. Autoloading relay
701767A9.cdr
10
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
701760A8.cdr
% Synchronous Speed

CONTROL FEATURES
Power Factor (Pull out) Protection
The SPM provides pull out protection for synchronous motors operating in either the generating or motoring modes. The SPM provides power factor settings and also displays the measured leading/lagging power factor. The power factor regulation option enables field forcing in advance of a pull-out condition. Motor pull-out protection is provided by a circuit which monitors the power factor and has a built in time delay to prevent inadvertent tripping on transients. Two modes of pull-out protection are available, resync mode and ride-thru mode. These modes will be initiated if the lagging power factor drops below the programmed set point, or if a line current surge occurs which is above four times the motor full load current. Resync mode operation will cause the Field Application Relay (FAR) to remove the motor field excitation. The motor will continue to run with the field removed for the programmed power factor delay time, and if resynchronization does not occur within this time the Trip relay will operate and the motor will stop. In ride-thru mode the motor field excitation is not removed immediately. Instead, the SPM allows the motor to run for the power factor delay time. If the power factor dip or line current surge persists the trip relay will operate and the motor will stop.
Reluctance Torque Synchronizing

A synchronous motor which is lightly loaded and connected to a low inertia load may pull in to synchronization before the rotor poles are externally magnetized. This is known as reluctance torque synchronizing. When a full load is applied the rotor will begin to slip since the torque developed is only a fraction of rated torque under separate excitation. Furthermore under this condition the rotor can be polarized in any direct axis alignment as opposed to external excitation which forces only one orientation of the direct axis. The SPMs field application control responds with proper application of excitation in the event that a motor synchronizes on reluctance torque.

SPM Displays and Messages
The unit contains an LCD display for programming prompts, displaying the reason for SPM trip operation, and readout of the desired motor running parameters. When the field contactor closes the parameters displayed are line amperes, field amperes, and motor power factor. Once the motor has synchronized the parameters displayed can include power factor, line current, field volts, field current, and field ohms. The SPM also stores motor run time and the number and types of motor trips. Trip, Field Application (FAR) and FCX relay states may also be monitored.
Self Tests and Diagnostics
Power Factor Regulation

Power factor regulation is a DC control signal output used to control a variable SCR exciter output. This replaces the standard power factor analog signal output. This option is not recommended for brushless applications due to instability problems arising from the long time constant of the rotating exciter field. The regulator has five adjustable set-points that can be changed while the motor is running to facilitate regulator tune-up. They are: I PF setpoint - range from 0.9 lagging,
through 1.0 to 0.0 leading
10
I reg output - upper limit of the control

voltage output signal I reg gain - adjusted for optimum regulator performance I reg stability - time adjustment to help compensate for instability I reg floor - lower limit of the control voltage output signal
Power factor regulation - functional block diagram
Main Contactor A B C MOTOR Field Field Contactor SCR Proportional Exciter DC Supply to Motor Field
The SPM has built-in test diagnostics to indicate that the relay is operating properly prior to start-up. The SPM's separate test mode allows the user to verify the following: Trip relay contacts, system test, squirrel cage protection tests, synchronization and power factor test. Upon entering the test mode the SPM de-energizes the trip contact and upon exiting the test mode the trip contact is energized. System test performs a complete check on internal memory, input-output devices and other system functions. The squirrel cage protection test generates a test frequency internally into the Squirrel cage protection program. Synchronization and power factor tests generate an internal slip frequency into the synchronizing circuitry. This test frequency simulates an accelerating motor. When the set point is reached the FAR picks up followed by the FCX. Then the SPM automatically tests the power factor circuitry by internally generating a power factor signal. Checks are performed on the power factor setpoint and the resync mode.
Starting and Synchronizing

For collector ring motors the SPM detects the proper rotor speed and angle and determines the correct time to close the field application relay based on the percent synchronous slip setpoint. This applies excitation to the motor field and opens up the field discharge resistor loop. For brushless motors the voltage is applied to the exciter after a preset programmable time elapses. Power factor pullout protection is then enabled. A contact (FCX) is also provided to signal automatic motor loading.
Voltage Input
Current Input
PF Detection
PF Feedback
PF Regulator
Control Signal
SPM
PF Reg Setpoint Output Reg Reg Reg Gain Stability Floor
701754A5.cdr
Motor Protection
233

INPUTS & OUTPUTS
FIELD VOLTAGE INPUT: the induced field voltage VF+ and VF- are connected across the external discharge resistor via the VDN to monitor induced AC field voltage. This input provides the instantaneous value of motor slip. EXCITER VOLTAGE INPUT: VE+ and VEterminals are connected to the exciter via the VDN to monitor DC exciter voltage. EXCITER CURRENT INPUT: the field current IE+ and IE- terminals are connected to the DC field via a DCCT and a calibration module (ordered separately) to detect field loss. MOTOR LINE CURRENT: inputs I3S, I3T, and for brushless the additional I2S and I2T terminals, are connected to the system current transformers. MOTOR 'ON' INPUT: MX1 to MX2 accept a normally closed dry electrical interlock that opens when the motor is energized and closes when the motor is de-energized. REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING INPUT: NX1 and NX2 accept a normally open dry electrical interlock that closes when the motor reaches full voltage during a reduced inrush start. CONTROL POWER: the SPM has an AC power supply with a range from 85 to 265 VAC. If control voltage excursions occur outside these ranges an external stabilizing transformer should be used. This will necessitate the use of the optional separate power factor reference voltage inputs. POWER FACTOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE: PF reference voltage derives from control power, V1 and V2. The SPM also has optional inputs for separately powered PF reference voltage, V1EXT and V2EXT. Effective range 85 to 265 VAC. POWER FACTOR ANALOG SIGNAL OUTPUT: This signal is a zero to ten volts DC signal corresponding to motor power factor. Zero volts represents zero lagging power factor, five volts represents unity power factor, and ten volts represents zero leading power factor. A one volt change corresponds to an 18 degree phase shift. If power factor regulation is provided, this analog signal output is replaced with the PF regulation output. POWER FACTOR CONTROL SIGNAL: This option uses the PF analog output to supply a 0 - 10V control signal to a variable SCR exciter. TRIP RELAY: terminals TRIP1 and TRIP2 are connected to a failsafe normally open contact. This contact closes on relay power up and opens on a trip condition to de-energize the motor. FAR RELAY: Field application relay terminal points FAR1 and FAR2 is a normally open contact. This contact closes to apply DC to the motor field to pull motor into synchronization. FCX RELAY: The FCX (field contactor auxiliary) relay picks up a setpoint time delay after the FAR relay picks up and is used to signal external systems to auto load/unload the motor. RS485 PORT: ModBus RTU protocol is provided with baud rates variable from 300 to 115,200 bps. Allows for user connection to a DCS, SCADA or PLC system.
Software
The SPMPC software that is provided with each SR469 runs under Windows on a personal computer. All information that may be accessed from the SPM may also be displayed on a PC. These include actual values, setpoints, status, trending. Graphical display of actual values over time may be particularly useful in troubleshooting situations. The SPMPC program uses a simple point and click interface. Setpoint files for each motor may be stored, printed for verification, and downloaded to the SPM for error free setpoint entry. The entire SPM manual is included in the program in the form of a help file. This allows for quick access to information while programming the relay.
10
Communications Port
The SPM is equipped with one communications port. A rear RS485 port could be used for remote communications, or for connection to a DCS, SCADA, or PLC. The port supports ModBus RTU protocol. The RS485 port is variable from 300-115,000 bps. The communication port may be active simultaneously without adversely affecting response time.
234
Motor Protection

STANDARD FEATURES
Front View
GE KEY Used to enter or exit the different modes of the SPM. These are Standby, Test, Statistics, and Programming modes.
SPM Sync. Protection/Control
QUICK RELEASE TABS Used to remove display for easy access to drawout.
LOCKING PROVISION A wire lead seal can be used to prevent unauthorized removal of relay.
LCD DISPLAY Backlit 32 character display for setpoints, actual values and status. Programmable auto scan sequence for unattended operation.
ENTER KEY Used to make a selection or acts as an enter key.
SCROLL KEYS Used to scroll through the various menus and change setpoint parameter values.
DISPLAY FUNCTION MENU Menu of all accessible setpoints and actual values for easy reference. CONTRAST DIAL Lightens or darkens display.
10
PULLDOWN DOOR Hides menu when not in use.
Rear View
S1 CASE Compact S1 rugged metal/bakelite case. Fits standard cutout.
TERMINAL BLOCK A RELAYS TRIP: Normally open, failsafe trip relay. FAR: Field application relay. FCX: Autoloading of the motor. INPUTS EXCITER: Exciter voltage inputs. Connected via DCCT and CM. FIELD: DC field voltage input. REDUCED VOLTAGE: Contact input for reduced voltage starting. Motor ON input. Exciter current input. Power Factor reference voltage (for separately powered option). OUTPUTS POWER FACTOR: 0-10 VDC analog signal.
RS485 GND
FCX N/O
FCX N/C
RS485-
V1EXT
FAR1
TRP1
NX2
VE+
MX
VF-
IE+ IENC
TRP2
NC NC
N+ N-
RS485+
V2EXT
FAR2
FCX COM
NX1
MOTOR LINE CURRENT 2 Phase current inputs. Accept #8 wire.
MX1
VF+
VE-
NC
CONTROL POWER 85 TO 265 VAC. 701750AF .cdr
Motor Protection
235

TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL BRUSHLESS MOTOR CONNECTION
A B C
T1
EF1
T2
T3
SYNC MOTOR
FIELD
EF2
NOMENCLATURE
CM DCCT M OL T1, T2, T3 FIELD CURRENT CALIBRATION MODULE DIRECT CURRENT CT MAIN CONTACTOR OVERLOAD RELAY MOTOR TERMINALS OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
DCCT VOLTAGE DIVIDER NETWORK (VDN)
B1 B2 B3 B4
I2S
I2T I3S
I3T
EXCITER/FIELD VOLTAGE
VF+ VFVE+ VE-
A18
A19
FC (E+) (E-) (V+) (V-)
NOTES:
1) Relays shown with no control power applied to relay 2)
PHASE CURRENT INPUT
FC
A21
A20
*Trip Relay closed during normal operation
GE Power Management
FIELD CONTACTOR

CM 7 CM 8 EXCITER VEXCITER V+
TYPICAL COLLECTOR RING MOTOR CONNECTION

SUPPLY A
T1
T2
F1
SYNC MOTOR
FC
B C
PHASE C
T3
FIELD
10
F2
FC
FIELD DISCHARGE RESISTOR
B1
B2
B3
B4
VOLTAGE DIVIDER NETWORK (VDN) V+

F
FIELD CONTACTOR
FC
EXCITER/FIELD VOLTAGE
I2S
CONTROL POWER . REF VOLT.
I2T I3S
I3T
A18 A19 A21 A20
(+)
(R1) (F2) (V+) (V-)
PHASE CURRENT INPUT
B9 B10
V1
V2
VF
( )
(E+) (E-)
VE+ VE
G1 CHASSIS GROUND B8
FILTER GROUND
GE Power Management

OL
A22 TRIP1 A23 TRIP2
MX REDUCED VOLTAGE MONITOR
DIGITAL INPUTS
*TRIP
OUTPUT RELAYS
MX1 MX2
A11
M A12
A9
A10
EXCITER
MX STOP START
M
FCX A13 N/O
FIELD CONTACTOR AUX. (FCX)
MAIN AUXILIARY
A14 COM
NX2 NX1
FCX A15 N/C RM EXCITER CONTACTOR

A6 A7
ON REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTERS, REMOVE JUMPER AND CONNECT A NO. AUX CONTACT FROM THE FINAL STEP CONTACTOR HERE.
RM TO EXCITER POWER SUPPLY TO PLC OR COMPUTER
A1
A2
FIELD APPLICATION (FAR)
RS485
FAR 1 FAR 2
COMM A3 GND
POWER FACTOR OUTPUT
FIELD CURRENT
OPTIONAL REF. VOLT.
FC FIELD CONTACTOR
N+
N-
A17
IE -
I E+ V1EXT V2EXT
A4
A16
PF ANALOG OUTPUT OR PF REG CONTROL SIG OUTPUT (IF PF REGULATOR OPTION)
A24 A25 A5
6 1 3 240 VAC 120 VAC
5 2 4 7 8
USED FOR SEPARATELY SUPPLIED POWER FACTOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE (OPTIONAL CONNECTION)
FIELD CURRENT CALIBRATION MODULE (CM)
BRUSHLESS & COLLECTOR RING - 701756AN.cdr COLLECTOR RING - 701751.DWG BRUSHLESS - 701753.DWG
236
Motor Protection

HARDWARE
Space Saving Case
The SPM is supplied in a compact S1 drawout case. The drawout case allows the unit to be removed without unwiring the rear terminals.
Calibration Module (CM)

This optional accessory provides proper AC excitation to the DCCT and provides calibration adjustment to obtain correct field amp readings. The CM is required for field current and/or field overtemperature features.
The CM calibration module is included with the optional PG2SPM or PG4SPM overtemperature/ current loss accessory package
Direct Current Current Transformer (DCCT)

The optional DCCT detects DC field current. The DCCT is required for field current and/or field overtemperature features. 200A and 400A versions are available. The DCCT works in conjunction with the CM and both are available in a separate accessory package. See order code for more details.
DCCT is included with the optional PG2SPM or PG4SPM overtemperature/current loss accessory package
Voltage Divider Network (VDN)

The VDN is provided to connect the SPM to field and/or exciter voltages.
The VDN is included as a standard accessory
10
SPM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 5 - 2000 CT Secondary: 5 Conversion Range: 0.05 - 6 x CT Frequency: 5 0 / 60 Hz Accuracy: @ <2 x CT 0.5% of 2 x CT true RMS @ 2 x CT 1% of 6 x CT true RMS MONITORING POWER FACTOR Range: Time Delay: Accuracy: POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Input: 85 - 265 VAC @ 48 - 60 Hz Power: 10 VA nominal Holdup: 100 ms typical @ 120 VAC ENVIRONMENTAL Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature: -20C to +70C Storage Temperature: -40C to +85C PACKAGING Shipping Box: Ship Weight: TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength: Per IEC 255-5 and ANSI/IEEE C37.90 2.0 kV for 1 minute from relays, CTs, VTs power supply to Safety Ground IEC255-5 500Vdc, from relays, CTs, VTs, power supply to Safety Ground ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5kV/1MHz) ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5 kV/10 ns) Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance, Class III Level IEC 255-5 0.5 Joule 5 kV C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Sinusoidal Vibration 8.0 g for 72 hrs
Insulation Resistance: Transients:
0.01 to 1 to -0.01 0.1 to 10 sec 5%
Impulse Test: EMI: 12.50" x 10.50" x 9.75" (L x H x D) 318 mm x 267 mm x 248 mm (L x H x D) 14.25 lbs / 6.45 kg
INPUTS FIELD CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary: 5 - 1000 Conversion Range: 0.05 - 1 x CT Accuracy: 2% EXCITER VOLTAGE INPUTS Conversion: 0 - 350 VDC (prior to VDN) Accuracy: 1% SWITCH INPUTS (MX & NX) Type: Dry contact Internal Interrogation Voltage: 85 - 265 VAC (control voltage) OUTPUTS PF ANALOG OUTPUT Type: Output: Accuracy: Isolation: RELAY CONTACTS Type: Rated Load: Break: Max. Operating Voltage:
Static: Vibration:
APPROVALS UL: UL Listed CSA: CSA Approved
DIMENSIONS
SPM FRONT SPM SIDE SPM PANEL CUT-OUT
6.75" (171)
1.42" (36)
6.19" (157)
0.75" (19)
0.22" (5.6) (4 PLACES) 0.25" Dia. (6.3)
5.69" (144)
0.22" (5.6)
Active 0-10 VDC Max. @ RL 1K (min. load) 10% (0.1 v) 36 V VpK FAR, TRP Form A FCX Form C 10 A AC continuous NEMA A300 1 A DC continuous NEMA R300 10A 250 VAC or 30 VDC 250 VAC
8.38" (212) 9.29" (236)

C L
2.19" (56)
C L CUTOUT
4.41" (112)
4.38" (111) 4.19" (106)
8.81" (224)
PANEL
6.94" (125)
Inches (mm)
701752A9.dwg
Motor Protection
237

The DC portion of the synchronous motor (rotor assembly) shall be protected and controlled using a drawout microprocessor based multifunction relay. The relay shall be adaptable to either collector-ring or brushless type synchronous motors. Protection features shall include all of the following features: I Cage windings and stall protection I I I I I I I
during start Lockout feature to protect a hot rotor after an incomplete start Incomplete sequence trip due to failed acceleration Automatic acceleration timer adjustment for reduced voltage starting Power factor (pull-out) trip with auto re-synchronizing feature Loss of DC field current trip Loss of DC field voltage trip Field winding overtemperature trip
After a successful start, the relay shall automatically apply the DC field to the rotor at a prescribed slip and slip angle to minimize mechanical stresses to the shaft as well as minimize possible electrical transients to the power system. This shall be achieved by a dedicated output to close the DC field contactor. The relay shall also be capable of reluctance torque synchronizing (collector-ring machines only). A dedicated output shall be provided in the relay to enable the loading of the motor following the DC field application and unloading of the motor following a trip and /or loss of synchronization (pole slipping). Control of SCR type excitation system by means of an analog output to maintain power factor (PF regulation) is an available option.
Man-Machine Interface (MMI) shall be in a form of a backlit alpha-numeric display and a keypad to accommodate relay programming as well as viewing actual motor parameters which shall comprise: I AC stator current I Power factor I DC field current I DC field voltage I DC field resistance I Running time meter (RTM) Remote communications shall be provided via an RS485 port. ModBus RTU protocol shall be used with data transmission rates selectable up to 115,200 bps. Statistical data shall include number and type of trips. Prior to starting the motor, the relay, shall be capable of performing a complete system check.
10
ORDERING
SPM *
SPM PF
SPM: Standard starting & protection relay with VDN board PF: Power factor regulation option used on motors with proportional SCR exciter. (Not recommended for brushless applications)
Accessories
PG2SPM: External hardware package for overtemperature and current loss protection up to 200A (includes 1-DCCT200 & 1-CM) PG4SPM: External hardware package for overtemperature and current loss protection up to 400A (includes 1-DCCT400 & 1-CM) MPSPM: Mounting panel to retrofit existing SPM cutouts for SPM

See pages 15 - 18.
238
Motor Protection
Motor protection and management for small to medium sized motors.
239
Motor Protection Relay
Applications
I I I I
Small to medium sized motors Pumps, conveyors, compressors, fans, sawmills, mines Variable frequency drives Multi speed motors
Protection
Overload (15 selectable curves) Phase short circuit Locked rotor / mechanical jam Thermal memory lockout Single phase/unbalance Ground fault Overtemperature: thermistor Additional 3 RTDs optional Undercurrent Trip/alarm/auxiliary/service outputs 5 switch inputs
10

DESCRIPTION
The 239 relay is designed to fully protect three phase AC motors against conditions which can cause damage. In addition to motor protection, the relay has features that can protect associated mechanical equipment, give an alarm before damage results from a process malfunction, diagnose problems after a fault and allow verification of correct relay operation during routine maintenance. Using the ModBus serial communications interface, motor starters throughout a plant can be connected to a central control and monitoring system for continuous monitoring and fast fault diagnosis of a complete process. One relay is required per motor starter. Setpoints are entered via the front panel or using a computer. Status, actual values and trouble shooting information are available in clear English from the front panel display. A simulation mode and pickup indicator allow testing and verification of correct operation without requiring a relay test set. When the RTD option is ordered, up to 3 RTDs can be monitored. These can all be in the stator or 1 in the stator and 2 in the bearings. An optional analog output is also available for direct PLC interface or metering of the motor thermal capacity. Installing a 239 relay in a motor starter for protection and monitoring of small to medium sized motors will minimize downtime due to process problems.
I I I I I I
Status/current/temperature display Fault diagnosis Trip record, last 5 Process control Optional analog output Simulation mode for field testing
User Interfaces
I I I I
RS485 ModBus communications 40 character illuminated display 6 LED indicators Keypad
Features
I I I
AC/DC control power Compact size, fits most motor starters Upgrade mods options in field using passcode
GE Power Management
239
239 Motor Protection Relay

PROTECTION
Motor starting
During acceleration, the motor is protected by an I2t overcurrent curve which passes through the setpoints Locked Rotor Current and cold Safe Stall Time. The running overload curve is not active during acceleration therefore providing starting protection independent of running protection.
Separate start and run modeling provides optimum rotor and stator protection
TRIP TIME (seconds)
Trip time overload curves, data and formulae are provided for protection and co-ordination
Locked Rotor
A mechanical jam FLC pickup and time delay are also available to help prevent damage to a locked rotor during running.
239 OVERLOAD CURVES

10,000
Thermal Capacity
The 239 uses an accurate electronic memory method based on motor currents and time based integration algorithms to determine the thermal capacity used. A thermal capacity used alarm is available to trigger an alarm when the user programmed setpoint has been exceeded.
1,000
SEPARATE START AND RUN PROTECTION
100
TRIP TIME (sec)
Single Phase (Unbalance)

CURVE 15 12 9 7 4
10
SAFE STALL TIME
RUN CURVE
START CURVE
3 2 1
10
x1 FLC LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT
0.1
819769A5.CDR
1
Full Load Setpoint
10
MOTOR CURRENT
PHASE CURRENT (multiples of full load)

819765A8.CDR
Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Although the currents induced in the rotor can be high, the increase in the stator current is much lower, so that timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip. To prevent extensive rotor damage unbalance protection must be used. The 239 has an unbalance protection function with an unbalance pickup level and time delay that can trigger a trip or an alarm.
Motor Running
To protect the motor while it is running one of 15 different curves can be selected to accurately match the motor overload characteristic. Curves automatically adjust for hot motor compensation to ensure correct thermal modeling. An overload lockout time is programmed by the user to allow sufficient cooling after an overload trip. An Auto reset feature is available which automatically resets the overload trips once the thermal capacity has decreased to 15% or less. An immediate overload alarm may be used to alert an operator. This may be useful for systems that do not normally experience overloads. An immediate overload pickup setpoint is also available.
Overheating
Overheating from causes other than resistive heating due to current cannot be detected by thermal capacity modeling methods that only sense current. To detect the effects of motor overheating due to such things as blocked ventilation, high ambient temperature, or other unforeseen causes, direct temperature sensing is necessary. Temperature rise under these types of conditions is usually slow enough to allow the accurate sensing of the actual motor temperature. To measure motor temperature input for a thermistor is standard on the 239. For more precise protection, three RTDs located in the stator and/or bearings can be connected to the 239 when the RTD temperature sensing option is ordered. This provides displayed temperatures as well as alarm and trip settings for both bearing and stator RTDs.
The RTD temperature sensing option gives more precise protection from overheating
Ground Fault
Aging and thermal cycling can cause the stator insulation to break down. This can produce ground faults. Ground faults can also occur in motors because of environmental conditions such as moisture or conductive dust. The 239 can trigger a trip or an alarm if the ground pickup level is exceeded. A time delay may also be entered for time coordination of systems with several levels of ground fault detection.
DEVICE PROTECTION
37 38 46 48 49 50 51 50G/50N 74 86 94 undercurrent/minimum load motor/load bearing overtemperature unbalance locked rotor stator winding overtemperature phase short circuit timed overload ground fault instantaneous or definite time alarm relay lockout relay trip relay
MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR BEARING STATOR THERMISTOR RTD OR RTDs
MOTOR BEARING RTD

819768AK.CDR
240
Motor Protection

Phase Short Circuit
Complete protection from phase to phase and phase to ground faults is provided with this feature. The function can cause a trip or can activate an auxiliary relay. This function can be instantaneous or can be delayed by up to 2 seconds.
Metering
Measured values include: I I I I
phase current ground current unbalance current % of full load (how close to overload) I motor thermal capacity used (how close to trip) I stator temperature (RTD option) I bearing temperature (RTD option)
interface to a PLC. The single output that is continuously monitored can be selected as: average phase current, motor full load %, thermal capacity used, or RTD temperature.
THERMAL CAPACITY USED %
925146A3.cdr
Undercurrent
The undercurrent protection function is typically used to protect pumps from loss of suction, fans from loss of airflow due to a closed damper, or conveyor systems from a broken belt. This function can be used as an alarm, a trip, or disabled if not required. Alternately this feature can be used as a pre-overload warning. This can be accomplished by setting the undercurrent pickup to be above the normal operating current of the motor but below the rated full load current. In this case the undercurrent function would send a signal during normal operation that would stop if the operating current rose above the normal level.
For local operator monitoring, a thermal capacity meter (TCS2) is available for use with this output. Useful information such as process loading, how close the motor is to tripping or overheating can also be obtained with this output.
Fault Diagnosis
After a trip, the cause of trip along with measured values of current, unbalance and temperature present at the time of trip are displayed. With this information, the cause and action required to fix the problem can be quickly determined. A trip record of the last 5 causes of trip helps identify a persistent problem like an overheating bearing.
819817A3.cdr
Multi Speed Motors

Through the use of an optional switch(es), alternate parameters can be activated for protection of multi speed motors. This allows for additional setpoint groups for: I I I I
phase CT primary full load current overload curve short circuit trip settings
10
819816A3.cdr
Analog Output Option

The analog output option provides an isolated 0-1, 0-20, 4-20 mA signal for

400A
Alarm functions include immediate overload warning, unbalance, undercurrent and internal self check fault. Often an alarm can be generated soon enough to enable corrective action to be taken before a trip occurs which would shut down the process.
Testing
While periodic calibration is not required, the PICKUP LED is useful during commissioning or routine verification to indicate the pickup point for phase overload or ground. A simulation mode is also available that enables simulated currents to be used without the need for a relay test set. This is ideal for verification of settings and training.
FAULT/ PROCESS ALARM FAULT/ ALARM/ PROCESS CONTROL SERVICE ALARM RS485 REMOTE COMMUNICATION
The simulation mode can be run from the front panel display or a PC
3 PHASE 4160V BUS
52
239 RELAY
37 UNDERCURRENT
TRIP
FUSED CONTACTOR
46 UNBALANCE
48 LOCKED ROTOR
86 TRIP RELAY 74 ALARM RELAY AUXILIARY RELAY SERVICE RELAY RS485
3 PHASE CTs
50 SHORT CIRCUIT
51 TIMED OVERLOAD GROUND CT

THERMISTOR/ STATOR RTD BEARING RTDs 50G INSTANTANEOUS GROUND FAULT 49 STATOR OVER TEMPERATURE 38 BEARING OVER TEMPERATURE
MOTOR
LOAD
819763AF.CDR
Motor Protection
241

USER INTERFACES
Communication
By using the industry standard ModBus RTU protocol with an RS485 two wire hardware interface, the 239 can be connected to most types of PLCs and computers. Complete details are available for programming the 239 to communicate with these devices. This allows any monitored value, status and setpoints to be remotely accessed by a plant distributed control system or SCADA software running on a personal computer. Correct operation of the communication port is verified by a front panel LED indicator. 239PC is provided for easy setpoint programming on a personal computer that runs Windows.
Enter setpoints directly to the 239 or copy/save relay settings to a file
Display and Keypad

The 40 character vacuum fluorescent display and keypad provide convenient local communications and control. Motor parameter setpoints can also be entered using the keypad and display. To help prevent unauthorized setpoint changes a setpoint access input must be shorted before changes can be made.
Self explanatory messages make programming and monitoring easy
All information that can be accessed from the relay can also be displayed on a PC. This includes actual values, setpoints, status and trip records.
View motor current, temperature, statistics and status
819818A3.cdr
Future Expansion
GE Power Management relays communicate using an open architecture protocol and hardware interface. Different GE Power Management relays or devices by other manufacturers can be mixed on the same communication link. Even if communications are not required on initial installation, the 239 can be integrated into a plant control system at a later date since communication is standard. Flash Memory is used for code storage within the 239. This allows future product upgrades to be installed throughout an existing plant if required by simply loading new program code via the serial port.
Install the latest product enhancements in existing relays via the serial port
LED Indicators
Six LED indicators on the front panel provide quick visual indication of status.
10
Switch Inputs
The 239 has 5 switch inputs, three fixed and two user definable.
Read the trip record and pretrip values for quick fault diagnosis
I setpoint access: these terminals

must be shorted together in order for the faceplate keypad to have the ability to store new setpoints I emergency restart: momentarily shorting these terminals together when the motor is stopped will cause the thermal memory to discharge to 0% used, allowing for an immediate restart after an overload trip; while this may be necessary for safety or production considerations it will compromise the thermal protection functions of the 239, and it is possible to damage the motor I external reset: this input can be used for remote reset operation. It can also be used for an automatic reset. I option switch 1 & 2: these inputs can be monitored by the serial port for process signalling; they can also be programmed to provide an alarm or trip after a programmable time delay
Product update from GE Power Management on CD
TRIP
AUXILIARY
PICKUP
Transfer new product enhancements to existing 239 relays via the serial port
ALARM
SERVICE
COMMUNICATE
The 239PC program can also be used to generate graphical trend reports.
819776A7.CDR
Maximize production throughput and improve preventative maintenance with trend analysis
239PC
For quick entry of all relay setpoints 239PC can be used instead of the front panel keypad and display. This software runs under Windows on a personal computer for intuitive point and click entry. The PC connects to the 239 via the serial port and a RS232/RS485 convertor (available as an accessory). Setpoints for each motor in the plant can be stored in a file and printed for easy reference. When new relays are added, a complete file of settings can be downloaded for error free setpoint entry.
242
Motor Protection

FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY 40 character illuminated display for all light conditions. I Setpoints I Actual values I Status messages I Fault conditions STATUS INDICATORS I Trip: Energized when the 239 detects a trip. I Alarm: Energized when the 239 detects an alarm. I Auxiliary: Energized when the auxiliary relay is operated. I Service: Energized when the 239 detects an internal fault condition. I Pickup: Energized when motor full load or ground pickup is exceeded. I Communicate: Off if there is no communication at all, flashes if RS485 activity but invalid messages and on (steady) if communication is successful. KEYPAD Rubber keypad makes installed unit dust tight and splash proof. Meets IP53/NEMA12.
TRIP
AUXILIARY
PICKUP
ALARM
SERVICE
COMMUNICATE
ACTUAL
MESSAGE SETPOINT
STORE
VALUE RESET
10
COMPACT DESIGN Replaces many discrete components with one standard unit.
PROTECTIVE DOOR Covers keys when not in use.
Rear View
OPTIONAL ANALOG OUTPUT Select output as: thermal capacity used, current as a % of full load, average current, RTD 1-3 temperature. Isolated 4-20 mA for PLC process input or 0-1 mA for thermal capacity meter (meter available from GE PM).
1
AC/DC CONTROL POWER Door slides open for easy access to fuse. Universal control power 90-300 VDC/70-265 VAC.
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING 250 VAC 10A RESISTIVE 1/4HP 125VAC 1/2HP 250VAC
MADE IN CANADA
COMMUNICATIONS RS485 serial communications, 1200-19200 baud for remote monitoring. Setpoint programming and commands. Modbus RTU protocol. SWITCH INPUTS I ACCESS: Enable/disable setpoint programming. I RESTART: Over-rides lockout for process restarting. I RESET: Field reset after a trip. I OPTION 1 & 2: User specified control inputs.
GE Power Management
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
CUSTOMERTAG No.: 1234-567-89
MODEL NO.: 239-RTD-AN
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
PHASE CT INPUTS 3 isolated phase CT inputs. Accept 1 amp or 5 amp secondary.
5 6 7 8
20 VA 90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC 50-60Hz 20 VA
OPTIONAL 3 RTD INPUTS Mix RTD types. Separate stator and bearing monitoring. 4 RELAYS I TRIP: Cause motor to trip by opening contactor or energizing breaker trip coil. I ALARM: Signals an alarm is present. I AUXILIARY: Programmable for control or separate trip/alarm. Serial port commands for remote control. I SERVICE: Signals internal relay fault. Service is required. TEMPERATURE SENSING NTC or PTC thermistor input.
819790AF.CDR
SERIAL NO.: D6401234
VERSION: 64D240C4.000
9 10
GROUND CT INPUT 5 A or 50:0.025 CT input for residually connected phase CTs or separate core balance CT.
11 12
Motor Protection
243

TYPICAL WIRING
2 CT CONNECTION (NO GROUND) L1 L2 PHASE C CT L3 PHASE C CT L3
RESIDUAL GROUND CONNECTION
PHASE A CT
PHASE A CT PHASE B CT
L1 L2
10 11 12
10 11 12
5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 50:0.025 COM PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND
5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 50:0.025 COM PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND
ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CONNECTION
SUPPLY A B C
STARTER L1 L2 L3 CONTROL POWER

CONTACTOR COIL
50:0.025 GROUND CT
L1 L2 L3 MOTOR
10
80-300 VDC 70-265 VAC 50/60 Hz
TWIST LEADS
13 14 36 37
SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS SAFETY FILTER GROUND GROUND
9 10 11 12
CONTROL POWER N L START CC STOP
+ CONTROL POWER
5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 50:0.025 COM PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
GENERAL ALARM
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 43 38 44 39 45 40 46 41 47 42
NO
COM
NC NO
COM
RELAY #1 TRIP
OUTPUT RELAYS
GE Power Management

RELAY #2 ALARM
SERIAL
USE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR WIRE
RS485 + 15 RS485 - 16 485 GROUND 17

4-20mA
RS485 THERMAL CAPACITY
NC NO
COM
ANALOG OUT
NC NO
COM
RELAY #4 SERVICE
0-1mA
RELAY #3 AUXILIARY
18 19 SHIELD 20
IN+ 21 COM 22
NC IN
COM
THERMISTOR
STATOR THERMISTOR
RTD TEMPERATURE SENSING
ACCESS KEY SWITCH EMERGENCY RESTART EXTERNAL RESET OPTION 1 OPTION 2
SETPOINT ACCESS
S1
RTD#1 SWITCH INPUTS
SHIELD 48 HOT 49 COMP 50 RET 51 HOT 52 COMP 53 RET 54 HOT 55 COMP 56 RET 57
USE SHIELDED WIRE 3) SHIELD TERMINALS ARE INTERNALLY CONNECTED TO SAFETY GROUND TERMINAL 13 RTD TEMPERATURE SENSING AND ANALOG OUTPUT OPTIONAL
IN IN IN
EMERGENCY S2 COM RESTART EXTERNAL RESET COM

COM
STATOR RTD
RTD#2
S3 S4 S5
STATOR/ BEARING RTD
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
RTD#3
IN
COM
STATOR/ BEARING RTD
NOTES: 1) 2) RELAY CONTACT STATE SHOWN WITH CONTROL POWER NOT APPLIED.
RELAY FACTORY DEFAULTS: TRIP ALARM, AUXILIARY: NON-FAILSAFE , SERVICE: FAILSAFE
4)
819751B5.DWG 819829B6.CDR
244
Motor Protection

PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES TRIP TIME Curves: 15 curves, fixed shape Overload Pickup Inhibit: 1.0-5.0 x FLC Pickup Level: 1-1500 A Accuracy: Pickup: 1% of displayed value Time: 2% of trip time or 1 sec whichever is greater SHORT CIRCUIT & GROUND TRIP Ground Trip Level: 0.05 15A (50:0.025 CT) 3-100% (5A CT) S/C Trip Level: 1-11 x CT PRI/OFF Intentional Delay: INST. or 10 ms to 60000 ms programmable Instantaneous: 20-45 ms *Total Delay: Instantaneous + intentional *trip time accuracy guaranteed if current > 1.4 x trip level setting BREAKER FAILURE TIMING Delay: INST. or 10 ms to 60000 ms programmable Instantaneous: 20-45 ms *Total Delay: Instantaneous + intentional *trip time accuracy guaranteed if current > 1.4 x trip level setting START PROTECTION Thermal: Separate start and run protection Activation: Inrush 3 phase current increases from <5% to >101% FLC in 1 sec Deactivation: Current drops to <100% FLC motor running if current >5% FLC Locked Rotor: 0.5 - 11.0 x FLC Safe Stall Time: 1.0-600.0 sec THERMAL MODELING Thermal Capacity: Separate start/run, exponential cool down Cool Rate: Stop: 1-5000 min programmable Run: 50% of stopped cool time Hot/Cold: 50-100%, hot after 15 min running Lockout: 1-5000 min programmable 20% power on or off UNBALANCE Range: Accuracy: Delay: Calculation: 5-100% / OFF 2% 0 - 60 sec if Iav IFLC if Iav < IFLC Im - Iav UB% = |______| x 100 Iav METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: True RMS, 16 samples/cycle CT Input: 1 A and 5 A secondary Range: 0.1 to 11 x phase CT primary Frequency: 20-300 Hz Accuracy: 2% of full scale GROUND CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: True RMS, 16 samples/cycle CT Input: 5 A secondary and 50:0.025 Range: 0.03 to 1.4 x CT primary (5A CT) 0.05 to 16.0 A (50:0.025 CT) Frequency: 20-300 Hz Accuracy: 5A CT: 2% of full scale (5 A CT) 50:0.025 CT: 0.03 A (0-0.49 A) 0.07 A (0.50-3.99 A) 0.20A (4.00-16.00 A) INPUTS SWITCH INPUTS Type: Output: Duration: CT INPUTS OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT (OPTION)
OUTPUT MAX LOAD MAX OUTPUT 0-1 mA 2400 1.1 mA PROGRAMMABLE 0-20 mA 600 21 mA 4-20 mA 600 21 mA
Accuracy: Isolation: OUTPUT RELAYS

VOLTAGE DC Resistive 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 30 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 120 VAC 250 VAC 120 VAC 250 VAC
2% of full scale reading 50 V isolated, active source

MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A MAKE/CARRY 0.2 SEC 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A Form C NO/NC Silver Alloy BREAK 10 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 5A 0.25 A 0.15 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
DC Inductive (L/R = 7 ms) AC Resistive
AC Inductive PF=0.4 Configuration: Contact Material:
Dry contacts 29 VDC, 10 mA (pulsed) 100 ms minimum CT INPUT (A) 1 5 20 5 25 100 5 25 100 0.025 0.1 0.5 BURDEN (VA) 0.009 0.2 3.5 0.04 0.9 16 0.04 1.1 17 0.07 1.19 30.5 () 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 116 119 122
PRODUCTION TESTS Dielectric Strength: 2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, power supply FUSE TYPE/RATING 5 x 200 mm, 2.5 A, 250 V Slow blow, high breaking capacity ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: -10C to +60C ambient Humidity: 95% non-condensing Pollution Degree: 2 Overvoltage Category: 2 IP Class: X0 Insulation Voltage: 300 V TYPE TESTS Insulation Resistance: IEC 255-5 500 VDC Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 Oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 Fast Rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC 255-4 Impulse/High Frequency Disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15 W Transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 Electromagnetic Interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 Static Discharge Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle Dust/Moisture: NEMA 12/IP53 PACKAGING Shipping Box: Ship Weight:
Phase CT (1 A)
Phase CT (5 A)
Ground CT (5 A)
10
Ground CT (50:0.025)
Phase CT (1 A) Phase CT (5 A) Ground CT (5 A)
WITHSTAND 1 SEC x CT 5 SEC x CT CONTINUOUS x CT 100 40 3 100 40 3 100 40 3
Im - Iav UB% = |______| x 100 IFLC where: Iav = average phase current Im = current in a phase with maximum deviation from Iav IFLC = full load current setting UNDERCURRENT Range: Delay: RTDS (OPTION) Inputs: Type: Range: Trip/Alarm Range: Dead Band: Accuracy: Lead Resistance: 5-100% FLC / OFF 0-250 sec 3 RTDs, stator/bearing programmable 100 Pt (DIN 43760), 100 Ni, 120 Ni, 10 Cu programmable -40 to 200C/ -40 to 400F 0-200C 2C 2C Pt or Ni RTD: 25 max Cu RTD: 3 max 3 wire lead resistance compensation PTC or NTC programmable 100-30,000 100-30,000 2 sec 5% or 100 whichever is greater
Continuous Maximum
50:0.025 GROUND INPUT WITHSTAND 150 mA 12 A for 3 cycles
50:0.025 input can be driven by a 50:0.025 CT. POWER SUPPLY Input: 90-300 VDC or 70-265 VAC, 50/60 Hz Power: 10 VA (nominal), 20 VA (max) Holdup: Non-failsafe trip: 200 ms Failsafe trip: 100 ms both times at 120 VAC / 125 VDC Note: It is recommended that all 239 relays be powered up at least once per year to avoid deterioration of elecrolytic capacitors in the power supply. COMMUNICATIONS Type: RS485 2 wire, half duplex, isolated Baud Rate: 1200-19,200 Protocol: ModBus RTU Functions: Read/write setpoints, read actual values, execute commands *Specifications subject to change without notice.
8.5" L x 6" H x 6" D (215 mm x 152 mm x 152 mm) 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
INSTALLATION Warning:
Hazard may result if the product is not used for its intended purpose. Ventilation Requirements: None Cleaning Requirements: None APPROVALS Manufactured under an ISO9001 registered system UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Approved under LR41286 : IEC 947-1, IEC 1010-1
THERMISTOR Type: Hot Resistance: Cold Resistance: Delay: Accuracy:
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW 4.85" (123) PANEL CUTOUT 4.38" (111) REDUCED DEPTH COLLAR SIDE VIEW 0.50" (13) 3.06" (78) 1.75" (45) REDUCED DEPTH COLLAR REAR VIEW 5.18" (132) REDUCED DEPTH COLLAR PANEL CUTOUT 4.51" (115) 4.19" (107) 0.16" (4) 1.40" (36) 1.96" (50) 3.92" (100) 7.17" (182) 6.88" (175) CUT-OUT 7.72" (196) COLLAR 5.88" (150) PANEL Dimensions on both sides of the bezel are not the same 8 x 0.08"R (2) PANEL 4 x 0.08"R (2) Inches (mm)
819752AJ.DWG
0.81" (21)
4.00" (102)
0.27" (7)
0.45" (11)
4.19" (107)
Motor Protection
245
6.88" (175)
4.08" (104)

The motor protection relay shall provide protection and monitoring of small and medium horse power motors. This will include: I overload (51) I2t thermal modeling I 15 overload curves I thermal lockout to prevent trip reset I I I I I I I
after an overload trip hot winding temperature detection using thermistor (49) or optional RTD sensing (49/38) single phase/unbalance (46) rapid trip/mechanical jam phase short circuit (50) ground fault (50N/50G) locked rotor (48) undercurrent (37) protection for applications such as pumps
Four relays shall be available for trip, alarm, service, and programmable auxiliary. Monitoring and metering functions shall include an optional analog output suitable for interface to a PLC. Fault records including the cause of the trip and measured values aid in fault diagnosis. The causes of the last 5 trips are also recorded. A simulation mode is available to test the relay without external inputs. Metering includes: I I I I I I I
phase current ground current unbalance % of full load motor thermal capacity used stator temperature (RTD option) bearing temperature (RTD option)
Setpoint programming and retrieval of running information, pretrip data, trip record of previous trips shall be accomplished by means of a keypad and a display. Serial communication over 2 wire RS485 link operating at 1200 - 19200 bps will be provided. Open protocol, ModBus RTU will include commands for read/write and such protocol shall be included in the relay instruction manual. Five switch inputs shall be provided for setpoint access, emergency restart, external reset, and two user programmable option switches. The relay will accept AC/DC control power.
Motor protection during acceleration shall be independent of the running protection.
10
ORDERING
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft
239
239
*
RTD
*
AN
Basic unit 3 RTDs: stator/bearing; programmable type: platinum, nickel, copper Single isolated, analog output: 0-1, 0-20, 4-20 mA Programmable output parameters: thermal capacity, % full load, phase current RTD1, RTD2, RTD3 temperature
Accessories
239PC supplied free Phase and ground CTs Thermal capacity meter TCS2 Emergency restart keyswitch ERSW RS485 Terminating Network RS232 to RS485 convertor (required to interface a computer to the relay) 2.25" Collar for limited depth mounting (1009-0068)
Modifications
MOD 501: MOD 502: MOD 504: MOD 505: MOD 506: MOD 509: MOD 512: MOD 513: 20-60 VDC/20-48 VAC control power Conformal Coating Removable Terminal Blocks Enhanced Start Protection Custom (Programmable) Overload Curve Directional Ground 1A Ground input Class 1 Div 2 Operation

See pages 15 - 18.
246
Motor Protection
NEW
MM3
Intelligent MCC Controller
Applications
I I
Low voltage motor control centers Integrated process & electrical control
Protection
I I I I I I I
Overload Phase unbalance Contactor failure Locked/stalled rotor Ground fault Hot winding thermistor Undercurrent/underpower
10
Control
I I I I I
Undervoltage auto restart Outputs: 2 contactor, 2 programmable Inputs: 6 fixed, 10 programmable 1 analog input 1 analog output 4-20 mA
DESCRIPTION
The Motor Manager 3 (MM3) combines control functions and comprehensive motor protection in one package. This compact device provides sophisticated control and protective relaying at significant cost savings over the discrete devices normally found in a low voltage motor control center (MCC). One MM3 is required for every starter in the MCC. The contactors can be energized and de-energized using the MM3s direct wired inputs, or via the serial port. A total of 6 fixed and 10 programmable switch inputs are available. A wide range of starter types may be controlled by the MM3 using two contactor outputs and two auxiliary outputs. One analog input can be programmed by the user as well as one analog out. A programmable undervoltage auto restart function is available. Motor protection features for the most common causes of failure are provided to prevent costly shut downs and rewinds. These include overload, phase unbalance, locked rotor (stall), ground fault, undercurrent and under power. A thermistor input can also be provided to protect a hot winding. The relay checks the contactor status at start and stop commands to indicate contactor failure. Alarms are provided to warn of additional abnormal conditions. The MM3 has two mounting configurations: chassis mount no display, and panel mount local display. Both models have a 2 wire RS485 ModBus RTU protocol communication port operating at up to 57,600 bps. The panel mount model has a stop key and 8 status LEDs, a 2 by 20 line display, 2 additional command mode LEDs, and a keypad, which allows full local access without a computer.

I I I I
Display phase current, ground current, thermal capacity, analog input, power, energy, etc. Trip record and pre-trip values Maintenance information Self-test
User Interfaces
I I I
2 RS485 ModBus Ports, 1200 - 57,600 bps Display model for local interface Up to 10 status LEDs
Features
I I I I I I
Reduces MCC and field wiring Replaces timers, relays, protective devices, meters, panel indicators Integrated primary CTs up to 250 FLC Local faceplate Standard removeable rear terminals Remote Touchscreen graphical interface (connects up to 32 units)
GE Power Management
247
MM3 Intelligent MCC Controller

The MM3 is available with different protection and control features depending on the model ordered as outlined in the Model Table.
Ground fault (50G/51G)

The ground fault level is measured as a percentage of FLC. Ground overcurrent can be detected either from the residual connection of the phase CTs or from the zero sequence CT. A delay time is set to prevent nuisance alarms from momentary surges. Both a ground fault alarm and trip are provided. The alarm can be set below the trip level to get an early warning of insulation breakdown.
shearpin, loss of pump flow, etc., which may result in only a small change in current is provided by the under power alarm.
Overload (49/51)
An overload trip is caused when the thermal capacity value equals 100%. Thermal capacity used is calculated from accumulated I2t value and chosen overload curves. True RMS current sensing ensures correct response to the heating effect of harmonics. One of 12 different I2t time-overcurrent overload curves may be selected from 8 standard curves and 4 NEMA compatible curves.
Of the 12 overload curves available 4 are NEMA compatible time/current overload curves
100000
Contactor Failure
The MM3 monitors the contactor while performing start and stop commands. If the contactor does not change status (open to closed or closed to open) an open control circuit or welded contactor alarm is triggered.
Overtemperature (49)
An input from motor winding thermistors is available. The MM3 can accept both positive temperature coefficient (PTC) and negative temperature coefficient (NTC) sensors. A thermistor level can be selected for both alarm and trip.
Additional Alarms
The MM3 has programmable alarms to warn of a number of abnormal conditions. These include: acceleration time exceeded, abnormal inverter starter, incomplete start, motor greasing, contactor inspection, motor stop time, analog input, and process interlock switch open.
Cooling Time 10
10000
TIME IN SECONDS
1000
After an overload trip the thermal capacity value will decrease exponentially to model the cooling characteristic of the motor. An overload trip can normally be reset when the thermal capacity value decreases to 15%. A stopped motor cooling time can be set to determine how long it takes for a stopped motor to reach steady state ambient temperature from its maximum allowable temperature.
Starters
The MM3 can control a variety of starter types using the contactor outputs. Contactor A is used for full voltage non-reversing starters. Contactor A and B are used for reversing, two speed, autotransformer, inverter, wye-delta open transition, slip ring, and part winding starters. Contactors A, B, and one auxiliary output are used for the reduced voltage wye-delta closed transition starter.
100
Undercurrent/Under Power (37)

CURVE #
CLASS 30
Both under current and under power alarms and trips are provided with time delays. Protection against failed
10
CLASS 20 CLASS 15 CLASS 10

1 0.1 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 20 50 100
MULTIPLE OF PICKUP CURRENT (PER UNIT)
807903D4.cdr
DEVICE PROTECTION
52 480 VOLT BUS
Phase Unbalance (46)

The MM3 monitors the percentage unbalance in the motor phase currents. If a phase current unbalance of greater than 15% exists for more than 5 seconds an alarm is generated. If a phase current unbalance of greater than 30% exists for more than 5 seconds a trip occurs.
49/51 46
FUSE CONTACTOR
CONTACTOR A (FORWARD/WYE) CONTACTOR B (REVERSE/DELTA) AUX 1 RELAY
Locked/Stalled Rotor (48)

Mechanical equipment such as pumps or fans can be quickly damaged if it gets jammed resulting in a locked rotor stall. The MM3 will trip when the running current exceeds the stalled rotor trip level after the programmed time delay. If stall protection is not required this feature may be set to OFF. This feature is disabled during the inrush of motor starting.
PHASE PT PHASE CT
59 27 AUX 2 RELAY 51 49 37 46 CONTROL INPUTS 4-20mA MOTOR INPUT MANAGER 3
overload phase unbalance (single phase) welded/open contactor 50G/51G ground fault 48 locked rotor/stalled rotor 37 undercurrent/under power 27 undervoltage 59 overvoltage 49 hot winding (thermistor) option 3
GROUND CT WINDING THERMISTOR

THERMISTOR LOAD MOTOR
51G 49
PROCESS PLC OR TRANSDUCER
RS485 REMOTE COMMUNICATION 1200-57K6 BAUD
809751A2.dwg
248
Motor Protection

Undervoltage Auto Restart
It is possible to automatically restart the motor after a momentary power loss if this feature is enabled. When the control voltage drops below the dropout voltage the contactors are deenergized. The MM3 can initiate timers to restart selected drives upon the return of supply voltage. If control voltage is restored within the programmed restart time it will be restarted immediately. If the control voltage takes longer to be restored the MM3 can be programmed to attempt to restart the motor after a programmed time delay.
Metering
The MM3 meters and displays: I I I I
RMS current of each phase ground fault leakage current motor load as a % of full load current thermal capacity used (%) according to I2t history and chosen overload curve; hot/cold ratio is used to model heating when running below full motor current % unbalance power (kW) energy (kWh) voltage analog input
at which a number of routine maintenance tasks should be performed. When these times are exceeded an alarm is generated. These include: I motor greasing interval: number of
hours after which motor bearings must be lubricated I contactor inspection: number of starts after which contactor contacts must be inspected for wear I maximum motor stopped time: The maximum number of hours that the motor can be left not running
Outputs
The MM3 has one or two contactors (A and B). There are also two auxiliary programmable output relays available on the MM3. These two outputs can be assigned to any one of 31 functions.
I I I I I
Networking
Gateway solutions exist to connect the MM3 to installed protocols in a given system. The X-Link is a gateway product from SST (www.sstech.on.ca). This product makes it possible to transfer data between two communications networks. Networks such as ModBus, ModBus Plus, ProfiBus, DeviceNet, Data Highway Plus, GE Fanuc, ControlNet and DNP are supported.
Trip Record
When the MM3 issues a trip command a trip record is generated. This includes the cause of the trip and pre-trip actual values.
Switched Inputs
The MM3 has up to 6 fixed control inputs. These are used for start A and B, stop, local isolator, and contactor A and B status. The MM3 also has up to 10 programmable switch inputs. Each input can have one of 33 interlock functions assigned to it. Once a function is assigned to one interlock input that function cannot be assigned to any other interlock input.
10
Statistics and Maintenance

The MM3 records statistical data about relay and motor operation. The MM3 also allows the user to set the interval
X-Link makes it possible to transfer data between two communications networks.

PC EQUIPPED WITH: SST 5136-PFB PROFIBUS CARD MICROSOFT EXCEL SST X-LINK CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE SST DP MASTER DDE SERVER SOFTWARE SST PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE
Analog Input
MODBUS NETWORK PROFIBUS-DP NETWORK
The analog input can be scaled to user defined values. High and low alarm and trip setpoints are recorded with time delays.
SST X-LINK EQUIPPED WITH: SST 5136-PBMS PROFIBUS CARD OPTIONAL RS232 SERIAL CARD KERNEL DRIVER MODBUS DRIVER (DRIVER 1) PROFIBUS-PBMSLV DRIVER (DRIVER 2)
Cost Effective MCC Wiring with MM3

MCC WIRING CONVERTIONAL MCC
SUPERVISORY CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ONE STARTER
STOP RELAY
MCC WITH MOTOR MANAGER 3

SUPERVISORY CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ONE STARTER TRIPPED
24V DC OUTPUTS
START RELAY
STOPPED
RUNNING
RS232 CABLES FROM COM PORT OF THE SERIAL CARD AND X-LINK TO F485
E BL K N CA -LIN TIO K EM H X RA LIN OD IT GU M D W NFI M X O LL IE O RO T T NU PPL NK C D F OR RT E P O SUX-LI CT IG M P R NE NF O FOCON COPC C
F485 OR SCI BOX

F485 OR SCI BOX

F485 OR SCI BOX

10 WIRE CONTROL CABLE
COMPUTER
Tx
Rx
+ - COM GND + COM PORT 9VAC/9VDC
9VAC/ 9VDC
COMPUTER
Tx
Rx
9VAC/ 9VDC
COMPUTER
Tx
Rx
9VAC/ 9VDC
REMOTE CONTROL
TWO WIRE
CONTROL CABLE
TWISTED PAIR
DAISY-CHAIN 3
RUNNING STOPPED TRIPPED ALARM
DAISY-CHAIN 2
ACTUAL STORE SETPOINT RESET
DAISY-CHAIN 1
ACTUAL STORE SETPOINT RESET
LOCAL MCC RS485 TWISTED PAIR

L
SLAVE 1
AUTO START A SETPOINT
FAULT
SLAVE 1
MESSAGE
RUNNING STOPPED TRIPPED
RELAY A RELAY B AUX RELAY 1 AUX RELAY 2

AUTO
SLAVE 1
START B
MESSAGE
RUNNING STOPPED

AUTO
CONTACTOR A MESSAGE CONTACTOR B
VALUE
VALUE
TRIPPED
MANUAL
ALARM
MANUAL START B ACTUAL
ALARM
MANUAL
240/120V AC
N
STOP RELAY
START RELAY
CONTACTOR C3 TRIP
CONTACTOR C2 CONTACTOR
L PANEL DEVICES
AUX 1 AUX 2
RESET
STOP
START A
STOP
START A
START B
STOP
VALUE
STORE
FIELD STOP
240/120 V AC
N
MM III
RUNNING INDICATOR STOPPED INDICATIOR TRIPPED INDICATIOR HOURS RUN COUNTER NUMBERS OF STARTS START PUSHBUTTON STOP PUSHBUTTON
ACTUAL
STORE
ACTUAL
STORE
SETPOINT
RESET
SETPOINT
RESET
O/L RELAY
GROUND FAULT
STALL RELAY
THERMISTOR
U/C RELAY
ACCEL TIME
TRIP RELAY
FIELD CONTRACTOR STOP
SLAVE 2
STATUS
ALARM
SLAVE 2
COMMUNICATE RELAYS
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
MESSAGE
RUNNING STOPPED TRIPPED ALARM

AUTO
SLAVE 2
START B
MESSAGE
RUNNING STOPPED

AUTO
VALUE
VALUE
TRIPPED
MANUAL
ALARM
MANUAL
STOP
START A
STOP
START A
START B
PQM
POWER QUALITY METER
809755A2.AI
SR469 STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
STOPPED STARTING RUNNING OVERLOAD PICKUP UNBALANCE PICKUP GROUND PICKUP HOT RTD LOSS OF LOAD
OUTPUT RELAYS
R1 TRIP R2 AUXILIARY R3 AUXILIARY R4 ALARM R5 BLOCK START R6 SERVICE
SLAVE 3
COMPUTER RS232 COMPUTER RS485 AUXILIARY RS485 LOCKOUT RESET POSSIBLE MESSAGE
RESET
NEXT
PROGRAM PORT
SETPOINT MESSAGE ACTUAL
8 5 2 0
9 6 3
HELP
4 1
VALUE
ESCAPE
ENTER
MOTOR MANAGEMENT RELAY
TM
SR469
809822a1.ai
Motor Protection
249

USER INTERFACES MODELS
Communication
The MM3 uses a ModBus RTU RS485 connection for communication. Up to 32 MM3s can be daisy chained together on a single communication channel. The MM3 supports operation at 1200 to 57600 bps. A RS232/485 converter module may be used to connect a personal computer to the MM3.
Mounting Configurations
The MM3 can be ordered in two mounting configurations; the chassis mount and the panel mount with local display.
The chassis mount model is the black box version of the MM3. It is mounted inside the motor control center (MCC)
Alternatively up to 32 MM3s could be daisy chained and connected to a Touch-screen Graphical Interface (TGI) module for remote status/command operations.
Software
The MM3 is provided with a free communications program called MM3PC. It runs on a personal computer under Windows. It allows access to all the features of the MM3 with easy to use pull down menus. Using this program it is possible to: I I I I I I
program or modify setpoints load or save setpoints from or to a disk read actual values from the MM3 monitor status read pre-trip data and trip record display dynamic trending of actual values I get help on any topic I print the instruction manual from disk I simulate and test features
10
Windows based software is supplied with the MM3
The chasis mount version has the added flexibility of using the display port as a second communications port. The advantage is that slower metering functions can be assigned to one communications port while the other port could be used for high speed command operations such as Start/Stop or quick status updates such as Tripped, Running, etc. Using the second port provides a means for redundant communication channels guaranteeing control and status information even if one channel is interrupted.
The panel mount with display model is the Top of the Line MM3
The panel mount with local display model is mounted on the front panel of the MCC with its 2 by 20 alphanumeric display, full keypad, and 10 status LEDs exposed to the operator for complete local viewing and setpoint programming. The setpoints can also be loaded into the relay through the RS485 communications port.
Model Table: The MM3 is available in chassis mount or panel mount models.
OPTION 1 (Standard) Protection 3 phase overload protection (49/51) Phase unbalance (46) Welded/open contactor Ground fault trips (50G/51G) Stalled rotor protection (48) Display kw and kWh Undercurrent/underpower (37) Overvoltage (59) Undervoltage (27) 4 control 2 programmable
OPTION 2 3 phase overload protection (49/51) Phase unbalance (46) Welded/open contactor Ground fault trips (50G/51G) Stalled rotor protection (48) Display kw and kWh Undercurrent/underpower (37) Overvoltage (59) Undervoltage (27) 6 control 10 programmable Thermistor input Analog in input Analog output Contactor A Contactor B Aux 1 Aux 2 or ESD relay
Inputs
Relays
Contactor A Aux 1 Aux 2 or ESD relay
250
Motor Protection

FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY: 2 line, 40 character illuminated display communicates all messages in simple English for easy interpretation by users unfamiliar with unit. RELAY INDICATORS: RELAY A: Contactor A energized. RELAY B: Contactor B energized. AUX 1: User programmable relay 1 energized. AUX 2: User programmable relay 2 energized. PROGRAM KEYS: ACTUAL VALUES: Press to enter actual values mode to display actual motor values such as current, ground leakage, thermal capacity. SETPOINTS: Press to enter setpoint mode to alter or examine setpoints. STORE: Save a newly entered setpoint. RESET: Reset the MM3 after a trip. MESSAGE: Move to the desired setpoint or actual value message. VALUE: Increment or decrement currently displayed setpoint value. CONTROL KEYS: AUTO: Selects operation of start via communication port. MANUAL: Selects manual operation of motor using start key. START A: Energize contactor A. START B: Energize contactor B. STOP: De-energize contactors.
STATUS INDICATORS: RUNNING: Contactor is energized and motor is running. STOPPED: Contactor is not energized and motor is not running. TRIPPED: Contactor is not energized. Motor is not running. The MM3 has tripped the motor due to a fault. Normally a cause of trip message will be displayed. ALARM: One or more alarm conditions are present. Normally a cause of alarm message will be displayed.
10
Rear View
SWITCH INPUTS Opto-isolated 120/240 VAC live inputs for various interlock functions. The interlock inputs are fully programmable and can be assigned to such functions as setpoint access, plant interlock, test, and various others.
THERMISTOR NTC or PTC thermistor input for hot winding detection.
GROUND CT INPUT 50:0.025 ground fault input.
Ground safety and surge
SUPPLY VOLTAGE required to power the MM3 VOLTAGE INPUT Phase A voltage input for voltage and power monitoring.
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT 4 - 20mA input for process control monitoring / alarming / tripping. COMMUNICATIONS RS485 2 wire serial communication port operates at 1200 - 57,600 bps for remote commands, monitoring and setpoint store. ModBus RTU protocol.
CONTROL POWER 120/240 VAC supply voltage selector switch and fuse access door 4 RELAYS I Contactor A: direct on line / forward / wye I Contactor B: reverse / delta I User programmable relay (AUX 1) I User programmable relay (AUX 2) Ground safety
RESIDUAL GROUND INPUT PHASE CT INPUTS 3 isolated phase CT inputs
Motor Protection
251

TYPICAL WIRING
CT MODULE L1 L2 L3 CT PHASE C CT PHASE A CT PHASE B A A CT GROUND
480 VOLTS A C B
CONTACTOR F3 F4 F5 A
MOTOR
C B A F1 F2
10 9
480 VOLTS
INTERLOCK INPUT 10 INTERLOCK INPUT 9 INTERLOCK INPUT 8 PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS INTERNAL CONNECTOR
19 20
RS485
SERIAL 485 A+ SERIAL 485 B485 SHIELD
25
RS485
26 27 31 32 33
4-20 mA ANALOG OUT
8 7
110/230 VAC
6 5 4 3 2
INTERLOCK INPUT 6 INTERLOCK INPUT 5 INTERLOCK INPUT 4 INTERLOCK INPUT 3 INTERLOCK INPUT 2 INTERLOCK INPUT 1 STOP
ANALOG OUT
INTERLOCK INPUT 7
ANALOG + ANALOG ANALOG OUT SHIELD
GE Power Management PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 1
MOTOR MANAGER 3 OPTION 2
43
N/O
42 41
N/C
10
1 * 11 12 13
A
40 39
N/O
FIXED SWITCH INPUTS
START A START B ISOLATOR STATUS NO CONTACTOR A STATUS NO CONTACTOR B STATUS NO THERMISTOR + THERMISTOR ANALOG + ANALOG ANALOG IN SHIELD NEUTRAL
= OPTION 2
PROGRAMMABLE RELAY 2
38 37
N/C
14 * 15 16
36
+24 VDC +24 COM
PROG. RELAY 2 EXT. COIL
35 34
STATOR THERMISTOR
17 18
4-20mA ANALOG IN
28 29 30 23 24 22 21 48
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR A B
ANALOG IN CONTROL POWER
N/O COM N/O COM
46 47 44 45
CONTACTOR A
LIVE EARTH SURGE EARTH SAFETY EARTH SAFETY
PHONE JACK
TO REMOTE DISPLAY
MCC GROUND BUS
NOTES: 1. RELAY CONTACT STATE SHOWN WITH CONTROL POWER NOT APPLIED. 2. TERMINALS MARKED WITH "*" MUST BE CONNECTED BEFORE MOTOR CAN BE STARTED. 3. DO NOT GROUND TERMINAL 19 WHEN USING A EXTERNAL GROUND CT.
809772A3.dwg
252
Motor Protection

MM3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES Trip Time: 200 ms up to 10 sec Accuracy: 2% of trip time over 10 sec Detection Level: 1% of primary CT amps GROUND FAULT TRIP TIME Accuracy: - 0 ms, + 50 ms, 0.0 = less than 50 ms SINGLE PHASE (PHASE UNBALANCE) Range: Greater than 30% U/B Accuracy: 2 percentage points Trip Delay: 5 sec, 1 sec Calculation Method: If IAV IFLC : UB = | IM - IAV | x 100 IAV If IAV < IFLC : UB = | IM - IAV | x 100 IFLC Where: IAV = average phase currents IM = current in a phase with maximum deviation from IAV IFLC = motor full load current setting UNDERCURRENT Range: Delay Range: Accuracy: 10-100% of motor FLC, or OFF 1 to 60 sec 1 sec OUTPUTS MM3 CONTACTOR AUX 1 & AUX 2 OUTPUT RELAYS MAKE/CARRY MAX. OPERATING MAX. SWITCH. VOLTAGE CONTINUOUS CURRENT CAPACITY RESISTIVE 30 VDC 8A 8A 2400 VA 240 W 250 VAC 8A 8A 2000 VA 240 W INDUCTIVE 30 VDC 3.5 A 8A 875 VA (PF = 0.4) 170 W 250 VAC 3.5 A 8A 875 A 170 W CONFIGURATION SPST-NO + SPST-NC AUX 1 & 2 Form A CONTACT MATERIAL Silver Alloy (AgCdO) MAX OPERATING VOLTAGE 380 VAC, 125 VDC MIN PERMISSIBLE LOAD 5 VDC, 10 mA ANALOG OUTPUTS Output: Max Load: Max Output: Accuracy: Isolation: 4-20 mA 600 21 mA 2% of full scale reading 36 V isolated, active source POWER SUPPLY SUPPLY VOLTAGE AC Nominal: 120 VAC, range 80-135 VAC 240 VAC, range 150-270 VAC Frequency: 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: 25 VA (Maximum) 7 VA (Nominal) ENVIRONMENTAL Pollution Degree: Overvoltage Category: Insulation Voltage Operating Temperature Range: IP Class: TYPE TESTS Transients:
2 2 300 V 0C to 60C IEC 529 IPX0
Impulse: RFI: Static: Hipot:
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory/ Fast Risetime Transients IEC 801-4 Electrical Fast Transient/ Burst Requirements IEC 255-5 5 kV Impulse Voltage Test 150 MHz, 450 MHz 5 W Handheld Transmitter @ 25 cm IEC 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge 1500 V, 1 min all input > 30 V
UNDERVOLTAGE SUPPLY VOLTAGE Undervoltage: 65 % of nominal (120 VAC or 240 VAC) immediate restart for maximum dip time of 0.1-0.5 sec or OFF delayed restart for maximum dip time of 0.1-10.0 sec/unlimited time Delay Restart Range: 0.2-300 sec Delay Restart Accuracy: 0.2 sec MONITORING VOLTAGE INPUT/POWER READING Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Voltage Full Scale: 1.5 x VT Primary Voltage Accuracy: 2% of VT Primary or 2% of reading, whichever is greater Power Accuracy: 5% of nominal or 5% of reading, whichever is greater Input Voltage: Nominal: 120 VAC or 240 VAC Max: 250 VAC VT Burden: 0.01 VA ACCELERATION TIME Range: 0.5 to 125 sec, or OFF Accuracy: 0.5 sec THERMAL COOLING TIMES Range: 5-1080 min when motor stopped 50% of motor stopped value when motor running Accuracy: 1 min STALLED ROTOR Range: Delay Range: Accuracy: 1.15 to 4.50 x FLC, or OFF 0.5 to 5 sec 0.5 sec
INPUTS THERMISTOR INPUTS Sensor Types: positive temperature coefficient PTC RHOT=100-30,000 negative temperature coefficient NTC RHOT=100-30,000 Delay: 1 sec Accuracy: 5% or 100 (whichever is greater) ANALOG INPUT Range: Accuracy: Alarm: Trip: Accuracy: Isolation: 4-20 mA 1% of full scale Programmable 4-20 mA Programmable 4-20 mA 2% of full scale reading 15 V isolated, active source
FUSE TYPE/RATING 0.5 A 250 V Fast blow, high breaking capacity INSTALLATION WARNING: HAZARD may result if the product is not used for its intended purpose. PACKAGING Max. Weight: 6 lbs 12 oz (3.1 kg) Shipping Dimensions: 12" x 9" x 7.5" (350 mm x 229 mm x 190 mm) APPROVALS : IEC 947-1, IEC 1010-1 Quality Assurance System (registered by QMI): CSA: CAN3.Z299.3 - 1985 ISO: 9001 - 1994 *Specifications subject to change without notice. NOTE: It is recommended that all MM3 relays are powered up at least once per year to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors in the power supply.
10
COMMUNICATIONS Type: RS485 2 wire, half duplex Baud Rate: 1,200-57,600 bps Protocol: ModBus RTU Functions: Read/write setpoints, read actual values, execute commands, read coil status, read device status, loopback test
Motor protection and control shall be provided by an intelligent control device capable of manual or automatic control. Protection features available shall include trip and alarms for: I I I I I I I I
overload with 12 overload curves phase unbalance welded/open contactor ground fault locked/stalled rotor thermistor for hot winding under current and under power additional alarms for abnormal conditions
I 2 auxiliary relays, each of which

can be assigned to any one of 31 functions I one analog input with high and low alarm and trip setpoints I undervoltage auto restart
METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Range: 0.1 to 8 x phase CT primary amps setpoint when external CTs are used .2 to 250 A, FLC < 32 A Accuracy: (2% + 1)* GROUND FAULT CURRENT INPUT Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x FLC amps setpoint (residual connection) 0.5 to 15.0 A (50:0.025 CT) Full Scale: 1.5 x FLC amps setpoint (residual connection) 15 A (50:0.025 CT) Accuracy: (2% + 2)* (residual connection) FLC < 32 A (2% + 6)* (residual connection) FLC < 32 A 50:0.025 CT: 0.3 A
*Accuracy is given as ([% of reading] + [number of least significant digits])
Motor current sensing shall be from internal primary CTs up to 250 FLC. Ground sensing shall be from an external core balance CT or residually. Metering values shall include: I I I I I I I I I I
RMS current of each phase RMS ground fault leakage current thermal capacity analog input motor load thermal capacity used unbalance power (kW) energy (kWh) RMS voltage
OUTPUTS RELAY CONTACTS MM3 CONTACTOR A & B OUTPUT RELAYS MAKE/CARRY MAX. OPERATING MAX. SWITCH. VOLTAGE CONTINUOUS CURRENT CAPACITY RESISTIVE 30 VDC 8A 8A 2500 VA 300 W 250 VDC 8A 8A 2500 VA 300 W INDUCTIVE 30 VDC 3.5 A 8A 1250 VA 220 W (PF=0.4) 250 VDC 3.5 A 8A 1250 VA 220 W CONFIGURATION SPST-NO Contactor A & B Form A CONTACT MATERIAL Silver Alloy (AgCdO) MAX OPERATING VOLTAGE 380 VAC, 125 VDC MIN PERMISSIBLE LOAD 5 VDC, 100 mA
Control features available shall include: I 6 fixed control inputs for start A & B,
stop, local isolator, contractor A & B status I 10 programmable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any one of 33 functions I 2 contactors (A & B)
Motor Protection
253

The motor manager shall generate a trip report each time a trip command is issued. It shall include the cause of the trip and the pre-trip metering values. Statistical data and routine maintenance alarms shall be included features of the motor manager. A RS485 ModBus RTU connection shall be used for communication. It shall support operation at 1200 to 57,600 bps. A RS232/485 converter module can be used to connect a personal computer to the motor manager. Software shall be provided to allow easy access to all features. A remote panel mount model shall be available with a 2 by 20 character display, control keys, and 10 LEDs to provides local access without a computer.
DIMENSIONS
DISPLAY MODULE
1.57 (40) 0.85 (21.6) 6.750 (171.5) 6.49 (164.8)
0.10 (2.54)
6.25 (158.8)
3.75 (95.3)
MESSAGE RUNNING RELAY A RELAY B AUX. RELAY 1 AUX. RELAY 2 VALUE
COMM PORT TO MAIN MODULE
STOPPED TRIPPED ALARM
4.00 (101.6)
2.31 (58.7) 3.47 (88.1) 1.15 (29.2)
CUTOUT
0.078 T Typ (2) 8 PLACES
STOP
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
0.17 (4.3) 4.063 (117.6)
MOUNTING DETAIL
10
MAIN MODULE
9.833 (249.8)
8.850 (224.8)
3.285 (83.4)
4.073 (117.6)
(4) - 0.156 (4)
2.270 (57.7) 1.040 (26.4) 1.030 0.704 (26.1) 0.950 (17.9) (24.1) 0.704 (17.9)
SPLIT LINE
CT MODULE
CUTOUT
CUTOUT
CUTOUT
C L
3.600 (91.5)
C L
C L
C L
REAR VIEW
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021222324
WARNING Check voltage switch before installation
(4) - 0.156 (4)
1.25 (31.8) 2.950 (74.9)
1.25 (31.8) 1.475 1.475 (37.5) (37.5) 3.963 (100.7) 3.963 (100.7)
1.25 (31.8) 2.950 (74.9)
252627282930313233343536373839 404142 434445464748
2.622 (66.6)
4.712 (119.7)
DISPLAY PORT REMOTE CT PORT
2.090 (53.1)
NOTE CT & MAIN MODULES CAN BE SPLIT MOUNTED & INTERFACED WITH CABLE
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
MOUNTING DETAIL
809800A1.ai
ORDERING
Accessories
MM3PC software package supplied free RS232 TO RS485 CONVERTER box designed for harsh industrial environments 5A PHASE CT: 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 50:0.025 Ground CT for sensitive ground detection on high resistance grounded systems Control key cover hides auto, manual and start buttons
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon
MM3
MM3
* * * *
1 2 E A N W 120 240
Product family Option 1 basic unit Option 2 full unit ESD relay Aux 2 relay No display (chassis unit) With local display 120 VAC control voltage 240 VAC control voltage

See pages 15 - 18.
254
Motor Protection
MM2
Intelligent MCC Controller
Applications
I I
Low voltage motor control centers Integrated process and electrical control
Protection
I I I I I I I
Overload Phase unbalance Contactor failure Locked/stalled rotor Ground fault Hot winding thermistor Undercurrent/underpower
10
Control
DESCRIPTION
The Motor Manager 2 (MM2) combines control functions and comprehensive motor protection in one package. This compact device provides sophisticated control and protective relaying at significant cost savings over the discrete devices normally found in a low voltage motor control center (MCC). The MM2 is available in a standard model or with one or two additional option packages. Option 1 enhances the control and diagnostic functions, while Option 2 enhances the protection and input features. One MM2 is required for every starter in the MCC. The contactors can be energized and de-energized using the MM2s direct wired inputs, or via the serial port. A total of 6 fixed and 10 programmable switch inputs are available. A wide range of starter types may be controlled by the MM2 using two contactor outputs and two auxiliary outputs. One analog input can be programmed by the user. A programmable undervoltage auto restart function is available. Motor protection features for the most common causes of failure are provided to prevent costly shut downs and rewinds. These include overload, phase unbalance, locked rotor (stall), ground fault, undercurrent and under power. As well a thermistor input can be provided to protect a hot winding. The relay also checks the contactor status at start and stop commands to indicate contactor failure. Alarms are provided to warn of additional abnormal conditions. The MM2 has three mounting configurations: chassis mount, panel mount without a display, and panel mount with a display. All three models have a 2 wire RS485 ModBus RTU protocol communication port operating at up to 19,200 bps. The panel mount models have a stop key and 9 status LEDs. The panel mount with display models have a 2 by 20 line display, 2 additional LEDs, and a keypad, which allows full local access without a computer.
I I I I
Undervoltage auto restart Outputs: 2 contactor, 2 programmable Inputs: 6 fixed, 10 programmable 1 analog input

I I I I
Display phase current, ground current, thermal capacity, analog input, power, energy, etc. Trip record and pre-trip values Maintenance information Self-test
User Interfaces
I I I
RS485 ModBus, 1200 - 19,200 bps Display model for local interface Up to 11 status LEDs
Features
I I I I
Reduces MCC and field wiring Replaces timers, relays, protective devices, meters, panel indicators Panel mount with or without display Chassis mounting available
GE Power Management
255

The MM2 is available with different protection and control features depending on the model ordered as outlined in the Model Table.
Ground fault (50G/51G)

The ground fault level is measured as a percentage of the CT primary. Ground overcurrent can be detected either from the residual connection of the phase CTs or from the zero sequence CT. A delay time is set to prevent nuisance alarms from momentary surges. Both a ground fault alarm and trip are provided. The alarm can be set below the trip level to get an early warning of insulation breakdown.
shearpin, loss of pump flow, etc., which may result in only a small change in current is provided by the under power alarm.
Overload (49/51)
An overload trip is caused when the thermal capacity value equals 100%. Thermal capacity used is calculated from accumulated I2t value and chosen overload curves. True RMS current sensing ensures correct response to the heating effect of harmonics. One of 12 different I2t time-overcurrent overload curves may be selected from 8 standard curves and 4 NEMA compatible curves.
Of the 12 overload curves available 4 are NEMA compatible time/current overload curves
100000
Contactor Failure
The MM2 monitors the contactor while performing start and stop commands. If the contactor does not change status (open to closed or closed to open) an open control circuit or welded contactor alarm is triggered.
Overtemperature (49)
An input from motor winding thermistors is available. The MM2 can accept both positive temperature coefficient (PTC) and negative temperature coefficient (NTC) sensors. A thermistor level can be selected for both alarm and trip.
Additional Alarms
The MM2 has programmable alarms to warn of a number of abnormal conditions. These include: acceleration time exceeded, abnormal inverter starter, incomplete start, motor greasing, contactor inspection, motor stop time, analog input, and process interlock switch open.
Cooling Time 10
10000
1000
After an overload trip the thermal capacity value will decrease exponentially to model the cooling characteristic of the motor. An overload trip can normally be reset when the thermal capacity value decreases to 15%. A stopped motor cooling time can be set to determine how long it takes for a stopped motor to reach steady state ambient temperature from its maximum allowable temperature.
Starters
The MM2 can control a variety of starter types using the contactor outputs. Contactor A is used for full voltage non-reversing starters. Contactor A and B are used for reversing, two speed, autotransformer, inverter, wye-delta open transition, slip ring, and part winding starters. Contactors A, B, and one auxiliary output are used for the reduced voltage wye-delta closed transition starter.
TIME IN SECONDS
100
Undercurrent/Under Power (37)

CURVE #
CLASS 30 10 CLASS 20 CLASS 15 CLASS 10
Both under current and under power alarms and trips are provided with time delays. Protection against failed

1 0.1 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 20 50 100
MULTIPLE OF PICKUP CURRENT (PER UNIT)
807903D4.cdr
DEVICE PROTECTION
52 480 VOLT BUS
Phase Unbalance (46)

The MM2 monitors the percentage unbalance in the motor phase currents. If a phase current unbalance of greater than 15% exists for more than 5 seconds an alarm is generated. If a phase current unbalance of greater than 30% exists for more than 5 seconds a trip occurs.
49/51 46
FUSE CONTACTOR CONTACTOR A (FORWARD/WYE) CONTACTOR B (REVERSE/DELTA) AUX 1 RELAY PHASE PT 59 27 AUX 2 RELAY CONTROL INPUTS 4 - 20mA INPUT
overload phase unbalance (single phase) welded/open contactor 50G/51G ground fault 48 locked rotor/stalled rotor 49 hot winding (thermistor) 37 undercurrent/under power 27 undervoltage 59 overvoltage
STANDARD PROTECTION
OPTION 2 ENHANCEMENT
Locked/Stalled Rotor (48)

Mechanical equipment such as pumps or fans can be quickly damaged if it gets jammed resulting in a locked rotor stall. The MM2 will trip when the running current exceeds the stalled rotor trip level after the programmed time delay. If stall protection is not required this feature may be set to OFF. This feature is disabled during the inrush of motor starting.
PHASE CT 51 49 37 46 GROUND CT WINDING THERMISTOR 51G 49
MOTOR MANAGER 2
PROCESS PLC OR TRANSDUCER
THERMISTOR MOTOR
LOAD
RS485 REMOTE COMMUNICATION 1200-19K2 BAUD

807621B9.dwg
256
Motor Protection

Undervoltage Auto Restart
It is possible to automatically restart the motor after a momentary power loss if this feature is enabled. When the control voltage drops below the dropout voltage the contactors are de-energized. The MM2 can initiate timers to restart selected drives upon the return of supply voltage. If control voltage is restored within the programmed restart time it will be restarted immediately. If the control voltage takes longer to be restored the MM2 can be programmed to attempt to restart the motor after a programmed time delay.
USER INTERFACES
Display and Control Keys
The panel mount model has a large STOP key which allows the user to stop the motor from the faceplate of the MM2. When both options are ordered with the MM2, the panel mount model may be ordered with a 2 line 40 character display and additional control keys. The display and keypad can be used for local programming, to show information on alarms and trips, and to display metering and monitoring values.
Up to 5 default messages can be selected to automatically scan sequentially when the motor is running and the MM2 is left unattended
Metering
The MM2 meters and displays: I I I I
RMS current of each phase ground fault leakage current motor load as a % of full load current thermal capacity used (%) according to I2t history and chosen overload curve; hot/cold ratio is used to model heating when running below full motor current % unbalance power (kW) energy (kWh) voltage analog input
Outputs
The MM2 has one or two contactors (A and B). There are also two auxiliary programmable output relays available on the MM2. These two outputs can be assigned to any one of 31 functions.
I I I I I
Trip Record
When the MM2 issues a trip command a trip record is generated. This includes the cause of the trip and pre-trip actual values.
Indicator LEDs
The panel mount MM2 has 9 status LEDs. The display model has 2 additional LEDs which indicate auto mode or manual control mode.
10
Switched Inputs
The MM2 has up to 6 fixed control inputs. These are used for start A and B, stop, local isolator, and contactor A and B status. The MM2 also has up to 10 programmable switch inputs. Each input can have one of 33 interlock functions assigned to it. Once a function is assigned to one interlock input that function cannot be assigned to any other interlock input.
Statistics and Maintenance

The MM2 records statistical data about relay and motor operation. The MM2 also allows the user to set the interval at which a number of routine maintenance tasks should be performed. When these times are exceeded an alarm is generated. These include: I motor greasing interval: number of
hours after which motor bearings must be lubricated I contactor inspection: number of starts after which contactor contacts must be inspected for wear I maximum motor stopped time: The maximum number of hours that the motor can be left not running
Communication
The MM2 uses a ModBus RTU RS485 connection for communication. Up to 32 MM2s can be daisy chained together on a single communication channel. The MM2 supports operation at 1200 to 19,200 bps. A RS232/485 converter module may be used to connect a personal computer to the MM2.
Analog Input
The analog input can be scaled to user defined values. High and low alarm and trip setpoints are recorded with time delays.
Cost Effective MCC Wiring with MM2
One MM2 is typically mounted in each starter of a motor control center
CONVENTIONAL MCC
SUPERVISORY CONTROL SYSTEM
REMOTE CONTROL
MCC WITH MOTOR MANAGER 2

SUPERVISORY CONTROL SYSTEM
STOP
STOP STOPPED RUNNING TRIPPED
MULTIWIRE CONTROL CABLE
PLACED BY RE
REPEAT FOR EACH STARTER
TWO WIRE CONTROL CABLE
LOCAL MCC
120/240 VAC
STOP
START CONTACTOR CONTACTOR TRIP STOP CONTACTOR
TO OTHER STARTERS IN MCC
DIGITAL CONTROL/ MONITOR RS485 TWISTEDPAIR MOTOR MANAGER 2
120/240 VAC FIELD STOP CONTACTOR

AUTO START A SETPOINT
RUNNING STOPPED TRIPPED ALARM FAULT
CONTACTOR A MESSAGE CONTACTOR B AUX 1 AUX 2
O/L
GROUND
STALL
THERMISTOR
U/C
ACCEL
TRIP
MANUAL
START B
ACTUAL
RESET
STOP
VALUE
STORE
MM2 Motor Manager 2
807680A6.cdr
Motor Protection
257

USER INTERFACES
Software
The MM2 is provided with a free communications program called MM2PC. It runs on a personal computer under Windows. It allows access to all the features of the MM2 with easy to use pull down menus. Using this program it is possible to: I program or modify setpoints I load or save setpoints from or to a
disk read actual values from the MM2 monitor status read pre-trip data and trip record display dynamic trending of actual values I get help on any topic I print the instruction manual from disk
MODELS
Mounting Configurations
The MM2 can be ordered in three mounting configurations; the chassis mount, the panel mount without display and the panel mount with display.
The chassis mount model is the black box version of the MM2. It is mounted inside the motor control center (MCC) The panel mount with display model is the Top of the Line MM2
I I I I
Windows based software is supplied with the MM2
The panel mount without display model is mounted on the MCC panel with the stop button exposed to the operator. Nine status indicator LEDs are provided
The panel mount with display model may be ordered when both option packages are ordered. It is mounted on the front panel of the MCC with its 2 by 20 alphanumeric display, full keypad, and 11 status LEDs exposed to the operator for complete local viewing and setpoint programming. The setpoints can also be loaded into the relay through the RS485 communications port.
10
Option Packages
Option package 1 increases the control and diagnostic features available. It includes: I process control and process inputs I undervoltage auto restart I diagnostics including alarms, pre-trip
data, and historical statistics about the use and performance of the motor and drive
The chassis mount and panel mount without display models come with all the standard features and may be ordered with one or both of the option packages. The setpoints are loaded into these MM2s through the RS485 communications port from a personal computer running the MM2PC program.
Option package 2 increases the protection features and input options. It includes: I 2nd contactor control, including two
more control inputs
I single phase VT input used to calculate and display the kW and kWh absorbed by the drive I enhanced protection including five more protection features I motor winding thermistor input
Model Table: The MM2 is available in chassis mount or panel mount models. Both models may be enhanced with two option packages. Panel mount models with display are only available with both options
STANDARD Protection & Control overload (49/51) phase unbalance (46) welded/open contactor
OPTION 1 ADDS undervoltage auto restart diagnostics
OPTION 2 ADDS ground fault (50G/51G), rapid trip locked/stalled rotor (48) overtemperature thermistor (49) undercurrent/under power (37) overvoltage (59)/undervoltage (27) 2 control
Inputs
4 control 2 programmable
8 programmable 1 analog auxiliary 1 and 2
thermistor input single phase voltage input for kW & kWh contactor control (B)
Relays Mounting Configurations
contactor control (A) chassis mount panel mount without display
chassis mount chassis mount panel mount without display panel mount without display panel mount with display available when both options are ordered
258
Motor Protection

FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY: 2 line, 40 character illuminated display communicates all messages in simple English for easy interpretation by users unfamiliar with unit. RELAY INDICATORS: RELAY A: Contactor A energized. RELAY B: Contactor B energized. AUX 1: User programmable relay 1 energized. AUX 2: User programmable relay 2 energized.
CONTROL KEYS: AUTO: Selects operation of start via communication port. MANUAL: Selects manual operation of motor using start key. START A: Energize contactor A. START B: Energize contactor B. STOP: De-energize contactors.
STATUS INDICATORS: RUNNING: Contactor is energized and motor is running. STOPPED: Contactor is not energized and motor is not running. TRIPPED: Contactor is not energized. Motor is not running. The MM2 has tripped the motor due to a fault. Normally a cause of trip message will be displayed. ALARM: One or more alarm conditions are present. Normally a cause of alarm message will be displayed. FAULT: An internal fault or abnormal condition has been detected. The MM2 may need to be replaced or serviced.
10
PROGRAM KEYS: ACTUAL VALUES: Press to enter actual values mode to display actual motor values such as current, ground leakage, thermal capacity. SETPOINTS: Press to enter setpoint mode to alter or examine setpoints. STORE: Save a newly entered setpoint. RESET: Reset the MM2 after a trip. MESSAGE: Move to the desired setpoint or actual value message. VALUE: Increment or decrement currently displayed setpoint value.
Rear View
SUPPLY VOLTAGE required to power the MM2 COMMUNICATIONS RS485 2 wire serial communication port operates at 1200 - 19,200 bps for remote commands, monitoring and setpoint store. ModBus RTU protocol. SWITCH INPUTS Opto-isolated 120 VAC live inputs for various interlock functions. The interlock inputs are fully programmable and can be assigned to such functions as setpoint access, plant interlock, test, and various others. 4 RELAYS I Contactor A: direct on line / forward / wye I Contactor B: reverse / delta I User programmable relay (AUX 1) I User programmable relay (AUX 2) ANALOG INPUT 4 - 20mA input for process control monitoring / alarming / tripping. THERMISTOR NTC or PTC thermistor input for hot winding detection. GROUND CT INPUT 5 amp or 50:0.025 ground fault input for residually connected phase CTs or separate core balance (zero sequence) CT.
CONTROL POWER 120/240 VAC supply voltage selector switch and fuse access door
Ground safety and surge
VOLTAGE INPUT Phase A voltage input for voltage and power monitoring. PHASE CT INPUTS 3 isolated phase CT inputs that accept 1 amp or 5 amp CT.
Motor Protection
259

TYPICAL WIRING
RESIDUAL GROUND CONNECTION CT PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT PHASE A TWO PHASE CT CONNECTION CT PHASE C DIRECT CONNECTION
1 5A
10
11
12
1 5A
10
11
12
1 5A
1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
50: 0.025 COM
1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
50: 0.025 COM
1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A
1A COM
PHASE A CT
PHASE B CT
PHASE C CT
GROUND CT
PHASE A CT
PHASE B CT
PHASE C CT
GROUND CT
PHASE A CT
PHASE B CT
PHASE C CT
480V C A B A C B
ISOLATOR SWITCH
CONTACTOR A L1 A A L2 L3 480V
CORE BALANCE ( ZERO SEQUENCE ) CT CT CT CT PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND
L1 L2 L3
MOTOR
110V OR 120V ONLY Vab VT
15 16
VT COM
1
5A
10 11 12
10
VT
50: 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 1A COM 5A 0.025 COM
PHASE A CT
PHASE B CT
PHASE C CT
GROUND CT
PROGRAMMABLE SWITCH INPUTS
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
STOP
INTERLOCK INPUT 1 INTERLOCK INPUT 2 INTERLOCK INPUT 3 INTERLOCK INPUT 4 INTERLOCK INPUT 5 INTERLOCK INPUT 6 INTERLOCK INPUT 7 INTERLOCK INPUT 8 INTERLOCK INPUT 9 INTERLOCK INPUT 10 STOP START A START B ISOLATOR STATUS NO CONTACTOR A STATUS NO CONTACTOR B STATUS NO
ANALOG IN ANALOG IN SERIAL GROUND SERIAL SERIAL 485 485
19 20 38 39
4 20mA ANALOG INPUT
RS485
40 17 18
STATOR THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
GE Power Management
50
51 52
120V FIXED SWITCH INPUTS LIVE
*
START
MM2
Motor Manager 2
53 54
*
A
OPTION 1 OPTION 2
55 56
57 SWITCH COMMON 58 SWITCH COMMON

GROUND CONTROL VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR A CONTACTOR B
AUX 1
AUX 2
GND GND SAFETY SURGE
N COM NO COM NO 1 NC 1COM 1 NO 2 NC 2COM 2 NO NC COM NO
COIL
13 14
36 37
34 35
CONTACTOR A
32 33
26 27 28 29 30 31 23 24 25 21 22
807601DB.dwg
NOTES: 1 ) RELAY CONTACT STATE SHOWN WITH CONTROL POWER NOT APPLIED. 2 ) DRAWING SHOWN WITH ALL OPTIONS. SEE ORDER CODE TO DETERMINE TERMINALS INSTALLED. MUST BE CONNECTED 3 ) TERMINALS MARKED WITH BEFORE MOTOR CAN BE STARTED.
MCC GROUND BUS
L AC CONTROL VOLTAGE 120 / 240 VAC N
4 ) DIRECT CONNECTION WITH NO CTs CAN BE USED FOR MOTOR FULL LOAD CURRENT BELOW 10 AMPS ( TYPICALLY LESS THAN 10 HP ). NOTE: CT TERMINALS RATED FOR 600V.
260
Motor Protection

MM2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES Trip Time: 200 ms up to 10 sec Accuracy: 2% of trip time over 10 sec Detection Level: 1% of primary CT amps GROUND FAULT TRIP TIME Accuracy: - 0 ms, + 50 ms, 0.0 = less than 50 ms SINGLE PHASE (PHASE UNBALANCE) Range: Greater than 30% U/B trip, alarm 15% Accuracy: 2 percentage points Trip Delay: 5 sec, 1 sec Calculation Method: If IAV IFLC : | IM - IAV | x 100 IAV If IAV < IFLC : | IN - IAV | x 100 IFLC Where: IAV = average phase currents IM = current in a phase with maximum deviation from IAV IFLC = motor full load current setting UNDERCURRENT Range: Delay Range: Accuracy: 10-100% of motor FLC, or OFF 1 to 60 sec 1 sec OUTPUTS RELAY CONTACTS VOLTAGE MM2 CONTACTOR A & B AND AUX 2 OUTPUT RELAYS VOLTAGE MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY BREAK CONTINUOUS 0.2 sec 30 VDC 10 A 30 A 10 A RESISTIVE 125 VDC 10 A 30 A 0.5 A 250 VDC 10 A 30 A 0.3 A 30 VDC 10 A 30 A 5A INDUCTIVE 125 VDC 10 A 30 A 0.25 A (L/R = 7ms) 250 VDC 10 A 30 A 0.15 A RESISTIVE 120 VAC 10 A 30 A 10 A 250 VAC 10 A 30 A 10 A INDUCTIVE 120 VAC 10 A 30 A 10 A (PF = 0.4) 225 VAC 10 A 30 A 8A CONFIGURATION CONTACTOR A & B FORM A AUX RELAY 2 FORM C CONTACT MATERIAL SILVER ALLOY (AgCdO) MAX OPERATING VOLTAGE 280 VAC, 250 VDC MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE LOAD 5 VDC, 100 mA MM2 AUX 1 OUTPUT RELAY VOLTAGE MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY BREAK 0.2 sec RESISTIVE 30 VDC 5A 15 A 5A 125 VDC 5A 15 A 0.25 A INDUCTIVE 30 VDC 5A 15 A 2.5 A (L/R = 7ms) 125 VDC 5A 15 A 0.1 A RESISTIVE 120 VAC 5A 15 A 5A 250 VAC 5A 15 A 5A INDUCTIVE 120 VAC 5A 15 A 5A (PF = 0.4) 225 VAC 5A 15 A 3A CONFIGURATION AUX RELAY 1 DUAL FORM C CONTACT MATERIAL SILVER ALLOY (AgCdO) MAX OPERATING VOLTAGE 280 VAC, 125 VDC POWER SUPPLY SUPPLY VOLTAGE AC Nominal: 120 VAC, range 80-135 VAC 240 VAC, range 150-270 VAC* Frequency: 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: 25 VA (Maximum) 7 VA (Nominal) *CE units limited to 250 V unless external fuse rated to 300 V is used.
COMMUNICATIONS Type: RS485 2 wire, half duplex Baud Rate: 1,200-19,200 bps Protocol: ModBus RTU Functions: Read/write setpoints, read actual values, execute commands, read coil status, read device status, loopback test
UNDERVOLTAGE SUPPLY VOLTAGE Undervoltage: 65 % of nominal (120 VAC or 240 VAC) immediate restart for maximum dip time of 0.1-0.5 sec or OFF delayed restart for maximum dip time of 0.1-10.0 sec/unlimited time Delay Restart Range: 0.2-300 sec Delay Restart Accuracy: 0.2 sec MONITORING VOLTAGE INPUT/POWER READING Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Voltage Full Scale: 1.5 x VT Primary Voltage Accuracy: 2% of VT Primary or 2% of reading, whichever is greater Power Accuracy: 5% of nominal or 5% of reading, whichever is greater Input Voltage: Nominal: 120 VAC or 110 VAC Max: 150 VAC VT Burden: 0.01 VA ACCELERATION TIME Range: 0.5 to 125 sec, or OFF Accuracy: 0.5 sec THERMAL COOLING TIMES Range: 5-1080 min when motor stopped 50% of motor stopped value when motor running Accuracy: 1 min STALLED ROTOR Range: Delay Range: Accuracy: 1.15 to 4.50 x FLC, or OFF 0.5 to 5 sec 0.5 sec
ENVIRONMENTAL Pollution Degree: Overvoltage Category: Insulation Voltage: Operating Temperature Range: Dust and Moisture Rating: IP Class:
2 2 300 V 0C to 60C NEMA Type 12+12K IEC 529 - IP53
TYPE TESTS CSA: UL: Transients:
METERING PHASE CURRENT INPUTS Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Range: 0.1 to 8 x phase CT primary amps setpoint Full Scale: 8 x phase CT primary amps setpoint Accuracy: 2% of Phase CT primary amps setpoint or 2% of reading, whichever is greater GROUND FAULT CURRENT INPUT Conversion: True RMS, sample time 1.67 ms Range: 0.1 to 1.0 x G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary CT) 0.5 to 15.0 amps (50:0.025 CT) Full Scale: 1.5 x G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary CT) 15 A (50:0.025 CT) Accuracy: 4% of G/F CT primary amps setpoint (5 A secondary CT) 0.3 A (50:0.025) CT
INPUTS THERMISTOR INPUTS Sensor Types: positive temperature coefficient PTC RHOT=100-30,000 negative temperature coefficient NTC RHOT=100-30,000 Delay: 1 sec Accuracy: 5% or 100 (whichever is greater) ANALOG INPUT Range: 4-20 mA Accuracy: 1% full scale Alarm: programmable 4-20 mA Trip: programmable 4-20 mA CT INPUTS CT INPUT BURDEN (A) (VA) () 1 0.009 0.01 Phase CT (1 A) 5 0.2 0.01 20 3.5 0.01 5 0.04 0.002 Phase CT (5 A) 25 0.9 0.002 100 16 0.002 5 0.04 0.002 Ground CT (5 A) 25 1.1 0.002 100 17 0.002 0.025 0.07 116 Ground CT (50:0.025) 0.1 1.19 119 0.5 30.5 122 1 SEC x CT 100 100 100 WITHSTAND 5 SEC x CT CONTINUOUS x CT 40 3 40 3 40 3
Impulse: RFI: Static: Hipot:
Approved File No. LR41286 Recognized File No. E83849 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory/Fast Risetime Transients IEC 801-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Requirements IEC 255-5 5 kV Impulse Voltage Test 150 MHz, 450 MHz 5 W Handheld Transmitter @ 25 cm IEC 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge 1500 V, 1 min all input > 30 V
10
PACKAGING Max. Weight: 4 lbs (1.8 kg) Shipping Dimensions: 8.3" x 5.625" x 5.8" (211 mm x 143 mm x 147 mm)
FUSE TYPE/RATING 0.5 A 250 V Fast blow, high breaking capacity
INSTALLATION WARNING: Ventilation Requirements: Cleaning Requirements:
HAZARD may result if the product is not used for its intended purpose None None
Phase CT (1 A) Phase CT (5 A) Ground CT (5 A)
50:0.025 GROUND INPUT WITHSTAND Continuous 150 mA Maximum 12 A for 3 cycles 50:0.025 input can be driven by a GE Power Management 50:0.025 CT.
CERTIFICATION CE: CSA: UL: Quality Assurance System:
Conforms to IEC 947-1, IEC 1010-1 Approved File No. LR41286 Recognized under E83849 Registered by QMI to CSA CAN3.Z299.3-1985 and ISO 9001-1994
DIMENSIONS
PANEL MOUNT FRONT VIEW 7.36" (187)
RUNNING STOPPED TRIPPED ALARM FAULT
PANEL MOUNT SIDE VIEW 1.0" (25) 3.95" (100) 0.10" (2.5)
PANEL MOUNT CUTOUT 0.35" (9) 7.10" (180) 6.90" (175)
PANEL
4.13" (105)
PANEL
0.13" (3)
1.15" (29) 2.31" (59)
0.30" (7.5)
807629C5.dwg
Inches (mm)
CHASSIS MOUNT SIDE VIEW
CHASSIS MOUNT CUTOUT 7.50" (191) 7.24" (184) 6 x 0.218" Dia. HOLES (6)
4.35" (111)
4.17" (106)
CONTACTOR B AUX 1 AUX 2
3.47" (88)
CONTACTOR A
CUTOUT
MM2 Motor Manager 2
BASE PLATE PROFILE
8 x 0.078" R (2)
Motor Protection
261
3.47" (88)
4.07" (103)
1.73" (44)

Motor protection and control shall be provided by an intelligent control device capable of manual or automatic control. Protection features available shall include trip and alarms for: I I I I I I I I
overload with 12 overload curves phase unbalance welded/open contactor ground fault locked/stalled rotor thermistor for hot winding under current and under power additional alarms for abnormal conditions
I 2 contactors (A & B) I 2 auxiliary relays, each of which can

be assigned to any one of 31 functions I one analog input with high and low alarm and trip setpoints I undervoltage auto restart
I power (kW) I energy (kWh) I RMS voltage The motor manager shall generate a trip report each time a trip command is issued. It shall include the cause of the trip and the pre-trip metering values. Statistical data and routine maintenance alarms shall be included features of the motor manager. A RS485 ModBus RTU connection shall be used for communication. It shall support operation at 1200 to 19,200 bps. A RS232/485 converter module can be used to connect a personal computer to the motor manager. Software shall be provided to allow easy access to all features. A panel mount model shall be available with a 2 x 20 character display, control keys, and 11 LEDs to provides local access without a computer.
Motor current sensing shall be from external 1 amp or 5 amp secondary CTs. Ground sensing shall be from an external core balance CT or via residually connected phase CTs. No CTs shall be required for up to 10 amps full load current. Metering values shall include: I I I I I I I
RMS current of each phase RMS ground fault leakage current thermal capacity analog input motor load thermal capacity used unbalance
Control features available shall include: I 6 fixed control inputs for start A & B,
stop, local isolator, contractor A & B status I 10 programmable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any one of 33 functions
10
ORDERING
MM2
MM2
* * * *
PD P C 1 2 120 240
Basic unit Panel Mount With Display * Panel Mount Without Display Chassis Mount (Black Box) Option 1 Process control, process input, undervoltage auto restart, diagnostics Option 2 Enhanced protection, power (kW), thermistor, 2nd contactor control Control voltage 120 VAC Control voltage 240 VAC
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon
Note:*Only Available when both options are ordered.
Accessories
MM2PC software package supplied free RS232 TO RS485 CONVERTER box designed for harsh industrial environments 5A PHASE CT: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 1A PHASE CT: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 50:0.025 GROUND CT for sensitive ground detection on high resistance grounded systems COLLAR for reduced depth mounting
Modifications
MOD601: 240 VAC switch inputs - allows the use of external 240 VAC supply to power switch inputs MOD602: 24 - 48 VDC switch inputs - allows the use of external 24 - 48 VDC supply to power switch inputs MOD603: ESD relay - converts AUX 2 relay into an emergency shutdown relay MOD605: Removable rear terminals - allows terminals 13 - 58 to be unplugged from the MM2 MOD610: Conformal coating MOD613: 240 VAC VT input MOD616: MM2 with remote display

See pages 15 - 18.
262
Motor Protection
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
BUS 1000/2000
Modular bus bar protection system.
The BUS 1000/2000 is a solid state, high speed protection system for the detection of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults on bus bar installations. It can be used to protect high voltage bus bar installations of any voltage.
C30
I/O control, event recording, and digital oscillography for bay control and substation automation.
The C30, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital controller that provides digital I/O and programmable logic that may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system.
C60
Breaker management relay with synchrocheck, autoreclosure, and event analysis for breaker applications.
The C60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides complete breaker monitoring and control including breaker failure protection, synchrocheck, autoreclosure, and power metering in one integrated package.
DBT
Supervision of the integrity of the breakers tripping and closing circuits.
The DBT is a digital relay that supervises the integrity of the breakers tripping and closing circuits. It is available as a single phase or three phase version.
DBF
Backup protection for the primary circuit breaker.
The DBF is a digital breaker failure relay that provides phase and ground backup protection if the primary circuit breaker fails to clear a system fault.
SBC
Phase and ground backup protection for the primary circuit breaker.
The Type SBC is the general designation of a family of static breaker backup relays that provide phase and ground backup protection if the primary circuit breaker fails to clear a system fault.
DRS
Multifunction recloser system for distinct single and three phase programs.
The DRS is a multi-function microprocessor recloser system with a set of algorithms to perform distinct recloser single and three phase programs. The DRS also has synchronism check and voltage check functions. It may be applied with either one or two breakers.
SECTION 11: SPECIAL FUNCTIONS BUS 1000/2000 ......................265 C30 ..........................................269 C60 ..........................................273
MCP
Digital protection and control of capacitor banks.
The MCP is a microprocessor based digital relay system that provides protection, control and monitoring functions for medium voltage capacitor banks.
DBT .........................................277 DBF..........................................279 SBC .........................................282 DRS .........................................283 MCP.........................................287
MIV
Three phase and ground voltage protection relay under/overfrequency relay.
The MIV, a member of the M Family of protection relays, is a microprocessor based relay that provides voltage, frequency or voltage and frequency protection for a wide range of applications.
MIV..........................................291
263
264
Modular bus bar protection system.
BUS 1000/2000
Bus Bar Protection
Applications
I I
Protection of HV bus bar installations Single or multiple bus bar
Protection
I I I I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The BUS 1000/2000 is a solid state, high speed protection system for the detection of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults on bus bar installations. It can be used to protect high voltage bus bar installations of any voltage. BUS 2000 models add to the functionality of BUS 1000 the metering, monitoring, event recording, waveform capture, and IRIG-B time synchronization capabilities of the DMS metering and monitoring module. The main protective function is a three phase differential overcurrent relay with percentage restraint and stabilizing resistors. A very sensitive differential overcurrent function is provided to give an alarm and to block the trip output in case the measuring function inputs are accidentally disconnected during normal operation. An optional breaker failure function which is associated with the differential protection can be provided in the same package. Overcurrent units for individual trip supervision of the breakers are also an option. The protection does not require the use of dedicated current transformers, nor do the current transformers have to be of the same ratio or characteristics. Special intermediate current transformers of the appropriate ratio and characteristics are supplied as part of the protection system. This characteristic of the BUS 1000/2000 allows its application to existing installations. For use in double bus bar arrangements with bus bar selector line switches, the BUS 1000/2000 system includes bistable (two position) auxiliary units that connect the currents from the secondary of the intermediate current transformers (typically 1 A nominal) into the appropriate input of the selected differential unit. One differential unit is used per bus bar. The modular design allows the configuration of different systems adapted to the specific characteristics of the bus bar to be protected. The modules have test points for line currents, restraint and differential magnitudes, for ease of installation and maintenance. Depending on the application, the protection system is located in one or more standard 19 inch rack cases, or in ready to install cabinets.
Differential overcurrent with percentage restraint Stabilizing resistors Very sensitive differential overcurrent function Optional breaker failure function Optional overcurrent supervision Independent trip and alarm outputs Optional 27 Optional 59 Optional lockout outputs (86)
11

I I I I
Event record IRIG-B time synchronization Monitoring function Current differential oscillography
User Interfaces
I I I I
Test points for ease of installation Optional test system Two RS232 communication ports Display and keypad for the monitoring module
Features
I I I
Measuring function supervision Modular design One or more standard 19" rack cases
GE Power Management
265
BUS Bus Bar Protection

PROTECTION
Differential Overcurrent
The main protective function of the BUS is the three phase differential overcurrent relay with percentage restraint and stabilizing resistors. For high magnitude external faults, the impossibility of obtaining a completely balanced differential circuit due to the differences in the CT makes the protection functions provided in the BUS 1000/2000 necessary to provide current differential protection. To prevent operation on these unbalances, a current differential relay with percentage restraint is used. The differential current is defined as the difference of the restraint currents. It is a variable quantity due to the effect of the restraining currents. The smaller of the restraint currents is called the through current. The differential current required to operate the relay is a fixed percentage of the through current. As the through current increases the level of differential current must increase to operate the relay. The stability of the protection means that there is no false operation under severe external faults which saturate one of the line current transformers. The stability is assured by selecting the proper combination of percentage restraint and stabilizing resistor values depending only on the total resistance of the saturated circuit seen from the relay. The restraint percentage may be set from 0.5 to 0.8 and the stabilizing resistor is set to 250 . A very sensitive differential overcurrent function is provided to give an alarm and to block the trip output in case the measuring function inputs are accidentally disconnected during normal operations. The principle of operation of BUS 1000/2000 allows selective and high speed detection and clearing of any type of fault occurring inside the protected zone.
FEATURES
Outputs
The BUS 1000/2000 has independent trip and alarm outputs per line. The operating time of an output relay is less than 10 ms.
Measuring Function
The measuring function is supervised for error free operation.
Testing
The modules have test points for line currents, restraint and differential magnitudes, for ease of installation and maintenance. An optional test system may be used to check the operation and alarm functions under normal operating conditions.

The BUS 2000 includes a monitorization module. This unit contains event record, alphanumeric LCD display, RS232 or fiber optic communications interface and IRIG-B time synchronization. This unit helps the protection engineer in the post-fault studies, providing and storing relevant information about the unit operation. The monitorization unit is mounted in a 19" rack case.
Modular Design
The modular design allows the configuration of different systems adapted to the specific characteristics of the bus bar to be protected. Depending on the application, the protection system is located in one or more standard 19 inch rack cases, or in ready to install cabinets.
BUS 2000 double bus differential and breaker failure protection system
11
Optional Breaker Failure

A breaker failure function (per line) associated with the differential protection can be provided in the same package. The pickup can be set from 0.2 to 3.3 A. The reset time is less than 12 ms, and the discrimination time is 100 to 730 ms.
Optional Overcurrent Units

Overcurrent units for individual trip supervision of the breakers can be provided in the same package. The pickup can be set from 0.2 to 3.3 A.
266
Bus Protection

TYPICAL WIRING
52 P1 p1 s1 p1 s1 p1 s1 TI P1 TIX 3 P1 TIX 2 P1 TIX P1 1 p2 s2 p2 s2 p2 s2 T1 P6 OTHER EQUIPMENT
52 P6 p1 s1 p1 s1 p1 s1 TIX P6 3 TIX P6 2 TIX P6 1 p2 s2 p2 s2 p2 s2 OTHER EQUIPMENT
POSITION 1 87 RE P1 TM 87 1 RD 87 TDIF 1
TP1 TP2
POSITION 6
P6 TM 1 1 P6 TF
87 1 UM
TP3
87 RF
P1 TF
11
2 87 RF P1 TF P6 TF 2
87 2 RD 87 TDIF 2
TP4
TP5
87 2 UM
TP6
87 3 RD 87 TDIF 3
TP7
TP8
3 87 RF P1 TF P6 TF
87 3 UM
TP9
87 AL
LEGEND:
52 P1 ... P6 T1 TIX 87 Power circuit breaker Positions 1 to 6 Main current transformer Auxilliary current transformer Differential unit RE RD RF UM AL Stabilizing resistor Differential voltage resistor Restraint voltage resistor Measuring unit Alarm unit TDIF TF TM TP1 ... TP9 87DISP Differential circuit input current transformer Restraint circuits input current transformer Transducer for input current measuring studs Restraint and operating quantities test studs Trip relays 719750A2.CDR
Bus Protection
267

BUS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION STABILIZING RESISTOR 250 ALARM FUNCTION Pickup: Operation Time: 0.027 A 10 sec MONITORING SENSITIVITY (FOR INTERNAL FAULTS) Adjustable from 0.2 to 2.0 A OPERATING TIME (INCLUDING OUTPUT RELAY) Less than 10 ms INPUTS LINE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS REQUIREMENTS Relation between maximum and minimum current transformer ratio on all positions connected to the same bus bar: 10 max Maximum saturation voltage required (for In = 5 A): 100 V INTERMEDIATE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS Standard ratios: 5:2 5:1.33 5:1 5:0.5 5:0.2 Other ratios, according to application, available. DC BURDENS 125 VDC systems (mA) Normal Tripped Single bus system 280 670 Trip output (per line) 65 Line supervision and breaker 70 140 failure units (per line)
BREAKER FAILURE (OPTION) Pickup: 0.2 to 3.3 A Reset Time: <12 ms First Stage Timer: 100-730 ms 2nd & 3rd Stage: upon request
TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, one min Impulse Voltage Withstand: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 sec, 0.5 J Interference Test Withstand: ANSI/IEEE C37.90 and IEC 255-5
METERING Current: In = 1 A Thermal Ratings: Per Line Input: Continuous: 2 x In Three sec: 50 x In One sec: 100 x In Total Current Flow Through the Bus Bar: Continuous: 20 x In
ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -40C to +70C (-40C also available) Operation: -20C to +65C APPROVALS Compliant *Specifications subject to change without notice.
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW
19.00" (482mm)
SIDE VIEW
13.74" (349mm) 1.38" (35mm)
PANEL MOUNTING
17.32" (440mm) 18.31" (465mm)
7.00" (178mm)
7.00" (178mm)
11
4.00" (102mm)
CUTOUT
INCHES (mm)
PANEL
4 x 0.28" Dia. (7mm)

719752A5.dwg
ORDERING
The BUS 1000/2000 is a modular system formed by individual functions and combinations.(The model number must be confirmed by the manufacturer.)
BUS * * * * * * * * 00
BUS 1 2 1 2 ** A D 1 2 2 3 1 2 C D E F
BUS system in standard 19 inch racks Without numerical monitorization module With numerical monitorization module Single busbar Double busbar Specify the number of lines + bus coupler (two digits) (Add 1 for bus couples in case of double busbar) Without cabinet In a 787" x 315" x 315" cabinet (2000mm x 800mm x 800 mm) Without breaker failure With breaker failure With test rack & short circuitable resistors Without test rack & short circuitable resistors 50 Hz 60 Hz Auxiliary voltage 125 VDC Auxiliary voltage 250 VDC Auxiliary voltage 220 VDC Auxiliary voltage 110 VDC
Auxiliary CTs are loose supplied unless otherwise specified.

See pages 15 - 18.
Accessories
Cabinet for BUS 2000 19" racks Test system
268
Bus Protection
I/O control, event recording, and digital oscillography for bay control and substation automation.
C30
Controller
Applications
I I I
Bay control Substation logic Substation automation
Control
DESCRIPTION
The C30, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital controller that provides digital I/O and programmable logic that may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system. The relay also includes digital elements that can be used to monitor any FlexLogic operand and digital counters that can count function operations, the change of state of an external contact, or pulses from a watt-hour meter. When more than one controller is connected through the Ethernet ports using MMS/UCA2 protocol, digital states may be shared on the peer-to-peer network and logic may be distributed, increasing the processing capability. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is re-configurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The C30 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the C30 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger digital oscillography records. The URPC software is used to view these records. The C30 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is malfunctioning prior to a failure to operate.
I I I I I I
Programmable logic Timers Counters Digital elements Distributed logic (UCA2) Remote I/O expansion (UCA2)
11
Monitoring
I I I I
Digital oscillography capture Digital status HMI 1024 Event record Self diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2x20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
269
C30 Controller
MONITORING
Digital Counters
The digital counters are used to count the number of state transitions between logic 0 to logic 1. The FlexLogic operand inputs (UP and DOWN) are provided to increment or decrement the accumulated counter value. The counter can be utilized to count function operations such as the pickup or operation count of any internal relay element, the changes of state of an external contact such as a breaker auxiliary switch, or pulses from a watt-hour meter. Other FlexLogic operand inputs can be used to accomplish the following: I Reset the accumulated count to zero I Capture (freeze) the accumulated
count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and reset the count to zero I Capture (freeze) the accumulated counter value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation and continue counting
in the counter, and to block the counting operation via an input FlexLogic operand. A compare setting feature is also available that can compare an accumulated count value to a set value and indicate whether that present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set value.
problems before a trip operation is required.
Remote Inputs/Outputs
URs can exchange digital state information via the UCA2 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) mechanism. This peer-to-peer sharing of state information is essentially an addition to existing FlexLogic functionality to allow Distributed FlexLogic. Remote outputs originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each GOOSE message contains data which identifies the originator, and is transmitted when required. Remote inputs originate as GOOSE messages from remote devices. A receiving relay is programmed to capture messages from selected originating devices.
Digital Elements
There are user programmable digital elements available on the C30. A digital element can be used to monitor any FlexLogic operand, and to present a target message and/or enable event recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand. As an example, a digital element used in conjunction with a the voltage monitor on Form-A relays can be used to monitor the integrity of a trip circuit in a breaker and thus annunciate circuit
Data Logger
11
The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. Preset and block settings are available to preset the count value
Single line diagram of substation automation created with the URPC software
Single line diagram of operator interface for bay control
270
Controller
C30 Controller
TYPICAL WIRING
W 1a W 1c W 2a W 2c W 1b W 3a W 3c W 4a W 4c W 3b W 5a W 5c W 6a W 6c W 5b W 7a W 7c W 8a W 8c W 7b W 8b
CONTACT INW1a CONTACT IN W1c CONTACT INW2a CONTACT IN W2c COMMON W1b CONTACT INW3a CONTACT IN W3c CONTACT INW4a CONTACT IN W4c COMMON W3b CONTACT INW5a CONTACT IN W5c CONTACT INW6a CONTACT IN W6c COMMON W5b CONTACT INW7a CONTACT IN W7c CONTACT INW8a CONTACT IN W8c COMMON W7b SURGE DIGITAL I/O DIGITAL I/O CONTACT IN U 1a CONTACT IN U 1c CONTACT IN U 2a CONTACT IN U 2c COMMON U1b CONTACT IN U 3a CONTACT IN U 3c CONTACT IN U 4a CONTACT IN U 4c COMMON U 3b CONTACT IN U 5a CONTACT IN U 5c CONTACT IN U 6a CONTACT IN U 6c COMMON U 5b CONTACT IN U 7a CONTACT IN U 7c CONTACT IN U 8a CONTACT IN U 8c COMMON U 7b SURGE
U 1a U 1c U 2a U 2c U 1b U 3a U 3c U 4a U 4c U 3b U 5a U 5c U 6a U 6c U 5b U 7a U 7c U 8a U 8c U 7b U 8b P1a P1b P1c P2a P2b P2c P3a P3b P3c P4a P4b P4c P5a P5b P5c P6a P6b P6c P7a P7b P7c P8a P8b P8c
6D
GE Power Management
C30 CONTROLLER
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b H 8b
6E
6K
6D
H1
P1
H2
P2
H3
P3
H4
CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE
I
P4
DIGITAL I/O
P5
P6
DIGITAL I/O
P7
11
P8
6G
V I
F1
6B
T.C.
F2
M2
V I
F3
M3
V I
F4
M4
F5
F6
CONTACT IN M 5a CONTACT IN M 5c CONTACT IN M 6a CONTACT IN M 6c COMMON M5b CONTACT IN M 7a CONTACT IN M 7c CONTACT IN M 8a CONTACT IN M 8c COMMON M7b SURGE
( DC ONLY )
DIGITAL I/O
F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F 7b
DIGITAL I/O
F 8b
AC or DC
CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER
POWER SUPPLY
DC
Tx1 Rx1 10BaseF Tx2 Rx210BaseF
CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT
9D
Fibre *Optic Twisted Pair
NORMAL ALTERNATE COM 1 TEST ONLY RS485 COM 2
RS-232 DB-9 (front)
10BaseT D3b D4b D5b D5a D6a D7b
COM
CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER CPU
IRIG-B
Remote Co-axial No. 10AWG Minimum
SURGE GROUND
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X W V
GROUND BUS
U T
S R
P N M
I/O I/O
J
6
H G
6 I/O
D
9 CPU
B
1 Power Supply
I/O
* Optional
I/O
*
(Rear View)
I/O *
F 1a F 1b F 1c F 2a F 2b F 2c F 3a F 3b F 3c F 4a F 4b F 4c F 5a F 5b F 5c F 6a F 6b F 6c F 7a F 7c F 8a F 8c F 7b
M1
M 1a M 1b M 1c M 2a M 2b M 2c M 3a M 3b M 3c M 4a M 4b M 4c M 5a M 5c M 6a M 6c M 5b M 7a M 7c M 8a M 8c M 7b M 8b
UR COMPUTER
1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9

9 PIN CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECT
834700B3.CDR
Controller
271
C30 Controller
Digital I/O, digital elements, and programmable logic shall be provided in one integrated digital relay package for application as a digital controller and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The relay shall be provided in one integrated package suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. The relay shall be housed in a horizontal, 4 RU, 19 inch rack chassis configuration. It shall be a modular design to easily facilitate upgrading or repair by replacement of modules. The faceplate interface shall include an alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display, keypad, and LED target indicators. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs shall be re-configurable through the use of FlexLogic equations. The use of remote inputs and outputs in addition to hardware shall be available on the communications ports using the UCA2 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) mechanism to minimize the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring. The contact inputs shall accept wet or dry contacts. Contact outputs shall be trip rated Form-A with current and voltage circuit monitors, Form-C, or Fast Form-C for signalling. Hardware input/output capability shall be expandable. The relay shall have three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port shall be accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The second port shall be RS485 supporting ModBus RTU protocol capable of baud rates up to 115kbps. The third communications port shall be either a similar RS485 port or a 10Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2 and ModBus TCP/IP protocols. The physical port shall be 10BaseF, or redundant 10BaseF. The relay shall be supplied with supporting application software for use on a PC with Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program shall be capable of retrieving Comtrade oscillography files from the relay to display, save, or print when troubleshooting. The software shall provide the capability of editing and managing settings files to store to the relay or disk backup, while on-line or off-line. The software shall also permit the updating of new relay firmware and viewing of all trip and alarm target messages, and the 1024 time stamped events recorded by the relay. The relay clock shall be capable of being synchronized with an IRIG-B signal to allow synchronism with other connected devices.
11
ORDERING
C30 C30 C30
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F** H ** M** P** U** W** F** H** M** P**
HC VF H L 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) 8 RTD 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD 8 dcmA inputs 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module

272
Controller
Breaker management relay with breaker failure, autoreclosure, and event analysis.
C60
Applications
I I I I I I I I I I
Breaker Management Relay
Complete breaker supervision, synchrocheck, autoreclosure Breaker failure, control & monitoring
DESCRIPTION
The C60, a member of the UR family of protection relays, is a digital relay that provides complete breaker monitoring and control including breaker failure protection, synchrocheck, autoreclosure, and power metering in one integrated package. It may be used as a stand alone device or as a component of an automated substation control system. Control and monitoring functions include trip circuit supervision, breaker operation counting, breaker contact arcing current, event recording, power metering as well as input and output status. The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, features, and outputs is reconfigurable through the use of logic equations (FlexLogic). The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communications ports (minimizing the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring). Hardware input/output capability is expandable. The C60 has three communications ports that operate independently and simultaneously. The RS232 port is accessible from the faceplate of the relay. The RS485 port supports ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols and is capable of baud rates up to 115 kbps. The third communications port may be ordered as either a similar RS485 port or a 10 Mbps Ethernet port supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols. The physical Ethernet port may be ordered as 10BaseF, or redundant 10BaseF. The high baud rates of these ports enable system wide communications without sacrificing speed. The free Windows based URPC software allows complete access to all relay information, taking advantage of the PC display to provide more data at a glance in a graphical representation. Diagnostic features of the C60 include a 1024 event record that tags events with time and date. This precise time stamping allows for a determination of the sequence of events throughout a system. Events can also trigger oscillography records that consist of a 64 samples/cycle record of analog signals and digital flags, as well as a snap-shot of protection settings. The URPC software is used to view these records. The C60 utilizes flash memory technology that, coupled with the modular hardware, allows future upgrading of the relay to follow the technology curve without replacing the entire relay. Self-test functions determine the relative health of the relay and raise an alarm if the relay is mal-functioning prior to a failure to operate. An IRIG-B input is provided for time synchronization using a satellite time signal.

Breaker failure Autoreclosure Synchrocheck Breaker contact arcing current Pole disagreement Trip circuit supervision Breaker operations counting Undervoltage protection
11

I I I I I I
Current, voltage, power Current, voltage phasors Power factor Demand 64 samples/cycle oscillography 1024 event recording
User Interfaces
I I I I
I I
URPC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS485 port (115 kbps, ModBus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols) Second RS485 or Ethernet port: 10BaseF or redundant 10BaseF supporting MMS/UCA2, DNP 3.0, and ModBus/TCP protocols 2 x 20 character display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
I I I I I I I I I
GE Power Management
273
C60 Breaker Management Relay

Breaker Failure
Two schemes are provided, one for use with three-pole tripping only and one for use on three pole + single pole operation. The philosophy of the schemes is identical. The breaker failure system provides three different methods of detecting a breaker failure. All methods of failure detection are supervised by a current monitor to ensure security of a declaration of failure.
Phase Undervoltage
The C60 has three individual phase undervoltage elements (all with identical programmable characteristics): I Pickup level I Definite time or inverse time curve I Minimum operating voltage Typical applications for undervoltage protection are: I Protection for sensitive loads such as
induction motors
Breaker Arcing Current

This element calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and intergrating the square of the current passing through the breaker contacts as an arc. The per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a programmed threshold value for alarm indication.
Autoreclose
The recloser provides up to four reclose shots for three pole operation. The recloser provides outputs that can be used to modify circuit protection between reclose shots.
I Permissive functions such as blocking of elements or external devices
MONITORING
Data Logger
I Automatic re-energization schemes
Breaker Control
The relay provides for control of one or two breakers from faceplate pushbuttons, remote communications, or contact inputs. A breaker pole discrepancy feature is included in the breaker control scheme. Breaker position indication is provided by LEDs on the faceplate.
Synchrocheck
The synchrocheck feature is intended to supervise manual and reclose initiated breaker closing. The feature tests for permissible levels of V, , and Hz, and provides both voltage check and dead source bypass facilities.
11
52
79
Monitoring
CLOSE
TRIP
50P1BF 50P2BF
50P3BF
50N1BF 50N2BF 50N3BF
METERING
25
C60
Breaker Management Relay
27P-1&2
834710A7.CDR
274
Controller

TYPICAL WIRING
A B C
POSITIVE WATTS
52
OPEN DELTA (ABC) VT CONNECTION
F 1b
F 2b
F 3b
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 5a
F 6a
F 7a
F 4b
F 1a
F 2a
F 3a
F 4a
F 4c
F 8a
VX
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 5c
F 6c
F 7c
F 2c
F 3c
F 1c
VA
VA
VC
VB
VA
VA
VC
VB
VB
VB
VC
VC
IG5
IA5
IA1
IC5
IB5
IB1
IC1
IG1
IG
IA
VX
IB
IC
F 8c
CIRCUIT 1 CURRENT INPUTS 8A / 8B

I
CIRC. 1 V. I.
11
TC1
( DC ONLY )
H2
H 8b
SURGE
H3
DC AC or DC
H4
POWER SUPPLY
H5
H6
P 1a P 1c P 2a P 2c P 3a P 3c P 4a P 4c P 5a P 5c P 6a P 6c P 7a P 7c P 8a P 8c P 8b
dcmA In P 1 dcmA In P 2
5F
GE Power Management
C60
BREAKER MANAGEMENT RELAY
6K
dcmA In P 3 dcmA In P 4
RS-232 dcmA In P 5 dcmA In P 6 dcmA In P 7 dcmA In P 8

SURGE ANALOG I/O
DB-9 (front)
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
RS485 COM 1
COM
9A
M6
COM
SURGE
CPU
IRIG-B
DIGITAL I/O
RS485 COM 2
M7
M8
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
834701B6.CDR
F
8 CT/VT
X W V
GROUND BUS
U T
6
S R
5
P N M
6 I/O * I/O *
J
6
H G
I/O
D
9 CPU
6 I/O *
I/O *
(Rear View)
DIGITAL I/O
6B
H1
H 1a H 1b H 1c H 2a H 2b H 2c H 3a H 3b H 3c H 4a H 4b H 4c H 5a H 5b H 5c H 6a H 6b H 6c
1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9

9 PIN CONNECTOR
VOLTAGE SUPV.
TC2
UR
COMPUTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

25 PIN CONNECTOR
PERSONAL COMPUTER
B
1 Power Supply
* Optional
Controller
275
Breaker protection, control, monitoring and metering shall be supplied in one integrated digital relay package for application on high voltage breakers and suitable for incorporation in an integrated substation control system. Protection and control functions shall include: I instantaneous overcurrent elements I I I I I
for breaker failure for phase and neutral 2 undervoltage elements (instantaneous or timed) breaker control feature for manual control of one or two breakers synchrocheck Four shot autorecloser 16 digital elements
Monitoring features shall include: I breaker pole discrepancy I breaker arcing current for predictive
maintenance
functions shall include current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power and power factor.
All elements shall have a blocking input that allows supervision of the element from other elements, contact inputs, etc. The relay shall have eight setting groups for protection elements. This allows for dynamic reconfiguring of the protection elements to adapt to changing conditions such as system configuration changes, seasonal requirements, testing, etc. Voltage inputs shall be included to provide voltage level detectors, and additional metering data. Metering

11
ORDERING
C60 C60 C60
* 00 * 00
A C D 00
HC * VF *
F** H ** M** P** U** W** F** H ** M** P**
HC VF H L 8A 8B 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX 5C 5E 5F 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K
6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K XX
For full sized 19" horizontal (H) For reduced size vertical (V) Base unit RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU RS485 + redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus/TCP, and DNP 3.0) CPU No software options Horizontal 19" mount Reduced size (3/4) vertical 125/250V AC/DC power supply 24/48V (DC only) Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT 8 RTD 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD 8 dcmA inputs 2 Form-A, 2 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A, 4 Form-C, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C, 4 Fast Form-C No module

See pages 15 - 18.
276
Controller
Supervision of the integrity of the breakers tripping and closing circuits.
DBT
Digital Breaker Supervision
Applications
I I
Trip circuit supervision Single pole or three pole tripping schemes

I I I
Supervision of breaker coils Undervoltage unit Inhibition switch for use during breaker maintenance

I I
Measurement of the breakers operating DC power supply Resistance measurement of the breaker coils
11
Features
I I I
LED indicators Simple dip switch setting Compact 19" rack-mount case
DESCRIPTION
The DBT is a digital relay that supervises the integrity of the breakers tripping and closing circuits. The relay checks the continuity of the coil regardless of the status of the breaker (open or closed). It also includes a time delay in order to avoid misoperations during open to closed transitions. It can supervise three different coils at the same time. It has a DC undervoltage unit which checks the breakers operating power supply voltage. This relay can be used with either closing or tripping coils. With the three phase version the coils can be from three different breakers. The DBT relay has an advantage over coil supervision relays which are based only on continuity, as it also measures real resistance. The advantage of this method is selectivity. The DBT is able to detect failures in the tripping circuits even when there are coils from different auxiliary circuits connected in parallel. In this situation a failure or a broken lead would not be detected based only on continuity, because there would be an alternative path in the parallel coil. The resistance measurement used by the DBT will detect this condition. In order to make this resistance measurement it injects a 5 mA current, measures the voltage drop, and calculates the resistance. In order to avoid misoperation during the maintenance of the breaker there is a switch on the front of the relay that inhibits operation. This inhibition may also be activated by one of the digital inputs.
GE Power Management
277
DBT Digitial Breaker Supervision

TYPICAL WIRING
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY GROUND BUS
B9 B10
GE Power Management
B11 B12 G G SURGE CASE C12 D12 C11 D11 C10 D10 C9 D9 C8 D8 C7 D7 C6 D6
726701A4.CDR
DBT
Digital Breaker Tripping
CONTROL POWER
TRIP
b
AS T.C. No. 1 TRIP COIL 1
INPUTS
C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4
LOCAL/ REMOTE SPRINGS SF6 ANTIPUMPING
OUTPUTS CONFIGURABLE
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
BREAKER VOLTAGE a b a b a b TRIP COIL No. 1 TRIP COIL No. 2 TRIP COIL No. 3 SYSTEM READY BREAKER CIRCUIT OK BREAKER CIRCUIT OK BREAKER VOLTAGE OK COIL No. 1 OK COIL No. 2 OK COIL No. 3 OK
DBT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

METERING ACCURACY Voltage: Resistance: Time: 5% 10% 20 ms OUTPUTS OUTPUT CONTACTS Breaking Capacity: Max DC Operating Voltage: Max AC Operating Voltage: Continuous Current: Closing: POWER SUPPLY 110/125 VDC, 20% 220/250 VDC, 20% APPROVALS Compliant *Specifications subject to change without notice. 4000 VA 300 VDC 440 VAC 16 A 30 A ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Range: Operation: -25 C to + 55 C Storage: -40 C to + 65 C according to IEC 255-6 and ANSI C37.90 Ambient Humidity: up to 95% without condensation PACKAGING Weight: Net: Packed: Dimensions: Width: Depth: Height:
11
INPUTS BURDENS Voltage Burden: 110/125 VDC model: 220/250 VDC model: Digital Inputs Burden: 110/125 VDC Model: 220/250 VDC Model: DC Power Supply Burden:
48 k 96 k 66 k 132 k <7.5 W
3 kg 4 kg 483 mm (19") 214 mm 43 mm (1 unit high)
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW 19.00 (483) 1.70 (43) 1.20 (31) SIDE VIEW 8.43 (214) 6.38 (162)
CUTOUT 18.32 (165) 17.38 (441) 1.25 (32)

726700A1.DWG
0.28 Dia. (7) 4 Pl. INCHES (mm)
CUTOUT
0.26 (7) 1.77 (45)
ORDERING
DBT
DBT
* 000 A 0 * 0 H **
3 1 2 00 01 02
Base DBT 3 coils (three phase) 110/125 VDC 220/250 VDC 5 NO 1 NC (shown in typical wiring) 1 NO 5 NC 2 NO 4 NC

See pages 15 - 18.
NOTE: In case the breaker has only one coil, one DBT can be used to supervise three different breakers, provided they have the same breaker voltage.
278
Controller
Phase and ground backup protection for the primary circuit breaker.
DBF
Digital Breaker Failure
Application
s
Backup protection for primary circuit breaker

s s s s s s
DESCRIPTION
The DBF is a digital breaker failure relay that provides phase and ground backup protection if the primary circuit breaker fails to clear a system fault. Breaker failure protection is critical in any backup relaying scheme. This protection must have not only sensitivity and dependability, but also a high level of security because it is protecting the busbars themselves. The reliability must also be the same as that of a busbar protection relay. By using digital technology the operation time of the DBF has been improved. An associated function protects against electrical arcing between the contacts of the breaker when it is opened. This will help to prevent damage to the breaker. This function uses three very sensitive overcurrent detectors set to the line capacitive current. Three setting groups are available, with the active group selected by a setting or an input. There are 14 configurable inputs and 16 outputs (5 configurable). The DBF meters the current continuously. It also monitors the breaker health I 2 t value. It has an event recorder that can store the last 165 events with a 1 ms resolution. It can store up to 4 oscillography records with 66 cycles each. The local user interface includes a keypad and display. There are 17 LED indicators, one a two colored system alarm, and 16 red configurable to any of the 32 alarms available. There are three communications ports, one on the front panel and two on the rear. It has 2 tripping steps.
s s s s s
Two step instantaneous and/or time delayed breaker failure Independent timer per phase for the first step Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent Three phase direct trip Fast tripping logic by using a second set of level detectors per phase and an independent timer Internal arcing protection Operation failure detection Three settings groups 14 configurable inputs 16 outputs (5 configurable)
11

s s s s s
Current metering Breaker health monitoring Event recorder, last 165 events Oscillography, 4 records of 62 cycles Phase sequence selection
User Interfaces
s s s s s s
Keypad and display 17 LED indicators 3 communications ports RS232 ports Fiber optics available IRIG-B input
GE Power Management
279
DBF Digital Breaker Failure

The DBFs three phase overcurrent protection (50PBF) consists of single or three-phase breaker failure initiation units with independent pickups and time delays. It also has three phase direct trip protection (50XNF), which may be used for three phase breaker failure initiation without overcurrent. The DBF also includes ground overcurrent protection (50NBF). Two step breaker failure operation is included where each step operation may be activated by single, two or three phase overcurrent functions. Both steps are time delayed and offer a wide range of settings. Using independent timers per phase for the first step permits a correct coordination with the second zone in case of evolving faults in single-pole tripping schemes. The fast tripping logic permits accelerated tripping during three-phase faults. This is particularly useful in maintaining power system stability where selective fast tripping is appropriate. The logic for configurable outputs consists of a combination of NOT, AND, and OR gates applicable to trips, alarms and pickups of all the protection and control functions, internal protection status, control, digital inputs, etc. A basic DBF model is also available which includes 6 configurable inputs and 10 outputs (5 of which are configurable).
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The DBF has a 20 button keypad and a 2 line by 16 character alphanumeric LCD. This allows local user interface without a computer.
LED Indicators
The DBF has 17 LED indicators. One is a two color system alarm. The other 16 are red, and are configurable to any of the 32 alarms available. Each LED can be configured with or without memory.

Breaker Monitoring
The breaker status is monitored continuously. The cumulative I 2 t value is stored and used for breaker health monitoring.
Communications
The DBF has three communications ports, one on the front panel which is connected to one on the rear panel, and a third independent rear panel port. The first two ports allow communication through GE-LOCAL software, either locally with a laptop computer, or remotely to a protection dispatch center. This software allows the user to visualize measurements and status as well as the relays time synchronization. The third port connects the user to a communications network, through GE-POWER software, to the part of a DDS integrated system. These applications are part of GE-NESIS (General Electric NEtwork Substation Integration Software) used by the DDS system.
GE-LOCAL software is provided for DBF communication
Event Recorder
The DBF records up to 165 events in non-volatile memory. Records include date and time with 1 ms resolution, type of event, current measurements and relay status.
11
Internal Arcing Protection

If an electrical arc exists between the contacts of an open breaker it can eventually destroy the breaker. The DBF uses three very sensitive overcurrent detectors set to the line capacitive current to protect against internal arcing.
Oscillography
The DBF system includes an oscillography recorder. It can be activated by any of the protective functions pickup or trip or by an external input. Records have a resolution of 16 samples per cycle. Up to 4 records may be stored with up to 66 cycles each, with prefault cycles adjustable between 2 and 10 cycles.
The DBF can store up to 4 oscillography records
Settings Groups
Three groups of settings are available for the DBF. The active group may be selected by a setting or by an input.
Inputs and Outputs

The enhanced model DBF has 14 configurable inputs, in groups of 2 and 3 inputs. There are 16 outputs with the following assignments: s s s s s s
1 breaker failure pickup 2 breaker failure fix tripping contacts 1 internal arc contact 1 alarm contact 5 spare configurable contacts 6 latching relay contacts (optional)
Protection Status Self-checking

The DBF performs self tests both at start up and continuously in the background during operation.
280
Controller

TYPICAL WIRING
A B
C(B)
52
CONTROL POWER GROUND BUS
C
A
1
B(C)
A1
Ia
A2
Ia
B1
Ib
B2
Ib
A3
Ic
A4
Ic
B3
In
B4
In
A10 B10
CONTROL POWER
A9
B9
GND
CURRENT INPUTS
GE Power Management
DBF
Digital Breaker Failure
C9 D9 C10 D10 C11 D11 C12 D12 E7 F7 E8 E9 F9 E8 E10 F10 E11 E12 F12 E11
GROUP 1
CC1 CC2 CC3
BFI - A BFI - B BFI - C COMMON 52/b - A 52/b - B 52/b - C COMMON
CONFIGURABLE-DEFAULTS SETTINGS SHOWN INPUTS
SYSTEM READY TRIP 1 BF PICKUP TRIP 2 INTERNAL ARC
CC7 CC8
BFI - 3POLE BFI - 3POLE COMMON
GROUP 3
GROUP 2
CC4 CC5 CC6
C3 D3 A12 B12 A11 B11 C1 D1 C2 D2
11
TRIP TRIP OUTPUTS TRIP TRIP TRIP 64 D4 65 D5 C6 D6 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 E6 F6 C7 D7 C8 D8 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS
CC9 CC10 COMMON CC11 CC12 ACTIVE TABLE 0 ACTIVE TABLE 1 COMMON TRIGGER DSC LATCH RESET COMMON IRIG - B
GROUP 5
GROUP 4
CC13 CC14
GROUP 6
FIRST SPET TRIP
TRIP TRIP TRIP
SECOND STEP TRIP
DB-9 DB-9 Tx Rx
1 (FRONT) RS232 TRIP 2 (REAR) RS232
2
DB-9 3(REAR) FIBER OPTIC OR RS232
SPARE SPARE
CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS
NOTE
1 2
Ground at relay location, recommended for safety. Port 3 is independent from ports 1 and 2. Port 1 has priority over port 2.
725701A8.CDR
DIMENSIONS
CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN FRONT VIEW
19.00" (483) 3.40" (87)
SIDE VIEW
10.35" (263) 1.20" (31)
0.28" Dia. (7) 4 Pl.
18.32" (465) 17.32" (440)
3.52" 3.00" 0.26" (89) (76) (7)

725700A2.dwg
INCHES (mm)
Controller
281

DBF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION Thermal Capacity: Current circuits: Continuously: During 3 sec: During 1 sec: TIMERS 1 Phase Timers T1: 3 Phase Timers T2: 3 Phase W/O Current Timer T3: 2nd Stage Timer: Internal Arc Timer T4: METERING Frequency: Rated Phase Current: Rated Ground Current: Auxiliary Voltage: OUTPUTS Signalling contacts: Contact Capacity: Maximum operating voltage: Continuous current: Make and carry: Breaking capacity: Burdens: Current Circuits: DC Burden: During operation: Per each activated input: INPUTS Tripping Contacts: Contact Capacity: Maximum Operating Voltage: Continuous Current: Make and Carry: Breaking: MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Metallic package in 19" rack and 2 units high Frontal MMI with LCD and keypad Six rear terminal blocks Protection class IP52 (according to IEC 529) ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Storage: -40C to +85C Operation: -20C to +55C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min Surge Test Voltage: 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Interference: Class III according to IEC 255-22-1 Electrostatic Discharge: Class IV according to IEC 255-22-2 Radio Interference: Class III according to IEC 255-22-3 Fast Transient: Class IV according to IEC 255-22-4 Sinusoidal Vibration: Class II according to IEC 255-21-1 Shock: Class I according to IEC 225-21-2 Radio Frequency Emission: according to IEC 41B (Sec) 81 and EN55022 class B Emisitivity: according to EN50081-2(*) Susceptibility: according to EN50082-2(*) PACKAGING Dimensions: Weight: Not packaged: Packaged:
4 x In 50 x In 100 x In 0.05 - 2 sec in steps of 0.01 sec 0.05 - 2 sec in steps of 0.01 sec 0.05 - 2 sec in steps of 0.01 sec 0.05 - 2 sec in steps of 0.01 sec 0.1 - 2 sec in steps of 0.01 sec
440 VAC 16A 30 A 4000 VA
50/60 Hz 0.2 - 2.4 In in steps of 0.01 A Range D 0.1-1.2 In in steps of 0.01 A Range D 24 - 48 VDC 20% 110 - 250 VDC 20%
380 VAC, 250 VDC 8A 8A 1760 VA 0.5 VA for In = 5 A 0.1 VA for In = 1 A 12 W 8 mA/1W, Vaux: 125 VDC
COMMUNICATIONS Local Communication: LCD alphanumeric display with two lines of 16 characters per line 20 button frontal keypad Remote Communication (local or remote PC and communication net): Mode: half duplex Speed: 1200 to 19200 bps Physical Media: RS232 (ports 1, 2 and 3) Plastic fiber optic (port 3 optional) Type of connector: HFBR-4516 Power supplied: -8 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -39 dBm Wave length: 660 nm Glass fiber optic (port 3 optional) Type of connector: STA Power supplied: -17.5 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -24.5 dBm Wave length: 820 nm Synchronization: IRIG-B DB9 connector for RS232 ports on the front (1) and on the rear (2) DB9 connector for RS232 port on the rear (3), with 1 mm plastic fiber optic or 50/125 glass fiber optic option APPROVALS Compliant
3.40" H x 19" W x 10.35" D (87 mm x 483 mm x 263 mm) 16.08 lbs (6 kg) 18.76 lbs (7 kg)
ORDERING
11
DBF
DBF
1 * * * * 1 1 1 * ** A
0 1 2 3 B C D F G 1 2 M D G H 00
DBF Digital Breaker Tripping RS232 communications Plastic fiber optic and RS232 communications Glass fiber optic and RS232 communications RS485 and RS232 communications Ranges: Phase: In = 1 A (0.2-2.4 A), Ground: In = 1 A (0.2-2.4 A) Ranges: Phase: In = 5 A (1-12 A), Ground: In = 1 A (0.2-2.4 A) Ranges: Phase: In = 5 A (1-12 A), Ground: In = 5 A (0.5-6 A) Ranges: Phase: In = 5 A (0.5-6 A), Ground: In = 1 A (0.2-2.4 A) Ranges: Phase: In = 5 A (0.5-6 A), Ground: In = 1 A (0.1-1.2 A) P1, P2, P3: M-Link communications protocol P1, P2: M-Link protocol; P3: ModBus RTU communications protocol Spanish language English language 48-125 VDC power supply 110-250 VDC power supply Standard model
Special Models:
MOD 04A: Digital inputs voltage: 48 VDC20% MOD 05A: DIV: 110 VDC 20% MOD 06A: DIV: 125 VDC 20% MOD 07A: DIV: 250 VDC 20%
In the ordering code, the last three digits are to be replaced by the MOD Code. Example: DBF with DIV of 48 VDC: DBF****111*04A.

See pages 15 - 18.
SBC Static Breaker Backup Relays

Phase and ground backup protection for the primary circuit breaker. Application
s
Features
s s s s
Backup protection for primary circuit breaker

s s
Built-in regulated power supply Fast reset current detectors Surge suppression on input circuits Drawout case (200 series)
Phase instantaneous overcurrent Ground instantaneous overcurrent

282
Controller
Multifunction recloser system for distinct single and three phase programs.
DRS
Applications
I I I
Numerical Single and Three Phase Reclosing System
Single-phase & three-phase recloser One or two breakers (simultaneous or sequential) reclosing schemes Any kind of busbar arrangement
Protection
I I
Pole disagreement Independent trip and alarm outputs
Monitoring
I I I I
Event record, last 165 events Oscillography for internal flags Busbar and line voltage measurement On-line breaker status (2 breakers x 3 poles)
11
User Interfaces
DESCRIPTION
The DRS is a multifunction microprocessor recloser system with a set of algorithms to perform distinct recloser single and three phase programs. The equipment has also incorporated the synchronism check and the voltage check functions. It may be applied with either one breaker or two breakers. The system is intended for use with protective relay schemes that trip only one breaker pole for single line to ground faults, and all three poles for all multiphase faults. It has provision for one or two reclose operations, with the ability to choose a different high-speed reclose time for single phase and multi-phase faults. The second reclose operations are always time delayed. When two breakers are reclosed, the reclose signal can be given to the two breakers simultaneously, or it can be given to one breaker first and then, after a delay to check that the breaker does not retrip, the second breaker is reclosed. This is the master-follower concept. The DRS can be applied to any transmission line with single-pole or three-pole operation. The substation arrangement can be single busbar, double busbar, three busbar or breaker and half. There are no restrictions in the application. Additionally, the DRS has other complementary functions as: breaker pole disagreement, synch check for fast reclosing and for manual closing supervision, oscillography, event recorder and time synchronization. The DRS is supplied in an standard 4U high 19" case.
I I I I I
Alphanumeric LCD RS232, plastic or glass fiber optics Time synchronization (PC or GPS synch.) 17 LEDS (16 programmable) Configurable alarms
Features
I I I I
I I I I
Manual closing supervision Standard 19" rack case packing 7 reclosing programs Closing and reclosing conditions: - voltage synch. check - undervoltage (DL-DB, DL-LB, LL-DB) - external input Closing/reclosing accumulative counters 3 settings tables Configurable inputs/outputs Self-checking functions
GE Power Management
283
DRS Reclosing System

FUNCTIONALITY
Recloser
The recloser portion of the DRS provides both single pole and three pole reclosing for one or two breakers. The reclosing sequence can be set to any of 7 programs: I R1 - LO I R3 - LO I R1 - T3 - LO I R3 - T3 - LO I R1 - LO or R3 - LO I R1 - T3 - LO or R3 - T3 - LO I R1 - T3 - LO or R3 - LO R1 = Single pole reclose R3 = Three pole reclose T3 = Second step three pole reclose LO = Lock-out. The reclosing sequence is started by the receipt of a reclose initiation signal. After the set time delay, a reclose output is issued. If only one shot has been chosen, the recloser will go to lockout if a second initiation input is received prior to the expiration of the reset time. If two shots have been chosen, a second delayed shot will precede the lockout state. The recloser can be reset from lockout using a command or automatically after a set time. Manual closing can be done energizing an input to the DRS. Closing conditions will be directed by the DRS (voltage synchrocheck, DL-DB, DL-LB, LLDB, external input).
Outputs
The DRS has independent output configurable contacts per breaker. Additionally, alarm outputs are provided.
Oscillography
The DRS stores 4 oscillography records, 264 cycles each. Each record includes, at 4 samples per cycle, the following information: I The 4 voltage inputs (VL1, VB1, VL2, VB2) I The status of each reclosing automatically
Easy to Configure
The DRS is configured using GE-INTRO software. This is a graphical Windows based program that allows easy configuration. No training or programming skills are required.
I All internal digital flags Using the GE-OSC and DRSTool software packages, it is possible to analyze the performance of the DRS.
MONITORING
Continuous Metering
On-line voltage (magnitude and angle) and frequency metering.
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The front of the DRS has a keypad and a backlit LCD. This allows the user to easily display metering data, settings and other information.
Breaker Status
DRS displays up to 2 breaker status with information per pole.
Event Record
The DRS stores up to 165 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the user with the information needed to determine the sequence of events, speeding diagnosis and system recovery. Events consist of a broad range of state occurrences including trips and alarm contact operations.
LED Indication
The DRS includes 17 LED indicators on the front panel. 16 red LEDs are user configurable, while a two-color LED reports system in service information.
11
Communication Ports
LOCAL COMMUNICATION PORTS: A nine pin RS232 serial port (Port 1) is located on the front of the relay and another one on the rear. It allows the user easy access with a laptop computer to get events, access settings, metering information, etc.
FEATURES
Pole Disagreement
A pole disagreement tripping or alarm output per breaker is provided. The function supervises the breaker auxiliary contact (per phase) status and with a timer supervision, determines if a pole disagreement condition exists.
DRS with remote communication access
LEVEL 2
COMMUNICATION GPS Sync.
LEVEL 0
89L 89E
TT
Closing/Reclosing Conditions
Conditions are independently set for closing and for reclosing, per breaker. Closing/reclosing conditions checked by the DRS are: I Voltage synchrocheck: verifies the
magnitude, phase angle and frequency difference between the two voltage signals at both sides of the breaker I Undervoltage conditions: Dead LineDead Bus, Dead Line-Live Bus, Live Line-Dead Bus (Dead/Live voltage levels are defined by settings) I External permission: a digital input can be used to permit the closure/reclosure
TI
RECLOSE & TRIPPING

52
DIGITAL INPUTS B1 B2 B9B2 B9B1 TT
RS232 LOCAL ACCESS WITH LAPTOP
284

TYPICAL WIRING
External connection drawing
B9 B10 A9 A10 B7
B8
A7
A8
D11 C11 G D12

CONTROL POWER
A B
VL1
VB1
VL2
VB2
VOLTAGE INPUTS
52-1 CLOSE 52-1 CLOSE
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PO13 PO14 PO15 PO16 PO17 PO18 PO19 PO20 PO21 PO22
GE Power Management
DRS
Reclosing System
C1 D1 C2 D2 C3 D3 C4 D4 R1 I1 R2 I2 R3 I3 R4 I4 R5 I5 R6 I6 R7 I7 R8 I8 R9 I9 R10 I10 R11 I11 R12 I12 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 G1 H1 G2 H2 G3 H3 G4 H4 PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8 PI9 PI10 PI11 PI12 PI13 PI14 COMMON PI15 PI16 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI21 PI22 PI23 PI24 PI25 52-1 CLOSE 52-2 CLOSE 52-1 CLOSE PERMISSION 52-2 CLOSE PERMISSION RECLOSE PROGRAM (1) RECLOSE PROGRAM (2) RECLOSE PROGRAM (3) COMMON 79-1 PERMISSION 79-2 PERMISSION 52-1 A/a 52-1 A/b 52-1 B/a 52-1 B/b 52-1 C/a 52-1 C/b COMMON SINGLE POLE INITIATE THREE POLE INITIATE TIME DELAYED TRIP CHANGE SEQUENCE
52-1 TRIP 52-2 CLOSE
52-2 CLOSE
INPUTS 1
SYSTEM READY 52-2 TRIP 52-1 THREE POLE TRIP ENABLE 52-2 THREE POLE TRIP ENABLE 79-1 OUT OF SERVICE 79-2 OUT OF SERVICE BOTH 79s OUT OF SERVICE 79-1 IN PROGRESS 79-2 IN PROGRESS 1 PHASE 79-1 FAST RECLOSE
3 PHASE 79-1 FAST RECLOSE

3 PHASE 79-1 TIME DELAYED RECLOSE
1 PHASE 79-2 FAST RECLOSE

3 PHASE 79-2 TIME DELAYED RECLOSE 3 PHASE 79-2 TIME DELAYED RECLOSE POLE DISAGREEMENT 52-1 POLE DISAGREEMENT 52-2
PI26 ACTIVE TABLE 1 PI27 ACTIVE TABLE 2 PI28 EXTERNAL TRIGGER COMMON PI29 52-2 A/a PI30 52-2 A/b PI31 52-2 B/a PI32 52-2 B/b PI33 52-2 C/a PI34 52-2 C/b PI35 COMMON PI36 BLOCK 79-1 PI37 PI38 BLOCK 79-2 PI39 PI40 GENERAL BLOCK PI41 PI42 LOCKOUT RESET COMMON
C5 D5 C6 D6 C7 D7 C8 D8 C9 D9 C10 D10 E5 F5 E6 F6 E7 F7 E8 F8 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11 E12 F12 G5 H5 G6 H6 G7 H7 G8 H8 G9 H9 G10 H10 G11 H11 G12 H12
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
11
INPUTS 6
INPUTS 5
INPUTS 4
INPUTS 3
INPUTS 2
736750A1.ai
285

USER INTERFACES
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS PORT: One serial port is provided on the rear of the unit. This can be an RS232 port or a fiber optical port (glass or plastic). The ports may be set independently for different data rates from 300 to 19,200 bps.
Software
Two Windows based software packages are included with the DRS: I GE-LOCAL enables the user to visualize the protection settings, alarms, LEDs, measurements and status I GE-INTRO enables the user to configure the inputs, outputs and LEDs
An IRIG-B input is provided which permits the relay to synchronize its clock. This ensures that all event time stamping is consistent across the entire system.
Optionally GE-OSC AND DRSTOOL enable the user to study the oscillography records. These software packages are part of the GE-NESIS software (GE NEtwork Substation Integration System) used by the DDS system.
DRS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MONITORING Recloser Timers: R1 Reclose: R3 Reclose: T3 Reclose: Reclaim Time: Reset Time: Synchronism Check: Module: Angle: Frequency: Timer: Pole Disagreement: Timer: INPUTS Voltage: Thermal Ratings: Continuous: 1 min: Frequency: Auxiliary DC: DC Inputs: AC Burden: DC Burden: 0.01-60 sec in 0.01 sec steps 0.01-60 sec in 0.01 sec steps 0.1-256 sec in 0.1 sec steps 0.1-256 sec in 0.1 sec steps 0.1-256 sec in 0.1 sec steps 2-90 V in 1 V steps 2-89 in 10 steps 0.01-2 Hz in 0.1 Hz steps 0.01-60 sec in 0.5 sec steps 0.1-256 sec in 0.1 sec steps COMMUNICATIONS Mode: Speed: Physical Media: RS232 Plastic Fiber Optic Type of connector: Power supplied: Receivers sensitivity: Wave length: Glass Fiber Optic Type of connector: Power supplied: Receivers sensitivity: Wave length: RS485 (port 2 optional) Half duplex 1200 to 19200 bps TYPE TESTS Insulation Test Voltage: Impulse Voltage Withstand: Interferences: Electrostatic Discharges: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, one min 5 kV peak, 1 V 50 sec, 0.5 J IEC 255-22-1 class III IEC 255-22-2 class IV and EN 61000-4-2, 8 kV Radiated Interference: ENV 50140, ENV50141, ENV50204, 10 V/m Fast Transient: IEC 255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4, class IV Magnetic Fields at Industrial Frequency: EN 61000-4-8, 30 Av/m RF Emission: EN 55011, class B
11
HFBR-4516 -8 dBm -39 dBm 660 nm STA -17.5 dBm -24.5 dBm 820 nm
Vn = 90-220 VAC 2 x Vn 3.5 x In 50 or 60 Hz 48/125 or 100/250 VDC 48, 125, 220 VDC 0.2 VA (Vn = 90 V) 12 W, 8 mA per input ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -40C to +55C Operation: -20C to +70C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing APPROVALS Compliant
ORDERING
DRS 1*00
DRS 0 2
* C0 * 001 * *
Numerical single-phase and three phase reclosing system P1, P2, P3: M-Link protocol P1, P2: M-Link protocol; P3: ModBus RTU protocol RS232 communications 1 mm plastic fiber optic communications 62.5/125 glass fiber optic communications RS485 communications 48-125 VDC auxiliary voltage 110-250 VDC auxiliary voltage Revision level Spanish language English language
0 1 2 3 G H A I

See pages 15 - 18.
286
Digital protection and control of capacitor banks.
MCP
Digital Capacitor Bank Protection
Applications
I
Capacitor bank protection and control

I I I I I I I
Instantaneous overcurrent Time overcurrent Neutral overcurrent or overvoltage Instantaneous overvoltage Time overvoltage Local and remote breaker operation Selectable inputs and outputs 11

DESCRIPTION
The MCP is a microprocessor based digital relay system that provides protection, control and monitoring functions for medium voltage capacitor banks. The protection functions include integral overcurrent and overvoltage protection. The overcurrent functions include three phase and ground instantaneous and time overcurrent. Overcurrent or overvoltage protection against unbalanced neutral of the capacitor bank is provided with an alarm level and a trip level. Both instantaneous and time overvoltage protection functions are provided. The MCP allows both local and remote control of the breakers. It has a regulation function which controls the opening and closing of the capacitor bank breaker for discrete regulation of the voltage in the power system. It has a weekly programming schedule for breaker opening and closing which allows the relay to distinguish between working days and holidays. The MCP meters the instantaneous value of the phase and ground current, voltage, and the unbalance current or voltage. It monitors local and remote breaker operation. It has an event recorder with the capacity to store up to 255 events. The MCP is self checking, monitoring internal circuitry and external inputs. The local user interface includes a 20 button keypad and a 2 line LCD which allows the user to enter commands and settings, and access information. A remote communications module is supplied with the relay. Remote communications can be via an RS232 port or fiber optics. Communications software is also provided. The MCP is packaged in a standard 19" rack-mount case. An optional 28 point test block allows all functions to be tested without disconnecting the system.
I I I I
Metering: current and voltage Breaker supervision Event record of last 255 events Self testing
User Interfaces
I I I I
Keypad and LCD 7 LED indicators RS232 serial data port Fiber optics option
Features
I I
Weekly programming schedule Standard 19" rack-mount
GE Power Management
287
MCP Digital Capacitor Bank Protection

Overcurrent
The MCP has three-phase and ground instantaneous overcurrent protection functions. It also has three-phase and ground time overcurrent protection functions, with three inverse time characteristic curves plus a curve which can be user defined.

Metering
The MCP performs instantaneous metering of phase and ground currents, voltage, and the unbalance current or voltage. These values may be viewed on the local LCD or remotely on a computer.
Communications
A communications module is provided with the relay. The communications medium may be selected to be an RS232 port or fiber optics connections. Software is supplied with the relay which runs on a personal computer and can perform the same operations as the keypad and display. The communications module allows the relay to be an integral part of a complete substation protection and control system, or part of a higher level control system.
The communication software provided can be used to enter settings, view metering values and status, and for remote control
Event Record Neutral Overcurrent or Overvoltage

Overcurrent or overvoltage protection against unbalanced neutral of the capacitor bank is provided with an alarm level and a trip level. The MCP has an event recorder with the capacity to store up to 255 events. This can facilitate diagnostics following a trip command.
Self Tests
The MCP performs self checking and monitoring of internal circuitry and external inputs. This enhances reliability by detecting failures and eliminating incorrect operations.
Overvoltage
The MCP has both instantaneous overvoltage protection and time overvoltage protection with a characteristic curve.
Breaker Control 11
Local breaker control is possible via the keypad and display on the front panel of the relay. Remote control is available via the communications port with the software provided. A regulation function controls the opening and closing of the capacitor bank breaker for discrete regulation of the voltage in the power system.
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
The MCP has a 20 button keypad and a 2 line LCD. This allows the user to enter commands and settings, and access information. This local interface allows: I instantaneous access of metering
information
Inputs and Outputs

Standard input/output modules or special modules may be used.
I local breaker operation I viewing of the protection system

status I viewing and modifying the protection settings
HARDWARE
The MCP has a modular design, which allows the addition of special input and output modules, or other special modules. The protection and recloser functions are independent from the analysis and control functions to ensure reliable operation even in the event of a failure of the components in the rest of the system. It is packaged in a standard 19" rack-mount case. An optional 28 point test block allows all functions to be tested without disconnecting the relay from the system.
Weekly Programming
The MCP has weekly programming, which includes the times of work day and holiday openings and closings. This allows the relay to use different settings for working days and holidays.
LED Indicators
The MCP has 7 LED indicators. One of these indicates the relay is in service. The other 6 are signaling LEDs.
288
Controller

TYPICAL WIRING
for MCP1---D Voltage Unbalance for MCP1---M Current Unbalance
52
Id
GROUND BUS
A B C
A2
C A B
Va
A3
Vb
A6
Vd
A7
Vd
B12 B11 B10 B9

Ia Ia Ib Ib
B8
Ic
B7
Ic
B6
In
B5
In
B3
Id
B4
Id
C1
C2
F3
A1 G
CONTROL POWER
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
INPUTS C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12
724701A5.CDR
GE Power Management
READY
MCP
Digital Capacitor Bank Protection
F4 F5 F6 F7 52/b MANUAL AUTO BANK 52/b
OPEN OPEN CLOSE INPUTS CLOSE OPERATION DISABLED MANUAL OUTPUTS
11
NOT BLOCKED BY TRIP

TRIP WITH BLOCKING TRIP WITHOUT BLOCKING 51D ALARM (Note 1) READY CLOCK COMMON TRIP WITH BLOCKING TRIP WITHOUT BLOCKING COMMON 51D ALARM (Note 1) READY & CLOCK COMMON COMMON TRIP WITH BLOCKING TRIP WITHOUT BLOCKING 51D ALARM (Note 1) READY & CLOCK COMMON
Note 1: This contact is voltage unbalance trip for MCP models with voltage unbalance.
Controller
289

MCP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION OVERCURRENT SETTING RANGES Transformation Ratio (phase-ground): 0-4000 in steps of 1 Phase TOC Available Ranges: 0.3 - 2.4 x InPH (1 or 5 A) 0.2 - 1.6 x InPH (5 A) in steps of 0.01 x InPH TOC Time Delay: Depends of the curve selected Phase Operating Curves: ANSI inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and a user defined curve Phase Instantaneous Unit (IOC): 1 - 20 x TOC Phase IOC Time Delay: 0.00 - 9.9 sec in steps of 0.01 Ground TOC Available Ranges: 0.1 - 0.8 x InGRN (1 or 5 A) 0.2 - 1.6 x InGRN (1 A) Ground Operating Curves: ANSI inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, and a user defined curve Ground Instantaneous Unit (IOC): 1 - 20 x TOC Ground Instantaneous Time Delay: 0.00 - 9.9 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Capacitor Bank Star Unbalance Unit, Id: Alarm Level: 0.5 - 2 A in steps of 0.01 A Time Delay: 1 - 10 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Trip Level: 1 - 5 A in steps of 0.01 A Time Delay: 0.1 - 1 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Capacitor Bank Unbalance Unit, Vd: Trip Level: 2-8 V in steps of 1 V Time Delay: 1-20 sec in steps of 1 sec OVERVOLTAGE SETTING RANGES TOV Time: 100 - 140 VDC in steps of 1 V Delay of the TOV Instantaneous: Depends on the curve selected Overvoltage Unit (IOV): 1.5 2 x Vn in steps of 0.01 METERING RATINGS Frequency: Current: Voltage: Auxiliary Voltage: 50 or 60 Hz 1 or 5 A 110 V 48-125 VDC, +20% 110-250 VDC, +20% INPUTS OVERLOAD CAPACITY Current Circuits: Continuous: 3 Sec: 1 Sec: Voltage Circuits: Continuous: One Min: 2 x In 50 x In 100 x In 2 x Vn 3.5 x Vn
MONITORING AUTOMATIC MECHANISM SETTING RANGES Minimum Timed Voltage: 85 - 110 in steps of 1 Time Delay: 3 - 5 min in 1 steps of 1 sec Minimum Instantaneous Voltage: 85 - 110 V in steps of 1 V Maximum Times Voltage: 110 - 130 V in steps of 1 V Time Delay: 3 - 5 minutes in steps of 1 sec Maximum Instantaneous Voltage: 110 - 130 V in steps of 1 V Voltage Zero: Below 50o of VDC Time Delay: 10 - 60 sec in steps of 0.01 sec OUTPUTS CONTACTS Trip: Make: Break: Auxiliary: Continuous: Make: Break: Continuous:
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Operation: -10C to +55C Storage: -40C to +65C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS Insulation Withstand Test: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz for 1 min, IEC 255-5 Impulse Test: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 sec, 0.5 J, IEC 255-5 Interference Test: 2.5 kV longitudinal, 1 kV transversal, Class III, IEC 255-22-1 Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 255-22-2, Class III Radio Interference: IEC 255-22-3, Class III Rapid Transient: IEC 801-4, Class III Accuracy: Operating value: 5% Operating time: 5% or 0.030 sec whichever is greater Repeatability: Operating value: 1% Operating time: 2% or 0.030 sec whichever is greater PACKAGING Dimensions: Weight: Net: Shipping: APPROVALS Compliant
300 W resistive during 0.2 sec with 30 A max and 300 VDC 50 W resistive with 2 A and 300 VDC max 5A 5 A DC for 30 sec and 250 VDC max 25 W inductive and 250 VDC max 3A
COMMUNICATIONS Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps Mode: half duplex Medium: Remotely: RS232C fiber optic Locally: display and keypad
484 mm x 260 mm x 185 mm 24.2 lbs 30.8 lbs
11
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW 19.05 (484) SIDE VIEW 10.25 (260) 0.28 Dia. (7) 4 Pl. 7.00 (178) 4.00 (102) 1.50 (38) INCHES (mm)
724700A1.DWG
CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN 18.30 (465) 17.35 (441)
7.30 (185)
CUTOUT
ORDERING
MCP 1 * * * * * * * * * *
MCP 0 1 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 M D 1 2 0 1 2 1 2 9 G H * * 0 0
MCP digital capacitor protection No test block Test block Range: phase: 1 - 8 A, ground: 0.2 - 1.6 A Range: phase: 1.5 - 12 A, ground: 0.5 - 4 A Range: phase: 0.3 - 2.4 A, ground: 0.1 - 0.8 A RS232 communications 1 mm plastic fiber optic communications 100/140 glass fiber optic communications 50/125 glass fiber optic communications Ground current unbalance Voltage unbalance 50 Hz frequency 60 Hz frequency 48 VDC Vaux inputs 110/125 VDC Vaux inputs 220/250 VDC Vaux inputs Standard input/output for current unbalance Standard input/output for voltage unbalance Special model outputs 48-125 VDC Vaux 110-250 VDC Vaux Code for special model definition Standard models

See pages 15 - 18.
290
Controller
Three phase and ground voltage protection relay Under/overfrequency relay.

NEW
MIV
Applications
s s s s s s
Voltage/ Frequency M Family Relay
Over/undervoltage protection and monitoring Overvoltage protection for generators Undervoltage detection in automatic transfer systems Undervoltage/voltage unbalance protection for motors Monitoring of lines and busbars for healthy/existing/lack of voltage Voltage/frequency load shedding and restoration

DESCRIPTION
The MIV, a member of the M Family of protection relays, is a microprocessor based relay that provides voltage, frequency or voltage and frequency protection for a wide range of applications at any voltage level, including over/undervoltage protection and monitoring, undervoltage detection in automatic transfer systems, overvoltage protection of generators, undervoltage, voltage unbalance protection of motors, monitoring of lines and busbars for healthy/existing/lack of voltage and voltage/frequency load shedding and restoration. Three different MIV models provide voltage protection (MIV1000), frequency protection (MIV2000) or a combination of voltage and frequency protection elements (MIV3000). In every model, each protection element can be selectively enabled either via the front panel or via communications. The MIV has two user configurable digital inputs and six digital outputs out of which four are user configurable. The MIV incorporates six status LEDs, four of which are user configurable. The front panel also features a three key keypad and a 3.5 digit LED dot matrix display that provides an easy to use user interface. The front keypad allows the user to set the baud rate and relay address for communication. A front RS232 and a rear RS485 communication port are provided for computer access using ModBus RTU protocol. The rear RS485 can be converted to an RS232 or fiber optic port (plastic or glass F.O.) by means of using an external DAC 300 converter. Windows based software is provided free of charge with the relay to allow setup and configuration of MIV units. Computer access with M+PC software allows setting and configuration (inputs, outputs, LEDs and configurable logic) of the units, display of metering information, status of the unit, and the display of event records and oscillography record for the last fault. The MIV has a drawout construction in a 1/8 of a 19 rack case and can be flush or 19 rack mounted.
s s s s s s s
Three phase undervoltage protection (27) (Hiset and Loset) Three phase overvoltage protection (59) (Hiset and Loset) Ground overvoltage protection (59N) (Hiset and Loset) Voltage unbalance protection (47) Under/overfrequency protection (81U/81O) Configurable I/O 6 outputs: trip, service required, auxiliary

s s s
24 Event record Analog/digital oscillography Frequency and per-phase voltage metering
User Interfaces
s s s s s
M+PC software for setting, monitoring RS232 port, faceplate accessible (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) RS485 rear port (19.2 kbps, ModBus RTU) LED dot matrix display and keypad Target LED indicators
Features
s s s s s s
Configurable logic Flash memory for field upgrades Two setting tables Drawout case AC/DC power supply Switchgear flush or 19" rack mounting
GE Power Management
291
MIV Voltage/Frequency Relay

PROTECTION
NOTE: MIV1000 units include only the described voltage functions, MIV2000 include only frequency functions (4 units), and MIV3000 include both voltage and frequency (2) units. and 2 can be done by means of a setting, a communication command or digital input activation. Settings are divided in 2 categories, main and advanced settings. This allows users to have access to main relay functionalities in an extremely simple, user friendly way by entering only main settings, while having access to complete functionality for more complex use through advanced settings. cells. A graphical user interface is provided for configuration of MIV logic. The outpus of the MIV configurable logic can be used to configure digital outputs and LEDs.
Phase overvoltage protection (59)

The MIV includes two separately adjustable phase overvoltage units. Each one can be independently enabled. Settings allow the pickup setpoint to be set from 2 to 60 V or 10 to 250 V depending on model and a time delay from 0 to 600 seconds to be set. The protection units can operate either on phase to phase or phase to ground voltage magnitudes depending on voltage magnitudes applied to MIV VTs.
USER INTERFACES
Communication Ports
A front mounted RS232 and a rear RS485 port allow easy user interface via a PC. ModBus RTU protocol is used for all ports. The relay supports baud rates from 300 to 19,200 bps. Up to 255 MIV relays can be addressed on a single communications channel. A unique address must be assigned to each relay via a setting when multiple relays are connected.
Metering
MIV provides metering values for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground voltages, ground voltage, negative sequence voltage and frequency. The accuracy is 3% in the complete range for voltage values and +/-5mHz for frequency.
Phase undervoltage protection (27)

The phase undervoltage protection has the same settings and features as the phase overvoltage protection. In order to avoid permanent undervoltage tripping whenever a breaker is open and the VTs are located on the line side, a separate setting is provided to enable/disable undervoltage protection units when a breaker is open.
Events Recording
Events consist of a broad range of change of state occurrences, including pickups, trips, contact operations, alarms and self test status. The MIV stores up to 24 events time tagged to the nearest millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine sequence of events which facilitates diagnosis of relay operation. Each event can be individually maskable in order to avoid the generation of undesired events.
M+PC SOFTWARE
A single PC software package is required to access, configure, and monitor all relays in the M family regardless of their model, application, or available options. The M+PC software extracts the model number, version, and configuration parameters from the connected relay to display only the relevant data and options for the relay it is communicating with. This eliminates having to manually configure the relay within the software and provides a simple and easy to use operator user interface. All M Family products are supplied with Windows based M+PC software. M+PC allows communication among M Family relays for monitoring, setting changes, information and configuration. The M+PC software program may be run on a PC with the Windows 95/98/NT operating systems. The program may be used locally on the RS232 front serial port or remotely on the RS485 port. It provides full access to the relay data with the following features: s s s s
View actual values View relay status View/edit settings on-line/off-line View event recorder for troubleshooting s Configure inputs, outputs and LEDs through configurable logic s Relay firmware programming for upgrades
Ground Overvoltage protection (59N)

The MIV includes two separately adjustable ground overvoltage units. Each one can be independently enabled. Settings allow the pickup setpoint to be set from 2 to 60 V or 10 to 250 V depending on model and a time delay from 0 to 600 seconds to be set.
Oscillography
MIV captures voltage waveforms and digital channels at 8 samples per cycle. One oscillography record with a maximum length of 24 cycles is stored in memory. Oscillography is triggered either by internal signals or an external contact.
Voltage Unbalance Protection (47)

A definite time voltage unbalance function operating on negative sequence voltage is included in the MIV 3000 relay. Pickup and time delay settings are the same as in the rest of voltage functions.
Configurable I/O and LEDs

There are two configurable digital inputs in the MIV. Out of the MIVs six digital outputs, two have a fixed function (trip and service required), while the other four are user configurable. Those configurable outputs can be assigned either to a set of pre-configured values or an OR/NOT combination of the same values. Each configurable output can be independently latched. The first LED has a fixed assignment (relay in service), the second fixed for trip, and the remaining four LEDs are user configurable in function, memory and/or blinking/fixed indication.
Frequency Functions (81O/81U)

Two or four independent definite time frequency units are provided in the MIV (depending on model). Each unit can be independently set as underfrequency or overfrequency. Each frequency unit is supervised by an independently adjustable undervoltage element.

Two separate settings groups are stored in MIV nonvolatile memory, with only one group active at a given time. Switching between setting groups 1
Configurable Logic
Up to a maximum of 4 configurable logic schemes can be implemented into the MIV by means of using a set of 4 pre-configured logic gates and timer
All status information such as target messages and digital input/output states may be viewed with the M+PC software.
292
Voltage/Frequency Relay

MIV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P) Pickup Level: 2.0 to 60 V or 10 to 250 V in steps of 0.1 (depending on model) Curve shapes: Definite time Time delay: 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 Accuracy: Level: 3% over the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59) Pickup Level: 2.0 to 60 V or 10 to 250 V in steps of 0.1 (depending on model) Curve shapes: Definite time Time delay: 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 Accuracy: Level: 3% over the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms GROUND OVERVOLTAGE (59N) Pickup Level: 2.0 - 60 V or 10 - 250 V in steps of 0.1 (depending on model) Curve shapes: Definite time Time delay: 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 Accuracy: Level: 3% over the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms VOLTAGE UNBALANCE (47) Pickup Level: 2.0 to 60 V or 10 to 250 V in steps of 0.1 (depending on model) Curve shapes: Definite time Time delay: 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 Accuracy: Level: 3% over the complete range Time: Greater of 3% or 25 ms OVERFREQUENCY (81O) Source: Pickup level: Time delay: Voltage inhibit Setting: UNDERFREQUENCY (81U) Source: Pickup level: Time delay: Voltage inhibit Setting: METERING Frequency : Voltage: Voltage (Phase B) 42.0 to 67.5 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 30 to 250 V / 10 to 60 V in steps of 0.01 Voltage (phase B) 42.0 to 67.5 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz 0.0 to 600 sec in steps of 0.01 30 to 250 V / 10 to 60 V in steps of 0.01 MONITORING (OPTIONAL) OSCILLOGRAPHY Records: 1 x 24 cycles Sampling Rate: 8 samples per power frequency cycle Triggers: Any element pickup or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state Communication command Data: AC input channels Digital input/output channels EVENT RECORDER Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers: 24 events To 1 millisecond Any element pickup, operate or reset Digital input/output change of state Self test events COMMUNICATIONS Local Communication: Alphanumeric display; 3 button frontal keypad Remote Communication: (local or remote PC and communications net): Mode: ModBus RTU Speed: 300 to 19200 bps POWER SUPPLY Frequency: 50/60 Hz Auxiliary Voltage: 24 to 48 VDC, 20% 110 to 250 VDC, 110 to 220 Vac 20% MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Metallic package in 1/8 19" rack and 4 units high Frontal MMI with display and keypad DB9 connector for RS232 ports on the front (1) and RS485 on the rear Protection class IP52 (according to IEC 529) ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Storage: -40C to +80C Operation: -20C to +60C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radiointerference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radiofrequency Emission:
OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS Contact Capacity: Max. Operating Voltage: 440 VAC Continuous Current: 16A Make and Carry: 30 A Breaking: 4000 VA OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration: 6 Electro-Mechanical Form C Contact Material: silver alloy suited for inductive loads Operate Time: 8 ms Max Ratings for 100000 operations:
VOLTAGE DC Resistive 24 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC DC Inductive 24 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC (L/R = 40 ms) 250 VDC AC Resistive 120 VAC 250 VAC AC Inductive 120 VAC PF=0.4 250 VAC MAKE/CARRY MAKE/CARRY CONTINUOUS 0.2 sec 16 A 48 A 16A 48A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16A 48A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A 16 A 48 A BREAK 16 A 2.6A 0.6 A 0.5 A 8A 1.3A 0.3 A 0.25 A 16 A 16 A 6A 5A MAX LOAD 384 W 125W 75 W 125 W 192 W 62W 37.5 W 62.5 W 1920 VA 4000 VA 720 VA 1250 VA
5mHz 3% over the complete range
INPUTS BURDENS Voltage Circuits: 0.2 VA DC Burden: During Operation: 10W Per Each Activated Input: 8mA / 1W, Vaux: 125
2kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to IEC60255-22-1 Class IV according to IEC60255-22-2 Class III according to IEC60255-22-3 Class IV according to IEC60255-22-4 Class II according to IEC60255-21-1 Class I according to IEC60255-21-2 According to IEC 41B (Sec 81) and EN55022 Class B Oscillatory / Fast Risetime Transient: ANSI/IEEE C 37.90.1 Electromagnetic Interference Withstand Capability: ANSI/IEEE C 37.90.2 PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: Ship:
5.9 lbs (2.7 kgs) 7 lbs (3.2 kgs)

BUS 52 3
WIRING
A BUS B C
B1 B2 B3 B4 A3 A4
VA N VB N VC N VOLTAGE INPUTS
A1 +/~
A2 -/~
POWER RS485 SDA B12 SDB A12 GND B11

A B GROUND
TRIP
2x27 2x59 2x59N 2x81O/ 81U
47
TRIP COIL CONTROL POWER +
52a
52a
<<
TRIP COIL
>>
A5 A6 B5
GE Power Management

COM OUT4 OUT3 OUT1/2 OUT1 READY B7
INPUT
LOAD
MIV
mivblock a2.ai
B6 A8 CC1 A9 CC2 A10 COM

RS232
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DIGITAL INTPUTS
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide below. MIV * 0 * 0 E 0 0 0 * 0 0 *
1 2 3 0 1 F H If relays are to be mounted in an
M+system either an M050 half 19" rack or M100 full 19" rack case must be ordered. The M050 and M100 racks are provided at no additional cost.
B8
JK
B9 B10 A7
INPUT
miv wire a3.ai
Voltage functions Frequency functions Voltage + frequency functions 10 - 250 V setting range (only for MIV2000) 2 - 60 V setting range 24-48 VDC Power Supply 110-250 VDC 110-220 VAC p.s. C Individual relay S Mounted in an M+ system D Depth reducing collar
SAFETY GND GROUND

Voltage/Frequency Relay
293
POWER QUALITY
PQM
Continuous metering of feeders, transformers, capacitor banks, generators and motors.
The PQM is an ideal choice when continuous monitoring of a three phase system is required. It provides metering for current, voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, cost of power, power factor and frequency.
PPQM
Portable metering of feeders, transformers, capacitor banks, generators and motors.
When portable monitoring of a 3 phase system is required, a Portable PQM is an ideal choice. The portable version of the PQM has all the same features as the panel mount PQM available in a rugged carrying case.
SECTION 12: POWER QUALITY PQM ........................................295 PPQM ......................................303
294
Continuous metering of feeders, transformers, capacitor banks, generators and motors.
PQM
Power Quality Meter
Applications
I I I I I
Metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks and motors Medium and low voltage systems Commercial, industrial, utility Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc. Power quality analysis
Metering/Control
I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
The PQM is an ideal choice when continuous monitoring of a three phase system is required. It provides metering for current, voltage, real and reactive power, energy use, cost of power, power factor and frequency. Programmable setpoints and 4 assignable output relays allow control functions to be added for specific applications. This includes basic alarm on over/under current or voltage, unbalance, demand based load shedding, and capacitor power factor correction control. More complex control is possible using the 4 switch inputs which also can be used for status such as breaker open/ closed, flow information etc. The PQM may be used as a data gathering device for a plant automation system that integrates process, instrument and electrical requirements. All monitored values are available via two digital RS485 communication ports running the ModBus protocol. If analog values are required for direct interface to a PLC, any of the monitored values can be output to one of 4 isolated analog outputs. A process variable can be measured using an analog input. A front panel RS232 communication port can be connected to a PC for simultaneous access of information by other plant personnel. The quality of the power system is important with increasing use of electronic loads such as computers, ballasts or variable frequency drives. With the PQMs power analysis option, any phase current or voltage can be displayed and the harmonic content calculated. By knowing the harmonic distribution, action can be taken to prevent overheated transformers, motors, capacitors, neutral wires and nuisance breaker trips. Redistribution of system loading can also be determined. Waveform and chart recorder printouts available from the PQM assist in problem diagnosis.
I I I I I
A V W var VA varh Wh PF Hz unbalance A W var VA demand Load shedding Power factor control Pulse input totalizing Pulse output based on kWh, kvarh or kVAh
12
Monitoring
Harmonic analysis through 62nd with THD and TIF Event recorder Waveform capture Data logger Triggered trace memory
Communications
I I I I I I
Ports: RS232 front, dual RS485 rear ModBus RTU protocol Mini RTU: digital 4 in / 4 out Analog 1 in / 4 out Local/remote display of all values Communicate with GE Power Management 269/565 (MOD 508)
GE Power Management
295

STANDARD FEATURES
Select the panel mount with display version for easy local interface. Standard models offer RS485 ModBus communications for programming and monitoring. Replace expensive additional devices by adding the CONTROL, TRANSDUCER and POWER analysis options as required.
Panel mount with display for local/remote programming and monitoring
Metering
Each voltage and current is sampled 64 times per cycle for 0.2% accuracy true RMS measured values. I Ia Ib Ic In I Va Vb Vc Vab Vbc Vca I V I unbalance I true PF crest & K factor I Hz W var VA I Wh varh VAh W cost I demand: A W var VA A keypad and illuminated 40 character display are used for programming setpoints and monitoring values and status.
Select up to 10 different messages for automatic scanning of important information
I load all setpoints from a file I change individual setpoints The standard version PQM comes complete with a front RS232 port. The RS232 port can be used for data collection, printing reports or problem analysis without disturbing the main communication interface to rear RS485 port.
Main plant control/monitoring communication interface RS485
ACTUAL
STORE

STATUS
ALARM PROGRAM SIMULATION SELF TEST
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
Use RS232 comm port for simultaneous access by electrical, maintenance, process, instrumentation personnel for Data monitoring Problem diagnosis Event records Trending Report printing Print reports
PQMWindowsApplication-PQM F ile S etpoint A ctual C ommunication H elp Actual-ChartRecorder OK RUN Cancel PRINT TrendingChart Seconds(ElapsedTime) ForHelp,pressF1
SETPOINT
RESET
MESSAGE

STATUS
ALARM
COMMUNICATE
TX1
RELAYS
ALARM
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1
SIMULATION
TX2
AUX2
SELF TEST
RX2
AUX3
823750AD.cdr
RS232
823779A7.cdr
Keep 600 volt wiring off a panel with reduced depth by using the detachable face plate (MOD 505); cable is 6 ft (2 meters) in length
Future Expansion
Flash Memory is used for firmware storage within the PQM. This allows future product upgrades to be loaded via the serial port. Initially PQM meters can be used as stand-alone units. Open architecture allows connection to other or Modbus compatible devices on the same communication link. These can be integrated in a complete plant wide system for overall process monitoring and control.
Download the latest product enhancements via the serial port
Product update from GE PM on disk Transfer new firmware to the PQM
Alarms
Any of the assignable output relays may be used to trigger an alarm for specific applications. Alarm messages are in clear English for easy interpretation. CONDITION
overcurrent undercurrent neutral current current unbalance overvoltage undervoltage phase sequence overfrequency underfrequency power factor switch input
12
APPLICATION
motors/transformers pumps/compressors leakage/unbalance motors equipment protection motors/load transfer pumps/equipment generators load shedding capacitor banks process control
Expensive peak demand penalties can be avoided using demand monitoring for load scheduling
LOAD CONTROL
DCS SYSTEM

STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
823774A5.cdr
Communications
OPTIONS
Transducer
4 ANALOG OUTPUTS: 4 isolated analog outputs can be used to replace 8 analog transducers. Output signals can be selected from any of the measured parameters for direct interface to a PLC.
Replace 8 transducers with the PQMs direct PLC 4-20 mA analog interface
Select 1-4 or 5-8
PQM

STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
823776A7.cdr
Integrate process, instrumentation and electrical requirements in a plant automation system by connecting PQM meters together to a DCS or SCADA system. A PC running PQMPC can change system setpoints, monitor values, status and alarms. Continuous monitoring minimizes process downtime by immediately identifying potential problems due to faults or changes from growth. I I I I I
RS485 ModBus 1,200 - 19,200 bps mini RTU SCADA system component measure actual values read status issue control commands

STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
Select from: Ia Ib Ic Imax Iav Van Vbn Vcn W var VA Wh varh PF Hz
PLC or RTU
4 isolated 4-20mA analog outputs
823778A8.cdr
296
Meters
ANALOG INPUT: With the analog input and an output relay for selection, two transducers (such as temperature or water level) can be monitored and used for control.
Connect two 4-20 mA transducers for process variable measurement and control
Power factor setpoints and 2 output relays can be used for 2 level capacitor bank switching
BANK 1 BANK 2
-1.05
OFF
DUAL CAPACITOR BANK POWER FACTOR CONTROL ON

OFF ON
OFF
OFF
LEAD
Delay 1
BANK 1 Drop Out
1.00
Delay 2
BANK 2 Drop Out
4-20 mA transducer
PQM AUX RELAY

STATUS
ALARM
+0.95
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
4-20 mA transducer
ANALOG INPUT
BANK 1 Pickup
+0.90
Delay 1
BANK 2 Pickup
823803A3.cdr
HARMONIC ANALYSIS: Non linear loads such as variable speed drives, computers and electronic ballasts can cause harmonics which may lead to problems such as nuisance breaker tripping, telephone interference, transformer, capacitor or motor overheating. For fault diagnosis such as detecting undersized neutral wiring, need for a harmonic rated transformer, or effectiveness of harmonic filters, details of the harmonic spectrum are useful and available with the power analysis option.
Harmonic spectrum analysis helps to identify problems and that implemented changes work correctly
POWER FACTOR
LAG
Delay 2
+0.85 0
10
12 14 16 TIME (hour)
18
20
22
24
823757A7.cdr
2ND REAR COMM PORT: An additional rear RS485 comm port is provided for simultaneous monitoring by process, instrument, electrical or maintenance personnel.
Redundancy in high security systems is provided by the 2nd RS485 comm port
COM1 RS485
Use the PQM as a Mini RTU for monitoring and control with addressable output relays and switch inputs
DCS
PLANT CONTROL SYSTEM
COM2 RS485
RS485 MODBUS PQM

STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
PQM
POWER QUALITY METER
PQM
POWER QUALITY METER
PQM
POWER QUALITY METER
4 SWITCH INPUTS
STATUS
Control
3 OUTPUT RELAYS/4 INPUTS: Measured parameters from the standard PQM can be combined with setpoints and input/outputs for control applications. With the control option, 3 output relays and 4 switch inputs are added along with programmable setpoints to make a mini RTU. Output relays can also be controlled via the communication port or assigned to different setpoints for custom programming to accommodate many situations. Possibilities include: I undercurrent alarm for pumps I over/undervoltage for generators I unbalance alarm for rotating
machines I dual level power factor for capacitor bank switching I underfrequency/demand output for load shedding resulting in power cost savings I kWh, kvarh and kVAh pulse output for PLC interface
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
4 RELAYS ALARM AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3

823775A6.cdr
WAVEFORM CAPTURE: Voltage and current waveforms can be captured and displayed on a PC using the PQMPC program supplied with the PQM or using third party software. Distorted peaks or notches from SCR switching provide clues for taking corrective action.
Voltage and current waveforms provide valuable insights into system problems
12
Power Analysis
DATA LOGGER (TRENDING): Trending is useful as a troubleshooting aid when a problem is detected. Measured values can be selected and plotted with a programmable sampling rate to suit the time interval of interest. The generated chart recorder screen can be printed or exported to other programs for report writing.
Record trends of measured parameters over time
EVENT RECORDER: Alarms, setpoint triggers, input and output events can be stored in a 40 event record and time/date stamped by the internal clock. This is useful for diagnosing problems and system activity. Minimum and maximum values are also continuously updated and time stamped. TRACE MEMORY: The PQM can be configured to record a maximum of 36 cycles of data on all voltage and current inputs based on undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent or switch input state change.
Meters
297

PQMPC
PQMPC is a Windows based program for the PQM. It can be used to enter setpoints, read metered values, monitor status and evaluate power quality. All data continuously gathered by the PQM can be transferred to a third party software program for display, control or analysis via the communications interface.
Use the free PQMPC software to program/ monitor from a PC under Windows SETPOINTS METERING STATUS DATA LOGGER POWER QUALITY Monitor any measured value or status for fast fault diagnosis and correction
View system alarm status
When justifying equipment purchases or analyzing problems such as phase unbalance from a power utility, a printout can be useful. PQMPC enables waveform capture information to be transferred to other programs for inclusion in reports. Routine event logs of demand or sampled voltage can also be created and printed out.
Print data logger records or demand profile trending
See actual vs setpoint value for active alarms
Screens are available for monitoring all measured values such as current, voltage, or power. Status of alarms and control settings can also be displayed. Voltage and current waveshape can give important information about what is happening on a system. For example, non linear loads such as computers or variable speed drives may introduce distortion that indicates filtering is required.
Gain useful system information using voltage/ current waveform capture
823781A4
Once all setpoints have been entered they can be downloaded into any PQM or stored in a file with a tag name for later reference.
To verify correct installation, the simulation mode substitutes programmed currents and voltages for real ones. This powerful tool is also an excellent training aid for plant personnel.
In simulation mode, voltage and current can be injected without a test set to verify correct control operation or for training
12
Program setpoints then download to the PQM, save to a file or print for later reference
METER SETTINGS
PQMWindowsApplication-PQM F ile S etpoint Actual Communication Help Actual-ChartRecorder
Select waveform for display
OK
RUN
Cancel
PRINT
TrendingChart
save on disk send to PQM

STATUS ALARM PROGRAM COMMUNICATE TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 RELAYS ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
Seconds(ElapsedTime)
ForHelp,pressF1
print
SIMULATION SELF TEST
Analyze waveform or copy to other software
1
823780A7.cdr
Program simulated voltages and currents
To speed up learning, the full instruction manual is available on line.

Click on any topic for on-line help or print any topic including illustrations
Harmonic analysis may reveal excessive harmonic content requiring a derated transformer or larger neutral wire. Early warning of these problems can prevent equipment damage or nuisance breaker tripping.
Use the power analysis option to identify harmonics for sizing transformers, neutral wiring and preventing equipment overheating
Start simulation and verify correct operation
823773A3
A built in communications debugging tool assists in troubleshooting when developing communication interfaces
Select parameter for harmonic analysis
Read any memory location to verify correct values Details of each harmonic
Load any memory location and observe correct operation
View harmonic distribution or copy to other software
8237672A2
823771A5
298
Meters

FEATURES
Front View
STATUS: ALARM PROGRAM COMMUNICATE: For monitoring communication activity: TX1 COM1 transmit data RX1 COM1 receive data TX2 COM2 transmit data RX2 COM2 receive data RELAYS: ALARM Alarm condition present. See display for cause. AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 Auxiliary relay activated by programmable function.
- Alarm condition present - Setpoint programming is enabled SIMULATION- Simulated values being used for test/training SELF TEST - internal fault detected, service required
DISPLAY 40 character illuminated display for programming, monitoring, status, fault diagnosis, user programmable messages and setpoints.Programmable auto scan sequence for unattended operation.
ACTUAL
STORE
SETPOINT
RESET
DOOR: Door covers keys and computer port when not in use. KEYPAD: Rubber keypad is dust tight and splash proof.
MESSAGE

STATUS
COMMUNICATE
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2
RELAYS
ALARM
VALUE
AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
SETPOINT KEY: Program all setpoints. Tamperproof settings with passcode and access jumper prevent unauthorized setpoint changes. COMPUTER INTERFACE: RS232 comm port for connecting to a PC. Use for downloading setpoints, monitoring, data collection, printing reports.
823756AJ.CDR
12
Rear View
ANALOG INPUT Accept 4-20 mA analog inputs for transducer interface. ANALOG OUTPUTS 4 isolated 0-1 mA or 4-20 mA outputs replace 8 transducers. Programmable including: A, V, W, var, VA, Wh varh, PF, Hz.
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
PQM
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING 250VAC 10A RESISTIVE 1/4HP 250VAC 1/2HP 125VAC
MADE IN CANADA
SWITCH INPUTS A Programmable for relay activation, B counters, logic, demand sync., C setpoint access, alarm position. D 4 OUTPUT RELAYS ALARM Programmable alarm conditions AUX1 actuated by programmable AUX2 setpoints, switch inputs, remote AUX3 communication control. COMMUNICATIONS Dual RS485 comm ports Modbus protocol. COM1 Continuous monitoring/control via SCADA system rear (RS485). COM2/3 Front (RS232) or rear (RS485) access allows simultaneous communication via a PC or for redundant comms. PROGRAM UPDATING Flash memory storage of firmware for field updating via communications port. Enables product updating on-site for latest features. FUSE ACCESS Control power fuse accessible under sliding door. COMPACT DESIGN Panel mount replaces many discrete components with one standard model.
823755AL.cdr
MODEL NO.: PQM-T20-C-A
VERSION: 100.000
CONTROL VOLTAGE:
90-300VDC 20VA 70-265VAC 50/60HZ 20VA
SERIAL No.: A6650001
CUSTOMER TAG No.: 1234-567-89
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CT INPUTS: 3 isolated phase CT inputs 1 isolated neutral CT input 1 Amp or 5 Amp secondary VT INPUTS: 0-600V, 3 wire or 4 wire voltage inputs. Direct (up to 600V) or VT (>600V for isolation) connections.
AC/DC CONTROL POWER Universal control power 90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC GROUND: Separate safety and filter ground All inputs meet C37.90 and IEC801-2 EMI, SWC, RFI interference immunity
Meters
299

TYPICAL WIRING
ALTERNATIVE CT/VT CONNECTIONS
4 WIRE WYE/120 VOLTAGE 3 VTs LINE A B C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT OPTIONAL NEUTRAL CT ANY VOLTAGE LOAD A B C N
4 WIRE WYE/120 VOLTAGE 3 VTs A B LINE C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT
ANY VOLTAGE A B LOAD C OPTIONAL NEUTRAL CT N
VTan
VTbn
VTcn
1 V1
9
5A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
V2 V3 VN VOLTAGE INPUTS
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
CURRENT INPUTS
Perferrred 4 wire configuration

4 WIRE WYE DIRECT/120 VOLTAGE NO VT LINE A B C N PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT OPTIONAL NEUTRAL CT 600V MAX LOAD A B C
OBSERVE CT & VT POLARITY
VTan
VTbn
VTcn
1
N
9
5A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
V1 V 2 V3 VN
CONTROL POWER 90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC 50/60 Hz
1 V1 2 3 4 9
5A
1A COM 5A
VOLTAGE INPUTS
PHASE A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PHASE B PHASE C CURRENT INPUTS
NEUTRAL
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
CONTROL POWER
CURRENT INPUTS ANY VOLTAGE LOAD A PHASE B CT PHASE C CT OPTIONAL NEUTRAL CT B C N
8 7
4 WIRE WYE/60 VOLTAGE 2 VTs (2-1/2 ELEMENTS) LINE A B C N PHASE A CT
+ N_
6 5
SAFETY GROUND FILTER GROUND
GE Power Management
USE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR WIRE COM 1 + _ 48 47 COM1 RS485 TO/FROM DEVICE
VTan
VTcn
SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS 45 NO 44 COM
RS485 SERIAL
COM 46 COM 2 + _ 51 50 COM2 RS485 TO/FROM DEVICE
12
1 V1 2 3 4 9
5A
ALARM
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
43 NC 42 NO 41 COM 40 NC 39 NO 38 COM 37 NC AUX2

A B
COM 49
CURRENT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
ANALOG IN
*Note: Accurate only with balanced phase voltages

3 WIRE DELTA/60 VOLTAGE 2 VTs LINE A B C PHASE C CT 2 PHASE CTs ANY VOLTAGE LOAD
AUX1
+ _
SHIELD
23 22 21 4-20mA TRANSDUCER
VTab VTcb
ANALOG OUT
1+ 4-20mA 2+ 3+ 4+
28 27 26 25 TO PLC OR SCADA SYSTEM
36 NO
2 or 3 CTs see below
35 COM 34 NC
AUX3
1 V1
9
5A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
CURRENT INPUTS
DRY CONTACT SWITCH INPUTS
COM 24
PROGRAMMABLE SWITCH INPUTS
Preferred 3 wire configuration

3 WIRE DIRECT/120 VOLTAGE NO VTs LINE A B C PHASE A CT PHASE B CT PHASE C CT 2 or 3 CTs see above 600V MAX LOAD L N
32 SW1 31 30 29 SW2 SW3 SW4
COM3 RS232 (FRONT)

RS232 INTERFACE
PQM 1 TXD 2 RXD 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9 9 PIN CONNECTOR 25 PIN CONNECTOR COMPUTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22
1 V1
9
5A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
NOTES: 1) Relay contact state shown with control power not applied.
CURRENT INPUTS
SINGLE PHASE DIRECT NO VTs LINE L N PHASE CT
600V MAX LOAD L N
PERSONAL COMPUTER
CAUTION: USE HRC FUSES FOR VT PRIMARY TO ENSURE ADEQUATE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY.
PQMPC
Transducer Option
1 V1 2 3 4 9
5A
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1A COM 5A
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
NEUTRAL
Control Option
CURRENT INPUTS
823807AR.CDR 823753AQ.DWG
300
Meters
9 WIRE RS232
33 +24VDC
RS232

PQM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MONITORING UNDERVOLTAGE MONITORING Required Voltage: 20 V applied Pickup Level: 0.50 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01 x VT Dropout Level: 103% of pickup Time Delay: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmable) phases have to go below pickup to operate Level Accuracy: Per voltage input Timing Accuracy: -0/+1 sec OVERVOLTAGE MONITORING Pickup Level: 1.01 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 x VT Dropout Level: 97% of pickup Time Delay: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec Phases: Any One/Any Two/All Three (programmable) phases have to exceed pickup to operate Level Accuracy: Per voltage input Timing Accuracy: -0/+1 sec UNDERFREQUENCY MONITORING Required Voltage: 20 V applied Pickup Level: 20 - 70.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup + 0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.1 to 10.0 in steps of 0.1 sec Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz Timing Accuracy: 3 cycles OVERFREQUENCY MONITORING Required Voltage: 20 V applied Pickup Level: 20 to 70.00 in steps of 0.01 Hz Dropout Level: Pickup - 0.03 Hz Time Delay: 0.1 to 10.0 in steps of 0.1 sec Level Accuracy: 0.02 Hz Timing Accuracy: 3 cycles POWER FACTOR MONITORING Required Voltage: 20 V applied 0.50 Lag to 0.50 Lead in steps of 0.01 Pickup Level: Dropout Level: 0.50 Lag to 0.50 Lead in steps of 0.01 Time Delay: 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.5 sec Timing Accuracy: -0/+1 sec SAMPLING MODES SAMPLES/ INPUTS SAMPLED DURATION CYCLE AT A TIME (CYCLES) 64 ALL 2 16 ALL continuous 256 1 1 METERING MEASURED VALUES ACCURACY PARAMETER (% of full scale) Voltage 0.2% Current 0.2% Voltage Unbalance 1% Current Unbalance 1% kW 0.4% kvar 0.4% kVA 0.4% kWh 0.4% kvarh 0.4% kVAh 0.4% Power Factor 1% Frequency 0.02 Hz kw demand 0.4% kvar demand 0.4% kva demand 0.4% Amps demand 0.2% Amps THD 2.0% Volts THD 2.0% Crest factor 0.4% POWER SUPPLY CONTROL POWER Input: 90 - 300 VDC 70 - 265 VAC 50/60 Hz Power: 10 VA nominal, 20 VA maximum Holdup: 100 ms typical @ 120 VAC/VDC OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUTS Accuracy:
RESOLUTION RANGE 1 VOLT 20% of VT to 100% of VT 1a 1% of CT to 150% of CT 0.1% 0 - 100.0% 0.1% 0 - 100.0% 0.01 kW 0 - 999,999.99 kW 0.01 kvar 0 - 999,999.99 kvar 0.01 kVA 0 - 999,999.99 kVA 1 kWh 232 kWh 1 kvarh 232 kvarh 1 kVAh 232 kVAh 0.01 0.0 - 1.0 0.01 Hz 20.00 - 70.00 Hz 0.1 kw 999,999.99 kw 0.1 kvar 999,999.99 kvar 0.1 kva 999,999.99 kva 1a 0 - 7,500 a 0.1% 0.0 - 100.0% 0.1% 0.0 - 100.0% 1 - 9.99
INPUTS AC CURRENT Conversion: CT Input: Burden: Overload: Full Scale: Frequency: Accuracy: AC VOLTAGE Conversion: VT pri/sec: Input Range: Full Scale: Burden: Frequency: Accuracy: SWITCH INPUTS Type: Resistance: Voltage: Duration: ANALOG INPUT Range: Accuracy: Relay Output: Internal Burden Resistance: PULSE INPUT Max Inputs: Min Pulse Width: Min Off Time:
True RMS, 64 samples/cycle 1 A and 5 A secondary 0.2 VA 20 x CT for 1 sec 100 x CT for 0.2 sec 150% of CT up to 32nd harmonic 0.2% of full scale, true RMS True rms, 64 samples/cycle Direct or 120 - 72,000 : 69 - 240 20 - 600 VAC 150/600 VAC autoscaled < 0.1 VA up to 32nd harmonic 0.2% of full scale, true RMS Dry contact 1,000 max ON resistance 24 VDC @ 2 mA 100 ms minimum 4 - 20 mA 1% of full scale Programmable 4 - 20 mA 250 4 150 ms 200 ms
1% of full scale reading OUTPUT 0-1 mA (T1 Option) 0-20 mA &4-20 mA (T20 Option) Max Load 2400 600 Max Output 1.1 mA 21 mA Isolation: 50 V isolated, active source OUTPUT RELAYS Voltage Make/Carry Make/Carry Continuous 0.2 SEC Break 30 Vdc 5 30 5 Resistive 125 Vdc 5 30 0.5 250 Vdc 5 30 0.3 30 Vdc 5 30 5 Inductive 125 Vdc 5 30 0.25 (Vr=7ms) 250 Vdc 5 30 0.15 120 Vac 5 30 5 Resistive 250 Vac 5 30 5 Inductive 120 Vac 5 30 5 PF = 0.4 250 Vac 5 30 5 Configuration FORM C NO/NC Contact material SILVER ALLOY PULSE OUTPUT Parameters: +ve kWh, ve kWh, +ve kvarh, ve kvarh, kVAh Interval: 1 to 65000 in steps of 1 Pulse Width: 100 to 2000 ms in steps of 10 ms Min Pulse Interval: 500 ms ENVIRONMENTAL Humidity: 95% non-condensing Temperature: -10C to +60C ambient Environment: IEC 68-2-38 Temperature/Humidity Cycle PACKAGING Shipping Box: Ship Weight: 8 1/2" L x 6" H x 6" D (215mm x 152mm x 152mm) 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
12
Metered values Trace memory Harmonic spectrum
DEMAND MONITORING Measured Values: Phase A/B/C/N current (A) 3 real power (kW) 3 reactive power (kvar) 3 apparent power (kVA) Measurement Type: Thermal exponential 90% response time (programmable): 5 - 60 min, steps of 1 min Block interval/rolling demand time in interval (programmable): 5 - 60 min, steps of 1 min Pickup Level: A: 10 to 7,500 in steps of 1 kW: 0.1 to 6,500.0 in steps of 0.1 kvar: 0.1 to 6,500.0 in steps of 0.1 kVA: 0.1 to 6,500.0 in steps of 0.1
TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength: 2.0 kV for 1 min to relays, CTs, VTs, power supply Insulation Resistance: IEC255 - 5 500 VDC Transients: ANSI C37.90.1 oscillatory 2.5 kV/1 MHz ANSI C37.90.1 fast rise 5 kV/10 ns Ontario Hydro A-28M-82 IEC255-4 impulse / high frequency disturbance Class III Level Impulse Test: IEC 255-5 0.5 J 5 kV RFI: 50 MHz/15w transmitter EMI: C37.90.2 electromagnetic interference @ 150 MHz and 450 MHz, 10 V/m Static: IEC 801-2 static discharge Note: Type test report available upon request. APPROVALS ISO: Manufactured to an ISO9001 registered program UL: Recognized under E83849 CSA: Recognized under LR41286 : Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN 50082-2 Conforms to IEC 947-1, IEC 1010-1
COMMUNICATIONS COM1/COM2 Type: RS485 2 wire, half duplex, isolated COM3 Type: RS232, 9PIN Baud Rate: 1,200 to 19,200 bps Protocol: ModBus RTU Functions: Read/write setpoints Read actual values Execute commands *Specifications subject to change without notice.
Three phase metering and power quality analysis shall be provided by a power quality meter. Metering shall include A, V, W, Wh, Wcost, var, varh, VA, VAh, Hz, and PF in True RMS or displacement(fundamental) quantities. Power analysis features shall include an event recorder, waveform capture, trace memory, harmonic spectrum display (through the 62nd harmonic with total harmonic distortion) and a data logger function. All analysis data shall be non-volatile. Four switch inputs shall be provided which can be programmed for relay activation, counters, logic, demand sync, reset and alarms. Four output relays shall be provided which can be programmed to activate on alarms, setpoints, switch inputs, kWh pulse, trace memory triggers or communications control. These output relays shall also be able to use demand metering values of A, VAR, W and VA to control load shedding. PLC interface shall be provided via four isolated 4-20mA outputs programmable from measured and calculated parameters. Transducer monitoring shall be provided via a
Meters
301

4-20mA input. Preprogrammed logic shall allow capacitor bank control for power factor correction. Current inputs shall be via 1 amp or 5 amp CTs and no VTs shall be required for voltages up to 600V. Control power can be AC or DC. Local user interface shall include a keypad and display for entering all setpoints and reading all measured values, and LED indicators for output relays, communication status and alarm status. An RS232 computer interface port shall be located on the front panel. Two RS485 and one RS232 communication ports shall be provided for simultaneous access using ModBus RTU protocol. Any communication port shall be programmable for access using DNP 3.0 Level 2 protocol. Windows based software shall be provided to enable setpoint programming.
DIMENSIONS
PANEL MOUNT WITH DISPLAY FRONT
7.36" (187) USE MOUNTING A 0.85" (22)
SIDE
3.92" (100)

STATUS ALARM PROGRAM SIMULATION SELF TEST COMMUNICATE TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 RELAYS ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
4.35" (110)
DETACHABLE FACE PLATE VERSION (MOD 505)

FRONT
7.36" (187)
DETACHABLE FACE PLATE

USE MOUNTING A
SIDE
0.85" (22)
DETACHABLE FACE PLATE CHASSIS

USE MOUNTING B
SIDE
MOUNTING SURFACE
REAR

STATUS ALARM PROGRAM SIMULATION COMMUNICATE TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 RELAYS ALARM AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
4.35" (110)
4.07" (103)
12
SELF TEST
1.81" (46)
4.54" (115)
7.50" (191)
MOUNTING A
7.10" (180) 6.90" (175) 0.10" (2.5)
MOUNTING B
Inches (mm)
0.32" (8)
1.16" (29) 2.32" (59) 3.47" (88)
1.73" (44) 4.11" (104) (6) - 0.218" Dia. HOLES (6.00) 7.24" (184) 3.47" (88)
CUT-OUT
0.08" R (8 PLACES) (2)
823762AF.DWG
ORDERING
Modifications:
MOD 500: Portable test/carrying case MOD 501: 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC Control Power MOD 502: Tropicalization MOD 504: Removable Terminal Blocks MOD 505: Detachable faceplate MOD 506: 4 Step Capacitor Bank Switching MOD 507: -40 to +60C temperature operation MOD 508: 269/565 communication protocol MOD 513: Class 1, division 2 operation MOD 516: PQM remote: base unit only MOD 517: PQM remote: detachable faceplate only
PQM
PQM
*
T20 T1
*
Basic unit with display, all current/voltage/power measurements, 1 RS485 comm port, 1 RS232 comm port Transducer option; 4 isolated analog outputs 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA, assignable to all measured parameters, 4-20 mA analog input, 2nd RS485 comm port Transducer option; 4 isolated analog outputs 0-1 mA, assignable to all measured parameters, 4-20 mA analog input, 2nd RS485 comm port Control option; 3 additional programmable output relays (total of 4), 4 programmable switch inputs Power analysis option; harmonic analysis, triggered trace memory waveform capture, event record, data logger
C A
Accessories:
*PQMPC Windows software **RS232 to RS485 convertor 2.25" Collar for limited depth mounting RS485 terminating network PQM Mounting Plate to replace MTM Plus
Order code for all options: PQM-T20-C-A
* Free upon request **Required to connect a computer to the PQM RS485 ports

See pages 15 - 18.
Control Power:
90-300 VDC / 70-265 VAC standard 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC (MOD 501)
302
Meters
Portable metering of feeders, transformers, capacitor banks, generators and motors.
PPQM
Portable Power Quality Meter
Applications
I I I
DESCRIPTION
When portable monitoring of a 3 phase system is required, a Portable PQM is an ideal choice. The portable version of the PQM has all the same features as the panel mount PQM available in a rugged carrying case. These features include metering for current, voltage, real, reactive and apparent power, energy use (kWh, kvarh kVAh), power factor, demand, THD and frequency. Hardware features include programmable setpoints, four switch inputs and 4 assignable output relays which allow control functions for over/under current or voltage, unbalance, demand based load shedding and capacitor power factor control. The PPQM comes equipped with three clamp-on current probes and four fused voltage probes for easy connection to the power system or device being monitored. The PPQM can be connected directly to systems 600 V or less and can be connected to the secondary of the VTs for systems greater than 600 V. One of the advantages of a portable PQM is its ability to act as a power management tool without installing numerous meters throughout a system or plant. The PPQM can be used to determine areas of inefficiency by locating poor power factors, unbalanced loads and by monitoring peak demand. Poor power factor and excessive peak demand can have costly penalties. The PPQM can also be used as a trouble shooting tool. The PPQM can be use to determine wiring problems by displaying the individual current and voltage waveforms and their phase relationship in the PQMPC software. The PPQM can be used to diagnose nuisance trips by using a breaker auxiliary output to trigger the trace memory feature in the PPQM. The trace memory will capture 7 waveforms to determine why the trip has occurred. The trace memory feature can be triggered on current and voltage fluctuations as well as by the switch inputs. The PPQM can also be used as a data collection device by utilizing the data logger feature. The PPQM can be placed at different locations throughout a plant to collect data such as current and voltage values, power (W, var, VA), %THD per phase, power factor and demand values. This information is easily downloaded to PQMPC via the front RS232 communications port or the two rear RS485 communications ports all running the ModBus protocol. The PPQM can also use the harmonic analysis feature with PQMPC to determine the harmonic content of each input up to the 62nd harmonic.
I I I I
Portable metering of distribution feeders, transformers, generators, capacitor banks and motors Locate power quality problems at their source Locate problem areas to improve efficiency and reduce costly power factor and demand penalties Medium and low voltage systems Commercial, industrial, utility Flexible control for demand load shedding, power factor, etc. Power quality analysis 12
Measure/Control
I I I I I I
A V W var VA varh Wh PF Hz unbalance A W var VA demand Load shedding Power factor control Pulse input totalizing Pulse output based on kWh, kvarh or kVAh
Communications
I I I I I
Ports: RS232 front, dual RS485 rear ModBus RTU protocol Mini RTU: digital 4 in / 4 out Analog 1 in / 4 out Local/remote display of all values
Maintenance
I I I I I
Harmonic analysis through 63rd with THD and TIF Event recorder Waveform capture Data logger Triggered trace memory
GE Power Management
303
PPQM Portable Power Quality Meter

DIMENSIONS
Clamps
0" ) .5 m 10 7m 6 (2
" ) .80 12 5mm (32
BACK
1000 A 500 A
11.60" (295mm)
150 A
8.11" (206)
FRONT
4.53" (115)
7.68" (195)
BODY
1.26" (32)
0.87" (22)
2.60" (66)
1.34" (34)
4.13" (105)
1.89" (48)
823851A2.cdr
823403A5.dwg
FEATURES
Front View
DISPLAY 40 character illuminated display for programming, monitoring, status, fault diagnosis, user programmable messages and setpoints. Programmable auto scan sequence for unattended operation.
ORDERING
To order, select the Portable PQM with the desired clamp-on CT from the Selection Guide below.
CASE
Rugged carrying case with storage area for CT and VT probes.
GE Power Management
PPQM
*
150
1 A - 150 A clamp-on CT which fits wires 0.47" (12 mm) in diameter 2 A - 500 A clamp-on CT which fits wires 1.18" (30 mm) in diameter 2 A - 1000 A clamp-on CT which fits wires 2.13" (54 mm) in diameter
RELAYS:
12
ALARM Alarm condition present. See display for cause. Auxiliary relay activated AUX1 by programmable AUX2 function. AUX3
500
ACTUAL STORE
KEYPAD:
Rubber keypad is dust tight and splash proof.
SETPOINT
RESET
1000
COMMUNICATE: For monitoring communication activity: TX1 COM1 transmit data RX1 COM1 receive data TX2 COM2 transmit data RX2 COM2 receive data
MESSAGE

STATUS COMMUNICATE RELAYS
DOOR:
ALARM
ALARM
TX1
VALUE
PROGRAM RX1 AUX1
Door covers keys and computer port when not in use.
SIMULATION
TX2
AUX2
Modifications:
MOD 501: Control Power 20-60 VDC/ 24-48 VAC
SELF TEST
RX2
AUX3
COMPUTER INTERFACE: STATUS:

ALARM PROGRAM - Alarm condition present - Setpoint programming is enabled SIMULATION - Simulated values being used for test/training - internal fault SELF TEST detected, service required RS232 comm port for connecting to a PC. Use for downloading setpoints, monitoring, data collection, printing reports, firmware updating.
Portable POWER QUALITY METER
PQM
Accessories:
PQMPC software (free) RS232 to RS485 convertor
Rear View
ANALOG OUTPUTS
4 isolated 4-20 mA outputs replace 8 transducers. Programmable including: A V W var VA Wh varh PF Hz
SWITCH INPUTS
A B C D
Control Power:
90-300 VDC / 70 - 265 VAC standard
Programmable for relay activation, counters, logic, demand synchronization, setpoint access, alarm position
ANALOG INPUT
Accept 4-20mA analog input for transducer interface.
PQM Portable
POWER QUALITY METER
ANALOG IN ANALOG OUT + SWITCH INPUTS
AUX3
4 OUTPUT RELAYS
OUTPUT RELAYS
AUX2 AUX1 ALARM
RS485 SERIAL
COM 1 COM 2
4-20mA +24VDC SHIELD
COM
COM
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
REMOVABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS for ease of wiring. CT INPUTS:

3 isolated phase CT inputs Max input 1A, accepts 1000:1 clamp-on CTs supplied.
+
23
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
+
48
+
51
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NC
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
NO
NC
4+
3+
2+
1+
46
47
49
50
Programmable alarm conditions actuated by programmable setpoints, switch inputs, remote communication control.
COMMUNICATIONS
COM1 Continuous monitoring/control via SCADA system rear (RS485). COM2 Second rear (RS485) access allows simultaneous communication via a PC or for redundant comms.

See pages 15 - 18.
VT INPUTS:
0-600V, 3 wire or 4 wire voltage inputs. Fused voltage probes supplied.
V1
CAUTION
USE ALL SAFETY MEASURES FOR WORK ABOVE 50 VOLTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
600VAC MAX.
CURRENT INPUTS
V2
V3
VN
I1
I2
I3
V1
1 AMP FUSE
V2
1 AMP FUSE
V3
1 AMP FUSE
COM 1
COM 2
COM 3
VOLTAGE INPUT FUSES

F USE F USE F USE
1.5A MAXIMUM UNFUSED
PROGRAM UPDATING
3 AMP FUSE
FU
F USE F SE
The voltage inputs are fused with HRC type fuses.
120/240 VAC SUPPLY

FU FU FU
F SE F SE F S SE
AC/DC CONTROL POWER

Universal control power 90-300 VDC 70-265 VAC AC cord included.
REPLACE ALL 1 AMP FUSES WITH HRC TYPE ONLY
UNIT MUST BE GROUNDED
Flash memory storage of firmware for field updating via communications port. Enables product updating on-site for latest features.
823809A5.cdr
304
Meters
E US
E US
E US
E US
ModBus is a registered trademark of Modicon Windows is a trademark of Microsoft
OVERCURRENT RELAYS
IAC
Time-overcurrent protection of AC circuits and apparatus.
IAC relays are used in the protection of industrial and utility power systems against either phase or ground overcurrent. They are single phase, non-directional, current sensitive, ac devices.
DIAC/DIFC/DSFC
Single phase or ground overcurrent protection for industrial and utility power systems.
The DIAC, DIFC, and DSFC units are single phase, digital microprocessor based, self-powered, non-directional overcurrent relays. They provide time and instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase or ground faults.
IFC
Type IFC relays are used for the protection of industrial and utility power systems against either phase or ground overcurrent. They are single-phase, non-directional, current sensitive AC devices.
IFCV
Generator and generator system fault backup protection.
IFCV relays are draw out, induction disc time-overcurrent relays having voltage restraint and inverse time characteristics. They are supplied with two electrically separate contacts.
CHC
Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays
High-speed instantaneous overcurrent fault detector relays.
HFC
Direct trip instantaneous overcurrent relays.
HFC relays consist of one or more hinged armature instantaneous overcurrent units. Each unit has two electrically separate contacts and is assembled in a single end drawout type C1 case.
PJC
Instantaneous overcurrent or undercurrent protection of AC and DC circuits and machines.
The PJC is a plunger relay that operates on the principle of electromagnetic attraction. The contacts are opened or closed by an armature which is attracted vertically into a small solenoid.
SECTION 13: OVERCURRENT RELAYS IAC...........................................306 DIAC ........................................315 DIFC.........................................315 DSFC .......................................315 IFC ...........................................319 IFCV.........................................323 CHC .........................................325 HFC..........................................325 PJC ..........................................325
305
IAC
Time-Overcurrent Relay
Applications
I I
Feeder, AC machines & transformers Applications where operating time is inverse to operating current

I I I
Ground and f time O/C and U/C Overload motor protection Instantaneous overcurrent (optional)
Features
I I I I
6 inverse time/current operating curves Target seal-in units available Instantaneous units available Drawout case
13
INTRODUCTION
The listing of IAC Models, on pages 310 through 314 is organized by time/ current characteristics into fourteen tables. To find a known model number:
1. See WHERE TO FIND IAC MODELS on this page to determine correct table and page. 2. Turn to that table for sequential listing of models.
DESCRIPTION
IAC relays are used in the protection of industrial and utility power systems against either phase or ground overcurrent. They are single phase (although some models contain more than one unit), nondirectional, current sensitive, ac devices. The basic operating mechanism (the time unit) produces one of several available operating characteristics. The operating time is inversely related to operating current which permits close coordiWhere to find IAC models
nation with other protective devices. It consists of a magnetic core operating coil, an induction disc, damping magnet, and a mechanical target. The IAC relay may also include one or more hinged armature instantaneous overcurrent units, with integral target. The IAC relay is mounted in a drawout case, permitting front access to the relay for testing and maintenance. Testing can be accomplished, without removing the relay, by using XLA test plugs.
To find a model number for a known application: .

1. See APPLICATION, to determine time/current characteristics and/or specific application desired. 2. See WHERE TO FIND IAC MODELS to determine correct table and page. 3. Use the rating and comment columns of that table to determine Model Number with desired features.
Models of These Designs

IAC 51, 52, 60 IAC 53, 54, 80 IAC 77, 78, 90 IAC 55, 56, 68, 85, 95 IAC 57 IAC 66 IAC 59
Time/Current Characteristics
Inverse Time Very Inverse Time Extremely Inverse Time Inverse, Short Time Inverse, Medium Time Inverse, Long Time Inverse, Over- and Undercurrent
60 Hz
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7
50 Hz
Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14
306
GE Power Management
IAC Time-Overcurrent Relay

APPLICATIONS
Type IAC relays are used for protection of feeders, transmission lines, alternating current machines, transformers, and for numerous other applications where a relay is required whose operating time is inversely related to operating current. ping during the inrush period, and at the same time coordinate properly with power fuses and fuse cutouts. Three additional time characteristics are available as follows: INVERSE SHORT TIME relays (see Table 4) are used on equipment where tripping must be relatively fast but should not approach the operating time of an instantaneous unit. Protection of power rectifiers is an example of such an application. INVERSE MEDIUM TIME relays (see Table 5) are used as generator or transformer neutral relays or as backup protection for feeder ground faults. Also, the inverse medium time relay may be used where a slower relay is required to obtain coordination. INVERSE LONG TIME relays (see Table 6) are designed for applications requiring long time delay. The major area of usefulness is in the protection of motors against overloads under conditions where the customary thermal devices are not applicable. for supervising the time overcurrent unit to permit tripping for stall and heavy overload conditions. Operation of only the time unit indicates a light or moderate overload condition and can be used as an alarm. The IAC66M relay is similar except that the high dropout instantaneous unit is used in conjunction with a 0.1 sec time delay telephone relay which blocks operating during initial inrush conditions, allowing the unit to be set more sensitively. LOAD CENTER PROTECTION The IAC66T relay, which has a static timer unit used with a high dropout instantaneous unit, is designed to protect medium voltage circuits supplying low voltage load centers. This relay coordinates width the short time and long time overcurrent trip characteristics of 600 V air circuit breakers. OVER- AND UNDERCURRENT RELAYS (see Table 7) are used where an indication of the variation of a current between maximum and minimum limits is required. These relays do not have a time dial. The time characteristics are determined by the contact settings. TORQUE CONTROLLED RELAYS have wound shading coils connected to terminal studs. Operation of the timeovercurrent unit thus depends on the closing of an external contact across those terminals. The overcurrent relay can be supervised by some external device, such as a directional relay.
Available Inverse Time/Current Characteristics

Six inverse time/current operating characteristics are available for the time unit of the IAC (see Figure 1).
Fig. 1. Typical operating characteristics of 60 Hz IAC relays. The No. 5 time-dial setting is shown for each curve, and the range of time adjustment from 0.5 to 10 time-dial settings is shown for the extremely inverse, the inverse short time, and the inverse long time relays.
Instantaneous Unit
Instantaneous units are used to provide tripping with no intentional time delay for currents exceeding a predetermined value. Typically, if the fault current magnitude under maximum generating conditions triples as a fault is moved toward the relay location from the far end of the line, then an instantaneous unit is desirable. High dropout instantaneous units are available and are used together with other devices to obtain time-delay tripping. One application is motor protection, where the high dropout unit supervises the time unit for tripping during starting and overload conditions. For special feeder applications, the high dropout unit can supervise the time unit to prevent the overtravel from causing undesired tripping and to permit shorter coordination margins.
13
FEATURES
Time-Overcurrent
Time-overcurrent units are available in several ranges to meet current pickup settings of from 0.1 to 16 A. Sensitivity is determined by discrete tap-plug settings, and a time dial provides a continuously adjustable time delay over the entire range. IAC model numbers which end in 8__A, such as IAC51B801A, provide an extended range of settings with a ratio of maximum setting to minimum setting of 8:1. Most other IAC relays have a ratio of 4:1. The available tap settings are listed below for the common time overcurrent units:
The three standard time characteristics are as follows: INVERSE TIME relays (see Table 1) are generally applied where the shortcircuit current magnitude is dependent largely upon the system generating capacity at the time of the fault. VERY INVERSE TIME relays (see Table 2) are best applied on systems where the magnitude of the short circuit current flowing through any given relay is dependent mainly upon the relative location of the fault with respect to the relay and only slightly or not at all upon the system generating capacity. EXTREMELY INVERSE TIME relays (see Table 3) are intended for applications, such as on utility distribution feeders, where sufficient time delay must be provided to allow a re-energized circuit to pick up without unnecessary trip-
Specific Applications
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS provide overcurrent protection for starting, overload, and fault conditions. The IAC66K relay has an inverse long time characteristic (as described above), which approximates the motor thermal limit, and two instantaneous overcurrent units. The first instantaneous unit is set above the maximum motor starting current and protects for fault conditions only. The second, a special high dropout unit, is customarily used
AVAILABLE SETTINGS
Time overcurrent units with 8:1 range of settings: I 0.5-4.0 A unit: 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 1, 1.2,
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, and 4 A taps
I 1.5-12 A unit: 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,

8, 10, and 12 A taps
Overcurrent Relays
307

FEATURES
I 2-16 A unit: 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10,
12 and 16 A taps
IAC Relays With 8:1 Range Units

TIME OVERCURRENT UNIT IAC51 and 52 Tap Setting Taps Taps 0.5-4.0 (A) 2-16 (A) CONTINUOUS-CURRENT RATING
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 7.5 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 3.5 3.7 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Other common IAC time overcurrent units: I 0.5-2.0 A: 0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1, 1.2, 1.5 and
2A
IAC53 and 54 Taps Taps 0.5-4.0 (A) 1.5-12 (A)
IAC77 and 78 Taps Taps 0.5-4.0 (A) 1.5-12 (A)
I 0.6-1.8 A: 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6

and 1.8 A I 1.5-4.5 A: 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, and 4.5 A I 1.5-6.0 A: 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, and 6 A I 2.5- 5.0 A: 2.5, 2.8, 3.1, 3.5, 4, 4.5 and 5A I 2.5-7.5 A: 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, and 7.5 A I 4.0-8.0 A: 4, 4.5, 5, 5.6, 6, 6.3, 7.1 and 8A I 4.0-12.0 A: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10 and 12 A I 4.0-16.0* A: 4, 5, 6, 8 10, 12 and 16 A * Some 4-16 A units also have 7 A tap.
Instantaneous Overcurrent
Instantaneous overcurrent units are available in several ranges to meet current settings between 1.0 and 160 A. The instantaneous unit in IAC relays with model numbers ending in 8__A has a maximum setting to minimum setting ratio of 8:1. It uses two separate windings which can be connected either in series (for low range) or in parallel (for high range) with pickup continuously adjustable over each range. The instantaneous unit used in most other IAC relays uses a single winding with a ratio of maximum to minimum setting of 4:1, with continuously adjustable pickup. These instantaneous units drop out at 40 percent or more of setting at minimum setting and 50 percent at maximum setting. High dropout units are also available which drop out at 80 percent or more of setting at minimum setting and 90 percent at maximum setting. Except as noted in the tables, the TOC unit operating coil is connected in series with the instantaneous unit operating coil if both are present, and each is set independently.
8 9 10 12 14 15 16 17.5 20 20 20 260 A
10.0 11.5 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
9.5 10.5 11.5 12.5 14.0 15.5 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 20.0
ONE SEC RATING

All 70 A 140 A 260 A 125 A 260 A
INSTANTANEOUS UNIT Instantaneous Unit Range

0.5-4.0 2-16 10-80 20-160
13
Connection of Instantaneous Unit High or Low Range

Low High Low High Low High Low High 0.5-2.0 1.0-4.0 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 20-80 40-160
Continuous Rating (A)

0.75 1.5 3.0 6.0 15.0 25.0 25.0 25.0
One Sec Rating (A)

25 50 130 260 400 600 600 600
Low range refers to coils connected in series. High range refers to coils connected in parallel.
IAC Relays With 4:1 Range Units

TIME-OVERCURRENT UNIT Time Unit Range 4-16 A
IAC51, 52, 53, 54, 77, 78
One Sec Rating (A)

260 215 260 200 70 130 65
Continuous Rating xy (A)

10 5 5 6 1.5 1.5 3
1.5-6 A
IAC51, 52 IAC53, 54 IAC77, 78
Target and Seal-in

Target and seal-in units, which are included with all time units except as noted in the tables of relay models, are dual rated. 0.2 and 2.0 A taps are standard; contact factory for form numbers of other ratings available. The seal-in unit picks up to bypass the contacts of the time unit during trip circuit energization. The 2 A tap is generally used, except where the relay contacts are used to energize auxiliary relays or other low-current devices.
0.5-2 A
IAC51, 52 IAC53, 54 IAC77, 79
x The continuous rating of the coil circuit applies to all Time Unit taps up to, and including, the value of the rating. For taps above this value, the rating is the same as the tap value. y Continuous ratings of relays having instantaneous units is the value shown or 1.5 times the minimum setting of the instantaneous units, whichever is the lower of the two values.
308
Overcurrent Relays

CONTACTS
Each unit, time or instantaneous, has one or two output contacts (if two contacts per unit, those contacts will have one side common). Contacts of a relay with more than one unit are generally not electrically separate except as noted in the tables. An exception is the high-dropout instantaneous unit, whose contacts are electrically separate from other contacts in the relay. The current closing rating of the contacts is 30 A for voltage not exceeding 250 V. The current carrying rating of the relay is limited by the tap being used on the target and seal-in units as indicated in the following table:
Ratings of Target Seal-ln Units, High Seismic (Hi-G)
SIMPLIFIED OUTPUT CONTACT ARRANGEMENTS

Fig. 2. As referenced in tables
LEGEND: TOC = Time Overcurrent Unit IOC = Instantaneous Unit SI = Seal-in Unit IOC-H = Instantaneous Unit - Hi-Dropout OX = Auxiliary Relay TU = Instantaneous Unit with Timer A SI SI TOC K TOC TOC
M TOC-1 TOC-2 IOC-1 IOC-2
B SI IOC SI TOC
O IOC SI SI TOC IOC-H
E SI SI TOC IOC
P SI SI TOC SI SI IOC-H OX OX
Dual Rated 0.2/2.0 A 0.6/2.0 A 0.2 2.0 0.6 2.0

Carry 30 A for (sec) Carry 10 A for (sec) Carry continuously (A) Min. Operating (A) Min. Drop-out (A) DC resistance (Ohms) DC resistive Interrupting rating (A) 0.05 0.45 0.37 0.2 0.05 8.3 2.2 20.0 2.3 2.0 0.5 0.24 0.5 5.0 1.2 0.6 0.15 0.78 3.5 30 2.6 2.0 0.5 0.18
F
IOC
Q SI SI TOC SI SI SI IOC-H IOC SI TOC TU
G SI SI TOC SI TOC
R SI-1 IOC-1 IOC-2 IOC-3 SI-1 SI-2 TOC-1 SI-2 SI-3 TOC-2 SI-3 TOC-3
2.5 A @ 125 VDC
13
If the total tripping current exceeds 30 A, an auxiliary relay must be used in conjunction with IAC relays. After tripping occurs, the tripping circuit of these relays must be opened by an a auxiliary switch on the circuit breaker or by other external automatic means, because the circuit is sealed closed while tripping current is flowing. The contacts will open in 6 cycles (1/10 sec) with normal adjustment of wipe, permitting use of the relay in instantaneous reclosing schemes.
H IOC IOC SI SI TOC SI TOC
S TOC-1 TOC-2
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guide.
IAC ** * * * * A
IAC 51 52 60 53 54 80 77 78 90 55 95 57 66 59 * * * *
IAC time-overcurrent relay Time Curve Inverse, 1 NO Refer to: Inverse, 2 NO Refer to: Inverse, torque control Refer to: Very inverse, 1 NO Refer to: Very inverse, 2 NO Refer to: Very inverse, torque control Refer to: Extremely inverse, 1 NO Refer to: Extremely inverse, 2 NO Refer to: Extremely inverse, torque control Refer to: Inverse, short time Refer to: Inverse, short time, low burden Refer to: Inverse, medium time Refer to: Inverse, long time Refer to: Inverse, over and undercurrent Refer to: Features (see Tables 1- 14) TOC/IOC current ranges and others (see Tables 1- 14) 60 Hz Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 3 Table 3 Table 3 Table 4 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 50Hz Table 8 Table 8 Table 8 Table 9 Table 9 Table 9 Table 10 Table 10 Table 9 Table 11 Table 11 Table 11 Table 12 Table 14
OPERATING COIL RATINGS

Note that relays with both time overcurrent and instantaneous units are limited to the lesser of the respective current ratings, since the operating coils are connected in series.
Overcurrent Relays
309

60 HZ MODELS
Model Number Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Per Unit Range (A) Unit (A)
0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 0.5-2 1.5-6 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 4-16 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 4-16 0.5-2 0.1-0.4 0.15-0.6 0.5-4.0 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 0.15-0.6 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-6 0.5-2 0.5-2 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 4-16 ------0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160 ---------------------------10-30 4-12 2-6 2-6 10-30 4-12 20-60 10-30 ------------1-4 10-40 0.5-2 4-16 10-40 2-8 20-80 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 10-30 1-3 2-6 4-12 2-6 4-12 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 4-12 10-30 20-60 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A
Comments
Model Number
Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Per Unit Range (A) Unit (A)
0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 1.5-6 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 2-8 4-16 4-16 4-16 2 Units 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 ------0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160 ---------4-16 10-40 2-8 4-16 20-80 10-40 20-80 10-40 4-16 2 Units 2-50 2-50 2-50 2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
Comments
TABLE 1. INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC51A801A A802A IAC51B801A B802A B803A B804A B805A B806A B807A B808A IAC51N7A N8A N13A N14A N16A N17A N101A N102A N111A IAC51V2A V3A V5A V6A V101A V104A V105A V106A IAC53A10A A19A A801A A803A IAC53B32A B34A B38A B50A B54A B76A B78A B801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B811A B812A IAC53M3A M4A M5A M6A M7A M9A M10A M11A IAC53M101A M102A M103A IAC52A801A A802A IAC52B801A B802A B803A B804A B805A B806A B807A B808A IAC60A12A A15A A111A IAC60B11A B13A B15A B16A B20A B21A B112A B114A B115A IAC60T1A T2A T3A
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
Control VDC 125 Includes 250 auxiliary 125 relay for bus 250 1 N.O. differential See Fig. 2-A 24 protection and for 48 checking CT 125 secondary 250 circuit. 48
Torque controlled time unit 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A will operate only when an external contact (wired to shading coil) is closed.
1 N.O. Similar to IAC60A with See Fig. 2-B instantaneous unit.
High dropout 1 N.O. instantaneous unit. Two See Fig. 2-F target seal-in units.
13
Control VDC 48/125 Has two PJC 1 N.O. 48/125 instantaneous See Fig. 2-M 125/250 units. No target seal-in units.
TABLE 2. VERY INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC53T801A T802A T803A T804A T805A T806A T807A T808A IAC54A10A A801A A803A IAC54B801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B811A B812A B813A IAC80L1A L2A L3A 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 4-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 2 Units 4-16 1.5-6 4-16 2 Units 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 ---------0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 4-16 ----------
Time unit and instanta1 N.O. neous unit contacts are See Fig. 2-E electrically separate.
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
High dropout instanta1 N.O. neous unit. Two target See Fig. 2-F seal-in units.
IAC80P1A P2A P3A IAC80T1A T2A
---------2 Units 2-50 2-50
Torque controlled time 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A unit will operate only when an external contact (wired to shading coil) is closed. Control VDC 125/250 Similar to 1 N.O. per unit 125/250 IAC80L except See Fig. 2-S 48/125 two units. Control VDC 48/125 Has two PJC 1 N.O. per unit 48/125 instant. units. No target See Fig. 2-M seal-in units.
310
Overcurrent Relays

60 HZ MODELS
Model Number Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Per Unit Range (A) Unit (A)
0.1-0.4 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.1-0.4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 4-16 4-16 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 0.5-2 0.5-2 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 ---------4-6 0.5-2 2-8 20-80 1-4 10-40 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 4-12 10-30 2-6 ---------10-40 10-40 4-16 4-16 2-8 20-80 2-8 1-4 10-40 ----------
Comments
Model Number
Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Per Unit Range (A) Unit (A)
0.1-0.4 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-6 0.5-2 ---------0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 10-40 4-16
Comments
TABLE 3. EXTREMELY INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC77A15A A801A A803A IAC77B55A B57A B60A B69A B71A B73A B801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B11A B812A IAC77M3A M4A M5A IAC55A2A A3A A101A IAC55B2A B3A B9A B10A B17A B19A B20A B25A B101A IAC57A2A A3A A101A 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC78A7A A801A A803A IAC788801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B811A B812A IAC90B1A B2A 2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
IAC90T1A T2A
2 Units 0.5-4 1.5-12
2 Units 2-50 2-50
Torque controlled time 1 N.O. unit will operate only See Fig. 2-B when an external contact (wired to shading coil) is close. Control VDC 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-M 48/125 Has two PJC 48/125 instantaneous units. No target seal-in units.
TABLE 4. INVERSE, SHORT TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC55B104A B115A B121A IAC55F1A F2A F3A F4A F6A F7A IAC95F1A 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 1.5-6 4-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 1.5-6 20-80 4-16 40-160 4-16 4-16 0.5-2 1.5-6 0.5-2 2-8 1.5-5
13
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
Time unit and instanta1 N.O. neous unit coil leads are See Fig. 2-B brought out to separate studs.
Moderately short-time 1 N.O. characteristic. Low See Fig. 2-E burden.
TABLE 5. INVERSE, MEDIUM TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC57B2A B3A B10A B13A B101A B104A 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 10-40 10-40 20-80 4-16 10-40 20-80
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
CASE SIZES AND APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS

IAC Relay Model
51N. 66T 66M, 80P 60T, 80T, 90T All others listed
Case Size
S2 M1 L2 S1
Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Net Ship

12 (5.4) 18 (8.2) 18 (8.2) 12 (5.4) 18 (8.2) 28 (12.7) 28 (12.7) 18 (8.2)
Overcurrent Relays
311

60 HZ MODELS
Model Number Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Range Contacts Unit Range Unit(A) Per Unit (A)
0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 1.5-4.5 ---------2-16 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 2-16 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 0.5-4 Hi Dropout Instantaneous IAC66K51A K52A K53A K55A K56A K57A K58A K59A K60A K64A K65A K67A K68A K69A K70A IAC59C1A C2A C103A 0.6-1.8 0.6-1.8 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 2-16 2-16 10-80 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 ------1-4 10-40 2-8 2-8 10-40 2-8 Two instantaneous 4-16 units, one 1 N.O. 10-40 standard See Fig. 2-O 4-16 and one high 10-40 dropout. 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 4-16 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC66M51A M52A M53A M54A M55A M56A M57A M58A M59A M60A M61A M62A IAC66T51A T52A T53A T54A T55A T56A T57A 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 2.5-7.5 2.5-7.5 4-12 4-12 4-12 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 2-16 10-80 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 10-80 20-160 10-80 10-80 10-80 10-80 20-160 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-P
Comments
Model Number
Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Range Contacts Unit Range Unit(A) Per Unit (A)
Comments
TABLE 6. INVERSE, LONG TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC66A51A A52A A53A IAC66B51A B52A B53A B54A B55A B56A B57A IAC66C51A C52A C53A C54A C55A C56A C57A Hi Dropout Control Instan- VDC taneous 4-16 2-8 7-28 10-40 20-80 20-80 4-16 2-8 7-28 10-40 20-80 20-80 7-28 4-16 7-28 10-40 10-40 4-16 10-40 48/ 125/ 250 Two instantaneous units; one standard, one high dropout. Two seal-in units. Aux. telephone relay for 0.1 sec time delay pickup of high dropout unit.
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
Time unit and instan1 N.O. taneous unit contact See Fig. 2-E leads are brought our separately.
See Fig. 2-Q
13
Two instantaneous units; one standard, 48/ one high drop110-125/ out. Static 220-250 time delay on high dropout unit adjustable from 0.05-3.0 sec, except for IAC66S2A which has 0.03-1 sec range.
TABLE 7. INVERSE TIME, OVER- AND UNDERCURRENT RELAYS

1 N.O. & No target seal-in 1 N.C. See Fig. 2-K unit.
312
Overcurrent Relays

50 HZ MODELS
Model Number Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Unit Range (A) Per Unit (A)
0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 1.5-6 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 4-16 4-16 ------0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160 -------------------
Comments
Model Number
Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Unit Range (A) Per Unit (A)
4-6 10-30
Comments
TABLE 8. INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC51A804A A805A IAC51B821A B822A B823A B824A B825A B826A B827A B828A IAC51N9A N10A N18A N103A N104A N119A 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC51V102A High dropout instanta1 N.O. neous unit. Two target See Fig. 2-F seal-in units. 2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
Control VDC 125 250 125 125 250 48 Includes auxiliary relay for bus differential protection and for checking CT secondary circuit.
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A
IAC52A804A A805A IAC52B821A B822A B823A B824A B825A B826A B827A B828A IAC60A14A A16A A113A IAC60B117A B118A B119A
0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-4 2-16 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 0.5-4 1.2-12 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 4-16
------0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160 ---------10-40 4-16 20-80 ------0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 4-16 4-16
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
Torque controlled time 1 N.O. unit will operate only See Fig. 2-A when an external contact (wired to shading coil) is closed. 1 N.O. Similar to IAC60A with See Fig. 2-B instantaneous unit.
TABLE 9. VERY INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC53A801A 803A IAC53B61A B801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B811A B812A IAC53T801A T802A T803A T804A T805A T806A T807A T808A 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.1-0.4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 1.5-12 ------4-16 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 0.5-4 2-16 10-80 20-160 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC54A801A A803A IAC54B801A B803A B805A B807A B809A B810A B811A B812A B813A IAC80L4A 2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
13
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
Time unit and instanta1 N.O. neous unit contacts are See Fig. 2-E electrically separate.
Torque controlled time 1 N.O. unit will operate only See Fig. 2-A when an external contact (wired to shading coil) is closed.
Overcurrent Relays
313

50 HERTZ MODELS
Model Number Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Unit Range (A) Per Unit (A)
0.5-4 1.5-12 0.02-0.08 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 3 Units 0.5-4 1.5-12 1.5-6 0.5-2 4-16 1.5-6 0.5-2 0.5-2 0.5-2 4-16 4-16 4-16 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 ------0.04-0.16 0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160 3 Units 2-16 10-80 ---------10-40 10-40 4-16 2-8 10-40 20-80 4-16 ----------
Comments
Model Number
Time Over- Instant. No. of Current Unit Range Contacts Unit Range (A) Per Unit (A)
0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 0.5-4 1.5-12 ------0.5-4 0.5-4 2-16 2-16 10-80 10-80 20-160 20-160
Comments
TABLE 10. EXTREMELY INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC77A804A A805A IAC77B58A B821A B822A B823A B824A B825A B826A B827A B828A IAC77S823A S826A IAC55A5A A6A A104A IAC55B6A B7A B14A B22A B105A B108A B122A IAC57A6A A8A A104A 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC78A804A A805A IAC78B821A B822A B823A B824A B825A B826A B827A B828A 2 N.O. See Fig. 2-G
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
2 N.O. See Fig. 2-H
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-R
TABLE 11. INVERSE, SHORT TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC55F5A 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC95F2A 1.5-6 1.5-5 4-16 4-16 Time unit and instanta1 N.O. neous unit coil leads are See Fig. 2-B brought out to separate studs. Moderately short-time 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-E characteristic. Low burden.
13
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
TABLE 12. INVERSE, MEDIUM TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A IAC57B6A B7A B11A B105A B108A 1.5-6 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 4-16 10-40 10-40 20-80 10-40 20-80
1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B
TABLE 13. INVERSE, LONG-TIME CHARACTERISTIC RELAYS

IAC66A54A A55A A56A IAC66B58A B59A B60A IAC66C58A C59A C60A 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 0.6-1.8 1.5-4.5 4-12 ---------2-16 10-80 10-80 2-16 10-80 10-80 Hi-Dropout Instantaneous 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-A 1 N.O. See Fig. 2-B Time unit and instantaneous 1 N.O. unit coil leads are brought See Fig. 2-E out to separate studs. IAC66K54A 0.6-1.8 10-80 K61A 1.5-4.5 10-80 K62A 1.5-4.5 10-80 K63A 1.5-4.5 20-160 K71A 4-12 10-80 K72A 4-12 20-160 DC Control Voltage 48/125/250 IAC66M63A M64A M65A M67A 1.5-4.5 1.5-4.5 4-12 4-12 10-80 20-160 10-80 20-160 2-8 2-8 Two instanta4-16 neous units: 1 N.O. one standard See Fig. 2-O 4-16 and one high 4-16 dropout. 4-16 Hi-Dropout Instantaneous 20-80 Two instantaneous units: one 1 N.O. 20-80 standard and one See Fig. 2-P 20-80 high dropout. Two seal-in units. 20-80 Aux. Telephone relay for 0.1 sec time delay pickup of high dropout.
TABLE 14. INVERSE TIME OVER- AND UNDERCURRENT RELAYS

IAC59C4A C5A C106A 0.5-2 1.5-6 4-16 ---------1 N.O. & 1 N.C. No target seal-in unit. See Fig. 2-E

314
Overcurrent Relays
Single phase or ground overcurrent protection for industrial and utility power systems.
DIAC/
DIFC/DSFC
Single Phase Digital Overcurrent Protection
Applications
I I I I
DIAC
Industrial and utility power systems Feeders, transmission lines, AC machines, transformers Facilities with medium voltage switchgear 50 or 60 Hz

I I I I I I I
DIFC
DSFC
Phase or ground overcurrent Separate TOC and IOC protection Wide pickup setting ranges 16 TOC curve characteristics RMS sensing Reset characteristic selection Manual trip levers 13
DESCRIPTION
The DIAC, DIFC, and DSFC units are single phase, digital microprocessor based, self-powered, non-directional overcurrent relays. They provide time and instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase or ground faults. They are designed to be used by industrial and utility power systems for applications including feeders, transmission lines, AC machines, transformers, or any facility with medium voltage switchgear. The digital DIAC, DIFC, and DSFC relays differ only in packaging, to provide easy replacement of existing IAC, IFC, and SFC GE relays. They come in the same cases as the electromechanical relays and use some of the same TOC curves. These digital devices do not require the routine calibration of electromagnetic relays, eliminating costly maintenance. In addition, the digital relay has the advantage of being less susceptible to vibration than electromechanical relays. RMS sensing provides accurate measurement for overcurrent protection. Sixteen selectable TOC curves allow these relays to be used for a wide variety of applications. Curves include a variety of inverse, very inverse, and extremely inverse options as well as definite time and I 2 t. The IOC function has an adjustable time delay of 50 to 400 milliseconds. The user can select the reset characteristics as either a fast reset or a traditional reset which mimics electromechanical reset characteristics. The relay has convenient manual trip levers which can be used to test external circuits connected to the trip and auxiliary contacts. The DIAC, DIFC, and DSFC are available as a complete drawout case and cradle assembly. For retrofit installations the existing case can be used by adding a finger to provide a surge ground connection. DIFC and DSFC are direct replacements for IFC and SFC relays, but it is necessary to replace both relay case and relay.
User Interfaces
I I I
Pickup status LED TOC and IOC latched indicators Target reset
Features
I I I I I I
3 models: DIAC, DIFC, DSFC Direct/functional replacement of IAC, IFC, SFC Self-powered Reduced maintenance costs Drawout case Low burden
GE Power Management
315
DIAC/DIFC/DSFC
PROTECTION
Single Phase TOC & IOC Protection
The DIAC, DIFC and DSFC relays contain two independently adjustable elements, one for time overcurrent (TOC) and one for instantaneous overcurrent (IOC). The relays use RMS sensing to calculate the pickup values for TOC. Sixteen TOC characteristic curves are available, each with time dial adjustment. With this type of flexibility the relays are suitable for many different applications. Time Overcurrent Curves
inverse GE IAC 51 IEEE IEC very inverse GE IAC 53 IEEE IEC extremely inverse GE IAC 77 IEEE IEC short time inverse GE 55 GE 75 GE 95 medium time inverse GE 57 long time inverse GE 66 definite time 0.1 to 9.9 s in 0.1 s steps I2t = K K = 25 to 2475 in steps of 25
HARDWARE
The pickup indicator is a yellow LED that indicates the relay has sensed a current exceeding the relay pickup setting. The DIAC, DIFC, and DSFC are available in the same cases as the IAC, IFC, and SFC units they have been designed to replace. The digital relay is available as a complete drawout case and cradle assembly. The drawout connection/test system of the DIAC and DSFC has 10 connection points. The drawout connection/test system of the DIFC has 14 connection points and a visible CT shorting bar. As the connection plug is withdrawn the trip circuit is broken prior to the current shorting bar engagement.
Contacts
A trip contact and an auxiliary contact are provided for both the TOC and IOC elements. Output seal-in is produced by the flow of current through the trip contact. These contacts are trip duty rated and suitable for use with DC power bus or capacitor trip applications.
Reset Characteristic and System Frequency

A dial is provided to select reset characteristics and system frequency. The reset characteristic can be set to timed reset, which emulates the reset characteristics of an induction disk relay, or instantaneous reset, where the reset is fixed at 40 to 50 ms. The system frequency can be set for 50 or 60 Hz. Targets can be reset by using the reset button or lever which is accessible without removing the case cover.

MAINBUS
52
DIAC DIFC DSFC
51
CTs
AUXILIARY
13
50
718751A3.CDR
Manual Trip
The operating time with no delay is no less than 27 ms. The IOC function offers an adjustable time delay from 50 to 400 ms. The relay comes in 1 A and 5 A models, which offer different pickup ranges. Range/ step
TOC range step IOC range step IOC delay step Time Dial step
Built-in manual pull and lift levers are provided for TOC and IOC. These levers allow the user to test the external circuits connected to the trip and auxiliary contacts. The levers can only be accessed by removing the case cover, to help prevent unintentional operation.
1A Rated
0.1 to 3.18 0.02 A 0.2 to 31.8 0.2 A
5A Rated
0.5 to 15.9 0.1 A 1 to 159 1A
TYPICAL WIRING
50 to 400 ms 25 ms 0.5 to 9.9 0.1 0.5 to 9.9 0.1
5 4 2 3 7 8 9
SURGE GROUND
5 4 2 3
SURGE GROUND
NO
TRIP OUTPUT RELAYS
CURRENT INPUT
Note: The IOC function operates on the sampled values, and the algorithm virtually eliminates the decaying DC offset component.
1 COM
NO NO NO
NO
TRIP OUTPUT RELAYS
CURRENT INPUT
1 COM
NO
GE Power Management
11 NO 12 NO 13 NO 14 NO
AUX
GE Power Management
DIAC or DSFC
Overcurrent Relay
DIFC
Overcurrent Relay
AUX
NO
Targets
A target seal-in unit is used to trip the associated breaker and provide a latched indication of operation. The relays have one TOC target and one IOC target. Each target and seal-in unit operates at 0.2 A and has a maximum voltage drop of 7 V.
10 NO
718750A4.CDR
NOTES:
1) Relay contact state shown in the non operative state 2) Terminal numbers shown for all 3 models
316
Overcurrent Relays
DIAC/DIFC/DSFC
DIMENSIONS
DIAC FRONT VIEW DIAC SIDE VIEW
SEMIFLUSH MTG. SURFACE MTG.
DIAC SEMIFLUSH MTG.

6.13" (156)
INCHES (mm)
9.12" (232)
4.38" (112)
CUTOUT
8.81" (224)
GLASS
6.62" (168)
1.13" (3) 10.31" (262)
STUDS FOR SURFACE MTG. 3.0"
4 x 0.25"Dia. (6) 5.69" (144)
(76)
DSFC FRONT VIEW
DSFC SIDE VIEW

DSFC SEMIFLUSH MTG.

6.13" (156)
7.00" (178)
2.25" (57)
CUTOUT
6.69" (170)
GLASS
6.62" (168)
1.13" (3) 10.31" (262)
STUDS FOR SURFACE MTG. 3.0"
4 x 0.25"Dia. (6) 5.69" (144)
13
(76)
DIFC FRONT VIEW
DIFC SIDE VIEW

DIFC SEMIFLUSH MTG.

5.69" (144)
7.38" (187)
GLASS
6.19" (157)
6.75" (171)
CUTOUT
6.13" (154)
0.88" (22)
10.88" (276)
3.0" (76)
4 x 0.25"Dia. (6)
5.13" (130)
718753A3.DWG
Overcurrent Relays
317
DIAC/DIFC/DSFC
FEATURES
TOC target, provides latched indication of operation
TIME Power Management
Model DIFCA5A Rated Current 5 Amperes Instruction Book GEK-105570
IOC target, provides latched indication of operation

INST
Feeder protection shall be provided using digital microprocessor, selfpowered, single phase relays. Protection features shall include: I instantaneous overcurrent
(50 or 50G)
Test lever for manually tripping TOC outputs
Test lever for manually tripping IOC outputs

Pull and lift to Test
Pull and lift to Test
TOC Pickup-Amps
Time Dial
Pickup
IOC IOC Pickup-Amps Delay
Time dial for TOC multiplier
Curve dial to select TOC characteristic
METERING Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Rated Current: 1 or 5 A Maximum Permissible Current: Continuous: 3 times rated I 2T: (1 A) 1520 (5 A) 38000 Three Sec: 50 times rated One Sec: 100 times rated INPUTS BURDEN AC Current Circuit: ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature Range: Storage: -40C to +85C Operation: -40C to +70C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensation TYPE TESTS Insulation Withstand Test: Impulse Voltage:
Input current 10% of rated 100% of rated
Burden 0.45 VA 2.6 VA
13
OUTPUTS OUTPUT CONTACT RATINGS Load Type Voltage Cont 1 Sec Make & Carry DC 125 10 A 30 A Resistive 250 DC 125 Inductive 250 10 A 30 A L/R = 40 ms 370
Break Max. Load 0.5 A 60 W 0.3 A 0.25 A 0.15 A 50 VA 0.05 A
Surge Withstand Capability: Fast Transient: Per ANSI C37.90.1 Per IEC 255.22.4, Class IV Oscillatory: Per ANSI C37.90.1 Per IEC 255.22.1, Class IV Radio Frequency Interference: 25 MHz - 1 GHz keyed every 1 MHz for 2 sec Per ANSI C37.90.2 & IEC 801.3 Electrostatic Discharge: Per IEC 801.2 APPROVALS UL, CUL: File No. E57838 NOTE: Suitable for Cap-Trip Devices Specifications subject to change without notice.
BURDENS
Burdens for the overcurrent units are listed in table below. Burdens decrease with increasing current above minimum setting, due to the power supply shunting in the power supply circuit. Since the power supply is the major portion of the burden, the burden for a given input current will be constant, irrespective of pickup settings on both TOC and IOC units. Burden @ Minimum Setting UNIT
1A 5A
RANGE
0.1/3.18 0.5/15.9
Hz
60 60
R
28.8 1.28
jX
29.2 1.15
Z
41.3 1.74
45 42
ORDERING
D****
I ACA I FCA S FCA
* *
IAC SI Case IFC CI Case SFC VI Case 1 A nominal current 5 A nominal current Revision level
1 5 B
318
Overcurrent Relays
20
Dials for setting TOC pickup current
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6
IAC51 IAC53 55-ST 57-MT 66-LT 75-ST AC77 95-ST

5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6
IEC Inverse IEC Very Inv. IEC Ext. Inv. IEEE Inverse IEEE Very Inv. IEEE Ext. Inv. DefiniteTime 12T
8
0 1 2 3
FREQ 50HZ 50HZ 60HZ 60HZ
RESET TIME INST TIME INST
Dials for setting IOC pickup current

12 14
Curve
6
Select
80 40 60
2
2 3
2 3
2 3
4 6 0
4
12
5 6
7 8
8
7 8
10
10
10
10
7 8
120 14 0
12
14
14
Time dial for IOC delay
Pickup LED indicator
I time overcurrent (51 or 51G) I independent TOC and IOC pickup

and timing settings
Selection dial for reset characteristics and system frequency

718752A2.CDR
I 16 selectable TOC curves meeting

GE, IEEE, and IEC standards
I latched targets for IOC and TOC

which operate on trip circuit current
The reset characteristic can be selected to either emulate an induction disk or fast reset. The system frequency can be selected to be 50 or 60 Hz. Two trip circuit test levers shall be located on the front panel. An LED pickup indicator shall be located on the front panel. All settings shall be visible through the units cover. Targets may be reset without removing the cover. The relay shall be available as a complete drawout case and cradle assembly.
5 kV peak, 1.2/50 sec, 0.5 J Per IEC255.5, Class III
ACCESSORIES
Test device for DIAC/DSFC, 20 point XLA12A1 Test device for DIAC/DSFC, 10 point XLA13A1 Test device for DIFC, 28 point XCA28A1 Current probe for DIFC XCA11A2 Test device for DIFC, 2 point XCA11A1
Burden in ohms (Z) at multiples of minimum pickup 3X

9.36 0.394
10X
2.32 0.094
20X
1.24 0.052
100X
0.768 0.034

See pages 15 - 18.
IFC
Time-Overcurrent Relay
Applications
I I
Feeder, AC machines and transformers Inverse time/current applications

I I I
Ground and phase time O/C and U/C Overload motor protection Instantaneous overcurrent (optional)
Features
I I I I I I I
6 inverse time/current operating curves Instantaneous current ranges Extended time current ranges Target seal-in units available Instantaneous units available High seismic capability Molded drawout case with clear cover
13
INTRODUCTION
IFC relays feature smaller size, visible CT shorting, improved testing and extended time and instantaneous current ranges. The IFC is available in 50 and 60 Hz models with the following time-current characteristics: I Inverse I Very Inverse I Extremely Inverse I Inverse Long Time I Inverse Medium Time I Inverse Short Time An instantaneous overcurrent unit is available.
DESCRIPTION
IFC relays are used for the protection of industrial and utility power systems against either phase or ground overcurrent. They are singlephase, non-directional, current sensitive ac devices. The basic operating mechanism (the time unit) produces one of several available operating characteristics with operating time inversely related to operating current to permit coordination with other protective devices. It consists of a magnetic-core operating coil, an induction disk, damping magnet, and a mechanical target. The IFC relay may also include a hinged-armature instantaneous overcurrent unit with its own target. The IFC relay is mounted in a drawout case, permitting front access with the cover off or removal from the case for testing and maintenance. The drawout element consists of a one-piece, molded support structure on which relay subassemblies are mounted. The case, also a one-piece, glass-filled polyester molding, is suitable for either semi-flush or surface mounting. The cover is completely transparent, permitting visual inspection of the relay and determination of CT shorting bar and relay target position. The time-overcurrent unit has a pickup current range of 0.5-4 A or 1-12 A. The associated target and seal-in unit is dual rated for 0.2 or 2 A, and has high seismic capability. The instantaneous unit is a hinged-armature relay with high seismic capability. A sliding link selects the upper or lower portion of the 2-50 A or 6-150 A range of setting adjustment.
GE Power Management
319
IFC Time-Overcurrent Relay

APPLICATIONS
IFC relays are used for protection of feeders, transmission lines, AC machines, transformers and for numerous other applications where an operating time inversely related to operating current is required. Six inverse time/current operating characteristics are available with the IFC (see Figure 1), as follows: EXTREMELY INVERSE TIME relays (IFC77) are intended for applications, such as on utility distribution feeders, where sufficient time delay must be provided to allow a re-energized circuit to pick up without unnecessary tripping during the inrush period, and at the same time coordinate properly with power fuses and fuse cutouts. VERY INVERSE TIME relays (IFC53) are best applied on systems where the magnitude of the short circuit current flowing through any given relay is dependent mainly upon the relative location of the fault with respect to the relay and only slightly or not at all upon the system generating capacity. INVERSE TIME relays (IFC51) are generally applied where the shortcircuit current magnitude is dependent largely upon the system generating capacity at the time of the fault. INVERSE LONG TIME (IFC66) relays are designed for applications requiring long time delay. One major application is in the overcurrent protection of large motors. MOTOR PROTECTION RELAYS provide overcurrent protection for starting, overload, and fault conditions. The IFC66K relay has an inverse long time characteristic (as described above) which approximates the motor thermal limit, and two instantaneous overcurrent units. The first instantaneous unit is set above the maximum motor starting current and protects for fault conditions only. The second, a special high dropout unit, is customarily used for supervising the time overcurrent unit to permit tripping for stall and heavy overload conditions. Operation of only the time unit indicates a light or moderate overload condition and can be used as an alarm. INVERSE MEDIUM TIME relays (IFC57) are used as generator or transformer neutral relays or as backup protection for feeder ground faults. Also, the inverse medium time relay may be used where a slower relay is required to obtain coordination. INVERSE SHORT TIME relays (IFC95) are used on equipment where tripping must be relatively fast but should not approach the operating time of an instantaneous unit.
Fig. 1. Typical operating characteristics at 60 Hz Type IFC relays. The No. 5 time-dial setting is shown for each curve, and the range of time adjustment from 0.5 to 10 timedial settings is shown for the extremely inverse, and the inverse long time relays.
DESIGN FEATURES
SMALLER SIZE: The IFC is smaller in both height and width than the IAC and takes up 25 percent less panel space. LOWER INVENTORY: Relay selection is simpler and there are fewer models to stock due to the IFCs extended time and instantaneous ranges. EASIER MAINTENANCE: All live parts are recessed. CT shorting contacts are located at the front and are clearly visible. Case and relay support structure are molded from insulating glass-filled polyester. The IFC is recognized under the Component Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. IMPROVED TESTING: The connection feature and test probes make IFC testing easier and more flexible. Time-current characteristics are not changed by removing the relay from its case. Refer to the GE Power Management CD or Home Page for information on test probes and plugs. RETAINS IAC FEATURES: IFC relays use the simple, reliable induction disk principle in a fully-drawout construction. External terminal connections are identical. Performance characteristics and application criteria are the same. SEALED CASE: A one-piece, seamless molded case with hooded flange and positive gasket seal provides superior protection in dirty or corrosive environments. HIGH-SEISMIC CAPABILITY: Seismic Fragility Level exceeds maximum acceleration of 4g ZPA (10g peak) when tested using a biaxial, multi-frequency input.
100 60 30 Long time IFC66
10 6 Time in seconds 3 Medium time IFC57 Inverse IFC51
1.0 Very inverse IFC53
0.6 0.3 Short time IFC95 Extremely inverse IFC77
13
0.1 .06 .03
.01 1.5
5 10 20 Multiples of tap value
50
ifc fig1.ai
OUTPUT CONTACT ARRANGEMENTS

*Note: The electrically separated second contact associated with the seal-in unit will operate only when the main units (TOC unit) contact closes and the target seal-in unit draws trip current. Thus, the second contact should be used for alarm purposes only.
IFC51A, 53A, 77A SI SI IFC51B, 53B, 77B SI SI IFC95FD SI SI
TOC
IOC
TOC
TOC
IOC
IFC53M SI SI SI SI
*IFC51AD, 53AD, 57AD, 66AD, 77AD, 95AD SI SI
TOC
HDO
TOC
SI
*IFC51BD, 53BD, 57BD, 66BD, 66CD, 77BD, 95BD SI SI
*IFC66KD SI TOC IOC2 HDO SI IOC1 IOC2 HDO
IOC
TOC
SI
IOC
IOC SI
LEGEND: TOC = Time-overcurrent Unit IOC = Instantaneous Unit
SI = Seal-in Unit HDO = High Dropout Instantaneous Unit
320
Overcurrent Relays

AVAILABLE SETTINGS
Time-Overcurrent Units
Range (A)
0.15-1.2 0.5-4.0 1-12 1.5-6.0 2.5-7.5
Instantaneous Unit
Rating (A)
1.5-5.0 2-8 x (IFC66KD only) 2-8 x 2-50 4-16 x 6-150 10-40 x 20-80 x
Taps (A)
0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 10.0, 12.0 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 2.5, 2.8, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 6.5, 7.5
Range Conn. of Unit

Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper
Range x (A)
1.5-5.0 2-4 4-8 2-4 4-8 2-10 10-50 4-8 8-16 6-30 30-150 10-20 20-40 20-40 40-80

4.8 3.7 4.8 1.9 3.0 3.5 8.0 4.3 6.9 8.0 18.0 9.0 16.2 12.6 20.0
One-Second Rating (A)

130 130 70 130 140 260 275 275
Instantaneous Units:
Pick-up setting is continuously adjustable over the entire range.
OPERATING COIL RATINGS

Note that relays with both TOC and instantaneous units are limited to the lesser of the respective current ratings, since the operating coils are connected in series.
x This range is approximate, which means that 6-30 and 30-150 might actually be 6-28 and 28-150. However, there is at least a 1 A overlap between the maximum Low setting and the minimum High setting.
Time-Overcurrent Unit
IFC51 0.5-4.0 1-12 0.15-1.2 Tap Tap Tap CONTINUOUS CURRENT RATING (A) Tap Setting
0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 10.0 12.0 All 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5
IFC53 0.5-4.0 Tap
1-12 Tap
IFC57 0.5-4.0 1-12 Tap Tap
IFC66 2.5-7.5 Tap
IFC77 0.5-4.0 1-12 Tap Tap
0.5-4.0 Tap
IFC95 1-12 Tap
1.5-6.0 Tap
13
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.7 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
2.7 4.1 4.6 5.3 6.0 6.5 7.6 8.5 9.3 10.0 10.8 12.1 13.2
3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 4.7 5.0 5.3 5.8 6.2 6.6 7.1
6.8 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.8 9.4 10.3 11.0 11.6 12.4 12.6 13.5 14.4
2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.3 3.6 4.1 4.7 5.3 5.8 6.8
3.9 4.3 4.8 5.3 6.2 6.8 7.8 8.8 9.7 10.4
5.0 5.3 5.5 5.8 6.1 6.4 6.8 7.0 7.3 7.5 8.0
2.5 2.7 3.0 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.5 5.2 5.9 6.5 7.5
5.8 6.4 7.2 8.4 9.4 10.4 12.1 13.6 15.1 16.4 17.6 19.8 21.8
1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.9 2.1 2.4 2.9 3.3 3.7 4.5
2.0 2.3 2.7 3.3 3.9 4.5
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.4 5.3
6.6 7.5 8.4 9.3 10.9 12.5 82 164
6.0 7.0
11.1 12.4 13.6 128 260 260 84
ONE-SECOND CURRENT RATING (A)

128 260 60 140 260 220 246
Overcurrent Relays
321

ORDER CODE BREAKDOWN
IFC ** ****
IFC 51 53 77 95 57 66 XXXX
Inverse Time Very Inverse Time Extremely Inverse Time Short Time Medium Time Long Time Electrical data (see group column under selection guide)

See pages 15 - 18.
SELECTION GUIDE
0.2/2.0 A Target and Seal-in
Time Curve
51 51 51 51 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 77 77 77 77 77 51 51 51 51 53 53 53 53 53 77 77 77 77 77 95 95 95 95 95 57 57 57 57 66 66 66 66
Group
Time Unit Instanteous Unit

1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 0.15 - 1.2 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1.5 - 6.0 1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 ---------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 6 - 150 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 1.5 - 5/6 150 ---6 - 150 6 - 150 2 - 50 ---6 - 150 6 - 150
Case
Time Curve
51 51 51 51 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 77 77 77 77 77 51 51 51 51 53 53 53 53 53 77 77 77 77 77 95 95 95 95 95 57 57 57 57 66 66 66 66
Group
Time Unit Instanteous Unit

1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 0.15 - 1.2 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 1.5 - 6.0 1 -12 0.5 - 4 1 - 12 0.5 - 4 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 2.5 - 7.5 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 ---------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 2-8 4-16 10-40 20-80 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 2 - 50 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 1.5 - 5/6 150 ------6 - 150 2 - 50 ---6 - 150 6 - 150
Case
60 Hz, 1 N.O. CONTACT

A1A A2A B1A B2A A1A A2A A6A B1A B2A B3A M1A M2A M3A M4A M5A M6A M7A M8A A1A A2A B1A B2A B3A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A BD3A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A BD3A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A FD1A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A AD1A BD1A CD1A KD1A
50 Hz, 1 N.O. CONTACT

A4A A5A B4A B5A A1A A2A A6A B1A B2A B3A M1A M2A M3A M4A M5A M6A M7A M8A A1A A2A B1A B2A B3A AD4A AD5A BD4A BD5A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A BD3A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A BD3A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A FD1A AD1A AD2A BD1A BD2A AD2A BD2A CD1A KD2A
C1
8 (3.6)
14 (6.3)
C1
8 (3.6)
14 (6.3)
13
60 Hz, 2 N.O. CONTACTS (SEE SECTION, OUTPUT CONTACT ARRANGEMENT)
50 Hz, 2 N.O. CONTACTS (SEE SECTION, OUTPUT CONTACT ARRANGEMENT)
C1
8 (3.6)
14 (6.3)
C1
8 (3.6)
14 (6.3)
High-dropout instantaneous unit. Wound shading coil on TOC unit.
322
Overcurrent Relays
Generator and generator system fault backup protection.
IFCV
TOC Relays with Voltage Restraint
Applications
I I
System fault backup protection Generator fault backup protection

I I
Time O/C unit with voltage restraint Instantaneous o/c unit available
Features
I I I I I
Inverse time-current operating curve 2 electrically separate contacts Target seal-in unit Induction unit design Drawout case 13
DESCRIPTION
IFCV relays are draw out, induction disc time-overcurrent relays having voltage restraint and inverse time characteristics. IFCV relays are supplied with two electrically separate contacts. One of these contacts, which operates the target seal-in unit, is on the induction disc unit and can be used as a trip contact; the second contact of the seal-in unit can be used for alarm or remote indication. Overcurrent relays with voltage restraint, Type IFCV, are recommended for this application. Three single-phase relays are required for each generator, with potential coils energized from line-to-line potential of the protected line. With full voltage applied to the restraint coil the relay should be set to pick up between 150 and 200 percent of full load on unregulated machines, and between 200 and 250 percent on regulated generators. For best protection the relays should be connected to trip both the armature and field breaker. This can be effected by means of a multicontact auxiliary relay, Type HSA. Generator Fault Backup Protection. Under certain conditions this relay will provide protection for the generator. It will operate if an internal fault is not cleared by differential relays, provided sufficient current is fed into the fault from other sources. Voltage Restraint will prevent the relay operating on heavy loads such as motor-starting currents. With zero restraint voltage the relay will operate at 25 percent of tap value. Therefore, complete loss of restraint potential will usually allow the relay to operate even though machine output is less than full load. High sensitivity is achieved with the voltage restraint feature, and the relay requires less current to operate on faults than on loads or power swings. Relay Time Characteristics are suitable for obtaining selectivity with feeder circuits which utilize time-overcurrent relays. Typical internal and external connections are shown in Figures 1, 2 and 3.
APPLICATIONS
System Fault Backup Protection should be provided at the source of fault current, the generator, to minimize the damage resulting from a short circuit if the primary protective devices should fail to operate.
GE Power Management
323
IFCV TOC/Voltage Restraint

BURDENS
Time Overcurrent Unit
POTENTIAL CIRCUIT V
120 120
INSTANTANEOUS UNIT W
9.26 9.43
Freq. (Hz)
50 60
VARS
14.4 17.4
VA
17.1 19.7
Hi Seismic Inst. Unit (Amps)

6-150
Burdens at Min. Pickup Min Line (Ohms) Hz Position Range Pickup (A) (A) R Z Jx
60 50 L H L H 6-30 30-150 6-30 30-150 6 30 6 30 0.110 0.022 0.092 0.018 0.078 0.005 0.065 0.004 0.135 0.023 0.112 0.019
Burdens in Ohms (Z) Times Pickup 3

0.095 0.022 0.079 0.018
10
0.081 0.022 0.068 0.018
20
0.079 0.022 0.066 0.018
CURRENT CIRCUIT Range Freq. Tap

2-16 2-16 50 60 2 2
A
5 5
Imp Ohms VA
3.10 2.58 77.5 64.5
PF
.43 .43
6-150
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
Fig. 1. Internal connections type IFCV51BD relay (0275A3203)
Potential Induction Unit
Fig. 3. Typical external connections of IFCV relays for back-up protection against external faults (275A4451) to a generator
A - C bus 1 2 3 52 (+) Trip Bus (+) 11 51-2 51-1 51-3 12 Alarm Bus
T&SI
Inst.
T&SI
Current Induction Unit
Inst. T&SI Inst.
7 51-1 8 RC 8 51-3 7 51-2 RC 8 RC 7
1 51-3 SI
51-3 51-2 51-1 SI
2 86 86 (-) 86 52 a 52 TC 86 41 a 41 TC
Alarm
*
2
* 4
6 8 11
*
12
*
14 13
Generator
13
1
5 7 3 Instantaneous Setting Set Link To "h" For High Range And To "L" For Low Range. Link Shown In High Range Position.
* = Short Finger
H1
6 6 6 51-3 51-2 51-1 OC OC OC 5 5 X1 5
Fig. 2. Internal connections of type IFCV51AD relay (0273A9599)

Potential Induction Unit
IF USED
T&SI
Current Induction Unit
51 OC RC SI 52 a TC 86 41
DEVICE FUNCTION NUMBERS - Overcurrent Relay Type IFCV51AD - Operating Coil - Restraining Coil - Seal in \With Target - Power Circuit Breaker - Auxiliary Contact Closed When Breaker Closes - Trip Coil - Lockout Relay Hand Reset - Field Breaker
T&SI
T&SI

*
2 1 5
*
6 7 8 11
*
12
See pages 15 - 18.

* = Short Finger
SELECTION GUIDE
Single-phase (with 0.2/2.0 A T&SI)
Current Operating Range (A) Time Overcurrent Unit Instantaneous Unit At Rated Voltage At Zero Volts
2-16 2-16
Restraint (V)
120 120
Model Number 60 Hz
IFCV51AD1A IFCV51BD1A
Contacts
50 Hz
IFCV51AD2A IFCV51BD2A
Case Size
C1

8 (3.6) 14 (6.3)
0.5-4 0.5-4
6-150
2 N.O.
See description paragraph on previous page.
324
Overcurrent Relays
Online ordering is available for these products. See pages 15 - 18.

Overcurrent Relays
CHC Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays

High-speed instantaneous overcurrent fault detector relays. Application
I
Features
I I
3 and ground fault in circuit breaker failure schemes
Electrically separate contacts available Drawout case

I I
3 and ground instantaneous O/C Time delay operation
HFC Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays

Direct trip instantaneous overcurrent relays. Application
I
Features
I I I
Direct trip instantaneous overcurrent

I Instantaneous overcurrent
I I I
2 electrically separated contacts per unit High seismic rating Molded drawout case
13
Detection of severe close-in faults on transmission lines Differential motor protection Sensitive ground fault protection
PJC Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays

Instantaneous overcurrent or undercurrent protection of AC and DC circuits and machines. Application
I Feeder circuit overcurrent protection I High speed, non-directional AC/DC
Features
I I I I
current
Self-reset or manual-reset relays Mechanical target available Up to 3 independent units per case Molded or drawout case available

I Instantaneous O/C and U/C
Overcurrent Relays
325
SYNCHRONIZING RELAYS
MLJ
Synchronism check relay for interconnection of AC system parts.
The MLJ is a digital synchronism check relay that measures bus and line voltages, checking voltage differences, frequency slip, and phase angle between both voltages
SLJ
Static Synchronism Check Relay
A static synchronism check relay used when two sources are already interconnected.
IJS
An induction disk synchronism check relay when two sources are already interconnected.
IJS is an induction disk synchronism check relay that has two shaded pole U-magnet driving elements acting on opposite sides of a single rotating disk. One operating element drives the disk in the contact closing direction and the other in the restraining or opposite direction.
SECTION 14: SYNCHRONISM RELAYS MLJ .........................................327 SLJ ..........................................329 IJS ...........................................330
326
Synchronism check relay for interconnection of AC system parts.
MLJ
Digital Synchronism Check Relay
Applications
I I I
Generator and network synchronism Bus or line synchronism check Manual closing of breakers

I I I
Synchronism check operation Undervoltage supervision DLDB, DLLB and LLDB indication
Features
I I I I I I I I
RS485, RS232 or fiber comm. available Configurable auxiliary outputs V Hz line and bus metering Continuous or manual modes Part of a modular system Independent 2" or 4" modules 1/4 or 1/8 standard 19" rack case available 3 digit display
14
DESCRIPTION
The MLJ is a digital synchronism check relay that measures bus and line voltages, checking: I voltage differences I frequency slip I phase angle between both voltages
which has been set by the user. If any of the conditions are not met, the relay will provide a close condition fault signal. The relay has two operational modes: I a continuous mode in which it
constantly checks the synchronism I the manual mode is activated when voltage is applied to a manual digital input, initiating the synchronism supervision when voltage is applied by another check starting digital input
synchronism function when both voltages are above the set value. Additionally, the relay contains dead linedead bus (DLDB), dead line-live bus (DLLB) and live line-dead bus (LLDB) units, with the ability to select any combination of them through independent settings. The basic relay, MLJ1000, and the RS-485 communications model, MLJ1005, are mounted in a 2" module that is compatible with the MID industrial systems. They can also be provided in an individual 1/8 rack. The relays with additional communications via RS232 and plastic or glass fiber optics, models MLJ1006 and MLJ1007, come with an additional 2" card. The set can be mounted in either a 4" module for MID compatibility or a 1/4 rack case to be used as a stand alone relay.
The main applications of the MLJ are: I connection of a generator to the

network
I reestablishing the connection

between two parts of the network
I manual closing of breakers The relay sends a closing output to the breaker when all of the values fall within the set limits and maintain these values for a period of time
The synchronism function (with the presence of line and bar voltage) can be supervised by two undervoltage units that permit the
GE Power Management
327
MLJ Digital Synchronism Check Relay

FUNCTIONS
I programmable synchronism verificaI I I I I I I I I I
tion (voltage, phase and frequency) two operating modes: continuous and manual dead line-dead bus (DLDB), dead line-live bus (DLLB) and live linedead bus (LLDB) units real time measuring of line and bus voltages, voltage difference, phase difference and slip registering of the last close permitted visual indication of the line and bus status (live/dead) configurable auxiliary outputs local interface with push buttons and display RS485, RS232 and fiber optics communications self test functions compatible with MID industrial systems
MAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Keypad
Composed of three buttons with the symbols +, -, and ENTER. Permits performing the following functions: I I I I
view measurements view relay status view or change settings indicators and inputs testing
Indicators
Three LEDs. Function Ready Close permission contacts Undervoltage (27) Colour Green Red Red
COMMUNICATIONS
The remote communications system uses the GEPCE protocol for communication via the M-Link program which permits: I I I I I
viewing measurements viewing and changing settings testing inputs viewing the relay status viewing the line and bar status (live/dead) I collecting the data of the last close permission
Display
Three 7 segment display The following information is available through use of the screen: I settings I self tests I line and bar status indications
(live/dead)
I measurement of:
Line and bus voltages Voltage difference Phase difference Slip I Registered values for the last relay operation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Aux. Configuration Close enable Undervoltage Dead line Dead bus Sync Sync failure System ready
14
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM

(+) A B C B1 LINE A1 A2 POWER SUPPLY A3 B3 B12 B2 (-)
720755A4.CDR
CONT/ COMMAND ENABLE
52b
B4 CC
A4 CC
A5 CC
CLOSE ENABLE CLOSE ENABLE SYSTEM READY AUX. 1
A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 A10 B10
A B C BUS
MLJ
AUX. 2 RS485 (OPTIONAL) COM+ COM- SHIELD A11 A12 B11
B5
328
Synchronizing Relays
MLJ Digital Synchronism Check Relay

SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION SETTINGS RANGES Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Voltage Difference: 2-90 V in 0.5 V steps Phase Difference: 2-60 in 1 steps Frequency Slip: 10-500 mHz in 10 mHz steps Continuous Mode Time: 0.1-99 sec in 0.1 sec steps Manual Mode Time: 0.1-99 sec in 0.1 sec steps Undervoltage 25 Supervision: Enabled /Disabled Undervoltage Supervision Threshold: 10-180 V in 1 V steps Line Voltage Live Level: 40-245 V in 1 V steps Line Voltage Dead Level: 10-180 V in 1 V steps Bar Voltage Live Level: 40-245 V in 1 V steps Bar Voltage Dead Level: 10-180 V in 1 V steps Failure to Close Time: 1 min Synchronism Function 25: Enabled /Disabled DLDB Unit: Enabled /Disabled DLLB Unit Enabled /Disabled LLDB Unit: Enabled /Disabled Auxiliary Output 1 & Output 2 Configuration: Possible configuration options for the auxiliary outputs: Close permission for synchronism or undervoltage Synchronism unit output Undervoltage unit output Line without voltage Bus without voltage Failure to close permission Power supply monitoring Unit Number: 1-255 in steps of 1 Communications Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 14,400, 19,200, 38,400 bps METERING ACCURACY Voltage: Voltage Difference: Angle: Frequency: Time: 2% or 0.5 V (whichever is greater) 3% or 1 V (whichever is greater) 1 for voltages between 20 and 220 VAC 2.5 for voltages between 10 and 20 VAC 5 mHz (45 to 65 Hz range) 1% or 30 ms (whichever is greater) INPUTS BURDEN Voltage Circuit Burden: DIGITAL INPUTS: Two Ranges: Digital Input Consumption: 0.15 VA at 110 V-120 V 24-48 VDC and 110-250 VDC 20% <2 mA COMMUNICATIONS Mode: Half duplex Physical Connection: RS485 RS232, plastic or glass fiber optics ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Range: Operating: Storage: Ambient Humidity: -20C to 55C (-5F to 131F) -40C to 70C (-40F to 149F) Up to 95% without condensation
POWER SUPPLY RATINGS Rated Voltage: Maximum Voltage: Continuous: Auxiliary Power: 63 to 220 VAC
CASE PHYSICAL Dimensions: Models 1000 and 1005: Models 1006 and 1007: Weight (without packaging): TYPE TESTS Insulation Test: Impulse Test: Interference Test Electrostatic Discharge Radio Interference: Fast Transient: RF Emission: Magnetic Fields: Vibrations: Shock Test: APPROVALS : Compliant 1/8 rack, 4 units high 1/4 rack, 4 units high 6.6 lbs (3 kg)
440 VAC 24-48 VDC 20% 110-240 VDC/VAC 20% AUXILIARY POWER CONSUMPTION: In Standby: Tripped: 3 W (alarm relay activated) 6 W (all output relays activated)
OUTPUTS CONTACTS Closing Contacts: Max Operating Voltage: Continuous Current: Closing: Breaking Capacity: Signalling Contacts: Max Operating Voltage: Continuous Current: Closing: Breaking Capacity: 440 VAC 16 A 30 A 4000 VA 380 VAC, 250 VDC 8A 8A 1760 VA
IEC 255-5, 2 kV 50/60 Hz 1 min IEC 255-5, 5 kV 0.5 J IEC 255-22-1, Class III IEC 255-22-2, Class IV IEC 255-22-3, Class III IEC 255-22-4, Class IV EN 55011, Class B IEC 1000-4-8, Class V IEC 255-21-1, Class II IEC 255-21-2, Class II
ORDERING
MLJ100 * B010 * 00 *
MLJ100 5 6 7 F H C S
Modular Industrial Protection System Digital synchronism check relay RS485 communications RS485 + RS232 + Plastic fiber optics communications RS485 + RS232 + Glass fiber optics communications 24/48 VDC input and auxiliary voltage 110/250 VDC input and auxiliary voltage Individual drawout housing As part of a MID drawout system

See pages 15 - 18.
14
SLJ Static Synchronism Check Relay

A static synchronism check relay used when two sources are already interconnected. Applications
I I
Features
I I I
Bus or line synchronism check High speed power transfer schemes
Telephone type output relay contacts Mechanical target Front panel settings

I I I I I
Synchronism check operation Adjustable time delay Adjustable phase calibration range Instantaneous undervoltage External control of synchronism check and/or both voltage functions
329
An induction disk synchronism check relay when two sources are already interconnected.
IJS
Application
I I I I I I
Sychronism Check Relays
Bus or line synchronism check

Synchronism check operation Adjustable time delay Selectable phase calibration range Instantaneous bus and line undervoltage Time delay dead-line live-bus and/or dead-bus live-line check
Features
I I I
Telephone type relay units available Mechanical targets available Drawout case
14
DESCRIPTION
IJS is an induction disk synchronism check relay that has two shaded pole U-magnet driving elements acting on opposite sides of a single rotating disk. One operating element drives the disk in the contact closing direction and the other in the restraining or opposite direction. The disk shaft is restrained by a spiral spring, to hold the contacts open when the relay is de-energized. The motion of the disk is retarded by permanent magnets to give a time delay. side of an open line breaker may be slightly out of phase with each other because of load flow on the rest of the system. The relay, however, can be calibrated to permit closure of the breaker under these conditions if the voltage and the phase-angle differences are not excessive. The relay has an adjustable time delay and permits operation only if the phase angle remains less than a definite number of degrees for a selected time. The relay operating torque increases as the phase angle decreases and is a maximum when the two compared voltages are in phase. On systems where the two sides of a given breaker may or may not be interconnected elsewhere at any given moment when paralleling is desired, the GXS is used for synchronizing when a finite frequency difference exists; and the IJS is used at the same location for synchronism check when the frequency difference is negligible or zero due to the existence of an interconnection elsewhere. In this application, the IJS contacts are connected in parallel with those of the GXS. Forms of the relay are available with a rated calibration range up to 60 degrees. For settings over 20 degrees, consideration should be given to the resulting generator stresses at the instant of closure through existing system impedances, as in any other situation involving out-of-phase closure. The IJS51A is the basic synchronism-check relay and includes a target seal-in unit. IJS52A is similar to the basic IJS51A but without the target seal-in unit.
APPLICATION
Generally, the IJS relay is applicable as a synchronism-check relay to permit closure of a circuit breaker only when two sources connected to it are synchronized elsewhere. It determines that synchronism is being maintained by other interconnections, and then permits closure of the circuit breaker. In such an application, the voltages on either

See pages 15 - 18.
330
GE Power Management
VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RELAYS

MFF
Under and overfrequency protection in AC systems.
MFF relays are micro-processor based relays that provide protection against frequency variations in AC systems.
DFF
Supervision of the frequency of the power system.
The DFF is a digital relay used to supervise the frequency of the power system and provide load shedding capabilities.
TOV
Under and overvoltage protection for low and medium voltage industrial installations.
Type TOV relays are undervoltage and overvoltage relays, single phase or three phase, instantaneous or fixed time.
MOV
Protection for two breakers and complex substation busbar schemes.
IAV
Time delay voltage relays
IAV relays are single phase induction disk relays designed to respond, with time delay, to either an increasing or a decreasing voltage, or both.
IFV
Time delay voltage relays
IFV relays are single phase induction disk relays designed to respond, with time delay, to an increasing voltage. Some models are frequency compensated, and some include an instantaneous unit.
ICR
Phase sequence and undervoltage
AC undervoltage, open or reverse phase protection.
SFF
Static relay for high speed detection of underfrequency or overfrequency conditions.
SFF relays are digital frequency relays designed to operate when the system frequency changes to a predetermined level.
CFVB
Voltage-balance Relay
Voltage-balance relay.
NBV
Voltage unbalance relays
High speed, sensitive, three phase voltage-unbalance relays.
SECTION 15: VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RELAYS MFF .........................................332 DFF ..........................................334 TOV .........................................338 MOV ........................................340 IAV ..........................................344 IFV ...........................................344 ICR ...........................................344 SFF ..........................................344 CFVB .......................................345 NBV .........................................345 NGV ........................................345
NGV
High speed voltage relay
The NGV relay is a high-speed relay designed for calibration on decreasing voltage (drop-out), or increasing voltage (pick-up) and may be continuously energized at rated voltage.
331
Under and overfrequency protection in AC systems.
MFF
Digital Frequency Relay
Applications
I I
AC systems Load shedding and restoration

I I
Under and overfrequency Undervoltage inhibit setting
Features
I I I I I
Frequency metering and last trip data Part of a modular system Independent 2" modules 1/8 standard 19" rack cases available 3 digit display and reset button
15
DESCRIPTION
MFF relays are microprocessor based relays that provide protection against frequency variations in AC systems. MFF relays perform the following functions: I protection against frequency variations I frequency measurement I register of the frequency and operation time of the last trip, as well as the setting level that has tripped
APPLICATIONS
I one maximum and one minimum
frequency settings.
The operation time is independent for each level, and it is adjustable from 0 to 10 sec, the minimum tripping response being between 3 and 5 cycles. When a quick frequency variation occurs, if the second setting is reached before the first settings operation time is finished, the first setting will trip before finishing its time. The relay blocks when the network voltage falls under an inhibition value, adjustable between 40 and 100% of the nominal voltage. MFF relays are digital and modular, mounted in a 1/8 rack case.
The minimum frequency function of the MFF is designed specifically to be applied in load shedding systems, where the accuracy and repeatability of the measurements are very important. If as a consequence of a disturbance in the system there is a loss of the generators capacity, so that the load exceeds the generation, the system can collapse. The first indication is the fall of frequency, as a consequence of the generators loss of speed. The MFFs distributed around the system detect this condition and trip in order to disconnect the loads in a controlled way. This action must be fast and strong enough to allow the system recovering. In order to avoid the complete breakdown of the system, the loads will be restored using the maximum frequency function.
MFF relays have two setting levels that can be programmed as follows: I two maximum frequency settings I two minimum frequency settings
332
GE Power Management
MFF Digital Frequency Relay

CONSTRUCTION
I accurate and reliable, with low I I
power consumption drawout, 1/8 19" rack case LED indicating lamps: In service (green LED) Level 1 trip (red LED) Level 2 trip (red LED) three-digit display, showing the following data: F0. status of the equipment F1. frequency measurement F2. last trip level (1 or 2) F3. last trip frequency F4. last trip time fire resistant, shock resistant, sealable plastic cover, with external indicator resets output unit with high seismic rating high reliability solid state components micro-processor based system
MFF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MONITORING The settings are adjusted using the three push-buttons on the front of the relay: ENTER, +, -. The chosen setting value will be shown on the display. Available Ranges: Frequency Setting (independently for units 1 and 2): Type Selection: maximum or minimum Frequency: 42.0 to 67.5 Hz in steps of 0.1 Hz Timing setting (independently for units 1 and 2): 0.00 to 10 sec in steps of 0.05 sec Inhibition Voltage Setting: 40 to 100% Vn in steps of 10% TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radio Interference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radio Frequency Emission: : 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to CEI 255-22-1 Class IV according to CEI 255-22-2 Class III according to CEI 255-22-3 Class IV according to CEI 255-22-4 Class II according to CEI 255-21-1 Class I according to CEI-225-21-2 According to CEI 41B (Sec.) 81 and EN55022 class B Emisivity according to EN50081-2 Susceptibility according to EN50082-2
I I I I
OUTPUTS The MFF basic model provides two auxiliary tripping relays (1 per level) with a type C contact: Closing Capacity: 3000 W resistive during 0.2 sec with a max of 30 A and 300 VDC Breaking Capacity: 50 W resistive with a maximum of 2 A and 300 VDC Make and Carry: 5A There is also an auxiliary equipment alarm relay with an NC contact.: Closing Capacity: 5 A during 30 sec and 250 VDC max Breaking Capacity: 25 W inductive and 250 VDC max Make and Carry: 3A INPUTS Nominal Frequency: Nominal Voltage: Auxiliary Voltage:
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Operation: -10C to +55C Storage: -40C to +70C Ambient Humidity: Up to 95% without condensation
PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: 5.06 lbs (2.3 kg) Packaged: 5.5 lbs (2.5 kg)
Fig. 1. Face plate characteristics
50 or 60 Hz 110 VAC 48-125 VAC/VDC 110-220 VAC, 110-240 VDC Consumption: less than 1.5 W for all voltages Accuracy: 0.005 Hz Repeatability: 0.01 Hz Permanently Admissible Max Voltage: 220V
APPROVALS Compliant
TYPICAL WIRING
Fig. 2. MFF external connections
A B C
(+) A1
MFF
15
OVER OR UNDER FREQUENCY
52
A8 A6 A4 A5
OVER OR UNDER FREQUENCY
SYSTEM READY TRIP CONTACT LEVEL 1 AUXILIARY CONTACT LEVEL 1
A7 A9
A10 A11 A3 (-)

720751A2.CDR
TRIP CONTACT LEVEL 2 AUXILIARY CONTACT LEVEL 2
A2
A12
ORDERING
MFF 1000
MFF 1000
A000 *
F G H
00C
Digital frequency relay 24-48 VDC power supply 48-125 VDC/VAC power supply 110-220 VCA, 110-240 VDC power supply

See pages 15 - 18.
There is also a possibility to supply special models with different ranges.
Voltage and Frequency Relays
333
Power system frequency supervision.
DFF
Applications
I I
Load shedding frequency schemes Protection of generators

I I I I I
Underfrequency protection Under and overvoltage protection 33 configurable outputs (DFF1000) 14 configurable inputs (DFF1000) 3 settings groups

I I I
Event record, last 150 events Oscillography, 4 records Self diagnostics
User Interfaces
I I I I I I
15
DESCRIPTION
The DFF is a digital relay used to supervise the frequency of the power system and provide load shedding capabilities. The DFF is applied directly to a generator to protect against those abnormal conditions that result in frequency fluctuations, and throughout the system to shed load in an attempt to regain frequency stability. The DFF has 8 frequency units which are supervised by an undervoltage unit. One overvoltage unit is also provided. There are 14 programmable inputs (DFF1000) and 33 programmable outputs (DFF1000) providing high flexibility in load shedding. Three separate groups of settings are stored in the DFFs non-volatile memory. The active group may be selected through a digital input, the keypad on through communications. The DFF monitors the voltage at 16 samples per cycle. Four oscillography record may be stored in memory. The DFF stores up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. The local user interface includes a 20 button keypad and a 2 line by 16 character backlit LCD. The relay has 16 user configurable LEDs. A front mounted RS232 port provides local computer access. One rear mounted port can be either an RS232, RS485, or fiber optics port. GE-NESIS Windows based software is provided for remote monitoring, configuring the inputs, outputs, and LEDs, and oscillography display. The DFF is packaged in a compact 19" rack-mount drawout case.
Keypad and LCD 16 configurable LEDs Front RS232 port Rear RS232, RS485, or fiber optics Software provided 1200 to 115,200 bps
Features
I I
Compact 19" drawout case DDS system compatible
334
GE Power Management
DFF Digital Frequency Relay

Frequency Functions
Under normal conditions, the generated frequency of the power system must match with the load requirements. When abnormal conditions occur there are changes in the system frequency. If the changes are small the frequency can be corrected through the normal adjustment of the system generator. However, when the load is increased above the generator rating the generator can no longer correct the speed and the frequency begins to drop. The DFF is applied directly to the generator to protect against damage, and throughout the system to shed load in an attempt to regain frequency stability. The DFF has 8 frequency units. Each unit can be configured as a rate of change unit or as an absolute frequency unit. These units are supervised by an undervoltage unit. The number of cycles needed to consider a trip condition can also be programmed. If the frequency unit is programmed as an absolute unit the relay will trip when the frequency is under the programmed value during the time delay value. When the units are programmed as rate of change units the relay will trip when the frequency is under the programmed value and the instantaneous variation of the frequency with respect to time is greater than the programmed value. In this case the time delay value will be ignored.
Configurable Inputs and Outputs

There are 14 configurable inputs and 33 configurable outputs (DFP1000), providing the DFF with high flexibility in load shedding schemes. AND/OR/NOT logic can be applied to configure the outputs. GE-INTRO software is provided to configure the inputs and outputs.
USER INTERFACES
Keypad and Display
A 20 button keypad and a 2 line by 16 character LCD is provided on the front panel for local user interface. This interface allows the user to assign and view protection settings, alarms, LEDs, measurements, and status.

Event Record
The DFF has an event record that can store up to 150 events with the date and time stamped to the nearest millisecond. This provides the information needed to determine the sequence of events, which helps the diagnosis of relay operation.
LED Indicators
The DFF has 1 LED to indicate the relay is in service, and 16 user configurable LEDs. AND/OR/NOT logic can be applied to configure the LEDs.
Communication Ports
The DFF has 2 communications ports. The front mounted port is an RS232 port. The rear mounted port may be selected to be an RS232, RS485, plastic fiber optics, or glass fiber optics port. The baud rate is 1200 to 115,200 bps.
Oscillography
The DFF captures voltage waveforms at 2 or 16 samples per cycle. If 16 samples are chosen 66 cycles are stored and if 2 samples are chosen 1586 cycles are stored. GE-OSC software is provided to allow the user to display and analyze the oscillography records.
The DFF can store four oscillography records
Software
Three Windows based software packages are included with the DFF: I GE-LOCAL enables the user to visualize the protection settings, alarms, LEDs, measurements and status I GE-INTRO enables the user to configure the inputs, outputs and LEDs I GE-OSC enables the user to study the oscillography records
Voltage Functions
One overvoltage and one undervoltage unit is provided. The voltage functions are single phase units. The frequency units are supervised by an undervoltage unit.
These software packages are part of the GE-NESIS software (General Electric NEtwork Substation Integration System) used by the DDS system.
GE-LOCAL software is provided for DFF communication
15

Three separate groups of settings are stored in the DFFs non-volatile memory, with only one group active at a given time. This allows the relay to respond to changing conditions by selecting the appropriate settings group. The active settings group can be selected via a user command or through a digital input. Certain settings are common to all settings groups.
335

TYPICAL WIRING (for Model DFF1000)
GROUND BUS
C B A
B7
Vc
B8
A9 A10 B9 B10 A8
Vc Va Vc
A7
A8
A7
Vc Vb
Vn Vn
CONTROL POWER
A12 B12 G G
VOLTAGE INPUTS
B
PICKUP F1 SP13 PICKUP F2 SP14 E5 F5 E6 F6 E7 F7 E8 F8 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11 E12 F12 R5 I5 R6 I6 R7 I7 R8 I8 R9 I9 R10 I10 R11 I11 R12 I12 J1 K1 J2 K2 J3 K3 J4 K4 J5 K5 J6 K6 J7 K7 J8 K8 J9 K9 J10 K10 J11 K11 J12 K12
GE Power Management
PICKUP F3 SP15
DFF
E1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 F4 F4 R1 I1 R2 I2 R3 I3 R4 I4 EP1 TABLE (A) SELECTION EP2 TABLE (B) SELECTION EXTERNAL TRIGGER EP3 EP4 EP5 EP6 EP7 COM EP8 EP9 EP10 EP11 EP12 EP13 EP14 COM
PICKUP F4 SP16 PICKUP F5 SP17 PICKUP F6 SP18 PICKUP F7 SP19 PICKUP F8 SP20
PROGRAMMABLE INPUTS
TRIP F1 TRIP F2 TRIP F3 TRIP F4 TRIP F5 TRIP F6 TRIP F7 TRIP F8
SP21 SP22 SP23 SP24 SP25 SP26 SP27 SP28 SP1 SP2 SP3
15
FRONT
RS-232
REAR
RS-232 OR RS-485 OR FIBER-OPTIC
SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7
C9 D9 C5 D5 C6 D6 C7 D7 C8 D8
SELF TEST ALARM TRIP 1 TRIP 2 TRIP 3 TRIP 4
SP8 SP9 OUTPUTS SP10 SP11 SP12
723701A4.CDR
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW
19.05" (484)
SIDE VIEW
10.25" (260) 0.28" Dia. (7) 4 Pl. 7.00" (178) 4.00" (102) 1.50" (38) INCHES (mm)
CUTOUT & DRILLING PATTERN

18.30" (465) 17.35" (441)
7.30" (185)
723700A1.DWG
336

DFF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS Digital inputs voltage: Thermal Capacity: Voltage circuits: Continuously: During 1 min: Tripping contacts: Continuous current: Make and carry: Operating time: Burdens: Voltage circuits: DC Burden: Per each activated input: 48, 125 or 220 VDC (depending on model) COMMUNICATIONS Mode: Half duplex Speed: 1200 to 19200 bps Physical media: RS232 (ports 1, 2) Plastic Fiber Optic (port 2 optional) Type of connector: HFBR-4516 Power supplied: -8 dBm Receptor's sensitivity: -39 dBm Wave length: 660 nm Glass Fiber Optic (port 2 optional) Type of connector: STA Power supplied: -17.5 dBm Receptor's sensitivity: -24.5 dBm Wave length: 820 nm RS485 (port 2 optional) PACKAGING Dimensions: TYPE TESTS Isolation Test Voltage: Surge Test Voltage: Interference: Electrostatic Discharge: Radiointerference: Fast Transient: Sinusoidal Vibration: Shock: Radiofrequency Emission: Emisivity: Susceptibility: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, 1 min 5 kV peak, 0.5 J Class III according to IEC 255-22-1 Class IV according to IEC 255-22-2 Class III according to IEC 255-22-3 Class IV according to IEC 255-22-4 Class II according to IEC 255-21-1 Class I according to IEC 255-21-2 According to IEC 41B (Sec.) 81 and EN522 Class B According to EN50081-2 According to EN50082-2
2 x Vn 3.5 x Vn 16 A 30 A according to ANSI C37-90 4 ms 0.2 VA for Vn = 63.5 V 12 W 8 mA (1 W Vaux = 125 VCC)
POWER SUPPLY Frequency: Nominal Voltage: Power Supply:
50 or 60 Hz 100/3 - 220/3 VAC 48/125 VDC or 110/250 VDC) 20%
19" x 10.25" x 7.7" (484 mm x 260 mm x 185 mm) Weight: Not Packaged: 26.4 lbs (12 kg) Packaged: 28.6 lbs (13 kg) APPROVALS Compliant
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Operation: -20 C to +55 C Storage: -40C to +70 C Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing ACCURACY Accuracy: Repeatability: Temperature error: Aging:
200 PPM at 20 C 50 PPM 35 PPM from -20 C to +55 C 5 PPM according to MIL-C3098F
The relay shall be an integrated digital protection system including frequency and voltage protection, voltage monitoring and communication capabilities. Protection functions shall include: I 8 frequency units selecting the rate
of change mode or the absolute mode I one frequency undervoltage supervision unit I one overvoltage unit (one phase) I one undervoltage unit (one phase)
Monitoring functions shall include: I voltage metering I fault voltages and frequency for last
trip
User interface shall include: I 1 LED to indicate the relay is in service I 16 user configurable LEDs I 33, 25 or 13 inputs (depending on the
model)
I self diagnostics I pick up and trip status of each function I oscillography (voltages and digital
flags) n sequence of events (up to 150 internal events)
I man-machine interface (MMI) shall

be in the form of a 2 line by 16 character backlit LCD alpha numeric display and keypad to accommodate programming and viewing of parameters I RS232, RS485 and fiber optic ports shall be provided for remote or local access via a personal computer
15
ORDERING
DFF 1 * 0 * * C * * 00 2 * *
DFF 0 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 G H A I
Base DFF digital frequency relay P1, P2: M-Link protocol P1: M-Link protocol; P2: ModBus RTU protocol 14 inputs, 33 outputs 7 inputs, 25 outputs 7 inputs, 13 outputs RS232 rear communications port Fiber optic plastic 1mm rear communications port Fiber optic glass 62.5/125 rear communications port RS485 rear communications port 48 VDC auxiliary voltage inputs 125 VDC auxiliary voltage inputs 220 VDC auxiliary voltage inputs 48/125 VDC power supply 100/250 VDC power supply Revision level Spanish language English language

See pages 15 - 18.
337
Under and overvoltage protection for low and medium voltage industrial installations.
TOV
Modular Voltage Relay
Applications
I I I
Automatic transfer equipment Automatic control systems Component for complex protection schemes

I I I I
Instantaneous under and overvoltage Time delay under and overvoltage Phase to ground fault detection in isolated neutral systems Third harmonic filter (single phase)
Features
I I I I I
Part of a modular system Independent 2" modules 1/8 standard 19" rack cases available LED indicators and reset button Trip, auxiliary, power supply alarm
15
DESCRIPTION
Type TOV relays are undervoltage and overvoltage relays, single phase or three phase, instantaneous or fixed time. Adjustments are made from dip switches located on the front of the relay. The single phase relays may include a filter for third harmonics, as well as the ability to select between overvoltage and undervoltage operation in the same relay. TOV relays are solid state, modular relays and are supplied in 1/8 standard 19" wide rack size cases.
APPLICATIONS
Some of the more common undervoltage applications of the TOV relay are:
1. instantaneous detection of undervoltage in automatic transfer equipment. 2. as fault detector with distance relays (using communication channels) in the case of lines with weak infeed at one terminal. 3. Phase to ground fault detection in systems with isolated neutrals and in alternating current rotating machines.
CONSTRUCTION
I accurate and reliable, with low power
consumption
I Drawout case I LED indicating lamps: PICK-UP target with

manual reset auxiliary power supply voltage I fire resistant, shock resistant, sealable plastic cover, with exterior indicator resets I output unit with high seismic rating I high reliability components, manufactured using techniques to minimize failures
Some of the more common overvoltage applications of the TOV relay are:
1. as overvoltage detector for automatic control systems whose functional security depends on voltage. 2. three phase overvoltage protection with time delays.
338
GE Power Management
TOV Modular Voltage Relay

TOV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PROTECTION OPERATING TIMES There are Two Operating Modes: 1. Instantaneous (30 to 50 ms) 2. Time delay 130 ms to 25.6 sec in 100 ms steps The same relay can be used in either mode, or in both modes VOLTAGE RANGES Adjustable Voltage Ranges are available as follows: 20 to 275 VAC 50 to 305 VAC 3 to 65 VAC (only in single phase version) in 1 V steps The Maximum Allowable Continuous Voltages are: 400 AC for the 20 to 275 V and 50 to 305 V ranges 200 VAC for the 3 to 66 V range FREQUENCY RANGE With filter Normal frequency 50 Hz Effective range Operating range 45-51 Hz 46-53 Hz 60 Hz 57-63 Hz 57-63 Hz 50/60 Hz 48/63 Hz 46/64 Hz Without filter* OUTPUTS CONTACT DATA The basic TOV relay has one trip output relay and three switched auxiliary output relays, the trip output contact rating is: Continuous: 16 A Make and Carry: 30 A Break: 180 VA resistive at 125/250 VDC 60 VA inductive at 125/250 VDC The three auxiliary output relays contact rating is: Continuous: 3 A, 250 VDC max Make and Carry: 5 A for 30 sec, 250 VDC max Break: 20 W inductive 250 VDC max POWER SUPPLY AUXILIARY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE Nominal Voltage 24-48 VDC/VAC 48-125 VDC/VAC 110-240 VDC 110-220 VAC Operating Range 19-60 VDC/VAC 38-150 VDC/VAC 88-288 VDC 88-264 VAC PACKAGING Approximate Weight: Net: 5 Ibs. (2.3 kg) Ship: 5.5 Ibs. (2.5 kg)
INPUTS BURDENS Depending on the service voltage and the number of auxiliary relays, the DC burden is: Normal: 45-63 mA Tripped: 63-79 mA The burden of the AC voltage circuits is less than 1 VA
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Ranges: Operating range: -20C to +55C Storage range: -40C to + 60C Relative Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing TYPE TESTS The TOV relay complies with the type tests recommended by IEC 255.5, impulse withstand and high frequency interference. The relay also complies with GE standards for fast transients. Between terminals and ground: 2000 VAC for one min at frequency (50 Hz-60 Hz) Between independent terminal groups: 2000 VAC for one min at frequency (50 Hz-60 Hz) Between terminals of each one of the output contacts: 1000 VAC for one min at frequency (50 Hz-60 Hz) APPROVALS Compliant
* Only the three-phase model MONITORING ACCURACY Accurate to within 5% of operating value Accurate to within 5%, or 30 ms, of operating time
ORDERING
To order select the basic model and the desired features from the Selection Guides below.
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
(+) ABC A4
GE Power Management
A7 B8 A11 A12 B12
TOV 40 * 3 * 030 * 00 *
TOV 4 1 2 I M F G H
Three phase voltage relay Voltage range: 20/275 VAC Voltage range: 50/305 VAC Undervoltage Overvoltage Auxiliary voltage: 24-48 VDC/VAC Auxiliary voltage: 48-125 VDC/VAC Auxiliary voltage: 110-240 VDC, 110-220 VAC C Individual housing S As part of a MID system
ABC
TRIPPING CONTACTS
TOV4000
Three Phase Voltage Relay
A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A5 (-) VC B4 VB VA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
TRIPPING AUXILIARY CONTACTS
B10 B11 A10 B6 B7 A6 SYSTEM READY PICKUP CONTACTS
15
720750A3.ai
(+) A4
GE Power Management
A7 B8 A11 A12 B12
TRIPPING CONTACTS
TOV 50 * 3B * 10 * 00 *
TOV 5 1 2 3 1 2 F G H
Single phase voltage relay Voltage range: 20/275 V Voltage range: 50/305 V Voltage range: 3/66 VAC 50 Hz filter 60 Hz filter Auxiliary voltage: 24-48 VDC/VAC Auxiliary voltage: 48-125 VDC/VAC Auxiliary voltage: 110-240 VDC, 110-220 VAC C Individual housing S As part of a MID system
TOV5000
Single Phase Voltage Relay
TRIPPING AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A2 B2
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS V0
B10 B11 A10 B6 B7
PICKUP CONTACTS
SYSTEM READY
A5 (-)
B4
A6
720757A1.ai

See pages 15 - 18.
339
Protection for two breakers and complex substation busbar schemes.
MOV
Digital Multifunctional Protection Relay
Applications
I I
Complex substation busbar schemes Protection for two breakers

I I I I I I I I
Undervoltage Voltage absence Voltage presence Weak infeed Closing/reclosing permission Synchronism checking 3 settings tables Configurable inputs and outputs

I I I I I I
15
Three-phase line voltage, busbars 1 & 2 voltage measurement Associated line selector switch status Optical signalling with 17 LED indicators Event recording Oscillographic record Self-check
DESCRIPTION
The MOV is a digital multifunction protective relay that provides undervoltage, voltage absence, voltage presence, and closing and reclosing permission functions for two breakers. It offers a great flexibility of configuration for the definition of inputs, outputs and internal logics. The MOV includes analysis functions, such as event recording, oscillography recording, and an alarms panel. In complex substation busbar schemes such as double busbar and breaker and a half, there is a need for special breaker closing logics. These logics involve several previous requirements, such as interlockings between disconnector switches and breakers, voltage checking, etc. All this associated logic, as well as the closing and opening commands, are traditionally performed by means of relays and auxiliary measuring elements, which can involve a great complexity, requiring an intensive use of these auxiliary units. The MOV provides the ideal replacement for all this associated logic, at a sensibly smaller cost. Besides, it offers the advantage of being adaptable to all further modifications of the Substation, without the need to change the hardware elements and the associated wiring, as the internal programmable logic provides great versatility with an important reduction in Engineering, Installation and Equipment Supervision costs.
User Interfaces
I I I I
RS232 port, faceplate accessible RS232/fiber optic/RS485 ports, rear accessible (see model list) HMI with keypad and alphanumeric display Windows based GE-INTRO configuration, GE-LOCAL communications, and GE-OSC oscillography analysis software (part of GE-NESIS)
Features
I I
IRIG-B time synchronization User configurable internal logic
340
GE Power Management
MOV Digital Multifunctional Protective Relay

PROTECTION
The available protection functions are: VOLTAGE ABSENCE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE CENTRAL BREAKER (FUNCTION D). This function detects the voltage absence on the line side of the central breaker. Voltage absence on any side of the central breaker can be detected by parallel connecting the operation of both MOVs protecting the breaker. The use of this function is the same as function C, but for the central breaker.
Weak Infeed
WEAK INFEED ON THE LINE (FUNCTIONS G, H AND I). These functions detect weak infeed condition on each phase of the line. These functions are required by some protection units for applying weak infeed logics.
Undervoltage
UNDERVOLTAGE ON BOTH SIDES OF THE SIDE BREAKER (FUNCTION A). The MOV detects undervoltage on both sides of the side breaker during a selectable time period. It monitors the Busbar voltage (V1) and the line voltage values (V3, V4, V5) or V2, depending on the status of the line disconnector switch. The operation of this function allows the side breaker to trip and signal undervoltage to the control system. Undervoltage on both sides of the central breaker (function A). The MOV detects undervoltage on the line side associated to the central breaker. In order to monitor undervoltage on both sides of the central breaker, this function has to be ANDed with function A of the MOV relay protecting the other two breakers (contacts in series).
Closing/Reclosing Permission
CLOSING PERMISSION FOR THE SIDE BREAKER (ONLY MOV2). This function allows supervision of the manual closing of the side breaker for DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB and/or Synchronism check conditions. In order to verify synchronism differences of voltage Module, Phase and Frequency are checked. The BUS side is V1, independently of the position of the line disconnector switch. The LINE side refers to (V3, V4, V5) or (V2) voltages, depending on the status of the switch (89). RECLOSING PERMISSION FOR THE SIDE BREAKER (ONLY MOV2). This function allows supervision of the Side breaker reclosing for the following conditions DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB, and/or Synchronism check. CLOSING PERMISSION FOR THE CENTRAL BREAKER (ONLY MOV2). This function allows supervision of the Central Breaker manual closing for the following conditions DL-DB, LL-DB, DLLB, and/or Synchronism check. In order to verify synchronism differences of voltage Module, Phase and Frequency are checked. The BUS side is V2, independently of the position of the line disconnector switch. The LINE side refers to (V3, V4, V5) or (V1) voltages, depending on the status of switch (89). RECLOSING PERMISSION FOR THE CENTRAL BREAKER (ONLY MOV2). This function allows supervision of the Central Breaker reclosing for the following conditions DL-DB, LL-DB, DLLB, and/or Synchronism check.
Voltage Presence
VOLTAGE PRESENCE ON BOTH SIDES OF THE SIDE BREAKER (FUNCTION E). This function detects the voltage presence on both sides of the side breaker. It is used for signaling this situation to the control system and the remote connection. VOLTAGE PRESENCE ON THE LINE SIDE OF THE CENTRAL BREAKER (FUNCTION F). This function detects the voltage presence on both sides of the central breaker, by series connecting the operations of both MOVs protecting the breaker and a half scheme. It is used for sending a signal to the control system and the remote connection. VOLTAGE PRESENCE ON ANY SIDE OF THE SIDE BREAKER (FUNCTION J). This function detects voltage presence on any side of the side breaker. It can be used for conditioning the undervoltage trip to voltage presence. This allows the breaker to close when there is no voltage (voltage absence) avoiding an undervoltage trip afterwards.
Voltage Absence
VOLTAGE ABSENCE ON THE LINE (FUNCTION B). This function detects voltage absence on the line in order to allow a line grounding operation. Voltage absence on any side of the side breaker (function C). This function detects the voltage absence on any side of the side breaker, in order to allow the side breaker closing, when the remote connection cannot operate, due to the lack of voltage. This function can be used for emergency closing.
15

L1 Va, Vb, Vc B1 Vb 52-1 89-1 V1 V2 52-0 V2 52-2 B2 89-2 V3, V4, V5
89-1
MOV MOV
V1 V3, V4, V5
89-1
89-2
Vb
89-2
Va, Vb, Vc L2
341

Line (Three Phase), Bus1, and Bus2 Voltage Level Metering
This function displays the primary modules for the three line voltages, and for both buses, as well as the difference in Module, Angle and Frequency between the voltages on both sides of the side breaker (52-1) and central breaker (52-0).
Optical Signaling with 17 LED Indicators

The MOV includes 17 LED indicators, one bicolor for the SYSTEM READY, and 16 red, configurable using the GEINTRO configuration program.
Oscillography Recording
The unit maintains a record of 4 oscillography registers, of 62 cycles each, with a resolution of 16 samples per cycle. The number of pre-fault cycles can be selected between 1 and 8. Each record includes the following information: instantaneous values of voltages, internal digital flags, date and time, causes of the oscillo, and active Settings Table in the moment of the record. The oscillography trigger causes can be configured. The oscillography can also be triggered by an input or by communications. The record is stored in COMTRADE format (Standard IEEE C37.111-1991) and can be displayed using the GE-OSC software, or any other software package accepting COMTRADE format or ASCII files (for example EXCEL)
Event Recording
The unit keeps a record of the last 165 events, with the following information: date and time (with 1 ms resolution), event description, voltage levels in the moment of the event, and unit status (set of all internal digital signals). This information is stored in a non-volatile memory.
Status of the Associated Line Disconnector Switch

This function displays the status of a line disconnector switch associated to the unit using the digital inputs 89/a and 89/b.
TYPICAL WIRING
CONTROL
3 settings tables
C A
A1 A2 B1 B2 A3 A4 B3
B4 A5 A6
A10 B10
CONTROL POWER CASE GROUND
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
VOLTAGE INPUTS B
There are 3 independent settings tables, stored in a non-volatile memory. It is possible to change the active settings table using digital inputs. Time synchronization using communications or the GPS satellite system by IRIG-B. A demodulated IRIG-B input for time synchronization allows relating data from different units, even if these are hundreds of kilometers away from each other, thanks to the GPS satellite system. The units can also be synchronized by communications, with the GE-LOCAL communications software, or manually using the HMI.
FUNCTION A
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PO13 PO14 PO15 PO16 PO17 PO18 PO19 PO20 PO21 PO22
GE Power Management
FUNCTION A'
MOV
15
C9 D9 C10 D10 C11 D11 C12 D12
Multifunctional Protective Relay

INPUTS GROUP 1 PI1 PI2 PI3 COMMON PI4 PI5 PI6 TABLE 0 TABLE 1 TRIGGER COMMON 89-A 89-B
FUNCTION B
FUNCTION B
FUNCTION B
FUNCTION E
FUNCTION E
FUNCTION F
FUNCTION F
FUNCTION A
IRIG-B
FUNCTION A
FUNCTION A'
FUNCTION A'
FRONT
RS-232
FUNCTION C
FUNCTION D
REAR
RS-232
FUNCTION G
FUNCTION H
FUNCTION I
REAR
PORT 3 IS INDEPENDENT FROM PORTS 1 AND 2 PORT 1 HAS PRIORITY OVER PORT 2
RS-232 OR FIBER-OPTIC (GLASS OR PLASTIC)
FUNCTION J
SYSTEM READY
PO5
A11 B11 A12 B12 C1 D1 C2 D2 C4 D4 C5 D5 C6 D6 C7 D7 C8 D8 E1 F1 E2 F2 E3 F3 E4 F4 E5 F5 E6 F6 E7 F7 E8 F8 E9 F9 E10 F10 E11 F11 E12 F12 C3 D3
738750A3.ai
INPUTS GROUP 2
Configurable inputs & outputs

There are 6 digital inputs (two groups of 3 inputs + a common per group), and 22 configurable outputs available. The configuration can be performed using the GE-INTRO configuration software.
User configurable internal logic

The programming logic of outputs and LEDs is performed at several levels. At a first level, AND gates with up to 16 signals can be programmed. Their output is incorporated to the available signals in order to be used in a next AND gate with up to 16 signals. Once the configuration of AND gates is finished, a second level can be performed using OR gates with 16 inputs; the logic outputs of these OR gates are assigned to the physical outputs of the unit, or to LED indicators.
342

COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
HMI with keypad and alphanumerical display
The MOV includes as standard a 20 key keypad and a 2-line liquid crystal display (LCD) with 16 characters per line. This display has highly reliable LED diode back lighting (the screen brightness can be adjusted on the rear of the front board). By means of this interface the user can change the settings, visualize measurements, carry out operations and access information stored in the unit. There are different models available, each of them with a different physical connection for the PORT 3 connector (RS-232 or fiber-optic). In the RS232 models the three connectors are RS232. In the RS232 and fiber-optic models the PORT1 and PORT2 connectors are RS232 while the PORT3 connector is replaced by a fiber-optic connector. The PORT 1 connector has priority over the PORT 2 connector and is selected when the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal is activated. Communication driver 1 (PORT 1 and PORT 2 connectors) and Comm. driver 2 (PORT 3 connector) are independent and the unit can serve them simultaneously. Local and remote communications can exist at the same time, although settings change and operations can be performed only from one of them as defined by communication priority levels.
GE-NESIS Software
The GE-NESIS software package includes the following programs, to be used for different purposes: I GE-LOCAL: Communications
Software
I GE-INTRO: Configuration Software I GE-OSC: Oscillography Treatment

Software
Local & Remote Communications

The relay has 2 serial gates and three connectors. Gate 1 can be reached from the front of the relay in connector 1 (PORT 1) or from the back in connector 2 (PORT 2). The second gate can be reached from connector 3 (PORT 3) which is located on the rear.
MOV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

COMMUNICATIONS RS232 DB9 female connector (2/3 connectors depending on model) Mode: Half duplex. 1 mm plastic fiber optic (depending on the model): Typical emitted power: -8 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -39 dBm Numerical opening N.O. 0.5 Wave length: 660 nm (visible red) HFBR-4516 type connector 62.5 /125 glass fiber optic (depending on the model): Typical emitted power: -17.5 dBm Receptors sensitivity: -25.4 dBm Numerical Opening N.O.: 0.2 Wave length: 820 nm (close infrared) SMA type connector POWER SUPPLY Frequency: Rated Voltage: Auxiliary Voltage: Operative Range: Digital Inputs Voltage: Thermal Capacity: Voltage Circuits: Permanent: During 1 min: OUTPUTS TRIPPING CONTACTS: Rated Voltage/Maximum Opening Voltage: 250/440 VAC Rated Current/Make Current: 16/25 A Operating Power: 4000 VA Mechanical Life: 30 x 106 AUXILIARY AND ALARM CONTACTS Operating Power (non-inductive loads): 1760 VA Operating Voltage: 380/250 VAC/VDC Rated Current DC: 8A Mechanical Life: 107 Electrical Life at Full Load: 105 CIRCUITS LOAD: Voltage Circuits: 0.2 VA at Un = 63.5 V Consumption: Auxiliary voltage: 12 W (stand-by condition) 16 W (all output relays active) Digital inputs: 8 mA (1 W for Vaux = 125 VDC) Accuracy: Voltage and current: 5% Time: 5% or 30 ms (whichever is greater) Error margin: Class E-5 according to IEC 255-4 Repetitivity: Operation value: 1% Operating time: 2% or 30 ms (whichever is greater) TYPE TESTS The MOV system complies with the following standards, which include the GE insulation and electromagnetic standard and the standards required by European Community Directive 89/336 for the CE marking, in line with European standards. It also complies with the European directive requirements for low voltage, and the environmental and operating requirements established in ANSI standards C37.90, IEC 255-5, IEC 255-6 and IEC 68. Insulation Test Voltage: IEC 255-5, 600V, 2kV, 50/60 Hz 1 min Impulse Voltage Withstand: IEC 255-5, 5 kV, 0.5 J 1 MHz Interference: IEC 255-22-1, Class III Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 255-22-2 EN 61000-4-2, Class IV, 8 kV Immunity to Radio Interference: IEC 255-22-3, Class III Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Amplitude Modulation: ENV 50140, 10 V/m Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Amplitude Modulation: Common Mode: ENV 50141, 10 V/m Electromagnetic Fields Radiated with Frequency Modulation: ENV 50204, 10 V/m Fast Transients: IEC 255-22-4 EN 61000-4-4, Class IV Magnetic Fields at Industrial Frequency: EN 61000-4-8, 30 Av/m RF Emission: EN 55011, Class B ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Ranges: Operating: -20C to +55C Storage: -40C to +65C Humidity : Up to 95% without condensing MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 19" rack case, 2 units high Protection level IP51 (according to IEC 529). LCD Display with two rows of 16 characters, and 20 key keypad. Rear connection with 6 terminal boards of 12 terminals each. PACKAGING Dimensions: Weight: Net: Shipping:
15
50 or 60 Hz (selectable) 100/3 - 220/3 VAC 48-125 VDC or 110-250 VDC 80-120% of rated values 48-125 or 110-250 VDC 2 x Vn 3.5 x Vn
ORDERING
MOV * * 0 * * 1 0 1 * * * *
MOV 1 2 0 1 2 0 2 M D
Digital multifunctional protective relay Undervoltage Undervoltage + synchronism RS232 communications interface Plastic F.O. + RS232 communications interface Glass F.O. + RS232 communications interface P1, P2, P3: M-Link protocol P1, P2: M-Link protocol; P3: ModBus RTU protocol Spanish HMI language English HMI language G 48 - 125 VDC auxiliary voltage H 110 - 250 VDC auxiliary voltage 0 0 Options (special models) A Revision level
14.12" x 7.95" x 3.46" 437 x 164 x 88 mm 6 kg 7 kg

See pages 15 - 18.
343

IAV Time Delay Voltage Relays

Single phase induction disk relays designed to respond to increasing and/or decreasing voltage. Applications
I I I
Features
I I I
AC Generators (including Hydro) Distribution feeder Time delay pickup or dropout
Frequency compensation (optional) Target seal-in unit (most units) Instantaneous units (optional)

I I I
Generator overvoltage Feeder under and overvoltage Ground detection
IFV Time Delay Voltage Relays

A single phase induction disk relay designed to respond to an increasing voltage. Applications
I I I
Features
I I I I
AC generators Ungrounded three-phase distribution system Time delay pickup or dropout Time delay overvoltage Ground detection on ungrounded systems and equipment neutrals Instantaneous overvoltage available

I I I
Frequency compensation (optional) Target seal-in unit on all contacts Instantaneous, hinged armature type units (optional) Drawout case
ICR Phase Sequence and Undervoltage

15
AC undervoltage, open or reverse phase protection. Applications

I I I
Features
I I
AC Machine undervoltage detection Reverse phase sequence detection Open phase detection on starting Undervoltage Phase sequence Open phase Time delay available
Target seal-in units available Drawout case

I I I I More information is available at: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
SFF Static Digital Frequency Relays

Static relay for high speed detection of underfrequency or overfrequency conditions. Applications
I I
Features
I I I I
Load shedding frequency schemes Extremely accurate frequency detection
Easy setpoint setup Ac or Dc control power Drawout case Up to 4 frequency setpoints

I I
Under and overfrequency with undervoltage cutoff Load shedding and restoration
344
CFVB Voltage-Balance Relay

Voltage-balance relay. Application
I
Features
I I
VT fuse failure detection
Mechanical targets Drawout case

I
Voltage balance
NBV Voltage Unbalance Relays

High speed, sensitive, three phase voltage-unbalance relays. Applications
I I
Feature
I
Motor bus Detection of upstream blown fuse
Drawout case

I
3 phase voltage unbalance

15
NGV Voltage Relays

High speed relays designed for calibration on increasing and/or decreasing voltage. Applications
I I I I

I I I
Battery monitor Emergency throwover control equipment Ground fault on ungrounded systems Telephone or telemetering services
Instantaneous Dc undervoltage Time delay Dc undervoltage available Ground and phase fault detection

See pages 15 - 18.
345
DIFFERENTIAL AND TIMING RELAYS

BDD
High speed phase and ground protection of 2- and 3-winding power transformers and autotransformers.
BDD relays are for the protection of transformers rated 2000 kVA and above and for transformers with windings rated 15 kV or above.
CFD
High speed relay for differential protection of AC generators, synchronous condensers and motors.
Type CFD high-speed, product-restraint relays are designed to provide percentage-differential relaying protection for the larger and more important machines.
PVD
High speed differential protection for busses and feeders.
The PVD relay is a single-phase, high speed, high-impedance, voltage-operated relay designed to provide protection in bus differential schemes.
GDC
Detection of restricted ground faults in transformers and rotating synchronous and asynchronous machines
The GDC relays are current detecting relays, this detection being actually made by means of voltage applied to a high impedance unit.
IJD
Percentage-differential relay
For the protection of AC rotating machinery and power transformers.
SAM
Static timing relays for general purpose timing applications.
The SAM series of relays provide highly accurate and repeatable timing functions that produce a contact closure after a selected time delay has expired.
SBD
High speed differential protection of busses and feeders and shunt reactors.
SBD is a single-phase, high-speed differential relay. It is specifically designed to provide bus differential protection, but may also be used for differential protection of shunt reactors.
SECTION 16: DIFFERENTIAL AND TIMING RELAYS BDD .........................................347 CFD..........................................349 PVD .........................................351 GDC .........................................353 IJD ...........................................354 SAM ........................................354 SBD .........................................354
346
High speed phase and ground protection of 2- and 3-winding power transformers and autotransformers.
BDD
Applications
I I I I I I
Percentage Differential with Harmonic Restraint
Power and autotransformer protection Current differential single phase

High speed percentage differential Phase and ground fault detection Current restraint circuits available Percent differential slope selection
Features
I I I I I I
DESCRIPTION
BDD relays are for the protection of transformers rated 2000 kVA and above and for transformers with windings rated 15 kV or above. However, the importance of the transformer to the system, not its size alone, should be the basis for the decision on this quality of protection.
AVAILABILITY
Six different forms of the Type BDD relay are available. Each relay is a single-phase unit with one differential circuit. Three relays are required for three-phase protection. The six different forms are provided with two, three, four, five, six or seven through-current restraint circuits for the protection of power transformers with two or more windings or circuits. The Types BDD15B, -16B, -17B, -18B, -19B and -20B with two, three, four, five, six and seven throughcurrent restraint circuits, respectively, also have provision for accommodating one additional circuit connection to the transformer without a throughcurrent restraint in the relay. This application can safely be made only when the additional circuit has no in-feed or is at best a very weak source and needs no throughcurrent restraint.
No auxiliary CTs are required Ratio matching taps Harmonic restraint prevents incorrect tripping upon transformer energization Self-contained target indicator Inherently selective Drawout case
FEATURES
Harmonic-current Restraint prevents incorrect tripping on magnetizing inrush currents and no auxiliary desensitizing equipment is required. No Auxiliary Current Transformers are needed for normal applications since the relay is provided with tapped internally mounted auxiliary transformer. The low burden of this relay minimizes current transformer error. Current transformer ratios should be selected carefully to obtain best protection. Refer to instructions. Minimum Pickup is proportional to the current tap in use and at zero restraint is approximately 30 per cent of tap value. Targets The hinged armature instantaneous unit has a self-contained target indicator INST. The main operating unit auxiliary includes an indicating target thus giving each phase relay two targets.
16
APPLICATIONS
The Type BDD differential relays should be used for all applications where high-speed operation and system stability are important. These relays have a percentage slope operating characteristic which prevents operation unless the differential current is greater than a certain percentage of the through current. A tap plug on the front of the relay provides slope percentages of 15, 25, or 40 which is usually adequate even for in-phase tap changing under load. Current transformer errors should not exceed 20 percent at 8 times tap value.
GE Power Management
347
BDD Percentage Differential Relay

CONTACTS
Type BDD15B relay is provided with two sets of open contacts and the Types BDD16B, -17B, -18B, -19B and 20B are provided with one set of open contacts. The current-closing rating of the contacts is 30 A for voltages not exceeding 250 V. If more than one circuit breaker per set of contacts is to be tripped, or if the tripping current exceeds 30 A, an auxiliary relay must be used with the Type BDD relay. After tripping occurs, it is necessary that the tripping circuit of these relays be opened by an auxiliary switch on the circuit breaker or by other automatic means. A hand-reset relay is recommended and normally used.
BURDENS
NOTE: Burdens and minimum pickup values are substantially independent of the percent slope settings and are approximately 100 percent power factor. Figures given are burdens imposed on each current transformer at 5.0 A. Tap Setting (A)
2.9 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 8.7
Relay
Zero Restraint Pickup (A)

0.87 0.96 1.05 1.14 1.26 1.38 1.50 2.61
Operating Circuit 60 Hz Relays Burden VA

3.2 2.7 2.4 2.0 1.9 1.6 1.5 0.7
Restraint Circuit 60 Hz Relays Burden VA

1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.5
Imped Ohms
0.128 0.108 0.096 0.080 0.076 0.064 0.060 0.028
Imped Ohms
0.052 0.048 0.044 0.040 0.036 0.032 0.028 0.020
BDD 15B 16B 17B 18B l 9B 20B
}{
(+) 1 87-1 Aux 87-1 Aux 2 250 VDC 86 86 10 (-)
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig. 1. Typical elementary diagram for Model No. 12BDD16B11 relays for four-circuit transformer protection with three restraints (0264B0499-1)
1 2 3 1 2 3 DC trip bus
52-1 H2
52-2 87-1 DCT
5 Phase 2 Phase 3 same as same as phase 1 phase 1 87-1 Moveable TCT 1 2 3 lead Winding 6 4 3 7
87-2 87-3 87-1 I Similar to phase 1
86
86
86
86
87-1 DHR 87-1 DHR
52-1 a
52-2 a
52-3 a
52-4 a
H3 Y2
Y3 X2 52-4 52-3 Weakest source, no restraint provided by this line 3
125 VDC
52-1 TC
52-2 TC
52-3 TC
52-4 TC
X1
X3
a - Aux switch, open when breaker is open TC - Trip coil DCT - Differential current transformer TCT - Through current transformer I - Instantaneous overcurrent unit DHR - Differential unit with harmonic restraint 86 - Type HEA hand-reset relay 52 - Power circuit breaker 87 - Type BDD differential relay
Burden of operating coil is zero under normal conditions. Burden of 50 Hz relay is the same or slightly lower. It should be recognized that pickup current flows not only through the differential current transformer but also through one of the primary windings of the through current transformer producing some restraint. However, compared to the operating energy, this quantity of restraint is so small that it may be assumed to be zero.
16
SELECTION GUIDE
Single-phase (3 Relays Required for 3-phase Protection); RATINGS Single-phase 5 A 1.5 A minimum pick-up 15/25/40 percent slope. Ratings Amps Number of Contacts DC Control Volts 125/250 148/125 Model Number
BDD15B16A BDD15B17A BDD16B16A BDD16B18A BDD17B3A -----BDD18B5A BDD18B6A BDD19B2A -----BDD15B13A BDD15B14A BDD16B13A BDD16B14A -------------------------------
Frequency (Hz) FOR TRANSFORMER PROTECTION REQUIRING 2 RESTRAINTS

5 60 50 60 50 60 50 60 50 60 60 2 N.O. BDD15B11A BDD15B12A BDD16B11A BDD16B12A BDD17B1A BDD17B2A BDD18B3A BDD18B1A BDD19B1A BDD20B1A
24/48
Case Size Net
Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Ship
M1
22 (10)
34 (15.4)
FOR TRANSFORMER PROTECTION REQUIRING 3 RESTRAINTS

5 1 N.O. M1 24 (10.9) 36 (16.3)

5 1 N.O. L2 26 (11.8) 39 (17.7)

5 1 N.O. L2 28 (12.7) 42 (19)

5 5
1 N.O. 1 N.O.
L2 L2
28 (12.7) 28 (12.7)
42 (19) 42 (19)

Minimum pickup is 1.5 A with tap plugs in the 5 A and the 25 percent slope positions.
348
Differential and Timing Relays
High speed relay for differential protection of Ac generators, frequency converters, synchronous condensers and motors.
CFD
High Speed Differential Relay
Applications
I I
Generators, 2000 kVA and above Motors and synchronous condensers, 3000 hp (or kVA) and above

I
High speed percent differential protection
Features
I I I
Variable percentage slope operating characteristic Product restraint principle Drawout case
APPLICATIONS
Type CFD22B high-speed, productrestraint relays are designed to provide percentage-differential relaying protection for the larger and more important machines. They are recommended for generators rated 2000 kVA and above and for motors and synchronous condensers rated 3000 hp (or kVA) and above. current transformer secondary windings are unused or do not exist, currents below 84 A are safe without limiters. Where taps are used on the CT secondaries, limiters are not necessary if the current is less than: 84 x [(Active Turns)2 (Total Turns)2]. Installations not shown to be safe by the approximate rule given above should be referred to the General Office with data on the fault currents, CT ratios, and CT excitation characteristics, to determine whether limiters are actually needed. The field switch should be tripped automatically at the same time the machine is disconnected from the system. If the neutral of a machine is grounded directly, or through a low impedance, it is advisable to provide a neutral breaker which can be tripped to open the ground-return circuit of the fault current as quickly as possible. Current transformers must be accurate within 2 percent to twice normal current. Above twice normal current accuracy is not so important.
16
Type CFD Relays WILL NOT Function for:

1. Turn-to-turn faults in the machine windings. 2. Open circuits in the machine windings. 3. High currents caused by external overloads or short-circuits. 4. Line power surges. 5. Ground between windings and machine frame, if system is ungrounded, unless a second ground occurs in another phase of the system.
APPLICATION FACTORS
Where the total R.M.S. symmetrical current that would flow in a differential relay coil is excessive, high voltage may result with sensitive differential relays, and a Thyrite limiter may be required across each phase of the current transformer secondaries. Where taps on the
GE Power Management
349
CFD High Speed Differential Relay

APPLICATION FACTORS
Type CFD Relays WILL Function for:
1. Internal machine faults, except turnto-turn. 2. Faults in primary cables within the protected differential zone. 3. Ground short-circuits in any part of the machine winding, except a portion very close to the neutral, provided there is no neutral impedance to limit ground current to a value below the relay pickup calibration.
SELECTION GUIDE
Contacts Target and Normally Holding Cont Rating Frequency Min. P.U. Open Per Coil in Amps in Hz Amp Unit (A) SINGLE-PHASE (3 REQUIRED) Ratings
60 5 50 0.2 2 1 0.2 1 0.2 1 0.2 1 0.2
Model No.
Case Size
Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg)
Net
Ship
CFD22B1A B2A B3A B4A CFD22A1A CFD22A2A CFD22A3A CFD22A4A
S1
12 (5.5)
18 (8.1)
THREE-PHASE
60 5 50 0.2 2 L2 35 (15.9) 45 (20.4)
Product-restraint Principle
The CFD relays function on the productrestraint principle, which gives very little, or zero, restraining torque on single-endfeed internal faults, and an operating torque from the restraint coils on internal faults, with an external source of power. If a current flows from the neutral side into the generator and another current flows from the generator to the bus, then the restraining coils produce a restraining torque that is proportional to the product of these two currents and the cosine of the angle between them. These are the conditions that will exist during normal operation, during external faults, and during internal faults when the generator continues to supply some current to the bus. Conversely, if a current flows from the neutral side into the generator and another current flows from the bus into the generator, then the restraining coils produce an operating torque that is proportional to the product of these two currents and the cosine of the angle between them. These are the conditions that will exist during an internal fault when part of the fault current comes from the bus. Percentage Slope: The relay has a slope which increases very rapidly above approximately twice normal current. This feature eliminates the necessity for close matching of the current transformers. Under normal conditions the two secondary currents should be equal but they may differ due to current transformer errors. The difference or error current will flow in the operating coil. For currents up to full load of the machine the error current will be less than the 10 percent difference current required to operate the relay. With an external fault the current in the current transformers can be high and the error current may be well over 10 percent. For this reason, the slope of the relay characteristic is made to increase as the current increases.
-------------
VOLTAGE LIMITER FOR LINE CURRENT TRANSFORMER SECONDARY SINGLE PHASE

---6118766G3 1 (0.45) 2 (0.91)
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
87 - Differential relay, Type CFD 86 - Hand-reset auxiliary relay 52 - Power circuit breaker 41 - Field circuit breaker HC - Holding coil T - Target coil TC - Trip coil 52 6 7 87 7 87 7 87
5 41 GENERATOR
5 (+) 1 87 HC 2
5 DC TRIP BUS 87 TO CONTACTS T FOR OTHER PHASES 87 87 3 86 86 86
86 52 a 52 TC
86 41 a 41 TC
(-)
16
(DWG. K.6507903-3)
BURDENS
The burdens of the coils in one phase (one induction unit) at 60 Hertz are given below: Continuous Rating (A)
5 0.5
The operating circuit burden as a function of differential current is given in the table below. The burden is imposed on one current transformer. Current (A)
0.2 0.6 2.0 4.0 5.0
Burden on one CT PF
0.57 0.81
Circuit
Restraining Operating
VA
0.9 14.4
Multiple of Min. Pickup Current

1 3 10 20 25
Burden on One CT Impedance ()

58 29 11 6.3 5.4
Calculated unsaturated values (VA at 0.5 A)

See pages 15 - 18.
350
High speed differential protection for busses and feeders for use with standard bushing-type current transformers.
PVD
Differential Voltage Relay
Applications
I I I
Bus differential high z voltage Shunt reactor differential protection Transformer high z ground differential

I I I
High-speed, high z voltage sensing High seismic instantaneous O/C unit Breaker failure protection (with suitable timing relay)
Features
I I I
Replacement for earlier PVD models Thyrite stacks limit potential voltage across relay Drawout case construction
16
INTRODUCTION
The Type PVD21 relay is a singlephase, high-speed, high-impedance, voltage-operated relay designed to provide protection in bus differential schemes. The Type PVD21 utilizes the same operating principle (high impedance voltage) as the earlier PVD models, but provides faster operating speeds and higher seismic capabilities. Typical operating speed is 20 ms at 4X pickup (See Fig. 1). The Type PVD21 is mechanically interchangeable with the earlier PVD21 models, and provides additional output contacts as shown in Figs. 2 and 3.
DESCRIPTION
The PVD21 relay is available in four models. All models include a highspeed voltage sensing unit (87L) that operates from the voltage provided by the differentially connected CTs during an internal fault. In addition, a high seismic instantaneous overcurrent unit (87H) is included in the PVD21B and 21D models The overcurrent unit 87H, which has an electrically separate output contact, may be used to supplement the voltage unit 87L, and/or to implement breaker failure protection when used with a suitable timing relay and other auxiliary devices. The PVD21A and 21B models use a single Thyrite stack to limit the magnitude of the voltage developed across the relay. For applications where high internal fault currents can be encountered, the PVD21C and 21D models are available. These relays include two Thyrite stacks, and offer the same basic protection, but with a slight decrease in sensitivity. See the PVD21 instruction book for proper selection and application for the PVD21C and 21D models.
GE Power Management
351
PVD Differential Voltage Relay

SELECTION GUIDE
Single-phase (3 Required)
Continuous Rating (V) Frequency (Hz)
60 50 60 50 60 50 60 50 60
Voltage Unit (87L) Min Max
Current Unit (87H) Min Max

----2A 2A ----2A 2A 4A ----50A 50A ----50A 50A 100A
Thyrite Stacks
Model Number
PVD21A1A A2A PVD21B1A B2A PVD21C1A C2A PVD21D1A D2A PVD21D3A
Case Size
150
75V
500V
} }
M1
20(9)
27( 1 2.2)
NOTE: All PVD relays include a 0.2/2.0 A T. & SI Unit used in conjunction with the 87L Unit.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

The Type PVD21 relays can be applied for bus protection in most cases where CTs having negligible leakage reactance are used. This generally includes any kind of current transformer with a toroidal core if the windings (on the taps used) are completely distributed about the core. It is preferable that all the CTs in the bus differential circuit have the same ratio. When adding to an existing bus, at least one CT set in the new breaker should be ordered with the same ratio as the bus differential CTs in the existing breakers. If the differential circuit unavoidably includes different ratio CTs, application of the PVD21 may still be possible, but special attention must be given to protection against overvoltage conditions during internal faults. Refer applications involving different ratio CTs to the local General Electric Company sales office.
RATINGS
The voltage unit 87L has a continuous rating of 150 V. The current unit 87H is a Hi-G, high seismic instantaneous unit with the following ratings for the coil: 87H UNIT (2-50 A RANGE) Link Position
Low High
Range (A)
2-10 10-50

3.7 7.5
One Sec Rating (A)

130
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig. 2. Simplified internal connection diagram for PVD21A and PVD21C
87L
87L = Voltage-operated unit S.I. = Seal-in unit * = Short finger Used with PVD21C S.I. Input to 87L circuitry 87L
S.I.
16
*
1 2
The contacts of the 87L unit have a current closing rating of 30 A for voltages not exceeding 250 V. The current carrying rating is limited by the seal-in unit rating (see below). The target and seal-in unit is a Hi-G, high seismic unit, dual rated with 0.2 and 2.0 A (DC) taps, with the following ratings: Description
DC resistance (Ohms) Minimum operating (A) Carry continuous (A) Carry 30 A for (sec) Carry 10 A for (sec)
*
3
Tap Setting
0.2 A 8.0 0.2 0.3 0.03 0.25 2.0 A 0.24 2.0 3 4 30
*
5 6 Shorting bar 7
Fig. 3. Simplified internal connection diagram for PVD21B and PVD21D
Pickup time in milliseconds
Used with PVD21D 87L 87H S.I. S.I.
87L = Voltage-operated unit 87H = Overcurrent unit S.I. = Seal-in unit * = Short finger Input to 87L circuitry
Fig. 1. Typical operating times of the PVD relay87L unit

30 20 10 0 0
87L
87H
2 3 4 5 Multilples of pickup setting
*
1 2
*
3
*
5 4 6 Shorting bar 7
*
9 8

10
352
Detection of restricted ground faults in transformers and rotating synchronous and asynchronous machines
GDC
Differential Detecting Relay
Applications
I I
Transformer circulating current protection circuits High impedance differential protection

I
Instantaneous overcurrent
Features
I I I
Mechanical target and seal-in unit Single- and three-pole models available Drawout case
DESCRIPTION
The relays type GDC are current differential detecting relays, this detection being actually made by means of voltage applied to a high impedance unit. These relays are provided with measuring elements and are used mainly for the detection of restricted ground faults in transformers and rotating synchronous and asynchronous machines. The measuring units are static, the only moving units are the detecting relay and the seal-in unit, both of our standard hinged armature type. To make sure protection devices perform without problems, it is common practice to use voltageoperated high impedance relays with a setting slightly higher than the value which would result in the current transformers in the case of maximum external fault currents. These relays are used together with an external stabilizing resistor, and are designed for those applications where a high sensitivity but also a high stability are required, that means the ability to discriminate if the fault has been produced in the internal zone of the device to be protected. The internal impedance of the relay and the series stabilizing resistor are low enough so that the induced voltages do not get over 2 kV in maximum faults conditions. In some cases, voltage dependent limiting resistors (VDR) varistors will have to be used to keep within the limits of the voltage values. The relays type GDC 52A are single-pole, and type GDC 52D are three pole.
Stabilizing resistor
Externally connected to the relay but forming a single block with it, there are some resistors provided together with the relay. These resistors can be adjusted without steps, continuously, in all their value range and their thermal rating is much more than necessary to allow for enough margin. Resistor value is 50 for In = 5 A relays and 200 for In = 1 A relays. Resistors with values different to these standard values are also available.
16
APPLICATIONS
This relay is applied in circulating current protection circuits, where heavy internal faults may cause great unbalances that produce current transformer saturation. Because of the above mentioned, and due to differences in the magnetizing curves of the current transformer, a large unbalance current is produced.

See pages 15 - 18.
GE Power Management
353
Voltage and Frequency Relays IJD Percentage-Differential Relay

For the protection of AC rotating machinery and power transformers. Applications
I I
Features
I I I I I
AC rotating machines (IJD52) Power transformers (IJD53)

I
Fixed slope percentage-differential

Single- and three-phase units available Various percentage slopes available Electrically operated target seal-in unit Restraint current matching taps (IJD53) Drawout case
SAM Static Timing Relay

Static timing relays for general purpose timing applications. Applications
I I
Features
I I I I I I I
Accurate and repeatable timing functions Distance relay timing Accurate repeatable timing for contact closure control

I
High reliability solid-state components Single or dual timing units available Timing range of 0.10 to 9.99 sec Various output contact arrangements available Front panel settings adjustment Flush mounting Drawout case construction
SBD Differential Voltage Relay

16
For high speed differential protection of busses and feeders and shunt reactors. Applications
I I I I
Bus and feeder differential protection Shunt reactor differential protection
Breaker failure initiation when used with a suitable timing relay High impedance voltage measurement with overcurrent supervision

I I
Sensitive, high-speed differential protection Phase and ground fault detection (requires 3 relays)

See pages 15 - 18.
354
DIRECTIONAL RELAYS
TCCV
Directional overcurrent relays for ground fault protection in ungrounded systems.
TCCV relays perform a directional protection against ground faults in ungrounded systems. These are solid state modular relays supplied in 1/3 of a 19" rack case.
TCW
Directional power reversal relay for preventing motoring in AC generators.
The TCW series are fixed time directional single-phase power relays used to avoid motoring of alternating current generators. Two polarized models are available, phase to ground and phase to phase.
IBC
Directional overcurrent protection of feeders and transmission lines.
IBC directional overcurrent relays are employed primarily for the protection of feeders and transmission lines in applications where single-phase relays are desired or required.
JBC/JBCG
Directional overcurrent protection of feeders and transmission lines.
JBC and JBCG relays consist of three units, an instantaneous power-directional unit of the induction-cup type, a time overcurrent unit of the induction-disk type, and an instantaneous-overcurrent unit of the induction-cup type.
ICW
Power directional protection of lines, feeders, and generators
Power directional protection of lines, feeders and transmission lines.
SECTION 17: DIRECTIONAL RELAYS TCCV .......................................357 TCW ........................................359 IBC ...........................................361 JBC/JBCG...............................361 ICW..........................................361
355
356
Directional overcurrent relays for ground fault protection in ungrounded systems.
TCCV
Directional Overcurrent Relay
Application
I
Three phase ungrounded systems

I I
Ground sensitive Directional overcurrent
Features
I I I I
Front panel settings LED trip indicator 1/3 standard 19", 4 unit, rack case High sensitivity (5 mA)
DESCRIPTION
The relays type TCCV perform a directional protection against ground faults in ungrounded systems. These are solid state modular relays supplied in 1/3 of a 19" rack case. Its negligible over-travel, fast reset (<75 ms.), high trip/reset ratio (<95%) characteristics, together with an adjustable time delay (0 to 3 sec), high response time (minimum of 21 ms) and the 32 selectable calibrated taps, provide the right requirements for a perfect coordination, making fast reclosings without loss of selectivity available.
Overcurrent Unit
In the frontal nameplate of the relay there is a group of 5 microswitches used for the selection of the current taps, according to the following formulas: IL = 1.2 [5 +( )] mA IH = 4.5 [5 + ( )] mA
APPLICATION
These relays have a very wide application field in ungrounded systems protection. They provide a selective protection due to the incorporation of a directional unit. The election of values which determine the operation curve characteristic for the overcurrent unit is made from the relay frontal nameplate and depends on the characteristics or needs of the system in which the relay is going to be applied. The possibility of delaying the trip up to a maximum of 3 sec is included, being such election made from the front of the relay .
OPERATION
The relay will trip whenever the overcurrent and directional units issue a trip permission simultaneously, being the first trip time delayed (definite time from 0 to 3 sec) and the next instantaneous during the associated reclosing cycle, minimizing in this way the damages caused by a close over fault. The relay continues operating in instantaneous trip mode for 10 sec, after the first time delayed trip. After these 10 sec the relay automatically goes back to the time delay mode.
The minimum current IL can take 32 values from 6 to 80.4 mA. These values, together with VH = 45 V and VL = 2 V determine the operation characteristic curve, so that it will give trip permission when the voltage and the current fall into the trip region. The relay has the possibility of delaying the first trip. The setting is made though a block of 4 microswitches and a scale switch placed in the front nameplate .
17
Directional Unit
120/3 V, 60 Hz
I rated polarization voltage 110/3 V, 50 Hz or I continuous thermal capacity: 3.6 Vn I characteristic angle: 90 I lagging V I directional stability: it doesnt operate for
currents in the opposite direction till 30 times the rated current with polarization voltages between 0 and 3 Vn
GE Power Management
357
TCCV Directional Overcurrent Relay

OPERATION
I directional sensibility: the minimum
polarization current is 2 mA and the minimum polarization voltage is 0 5V I operating time: 21 ms for I >7 IL and V >10 V and an angle of 90
POWER SUPPLY DC AUXILIARY CIRCUIT Power Consumption 125 V: Typical: Operated: Power Supply Voltage: Nominal Voltage: Operation Range: 75 mA 120 mA 48 or 125 VCC 39-57, 85-150 VCC (according to nominal voltage) OUTPUTS CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS The TCCV series relays include one telephone-type relay with 3 normally open contacts with the following characteristics: Make and Carry Capacity 3.000 W resistive during 0.2 sec with 30 A and 300 VCC max Breaking Capacity 50 W resistive with 2 A and 300 VCC max Rated Capacity 5 A with 300 VCC max
Construction
I accuracy, reliability and low power

consumption I fixed rack cases; led indicator with trip memory and reset push-button I shock proof, non-flammable and fireresisting sealed plastic cover, which permits exterior reset of indicator I output unit of high seismic value
TYPE TESTS TYPE TESTS The TCCV type relays include type tests recommended by IEC255-5 standard, about Impulse Test And High Frequency Transients. INPUTS CURRENT CIRCUIT BURDENS Range (mA) 6-80.4 Frequency (Hz) 50 Minimum Operation Current (mA) 6
INPUTS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BURDENS Power: <0.05 VA
R 109
Max Burden (m) for Multiples of Minimum Operation Current Once 2 times Z 10 times Z 20 times Z X Z 11 110 110 110 110
Specifications subject to change without notice.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig. 1. External connections
A B C B 52 H1 X1 (+) H1 X1 A1 A4 Vpol N A5 A6 X1 N H1 X1 H1 C1 C2 loct N X1 C7 A7 B1 B2 C A
A4-A5: A6-A7 B1-B2 TRIPPING CONTACT AUXILIARY INPUTS
ORDERING
TCCV
TCCV
* 5DA * 00 * 00
0 1 1 2 A C
Directional overcurrent ground relay No test block Test block 50 Hz 110/3 VAC 60 Hz 120/3 VAC 48 VCC auxiliary voltage 125 VCC auxiliary voltage
H1
X1
B4 B5
H1
Example: TCCV modular relay without test blocks, 60 Hz, 125 VDC, control voltage Model TCCV 05DA200C00
17
TRIPPING DIRECTION
52 a
tccfig2.ai
(-)
OPTION
52 TC
A2

See pages 15 - 18.
358
Directional Relays
Directional power reversal relay for preventing motoring in AC generators.
TCW
Modular Power Reversal Relay
Applications
I I
Power directional protection Generator protection against motoring

I I I I
Directional power Fixed time single phase Instantaneous or time delay Phase to ground or phase to phase polarizing voltage
Features
I I I I I
Trip, auxiliary, power supply alarm Part of a modular system Independent 2" modules 1/8 standard 19" rack case available LED indicators and reset button
DESCRIPTION
The TCW Series are fixed time directional single-phase power relays used to avoid motoring of alternating current generators. Two polarized models are available, phase to ground and phase to phase. Only one relay is required in most three phase applications, since power flow is generally the same. The TCW is a solid state, modular relay with a DC-DC power supply, and is available in 1/8 standard rack size cases. phase angle and magnitude of the applied current and voltage. The relay operates when the magnitude of power, in a given direction, is greater than a pre-set value. The relays are appropriate for balanced three phase loads, and the type of relay selected depends on the value of voltage phase to phase or between phase to ground. The trip characteristic is shown in Fig. 1, for phase to ground models; for phase to phase models, the trip characteristic is shown in Fig. 2. TCW type relays protect excessive power flow from the small generating station to the larger system. The relay activates the interconnection breaker if the power supply exceeds a predetermined value for a fixed period of time.
CONSTRUCTION
I accurate and reliable with low power
consumption
I 1/8 of a standard rack mounted case I LED indicating lamps for pick-up, trip (with
manual reset), and presence of auxiliary voltage (Vaux). I shock and flame resistant, sealed plastic cover exterior indicator I high seismic rating I highly reliable components, manufactured specially treated to avoid premature failure
17
RESPONSE TIME
There are two response modes I instantaneous: 40 ms I time delay with two scales:
0.1/1 sec (in 100 ms steps) 1/10 sec (in 1 sec. steps)
APPLICATIONS
TCW relays are designed specifically for the control of the power flow in alternating current generator applications. Operation depends on the
The same relay can be used in either mode, or in both modes.
GE Power Management
359
TCW Modular Power Reversal

APPLICATIONS
Fig. 1. Tripping characteristic for phase to ground polarization
15
Fig. 2. Tripping characteristic for phase-phase polarization

10 VPOL PHASE TO PHASE
METERING ACCURACY Operating Value: Operating Time: 5% 5% or 30ms (whichever is greater)
TRIPPING ZONE
NON-TRIPPING ZONE
TRIPPING ZONE
NON-TRIPPING ZONE
40%
1%
40%
1%
VPOL PHASE TO GROUND
INPUTS BURDENS Less than 3 W at all voltages Current Circuit: In = 1 A Current 1A 2A In = 5 A Current 5A 10A Voltage Circuit: Vpol: Burden: POWER SUPPLY RATINGS Frequency: Effective Range: Operating Range: Current Range: In: Setting: Auxiliary Power Supply:
Burden 0.17 VA 0.68 VA Burden 2.30 VA 9.30 VA 110V 0.25 VA
10 tcw fig1.ai
10 tcw fig2.ai
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig. 3. External connections for phase to ground polarization
A B C (+)
C A
50/60 Hz 48-51/57-63 Hz 46-53/56-64 Hz 1 A/5 A 1-40% In in 1% steps 24-48 VDC/VAC (20%) 48-125 VDC/VAC (20%) 110-240 VDC/110-220 VAC (20%)
52
B3 B2 Vpol
GE Power Management
A10
A8 A7 B4 B5
TRIPPING CONTACT
TCW
Modular Power Reversal
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
TRIPPING AUXILIARY CONTACT
A1 A2 POWER DIRECTION (NO TRIP) A B C A9
Ipol
B11 B9 A11 (-) B10

720752A4.CDR
SYSTEM READY
OUTPUTS CONTACT CHARACTERISTICS The TCW offers two auxiliary relays with type C contacts First Contact: Tripping: Continuous: 3A Close: 30 A Break: 180 VA resistive at 125/250 VDC 60 VA inductive at 125/250 VDC Second Contact: Trip Signalling: Continuous: 3 A at 250 VDC max Close: 5 A for 30 sec at 250 VDC max Break: 25 W inductive at 250 VDC max ENVIRONMENTAL ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Temperature: Operation: Storage: Relative Humidity:
ORDERING
17
-10C to +55C -40C to +70C 95% without condensing
TCW
TCW
500DA * * * * 00 *
1 2 1 2 1 2 F G H C S
Digital power reversal relay 50 Hz 60 Hz Vn: phase to ground Vn: phase to phase In: 1 A In: 5 A 24-48 VDC/VAC auxiliary power supply 48-125 VDC/VAC auxiliary power supply 110-240 VDC/110-220 VAC auxiliary power supply Individual drawout housing As part of a MID drawout system
TYPE TESTS STANDARDS AND TYPE TESTS: Impulse Test: 5kV peak, 1.2/50 sec, 0.5 J, IEC 255-4 Interference Test: 2.5 kV longitudinal, 1 kV transversal, IEC 255-4, Class III Electrostatic Discharge: IEC 801-3, Class III Radio Interference: IEC 801-3, Class III Fast Transient: IEC 801-4, Class III INSULATION Between terminals and ground: 2000 VDC for one min at rated frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz) Between independent groups: 2000 VAC for one min at rated frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz) Between terminals of each of the output contacts: 1000 VAC for one min at rated frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz) PACKAGING PHYSICAL Weight: Net: Shipping: APPROVALS Compliant *Specifications subject to change without notice.
6 lbs (2.7 kg) 7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)
Example: TCW500DA122G00C TCW is directional power relay with nominal current In = 5 A, compound voltage polarized (phase to phase), and 50 Hz. Modular Industrial Protection System

See pages 15 - 18.
50 Hz Vn, Phase to Ground Vn, Phase to Phase

63 110
60 Hz
69 120
360
Directional Relays

Directional Relays
IBC Directional Overcurrent Relay

Directional overcurrent protection of feeders and transmission lines. Application
I
Features
I I I
Directional phase fault protection (IBC)

I
Time overcurrent
Mechanical targets 3 inverse time/current operating characteristics Drawout case
JBC/JBCG Phase and Ground Directional Overcurrent Relays

Directional overcurrent protection of feeders and transmission lines. Applications
I I
Features
I I I
Directional phase fault protection (JBC) Directional ground fault protection (JBCG)
Mechanical targets 3 inverse time/current characteristics Drawout case

I I I
Time overcurrent Instantaneous overcurrent Voltage-restrained phase overcurrent

17
ICW Power Directional Protection of Lines, Feeders, and Generators

Power directional protection of lines, feeders and transmission lines. Applications
I I
Features
I I
Power directional protection Generator protection against motoring
Mechanical target Drawout case

I I I
Timed directional power Overpower and underpower Reverse power anti-motoring
Directional Relays
361
GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

CEH
High speed detection of loss of excitation for generators.
CEH relays are used for the detection of the loss of excitation of synchronous generators, and to automatically remove the generator from service.
GGP
Three-phase protection of generators against running light as synchronous motors.
The usual application of the GGP relay is to prevent motoring of a turbine-driven generator. The real purpose is to protect the turbine not equipped with integral protective means if its steam supply is lost or reduced.
CEX
Angle impedance relays
Generator and transmission line, out-of-step tripping and blinder applications.
SGC
Static negative sequence time-overcurrent tripping for DC voltages.
The SGC relay is a static negative time overcurrent relay. It is intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible damage from unbalanced currents resulting from prolonged faults or unbalanced load conditions.
SECTION 18: GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS CEH .........................................363 GGP .........................................365 CEX .........................................366 SGC .........................................366
362
For high speed detection of loss of excitation for generators.
CEH
Loss of Excitation Relays
Application
I
Generators (all types)

I I I
Loss of excitation Impedance unit Second z unit with a timer available
Features
I I
High speed tripping Drawout case
APPLICATION
The type CEH relays are used for the detection of the loss of excitation of synchronous generators, and to automatically remove the generator from service. Loss of excitation can be damaging to the machine, and/or detrimental to the operation of the system. It is recommended that lossof-excitation protection be considered for all synchronous generators. Fig. 1 illustrates a unit type generator connected to a power system with an offset Mho distance relay at its terminals set as indicated on the R-X diagram. The relay is set with an offset equal to one half the direct axis transient reactance, and a diameter equal to the direct axis synchronous reactance of the generator. Typical impedance loci, as seen by the relay when the excitation is lost as a result of a short circuit across the field windings, are also shown in Fig. 1. Curve A represents loss of excitation from full load conditions. This locus terminates in a region near the negative X axis at a point located approximately at the average of the direct and quadrature axis sub-transient impedances of the generator. In the case of no load, or very light load prior to the loss of excitation, the impedance seen by the relay terminates in an area near the negative X axis as shown by point C. The impedance seen in this case is approximately equal to the average of the direct and quadrature synchronous impedances of the generator. Curve B applies for some moderate condition between full and no load. Thus, the characteristic of Fig. 1 will suffice to detect a loss of excitation from any initial loading. Since a characteristic with settings as illustrated in Fig. 1 is required to detect loss of excitation, it should be ascertained that such an application is secure against undesired operation on stable system swings resulting from system disturbances. Fig. 2 illustrates typical impedance loci as viewed by two offset Mho relays located at the generator terminals for different system conditions after a nearby fault is cleared. Two Mho characteristics are shown; the larger one with settings as shown in Fig. 1, and the smaller one set with a diameter equal to the impedance of 1.0 per unit on the machine base. Referring to Fig. 1, a loss of excitation will be detected by the Mho unit set with the larger characteristic regardless of the load on the generator, whereas the Mho unit set with the smaller characteristic will only detect the loss if the generator is operating with a moderate to heavy load. The dash curve A in Fig. 2 represents the case for conditions of a three-phase short circuit at F, the high side of the unit transformer, occurring when the machine is running at full load and unity power factor L a . The fault was cleared at the critical switching time, that is, the maximum switching time for which the machine is just stable. When the fault is cleared in nominal relay plus breaker times with the voltage regulator in service, the impedance jumps to point Sa and follows the path of the dash lines back to the region around La. This is a stable swing, and the impedance path does not enter either characteristic. The solid curve B illustrates an extreme case of a similar set of circumstances. In this case:
a. The machine was running under-excited prior to the fault Lb.
18
GE Power Management
363
CEH Loss of Excitation Relay

APPLICATION
Fig. 1 Typical impedance loci on loss of field excitation
A
1
Fig. 2. Typical impedance loci for swings resulting from system disturbances
System equivalent
R
G Relay location F 3 fault Infinite bus F Sb Sa La Lb R
Xd 2
X d Per unit 2
Relay System location equivalent (Xd + Xd ) 2

1
C G
(1.0d +
Xd )Per unit 2 B A
Infinite bus A - Short-circuited field at full load B - Short - circuited field at moderate load C - Short - circuited field at no load or open - circuited field at no load CEH fig1_b.ai
Xd )Per unit (Xd + 2

CEH fig2_b.ai F - Three phase fault location A - Locus of swing impedance for conditions of unity power factor load, and/or fast fault clearing, and/or voltage regulator in service (dashed lines) La - Unity power factor 1.0 per unit load impedance. Sa - Impedance immediately after fault is cleared. B - Locus of swing impedance for conditions of leading 0.95 power factor load, and fault clearing at critical switching time, and voltage regulator out of service. (solid lines) Lb - 0.95 Leading power factor unit load impedance. Sb - Impedance immediately after fault is cleared.
b. The fault was not cleared until the critical switching time for the machine in question. c. Low system impedance. d. The voltage regulator was out of service.
excitation; for example, for the conditions depicted in Fig. 2. This relay contains two independent Mho functions and a built-in timer that operates in conjunction with one of the Mho functions. The Mho function without the timer can be set short, as shown in Fig. 2, to provide high-speed tripping for a loss of excitation when the machine is carrying moderate to heavy loads. The second Mho function can be set larger as shown in Fig. 2, and through the built-in timer provide a delay in tripping so that the machine will ride through any stable swings that may occur. External connections for the CEH52A relay are shown in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3. External AC connections for Type CEH52A relay using wye connected PTs
Phase sequence 1-2-3 3 2 1 or 3-2-1 Breaker Transformer (in unit connection) Tripping direction of magnetizing kvar
While the resultant swing was stable and would eventually settle back to the area around Lb, the impedance locus entered the larger relay characteristic. Studies indicate that the duration of its stay in the characteristic is in the order of 0.2 to 0.4 sec. Thus, if the larger relay characteristic is employed with a time delay set for about 0.5 to 0.6 sec, undesired tripping will not take place. Thus, a Mho relay set as in Fig. 1 can detect a loss of excitation for all machine loadings, but it is susceptible to tripping during a stable swing if the conditions of Fig. 2 exist. If two Mho functions are used, and set with the diameters shown in Fig. 2, time delay can be incorporated with the larger set function, and incorrect tripping can be avoided. The smaller set function will provide high-speed tripping for a loss of excitation when the machine is carrying moderate to heavy loads. It should be recognized that a bonafide loss of excitation, when the machine is
lightly loaded, may be detected only by the Mho function set with the larger characteristic. This will result in a delayed trip which may have an adverse effect on the system. This contingency should be evaluated by the user. Two models of the CEH relay are available for use in loss of excitation detection schemes. The first model, designated the CEH51A, contains a single Mho function. It is designed primarily for use in those applications where the impedance loci will enter the characteristics due only to a loss of excitation; for example, for the conditions shown in Fig. 2. The second model, designated the CEH52A, Fig. 3, is designed specifically for use in those applications where the impedance loci can enter the required characteristic for other system conditions as well as a bonafide loss of
Fuse CEH separately from all other secondary burdens Pol 0 6 17 18 6 0 0 95 TR2 5 TR15 0 95 15 OM1
Rest. Pol 15 OM2
Positive direction of kW and magnetizing kvar
Rest. TR2 OM2 OM1 TR1 8 6 TR2 OM2 OM1 TR1 3 NOTE: 5 See drawing 0246A6950 TR2 OM2 OM1 TR1 DC connections 8 6 TR2 OM2 OM1 TR1 3 5 Gen

See pages 15 - 18.
18
SELECTION GUIDE
Auxiliary Unit Frequency Current Voltage Volt (Hz) (A) SINGLE PHASE 1 MHO UNIT
115 60 5 24/48 48/125 125/250 110/220 125/250
Rating
Characteristic Circle Diameter () Min Max Min
Offset () Max
T. & S.I. Rat. (A)
Time Delay (Sec)
Model Number
Case Size
Approx. Wt. in lbs. (kg) Net Ship
50
0.2/2.0
115
50
CEH51A6A A4A A1A CEH51A5A A3A CEH52A2D A1D A3D
M1
24 (10.9)
35 (15.9)
SINGLE PHASE 2 MHO UNITS, 1 STATIC TIMER

120 120
Phase
60 50
5 5
125/250 110/220
10 10
100 100
0 0
6 6
0.2/2.0 0.6/2.0 0.6/2.0
0.05-3.0 0.05-3.0
L2D L2D
34 (15.4) 34 (15.4)
45 (20.4) 45 (20.4)
to neutral secondary basis.
364
Generator Protection Relays
For three-phase protection of generators against running light as synchronous motors.
GGP
Power Directional Relay
Applications
I I
Turbine-driven generators Prevent turbine damage

I
Three-phase reverse power
Features
I I I I I
Suitable for unbalanced loads Up to 30 second delay included Electrically separate main and timing contacts Electrically operated target and seal-in unit Drawout case
APPLICATIONS
Turbine-driven Generators
The usual application of the GGP relay is to prevent motoring of a turbine-driven generator. The real purpose is to protect the turbine not equipped with integral protective means if its steam supply is lost or reduced. Under such a condition the generator will take power from the bus and run light as a synchronous motor, driving the turbine at normal speed. With no steam or insufficient steam present in the turbine, the blades may be damaged by overheating as developed by windage. Under normal operating conditions, such heat is dissipated into the steam. preferred instead of three singlephase relays, giving full power directional protection for all varying conditions. The GGP should be used wherever phase-balancer action, in the presence of unbalanced loads, may cause the failure of singlephase power relays to trip. component. Since the directional unit contacts are brought out to studs, they may also be used to energize an alarm.
Timing
The timing unit can be adjusted to operate in any time from 1.5 to 30 sec, at which time the contacts close, tripping the generator breaker. If conditions return to normal at any time during the timing cycle, the power-directional unit opens its contacts, thereby de-energizing the timing unit, which resets. Tripping cannot occur unless the power reversal lasts long enough for the timing unit to complete its full travel and close its contacts.
18
Sensitivity
If motoring occurs, resulting in a power reversal (see Selection Guide next page for the main unit current setting), the directional unit induction cylinder design of the relay will close contacts at once. These contacts energize the operating coil circuit of the timing unit, which starts to time out. This relay measures true watts, and is practically unaffected by the reactive
Unbalanced Systems
The GGP is a 3-phase relay that is suitable for unbalanced loads and is
GE Power Management
365
GGP Power Directional Relay

CONTACTS
Electrically separate main and timing contacts, both single-circuit normally open. A 0.2/2 A target seal-in is available with seal-in contacts connected across the timing (Type IAV) unit contacts. Standard contact ratings for the universal seal-in unit are applicable.
BURDENS
Model Terminals VA CURRENT CIRCUIT, 5 A, 60 Hz
GGP53C 3-4 5-6 7-8 2-12 13-14 15-16 22.0 11.0 11.0 20.3 21.4 21.4
W
6.4 3.2 3.2 7.8 10.7 10.7
PF
0.29 0.29 0.29 0.38 0.50 0.50

See pages 15 - 18.
POTENTIAL CIRCUIT, 120, 60 Hz

GGP53C
SELECTION GUIDE
THREE-PHASE, 5 A Frequency (Hz)
60 50
At
Volts
120 120
Target and Seal-in (A)

0.2/2.0
Main Unit Fixed Setting A V

120 0.010
Timing Unit Adjustment (Sec) Min

1.5
Model Number
GGP53C1A C3A
Max
30
Case Size
M2
Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Net

22 (10)
Ship
34 (15.4)
unit power factor.
CEX Angle Impedance Relays

Generator and transmission line, out-of-step tripping and blinder applications. Applications
I I I

I I
Line blinder applications (CEX57D or CEX57F) Line out-of step tripping (CEX57E/NAA19B) Generator out-of-step tripping (CEX57E/GSY51A)
Angle impedance in out-of-step tripping schemes Restrict tripping zone in transmission line schemes
Features
I I I
Auxiliary telephone type unit available High speed induction cup relay Drawout case
18
SGC Negative Sequence Overcurrent

Static negative sequence time-overcurrent tripping for DC voltages. Application
I
Features
I I I I I I I
Generator negative sequence heating protection

I
Negative sequence time overcurrent
K setting selection from K = 2 to 40 Reset function approximates machine cooling Remote I2 readout meter available Alarm function available Electrically operated target seal-in Alarm level LED available Drawout case
366
AUXILIARY RELAYS
HEA
High-speed multicontact relays to perform auxiliary functions on AC and DC circuits.
The HEA relays are applicable where it is desired that a number of operations be performed simultaneously from the operation of a single relay.
HAA
Current or voltage operated units for annunciation and target applications.
HAA relays are used when a target is required, or when alarm or similar functions are required. It is an interposting relay in conjunction with a transformer SP relay.
HFA
Multicontact auxiliary relays for AC and DC circuit applications.
HFA relays are designed for applications where a number of auxiliary functions must be performed simultaneously. They have six electrically separate contact circuits adaptable for either circuit opening or circuit closing applications.
HGA
Hinged armature auxiliary relays to perform auxiliary functions in AC and DC circuits.
The HGA auxiliary relays are designed to provide additional contacts, higher contact carrying and interrupting ratings, timing, interlocking, electrical separation, or other auxiliary functions.
HSA
Multi-contact hand reset relays to perform auxiliary functions on AC and DC circuits.
The HSA auxiliary relays are applicable where it is desired that a number of operations be performed simultaneously from the operation of a single relay.
HMA
Self resetting hinged armature auxiliary relay.
The HMA relay is a general purpose, hinged armature, self resetting relay. It is housed in a molded TEXTOLITE case for surface mounting, and can be supplied either front or back connected.
RDB86
High speed trip and lockout relays applicable where several tripping functions need to be performed by the same relay.
RDB86A units are high-speed trip and lockout relays that incorporate HLB lockout relays and HLG quick relays.
NGA
Telephone-type DC auxiliary relays with several contact arrangements and operating times.
The type NGA is the general designation for a family of telephone-type DC auxiliary relays mounted in a small molded case similar to Type HGA relays.
SECTION 19: AUXILIARY RELAYS HEA .........................................368 HAA .........................................373 HFA .........................................375 HGA.........................................379 HSA .........................................384 HMA ........................................387 RDB86 .....................................389 NGA ........................................391 NBT .........................................392 ESA .........................................393 Other Single Function Relays .....................394
NBT
Breaker trip circuit supervision relay for voltage level and electrical continuity.
ESA
Auxiliary relays.
ESA units are auxiliary relays used for contact manipulation.
367
High-speed multicontact relays to perform auxiliary functions on AC and DC circuits.
HEA
Multicontact Auxiliary Relays
Application
I
Contact multiplication

I
Trip and/or block close breaker control
Features
I I I
Electrically separate outputs available Various shaft lengths available Locks equipment out of service
APPLICATION
HEA high-speed multicontact auxiliary relays are applicable where it is desired that a number of operations be performed simultaneously from the operation of a single relay. Typical functions that can be performed by these relays are:
1. trip the main circuit breaker of a system 2. trip station auxiliary breakers 3. trip main or auxiliary field breakers 4. trip and lock out all breakers on a bus
CONSTRUCTION
The HEA multicontact, hand-reset auxiliary relays are built with many parts common to the well-known Type SB-1 control and transfer switches. The mechanical target on the escutcheon plate assembly indicates the position of the relay. The black target indicates the reset position and the orange target, the tripped position. To reset the relay after being tripped, the handle is turned clockwise as indicated by the arrow on the escutcheon plate. Since the HEA relay is basically similar to the SB-1 switch, it is available with a shaft long enough to allow it to be mounted on panels with a thickness of from 1/8 inch to 2 inches thick, in increments of 1/16 inch. Like the SB-1 switch, all HEA relays must be ordered for the specific panel thickness, otherwise the relay will be supplied with a shaft long enough to be mounted only on a 1/8 inch panel. EXAMPLE: HEA61A222 for 3/4 inch panel relay number would be HEA61A222X12 (3/4 inch = 12/16 = ________________ X12). EXAMPLE: HEA63F272 for 1 1/2 inch panel relay number would be HEA6313272X24 (11/2 inch = 24/16 = ________________ X24).
19
Perhaps the most important use of the HEA relay is in conjunction with differential relays which protect transformers, rotating apparatus, buses, etc.
368
GE Power Management
HEA Multicontact Auxiliary Relays

HEA61, HEA62, AND HEA63
Operation
The operating shaft is held in the reset position by a positive roller latch which is especially constructed to resist shock arid vibration. It is released through the action of the operating coil, in attracting a hinged element. All HEA relays are made so that they should not normally be tripped manually, although it is possible by removing the rear cover and releasing the hinged-armature element. To select the proper model number of the special relay, select the number of the standard relay desired (example: HEA61C230X2). If a right angle drive upward is desired, add the letters Right-angle Up to the standard model number. Hence, the model number would be HEA61CRU230X2 (for 1/8 inch panel).
HEA61 HAND RESET

Application
The HEA61 relay is a hand-reset high speed auxiliary relay. When it is used in conjunction with differential relays which are protecting transformers, rotating machines, buses, etc., it is preferred that the auxiliary relay be hand reset to prevent accidental reclosing of breakers when an internal fault has caused the differential relay to operate.
Contact Ratings
The current-closing rating of the contacts is 50 A for voltages not exceeding 600 V. The contacts have a current-carrying capacity of 20 A continuously or 50 A for one minute. The interrupting ability of the contacts varies with the inductance of the circuit. The values (in amperes) given in Table 1, for DC inductive circuits, are based on the average trip coil.
Special Mounting
Type HEA61A, 61B, 61C, 62C, 63C and 63G relays can be supplied with a bevel-gear drive which allows the relay to be mounted in locations where normally the depth is not sufficient. The relays can be mounted like the standard but the bevel-gear drive changes the direction by 90 of that portion of the relay that is behind the panel. The bevel-gear drive is available to change the direction up, down, left, or right.
Table 1. Contact interrupting ratings
Operation
The HEA61 relay is available with 6, 10, or 16 main electrically separate contacts. In addition, there are 2 normally closed contacts that are wired for opening the operating coil circuit. See Figure 2.
Fig. 2. Typical HEA61B relay contact arrangement
Burdens
The burdens for the Type HEA relays are given in Table 2.
HANDLE END OF SWITCH BOTTOM CONNS. TOP CONNS. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1C 3C 5C 7C 9C 2C 4C 6C 8C 10C 2 4 6 8 10 12
Circuit Volts
24 DC 48 DC 125 DC 250 DC 600 DC 115 AC 230 AC 460 AC 550 AC
Amps Noninductive Circuits Number of Contacts 1 2 in Series 4 in Series

6.0 5.0 2.5 0.75 0.25 40.0 25.0 12.0 6.0 30.0 25.0 11.0 2.0 0.45 50.0 50.0 25.0 12.0 ---40.0 25.0 8.0 1.35 -------------
Amps Inductive Circuit Number of Contacts 1 2 in Series 4 in Series

4.0 3.0 2.0 0.7 0.15 24.0 12.0 5.0 4.0 20.0 15.0 6.25 1.75 0.35 50.0 25.0 12.0 10.0 30.0 25.0 9.5 6.5 1.25 ---40.0 20.0 15.0
Table 2. Burden data of trip coil
Intermittent Rating Volts

24 48 125 250 115 230 460
AC Coil Coil Resis. Current Amps Operating Frequency Ohms at 25C at (Rated Range Volts Volts)
DC DC DC DC 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 1.2 4.5 23 103 ---------------------25 14 7 14-30 28-60 70-140 140-280 95-125 190-250 380-500
Rating of Protective Relay Target Coil Amps Universal Separate Target Target and Seal-in Seal-in
2.0 2.0 0.2 0.2 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.2 ----------
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS NOTE - CONTACTS 11 & 12 SHOWN IN RESET POSITION.
19
The time required to trip the relay, from the instant of energization of the coil to the closing of the contacts, is approximately 15 ms (1 cycle on 60 Hz basis) slightly less for opening of the contacts. See Figure 3.
Auxiliary Relays
369

HEA61 HAND RESET
Fig. 3. Typical time-voltage characteristics of Type HEA61 relay
Type HEA 61 relay Time to close Normally open Contacts at Various voltages 24 volt rating Rated voltage
The diode-resistor combination is mounted on a small board that is mechanically attached beneath the trip coil frame. Although in most cases this dioderesistor combination is unnecessary, it is offered for those unusual conditions where the user might feel it necessary. The HEA62 is available only in the 62A, 62B, and 62C DC series.
Fig. 5. Typical schematic of HEA63 relay

(+)125V DC 4 + HGA33 2 1 HGA33 (-) 3 RESET RESET 1 POSITION MECHANISM HEA ROTARY SOLENOID
30 28 26 24 Milliseconds 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 60 120 12 24 125 and 250 volt rating 48 volt rating
HANDLE END
HEA63 HAND AND ELECTRIC RESET

Application
The HEA63 relay is basically a standard HEA61 except it has a rotary solenoid which is used to electrically reset the relay and there are only certain contact sequences available (see Selection Guide). This relay is especially useful where the operator and the HEA63 relay are some distance apart.
Rating (Volts)
24 48 125 250
Rotary Solenoid Coil Current (Amps)

26.8 13.5 5.5 2.8
Fig. 6. Typical HEA63B contact arrangement
18 20 22 24 26 28 36 40 44 48 52 56 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 Volts DC
12 28
16 32
NOTE: When viewed from the handle end of the relay, the odd contacts are on the right-hand side and the even contacts are on the left-hand side starting at the handle end and proceeding to the rear of the relay. Normally, the open contacts are the first contacts (nearest the handle) on the relay, in the reset position.
HANDLE END OF SWITCH BOTTOM CONNS. TOP CONNS. 2C 2 4 6 8 10 12 13 HEA INTERNAL CONNECTIONS NOTE - CONTACTS 11 & 12 SHOWN IN RESET POSITION.
Operation
The operation of the relay may be understood by referring to Fig. 5. When electrical resetting is desired, a contact or switch is closed which completes the HGA33 relay (which is a part of the overall HEA63 relay and is supplied automatically with the relay) coil circuit through a contact of the HEA relay. This contact is closed in the trip position. Closure of the HGA33 contacts energizes the rotary solenoid which imparts enough rotational force to the HEA shaft through a coupling to cause the HEA to reset and latch. When the HEA resets, the contact which energized the HGA33 coil opens and de-energizes the HGA33 relay. This HGA is of the time delay drop out variety with approximately 0.25 sec drop out time. The time delay insures that the HEA has fully latched. The contacts of the HGA33 then interrupt the rotary solenoid operating current. The HGA33 contacts have a high interrupting rating which is required because the rotary solenoid current is of a relatively high inductive magnitude.
3 5 7 9 11 3C 5C 7C 9C 4C 6C 8C 10C
Example: HEA61B233 rated 125 VDC 3 NO (contact numbers 1, 2, and 3) 7 NC (contact numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)
HEA62 HAND RESET

The HEA62 relay is identical to the HEA61 with the exception that on the HEA62 there is a diode-resistor combination inserted across the coil circuit. See Fig. 4. This diode-resistor suppresses the surge sometimes caused by the interruption of the coil contacts on a DC circuit.
Fig. 4. Typical HEA62A relay contact arrangement
HANDLE END OF SWITCH BOTTON CONNS. TOP CONNS. 1 3 5 7 9 10 1C 3C 5C 2C 4C 6C 2 4 6 8 JUMPER
19
INTERNAL CONNECTIONS NOTE - CONTACTS 7 & 8 SHOWN IN RESET POSITION.
370
Auxiliary Relays

SELECTION GUIDE
HEA61 Hand Reset
Approx. Group Wt. Contact Option 24 48 125 220 250 115 V 230 V Contact Contact in lbs (kg) VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC 50/60 50/60 Numbers Numbers Net Ship Hz Hz N.O. N.C.
M 40 41 42 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 30 31 32 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 20 21 22 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 80 81 82 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 ---------------------------------------------290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 10 11 12 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 90 91 92 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 100 101 102 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 3-4 3 None None 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 None 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 None 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 None 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-16 None 4 3-4 1-6 2-6 3-6 4-6 5-6 6 None 1-10 2-10 3-10 4-10 5-10 6-10 7-10 8-10 9-10 10 None 1-14 2-14 3-14 4-14 5-14 6-14 7-14 8-14 9-14 10-14 11-14 12-14 13-14 14 None 1-16 2-16 3-16 4-16 5-16 6-16 7-16 8-16 9-16 10-16 11-16 12-16 13-16 14-16 15-16 16 None 3 5 (1.3) (2.2)
CHOOSING AN HEA
Contact Arrangement
1) Decide if a Hand Reset or both Hand and Electric Reset HEA is required. 2) For an Electric Reset HEA go to step 3. For a Hand Reset HEA go to step 4. 3) An HGA33 Auxiliary Relay will accompany the HEA. The HGA is available as front or back connected. 4) Choose the number of contacts required and their action (N.O. and N.C.) 5) Operating voltage of the HEA must be known.
4 6 (1.8) (2.7)

HEA61 * *** ** *
M A B
Contact option 2 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 6 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 10 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 14 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 16 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Right angle up handle Right angle down handle Panel thickness in inches
6 8 (2.7) (3.6)
V C XXX RU RD X
10 8 (3.6) (4.5)
19
8 10 (3.6) (4.5)
Auxiliary Relays
371

HEA63 * *** ** *
A B C D F G XXX RU X
Contact Option 5 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay front connected 9 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay front connected 15 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay front connected 5 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay back connected 9 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay back connected 15 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) with HGA33 aux. relay back connected Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Right angle up handle Panel thickness in inches

See pages 15 - 18.
SELECTION GUIDE
HEA63 Hand and Electric Reset
Contact Arrangement Reset (latched) Position Contact Contact Contact Option Numbers Numbers Norm. Norm. Open Closed
None 2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-6 3-6 4-6 5-6 6 None 3-10 4-10 5-10 6-10 7-10 8-10 9-10 10 None 9-16 10-16 11-16 12-16 13-16 14-16 15-16 16 None
Group With Front-connected Auxiliary (HGA33A) Contact Option 24 VDC 48 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 24 VDC
Group With Back-connected Auxiliary (HGA33B) 48 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC
Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg)
Net
Ship
5 CONTACT (PLUS 2 CONTACTS IN TRIP CIRCUIT AND 1 CONTACT IN RESET CIRCUIT)

241 242 243 244 245 246 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 331 332 333 334 335 336 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 221 222 223 224 225 226 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 211 212 213 214 215 216 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 241 242 243 244 245 246 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 331 332 333 334 335 336 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 221 222 223 224 225 226 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 211 212 213 214 215 216 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226
14 (6.3)
18 (8.2)
15 (6.8)
19 (8.6)
19
16 (7.2)
20 (9)
372
Auxiliary Relays
Current or voltage operated units for annunciation and target applications.
HAA
Auxiliary or Annunciator Relays
Applications
I I I
When a target is required When alarm or similar functions required Interposing relay in conjunction with transformer SP relay

I
Auxiliary contacts and targeting
Features
DESCRIPTION
Generally two specific forms of the HAA are available, a current operated unit and a voltage operated unit. Example: HAA15A4 is 0.2/2 A DC and the HAA15B5 is a 125 VDC unit. Also, two general case designs are available. The single units such as HAA 15 use a molded plastic case with glass window and all others the standard drawout case. The HAA relays contain a standard target unit which is a small hinged armature type relay with a U shaped magnet frame, a fixed pole piece, an armature which operates the normally open contacts and the target, and an operating coil. HAA coil circuits dropping the target and causing the associated unit contacts to relay the alarm to the remote annunciator. The HAA16B, HAA16C, and HAA19A relays are special high-speed DC voltage relays with a pickup of 1 cycle or less at rated voltage for use with transformer pressure relays for increased security. The connections of the HAA16B and HAA16C are shown in Fig. 2. Its coil is shorted by a normally closed contact of the transformer pressure relay to prevent the HAA relay from operating in case a voltage surge should flash over the normally closed contacts of the pressure relay.
I I I I
Current operated units available High speed DC voltage operated units available Drawout case available Molded case with 3 mounting options available
BURDENS
Since these are DC relays the burdens may be easily calculated. In the case of voltage operated relays the burden in W may be found by using the following expression:
2 PDC = V = Burden (W) Rt
APPLICATIONS
The HAA auxiliary relay may be used whenever a target is required. Also, each unit has at least one set of contacts available for alarm or other similar use. See Selection Guide and Fig. 1 on next page for contact arrangements. A typical application would be to obtain a local annunciation of an abnormal condition and to relay the alarm to a central annunciator. With this arrangement the abnormal condition would operate one of the
CONTACT RATINGS
The contacts will make and carry 30 A momentarily and will carry 6 A continuously. For resistance values, pickup values and the current carrying ability of all the current operated HAA relays, refer to the GE Power Management CD or home page. The appropriate data for the voltage-operated HAA relays may be found in the tables below.
V = voltage rating of relay Rt = total resistance (coil plus external resistance) For current operated relays use the following expression: PDC = I2Rt = Burden (W) I = Applied Current
19
GE Power Management
373
HAA Auxiliary or Annunciator Relays

APPLICATION
Fig. 2. Schematic for application of HAA16B or HAA16C relay with transformer fault pressure relay
(+) P 7 HAA 8 4 P 6 HAA 5 HEA WHEN USED 3 4 HAA
VOLTAGE UNITS
Model Number
- - - - - - - - - - - - HAA16B5 & C5 B4 & C4 B1 & C1 B2 & C2 B3 & C3 HAA19A2A A1A
Resistances
Contin. Maximum Coil Internal External DC Rating Pickup Dropout Resistance Resistance Resistance (VDC) (Ohms) (V) (VDC) (Ohms) (Ohms)
48 125 250 24 32 48 125 250 48 125 41 106 212 13 15 22 60 120 22 60 4.8 12.5 25.0 2.4 3.2 4.8 12.5 25.0 4.8 12.5 840 5600 5600 14 14 95 95 95 95 95 5600 75 100 350 350 350 350 1000 650 1650
(-) P - CONTACTS OF PRESSURE RELAY
Available on all HAA models except models HAA16 and HAA19 These resistors are supplied automatically with the relay and should not be
SELECTION GUIDE
# Units Case Per Case
15A 15A 15B 15B 15B 15E 15F 15H 15H 15H 16B 16B 16B 16B 16B 16C 16C 16C 16C 16C 19A 19A 14B 14B 14B 14C 12A 12B 12B 12B 11A 11A 11B 11B 11B 18A 13A 13B 13B 13B 13D 13E
ordered separately
Fig. 1. Contact configurations
Current Contact Approx. Wt. Group VDC DC Config- in lbs (kg) (A) uration Net Ship
4 5 6 5 4 1 1 1 2 3 5* 4* 1* 2* 3* 5* 4* 1* 2* 3* 2A 1A 3A 2A 1A 1A 4A 2A 1A 3A 1A 2A 3A 2A 1A 1A 1A 3A 1A 2A 1A 1A 48 125 250 125 48 125 250 24 32 48 125 250 24 32 48 125 250 48 125 48 125 250 48 125 250 48 125 250 125 48 125 250 250 0.2/2.0 0.6/2.0 0.2/2.0 0.2/2.0 0.2/2.0 0.2/2.0 0.6/2.0 0.2/2.0 1.0
Figure 1E
2 (1)
3 (1.4)
Figure 1F

HAA ** ** *
Figure 1E 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8)
Figure 1H Figure 1B
8 (3.6) 6 (2.7)
12 (5.4) 10 (4.5)
19
4
Figure 1A
7 (3.2)
10 (4.5)
Figure 1D
8 (3.6)
12 (5.4)
11A 11B 12A 12B 13A 13B 13D 13E 14B 14C 15A 15B 15E 15F 15H 16B 16C 18A 19A XX
Fig. 1I
8 (3.6) 12 (5.4)
Contact Option S2 Case S2 Case S1 Case S1 Case S2 Case S2 Case S2 Case S2 Case S1 Case S1 Case Back connected and cover with glass window Back connected and cover with glass window Front connected and cover with glass window Front connected and cover with glass window Back connected and cover with glass window Back connected and cover with glass window Front connected and cover with glass window S2 Case S2 Case See Group column under Selection Guide F Semi-flush (not for models that use S1/S2 cases) * regular mounting
Figure 1C
8 (3.6)
12 (5.4)

See pages 15 - 18.
Fig. 1G
Includes external resistor. * Used as an interposing relay after the transformer sudden pressure relay.
374
Auxiliary Relays
Multicontact auxiliary relays for AC and DC circuit applications.
HFA
Application
I

I I
Standard, high-speed or variable time tripping available Manual, self or electric reset available
Features
I I I
Electrically separate contact circuits Molded case with 3 mounting options Drawout case available
APPLICATION
The type HFA relay is designed for applications where a number of auxiliary functions must be performed simultaneously. Six contacts are provided. If more than six circuits are to be controlled, the coils of two or more relays may be connected in series (DC only) or in parallel. All HFA relays have six electrically separate contact circuits adaptable for either circuit-opening or circuitclosing applications. The HFA relays are available for front or back connection. The front connected relays are suitable for surface mounting only. The back connected relays are suitable for either surface mounting or semi-flush mounting: a steel flange is provided for the latter. The HFA relay is also available in an S2 type draw-out case. Selection of DC relays for tripping duty where operating coil circuit is opened by an auxiliary switch. The operating time of the standard HFA relay is approximately 5 cycles for the DC models (60 Hz basis). If used on DC for tripping a circuit breaker, the operating time should be reduced to approximately 1 cycle in order that no appreciable time delay will be added to the operating time of the protective relay. This can be accomplished by selecting a relay which has a lower voltage rating than the control circuit. Recommended voltage
19
GE Power Management
375
HFA Multicontact Auxiliary Relays

APPLICATION
ratings for one minute tripping duty are listed below.
Target Time to Use Supply Relay with Operating Coil Tap Close N.O. Coil Contacts Voltage Coil Rated Current Value in at Pickup Prot. (VDC) (VDC) (A) Relay (60 Hz (A) Basis) 24 32 48 125 250 6 6 12 24 48 5.3 7.1 2.7 1.7 0.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.2 0.2
STANDARD SPEED
The HFA51 and 71 relays are instantaneous, hinged armature, six contact auxiliary relays supplied in either a drawout or non-drawout case for panel mounting.

HFA51 * * *
A B
Self reset Hand reset Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Semi-flush mounted, back connected Surface mounted, front connected Surface mounted, back connected
Approx. one cycle
XX F H *
When so applied, the HFA operating coil must be opened by the breaker auxiliary switch to prevent overheating. The increased current through the HFA operating coil will assure operation of the target on the protective relay.
SELECTION GUIDE
NON-DRAWOUT CASE
Group 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 54 55 56 86 DC Volt. 250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 6 115 208 230 460 115 230 460 208 VAC 50 Hz VAC 60 Hz Contacts Pickup Time (Cycles) DC Res. Ohms at 25C 8000 2000 510 336 140 82 21 5.2 13 45 52 212 20 80 325 52 Impedance at 25C Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Net Ship
CONTACT RATING
Contacts are electrically separate and easily reversible from normally open to normally closed or vice versa. The current-closing rating of the contacts is 30 A. The current-carrying rating is 12 A continuously or 30 A for 1 min.
Contact interrupting ratings
Table 4
Approx. 5
1 2 Contacts 1 2 Contacts VDC Contact in Series VAC Contact in Series (A) (A) (A) (A)
415 1350 1650 6600 575 2300 9200 1880
5 (2.2)
7 (3.1)

HFA71 * * *
A B XX H *
Self reset Hand reset Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Surface mounted, front connected Surface mounted, back connected
NON-INDUCTIVE
6 to 24 48 125 250 24 48 125 250 15 8 3 1 6.0 3.5 1.0 0.3 30 16 6 2 12 6 1.5 0.35 115 230 460 115 230 460 30 20 8 20 10 5 30 30 12 20 10 5
INDUCTIVE
19
SELECTION GUIDE
DRAWOUT CASE
Group 41A 42A 44 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 54 55 56 86 DC Volt. 250 125 48 24 12 6 115 208 230 460 115 230 460 208 Table 4 VAC 50 Hz VAC 60 Hz Contacts Operating Time (ms) 84 84 84 84 84 84 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 DC Res. Ohms at 25C 8000 2000 336 82 21 5.2 13 45 52 212 20 80 325 52 Impedance at 25C Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Case Net Ship
TABLE 4
60
Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: = Normally open contact, open when relay is de-energized. = Normally closed contact, closed when relay is de-energized.
CODE NUMBER 51 42 33 24 15 Contact Arrangement
06
If contact code is not specified on the order Code 60 will be furnished. Relays stocked in the warehouse are stocked with contact Code 60. Conversion from normally open to normally closed or vice-versa, can be easily accomplished in the field.
415 1350 1650 6600 575 2300 9200 1880
12 (5.4)
18 (8.1)
S2
376
Auxiliary Relays

TIME-DELAY APPLICATIONS
The type HFA65D relays are similar to the HFA51 relays except they have adjustable time-delay dropout. Although the HFA65D relay has a time delay dropout adjustable from 0.25 sec to 2.0 sec, it is normally set for 2 sec at the factory unless otherwise specified. The type HFA65E relays have an adjustable time-delay pickup with a fixed time dropout of 0.25 sec. Pickup is normally set for 0.083 sec unless otherwise specified.

HFA65 * * *
D E XX F H *
Adjustable time delay dropout Adjustable time delay pickup Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Semi-flush mounted, back connected Surface mounted, front connected Surface mounted, back connected
SELECTION GUIDE
TIME DELAY APPLICATIONS
Group 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 76 77 84 DC Volt. 250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 208 230 120 VAC 25/5000 Hz Contacts Time Delay Dropout Time (sec) DC Res. Ohms at 25C 4950 1230 308 187 77 48 11.7 3580 3580 790 Approx. Wt. in lbs (kg) Net Ship

TABLE 5 CODE NUMBER 51 42 33 24 15 Contact Arrangement
7 (3.1)
10 (4.5)
Table 5
0.25 - 2.0
0.067 - 0.10
8 (3.6)
12 (5.4)
Necessary
rectifier included.
CODE NUMBER 2 3 Contact Arrangement TABLE 7 CODE NUMBER 1 Contact Arrangement
60
06
TABLE 6
Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: = Normally open contact, open when relay is de-energized. = Normally closed contact, closed when relay is de-energized.
Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: = Long-wipe closed contact, closed when relay is de-energized and opens after the standard NC contact. This contact is used to insert the dropping resistor into the coil circuit.
Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: = Long-wipe closed contact, used to insert the dropping resistor into the coil circuits.
If contact code is not specified on the order Code 60 will be furnished. Relays stocked in the warehouse are stocked with contact Code 60. Conversion from normally open to normally closed or vice-versa can be easily accomplished in the field.
HIGH-SPEED TRIPPING
The HFA53K relays are designed to have a pickup time of 9 ms (one-half cycle60 Hz basis). The required external resistor is included in the basic model number. Since one contact is used for the operating coil transfer circuit, only five contacts are available for external circuits. The HFA73K is a high-speed tripping relay with a pickup time of not more than 9 ms. The required series resistor is built into the relay. Since one contact is used for the operating coil transfer circuit, only five contacts are available for external circuits.
SELECTION GUIDE
Coil Resistance () 25C NON-DRAWOUT CASE Group
Rating VDC
48 125 250 125 250
Resistor Operating Contacts Time (Cycles)

30 200 800 10 30
95 91 92 93 94
2 21 82 13.5 13.5
0.5
Table 6
6 (2.7)
9 (4)
19

HFA**
53 73 D E XX F H *
* * *
Non-drawout case Drawout case Adjustable time delay dropout Adjustable time delay pickup Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Semi-flush mounted, back connected Surface mounted, front connected Surface mounted, back connected
Approx. Wt. DC Coil Internal Series Group Continuous Resistance Resistance Operating Contacts Case in lbs (kg) Size Time Rating VDC () 25C Net Ship () DRAWOUT CASE
3A 1A 2A 48 125 250 2.9 21.0 82.0 75 500 2000 9 ms Table 7 S2 12 (5.4) 18 (8.1)
Within plus or minus 10 percent. On 60 Hz basis (time from energizing operating coil to closing of the normally
open contacts). numbers shown are for back connected, surface mounted. If back connected, semiflush mounting is desired, add letter F to listed model number, for example: HFA51A42F. If front connected, surface mounting is desired, add letter H to listed model number, for example: HFA51A42H. Intermittent rating.
Model
Auxiliary Relays
377

ELECTRIC RESET RELAYS
Table D lists the combination of reset and mounting available. Table E Lists the voltage and frequencies of the operating and reset coils. Table F and G (below) show the various contact configurations available. To obtain a complete catalog number, select the basic number from Table D; insert the form number from Table E; specify the contact code from either Table F or Table G. EXAMPLE: Electric reset only Front connected Surface mounting Reset coil cutoff contact 48 VDC operate coil 115V 60 Hz reset coil 3 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts
}
}
}
Select HFA54E-H from Table D
Select form number 245 from Table E Select contact code 42 from Table F
Thus, HFA54E245H code 42 is the complete relay number.
SELECTION GUIDE
TABLE D. BASIC NUMBER
Type of Reset
Mounting
Back-connected surface mounting Back-connected semi-flush mounting Front-connected surface mounting Back-connected drawout case Back-connected surface mounting Back-connected semi-flush mounting Front-connected surface mounting Back-connected surface mounting Back-connected semi-flush mounting Front-connected surface mounting Back-connected drawout case
Basic Number
HFA54BHFA54B-F HFA54B-H HFA74B-A HFA54CHFA54C-F HFA54C-H HFA54EHFA54E-F HFA54E-H HFA74E-A
Contact
Basic Number
HFA54HHFA54H-F HFA54H-H HFA74H-A HFA54JHFA54J-F HFA54J-H HFA54LHFA54L-F HFA54L-H HFA74L-A
Contact

5 (2.2) 12 (5.4) 7 (3.1) 18 (8.1)
Hand and electric reset
Hand and electric reset with mechanical target
Table F
Table G 5 (2.2) 7 (3.1)
Electric reset only
12 (5.4)
12 (8.1)
TABLE E. FORM NUMBERS
Voltage and Frequency

12 VDC 24 VDC 48VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 115 V 60 Hz 230 V 60 Hz
48 VDC
122 123 125 127 128 129 130
125 VDC
182 183 185 187 188 189 190
Reset Coil Rating 250 VDC 115 V 60 Hz Form Numbers

212 213 215 217 218 219 220 242 243 245 247 248 249 250
230 V 60 Hz
272 273 275 277 278 279 280
Operating Coil Rating
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
19
Model Number Pickup Voltage in Percent of Rating Hot
HFA51A, -B HFA54B, -C, -E, -H, -J, -L HFA71A, -B HFA74B, -E, -H, -L HFA53K HFA73K HFA65D HFA65E
15 Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 63 3 This contact is reserved for opening the reset coil circuit to protect the intermittently rated reset coil. NOTES: = Normally open contact, open when relay is de-energized. = Normally closed contact, closed when relay is de-energized.
TABLE F
60
CODE NUMBER 51 42 33 24 Contact Arrangement
Dropout Voltage in Percent of Rating AC

30-60
Cold
60 or less, DC
DC
2-10
Operating Time to Operating Time at Rated Voltage to Open a N.O. Contact When Voltage Close a N.O. Reduced from Contact Rated to Zero AC DC AC DC
33 ms or less 84 ms or less 14 ms or less 28 ms or less 9 ms or less Adjustable 250 to 2000 ms factory set at 2000 ms Adjustable 67-100 ms factory set at 83 ms 250 ms
80 or less, AC or DC
80 or 60 or less, less, DC only DC only
2-10
9 ms or less for tripping duty
06 Position No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 NOTES: = Normally open contact, open when relay is de-energized. = Normally closed contact, closed when relay is de-energized.
TABLE G
60
CODE NUMBER 51 42 33 24 15 Contact Arrangement
35-80 AC 30-60 DC
These relays are adjusted to give the proper time delays at rated voltage. Since these adjustments affect the pickup voltage point, it is not possible to accurately predict the pickup voltage.
If contact code is not specified on the order. Code 60 will be furnished. Relays stocked in the warehouse are stocked with contact Code 60. Conversion from normally open to normally closed, or vice-versa, can be easily accomplished in the field.
378
Auxiliary Relays
Hinged armature auxiliary relay to perform auxiliary functions in AC and DC circuits.
HGA
Application
I
Hinged Armature Auxiliary Relays

I I
Standard, low and variable time pickup available AC undervoltage (low dropout)
Features
I I
Molded case with 4 mounting options Drawout case available
APPLICATIONS
The HGA hinged armature auxiliary relays are designed to provide additional contacts, higher contact carrying and interrupting ratings, timing, interlocking, electrical separation, or other auxiliary functions. Where more than two circuits are to be controlled, the coils of two or more relays may be connected either in parallel on AC or in series or parallel on DC to obtain the desired results. the table, are satisfactory. The contact arrangement for each relay (or unit) is double-pole, double-throw (2 normally open, 2 normally closed). Low Pick-up: The HGA14 relay has been designed with a shorter armature gap which is obtained by the setting of an adjustable back contact. This construction allows a lower pickup value than normal and a faster pickup time. Also, relays are available for tripping duty and target operation with pickup times of 1/2 cycle on a 60-cycle basis, and are intermittently rated. The contact arrangement is one single-pole, double-throw contact and one normally open contact for each relay (or unit). The second normally closed contact is not used with the low pickup setting. This second contact can be used if the wipe is restored to normal and the control spring tension increased thus raising the pickup toward the 80 percent (60 percent DC cold) level which would apply with standard gap relays.
AC UNDERVOLTAGE
Low Dropout. The Type HGA14BH(-)A relay is a three-phase residual voltage relay with low dropout. A primary application is as on automatic throwover schemes where induction motors are the principal load.
19
GENERALPURPOSE RELAYS
Standard Pickup: The HGA11 is the standard auxiliary relay which is instantaneous in operation and is used for auxiliary functions where intentional delays of over 1-1/4 to 2 cycles are not required and where standard pickup values, as listed in
TIME-DELAY RELAYS
Fixed-time Dropout. The HGA17 is designed to provide a time-delay dropout of approximately 15 cycles (60-cycle basis). The delay is obtained by momentarily sustaining the magnetic flux at the relay pole face by means of induced currents in a copper ring which acts as a shorted one-turn coil. A small delay in pickup time is also obtained since the induced currents also tend to retard the
GE Power Management
379
HGA Hinged Amature Auxiliary Relays

TIME-DELAY RELAYS
buildup of the relay magnetic field. Operating times are measured at or from rated voltage or amperes for pickup and dropout times respectively. Adjustable-time Pickup: The HGA14D has a resistor-capacitor timing circuit with the resistor being adjustable to vary the charging time of the capacitor which is connected across the relay operating coil. Contact arrangement for the fixed-time dropout (HGA17) is one single-pole, double-throw contact and one normally open contact per relay (or unit).
CONTACT RATINGS
Standard Pickup Relays Type HGA11
The current-closing rating of the contacts is 30 A. The current-carrying rating is 12 A continuously or 30 A for one minute. Interrupting Ratings of Contacts in Amperes Contact-circuit Single Break VAC VDC NONINDUCTIVE CIRCUITS
--------115 230 --------115 230 6-32 48 125 250 ----6-32 48 125 250 ----15 8 2 0.3 30 20 5 3 1 0.25 10 6
Low Pickup Relays Types HGA14, HGA17

The current closing ratings of the contacts is 30 A. The current carrying rating is 12 A continuously or 30 A for one minute. The interrupting ratings (noninductive circuits) for the various voltages are as follows: Contact-circuit VAC VDC NONINDUCTIVE CIRCUITS
--------115 230 --------115 230 6-32 48 125 250 ----6-32 48 125 250 -----
Double Break
30 16 3 0.4 30 30 10 6 1.5 0.3 20 10
Single Break
10 5 0.6 0.25 20 10 5 3 0.5 0.2 10 5
RELAY CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage or Current Pickup Values. The values listed in the table below apply as indicated for all relays.
INDUCTIVE CIRCUITS
INDUCTIVE CIRCUITS
Relay
HGA 11 HGA14 HGA17A,B,C HGA17D,H
Pickup Classification
Standard Low Time Time
Percentage of Rated V or A Pickup Value AC

80% 40% 30-40% 80% Max.
Dropout Value DC
80% 30% 20-30% 60% Max.
AC
40-50% 20-30% 2-10% 5-15%
DC
2-10% 2-10% 2-10% 2-10%
BC surface mounting with cover
BC semi-flush mounting with cover
FC surface mounting with cover
FC surface mounting with cover with provisions for front mounting
19
380
Auxiliary Relays

HGA11 - Standard Pickup
SELECTION GUIDE
DC Group Volt.
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 70 71 74 75 250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 6 220 110 115 230 115 230
HGA11
* ** * *
A J S XX F G
Surface mounted back connected with studs and solid cover Surface mounted front connected with solid cover Surface mounted front connected with solid cover and provision for front mounted Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Mounting options Semi-flush mounted back connected with studs and cover with glass window Cover with glass window is required
AC AC 50 Hz 60 Hz
Contact
DC Pickup Res. AC Approx. Wt. Time Ohms Res. in lbs (kg) (cycles) @ 25C Ohms Net Ship
15500 3650 830 512 250 160 Approx 40 2 10 9600 2460 1000 3960 830 4270
2 N.O. 2 N.C
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)

HGA14 - Low Pickup (40% of rating for AC or 30% of rating for DC)
SELECTION GUIDE
DC Group Volt.
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 70 71 74 75 250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 6 220 110 115 230 115 230 Approx 2
AC AC 50 Hz 60 Hz
Contact
DC AC Approx. Wt. Pickup Res. Time Ohms Res. in lbs (kg) (cycles) @ 25C Ohms Net Ship
15500 3650 830 512 250 Approx 160 1 40 10 9600 2460 1000 3960 830 4270
HGA14
* ** * *
A F XX F G
Surface mounted back connected with studs and solid cover Surface mounted front connect ed with solid cover Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Mounting options Semi-flush mounted back connected with studs and cover with glass window Cover with glass window is required
2 N.O. 2 N.C
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)

HGA17 - Time Delay, Fixed Time (15 cycles dropout) (copper slugged coil)
SELECTION GUIDE
Group
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 68 70 63 64
DC Volt.
250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 220 110
AC 50/60 Hz
HGA17
* ** * *
A C H XX F G
Surface mounted back connected with studs and solid cover Front connected with solid cover (NO STUDS) Surface mounted back connected with studs and solid cover Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Mounting options Semi-flush mounted back connected with studs and cover with glass window Cover with glass window is required
DC Pickup Res. AC Approx. Wt. Contact Time Ohms Res. in lbs (kg) (cycles) @ 25C Ohms Net Ship
10300 2280 585 375 Approx 153 2 98 24.5 10300 1700 1700 1700
19
2 N.O. 2 N.C
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
115 230
Auxiliary Relays
381

HGA17 - Fixed Time Pickup with Approx. 15-cycle Delay on Dropout
SELECTION GUIDE
DC Group Volt.
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 68 70 63 64 250 125 62.5 48 32 24 12 220 110 115 230
AC 50/60 Hz
HGA17
* ** * *
D H XX F G
Front connected with solid cover (NO STUDS) Surface mounted back connected with studs and solid cover Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Mounting options Semi-flush mounted back connected with studs and cover with glass window Cover with glass window is required
DC Pickup AC Approx. Wt. Pickup Res. Res. in lbs (kg) Contact Time Ohms (cycles) Volts @ 25C Ohms Net Ship
10300 2280 585 375 153 98 24.5 10300 1700 1700 1700
2 N.O. 2 N.C
Approx 3.5
60%
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
80%

HGA14 - Molded Case Tripping Relays, 1/2 Cycle or Less (for tripping two breakers)
SELECTION GUIDE
Approx. For DC Pick- Contact For 3 2 For 3 1 For 3 For 3 Carrier Wt. in Group Volt. up A A 0.6 A 0.2 A GCX lbs (kg) Volts Targets Targets Targets Targets or GCY Net Ship
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 25 26 28 29 250 125 48 32 24 250 125 48 32 24 250 125 48 32 24 250 125 48 32 24 250 125 48 24 AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL,AM AL 2 3 (0.9) (1.4)
HGA14 ** **
AM AL XX
Back connected with cover Front connected with cover Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide)
80% or Less
2 N.O. 1 N.C
19

HGA14 - Adjustable Time Delay on Pickup
SELECTION GUIDE
Group
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HGA14
* *
D X
Back connected with cover Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide)
DC Volt.
48 125 125 250 250 125 125
Pickup Volts
15 or Less 61 - 67 30 - 35 65 - 70 65 - 70 65 - 70
Contact
2 N.O. 1 N.C
Pickup Time (cycles)

2 -4 2-6 1-3 1-6 1 - 12 2 - 12 4 - 24
8 (3.6)
12 (5.4)
382
Auxiliary Relays

SELECTION GUIDE
Drawout Case Relays
Each Unit
Pickup DC Option Group Volt. 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11N 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 11R 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14A 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 14AB 17J 1A 32A 63A 94A 125A 156A 187A 249A 280A 342A 373A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9A 10A 15A 16A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 9A 10A 15A 16A 1A 32A 63A 94A 125A 156A 187A 249A 280A 342A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 10A 24 48 62.5 125 250 115 115 230 230 6 12 24 48 62,5 125 250 115 115 230 230 6 12 24 48 62.5 125 250 115 115 230 230 6 220 24 48 62.5 125 250 115 115 230 230 12 12 24 32 48 62.5 125 250 115 115 40 25 98 153 375 585 2280 10300 1700 10 9600 160 512 830 3650 15550 90 99 376 512 10 40 160 512 830 3650 15550 90 99 512 512 1 S1 10 40 160 512 830 3650 15550 90 99 512 512

Pickup Wt. in Time Case lbs (kg)
(cycles)
Approx.
HGA
*** ****
Standard pickup general purpose double unit 11R Standard pickup general purpose single unit 14A Low pickup general purpose single unit 14AB Low pickup general purpose double unit 14B4 Single short gap unit with rectifiers (60 cycles, low burden) 17J Low pickup time delay single unit, fixed time (15 cycles min. dropout) (copper slugged coil) XXXX Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide)
VAC VAC 60 DC 50 Hz Hz Ohms
@25C
160 512 830 3650 15550
AC Z
Contact
11N
Net Ship
90 99 376 512
S2
9 11 (4.1) (5)
S1 2
7 9 (3.2) (4.1)

See pages 15 - 18.
7 9 (3.2) (4.1)
S2
9 11 (4.1) (5)
19
9 11 (4.1) (5)
S1
HGA11 (standard pickup) double pole, double throw {2 normally open/two normally
closed} per unit. HGA14 (low pickup) one single pole, double throw. HGA17 (time delay) plus one normally open contact per unit.
Auxiliary Relays
383
Multi-contact hand reset relay to perform auxiliary functions on AC and DC circuits.
HSA
Application
I

I
Trip and/or block close circuit breaker control
Features
I I I I
Electrically separate contact outputs Universal target dropping Mechanical target High seismic capability
APPLICATION
The type HSA high-speed multicontact, auxiliary relays are applicable where it is desired that a number of operations be performed simultaneously from the operation of a single relay.
CONSTRUCTION
The HSA multi-contact, auxiliary relays are built with many parts common to the type SBM control switches. The mechanical target on the escutcheon plate assembly indicates the position of the relay. The black target indicates the reset position and the orange target, the tripped position. To reset the relay after it has been tripped, the handle is turned clockwise as indicated by the arrow on the escutcheon plate. Since the HSA relay is similar to the SBM switch, it is available with a shaft long enough to allow it to be mounted on panels with thickness up to 1/4 inch.
OPERATION
The HSA relay is available with 9, 13 or 19 main electrically separate contacts. In addition, there are 2 normally closed contacts that are wired for opening the operating coil circuit. See Figure 2. The operating shaft is held in reset position by a positive roller latch which is especially constructed to resist shock and vibration. The latch is released through the action of a plunger device actuated by the relay operating coil. All HSA relays are made so that they should not normally be tripped manually; however, manual tripping can be accomplished through use of an escutcheon knockout (and pre-drilled hole in panel) which provides access to a screwdriveroperated tripping device. The time required to trip the relay, from the instant of energization of the coil to the closing of the contacts, is per HSA Relay Operating Characteristics (Figures 3 & 4), slightly less for opening of contacts.
19
Typical functions that can be performed by these relays are:

1. Trip and lock out the main circuit breaker of a system. 2. Trip station auxiliary breakers. 3. Trip main or auxiliary field breakers. 4. Trip and lock out all breakers on a bus.
Perhaps the most important use of the HSA relay is as an auxiliary used in conjunction with differential relays for bus, transformer, line or rotating machine protection.
384
GE Power Management
HSA Multicontact Auxiliary Relays

TARGET DROPPING
Universal targets in series with HSA trip coils increase HSA trip time. A typical increase in trip time for a single 0.2 A target and an HSA with a 125 VDC trip coil is 1.3 ms. Table 1 shows the maximum number and type of universal targets that can be dropped by the current pulse of HSA trip coils.
Table 1. Target dropping
DIELECTRIC CAPABILITY
HSA relays are rated 600 V in accordance with the Dielectric Test Section of Relay Standard ANSI/IEEE C37.90-1978.
CONTACT RATINGS
The current-closing ratings of the contacts is 30 A for voltages not exceeding 600 V. The contacts have a current carrying capacity of 20 A continuously. The interrupting ability of the contacts varies with the inductance of the circuit. The values (in amperes) given in Table 4 for DC inductive circuits are based on the average trip coil.
Table 4. Contact interrupting ratings
TRIP COIL RATINGS

The three trip coils available for HSA relays have multiple voltage ratings as shown in Table 3. To obtain maximum tripping speed, the coils are rated for intermittent duty only.
Table 3. Trip coil voltage ratings
HSA Coil Coil Group Voltage

1 2 2 3 3 48 VDC 110 VDC 125 VDC 220 VDC 250 VDC
Number of Parallel Targets Dropped 0.2 A 0.6 A 2.0 A

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 4 3 2 2 1 1
Circuit Volts
48 DC 125 DC 250 DC 120 AC 240 AC
Amps Amps Inductive Non-inductive (L/R- .04) Single Two in Single Two in Contact Series Contact Series
10 5 1.5 50 50 50 22 4 50 50 6 4 1.4 50 25 30 13 3.5 50 50
Intermittent Frequency Operating Rating Range (Hz) (V) (V)

48 110 125 220 250 69 110 120 220 240 DC DC DC DC DC 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 32-55 70-145 70-145 140-290 140-290 45-80 70-140 70-140 140-280 140-280
Coil Group
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
NOTE: A minimum of two parallel 0.2 A targets is recommended to assure tripping of 48 VDC HSA relays.
BURDENS
The burdens for the type HSA relays are given in Table 5 and Table 6.
Table 5. DC burden data for HSA relays
SEISMIC CAPABILITY
The seismic capability of HSA N.O. (Normally Open) and N.C. (Normally Closed) contacts are given in Table 2.
Table 2. HSA seismic capability
Seismic Capability (gs ZPA) HSA Reset HSA Tripped

N.O. 6.0 N.C. 4.0 N.O. 6.0 N.C. 6.0
CAUTION: Do not hold the reset handle in the reset position if the HSA will not reset. Failure to reset indicates that the trip coil is energized. Holding the reset handle in the reset position with the trip coil energized at rated voltage will cause rapid coil heating and possible insulation damage.
Fig. 3. Operating characteristics, 8- and 11-stage HSA relays
Coil Resistance Coil ( at Group Volts 25C 10%)

1 2 2 3 3 48 110 125 220 250 2.85 11.8 11.8 47.5 47.5
DC Inrush Current (A)

17 12 13 5 5.5
Table 6. AC Burdens
SERVICE TEMPERATURE
The HSA will operate over an ambient temperature range of -20C to +55C and will not be damaged by storage ambients of -40C to +65C.
Fig. 2. HSA11 Relay Contacts
Coil Group
1 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
Volts
69 110 120 220 240 69 110 120 220 240
Frequency
60 60 60 60 60 50 50 50 50 50
Z ()
10 11 11 45 45 10 11 11 45 45
Voltage Lead Angle

30 29 29 28 28 27 24 24 23 23
19
Fig. 4. Operating characteristics, 6-stage HSA relays
Auxiliary Relays
385
HSA Multicontact Auxiliary Relays

SELECTION GUIDE
Approx. Wt. in Contact Contact Contact lbs (kg) Option 48VDC 110/125VDC 220/250DC Numbers Numbers 69VAC 110/120VAC 220/240AC Norm. Norm. 50/60HzAC 50/60HzAC 50/60HzAC Closed Open Net Ship 9 CONTACT (Plus 2 Contacts in Coil Circuit) Group
A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 None 4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 None 4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 None 4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-12 5-12 6-12 7-12 8-12 9-12 10-12 11-12 12 None 4-16 5-16 6-16 7-16 8-16 9-16 10-16 11-16 12-16 13-16 14-16 15-16 16 None 4-22 5-22 6-22 7-22 8-22 9-22 10-22 11-22 12-22 13-22 14-22 15-22 16-22 17-22 18-22 19-22 20-22 21-22 22 None

Contact Arrangement
1) Choose the required number of contacts and their action (N.O. and N.C.) 2) Choose the operating voltage of the HSA.
HSA11
* *** *
A B C XXX X
9 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 13 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) 19 contacts (plus 2 contacts in coil circuit) Electrical data (see Group column under Selection guide) Enter the panel thickness in inches
3.1 5 (1.4) (2.3)
13 CONTACT (Plus 2 Contacts in Coil Circuit)

See pages 15 - 18.
3.5 5.4 (1.6) (2.4)
19 CONTACT (Plus 2 Contacts in Coil Circuit)
19
6 4 (1.8) (2.7)
386
Auxiliary Relays
Self resetting hinged armature auxiliary relay.
HMA
Application
I
Hinged Armature Auxiliary Relay

I I
High-speed pickup Self-resetting
Features
I I
Front or back connected Molded Textolite case
19
DESCRIPTION
The HMA relay is a general purpose, hinged armature, self resetting relay. It is housed in a molded TEXTOLITE case for surface mounting, and can be supplied either front or back connected. Back connected models are supplied with a removable front cover, whereas front connected models are supplied without cover or rear studs.
APPLICATION
The HMA relay is a high speed auxiliary relay designed for use with high speed circuit breaker. The pick-up time at rated voltage is approximately 2 cycles (on a 60 Hz basis). Relays for DC applications are adjusted to pick up at 60 percent of their rating when cold and 80 percent when hot. Relays for ac application are adjusted to pick up at 80 percent of their rating. The HMA11A is a back connected relay supplied with cover. The HMA11B is similar except it is front connected and is supplied without cover. The HMA24A is similar to the HMA11A except it is made for semi-flush mounting with a glass cover.
For AC and DC Auxiliary Functions

The HMA25A is similar to the HMA24A except it is surface mounted, back connected with glass cover.
GE Power Management
387
HMA Hinged Amature Auxiliary Relay

RATING
The current closing or momentary rating of the contact is 30 A for one min. The current carrying or steadystate rating is 12 A. The interrupting ratings for the various voltages are as follows:
Contact Circuit V
6-32 48 62.5 110 125 220 250 120 240 120 240 60 50 DC
BURDENS
The burdens for DC coils are shown in the Selection Guide. The AC burdens are shown in the following table. AC Coils Coil Rating V Hz
115 230 460 115 230 60 60 60 50 50
RDC 10%
330 1300 5100 380 1500
RDO 10%
440 2580 7040 503 2010
XDO 10%
864 3310 13825 871 3480
ZDO 10%
975 4180 15600 1006 4025
RPU 5%
1215 5160 19440 1323 5300
XPU 5%
1342 4500 21475 1552 6200
ZPU 5%
1815 6900 29040 2029 8120
Noninductive
Inductive
Freq. Single Double Single Double or Break Break Break Break Hz Amp Amp Amp Amp
15 10 5 1.5 1.5 0.3 0.3 20 13 20 13 30 20 10 3 3 0.5 0.5 30 25 30 25 6 3 1.5 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.1 15 10 15 10 12 6 3 1.2 1.2 0.3 0.3 15 10 15 10
RDC - DC resistance RDO - AC resistance with armature not picked up XDO - Inductive reactance with armature not picked up ZDO - Impedance with armature not picked up
RPU - AC resistance with armature picked up XPU - Inductive reactance with armature picked up ZPU - Impedance with armature picked up

HMA *** **
11A 11B 24A 25A XX
Back connected with cover Front connected without cover Semi-flush mounted back connected and cover with glass window Surface mounted back connected and cover with glass window See group column under selection guide
SELECTION GUIDE
Mtg.
11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11A 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 11B 24A 24A 24A 24A 24A 25A 25A 25A
Group
21 22 23 24 25 26 31 32 41 42 47 48 53 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 16 17 19 25 26 27 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4
DC Volt.
6 12 24 32 48 125 250 62.5 6 12 24 32 48 125 250 62.5 125 6 48 48 24
VAC 50 Hz
115 330 115 330 125 120 -
VAC 60 Hz
115 230 208 125 115 230 125 120 125 -
DC Ohms
15.3 60 230 440 1000 5660 930 1450 15.3 60 230 440 1000 5660 930 1450 5660 15.3 1000 1000 230
Contact

19
See pages 15 - 18.

2 N.O. 2 N.C.
1 (0.5)
2 (0.9)
Uses 3300 external resistor.
388
Auxiliary Relays
High speed trip and lockout relays applicable where several tripping functions need to be performed by the same relay.
NEW
RDB86
High Speed Trip and Lockout Relay
Line breaker tripping & lockout Contact multiplication High speed breaker circuits Transformer lockout
Applications
I I I I

I
Circuit opening and/or closing
Features
I I I I I I
Auto-cut contacts Electrically separated contact circuits Electrically or manually operated Semi-flush mounted case Back connected Custom mounted cases available
DESCRIPTION
RDB86A units are high-speed trip and lockout relays that incorporate HLB lockout relays and HLG quick relays. The HLB 100 is a bistable magnetic retention relay, with two independent operation coils, each of which has an auto-cut contact, so that the relay consumption is null in any of its two positions. HLB relays have eight electrically separate contact circuits adaptable for either circuit opening or circuit closing applications, without the need to reset or realign the contacts. The HLG 100 is a high speed multicontact tripping relay that can include either one or two coils, each of which operates 5 normally open contacts. HLG relays have incorporated, in parallel with the coil (or coils), a resistance that allows them to be installed in tripping circuits in series with 0.2 A seal-in targets. HLB and HLG relays are plug-in devices with a transparent plastic cover that are designed to be installed in an RDB 1/4 rack case for semi-flush panel mounting. They can also be supplied in 19" four unit high racks. One of the most important applications of RDB relays is the combination with differential relays, where the lockout relay needs to be reset manually for avoiding accidental reclosings, when an internal fault has activated the differential relay. The HLB relay is designed for applications where it is necessary to commute currents (for example, in bus bar protection systems type BUS1000), in control circuits and breaker tripping, and, in general, in those applications requiring electrical blocking and resetting. The HLG is a high speed auxiliary voltage relay, appropriate for use with fast breakers. The operating time at rated voltage is less than 8 ms. RDB86PA1A is a special model, typically used for transformer lockout (86T). It includes a trip indicating lamp for trip coil supervision, with manual reset.
19
APPLICATION
RDB relays are applicable where several tripping functions need to be performed by the same relay. Typical applications for these relays include: Line breaker tripping and lockout, lockout of all the line breakers in the same busbar, etc.
GE Power Management
389
RDB86 High Speed Trip and Lockout Relays

AVAILABLE MODELS
RDB86A1A: Includes one (1) highspeed tripping relay (HLG) with 10 normally open contacts and one (1) bistable relay (HLB) with 8 configurable contacts. The module is supplied with the following contact configuration: I 10 n.o. contacts for HLG high-speed
relay
RDB86A4A: Includes three (3) highspeed tripping relays (HLG) with 10 normally open contacts each, and (30 n.o. contacts in total), and five (5) bistable relays (HLB) with 8 configurable contacts (40 contacts in total). The module is supplied with the following contact configuration: I 30 n.o. contacts for HLG high-speed
relays
RDB86 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

POWER SUPPLY Rated Voltage: 125 VDC Please contact the factory for further voltage levels Operation Range: Between 80% and 120% of rated voltage Consumption: RDB86A1A: 0.3 A to rated V RDB86A2A: 0.6 A to rated V RDB86A3A: 0.95 A to rated V RDB86A2A: 1.01 A to rated V Performance Value: 60% of rated voltage Operation Time: Closing of a high-speed N.O. contact: <8 ms. Closing of a lockout N.O. contact: <25 ms. Overlapping time between a high-speed and a lockout contact: >10 ms. Time for a high-speed contact to remain closed: >35 ms. CONTACTS HIGH-SPEED RELAY Close and carry for a tripping cycle (according to ANSI c37.90): 30 A Opening: 180 VA resistive to 125/250 VDC Opening: 60 VA inductive to 125/250 VDC LOCKOUT RELAY Make and Carry: Continuous: 10 A During 1 minute: 20 A During 1 second: 50 A 30 A Opening of 5000 VA inductive to 250 VDC Opening of 375 VA inductive to 125 VDC Opening of 250 VA inductive to 250 VDC
I 2 n.c. contacts for HLB lockout relay I 6 n.o. contacts for HLB lockout relay 1/4 19" rack case, 4 units high. RDB86PA1A: Includes one (1) bistable relay (HLB) with 8 configurable contacts, plus an indicating lamp and a RESET press-button. The module is supplied with the following contact configuration: I 4 n.c. contacts I 4 n.o. contacts This model is used for transformer lockout (86T). It includes a trip indicating lamp for trip coil supervision, with manual reset. 1/4 19" rack case, 4 units high. RDB86A2A: Includes two (2) highspeed tripping relays (HLG) with 10 normally open contacts each, and (20 n.o. contacts in total), and two (2) bistable relays (HLB) with 8 configurable contacts (16 contacts in total). The module is supplied with the following contact configuration: I 20 n.o. contacts for HLG high-speed
relays I 4 n.c. contacts for HLB lockout relays I 12 n.o. contacts for HLB lockout relays
I 14 n.c. contacts for HLB lockout relays I 26 n.o. contacts for HLB lockout relays 19" rack case, 4 units high. The supplied cases are for semi-flush mounting. For other optional mountings, please contact our factory.
CONSTRUCTION
The RDB86A offering consists of a combination of individual relays, which are plugged directly on double bases (one or more, depending on the model) housed inside the case, so that no case wiring is needed. HLB bistable relays with 8 contacts configurable as n.o or n.c., are located at the top. HLG high-speed tripping relays, with up to 10 n.o. contacts, are located at the bottom. All dielectric materials used in this relay are non-hygroscopic, fire-proof, and do not contain chlorine compounds that could produce harmful gases for the contacts. The materials used in the structural parts of the relay are highly stable and rigid, ensuring a long life even in extreme mechanical and ambient conditions.
Closing Capacity: Breaking Capacity:
TYPE TESTS Dielectric Strength: Between independent circuits: 2500 VAC during 1 second Between independent circuits and ground: 25000 VAC during 1 second Between terminals of an open contact: 1000 VAC during 1 second Mechanical Life: Over 10 million operations ENVIRONMENTAL Ambient Conditions Temperature Range: -20C to +65C Ambient Humidity: Up to 95% without condensing
ORDER CODE
RDB86 A * A
1 1 HLG (10 n.o.) + 1 HLG (6 n.o. + 2 n.c.) for standard models 1/4 19" rack, 4 units high 2 HLG (20 n.o.) + 2 HLB (12 n.o. + 4 n.c.) 1/2 19" rack, 4 units high 3 HLG (30 n.o.) + 4 HLB (24 n.o. + 8 n.c.) One 19" rack, 4 units high 3 HLG (30 n.o.) + 5 HLB (26 n.o. + 14 n.c.) One 19" rack, 4 units high
1/2 19 rack case, 4 units high.
2 3 4
19
RDB86A3A: Includes three (3) highspeed tripping relays (HLG) with 10 normally open contacts each, and (30 n.o. contacts in total), and four (4) bistable relays (HLB) with 8 configurable contacts (32 contacts in total). The module is supplied with the following contact configuration: I 30 n.o. contacts for HLG high-speed
relays I 8 n.c. contacts for HLB lockout relays I 24 n.o. contacts for HLB lockout relays

Special Model RDB86PA1A: Includes one HLB relay (4 n.c. + 4 n.o.), an indicating lamp and a reset button. 1/4 19" rack 4 units high. NOTE: The quantities between parenthesis refer to the number of contacts, and whether they are normally open (n.o.) or normally closed (n.c.)
19" rack case, 4 units high.
390
Auxiliary Relays
A family of telephone-type DC auxiliary relays with several contact arrangements and operating times.
NGA
Auxiliary Relays
Application
I

I
Various pickup and dropout times available
Features
I I I I
Telephone type unit Small molded case Front or back connections available Surge limiting available
DESCRIPTION
The NGA15 is the general designation for a family of telephone-type DC auxiliary relays mounted in a small molded case similar to Type HGA relays. These auxiliary relays are available with several different contact arrangements and operating times. All models are continuously rated. Some have a surge limiting diode circuit for the operating coil as noted in the Selection Guide. The NGA15J is a long-time delay relay for pickup and dropout but does not include a surge limiting diode circuit. The NGA15AA, 15AH and 15AJ relays were specifically designed to initiate automatic reclosing (RI) in a protective relay scheme. These relays are surge limited and may be used in many other applications. The NGA15Q and 15X are general purpose highspeed auxiliary relays and are not surge limited.
VOLTAGE RATING
The NGA relays have been designed and assembled with components to give a pickup of 80 percent or less of rated voltage and to give the required operating times at rated voltage. The operating voltage range is 80 to 112 percent of nominal DC rating.
Contact Rating
The relay contacts will close and carry 30 A DC momentarily for tripping duty at control voltages of 250 VDC or less. These contacts will carry 3 A continuously and have an interrupting rating as given in Table 1.
Table 1. Interrupting ratings
APPLICATION
The NGA15U, 15AG and 15AK are general purpose auxiliary relays. They include a diode combination in parallel with the coil circuit to limit the magnitude of the voltage surges that can be developed when the coil circuit is interrupted. Such an arrangement makes these relays suitable for application in control and relaying circuits where blocking rectifiers are used and supplied from the same DC source as the relay.
19
Ratings
The NGA15 relays listed include the necessary resistors for the coil circuits where needed. These resistors are usually mounted inside the relay case. For some of the continuously rated models, an external resistor is required and these models are identified in the Selection Guide by . Volts
48 VDC 125 VDC 250 VDC 115 V, 60 Hz 230 V, 60 Hz
Inductance
Amps Inductive
1.0 0.5 0.25 0.75 0.5
Amps Non-Inductive
3.0 1.5 0.75 2.0 1.0
of average trip coil
GE Power Management
391
NGA Auxiliary Relays

SELECTION GUIDE
Continuous DC Rating (V) SURGE LIMITED
110 125 220 250 48 125 250 48 125 220 250 48 125 250 125 75 125 125 125 125 125 250 125 220 250 48 125 250
Model Add
Pick-up Time (ms)
Drop-out Time (ms)
Model Number Back Conn. Surface Front Conn. Surface Mtd. Mtd. with Solid Cover with Glass Window Cover
NGA15U4 U2 U3 U5 NGA15AK3 AK2 AK1 NGA15AK6 AK4 AK7 AK5 NGA15AH3 AH1 AH2 NGA15AJ1 NGA15A28 A21 A34 A33 A30 A32 ---NGA15Q5 ------------NGA15AG2 AG1 ---NGA15AG4 AG3 ---------NGA15AA3 AA4 ------NGA15L6 ---L5 ------L7 NGA15X2 ----------------
Contact Arrangement
Case Size
3 (1.40)
4 (1.8)
32
Molded
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
16 16 50 8 28-38 50-55 80-120 90-110 50-55
116-167 116-167 250 100 220-300 60-90 60
3 (1.4)
4 (1.8)
2 (0.9)
3 (1.4)
NOT SURGE LIMITED

4 4 Q6 Q4 NGA15J6 60-70 16 J5 J4 3 (1.4) Molded
4 (1.8) 3 (1.4)
2 (0.9)
number includes external resistor. suffix F for semi-flush mounting with glass window cover. Molded case construction similar to the Type HGA.

19
NBT Breaker Trip Circuit Supervision

Breaker trip circuit supervision relay for voltage level and electrical continuity. Application
I Breaker trip circuit
Features
I Low burden I 300 ms switching delay I Drawout case

I Undervoltage and overvoltage I Defective phase identification I Circuit continuity
392
Auxiliary Relays
High-speed multi-contact DC relays to perform auxiliary functions on AC and DC circuits.
ESA
Multi-contact Auxiliary Relays
Application
I
Contact manipulation

I I
High-speed pickup and dropout Self-resetting
Features
I I I
Four or Eight output relays Two Form-"C" contacts per relay 19" rack mounting with back connections
DESCRIPTION
The ESA is a high-speed, general purpose, self resetting relay. The ESA is housed in a 1.75" high 19" rack mount case with back connections. These auxiliary relays are available with either four or eight output relays. All models are continuously rated, have surge limiting diode circuits for the operating coils and have surge protection on all output contacts.
APPLICATION
The ESA can be used in any application where up to eight contacts/DC signals need to be converted to maximum two Form-"C" contacts, where high speed is a requirement. The pickup and dropout times at rated voltage are 4 msec. maximum. The relays are adjusted to pick up at 80% of rated DC voltage. The output contacts can be used in any AC or DC application where self resetting is desired.

ESA ** D * B
ESA 04 11 12 22 25 4 8
Base unit 48 VDC 110 VDC 125 VDC 220 VDC 250 VDC 4 Relays 8 Relays
19
CONTACT RATING
The relay contacts will close and carry 30A per ANSI C37.90, and carry 5A continuously at 250 VAC and 30 VDC. The contacts can break maximum 5A resistive at 250 VAC and 30 VDC.
BURDENS
The burdens for the DC coils are as follows:
Coil Group 04 11 12 22 25 Volts (DC) 48 110 125 220 250 Coil Resistance ( at 25C 10%) 1.07k 5.05k 5.85k 21.7k 22.7k

See pages 15 - 18.
GE Power Management
393
Other Single Function Relays

Reclosing Relays Distance Relays
HGA18
Single-shot reclosing relays Single-shot reclosing relays for distribution and transmission.
CEB
Offset Mho directional-distance High speed, single zone, offset Mho directional phase distance relay.
DAR
Modular reclosing relays Digital, three-phase reclosing relays.
CEYG
Reactance and Mho phase directional-distance High speed, single zone, Mho directional distance relays.
GXS
Automatic synchronizing relays For automatic synchronizing of AC generators and tie lines.
CEY
Reactance and Mho phase directional-distance High speed, single zone, Mho directional distance relays.
Directional Relays
GCX
Phase packaged directional-distance relays For three zone directional distance protection of transmission lines.
JBCV
Directional overcurrent protection of feeders and transmission lines. JBCV relays consist of three units, an instantaneous power-directional unit of the induction-cup type, a time overcurrent unit of the induction-disk type, and an instantaneousovercurrent unit of the induction-cup type.
GCY
Phase packaged directional-distance relays For two and three zone Mho phase distance protection.
19
GSY
Mho distance relay For out-of-step generator protection used in conjunction with CEX relay.
Auxiliary Relays
NAA
Auxiliary relays

A large family of special purpose auxiliary relays.
394
SB CONTROL AND TRANSFER SWITCHES

SB-1
Rotary switches for circuit breaker control, motor control or instrument transfer.
Type SB-1 switches are rotary, cam-operated devices for the control of electrically operated circuit breakers, small motors, magnetic switches and similar devices.
SB-9
Rotary switch for frequent control of circuit breaker, motor, or magnetic switch.
The SB-9 master control switches are recommended for applications requiring a large number of repetitive operations with positive positioning on each operation.
SB-10
Rotary/lateral switches for circuit breaker control, motor control or instrument transfer.
The SB-10 switch provides two electrically separate and mechanically independent switches in one device. It utilizes both lateral and rotary contacts all constructed on the same switch.
SBM
The SBM switch is a rotary cam-operated device for panel mounting only and for applications where space is at a premium. The standard line of switches is suitable for mounting on panels up to and including 1/4".
SECTION 20: SB CONTROL AND TRANSFER SWITCHES SB ............................................396 SB-1.........................................401 SB-9.........................................406 SB-10.......................................408 SBM ........................................410
395
Compact, positive acting switches for control and transfer service on panels and switchboards.
SB
I I I
SB-1 switch
SB-9 Switch
Control and Transfer Switches

Applications
Voltmeter and ammeter transfer Circuit breaker control Switchboard applications
SB-10 switch
SBM Switch
Features
I I I I I I I I
ORDERING DIRECTIONS
There are two general classes of Type SB switches:
l. the listed Model-Numbered Switches which include only the type SBM and SB-1 switches listed in this catalog II. the Unlisted Catalog-Numbered Switches which include all other type SBM and SB-1 switches not listed in this catalog, plus the type SB-9 and SB-10 switches described further on in this section.
B. Suffix Number for Panel Thickness The Type SB switches are designed for panel mounting; When Type SB switches are ordered panel thickness must be specified on all requisitions. The Type SBM switches are adaptable for mounting on panels up to and including 1/4". There is no coding necessary to indicate panel thickness on this type of switch. The Type SB-1 switches are adaptable for mounting on panels from 1/8" to 2" thick. When Type SB-1 switches are ordered, the panel thickness in increments of 1/16" must be specified on the requisition. This is done by adding the suffix X2 to the basic switch number when the switch is used on 1/8" panels. Use suffix X32 when used on 2" panel.
SB1CF11X2 or SB1CF11X32 NOTE: If the panel thickness is not specified on the requisition, the factory will furnish the Type SB1 switch for 1/8" panel. Example:
Compact design Rotary operation Lateral push/pull operation available Panel thickness selectable Selectable number of stages Assorted knobs, handles and escutcheons Locks available 600 VAC, 20A (250 A for 3.5 sec)
Listed Model-numbered Switches

When ordering this class of switch, refer to: page 410 through 414 for type SBM switches, page 401 through 405 for type SB-1 switches A. Basic Switch Number
Type SBM: 10AA004 10AA010 10AA106 (Example) Voltmeter switch Ammeter switch Circuit breaker control switch Type SB-1: (Example) SB1CF11X* Voltmeter switch SB1CA7X* Ammeter switch SB1B9X* Circuit breaker control switch (*panel mounting thickness in 1/16")
20
C. Special Switches For applications where the listed model switch is not exactly what is required, then it will be necessary to specify: Similar to . . . except.
Example:Similar to SB1CF11X2 except with pistol-grip handle.
396
GE Power Management
SB Control and Transfer Switches

ORDERING DIRECTIONS
The factory will modify the model switch so that it will have a pistol-grip handle instead of a knurled handle. The model switch loses its Catalog listed identity and is now given an unlisted catalog number such as: 16SB1BB438SSM2P. If other changes, such as adding a Yale lock or making a tandem switch are involved, then an unlisted catalog number will be assigned, such as: 117A800G1X2.
NOTE: Any change in the characteristics of the model switch will require the assigning of an unlisted catalog number. Typical changes involve: 1. handle (pistol grip to oval or knurled, etc) 2. operation (maintaining or spring return) 3. contacts (electrically separate to common connecting) 4. contact arrangement 5. escutcheon engraving 6. special mechanism (Yale lock, tandem, etc.)
JUMPERS
Greater switch flexibility can be achieved by use of jumpers ( Figs. 1a & 1b). When jumpers are ordered with the switch, they are supplied unassembled without additional cost. Jumpers may also be purchased separately and assembled on existing switches.
Fig. 1a. SBM jumpers
B. Unlisted Switches (Coded)

Example:16SB1BB300SSM2P engrave front view, 1-OFF2; refer to pages 399 and 400 for coding information 16SB1 = SB-1 switch BB = 2 stages, electrically separate contacts 300 = 3 positions (number assigned at the factory, also indicates contact arrangement) S = standard textolite cover S = standard escutcheon M = maintaining contact 2 = 2/16" or 1/8" panel P = pistol handle
C. Ordering Check List For convenience, check the following list of requirements that the factory must be furnished when a Type SB switch is ordered. Refer to pages 399 through 409, for descriptive information. Use ordering instructions and forms which are contained in GET-6169. Furnish the following information on each form and send to the factory with the requisition:
1. type of switch (SBM, SB-1, etc.) 2. type of handle (oval, pistol, etc.) NOTE: fixed black handles are furnished with the switch; removable handles must be ordered as a separate item by the purchaser 3. type of operation a. Maintained b. Spring return 4. panel thickness SBM 1/4" (standard) 1 and 1-1/2" (special order) SB-1, 9, 10 1/8" to 2" must be specified on order or switch will be supplied for 1/8" 5. escutcheon engraving 6. circuit designation plate engraving 7. jumpers (refer to fig. 1a or 1b) 8. locks (refer to fig. 1c)
Fig. 1b. SB-1, 9, 10 jumpers
LOCKS
Two different types of locks are available. Each allows the switch to be locked in one or more positions. One lock is built into the operating handle. The other lock is separately mounted on the panel above the switch, and when necessary, can be coordinated with a Kirk Key-interlock scheme. When it is necessary to lock switches in more than one position, a 45-degree space must be provided between adjacent locking positions. Therefore, eight is the maximum number of lock positions that can be furnished.
Fig. 1c. Locks for SB-1, SB-9, and SB-10
Unlisted Catalog-numbered Switches

This class of switches includes all the Type SBM and SB-1 switches which are not Catalog listed, plus all the Type SB-9 and SB-10 switches which are described on pages 406 and 408. These switches are designed to meet the customers specifications in regard to contact arrangement, type of handle, operation, escutcheon engraving, housing, and other special features that are available within the limits of the Type SB switch design. A. Unlisted Catalog Number
(Example) 10AB300 type SBM Switch 16SBMB3A02T1S2P1 type SBM switch 116A250G1X2 type SB-1 switch 367A900G1X2 type SB-1 switch 104A7045G1X2 type SB-9 switch 395A717G1X2 type SB-10 switch
20
It will be necessary for an engineer at the factory to check the original drawing to determine exactly what was furnished.
Kirk Yale key lock
Carbon lock
397

DIMENSIONS
Fig. 2. SB-1 switch with fixed handles (For estimating only) Fig. 3. Panel mounted type SB-9 switch
No. of Stages
Dimension in Inches Standard Cover Large Cover 12 Wires Out 24 Wires Out Top and 24 Wires Out Bottom Top and Bottom A B
7 7/16
Dimension in Inches No. Standard Cover Large Cover of 12 Wires Out 24 Wires Out Stages Top and 24 Wires Top and Bottom Out Bottom A B A B C C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 7/8 5 5/8 6 3/8 7 1/8 7 7/8 8 5/8 9 3/8 10 1/8 10 7/8 11 5/8 12 3/8 13 1/8 13 7/8 14 5/8 15 3/8 16 1/8 8 3/8 9 7/8 11 3/8 12 7/8 14 3/8 15 7/8 17 3/8 18 7/8 20 3/8 21 7/8 23 3/8 24 7/8 26 3/8 27 7/8 29 3/8 30 7/8 5 1/8 5 7/8 6 5/8 7 3/8 8 1/8 8 7/8 9 5/8 10 3/8 11 1/8 11 7/8 12 5/8 13 3/8 14 1/8 14 7/8 15 5/8 16 3/8 8 5/8 10 1/8 11 5/8 13 1/8 14 5/8 16 1/8 17 5/8 19 1/8 15 4 /16 20 5/8 22 1/8 23 5/8 25 1/8 26 5/8 28 1/8 29 5/8 31 1/8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Fig. 4. Panel-mounted type SB-10 switch
3 9/16 5 15/16 4 5/16 5 1/16 8 15/16 5 13/16 10 7/16 6 9/16 11 15/16 7 5/16 13 7/16 8 1/16 14 15/16 8 13/16 16 7/16 9 9/16 17 15/16 10 5/16 19 7/16 11 1/16 20 15/16 11 13/16 22 7/16 12 9/16 23 15/16 13 5/16 25 7/16 14 1/16 26 15/16 14 13/16 28 7/16 4 1/2
3 13/16 6 3/16 4 9/16 7 11/16 5 5/16 9 3/16 6 1/16 10 11/16 6 13/16 12 3/16 7 9/16 13 11/16 8 5/16 15 3/16 9 1/16 16 11/16 9 13/16 18 3/16 10 9/16 19 11/16 11 5/16 21 3/16 12 1/16 22 11/16 12 13/16 24 3/16 13 9/16 25 11/16 14 5/16 27 3/16 15 1/16 28 11/16 4 15/16
4 1/2
20
No. Dimension in Inches of Standard Cover Large Cover Stages A B C A B C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 3/4 6 3/4 7 1/2 8 1/4 9 9 3/4 10 1/2 11 1/4 12 12 3/4 13 1/2 14 1/4 12 1/2 12 1/2 14 15 1/2 17 18 1/2 20 21 1/2 23 24 1/2 26 27 1/2 7 7 7 3/4 8 1/2 9 1/4 10 10 3/4 11 1/2 12 1/4 13 13 3/4 14 1/2 12 3/4 12 3/4 14 1/4 15 3/4 17 1/4 18 3/4 4 15/16 20 1/4 21 3/4 23 1/4 24 3/4 26 1/4 27 3/4
For spring-return switches when more than three and less than seven contacts close in the normal handle position, add 3/4" to A and 1-1/2" to B. When seven or more contacts close in the normal handle position, add 1-1/2" to A and 3" to B. For pull-to-lock or pull-to-turn add 3/4" to A dimension and 1-1/2" to B dimension. Includes both lateral and rotary stages.
Note: Removable handles are similar to fixed handles and available in all types except radial and the locking handle. They do not alter switch dimensions or panel drilling.
4 1/2
SHIPPING WEIGHTS
Type SB-1 (1 stage) 2 lbs Type SB-9 (1 stage) 3 lbs Add 6 oz for each additional stage. Type SB-10 (1 stage) 3-1/2 lbs Add 6 oz for each additional stage.
398

SB-1 AND SB-9 UNLISTED SWITCHES ORDERING
The guide below is for unlisted switches which are numbered at the factory. Use it only as a guide to identify catalog numbers assigned by the factory.
Basic switch Code letters Special features only Design type common to all SB-1 switches Design type common to all SB-9 switches 1 stage 2 stages 3 stages 4 stages 5 stages 6 stages 7 stages 8 stages 9 stages 10 stages 11 stages 12 stages 13 stages 14 stages 15 stages 16 stages All fixed contacts thus: O| |O| |O All fixed contacts thus: O| |O O| |O All fixed contacts thus: O| || |O Misc. combinations of A, B, C, E, F & G and single contacts (see example ) All fixed contacts thus: O| |O| |O All fixed contacts thus: O| |O O| |O All fixed contacts thus: O| || |O Misc. combinations of A, B, C, E, F & G and single contacts (see example ) All fixed contacts thus: O| |O O| |O Misc. combinations of A, B, C, E, F & G and single contacts (see example ) Cont. development, factory assigned; first digit 1-8 shows number of positions rest of number is a sequential number (3 or 4 digit number) Standard cover Large cover For obsolete cover features see Escutcheon (see table 1) Spring return or maintaining contacts (see table 2 for SB-1; see table 3 for SB-9) Panel thickness: indicate number of 1/16"; example: 2 = 1/8", 3 = 3/16", 4 = 1/4" etc.; 99 = no panel thickness involved Round handle V-6047044-1 Knurled handle K-6079120-1 Large pistol grip handle K-6208137-1 Small pistol grip handle K-6046074-1 Radial handle V-6047043-1 Oval handle K-6046075-1 Omit handle Lever V-6248034-1 Locking handle (carbon lock) For obsolete handle see P1 - P12: pull to lock H1 - H16: Palladium contacts: H1 = 1 stage, H2 = 2 stage, H3 = 3 stage... H16 = 16 stage For obsolete features see
* * * **** * * * * * ***
16SB1 16SB9 A B C D E F G H K L M N P R T U A B C D E F G H K M **** S L * * * * D K L P R V Y E C** * ** ** **
Notes: Basic number assigned by factory engineers only to identify a special contact arrangement Suffix added by factory engineers to complete switch to customers specifications Misc. combinations example: O| |O| |O
O| || |O O| |O O| |O O| |O| |O| |O
A = explosion proof; W = watertight & dusttight; P = oil-filled; M = large fabricated metal; D = slotted end cover; V1 = std. vert. split; V2 = lg. vert. split; H1 = std. horiz. split; H2 = lg. horiz. split Switches ordered for 1/16" to 3/16" will be supplied for 1/8" panel mounting which will accommodate this range W = watertight handle Sequential latch: S1 = latching in CW & CCW positions; S2 = will prevent repeated CCW throw; S3 = will prevent repeated CW throw Right angle drive: A1 = switch mounted to the left; A2 = switch mounted to the right; A3 = switch mounted up; A4 = switch mounted down Palladium contacts: X1 = 1 - 4 stages; X2 = 5 - 8 stages; X3 = 9 - 12 stages; X4 = 13 - 16 stages (see H1, H2, etc. for up-to-date nomenclature usage) Ratchet mechanism: R1 = CW; R2 = CCW
20
399

SB-1 AND SB-9 UNLISTED SWITCHES ORDERING
Table 1: SB-1 or SB-9 Escutcheon
Code Escutcheon Number Typical Model Handle No. Throw
Table 2: SB-1 Spring Return and Maintaining

Code Description
Table 3: SB-9 Spring Return and Maintaining

Code Description
20
Handle Removable in Vertical Position A 6016164-3 16SB1CC1 135 CW A -3 CC18 360 B -4 CC2 135 CW B -4 CC19 360 C -5 CC3 135 CW C -5 CC15 360 D -6 CC4 135 CW D -6 CC11 45 CW & CCW D -6 CC22 45 CCW D -6 CC27 360 E -7 CC5 45 CW E -7 CC12 75 CW E -7 CC13 45 CW & CCW E -7 CC20 360 E -7 CC25 75 CCW F -8 CC6 45 CW F -8 CC14 45 CW & CCW F -8 CC24 360 G -9 CC7 45 CW I Eng. G -9 CC8 45 CCW R Eng. G -9 CC17 45 CCW G -9 CC26 135 CCW G -9 CC29 45 CW G -9 CC21 360 H -10 CC23 360 H -10 CC9 45 CW I Eng. H -10 CC10 45 CCWREng. H -10 CC31 45 CW H -10 CC32 45 CCW J -23 CC18 360 Y -24 CC19 360 Z -25 CC21 360 Handle Removable 90 CCW K 6016164-11 16SB1CC1 135 CW K -11 CC18 360 L -12 CC2 135 CW, L -12 CC19 360 M -13 CC3 135 CW M -13 CC15 360 N -14 CC11 45 CW & CCW N -14 CC27 360 N -14 CC4 135 CW N -14 CC22 45 CCW Fixed Handle P 6016164-60 Pull to Lock (Target) R 6016164-15 Round S 6016164-1 Standard T 6402670G* Target U Omit Escutcheon V Special Escutcheon Removable Handle W Omit Escutcheon X(00) Special Escutcheon
* Number to be assigned
A B C D E F G H K L M P R
S T U
Combination of Spring Return and Maintaining Contact S.R. from 45 CW to normal S.R. from 45 CCW to normal S.R. from 45 CW to normal (one extra stage) S.R. from 45 CCW to normal (one extra stage) S.R. from 90 CW to normal S.R. from 90 CCW to normal S.R. from 90 CW to normal (one extra stage) S.R. from 90 CCW to normal (one extra stage) S.R. from 45 CW to normal (two extra stages) S.R. from 45 CCW to normal 2 (two extra stages) Maintaining contacts Pull To Lock S.R. from 45 CW & CCW to normal, pull to lock in 45 CCW, then turn to 75 CCW & pull to lock S.R. all positions except when locked, pull to lock at 75 CCW Spring Return Only S.R. from all positions to normal S.R. from all positions to normal (one extra stage) S.R. from all positions to normal 2 (two extra stages)
Maintaining Except S.R. from 45 CW to Normal S.R. from 45 CCW to Normal Same as A but has 1 extra stage for extra spring Same as B but has 1 extra stage for extra spring S.R. from 75 CW to 45 CW & from 75 CCW to 45 CCW Maintaining M Maintaining Contact for all 45 Positions N Maintaining Contact for all 30 Positions K Maintaining Contact for 60 Positions V Maintaining Contact for all 37-1/2 Positions L Maintaining Contact for all 75 Positions E V 90 F + 90 X Special Spring Return S S.R. for all Combinations of 30, 37-1/2, 45, 60, 75, 90 CW & CCW T Same as S but has 1 extra stage for extra spring Spring Return with Provision for Intermediate Temporary Contact Position at the Half Way Point U S.R. 90 CW & CCW temp. feel 30 & 60 W S.R. from 90 CW or CCW or both Y S.R. from 60 CW or CCW or both Z S.R. from 75 CW or CCW or both A B C D J
Abbreviations S.R. = Spring Return CW = Clockwise CCW =Counterclockwise
Abbreviations S.R. = Spring Return CW = Clockwise CCW =Counterclockwise Symbols
= one extra stage for torsion spring = two extra stages for additional torsion springs
400
SB-1
Applications
I I
Control of electrically operated circuit breakers, valves, motors, etc. Transfer current and potential to instruments and relays
DESIGN INFORMATION
Type SB-1 Switches are rotary, camoperated devices for the control of electrically operated circuit breakers, small motors, magnetic switches and similar devices. Another important use is for the transfer of current and potential for meters, instruments, and relays. Also, there are many general control applications for which this switch can be used. Type SB-1 Switches are built up in a series of individual stages, each nested into the other with a common fixed contact support, operating shaft, and front and rear supports. The stack is held together with two tie bolts threaded into the front support. Each stage consists of an insulating barrier carrying one or two moving contacts and three operating cams. Rotation of the shaft moves the cams directly against the contact arms so that positive high pressure results at the contact. Contact action is not dependent on springs. Silver-to-silver contacts operate with a positive wiping action to provide low-resistance movement. The contacts can be removed independently of the other switch parts this permits easy replacement. Barriers between adjacent contacts prevent arcing between circuits. The switch, complete with a Textolite cover, is furnished for mounting on panels from 1/8 to 2" thick. The Textolite cover meets NEMA I requirements for panel mounting. The SB-1 Switch has the following features:
(a)maximum 16 stages (32 contacts): each stage houses two contacts which are available in any combination of: electrically common; electrically separate; or doublebreak contacts (b)maximum 12 positions: 90, 75, 60, 45, 37-1/2, 36, 30 between positions (c)eight types of fixed handles: knurled, oval, radial, round, lever and three types pistol grip (small, large, and locked handle) (d)removable handles: the standard handle is oval. knurled and pistol handles are also available; for description of handles, refer to GET-6169 (e)escutcheon: 1. standard (R) (360 rotation max 12 positions) 2. standard (S) (180 rotation max 7 positions) 3. target (T) mechanically operated shows last operated position on the switch; when the handle is turned to the left (45) position, a green target appears at 12 oclock. When the handle is turned to the right (45) position, a red target appears at 12 oclock
Features
Standard mounts on panels up to 3/16" (up to 2" available) Up to 16 stages (32 contacts) Tandem mechanisms available Yale lock or locking handle available Silver to silver positive wiping action contacts Rated 600 V, 20 A continuous (250 A for 3 seconds) Palladium contacts for low level instrument circuits available Pull-to-lock and pull-to-turn actions available Up to 12 positions, 360 rotation 4 types of escutcheons (switch face plates) 8 types of fixed handles (black only) 3 types of removable handles Maintained or spring return switch action NEMA I cover UL Recognized
20
GE Power Management
401
SB-1 Control and Transfer Switches

DESIGN INFORMATION
4. modified standard (for removable handles) (f) two types of operation: 1. maintained action all positions 2. spring return with following limitations: a. the handle must return to the 12 oclock position b. the maximum throw is 90 to either side of the 12 oclock position c. a combination of spring return and maintained contact can be provided on the same switch but this action is limited to: 1. spring return from 45 clockwise or 90 clockwise to 0, and maintaining the equivalent counterclockwise position 2. spring return from 45 counterclockwise or 90 counterclockwise to 0, and maintaining the equivalent clockwise position 3. five position switch with 45 positioning with partial spring return from 90 to 45 clockwise and counterclockwise only, maintaining in both 45 positions; return to 0 position by hand only (g)tandem mechanisms refer to GET-6169 (h)yale or locking handle refer to GET-6169 (i) Other special mechanisms refer to GET-6169
RATINGS
Type SB-1 Switches are rated for a mechanical life of one million operations. The electrical ratings are 600 VDC and VAC, 20 A continuous, or 250 A for three sec. The interrupting rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit, and the number of contacts connected in series, as indicated in the table. Contacts can be paralleled when current exceeds 20 A.
INTERRUPTING RATINGS Inductive Circuit Noninductive Circuit Number of Contacts 1 2 in Series 4 in Series 1 2 in Series 4 in Series Interrupting Rating (A)
6 5 2.5 .75 .25 40 25 12 6 30 25 11 2 .45 75 50 25 12 40 25 8 1.35 4 3 2 .7 .15 24 12 5 4 20 15 6.25 1.75 .35 50 25 12 10 30 25 9.5 6.5 1.25 40 20 15
Circuit Volts
Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit. For circuits having high values of inductance, refer application to your GE representative for recommendations.
MODEL SWITCH LISTINGS

Listed model switches are shown below. Any change in the characteristics such as: contact arrangement, position location, handle type, escutcheon engraving or housing from those shown on these pages will cause the switch to be placed on the unlisted line of switches. Application VOLTMETER
DP-ST (1 source) DP-DT (1 source) 3, phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral 3, phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral 3, 4-W, phase-to-neutral 2-3, 3-W Circuits
Model # Stages
SB1CA1 SB1CE27 SB1CF11 SB1CF16 SB1CF22 SB1CF23 SB1CA7 SB1CA15 SB1CA18 SB1CA19 SB1CA20 SB1CE25 SB1CF17 1 2 2 4 2 4 6 6 3 3 2 2 6
Application AMMETER-VOLTMETER
3, 3-W, phase-to-phase + 3 independent CTs Ckts 3, 4-W, phase-to-neutral + 3 independent CTs Ckts 3, 3-W, phase-to-phase, 3CTs (end of secondary) 3, 4-W, phase-to-neutral, 3CTs (end of secondary)
Model # Stages
Application BREAKER CONTROL (cont)

Red and green target Red and green target Red and green target Red and green target Red and green target Red and green target Red and green target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target Pull-to-Lock, target
Model # Stages
SB1B10 SB1B11 SB1B14 SB1B15 SB1B16 SB1B17 SB1B18 SB1B19 SB1B20 SB1B21 SB1B22 SB1B23 SB1B24 SB1B25 SB1B26 4 1 3 4 5 5 5 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 6
SB1CA21 SB1CA23 SB1CA24 SB1CA25 SB1B1 SB1B2 SB1B3 SB1B4 SB1B6 SB1B7 SB1B9
9 8 5 5 2 4 1 1 3 2 3
20
AMMETER
3 Independent circuits 3 Independent circuits + Off 3 CTs (end of secondary) 3 CTs (end of secondary) + Off 2 CTs (end of secondary) 2 CTs (end of secondary) + Off 4 Independent circuits + Off
BREAKER CONTROL
Red and green target Red and green target Trip switch, Contacts N.O. Trip switch, Contacts N.C. Operate 2 breakers (target) Substitute for P.B. station Red and green target
Pull to lock feature. Temperature meter switches; palladium contacts.
402

Application Model # Stages WATT METER AND POWER FACTOR
3 Current coils 3 Current coils 2 Current coils 2 Current coils Reversing switch Reversing switch 2 CTs and 2 PTs 1 CT and 2 PTs 1 CT and 2 PTs 1 CT and 2 PTs 1 CT and 2 PTs SB1CB13 SB1CF8 SB1CB12 SB1CF7 SB1CA10 SB1CB4 SB1CB14 SB1CA26 SB1CF6 SB1CA22 SB1CA8 SB1CF9 SB1CB15 SB1CB5 SB1A1 SB1AA1 SB1CG44 SB1CE33 SB1CE28 SB1CE29 SB1CE61 SB1CE52 5 5 3 3 4 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 6 4 6 6 6
Application Model # Stages TEMPERATURE METER (cont.)

3-W to 3 Coils and Test and Off 3-W to 3 Coils and Test and Off 2-W to 3 Coils and Test and Off 2-W to 3 Coils and Test and Off SB1CE63 SB1CE55 SB1CE62 SB1CE57 SB1CG1 SB1CG2 SB1CG3 SB1CG4 SB1CG5 SB1CG6 SB1CG7 SB1CG8 SB1CG9 SB1CG10 SB1CG11 SB1CG12 SB1CG13 SB1CG14 SB1CG15 SB1CG16 SB1CG17 SB1CG18 SB1CG19 6 6 4 4 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 1 2 2 3 3 4
Application Model # Stages MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES (cont)

4P DT and Off 5P DT and Off 5P DT and Off 6P DT and Off 6P DT and Off SP DT DP DT 3P DT 4P DT 5P DT 6P DT 7P DT SP 3T SP 4T SP 5T SP 6T SP 7T SP 8T SP 10T SP 12T DP 4T DP 6T DP 8T DP 12T SB1CG20 SB1CG21 SB1CG22 SB1CG23 SB1CG24 SB1CG25 SB1CG26 SB1CG27 SB1CG28 SB1CG29 SB1CG30 SB1CG31 SB1CG32 SB1CG33 SB1CG34 SB1CG35 SB1CG36 SB1CG37 SB1CG38 SB1CG39 SB1CG40 SB1CG41 SB1CG42 SB1CG43 4 5 5 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 4 6 8 12
MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES
S or DP ST S or DP ST 3 or 4P ST 3 or 4P ST 5 or 6P ST 5 or 6P ST 7 or 8P ST 7 or 8P ST 9 or 10P ST 9 or 10P ST 11 or 12P ST 11 or 12P ST SP DT and Off SP DT and Off DP DT and Off DP DT and Off 3P DT and Off 3P DT and Off 4P DT and Off
SYNCHRONIZING
Machine to bus Between machines, no PTs Between machines
MOTOR CONTROL
Governor or rheostat motor control Split-field motors With target
TEMPERATURE METER
2-W to 5 Coils and Test 2-W to 3 Coils and Test 3-W to 3 Coils and Test 2-W to 4 Coils and Test and Off 2-W to 4 Coils and Test and Off
Removable handle required with switch. Refer to GET-6169 for type of handle. Order as separate item.
Temperature meter switches; palladium contacts.
SELECTION GUIDE FOR CONTROL AND TRANSFER SWITCHES

MODEL NUMBER STAGE HANDLE
SB1A1 SB1A2 SB1A4 SB1A5 SB1A6 SB1AA1 SB1AA2 SB1B1 SB1B2 SB1B3 SB1B4 SB1B5 SB1B6 SB1B7 SB1B8 SB1B9 SB1B10 SB1B11 SB1B12 SB1B13 SB1B14 SB1B15 SB1B16 SB1B17 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 4 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 5 5 R D P V P P P P P P P P P P V P P P P P P P P P
ENGRAVING
RAISE-(blank)-LOWER RAISE-(blank)-LOWER RAISE-OFF-LOWER RAISE-OFF-LOWER LOWER-(blank)-RAISE RAISE-(blank)-LOWER REVERSE-(blank)-FORWARD TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE (blank)-TRIP (blank)-TRIP (blank)-TRIP TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE OFF-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE
SPECIAL FEATURES
PULL

SB1B18 SB1B19 SB1B20 SB1B21 SB1B22 SB1B23 SB1B24 SB1B25 SB1B26 SB1B27 SB1B28 SB1BA1 SB1BA2 SB1BB1 SB1BB2 SB1BB3 SB1BB4 SB1BB5 SB1BB6 SB1BB8 SB1C1 SB1C2 SB1C3 SB1C4 5 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 6 3 4 2 4 2 4 6 6 8 5 4 3 3 3 3 P P P P P P P P P P P V V P P P P P P P K * * *
ENGRAVING
TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE AUTO-OFF-HAND AUTO-OFF AUTO-OFF AUTO-MAN AUTO-OFF TRIP-(target)-CLOSE TRIP-(target)-CLOSE OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1)
SPECIAL FEATURES
PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL *SB1CC1 *SB1CC2 *SB1CC3
20
403

SB1C5 SB1C6 SB1C7 SB1C8 SB1C9 SB1C10 SB1CA1 SB1CA2 SB1CA3 SB1CA4 SB1CA5 SB1CA6 SB1CA7 SB1CA8 SB1CA9 SB1CA10 SB1CA11 SB1CA12 SB1CA13 SB1CA14 SB1CA15 SB1CA16 SB1CA17 SB1CA18 SB1CA19 SB1CA20 SB1CA21 SB1CA22 SB1CA23 SB1CA24 SB1CA25 SB1CA26 SB1CA27 SB1CA28 SB1CA29 SB1CB1 SB1CB2 SB1CB3 SB1CB4 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 6 2 4 4 6 6 6 3 6 3 3 3 3 2 9 2 8 5 5 3 2 6 9 4 6 6 4 2 2 4 4 12 3 3 * K * * * * K * * * * K K * * K * * * P K * * K K K K K K K K K V K K * * * K * * * * K * *
ENGRAVING
OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 IN-(blank)-OUT 1-OFF-2-3 1-OFF-2-3 1-OFF-2-3 1-OFF-2-OFF-3 1-OFF-2-OFF-3 1-OFF-2-3 1-OFF-2-3 1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-ON OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-ON (blank)-1-2 OFF-1-2-3-4-5-6 OFF-1-2-3-4-5-6 OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON W-OFF-RVA R-(blank)-I R-(blank)-I OFF-ON OFF-ON 1-2-3-4 R-(blank)-I R-(blank)-l
SPECIAL FEATURES
*SB1CC4 *SB1CC1 *SB1CC2 *SB1CC3 *SB1CC4 *SB1CC1 *SB1CC2 *SB1CC5 *SB1CC5 6119795G60 6119795G61 6119795G62 *6119795G60 *6119795G61 *SB1CC6 *SB1CC6 *SB1CC6 *SB1CC7(I) *SB1CC8(R) *SB1CC9(I) *SB1CC10(R) *SB1CC7 *SB1CC9 *SB1CC7(I) *SB1CC8(R) *SB1CC9(I) *SB1CC10(R)

SB1CB12 SB1CB13 SB1CB14 SB1CB15 SB1CB16 SB1CD1 SB1CE1 SB1CE2 SB1CE3 SB1CE4 SB1CE5 SB1CE6 SB1CE7 SB1CE8 SB1CE9 SB1CE10 SB1CE11 SB1CE12 SB1CE13 SB1CE14 SB1CE15 SB1CE16 SB1CE17 SB1CE18 SB1CE19 SB1CE20 SB1CE21 SB1CE22 SB1CE23 SB1CE24 SB1CE25 SB1CE26 SB1CE27 SB1CE28 SB1CE29 SB1CE33 SB1CE34 SB1CE35 SB1CE36 SB1CE37 SB1CE38 SB1CE39 SB1CE40 SB1CE41 SB1CE42 SB1CE43 SB1CE44 SB1CE45 3 5 4 2 3 6 1 3 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 6 8 12 8 12 3 3 3 6 3 4 5 4 2 3 2 4 2 4 6 6 2 3 4 6 4 6 2 3 2 4 5 3 K K K * * K P P P P * * P P K K K K K K P K P P K K P K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
ENGRAVING
OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON R-(blank)-I OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 OFF-ON REV-OFF-FOR 1-2-3-4 OFF-TEST 1-OFF-2 (blank)-OFF-(blank) STOP-(blank)-RUN 1-2-3 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 OFF-1-2-3-OFF-4-5-6 OFF-1-2-3-4-5-OFF-6-7-8-9-10 OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON START-OFF-RUN LOCAL-OFF-SUP. OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 1-2 IN-OUT 1-2-3 1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 1-OFF-2 TEST-1-2-3 TEST-1-2-3 TEST-1-2-3-4-5 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 OFF-1 OFF-1 OFF-1 OFF-1 OFF-1 OFF-1
SPECIAL FEATURES
*SB1CC7(I) *SB1CC8(R) *SB1CC11 *SB1CC11 *SB1CC11 Pall. Pall. Pall.
20
SB1CB5 SB1CB6 SB1CB7 SB1CB8 SB1CB9 SB1CB10 SB1CB11
404

SB1CE46 SB1CE47 SB1CE48 SB1CE49 SB1CE50 SB1CE51 SB1CE52 SB1CE53 SB1CE54 SB1CE55 SB1CE56 SB1CE57 SB1CE58 SB1CE59 SB1CE60 SB1CE61 SB1CE62 SB1CE63 SB1CE64 SB1CE65 SB1CE66 SB1CE67 SB1CF1 SB1CF2 SB1CF3 SB1CF4 SB1CF5 SB1CF6 SB1CF7 SB1CF8 SB1CF9 SB1CF10 SB1CF11 SB1CF12 SB1CF13 SB1CF14 SB1CF15 SB1CF16 SB1CF17 SB1CF18 SB1CF19 SB1CF20 SB1CF21 6 1 8 5 3 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 2 3 6 4 6 14 14 9 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 6 6 6 3 3 K K K K K K * * * * * * K P P K K K K K K K K * * * * * * * * * K * * * * K K * * * *
ENGRAVING
OFF-1 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-TEST-1-2-3-4 OFF-TEST-1-2-3-4 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 1-TEST-2 ST-R-N-T T-TLB-N-RLB-R-ST OFF-TEST-1-2-3-4 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 OFF-TEST-1-2-3 EQUIP (1) - EQUIP (1-2) - EQUIP (2) MAN-AUTO OFF-TEST-1-2-3-4-5 OFF-TEST-1-2-3-4-5-6 OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) 1-2-3 OFF-1-2-3-4 OFF-1-2-3-4 OFF-1-2-3-4 OFF-ON OFF-ON
SPECIAL FEATURES
Pall. *SB1CC19 Pall. *SB1CC21 Pall. *SB1CC18 Pall. *SB1CC19 Pall. *SB1CC18 Pall. *SB1CC19 Pall. Pall. Pall. Pall. Pall. Pall. *SB1CC1 *SB1CC2 *SB1CC3 *SB1CC4 *SB1CC5 *SB1CC6 *SB1CC6 *SB1CC7 *SB1CC9 *SB1CC1 *SB1CC2 *SB1CC3 *SB1CC4 *SB1CC20 *SB1CC24 *SB1CC7 *SB1CC9

SB1CF22 SB1CF23 SB1CF24 SB1CG1 SB1CG2 SB1CG3 SB1CG4 SB1CG5 SB1CG6 SB1CG7 SB1CG8 SB1CG9 SB1CG10 SB1CG11 SB1CG12 SB1CG13 SB1CG14 SB1CG15 SB1CG16 SB1CG17 SB1CG18 SB1CG19 SB1CG20 SB1CG21 SB1CG22 SB1CG23 SB1CG24 SB1CG25 SB1CG26 SB1CG27 SB1CG28 SB1CG29 SB1CG30 SB1CG31 SB1CG32 SB1CG33 SB1CG34 SB1CG35 SB1CG36 SB1CG37 SB1CG38 SB1CG39 SB1CG40 SB1CG41 SB1CG42 SB1CG43 SB1CG44 2 4 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 1 2 2 1 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 4 6 8 12 1 K K V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
ENGRAVING
OFF-1-2-3 OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2-3 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4-5 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6-7 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12 STOP-(target)-START
SPECIAL FEATURES

20
SPECIAL FEATURES NOTES - = None Pull = Pull-to-lock * = Made for removable handle handle must be ordered separately Pall. = Palladium contacts

405
Rotary switch for frequent control of circuit breaker, motor, or magnetic switch.
SB-9
Master Control Switches
Applications
I I
Steel mills, petroleum/chemical plants, power plants, heavy industries Repetitive positive positioning operation (thousands/week)
Features
I I I I I
APPLICATIONS
The SB-9 master control switches are recommended for applications requiring a large number of repetitive operations with positive positioning on each operation. This switch was designed primarily for use in steel mills, petroleum and chemical plants, and similar heavy industries where thousands of operations with positive positioning are required per week. The SB-9 switches have the following characteristics:
(a) maximum of 16 stages (32 contacts): each stage houses two contacts which are available in any combination: electrically common; electrically separate or double break (b) maximum of 12 positions: 90, 75, 60, 45, 37 1/2, 36, or 30 between positions. (c) handles: normally furnished with a large black pistol grip, but can be furnished with any of the standard handles used with the SB-1 switch including removable handles (d) escutcheon: same as type SB-1 switch (e) operation: 1. maintained action all positions 2. spring return same as type SB-1 switch (f) additional accessories and optional features: all special features listed for the SB-1 switch can be incorporated into the SB-9 switch; refer to GET-6169
I I I I I I I I I I I I I
CONSTRUCTION
The Type SB-9 switch is shown above. The contacts and stages of this switch are similar to the SB-1 switch except the SB-9 switch has a more positive positioning device, better insulation to ground, and more substantial end bearings. The positioning device is located at the rear of the switch.
Standard mounts on panels up to 3/16" (up to 2" available) Up to 16 stages (32 contacts) Tandem mechanisms available Yale lock or locking handle available Silver to silver positive wiping action contacts Rated 600 V, 20 A continuous (250 A for 3 sec) Palladium contacts for low level instrument circuits available Pull-to-lock and pull-to-turn actions available More positive positioning than SB-1 Better insulation to ground than SB-1 More substantial bearings than SB-1 Up to 12 positions, 360 rotation 4 types of escutcheons (switch face plates) 8 types of fixed handles 3 types of removable handles Maintained or spring return switch action NEMA 1 cover UL recognized
20
406
GE Power Management

RATINGS
Type SB-9 Switches are rated 600 VDC and VAC, 20 A continuous or 250 A for three sec. INTERRUPTING RATINGS Noninductive Circuit Circuit Volts
Inductive
HOW TO ORDER
Request the SB Control and Transfer Switches Guide, publication number GET6169F.
Via
Circuit 4 in Series
30 25 9.5 6.5 1.25 40 20 15
1
6 5 2.5 0.75 .25 40 25 12 6
2 in Series
30 25 11 2 .45 75 50 25 12
Number of Contacts 4 in Series 1 Interrupting Rating (A)

40 25 8 1.35 4 3 2 0.7 .15 24 12 5 4
2 in Series
20 15 6.25 1.75 .35 50 25 12 10
Fax: (905) 201-2098 E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.com Your local sales rep: (see sales offices at end of this catalog) Internet: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
Values of inductance equal to that of the average trip circuit. For circuits having high values of inductance, refer application to your GE representative for recommendations.
20

See pages 15 - 18.
407
Rotary/lateral switches for circuit breaker control, motor control or instrument transfer.
SB-10
Applications
I I I
Control of electrically-operated circuit breakers, valves, motors, etc. Transfer current and potential to instruments and relays Lateral action eliminates second separate switch
Features
I
APPLICATIONS
The SB-10 switch provides two electrically separate and mechanically independent switches in one device. It utilizes both lateral and rotary contacts all constructed on the same switch. Type SB-10 switches are used to control electrically operated circuit breakers, small motors, magnetic switches, etc., and to transfer meter, instrument, and relay circuits. In applications such as motor control, the lateral contacts are used to eliminate the need for a separate Start-Stop push-button station. on the same stage open or close together. A spring can be furnished so that one of the positions is spring return. Operations of the SB-10 switch are listed in the table below. The rotary stages have the same construction and operation as the SB-1 switch. When a switch is furnished with both lateral and rotary spring return, the lateral spring can be loaded in the 12 oclock rotary position only. The rotary operation is restricted to spring return to the 12 oclock position also. Interlocks may be provided so lateral contacts can be operated only in specific rotary positions. Similarly, interlocks may be provided to limit operation of rotary contacts to only one lateral position. If interlocks are not used, the switch can be operated laterally in any of the rotary positions. The same style of fixed handles and escutcheons used on SB-1 switches may also be used with the SB-10 switch. The drilling plans and mounting dimensions are the same. Note: The SB-10 switch cannot be furnished with locking handles.
CONSTRUCTION
20
The Type SB-10 switch is similar to the Type SB-1 switch except for the addition of lateral contacts. A maximum of four stages of lateral contacts is available on each switch, but the maximum number of stages on the SB-10 switch, including the rotary contacts, is 12. The lateral contacts are located at the handle end of the switch, and they operate independently of the rotary contacts. There are only two lateral positions in or out. Contacts may be closed in either position, and the contacts
2 electrically separate & mechanically independent switches in one device Standard mounts on panels up to 3/16" (up to 2" available) Up to 12 stages (24 contacts) of rotary contacts (includes lateral and rotary) Up to 4 stages (8 contacts) of lateral contacts (in-out action) Lateral action interlock with rotary position available Tandem mechanisms available Yale lock above handle available Silver to silver positive wiping action contacts Rated 600 V, 20 A continuous (250 A for 3 sec) Palladium contacts for low level instrument circuits available Up to 12 rotary positions, 360 rotation 3 types of escutcheons (switch face plates) 7 types of fixed handles Maintained or spring return switch action NEMA 1 cover UL Recognized
408
GE Power Management

OPERATIONS OF TYPE SB-10 SWITCHES
Lateral Operation
One Lateral Stage Pull-to-open contacts 1-2 ............................Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull-to-close contacts 1-2 .............................Maintaining or spring return in or out Two Lateral Stages Pull-to-open contacts 1-4 .............................Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull-to-close contacts 1-4 .............................Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull-to-open contacts 1-2 and close 3-4......Maintaining or spring return in or out Three Lateral Stages Pull-to-open contacts 1-6 .............................Maintaining or spring return in Pull-to-close contacts 1-6 .............................Maintaining or spring return out Pull-to-open contacts 1-4 and close 5-6......Maintaining or spring return in or out Pull-to-open contacts 1-2 and close 3-6......Maintaining or spring return in or out Four lateral Stages Pull-to-open contacts 1-8 .............................Maintaining or spring return in Pull-to-close contacts 1-8 .............................Maintaining or spring return out Pull-to-open contacts 1-6 and close 7-8......Maintaining or spring return in Pull-to-open contacts 1-2 and close 3-8......Maintaining or spring return out Pull-to-open contacts 1-4 and close 5-8......Maintaining or spring return in or out
NOTE: Pull-to-open denotes the same contact action as push-to-close. Pull-to-close denotes the same contact action as push-to-open. NOTE: Limitation for lateral contacts: Three stages will not work in pull-to-close 1-6. Four stages will not work in push-to-close 1-8. Four stages will not work in push-to-close 1-6. Four stages will not work in pull-to-close 1-2. Four stages will not work in pull-to-close 1-8. Four stages will not work in pull-to-close 3-8.
HOW TO ORDER
Request the Selection and Application Guide for SB Control and Transfer Switches, publication number GET6169E.
Via
Fax: (905) 201-2098 E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.com Your local sales rep (see sales offices at end of this catalog) Internet: www.GEindustrial.com/pm
Rotary Operation
Same as Type SB-1 Switch. For typical contact diagrams, refer to GET-6169.
20

See pages 15 - 18.
409
SBM
Applications
I I I
Control of electric-operated circuit breakers, valves, motors, etc. Transfer current and potential to instruments and relays Limited space applications
Features
I I I I I I I I
DESIGN INFORMATION
The SBM switch is a rotary camoperated device for panel mounting only and for applications where space is at a premium. The standard line of switches is suitable for mounting on panels up to and including 1/4". Switches may be specially ordered for 1 and 1 1/2" mounting. The compact design and the angled terminal connections allow centerline-to-centerline mounting of only three inches. design reduces arcing and subsequent pitting of the contacts. This compact design has the following features:
a. maximum of 10 stages (20 contacts) b. double-surface cams: one cam for each contact one surface for opening, the other surface for closing; opening and closing action does not depend on springs c. self-enclosed stages: eliminates the need for a separate cover; a small opening is provided at the bottom of each stage for quick contact inspection d. maximum of eight positions: 45 and 90 between positions e. eight types of fixed, black handles: knurled, oval, radial, round, lever and three types pistol grip (small, large)
I I I I I I I I
Compact design Up to 10 stages (20 contacts) Double surface cams (one cam per contact) Add-a-stage feature for adding up to two stages Electrically separate and mechanically independent double-break contacts Standard mounts on panels up to 1/4" (up to 1.5" available) Rated 600 V, 20 A continuous Silver to silver positive wiping action contacts Pull-to-lock action available Up to 8 positions, 360 rotation 3 types of escutcheons (switch face plates) 8 types of fixed handles 3 types of removable handles Handles to match SB-1 available Maintained or spring return switch action UL recognized
20
The SBM switch consists of an operating handle and square shaft, an escutcheon plate, a positioning chamber, a front support, and a series of individual stages each nestled into the other forming its own enclosure. Each stage houses two electrically separate and mechanically independent doublebreak contacts. The contacts have a positive wiping action of silver-tosilver contact buttons. Double-break
410
GE Power Management
SBM Control and Transfer Switches

DESIGN INFORMATION
f. three types of removable handles: pistol, oval, and knurled (SBM or SB-1 types) g. three types of escutcheons: 1. standard (8 positions) 2. target with red and green indicators 3. modified standard for removable handles h. two types of operation: 1. maintained action all positions 2. spring return action is limited to 90 clockwise and counterclock wise of the 12 oclock position; spring return action can be furnished from both sides to 12 oclock or from one side only with maintained action on the opposite side j. special mechanisms: a. add-a-stage b. pull-to-lock k. special enclosures: none available
ADD-A-STAGE FEATURE
A maximum of two additional stages (4 contacts) may be easily and economically added to an existing SBM switch. A 1/2" extension is provided on the rear of SBM switches with one to eight stages only. This extension permits the coupling of the add-a-stage unit when additional contacts are required.
RATINGS
The electrical ratings are 600 VDC or VAC, 20 A continuous. The interrupting rating depends upon the voltage and character of the circuit. The table below illustrates the interrupting duty of a single contact and contacts in series when various conditions exist on a circuit.
Interrupting Ratings
Noninductive Inductive Circuit Circuit Number of Contacts 2 in 2 in 1 1 series circuit
10 8 5 1 .4 40 25 20 15 30 25 15 3 .8 75 50 30 25 8 6 4 1 .3 24 12 10 8 25 18 10 2.5 .7 50 25 20 12
Add-A-Stage Units
No. 888B212G1 - 2 contacts No. 888B212G2 - 1 contact No. 888B212G3 - 4 contacts No. 888B212G4 - 3 contacts
NOTE: Specify catalog number of original switch and the position(s) in which each adder contact is to close. Instruction Book GEI-68767 provides information on mounting the add-astage unit. 24 DC 48 DC 125 DC 250 DC 600 DC 115 AC 230 AC 460 AC 600 AC
Circuit Volts

Listed switches are shown on these pages. Any change in the characteristics such as contact arrangement, position location, handle type, or escutcheon engraving from those shown on these pages will cause the switch to be placed on the unlisted line of switches. Service, Poles, and Throws VOLTMETER
DP-ST DP-DT 3 4W phase-to-neutral 3 4W phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral 4 circuits 2 wires 3 4W phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral 2 3. 3W circuits
Model Stages No.

AA001 AA002 AA003 AA004 AA005 AA006 AA007 AA008 AA009 AA010 AA011 AA012 AA013 1 2 2 2 4 3 4 3 3 5 2 2 5
Service, Poles, and Throws WATTMETER

2 current coils 3 current coils 2 current and 2 potential coils
Model Stages No.

AA018 AA019 AA020 AA021 AA022 AA023 AA066 AA067 AA065 AA024 AA025 AA026 AA100 AA101 AA102 AA103 3 5 4 2 3 4 4 1 1 2 2 2 2 4 1 1
Service, Poles, and Throws BREAKER CONTROL (cont.)

Operate two breakers (target) Substitute for P.B. switch (target) Target Target Target Target Target Target Target Target With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target) With pull-to-lock (target)
Model Stages No.

AA104 AA105 AA106 AA107 AA108 AA109 AA110 AA111 AA112 AA113 AA114 AA115 AA116 AA117 AA118 AA119 AA120 AA121 AA122 AA123 AA124 3 2 3 1 3 4 4 5 5 5 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5
POWER FACTOR
One or two CT coils One CT and 2 PT coils Reversing switch
MOTOR CONTROL
Governor, rheostat Stop, start, target For split-field motors
AMMETER
3 CTS (end of secondary) 3 CTS (end of secondary) & off 3 independent circuits 2 CTS (end of secondary) 2 CTS (end of secondary) & off 3 independent circuits and off
20
SYNCHRONIZING
Machine to bus Running and incoming Between machines
AMMETER VOLTMETER
3-phase 3W phase-to-phase, 3 independent circuits 3-phase 4W phase-to-neutral, 3 independent circuits 3-phase 3W phase-to-phase, 3 independent circuits, end of secondary 3-phase 4W phase-to-neutral, 3 independent circuits, end of secondary AA014 AA015 7 6
BREAKER CONTROL
Close and trip (target) Close and trip and auxiliary contacts (target) Trip, contacts normally open Trip, contacts normally closed
AA016 AA017
5 5
Removable handle required with switch. Refer to GET-6169 for type of handle. Order as separate item.
411

Service, Poles, Model Stages and Throws No. MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES
S or DP-ST 3 or 4P-ST 5 or 6P-ST 7 or SP-ST 9 or 10P-ST 11 or 12P-ST SP-DT with off, DP-DT with off, 3P-DT with off, 4P-DT with off, Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return Maintained Spring return AA027 AA028 AA029 AA030 AA031 AA032 AA033 AA034 AA035 AA036 AA037 AA038 AA039 AA040 AA041 AA042 AA068 AA043 AA044 AA045 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
JUMPERS
Jumpers are furnished assembled, where required, on all standard listed switches. For special switches or unlisted switches, separate jumpers can be ordered from the table below (to be assembled by purchaser). No additional charge for extra jumpers to be used on these switches. It is recommended that the formed jumpers listed should be used wherever possible in preference to wire jumpers to accomplish the various electrical connections that may be required. Also, the formed jumper will provide greater flexibility when adapting the SBM switch to individual requirements. Jumpers ordered separately: Cat. No. 307V512P1 (Adjacent stage) Cat. No. 307V515P1 (Same stage)
Fig. 1. Jumper 307V512P1 Fig. 2. Jumper 307V515P1 (Adjacent stage) (Same stage)
Service, Poles, Model Stages and Throws No. MISCELLANEOUS SWITCHES (cont.)
5P-DT with off, Maintained Spring return 6P-DT with off, Maintained Spring return SP-DT DP-DT 3P-DT 4P-DT 5P-DT 6P-DT 7P-DT SP-3T SP-4T SP-5T SP-6T SP-7T SP-8T 2P-4T 2P-8T AA046 AA047 AA048 AA049 AA050 AA051 AA052 AA053 AA054 AA055 AA056 AA057 AA058 AA059 AA060 AA061 AA062 AA063 AA064 5 5 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 8

AA001 AA002 AA003 AA004 AA005 AA006 AA007 AA008 AA009 AA010 AA011 AA012 AA013 AA014 AA015 AA016 AA017 AA018 AA019 AA020 AA021 AA022 AA023 AA024 AA025 AA026 1 2 2 2 4 3 4 3 3 5 2 2 5 7 6 5 5 3 5 4 2 3 4 2 2 2 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K *23WW145 *23WL235 *23WR235 *23WL123 *23WR123
ENGRAVING
OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 OFF-1-2-3 OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-1-2-3-4 2-3-OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1)-OFF-1 (2-3)-(3-1)-OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1)-OFF-(1-2) 1-2-3 3-OFF-1-2 1-2-3 1-2-3 3-OFF-1-2 3-OFF-1-2 3-OFF-1-2 3-OFF-1-2 3-OFF-1-2 3-OFF-1-2 OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON IN-OUT OFF-ON R-OFF-I R-(blank)-I
SPECIAL FEATURES
* ** **

AA027 AA028 AA029 AA030 AA031 AA032 AA033 AA034 AA035 AA036 AA037 AA038 AA039 AA040 AA041 AA042 AA043 AA044 AA045 AA046 AA047 AA048 AA049 AA050 AA051 AA052 AA053 AA054 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 2 3 4 5 V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
ENGRAVING
OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-OFF-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
SPECIAL FEATURES

20
412

AA055 AA056 AA057 AA058 AA059 AA060 AA061 AA062 AA063 AA064 AA065 AA066 AA067 AA068 AA069 AA070 AA071 AA072 AA073 AA074 AA075 AA076 AA077 AA078 AA079 AA080 AA081 AA082 AA083 AA084 AA085 AA086 AA087 AA088 AA089 6 7 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 8 1 4 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 4 4 2 3 4 6 8 5 3 2 4 V V V V V V V V V V P L P V *21WW236 *23WW458 *23WW156 *23WW156 P P L V L V L V V K V V V K P V V
ENGRAVING
1-2 1-2 1-2-3 1-2-3-4 1-2-3-4-5 1-2-3-4-5-6 7-1-2-3-4-5-6 7-8-1-2-3-4-5-6 4-1-2-3 7-8-1-2-3-4-5-6 RAISE-(blank)-LOWER RAISE-(blank)-LOWER STOP-(blank)-START 1-OFF-2 OFF-(1-2)-(2-3)-(3-1) OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON TRIP-NOR TRIP-NOR LOWER-(blank)-RAISE LOWER-(blank)-RAISE LOWER-(blank)-RAISE LOWER-(blank)-RAISE LOWER-(blank)-RAISE LOWER-(blank)-RAISE OFF-MOTOR-M&G GEN-BATT-POS to GD-NEG to GD MAN-AUTO MAN-AUTO MAN-AUTO OFF-INT-ON NEAR END-NOR-FAR END-DIFF RS-REC-NOR SEND CHANNEL ON-CHANNEL OFF
SPECIAL FEATURES
* * * *

AA090 AA091 AA092 AA093 AA094 AA100 AA101 AA102 AA103 AA104 AA105 AA106 AA107 AA108 AA109 AA110 AA111 AA112 AA113 AA114 AA115 AA116 AA117 AA118 AA119 AA120 AA121 AA122 AA123 AA124 AA125 AA126 AA127 AA128 AA129 2 2 3 5 1 2 4 1 1 3 2 3 1 3 4 4 5 5 5 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 1 2 2 2 4 V V K K K P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
ENGRAVING
NOR-TEST-OFF OFF-ON 1-2-3-OFF 1-2-3-OFF AUTO-MAN TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE (blank)-TRIP (blank)-TRIP TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE PULL TO LOCK-TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE TRIP-(blank)-CLOSE
SPECIAL FEATURES
PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL PULL
DIMENSIONS
No. of Stages
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Standard Switch A B
3 7/8 4 1/2 5 1/8 5 3/4 6 3/4 7 7 5/8 8 1/4 8 1/2 9 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8 2 1/8
Pull-to-Lock Switch A B
4 9/16 5 7/16 5 13/16 6 7/16 7 1/16 7 11/16 8 5/16 8 15/16 8 3/16 9 13/16 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8 2 7/8
Removable Handle Switch A B

4 3/4 5 3/4 6 6 5/8 7 1/4 7 1/8 8 1/2 9 1/8 9 1/8 9 3/4 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16 3 1/16
20
413

SELECTION GUIDE FOR UNLISTED SWITCHES
The guide below is for unlisted switches which are numbered at the factory. Use it only as a guide to identify catalog numbers assigned by the factory.
Description of Action
Maintained Both Directions 1A - Positions 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 2A - Positions 1, 3, 5, 7 3A - Positions 2, 4, 6, 8 Spring Return to Position 3 from Both Directions 1S - Positions 2, 4, 2S - Positions 1, 5 3S - Positions 1, 5, (Feel Position 2) 4S - Positions 1, 5, (Feel Position 4) 5S - Positions 1, 5, (Feel Positions 2 & 4) 1F - Pull to Lock in Position 1, (Feel Position 2) 2F - Pull to Lock in Position 2 Spring Return to Position 3 - From CW Only 1C - From Position 4 2C - From Position 5 3C - From Position 5, (Feel Position 4) Spring Return to Position 3 - CCW Only 1W - From Position 2 2W - From Position 1 3W - From Position 1, (Feel Position 2) Spring Return to Position 3 from CW Maintain Position at CCW 1H - From Position 4, Maintain Position 1, 2 2H - From Position 4, Maintain Position 1 3H - From Position 5, Maintain Position 2 4H - From Position 5, (Feel Pos. 4), Maintain Pos. 2 5H - From Position 5, Maintain Position 1 6H - From Position 5, (Feel Pos. 4), Maintain Pos. 1 Spring Return to Position 3 from CCW Maintain Position at CW 1K - From Position 2, Maintain Position 4, 5 2K - From Position 2, Maintain Position 5 3K - From Position 1, Maintain Position 4 4K - From Position 1, (Feel Pos. 2 ), Maintain Pos. 4 5K - From Position 1, Maintain Position 5 6K - From Position 1, (Feel Pos. 2), Maintain Pos. 5
Position diagram front view
16SBM
16SBM
*
A B C D E F G H K L
***
***
1 stage 2 stage 3 stage 4 stage 5 stage 6 stage 7 stage 8 stage 9 stage 10 stage 2 positions 3 positions 4 positions 5 positions 6 positions 7 positions 8 positions Sequence number assigned by factory Standard escutcheon Target escutcheon Target (pull to lock) escutcheon No escutcheon Escutcheon with removable handle Insert action from Description of Action table at right Indicate 1st stop position Knurled handle Oval handle Pistol grip handle Lever handle SB 1 knurled handle SB 1 oval handle SB 1 pistol grip handle SB 1 round handle No handle Up to 1/4 inch 1 or 1 1/2 inches When used, indicate escutcheon keyways
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *** S T P N R * * K V P L A B C D N 1 2 ***
20
REMOVABLE HANDLES
The SBM switch can be furnished with three types of removable handles: pistolgrip, oval. and knurled. When the SBM switch has maintained operation, the removable handle can be removed in any single one of the eight positions that are available on the switch. When spring return operation is used then the handle is removable only in the normal or 12 oclock position. Typical handles that are removable in the 12 oclock position are: Knurled Cat. No. 13WW145 Oval Pistol Cat No. 23WW145 Cat. No. 33WW145
SHIPPING WEIGHTS
Type SBM (1 stage) @ 1 1/2 lbs Add 6 oz. for each additional stage.
Note: Removable handles are not included in the price of the switch. They must be ordered with the switch and listed as a separate item.

See pages 15 - 18.
414
SENSORS, ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES

INTELLIGENT SENSORS
HYDRAN 201i System
GE provides products, systems, and services to monitor your system remotely and diagnose problems that may arise in real time.
515
Blocking and Test Module
The 515 Blocking and Test Module provides an effective means of trip blocking, relay isolation, and testing of protective relays.
PK-2
Test Blocks and Plugs
The PK-2 test blocks are mounted on switchboard panels to facilitate the testing of AC instruments, meters and relays.
XCA
Test Probes and Plugs
Test probes and plugs for C-case drawout relays.
XLA
Test equipment and accessories
Test plugs for drawout relays.
XTM
Test plugs, card extenders and bracket kits.
Test and mounting accessories for modular relays and communication sets.
EB
Terminal Blocks
Molded one-piece terminals boards available in 4, 6, 8, and 12 point models.
116B407
Pullout Fuse Blocks
The class J pullout blocks come in 2 or 3 fuse models. They can accommodate fuses of 1-30 A, 600 V or less.
SECTION 21: SENSORS, ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES SENSORS ...............................416 515...........................................417 PK-2 .........................................417 XCA .........................................418 XLA .........................................418 XTM ........................................418 EB ............................................419 116B407 ..................................419 ET ............................................420 Ground Fault CTs.......................421 Phase CTs....................................423 Instrument Transformers......424 Custom Solutions ..................425
ET
Indicator Lights
Incandescent and neon indicating lamps, land light emitting diodes.
CTs
Ground fault and phase CTs
CTs specially designed to match the ground fault and phase current inputs of GE Power Management motor protection relays.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Instrument transformers for use with relays and meters.
GE offers a complete line of both indoor and outdoor dry type current and voltage transformers for use on systems ranging from 120 V through 69,000 V.
415
Sensors
World Leader in Substation Monitoring and Diagnostics

HYDRAN 201iSystem
s s s s
On-line KEY fault gas detection and monitoring Detect first signs of failure condition (early warning) Microprocessor-based intelligence at the transformer Networking up to 128 units at one substation
FARADAY TNU Transformer Nursing Unit

s s s
s s
Transportable system for monitoring critical new or sick transformers Multiple-gas analysis (7 gases plus moisture) measured continuously Diagnostics and recommendations based on dissolved gas-in-oil measurements Monitor KEY parameters of critical transformers Remote communications through LAN, modem, or cellular modem
FARADAY TMMS Transformer Monitoring and Management System

s s s s s
Monitor KEY parameters of critical transformers Model DATA into useful transformer INFORMATION Intelligence at the transformer, diagnostics and recommendations Platform for advanced LTC vibro-acoustic monitoring Electronic filling cabinet for the operating history of the transformer
21
LTC-MAP 1525 Load Tap Changer Maintenance Action Planner

s
s s
Comprehensive Load Tap Changer (LTC) Monitor including thermal and mechanical diagnostics Measures contact wear and neutral switch inactivity Provides maintenance alerts and operational alarms through SCADA
Includes SAGE Express Software for configuration data retrievals and analyses Easy to install, cost-effective
416
Sensors

Test Accessories
515 Blocking and Test Module

The 515 is a 14 pole switchbank with a removable cover. It allows the user to visually isolate (open) trip relay output circuits. By opening the test switches and inserting test plugs, phase and residual currents from the primary CTs can be monitored. Currents can be injected into the relay from a secondary injection test set during commissioning. The relays trip and auxiliary circuits must be opened prior to withdrawal for testing to prevent nuisance tripping, and CTs can then be shorted. Conversely, when the test is done and the relay is put back in operation, the CT switches should be closed prior to closing the trip and auxiliary circuits, to ensure normal operation of the relay.
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
1.50" (38) PANEL 2.50" (63)
2.20" (56)
BEND TABS TO CAPTURE COVER IN PANEL AFTER INSTALLATION INTO PANEL CUTOUT. (5 PLACES TOP & BOTTOM; 3 PLACES SIDES)
3.12" (79) Inches (mm)
FRONT VIEW
10.68" (272)
GE Power Management
The 515 Blocking and Test Module provides an effective means of trip blocking, relay isolation, and testing of protective relays.
CUT OUT
TYPICAL WIRING
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT
9.65" (245)
984017A3.dwg
ORDERING
To order select the basic model from the Selection Guide below.
515
515
984018A3.AI
Basic unit 14 position test switches
Accessories
515 test plugs
PK-2 Test Blocks and Plugs

The PK-2 test blocks are mounted on switchboard panels to facilitate the testing of AC instruments, meters and relays. They are essentially 4-pole and 6-pole jacks with molded covers that have internal plug contacts which make a through connection when the cover is in place. When the cover is removed auxiliary contacts are used which automatically short circuit the current transformer. The PK-2 is rated 10 A continuous. The PK-2 is provided with unmounted auxiliary contacts, jumpers and screws. The PK-2 test plugs fit into the test blocks when the cover is removed. The test plugs are provided with studs and links, and can be permanently connected to the testing equipment in use.
3.15" (80)
3.50" (89)
TEST SWITCHES
21
ORDERING
To order select the model number from the Selection Guide below. UR approval Designed to IEEE 323-1974 standards UL Recognized
PK2
PK-2
*
6422120G1 6422120G3 6422120G2 6422120G4 6129533G1 6129533G2
4-pole test block with cover, surface mounting on 1-2" panel 4-pole test block with cover, surface mounting on 1/8 - 1/2" panel or semi-flush mounting on 1/8" panel 6-pole test block with cover, surface mounting on 1-2" panel 6-pole test block with cover, surface mounting on 1/8 - 1/2" panel or semi-flush mounting on 1/8" panel 4-pole test plug 6-pole test plug
Test Equipment and Accessories
417
Test Accessories
XCA Test Probes and Plugs

Test probes and plugs for C-case drawout relays. Application
s
For testing of in-service C-case drawout relays
s s s s
Features
s s
Two-position, four-point test probe (XCA11A1) Pre-wired CT circuit test probe (XCA11A2)
14 position, 28 point test plug (XCA28A1) Keyed to prevent incorrect insertion Accessory shorting plug available Test clips and links provided with XCA28A1
Three different XCA test plugs are available to provide an easy means of testing C-case drawout relays without removing them from their cases. The XCA11A1 is a 2 position four-point test probe. This test
probe is furnished with an accessory shorting plug which may be used to short out CT inputs during relay testing. The XCA11A2 is a prewired test probe for use in measuring current in the CT
circuits. It consists of an XCA11A1 test probe with an added jumper and six foot long ammeter leads. The XCA28A1 is a full-width 14-position 28-point test plug which provides complete flexibility.
XLA Test Equipment and Accessories

Test plugs for drawout relays. Application
s s s s s
For testing of in-service S, M and L case drawout relays
Features
s s
10 and 20 point plugs available Electrically separate and silver plated contact fingers
Substituted for the regular connecting plug Allows separate power source connection Keyed to prevent incorrect insertion Test clips and links provided
The XLA provides a quick and easy means of testing S, M, L-case drawout relays or meters without removing them from their cases. The test plug is substituted for the regular connecting
plug, so there is nothing to disconnect. The XLA12A enables power to be applied to the relay form either a separate source or the source that feeds the equipment. It has 20 points. The
XLA13A can only be used when a separate source of power is available. It has 10 points. These test plugs have been constructed so that it is impossible to connect the plug incorrectly.
XTM Test Plugs, Card Extenders and Bracket Kits

Test and mounting accessories for modular relays and communication sets. Applications
21
s s
Features
s s s s
For testing of in-service modular electronic relays (XTM) For testing electronic relays/ communication sets (card extender)
Current injection testing connections Input/output access Card extender enables access to modules for testing Permits semi-flush mounting of modular relays/communication sets (brackets)
The XTM 14 point test plug is available for testing modular electronic type relays. The connection plugs can be removed from the modular relay and the XTM test plug can be inserted for current injection testing and input/ output access.
The card extender provides versatility for testing plug-in modules in the relay. The module to be tested can be removed from the relay and the card extender inserted in its place. Then the module can be inserted into the card extender.
This gives complete access to the module for test purposes.
418
Indicator Lights
EB-25, EB-26, EB-27 Terminal Blocks

EB-25 with washer head binding screws and numerically engraved marking strip EB terminal block with snap cover EB-27 with short circuit strips
Terminal blocks are used where leads are brought to any part for permanent or temporary connection, especially if many wires are involved. Type EB-25, EB-26, and EB-27 are molded one-piece terminal boards available in 4, 6, 8, and 12 point models. They will accommodate wire sizes No.18 to
No.10 inclusive. They are rated for 600 volt - 30 A circuits. Type EB-25 is equipped with washerhead binding screws for circuit wire connections. It offers a choice of a blank, white fiber marking strip, or a black marking strip engraved with white numbers for circuit identification.
Type EB-26 is the same as EB-25 except that clamp type connectors are provided for circuit wire connections. Type EB-27 is the same as EB-25 except that short circuit strips are provided instead of a marking strip. UL Recognized
EB-1, EB-2, EB-4 Terminal Blocks

EB-1 terminal board without cover EB-2 terminal board with cover EB-4 6-point terminal board
Terminal boards are convenient when a large amount of small wiring is necessary on the back of a switchboard. Molded composition terminal boards make neat, compact arrangements possible on the back of the switchboard. Type EB-1 and EB-2 are used where a high current rated block is necessary, such as in
control power connections. They are rated for 600 volt - 100 A circuits. They will accommodate wires up to and including No. 4. They are provided with a white marking strip. They can accommodate 2 circuits. Type EB-1 has binding screws for circuit wire connections. Type EB-2 has clamp (pressure) type connectors for circuit wire connection.
Type EB-4 is provided with 2, 4, or 6 points. It will accommodate wires up to and including No.8 in size. It is rated for 600 V - 30 A circuits. EB-1 UR approval UL Recognized
PULLOUT FUSE BLOCKS

The class J pullout blocks come in 2 or 3 fuse models. They can accommodate fuses of 1-30 A, 600 V or less.
21
ORDERING
116B407
116B407
*
8 5
2 pole fuse block 3 pole fuse block
419
Indicator Lights
ET-16, ET-17 Incandescent Indicating Light (ET-16) & Neon Indicating Lamp (ET-17)
s mounting on panels up to and includs s s s s
ing 1/4" thick small size easy replacement of bulb and resistor with push-twist type plug standard GE extra-long-life bulbs terminals are easily accessible 9 basic color caps for ET-16 (transparent, clear, blue, amber, green and red; Translucent red, green, yellow, & white)
s 3 basic color caps for ET-17 (amber,

clear, & transparent red)
s ET-16 available for dim-bright applications UR approval, UL Recognized
ET-5, ET-6
s models of ET-5 available for 1/8"- 1/4" s s s s s s s s
thick panels, or 1"- 2" thick panels ET-6 available for thin panel applications up to 1/4" good visible indication long life low wattage consumption for economy and cool operation signal light indication can be used in combination with control switches to show circuit breaker position compact, requires only one hole for panel mounting series resistor prevents the possibility of a short circuit from a broken lamp filament
s uses GE telephone lamp, type T2,

with slide base
s terminals are easily accessible s dim-bright models available s 9 color caps available (clear; transparent blue, amber, green and red; translucent red, green, yellow, & white) s a color cap wrench and lamp puller is available as an accessory UR approval, UL Recognized
ET-16 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS)

s s s s s s s s
mounting on panels up to 1/4" thick 100,000 hour life reduced heat resistance to shock and vibration no cold filament inrush current cost savings Small size easy replacement of bulbs and resistors with simple push and twist base s LED lamp available in 3 basic colors (red, green, amber)
s lens cap available in 5 transparent

colors (red, green, amber, yellow, smoke) & clear s easily accessible connection terminals UR approval, UL Recognized
ET-5 AND ET-6 LEDS

21
s models of ET-5 available for up to s s s s s s s s s
1/4" thick panels, or 1"- 2" thick panels ET-6 available for thin panel applications up to 1/4" 100,000 hour life reduced heat resistance to shock and vibration no cold filament inrush current cost savings small size requires only one hole for panel mounting series resistor prevents the possibility of a short circuit thus eliminating the need for special fuses
s LED lamp available in 3 basic colors

(red, green, amber)
s lens cap available in 4 transparent

colors (red, green, amber, smoke) & clear s GE telephone type T2 slide base design s easily accessible terminals s a color cap wrench and lamp puller is available as an accessory
UR approval, UL Recognized
420
Current Transformers
GROUND FAULT CTS for 50:0.025 Amp CT

CTs that are specially designed to match the ground fault input of GE Power management motor protection relays should be used to ensure correct performance. These CTs have a 50:0.025A (2000:1 ratio) and can sense low leakage currents over the relay setting range with minimum error. Three sizes are available with 3 1/2", 5 1/2", or 8" diameter windows.
HGF3 / HGF5
Magnetization curves for 50:0.025 A ground fault CTs
Rs=26 Ohms
1000 SECONDARY EXCITING VOLTAGE (V) (60Hz)
HGF8
MODEL 0721A13526 50:0.025 A.
10000
CURRENT RATIO
TURNS RATIO 2000:1
SEC RES.* 24.85
1000
50:0.025
* OHMS AT 75 C.
100
HGF-3
100 This test report is in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13 1993
ABOVE THIS LINE THE VOLTAGE FOR A GIVEN EXITING CURRENT FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT BE LESS THAN 95% OF THE CURVE VALUE
HGF-5
10
10
BELOW THIS LINE THE EXCITING CURRENT FOR A GIVEN VOLTAGE FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT EXCEEED THE CURVE VALUE BY MORE THAN 25%
1 .001 .002
.005
1 0.1 100 1 10 EXCITING CURRENT (mA) (60Hz) 1000
0.5 1.0 2 .01 .02 .05 0.1 0.2 SECONDARY EXCITING RMS AMPS, 60 Hz - Ie
10
25
DIMENSIONS
2.25" (57.15) (2)-10-32 x 3/8" Lg. screw
DIMENSIONS
0.53"Dia. (13.5) 0.75" (19)
X2 X1
0.44" (11)
LABEL
"C" "E"
"D"
0.281" x 0.375" Slot (7 x 9.5)
8.13"Dia. (207)
11.00" (279) 8.50" (216)
"B" "A"
DIMENSIONS C PART NO. A B Min. Nom. Max. D Min. E
Inches (mm)
1.14" (29) 1.50" (38)
H1
8.50" (216)
Nom. Max.
11.00" (279)
1.25" 1.25" (32) (32)
3.00" (76)
21
2000 TURNS
X2 X1
in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm CT-HGF5 CT-HGF3
7.80 198 7.00 178 8.40 213 8.50 216 8.60 218 4.50 114 5.50 140 5.70 145 5.90 150 6.00 152 5.25 133 5.65 144 5.75 146 5.85 149 2.90 74 3.50 89 3.70 94 3.90 99
909050A8.DWG
910182A5.DWG
ORDERING
HGF *
HGF 3 5 8
Ground fault CT 3 1/2" diameter window 5 1/2" diameter window 8" diameter window

See pages 15 - 18.
421
GROUND FAULT CTS for 5 Amp Secondary CT

For low resistance or solidly grounded systems, a 5 A secondary CT should be used. Two sizes are available with 5 1/2" or 13" x 16" windows. Various Primary amp CTs can be chosen. (50 to 250)
GCT5
Magnetization curves for 5 A secondary CT
1000
GCT16
MODEL
1000
GE PM PART NO. CURRENT RATIO TURNS RATIO SEC RES.*
CORE BALANCE C.T. - P/N 0121B23597
SECONDARY VOLTAGE 50 Hz
100 SECONDARY VOLTAGE (V) 60 Hz
250 200 150 100 75 50
X912-0013 X912-0011 X912-0009 X912-0007 X912-0005 X912-0003
250:5 200:5 150:5 100:5 75:5 50:5
50:1 40:1 30:1 20:1 15:1 10:1
0.097 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.029 0.019
100
* OHMS AT 75 C.
This test report is in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13 1993
ABOVE THIS LINE THE VOLTAGE FOR A GIVEN EXCITING CURRENT FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT BE LESS THAN 95% OF THE CURVE VALUE
10
10
100
BELOW THIS LINE THE EXCITING CURRENT FOR A GIVEN VLOTAGE FOR ANY UNIT WILL NOT EXCEED THE CURVE VALUE BY MORE THAN 25%
.001
.002
.005
.01
.02
.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
10
.001
.002
.005
.01
.02
.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
10
25
SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT (A) 60Hz
SECONDARY EXCITING RMS AMPS, 50 Hz - Ie
DIMENSIONS
6.69" (170) 5.0" (127) 7.82" (198)
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW
22.20" (564) INCHES (mm) 18.20" (462) 20.70" (526) 13.20" (335) 9.60" (244) 2.50" (63.5)
SIDE VIEW
0.56" (14)
7.70" (195) (4)- 0.44" x 1.0" SLOTS (11.18 x 25.4) 9.88" (251) 4.94" (125)
X2 X1
10-32 SCREWS
21.20" (538) 18.20" (462) 16.20" (411)
LABEL
7.50" (190)
H1
5.50" (140) 4.94" (125)
9.88" (251)
(4) - 0.42" Dia. Holes
909251A1.DWG
1.17" (30)
7.50" (190) (4)- 0.56"Dia. HOLES (14.22) APPROX. WEIGHT: 50 Llbs.

909005A7.dwg
Inches (mm)
21
ORDERING
ORDERING
To order use the model number below.
GCT5- * : *
GCT550 75 100 150 200 250
Ground CT, 5.5" window 50 A primary 75 A primary 100 A primary 150 A primary 200 A primary 250 A primary 5 5 A secondary
GCT16 - 100 : 5

See pages 15 - 18.
422
PHASE CTS
Current transformers in most common ratios from 50:5 to 1000:5 are available for use as phase current inputs with motor protection relays. These come with mounting hardware and are also available with 1 A secondaries. Voltage Class - 600V BIL 10 KV.
DIMENSIONS
CURRENT TRANSFORMER SPECIFICATIONS
Current Ratio 50:5 75:5 100:5 150:5 200:5 250:5 300:5 400:5 500:5 600:5 750:5 1000:5 Window size 2.75" 2.75" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.00" 3.75" CT Class GE Multilin No. CT Dims. Sec. Res. C10 C10 C10 C10 C20 C20 C20 C20 C50 C50 C50 C50 X911-0010 X911-0011 X911-0012 X911-0013 X911-0014 X911-0015 X911-0016 X911-0017 X911-0018 X911-0019 X911-0020 X911-0021 A A B B B B B B B B B B 0.033 0.043 0.040 0.060 0.080 0.073 0.088 0.186 0.233 0.279 0.349 0.418
909068A2.DWG
4.78" (121)
Magnetization curves for 5 A secondary CT

EXCITATION CURVE
200
1000:5 750:5 600:5 500:5 400:5 300:5 250:5 200:5 150:5 100:5
5.70" (145)
4.00 (102)
6.82" (173)
100 SECONDARY VOLTAGE 60 Hz
(4) 0.44" X 1.00" SLOTS (11) x (25) 7.00" (178) 0.75" (19) LABEL X1 0.44" (11)
10
(4) 0.56"Dia. HOLES (14 Dia.)
5.75" (146)
H1
See Tables 3.50" (89)
7.12" (181)
.01
.02
.05 0.1 0.2 2 0.5 1.0 5 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT 60Hz
10
0.58" (15)
5.75" (146)
CT DIMENSIONS "A"
SECONDARY VOLTAGE 60 Hz
75:5
20 10
50:5
5.92" (150) 3.88" (99)
1 .01
0.5 1.0 2 .02 .05 0.1 0.2 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT 60Hz
10
4.70" (119)
3.00" 5.82" (76) (148)
ORDERING
(4) 0.44" X 1.00" SLOTS (11) x (25) 5.96" (151) (4) 0.56"Dia. HOLES (14 Dia.) 0.75" (19) LABEL X1 0.44" (11)
PCT- * : *
PCT50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 1000
Phase CT 50 A primary 75 A primary 100 A primary 150 A primary 200 A primary 250 A primary 300 A primary 350 A primary 400 A primary 500 A primary 1000 A primary 1 A secondary 5 A secondary
21

See pages 15 - 18.
4.75" (121)
H1
See Tables 3.00" (76)
6.31" (160)
0.62" (16)
4.75" (121)
CT DIMENSIONS "B"
423
Transformers/Accessories
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Instrument Transformers for use with..... Relays and Meters
s s s
GE offers a complete line of both Indoor and Outdoor dry type current and voltage transformers for use on systems ranging from 120 Volts through 69,000 Volts. Broad range of standard and special ratings designed for operating relays, meters and control devices. Get the best accuracy available in the industry with GEs ACCUBUTE versions certified to 0.15% performance, better than the best ANSI standard.
INDOOR TRANSFORMERS FOR.....

CURRENT JAK-0
Window type for both indoor and outdoor with mounting bases and available with bars for 200-800 amp ratings.
VOLTAGE JVM-3
With or without fuses.
JAG-0
Primarily for use in Switchgear for ratings of 100-3,000 amps.
JVM-5
Available in various ratings from 2.4 kV through 14.4 kV.
JAB-0
For installation over secondary busings of pad mounted distribution transformers available in 200-3000 amp ratings.
OUTDOOR TRANSFORMERS FOR.....

CURRENT JCD-4
Window type with large window with ratings from 1200-4000 amps.
VOLTAGE JVW-5
Various ratings for all popular primary and secondary voltage systems up through 15,000 volts.
JCK-5
Wound primaries for 15,000 volts available in 5-800 amp ratings.
JKW-200
For 34.5 kV systems in ratings of 25-3,000 amps.
Dont forget to explore the benefits of using GEs 0.15 Accuracy class Accubute line.
21

See pages 15 - 18.
424
In-house panel services tailored to the highest quality standards

NEW
Custom Panel Solutions

Panel Fabrication & Assembly
Services
I I I
Panel engineering, design, assembly CAD services Analyzer systems enclosures, racks, shelves, & pre-fabricated buildings Orbital welding for process tubing Custom metal work Skid mounted systems Functional checkout & staging Oxygen & particulate cleaning for high purity systems Complete point-to-point verification for wiring, computerized wire, & cable markers Custom engraving including graphics and logos on phenolic, brass, stainless, & aluminum sample systems Custom maintenance service
I I I I I
When you need panel design, engineering, fabrication, assembly, or modifications come to a name you know and trust - GE. GE offers a wide variety of choices to match its clients needs and environments. Enclosure choices range from carbon steel to stainless steel and aluminum to plastics for even more extreme environments. From tractor trailer sized skids to small panels, GE has the resources to handle your project needs. GE understands that when a project is finally approved, time is of the essence and is committed to providing timely service. From providing our customers with prompt quotations, all incoming jobs advance through engineering, directly to the production floor. Having design engineers and CAD facilities in-house reduces the time required to design layouts and enclosures by eliminating the need for third party resources.
No need to worry when you pick GE for design. We are ISO9001 certified and produce UL listed panels. We build our own product panels in the same facility where we build yours. Every aspect of our production is built around quality assurance. Our inspection and test procedures ensure that our clients specifications are met because we know how important it is for your product to work in the field. We pride ourselves in the diversity of the products we produce whether its power distribution buildings, process analyzer systems, customized drive systems, MCC modifications, control skids, control cabinets, PLC cabinets, ship board control consoles, I/O racks, junction boxes, or custom enclosures and structures. If you have a need, GE can address it. And just because we custom build for you does not mean high pricing. Give us a call to see how GE can provide real solutions for your business.
Contact Info
I
21
GE Power Management
425
SALES OFFICES
426
Sales Offices
INDUSTRIAL(I) AND UTILITY(U) SALES OFFICES
United States of America
CONNECTICUT General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Drive, P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581 Tel: (508) 836-6419 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: roland.bosse@indsys.ge.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Rd. Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com DELAWARE H.B. Saylor Associates (I) 799 Roosevelt Rd., Building 2, Ste.208 Doylestown, PA 18901 Tel: (215) 348-2465 Fax: (215) 340-0149 e-mail: h.b.saylor@worldnet.att.net General Electric Company (U) 1515 Victoria Dr. Downingtown, PA 19335 Tel: (610) 873-6579 Fax: (610) 873-6816 e-mail: Paul.Hubbell@indsys.ge.com DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA Atlantic Coast Advanced Technologies(I) 117 Roosevelt Blvd. Parlin, NJ 08859 Tel: (732) 721-0465 Fax: (732) 721-1063 e-mail: acat0465@aol.com General Electric Company (U) 7272 Park Circle Dr. Hanover, MD 21076 Tel: (410) 737-7293 Fax: (410) 737-7290 e-mail: tim.swygert@indsys.ge.com FLORIDA G.F. Electro Mechanical (I) 15619 Premiere Dr., Ste. 203 Tampa, FL 33624 Tel: (813) 962-3671 Fax: (813) 960-2673 e-mail: GFE2@aol.com FLORIDA (NORTH & WEST) General Electric Company (U) 7650 Courtney Campbell Causeway, Ste. 900 Tampa, FL 33607 Tel: (813) 286-4826/4847 Fax: (813) 286-4819/4804 e-mail:dave.tatum@indsys.ge.com chip.dellinger@indsys.ge.com Handlin/Schwarz Assoc., Inc (I) 30700 Azalea Court Daphne, AL 36527-8606 Mail: P.O. Box 1167 Daphne, AL 36526-1167 Tel: (334) 621-5606 Fax: (334) 621-1172 e-mail: arnold_schwarz@msn.com Levine Lectronic & Lectric (U) 200 Powers Ferry Rd. Marietta, GA 30067 Tel: (770) 565-1556 Fax: (770) 973-9264 e-mail:info@L-3.com Robert@L-3.com John@L-3.com Rich@L-3.com Jim@L-3.com FLORIDA (SOUTHEAST) General Electric Company (U) 8181 W. Broward Blvd., Ste. 258 Plantation, FL 33324 Tel: (954) 236-5381 Fax: (954) 236-5596 e-mail: jim.roomy@indsys.ge.com GEORGIA General Electric Company (U) 6465 East Johns Crossing, Ste. 300 Duluth, GA 30097 Tel: (770) 999-7769 Fax: (770) 999-7777 e-mail: rick.brown@indsys.ge.com Levine Lectronic & Lectric (I & U) 200 Powers Ferry Rd. Marietta, GA 30067 Tel: (770) 565-1556 Fax: (770) 973-9264 e-mail:info@L-3.com Robert@L-3.com John@L-3.com Rich@L-3.com Jim@L-3.com HAWAII HSI Electric Inc. (I) 2234 Hoonee Place Honolulu, HI 96819 Tel: (808) 845-5555 Fax: (808) 847-7777 e-mail: info@hsielectric.com jpreddy@hsielectric.com General Electric Company (U) 2312 Kamehameha Hwy., #B1 Honolulu, HI 96819 Tel: (808) 852-6867 Fax: (808) 852-6960 Dial comm. 8*351-6867 e-mail: Michael.Hirakami@supply.ge.com IDAHO General Electric Company (U) 9020 S.W. Washington Sq. Rd., Ste. 500 Tigard, OR 97223 Tel: (503) 526-7076 Fax: (503) 526-7085 e-mail: frank.watkins@indsys.ge.com IDAHO (SOUTH) Riter Engineering Co. (I) Mail: P.O. Box 25005 875 South Chestnut St. Salt Lake City, UT 84125 Tel: (801) 973-9063 Fax: (801) 973-8333 e-mail: steve@ritereng.com byron@ritereng.com mike@ritereng.com ILLINOIS (NORTH) Lehman Company (I) 799 Roosevelt Rd., Building 2, Ste. 208 Glen Ellyn, IL 60137 Tel: (630) 942-1900 Fax: (630) 942-1955 e-mail: LehmanCompany@compuserve.com ILLINOIS (SOUTH) Electrorep-Energy Products, Inc. (I & U) 208 South Grand East, Ste. #1 Springfield, IL 62704 Tel: (217) 789-4504 Fax: (217) 789-0302 e-mail: electrorep@stlnet.com General Electric Company (U) 4515 Barr Creek Lane Naperville, IL 60564 Tel: (630) 573-3047 Fax: (630) 904-5519 e-mail: bob.scillitoe@indsys.ge.com INDIANA General Electric Company (U) 12272 Hancock St. Carmel, IN 46032 Tel: (317) 574-8349 Fax: (317) 574-2374 Patrick Engineering (I) 7676 Elin Court Dayton, OH 45415 Tel: (937) 836-6499 Fax: (937) 836-8894 e-mail: JCaplin159@aol.com MPWebber1023@aol.com INDIANA (NORTH) Lehman Company (I) 799 Roosevelt Rd., Building 2, Ste. 208 Glen Ellyn, IL 60137 Tel: (630) 942-1900 Fax: (630) 942-1955 e-mail: LehmanCompany@compuserve.com IOWA Power Con Co. (I) 449 Kingbard Blvd. Waterloo, IA 50701 Tel: (319) 230-0901, (319) 240-2551 (319) 232-0246 Fax: (319) 232-9672 e-mail: rski@kca.net robski@kctc.net IOWA (EAST) General Electric Company (U) 2015 Spring Rd., Ste. 301 Oak Brook, IL 60521-1868 Tel: (708) 573-3023 Fax: (708) 573-3352 IOWA (WEST) General Electric Company (U) 11422 Miracle Hills Dr., Ste. 304 Omaha, NE 68154 Tel: (402) 496-6907 Fax: (402) 496-6910 e-mail: david.giudice@indsys.ge.com KANSAS Electrorep-Energy Products (I & U) 5897 Raytown Rd., Ste. 100 Raytown, MO 64133 Tel: (816) 358-9200 Fax: (816) 358-9202 e-mail: electrorep@cwix.com eepio7@swbell.net General Electric Company (U) 10550 Barkley St. Overland Park, KS 66212 Tel: (913) 967-6264 Fax: (913) 967-6333 e-mail: jim.swift@indsys.ge.com KENTUCKY General Electric Company (U) 56 Candlewood Ct. Nicholasville, KY 40356 Tel: (606) 223-6488 Fax: (606) 223-4436 e-mail: tony.placido@indsys.ge.com Patrick Engineering (I) 7676 Elin Court Dayton, OH 45415 Tel: (937) 836-6499 Fax: (937) 836-8894 e-mail: JCaplin159@aol.com MWebber1023@aol.com
ALABAMA General Electric Company (U) 300 Riverhills Business Park, Ste. E Birmingham, AL 35242 Tel: (205) 991-4137 Fax: (205) 991-4290 e-mail: steve.forsyth@indsys.ge.com Levine Lectronic & Lectric (I&U) 200 Powers Ferry Rd. Marietta, GA 30067 Tel: (770) 565-1556 Fax: (770) 973-9264 e-mail:AVA@L-3.com John@L-3.com Rich@L-3.com Jim@L-3.com ALABAMA (MOBILE) Handlin/Schwarz Assoc., Inc (I) 30700 Azalea Court Daphne, AL 36527-8606 Mail: P.O. Box 1167 Daphne, AL 36526-1167 Tel: (334) 621-5606 Fax: (334) 621-1172 e-mail: arnold_schwarz@msn.com ALASKA General Electric Company (U) One Embassy Centre, Ste. 500 9020 SW Washington Sq. Rd. P.O. Box 909 [97207] Tigard, OR 97223 Tel: (503) 526-7076 Fax: (503) 526-7085 e-mail: frank.watkins@indsys.ge.com Pacific Rim Technical Sales, Inc. (I) P.O. Box 110271 Anchorage, AK 99511-0271 Tel: (907) 868-5169 ARIZONA Applied Control Systems (I) 2633 N. 37th Ave., Ste. 9 Phoenix, AZ 85009 Tel: (602) 352-0051 Fax: (602) 352-0308 e-mail: chuck-c@appliedcontrols.com internet: www.appliedcontrols.com GE T&DSS (U) 11255 North 131 St. Place Scottsdale, AZ 85259 Tel: (602) 451-6508 Fax: (602) 451-6648 e-mail: bob.shaw@indsys.ge.com ARKANSAS Doby Assoc. Inc. (I) 17 Pear Tree Place Little Rock, AR 72209 Tel: (501) 455-2927 Fax: (501) 455-2961 e-mail: don.wright@mindspring.com General Electric Company (U) 300 Riverhills Business Park, Ste. E Birmingham, AL 35242 Tel: (205) 991-4137 Fax: (205) 991-4290 e-mail: steve.forsyth@indsys.ge.com
CALIFORNIA (CENTRAL) General Electric Company (U) 80 Blue Ravine Rd., Ste. 160 Folsom, CA 95630 Tel: (916) 355-1421 Fax: (916) 355-3100 e-mail: arnie.watchempino@indsys.ge.com CALIFORNIA (NORTH) Elec. Equip. Sales (I) 1338 Reliez Valley Rd. Lafayette, CA 94549 Tel: (925) 939-2521, (925) 945-0544 (925) 820-9440 Fax: (925) 939-2522 e-mail: eesco@dnai.com jjsell@aol.com internet: www.e2sco.com General Electric Company (U) 1340 Treat Blvd., Ste. 200 P.O. Box 8029 Walnut Creek, CA 94596 Tel: (510) 256-2428 Fax: (510) 256-2411 e-mail: jim.neidig@indsys.ge.com CALIFORNIA (SOUTH) General Electric Company (U) 3191 Temple Ave., Ste. 200 Pomona, CA 91768 Tel: (909) 444-5036 Fax: (909) 444-5203 e-mail: mbcoron@aol.com M.B.C.O. Eng. Sales Inc. (I) 2605 E. Foothills, Ste. D Glendora, CA 91740 Tel: (626) 852-1203 Fax: (626) 852-1205 e-mail: MBCORON@aol.com COLORADO General Electric Company (U) 3900 E Mexico Ave., Ste. 410 Denver, CO 80210 Tel: (303) 753-2242 Fax: (303) 753-2210 e-mail: mike.dubach@indsys.ge.com Power Equip. Specialists Inc. (I) 10200 West 44th St., Ste. 120 Wheat Ridge, CO 80033-2838 Tel: (303) 423-2741 Fax: (303) 467-0714 e-mail: tbassett@pes-co.com kkibler@pes-co.com bdouglas@pes-co.com jpierce@pes-co.com avalenz@pes-co.com internet: www.pes-co.com
22
Sales Offices are continued on the next page...
United States
427
Sales Offices
United States of America (continued...)
LOUISIANA Automation Control Co. Inc. (I) 11914 Cloverland Court Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Tel: (225) 291-3430 Fax: (225) 291-3491 e-mail: autocont@aol.com General Electric Company (U) 611 Highland Ct. Mandeville, LA 70448 Tel: (504) 624-2861 Fax: (504) 624-3376 e-mail: thomas.quinlan@indsys.ge.com LOUISIANA (N & SW) Automation Control Co. Inc. (I) 214 Constitution Maurice, LA 70555 Tel: (337) 988-6595 Fax: (337) 988-6595 e-mail: mmarx54000@aol.com MAINE General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Dr. P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581-5043 Tel: (508) 836-6421 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: steve.achorn@indsys.ge.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Rd. Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com MARYLAND Atlantic Coast Advanced Technologies(I) 117 Roosevelt Blvd. Parlin, NJ 08859 Tel: (732) 721-0465 Fax: (732) 721-1063 e-mail: acat0465@aol.com General Electric Company (U) 7272 Park Circle Dr. Hanover, MD 21076 Tel: (410) 737-7293 Fax: (410) 737-7290 e-mail: tim.swygert@indsys.ge.com MASSACHUSETTS General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Dr. P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581-5043 Tel: (508) 836-6419 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: roland.bosse@indsys.ge.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Rd. Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com MICHIGAN Engel-Klaes (I) 32540 Schoolcraft Rd., Ste. #130 Livonia, MI 48150 Tel: (734) 513-0330 Fax: (734) 513-0335 e-mail: EKCO@compuserve.com General Electric Company (U) 5569 Shaun Rd. West Bloomfield, MI 48322 Tel: (248) 612-2399 Fax: (248) 737-9067 e-mail: bob.frick@indsys.ge.com MICHIGAN (NORTH) Banghart-Madden Inc. (I) 220 Robert St. Watertown, WI 53098 Tel: (920) 262-1668 Fax: (920) 262-1903 e-mail: mike@az-tek.com MINNESOTA General Electric Company (I & U) 5353 Gamble Dr., Ste. 200 Minneapolis, MN 55416 Tel: (952) 542-0246 Fax: (952) 542-0250 e-mail: john.johanson@indsys.ge.com MISSISSIPPI Doby Assoc. Inc. (I) 4785 Old Canton Rd., Ste. 200 Jackson, MS 39211 Tel: (601) 981-1138 Fax: (601) 362-5107 e-mail: cdoby@mindspring.com General Electric Company (U) 300 Riverhills Business Park, Ste. E Birmingham, AL 35242 Tel: (205) 991-4137 Fax: (205) 991-4290 e-mail: steve.forsyth@indsys.ge.com MISSOURI General Electric Company (U) 12101 Woodcrest Executive Dr. St. Louis, MO 63141 Tel: (314) 579-7088 Fax: (314) 597-2000 e-mail: liz.haverman@indsys.ge.com MISSOURI (EAST) Electrorep-Energy Products, Inc. (I) P.O. Box 460200 2121 Schuetz Rd. St. Louis, MO 63146 Tel: (314) 991-2600 Fax: (314) 991-3852 e-mail: electrorep@stlnet.com MISSOURI (WEST) Electrorep-Energy Products. Inc. (I & U) 5897 Raytown Rd., Ste. 100 Raytown, MO 64133 Tel: (816) 358-9200 Fax: (816) 358-9202 e-mail: electrorep@cwix.com eepick@swbell.net MONTANA Control Technology (I) P.O. Box 50089 760 Lake Elmo Billings, MT 59105 Tel: (406) 259-4597 Fax: (406) 259-4599 e-mail:Bill.vanderloos@indsys.ge.com Rich.haag@indsys.ge.com Sam.coleman@indsys.ge.com Shari.lutgen@indsys.ge.com General Electric Company (U) 2180 South 1300 East, Ste. 340 Salt Lake City, UT 84106-2843 Tel: (801) 468-5761 Fax: (801) 468-5767 e-mail: ross.dicaprio@indsys.ge.com NEBRASKA General Electric Company (U) 11422 Miracle Hills Dr., Ste. 304 Omaha, NE 68154 Tel: (402) 496-6907 Fax: (402) 496-6910 e-mail: david.giudice@indsys.ge.com Power Con Co. (I) P.O. Box 45293 Omaha, NE 68145-0293 Tel: (402) 895-6697 Fax: (402) 895-0112 e-mail:sksimonsen@webcombo.net rjblack@webcombo.net NEVADA Applied Industrial Controls (I) P.O. Box 11974 Reno, NV 89510 Tel: (775) 356-7401 Fax: (775) 356-7475 e-mail: ericj@a-i-c.com NEVADA (NORTH) General Electric Company (U) 80 Blue Ravine Rd., Ste. 160 Folsom, CA 95630 Tel: (916) 355-1421 Fax: (916) 355-3100 e-mail: arnie.watchempino@indsys.ge.com NEVADA (SOUTH) General Electric Company (U) 3540 West Sahara Ave., #560 Las Vegas, NV 89102 Tel: (702) 682-0304 Fax: (702) 367-6421 e-mail: frank.gerovac@indsys.ge.com NEW HAMPSHIRE General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Dr., P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581-5043 Tel: (508) 836-6421 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: steve.achorn@indsys.ge.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Rd. Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com NEW JERSEY General Electric Company (U) 1639 RT 10E Parsippany, NJ 07054 Tel: (201) 292-7308 Fax: (201) 292-7310 e-mail: carl.bass@indsys.ge.com NEW JERSEY (NORTH) Atlantic Coast Advanced Technologies (I) 117 Roosevelt Blvd. Parlin, NJ 08859 Tel: (732) 721-0465 Fax: (732) 721-1063 e-mail: acat0465@aol.com NEW JERSEY (SOUTH) H.B. Saylor Associates (I) 21 Walnut Lane Doylestown, PA 18901 Tel: (215) 348-2465 Fax: (215) 340-0149 e-mail: h.b.saylor@worldnet.att.net NEW MEXICO Applied Control Systems (I) 2633 N. 37th Ave., Ste. 9 Phoenix, AZ 85009 Tel: (602) 352-0051 Fax: (602) 352-0308 General Electric Company (U) 3900 E. Mexico Ave., Ste. 410 Denver, CO 80210 Tel: (303) 753-2242 Fax: (303) 753-2210 e-mail: mike.dubach@indsys.ge.com NEW YORK General Electric Company (U) 2 Corporate Dr., P.O. Box 861 Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: (203) 944-3013 Fax: (203) 944-3019 e-mail: anthony.centorino@indsys.ge.com NEW YORK (SOUTHEAST) Atlantic Coast Advanced Technologies (I) 117 Roosevelt Blvd. Parlin, NJ 08859 Tel: (732) 721-0465 Fax: (732) 721-1063 e-mail: acat0465@aol.com NEW YORK (UPSTATE) General Electric Company (U) 443 Electronics Pkwy., P.O. Box 4841 Syracuse, NY 13221 Tel: (315) 456-7936 Fax: (315) 456-7980 e-mail: carl.chermak@indsys.ge.com Genergy (I) P.O. Box 5725, 105 Wolf Rd. 2nd Floor,Suite 202 Albany, NY 12205 Tel: (518) 446-0316 Fax: (518) 446-0810 e-mail: shams0750@aol.com NORTH CAROLINA Polytech Electrical Sales (I & U) 916 East Blvd. Charlotte, NC 28203 Tel: (704) 372-4161 Fax: (704) 372-4207 e-mail: Polyelec@aol.com NORTH CAROLINA (EAST) General Electric Company (U) 9030 Stony Point Pkwy. Ste. 585 Richmond, VA 23235-1938 Tel: (804) 560-8624 Fax: (804) 560-8664 e-mail: john.kelly@indsys.ge.com NORTH CAROLINA (WEST) General Electric Company (U) 4601 Park Rd., Ste. 300 Charlotte, NC 28209 Tel: (704) 561-5078 Fax: (704) 561-5792 e-mail: john.jones@indsys.ge.com NORTH DAKOTA GE Industrial Systems (U) 424 W. Owatonna St. Duluth, MN 55803 Tel: (218) 724-4201 Fax: (218) 724-4331 e-mail: jay.jones@indsys.ge.com General Electric Company (I) 5353 Gamble Dr., Ste. 200 Minneapolis, MN 55416 Tel: (952) 542-0246 Fax: (952) 542-0250 e-mail: john.johanson@indsys.ge.com OHIO Patrick Engineering (I) 7676 Elin Court Dayton, OH 45415 Tel: (937) 836-6499 Fax: (937) 836-8894 e-mail: JCaplin159@aol.com MWebber1023@aol.com OHIO (NORTHEAST) Delta Instrumentation (I) 3729 Waitley Dr., P.O. Box 495 Richfield, OH 44286 Tel: (888) 659-2508 Fax: (330) 659-2608 e-mail: dgrumney@deltainstrumentation.com tomb@deltainstrumentation.com mmcgrath@deltainstrumentation.com General Electric Company (U) 6161 Oaktree Blvd. Independence, OH 44131 Tel: (216) 328-6209 Fax: (216) 328-5441 e-mail: mark.hura@indsys.ge.com OHIO (SOUTH) General Electric Company (U) 4079 Executive Pkwy. Ste. 310 Westerville OH 43081 Tel: (614) 899-8934 Fax: (614) 899-8959 e-mail: bill.kaufman@indsys.ge.com OKLAHOMA General Electric Company (U) 1601 Medical Center Drive, Ste. 11 Edmond, OK 73034 Tel: (406) 340-9860 Fax: (406) 340-9868 e-mail: les.childs@indsys.ge.com KenCor Electrical Equipment (I) 3015 E. Skelly Dr., Ste. 103 Tulsa, OK 74105 Tel: (918) 745-6066 Fax: (918) 747-2747 e-mail: Kenelectr@aol.com OREGON General Electric Company (U) United Sales Associates 14833 SW, 72nd Ave.. Tigard, OR 97224 Tel: (503) 620-6960 Fax: (503) 684-3226 e-mail: usa23547@aol.com United Sales Associates (I) P.O. Box 1968, Lake Oswego OR 97035-0058 14833 - SW 72nd Ave Tigard, OR 97224 Tel: (503) 620-6920 Fax: (503) 684-3226 e-mail: usa23547@aol.com PENNSYLVANIA (EAST) General Electric Company (U) 1515 Victoria Dr. Downingtown, PA 19335 Tel: (610) 873-6579 Fax: (610) 873-6816 e-mail: Paul.Hubbell@indsys.ge.com Kathryn.Nesta@indsys.ge.com H.B. Saylor Associates (I) 21 Walnut Lane Doylestown, PA 18901 Tel: (215) 348-2465 Fax: (215) 340-0149 e-mail: h.b.saylor@worldnet.att.net
22
Sales Offices are continued on the next page...
428
United States
Sales Offices
United States of America (continued...)
PENNSYLVANIA (NORTH & WEST) Burl Burgess & Associates (I) Mail: P.O. Box 197 Oak Hill, WV 25901 Route 1, Box 265A Fayetteville, WV 25840 Tel: (304) 465-0742 Fax: (304) 465-8655 e-mail: bburgess@citynet.net General Electric Company (U) 1011 Brookside Rd., Ste. 250 Allentown, PA 18106 Tel: (610) 530-7185 Fax: (610) 530-7184 e-mail: larry.heindel@indsys.ge.com RHODE ISLAND General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Dr., P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581 Tel: (508) 836-6420 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: james.oconner@indsys.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Rd. Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com SOUTH CAROLINA General Electric Company (U) 4601 Park Rd., Ste. 300 Charlotte, NC 28209 Tel: (704) 561-5078 Fax: (704) 561-5792 e-mail: john.jones@indsys.ge.com Polytech Electrical Sales (I & U) 916 East Blvd., Charlotte, NC 28203 Tel: (704) 372-4161 Fax: (704) 372-4207 e-mail: Polyelec@aol.com SOUTH DAKOTA GE Industrial Systems (U) 335 North Main, Suite 210 Sioux Falls, SD 57102 Tel: (605) 336-2827 Fax: (605) 335-5979 e-mail: loren.auch@indsys.ge.com General Electric Company (I) 5353 Gamble Dr., Ste. 200 Minneapolis, MN 55416 Tel: (952) 542-0246 Fax: (952) 542-0250 e-mail: john.johanson@indsys.ge.com TENNESSEE General Electric Company (U) 735 Broad St., Ste. 804 The James Building Chattanooga, TN 37402 Tel: (423) 634-0951 Fax: (423) 634-0957 e-mail: kent.ready@indsys.ge.com TENNESSEE (EAST) EMR Assoc. Inc. (I) 9080 Barbee Lane, Suite 100 P.O. Box 32741 Knoxville, TN 37923 Tel: (865) 769-1998 Fax: (865) 769-2227 e-mail: acampen@emrassociates.com tcampen@emrassociates.com mwalker@emrassociates.com rstelling@emrassociates.com sgrindstaff@emrassociates.com TENNESSEE (CENTRAL) EMR Assoc. Inc. (I) 603 West Iris Dr., P.O. Box 40741 Nashville, TN 37204-0741 Tel: (615) 292-1977 (Mike Hughes) Tel: (615) 292-1101 (Ray Townsend) Fax: (615) 292-1560 e-mail:mhughes@emrassociates.com rtownsend@emrassociates.com TENNESSEE (WEST) Doby Assoc. Inc., PMB #320 (I) 1016 Autumn Oak Circle P.O. Box 1173 Collierville, TN 38027 Tel: (901) 497-4659 Fax: (901) 853-4603 e-mail: c-newsom@mindspring.com TEXAS (NORTH) EC Systems (I) 3799 Realty Road, Ste. 150 Addison, TX 75001 - 4312 Tel: (972) 484-1372 Fax: (972) 484-1460 e-mail: jm1133@juno.com jbmoody@airmail.net General Electric Company (U) 2800 Quail Run, Suite 100A Corinth, TX 76208 Tel: (940) 270-5001 Fax: (940) 270-5002 e-mail: richard.bodo@indsys.ge.com TEXAS (SOUTH) Double E Engineering Sales (I & U) 701 N. Post Oak Road, Ste. 312 Houston, TX 77024 Tel: (713) 290-1151 Fax: (713) 290-1167 e-mail: billwood@excelonline.com kybob@flash.net mattwood@excelonline.com margaretsab@excelonline.com Double E Engineering Sales. (I & U) 1776 Woodstead Ct., Ste. 212 The Woodlands, TX 77380 Tel: (281) 363-4458 Fax: (281) 363-4361 e-mail: becton@double-e-engineering.com darlene@double-e-engineering.com jhartnett@double-e-engineering.com gklingaman@double-e-engineering.com General Electric Company (U) 10 Clarion Ridge The Woodlands, TX 77382 Tel: (936) 321-0597 Fax: (936) 321-0598 e-mail: luis.yuri-luna@indsys.ge.com TEXAS (WEST) General Electric Company (U) 85 NE Loop 410, Ste. 416 San Antonio, TX 78216 Tel: (210) 366-7650 Fax: (210) 366-7662 e-mail: patrick.ricci.jr@indsys.ge.com Keasler Associates (I) 2011 N. Collins, #701 Richardson, TX 75080 Tel: (972) 669-4000 Fax: (972) 669-4060 e-mail: james@keasler.com penny@keasler.com syd@keasler.com sales@keasler.com UTAH General Electric Company (U) 2180 South 1300 E., Ste. 340 Salt Lake City, UT 84106-2843 Tel: (801) 468-5761 Fax: (801) 468-5767 e-mail: ross.dicaprio@indsys.ge.com Riter Engineering Co. (I) Mail - P.O. Box #25005 875 South Chestnut Street Salt Lake City, UT 84125 Tel: (801) 973-9063 Fax: (801) 973-8333 e-mail: steve@ritereng.com byron@ritereng.com mike@ritereng.com VERMONT General Electric Company (U) 1400 Computer Dr., P.O. Box 5043 Westborough, MA 01581-5043 Tel: (508) 836-6421 Fax: (508) 836-6424 e-mail: steve.achorn@indsys.ge.com The Iron Horse Co., Bedser Sales (I) 191 Karen Lee Road Glastonbury, CT 06033 Tel: (860) 657-8935 Fax: (860) 633-3383 e-mail: cabedser@aol.com VIRGINIA General Electric Company (U) 9030 Stony Point Pkwy., Ste. 565 Richmond, VA 23235-1936 Tel: (804) 560-8624 Fax: (804) 560-8664 e-mail: john.kelly@indsys.ge.com Polytech Electrical Sales (U) 916 East Blvd. Charlotte, NC 28203 Tel: (704) 372-4161 Fax: (704) 372-4207 e-mail: Polyelec@aol.com Polytech Electrical Sales, Inc. (I) 524 Jackson Avenue Lexington, VA 24450 Tel: (540) 462-6166 Fax: (540) 464-6166 Mobile: (540) 464-6166 e-mail: Polytechva@rockbridge.net WASHINGTON General Electric Company (U) United Sales Associates 13842 - 176th Place N.E. Redmond, WA 98052 Tel: (503) 620-6960 Fax: (425) 885-0010 e-mail: hejnal@gte.net United Sales Associates (I) P.O. Box 1968, Lake Oswego OR 97035-0058 14833 - SW 72nd Ave Tigard, OR 97224 Tel: (503) 620-6960 Fax: (503) 684-3226 e-mail: usa23547@aol.com WEST VIRGINIA Burl Burgess & Associates (I) P.O. Box 197 Oak Hill, WV 25901 Tel: (304) 465-0742 Fax: (304) 465-8655 e-mail: bburgess@citynet.net General Electric Company (U) 1011 Brookside Rd., Ste. 250 Allentown, PA 18106 Tel: (610) 530-7185 Fax: (610) 530-7184 e-mail: larry.heindel@indsys.ge.com WISCONSIN Banghart-Madden Inc. (I) 220 Robert Street Watertown, WI 53098 Tel: (920) 262-1668 Fax: (920) 262-1903 e-mail: mike@az-tek.com General Electric Company (U) 400 N. Executive Dr., Ste. 300 Brookfield, WI 53005 Tel: (414) 797-4927 Fax: (414) 797-4902 e-mail: roy.moxley@indsys.ge.com WYOMING General Electric Company (U) 2180 South 1300 East, Ste. 340 Salt Lake City, UT 84106-2843 Tel: (801) 468-5761 Fax: (801) 468-5767 e-mail: ross.dicaprio@indsys.ge.com WYOMING (NORTH) Control Technology (I) P.O. Box 50089, 760 Lake Elmo Billings, MT 59105 Tel: (406) 259-4597 Fax: (406) 259-4599 e-mail:Bill.vanderloos@indsys.ge.com Rich.haag@indsys.ge.com Sam.coleman@indsys.ge.com Shari.lutgen@indsys.ge.com WYOMING (SOUTHEAST) Power Equip. Specialists Inc. (I) 10200 West 44th St., Suite 120 Wheat Ridge, CO 80033-2838 Tel: (303) 423-2741 Fax: (303) 467-0714 e-mail: jpierce@pes-co.com WYOMING (SOUTHWEST) Riter Engineering Co. (I) Mail - P.O. Box #25005 875 South Chestnut Street Salt Lake City, UT 84125 Tel: (801) 973-9063 Fax: (801) 973-8333 e-mail: steve@ritereng.com byron@ritereng.com mike@ritereng.com
US Regional Sales Offices

NORTH EASTERN US GE Power Management Steve Hyrniw (I) 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 e-mail: steve.hyrniw@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Patrick M. Kerrigan (U) 2 Corporate Dr., P.O. Box 861 Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: (203) 944-3014 Fax: (203) 944-3019 e-mail: patrick.kerrigan@indsys.ge.com SOUTH EASTERN US GE Power Management Ed Lebenhaft (I) 4605 Charlotte Hwy., Suite 14 Lake Wylie, SC 29710 Tel: (803) 831-1331 Fax: (803) 831-1322 e-mail: ed.lebenhaft@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Craig Wester (U) 6465 East Johns Crossing, Ste. 300 Duluth, GA 30097 Tel: (770) 999-7087 Fax: (770) 999-7779 e-mail: craig.wester@indsys.ge.com NORTH CENTRAL US GE Power Management Jim Lindsay (I) 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 e-mail: jim.lindsay@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Dave Campbell (U) 4079 Executive Parkway Suite 310 Westerville, OH 43081 Tel: (614) 899-8890 Fax: (614) 899-8959 email: david.campbell@indsys.ge.com WESTERN US GE Power Management Charles (Ted) Witham (U) 3017 Douglas Blvd. Suite #300 Roseville, CA 95661 Tel: (916) 774-7114 Fax: (916) 774-7129 e-mail: charles.witham@indsys.ge.com SOUTH WESTERN US GE Power Management Ian Newall (I) 4425 Juan Tabo N.E., Suite 205 Albuquerque, NM 87111 Tel: (505) 296-2800 Fax: (505) 296-5600 e-mail: inewall@rt66.com NORTH WESTERN US GE Power Management Dale Radcliffe (I) P.O. Box 3143 Chino Valley, AZ 86323-2708 Tel: (520) 636-7350 Fax: (520) 636-7349 e-mail: dalerad@pe.net
US Sales Leader
GE Power Management John Keegan 640 Freedom Business Center King of Prussia PA 19406 Tel: (610) 992-6965 Fax: (610) 992-6971 e-mail: john.keegan@indsys.ge.com
22
United States
429
Sales Offices
Canada
Maynard Reece Equipment Ltd. (I) 60 Thornhill Dr., Unit 7 Dartmouth, NS B3B 1S1 Tel: (902) 468-2994 Fax: (902) 468-2995 e-mail: mre@ns.sympatico.ca ONTARIO GE Power Systems (U) 2300 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, ON L5N 5P9 Tel: (905) 858-5346 e-mail: ray.murphy@indsys.ge.com ALBERTA (NORTH) Altelec Engineering Sales (I & U) 17311-105th Ave. Edmonton, AB T5S 1H2 Tel: (780) 455-2020 Fax: (780) 454-0185 e-mail: altelec.edm@altelec.net ALBERTA (SOUTH) Altelec Engineering Sales (I & U) #203-2816 21st Street N.E. Calgary, AB T2E 6Z2 Tel: (403) 216-2150 Fax: (403) 216-2159 e-mail: altelec.cal@altelec.net BRITISH COLUMBIA TNC Power Systems Inc. (I & U) 3793 West 27th Ave. Vancouver, BC V6S 1R2 Tel: (604) 221-8500 Fax: (604) 222-1337 e-mail: wyale@home.com fhornby@home.ca MANITOBA KVA Dynamo Inc. (I) 572 McTavish St. Winnipeg, MB R2J 2W5 Tel: (204) 237-4490 Fax: (204) 233-5306 e-mail: sales@kvadynamo.com NEW BRUNSWICK GE Power Systems (U) 195 Barrington Street, 7th Floor Halifax, NS B3J 2A8 Tel: (902) 428-6091 Fax: (902) 423-2937 e-mail: mike.bernard@indsys.ge.com MAILING ADDRESS P.O. Box 34092 Scotia Square R.P.O. Halifax, NS B3J 3S1 Maynard Reece Equipment Ltd. (I) 880 Hanwell Rd., Ste. 203 Fredericton, NB E3B 6A3 Tel: (506) 459-8945 Fax: (506) 452-2714 e-mail: maynard@nbnet.nb.ca NEWFOUNDLAND GE Power Systems (U) 195 Barrington Street, 7th Floor Halifax, NS B3J 2A8 Tel: (902) 428-6091 Fax: (902) 423-2937 e-mail: mike.bernard@indsys.ge.com MAILING ADDRESS P.O. Box 34092 Scotia Square R.P.O. Halifax, NS B3J 3S1 Maynard Reece Equipment Ltd. (I) 60 Thornhill Dr., Unit 7 Dartmouth, NS B3B 1S1 Tel: (902) 468-2994 Fax: (902) 468-2995 e-mail: mre@ns.symaptico.ca NORTH WEST TERRITORIES Altelec Engineering Sales (I & U) 17311-105th Ave. Edmonton, AB T5S 1H2 Tel: (780) 455-2020 Fax: (780) 454-0185 e-mail: altelec.edm@altelec.net NOVA SCOTIA GE Power Systems (U) 195 Barrington Street, 7th Floor Halifax, NS B3J 2A8 Tel: (902) 428-6091 Fax: (902) 423-2937 e-mail: mike.bernard@indsys.ge.com MAILING ADDRESS P.O. Box 34092 Scotia Square R.P.O. Halifax, NS B3J 3S1 ONTARIO (NORTHERN) Chess Controls (I) P.O. Box 788 Copper Cliff, ON P0M 1N0 Tel: (705) 682-2828, 1-800-461-4076 Fax: (705) 682-0847 e-mail: chess@isys.ca internet: www.chesscontrols.com ONTARIO (SOUTHERN) EL Switchgear & Control Inc. (I) P.O. Box 81160 Ancaster, ON L9G 4X2 Tel: (519) 753-4696, 1-800-463-1275 Fax: (519) 753-5755 e-mail: elsc@on.aibn.com ONTARIO (OTTAWA) Entreprise Gerald Roy Inc. (I) 725 Boul. de Lery Ville de Lery, PQ J6N 1B5 Tel: (450) 699-4255 Fax: (450) 692-8716 e-mail: entgroy@total.net ONTARIO (SARNIA) Pelee-Delta Electric Inc. (I) 177 Samuel St. Sarnia, ON N7T 7L3 Tel: (519) 332-8800, 1-800-567-3714 Fax: (519) 337-5466 Internet: www.peleegroup.com PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND GE Power Systems (U) 195 Barrington St., 7th Floor Halifax, NS B3J 2A8 Tel: (902) 428-6091 Fax: (902) 423-2937 e-mail: mike.bernard@indsys.ge.com MAILING ADDRESS P.O. Box 34092 Scotia Square R.P.O. Halifax, NS B3J 3S1 Maynard Reece Eng. Equip. Ltd. (I) 880 Hanwell Rd., Ste. 203 Fredericton, NB E3B 6A3 Tel: (506) 459-8945 Fax: (506) 452-2714 e-mail: maynard@nbnet.nb.ca QUEBEC Entreprise Gerald Roy Inc. (I) 725 Boul. de Lery Ville de Lery, PQ J6N 1B5 Tel: (450) 699-4255 Fax: (450) 692-8716 e-mail: entgroy@total.net GE Power Systems (U) 555 Dr Frederik Philips Blvd St. Laurent, PQ H4M 2X4 H4S 1W8 Tel: (514) 215-2784 Fax: (514) 215-2696 e-mail: jacques.dussault@indsys.ge.com SASKATCHEWAN A.C. Wright Power Products Inc. (I) 710 46th Street West Saskatoon, SK S7L 6C1 Tel: (306) 668-1985 Fax: (306) 249-2770 e-mail: gemultilin@acwright.com YUKON TNC Power Systems Inc. (I & U) 3793 West 27th Ave. Vancouver, BC V6S 1R2 Tel: (604) 221-8500 Fax: (604) 222-1337 e-mail: wyale@netcom.ca fhornby@home.com
Canadian Regional Sales Offices

EASTERN CANADA GE Power Management Steve Hyrniw (I) 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 e-mail: steve.hyrniw@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Patrick M. Kerrigan (U) 2 Corporate Dr., P.O. Box 861 Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: (203) 944-3014 Fax: (203) 944-3019 e-mail: patrick.kerrigan@indsys.ge.com CENTRAL CANADA GE Power Management Jim Lindsay (I) 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 e-mail: jim.lindsay@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Patrick M. Kerrigan (U) 2 Corporate Dr., P.O. Box 861 Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: (203) 944-3014 Fax: (203) 944-3019 e-mail: patrick.kerrigan@indsys.ge.com WESTERN CANADA GE Power Management Kazik Kuras (I & U) 202 - 7198 Vantage Way Delta, BC V4G 1K7 Tel: (604) 940-6043 Fax: (604) 940-6053 e-mail: kkuras@direct.ca
22
Canadian Sales Leader

GE Power Management John Keegan 640 Freedom Business Center King of Prussia PA 19406 Tel: (610) 992-6965 Fax: (610) 992-6971 e-mail: john.keegan@indsys.ge.com
430
Canada
Sales Offices
Europe, Africa and the Middle East
NORWAY EFA Elektro (I & U) Skivn, 123 1411 Kolbotn, Norway Tel: +47-66-80-98-00 Fax: +47-66-80-74-04 email: kjell.yeterdal@efa.no OMAN Oman Mechanical Services Company Ltd. L.L.C. (I) P.O. Box 1199 Ruwi, Postal Code 112 Sultanate of Oman Tel: +968-737-613/4 Fax: +968-737-612 e-mail: omsc@omzest.com POLAND GE Industrial Systems (I & U) 3rd Floor, 9, Boh. Getta Warszawskiego Street 44-100 Gliwica, Poland Tel: 48-32-23-06-845 Fax: +48-32-23-06-846 PORTUGAL RME (I & U) Av. da Republica 1326-7 Sala 77, 4400 V.N. De Gaia Oporto, Portugal Tel: +351-22-3710156 Fax: +351-22-3710157 e-mail: rmel@mail.telepac.pt QATAR Petrotec, Petroleum Technology Co. W.L.L. (I & U) P.O. Box 16069 8th Floor, Toyota Tower Airport Road, Doha, Qatar e-mail: petrotec@qatar.net.qa ROMANIA Dacom Impex S.R.L. (I & U) Blud-uniriri Nr. 64, Bl. K4, SC. 2, ET. 4, AP 45, SECT. 45 70426 Bucharest, Romania Tel: +40-1-323-65-65 Fax: +40-1-320-91-32 e-mail: dacom@dial.roknet.ro SAUDI ARABIA Abdel Hadi A. Al-Qahtani & Sons (I) P.O. Box 20, Dammam - 31411 Saudi Arabia Tel: +966-3-826-1477 Fax: +966-3-826-9894 e-mail: alqahtaniandsons@hotmail.com info@abdelhadialqahtanisons.com DAMMAM GE International (I & U) Dammam Indl Area No. 1 Meelsa Bldg. P.O. Box 2321, Dammam 31451 Tel: +966-3-857-0032 Fax: +966-3-857-9469 JEDDAH GE International (I & U) Suite No. 208, Jewelry Center, Tahila Street, 21423 Jeddah Tel: +966-2-663-51-11 Ext. 118 Fax: +966-2-663-55-33 email: igbal@edncme.geis.com SCOTLAND Electropower Services (I & U) 82, MacAdam Place Ayr, Scotland KA8 0AW Tel: +44-1292-287-579 Fax: +44-1292-287-579 e-mail: eps@gripfast.freeserve.co.uk SOUTH AFRICA Drivecor (Pty) Ltd. (I & U) 113 Langermann Drive Kensington, Johannesburg 2094 South Africa Tel: +27-11-622-8711 Fax: +27-11-622-4441 e-mail: drivecor@drivecor.co.za SPAIN BILBAO GE Power Management (I & U) Avenida Pinoa, 10 48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya, Spain Tel: +34-94-485-88-00 Fax: +34-94-485-88-45 Tech:+34-94-485-88-54 e-mail: gepm.help@indsys.ge.com CANARY ISLANDS GE Power Management (I & U) Andrs Garca Surez A.G.S. Proteccin medida y Control S.L., C./General Vives n56 2E, Ofic. 202 35007-Las Palmas de Gran Canaria Tel: +34-928-49-13-70 Fax: +34-928-49-13-71 e-mail: andres.garcia@intercom.es MADRID GE Power Management (I & U) Avenida Generalsmo, 43-5 28224 Pozuelo de Alarcn, Spain Tel: +34-91-714-02-05 Fax: +34-91-351-21-03 e-mail: gepce@nexo.es SWEDEN Tillquist Elteknik AB (I) Box 1120 SE-164 22 Kista, Sweden Tel: +46-8-594-63-200 Fax: +46-8-751-36-95 e-mail: tilquel@el.tillquist.se TURKEY EKO Elektra Kopaz Osel (I & U) Istanbul Cad. E5 zeri No. 15 Cayirova-Gebze-Turkey 41420 Izmit Tel: +90-262-656-47-67 Fax: +90-262-656-47-70 e-mail: elektraas@superonline.com UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Al Bawardi (I & U) P.O. Box 4118, Abu Dhabi, UAE Tel: +971-2-349-999 Fax: +971-2-318-181 e-mail: NGoplani@albawardi.co.ae
CZECH REPUBLIC UNIREC (I & U) Prazska, 16 102 21 Praha 10 Czech Republic Tel: +420-2-81017-405 Fax: +420-2-81017-411 email: unirec@unirec-praha.cz EGYPT AEE Advanced Electronics Engineering (I) 26, Rabaa Bldgs. Nozha St. Nasr City Cairo, Egypt Tel: +202-418-5020 Fax: +202-418-9265 email: sales@aee.com.eg GE International (U) 54 Lebanon St. Mohandessin, Giza, Egypt Tel: +202-3055-470-8030 Fax: +202-305-96-21 email: magued.kamel@geeam.ge.com ENGLAND, WALES Associated Power Services Ltd. (I & U) Park Lane, Guisborough, Cleveland, England TS14 6NT Tel: +44-1-287-634-456 Fax: +44-1-287-636-252 e-mail: enquires@associatedpower.com gordon@associatedpower.com FINLAND Energico Y (I & U) Lastenkodinkuja 1 00180 Helsinki, Finland Tel: +358-9-686-6150 Fax: +358-9-686-65-510 e-mail: kari.nurminen@energico.fi FRANCE Irema (I & U) Mas David 30360 Vezenobres, France Tel: +33-4-66-835-858 Fax: +33-4-66-835-859 e-mail: irema@bsi.fr GERMANY AEG Niederspannungstechnik GmbH & Co.KG (I & U) Berliner Platz 2-6 24534 Neumnster, Germany Tel: +49 (0) 6103/892-276 Fax: +49 (0) 6103/892-215 GREECE Indelec Europe (I & U) 75, Marathonodromon Str. 15124 Maroussi, Athens, Greece Tel: +301 8028 105 Fax: +301 8026 915 e-mail: indelec@indelec.gr
INDIA Industry Uniserve Pty. Ltd. (I & U) 1101, 13th Cross Indiranagar, 2nd Stage Bangalore - 560038 India Tel: +91-80-528-5867, +91-80-528-0673 +91-80-528-6135 Fax: +91-80-528-5867 e-mail: uniserve@blr.vsnl.net.in INDONESIA PT Guna Elektro (I) Jln. Arjuna Utara 50 Jakarta 11510, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-565-5010, ext. 241 or 269 Fax: +62-21-568-9007, 62-21-568-9008 e-mail: BudijantoGunawan@GAE.co.id TitikLiutama@GAE.co.id IRELAND Electropower Services (I & U) 82, MacAdam Place Ayr, Scotland KA8 0AW Tel: +44-1292-287-579 Fax: +44-1292-287-579 e-mail: eps@gripfast.freeserve.co.uk ISRAEL General Engineers Ltd. (I & U) 1, Maskit St. Herzeliya 46105, Israel Tel: +972-9-959-2235 Fax: +972-9-955-5122 Mobile: 972-52-465-183 e-mail: asherg@gen-engineers.com ITALY Tecsystem SRL (I & U) Via V. Alfieri 1 20090 Cesano Boscone Milano, Italy Tel: +39-2-486-01011 Fax: +39-2-486-00783 e-mail: conca@tecsystem.it JORDAN NAW, Nabil Ayoub Wakileh & Co. (I & U) P.O. Box 92, Amman, Jordan Tel: +962-6-4-650-574 Fax: +962-6-5-693-471 e-mail: nawco@go.com.jo KUWAIT Petroleum Services Co. W.L.L. (I & U) 6 Ring Road, S. Farwania P.O. Box 4098 13041, Safat-Kuwait Tel: +965-431-9160 Fax: +965-433-2762 e-mail: petserv@ncc.moc.kw NETHERLANDS, HOLLAND ITS Ingenieursbureau (I & U) Korte Broekstraat 2A 4944 XM Raamsdonk, Netherlands Tel: +31-162-52-12-21 Fax: +31-162-51-20-99 e-mail: arnold@itsbv.nl
European / ME / African / Western Asia Regional Sales Offices

WESTERN EUROPE GE Power Management Beatriz Romero (I & U) Avenida Pinoa, 10 48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya, Spain Tel: +34-94-485-88-08 Fax: +34-94-485-88-45 e-mail: beatriz.romero@indsys.ge.com NORTHERN EUROPE / SOUTH AFRICA GE Power Management Joe Erfurt (I & U) c/o GE Power Controls East Lancashire Road, Liverpool, Merseyside L10 5HB England Tel: 8-011-44-151524-1122 Fax: 8-011-44-151524-6243 e-mail: joe.erfurt@indsys.ge.com SOUTHERN EUROPE GE Power Management Julian Roteta (I & U) Avenida Pinoa, 10 48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya, Spain Tel: +34-94-485-88-07 Fax: +34-94-485-88-45 e-mail: julian.roteta@indsys.ge.com NORTH CENTRAL EUROPE GE Power Management Jrgen Herrmann (I & U) Koberstdter Strae 2 D-63303 Dreieichenhain, Germany Tel: +49 (0) 6103/892-276 Fax: +49 (0) 6103/892-215 Mobile: +49 (0) 173/37208-40 e-mail: jjurgen.herrmann@indsys.ge.com SPAIN GE Power Management Raimundu Graziano (I) Avda Generalisimo, 43-5 28224 Pozuelo de Alarcn, Spain Tel: +34-91-714-02-06 Fax: +34-91-351-21-03 e-mail: gepce@nexo.es GE Power Management Carlos Reynoso (U) Avda Generalisimo, 43-5 28224 Pozuelo de Alarcn, Spain Tel: +34-91-714-02-08 Fax: +34-91-351-21-03 e-mail: carlos.reynoso@indsys.ge.com MIDDLE EAST / INDIA GE Power Management Mehmet Imeryz (U) Acibadem Caddesi Ibrahimaga Konutlari C3-A Blok Daire 15 81020 Acibadem, Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90 216 428 1215 Fax: +90 216 326 5176 e-mail: mehmet.imeryuz@indsys.ge.com GE Power Management Ali Hamze (I) Al Zohour Bldg., 2nd Floor, Makdessi St., Hamra, Beirut Lebanon, P.O. Box 113-6399 Tel: +961-1-751-129 Fax: +961-1-751-130 Cellular: +961-3-388-371 e-mail: ali.hamze@indsys.ge.com
European / ME / African / Western Asia Sales Leader

GE Power Management Luis M Perez Avenida Pinoa, 10 48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya, Spain Tel: +34-94-485-88-06 Fax: +34-94-485-88-45 e-mail: luism.perez@indsys.ge.com
22
Europe, Aftrica and the Middle East
431
Sales Offices
Asia
HONG KONG Power System Resources (I & U) Walton Plaza, Room 602 801 Chang Le Road Shanghai 200031, China Tel: +021-6466-6033, +021-6473-0202 +021-6466-0008 Fax: +021-6466-2812 e-mail: psrsha@public.sta.net.cn INDONESIA PT Guna Elektro (I & U) Jln. Arjuna Utara 50 Jakarta 11510, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-565-5010, ext. 241 or 269 Fax: +62-21-568-9007, 62-21-568-9008 e-mail: BudijantoGunawan@GAE.co.id TitikLiutama@GAE.co.id JAPAN Fuji EIC Co., Ltd. (I & U) 1-5-3 Nihonbashi Chuo-Ku Tokyo 103-8243, Japan Tel: +81-3-3278-7231 Fax: +81-3-3278-7307 e-mail: katsuyuki-kubomura@fujieic.co.jp sakari-sasaki@fujieic.co.jp KOREA YPP Digitech Corporation (I & U) 348-1 Hakwi-Ri, Kanam-Myeon Yeoju-Kun, Kyunggi-do, Korea CPO Box 6511, Seoul, Korea Tel: +822-579-3146 Fax: +822-572-8710 e-mail: Yppltd@soback.kornet21.net Yppltd01@ppp.kornet21.net Johnmbek@ppp.kornet21.net MALAYSIA Kejuruteraan Semangat (I & U) Maju Sdn. Bhd. 9, Jalan USJ 10/ID, Subang Jaya 47620 Petaling Jaya Selangor, Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: +603-733-6882 Fax: +603-733-0794 e-mail: kejsmsb@tm.net.my NEW ZEALAND Industry Uniserve Pty (I & U) Unit F, 55 Druces Road Manukau City, Auckland New Zealand Tel: +64-9-262-3290 Fax: +64-9-262-3292 e-mail: uniserve@xtra.co.nz PHILIPPINES Baviers Marketing Corp. (I) Suite 7, 2nd Floor, Katipunan Bldg. 1112 Antipolo cor. J.P. Rizal Sts. Makiti, Metro Manilla Philippines Tel: +632-897-6789 Fax: +632-897-7242 GE Meter & Instrument Co. Inc. (GEPMICI) (U) 2291 Passong Tamo Extension Makati, Metro Manila Philippines Tel: +63-2-815-8761 to 70 SINGAPORE Siemens Westinghouse Technical Services Pte. Ltd. (I & U) 10, Gul Avenue, Jurong, Singapore 629654 Tel: +65-861-4466, +65-869-6511 Fax: +65-861-4172, +65-861-0678 e-mail: westingh@pacific.net.sg TAIWAN Southeast Eng. Corp. (Sencorp) (I & U) 7 Roosevelt Rd., Sec. 1, 7th Fl. Yu-Ming Mansion 10757 Taipei, Taiwan Tel: +886-22-321-0216-8 Fax: +886-22-394-2621 e-mail: umiak@ms17.hinet.net THAILAND C.S.N. Engineering Co., Ltd. (I & U) 51/21-22 Moo 15 Chakphra Road Thalingchan Bangkok, 10170 Thailand Tel: +662-881-4528-31 Fax: +662-881-4532, +662-441-3404 e-mail: csnengco@-net.net.th
AUSTRALIA MELBOURNE Uniserve Pty. Ltd. (I & U) 1132 Burke Rd. Balwyn North, VIC 3104 Tel: +03-9859-5444 Fax: +03-9859-9111 PERTH Uniserve Pty. Ltd. (I & U) 64 Canning Highway Victoria Park, WA 6100 Tel: +08-9470-1400 Fax: +08-9470-1466 QUEENSLAND Uniserve Pty. Ltd (I & U). Level 3, 80 Petrie Terrace Brisbane, QLD 4000 Tel: +07-3368-0826 Fax: +07-3368-0827 SYDNEY Uniserve Pty. Ltd. (I & U) 10 Columbia Way Baulkham Hills, NSW 2153 Tel: +02-9899-5755 Fax: +02-9899-6220 e-mail:uniserve@uniserve.com.au
+ insert international call access number (011 from North America)
CHINA BEIJING Power Systems Resources (I & U) Parkson Plaza Room 7012A NO. 37 Jin Rong Da Jie 100031 Beijing - China Tel: +86-10-6607-3581 6607-3582 6607-3586 Fax: +86-10-6607-3587 e-mail: psrbj@public.bta.net.cn SHANGHAI Power Systems Resources (I & U) Walton Plaza, Room 601/602 801 Chang Le Road Shanghai 200031, China Tel: +021-6466-6033 +021-6466-0008 Fax: +021-6466-2812 e-mail: psrsha@public.sta.net.cn WUHAN Power Systems Resources (I & U) White Rose Hotel, Room 908 750 Minzhu Road Wuchang, Wuhan 430071, China Tel: +027-8789-3366, ext. 908 Fax: +027-8789-0388 e-mail: psrwh@public.wh.hb.cn
Asian Regional Sales Offices

NORTHERN ASIA GE Power Management Stephan Z. Ao 88 Zunyi Road South, Shartex Center 10/F, Shanghai, China 200336 Tel: (86) 21-6270-6789 Ext. 640 Fax: (86) 21-6270-9975 Cell:(604) 868-1861 e mail: stephan.ao2@indsys.ce.com SOUTH ASIA/PACIFIC GE Power Management Peter Buttle 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512 e-mail: peter.buttle@indsys.ge.com
Asian Sales Leader

GE Power Management Mike Coleman 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512 e-mail: mike.coleman@indsys.ge.com
Latin America
GUATEMALA Productos Electricos Centroamericanos, S.A. (U) Calzada Aguilar Batres 42-21, Zona 12 Guatemala 01012 Tel: +502-477-3055 Fax: +502-477-3607 e-mail: proelca@guate.net MEXICO F.I.S.E.I. (I) Rio Tiber No. 38-203 Col. Cuauhtemoc 06500 Mexico, D.F., Mexico Tel: +525-511-0453 Fax: +525-511-6660 e-mail: fiseimex@mexis.com Sistemas de Control (I) Avanzados, S.A. de C.V. Constitucion No. 283 entre 5 de Mayo y Madero C.P. 91700, Veracruz, Ver, Mexico Tel: +52-29-38-18-78 Fax: +52-29-38-18-54 e-mail: sica@net.iaiver.com.mx Transmision Y Distribucion SA. (U) Tres Zapotes 39-2 03650 Mexico D.F. Mexico Tel: +525-539-3385 Fax: +525-539-3446 e-mail: tydsage@prodigy.net.mx e-mail: mleon@prodigy.net.mx e-mail: delfinog@prodigy.net.mx e-mail: riosjj@prodigy.net.mx PANAMA Guiehr S.A. (U) Avenida Abel Bravo Urbanizacion Obarrio No. 22 Edificio Eurocentro Mail: Aptdo 6-4692 El Dorado Panama, Republica de Panama Tel: +507-269-1549 Fax: +507-263-2156 e-mail: guiehr@sinfo.net PARAGUAY Tronix S.R.L. Utility (U) Oleary 997, Codigo Postal 1255 Asuncion, Paraguay Tel: 595-21-490149 595-21-448045 Fax: 595-21-490148 e-mail: info@tronix.com.py PERU Ditec S.A. (I & U) Av. San Borja Sur 410 San Borja, Lima 41 Peru Tel: +511 4767680, +511 4767690 Fax: +511 2240541 e-mail: prditec@terra.com.pe ryditec@pol.com.pe PUERTO RICO GE Industrial Systems (I & U) P.O. Box 339 Minillas Industrial Park Road 174 No. 101 Bayamon, PR 00959 Tel: +787-288-2351 Fax: +787-288-2360 URUGUAY Indunor S.A. (I & U) Constituyente 1467 p. 21 11200 Montevideo, Uruguay Tel: +5982-400-0140 Fax: +5982-409-8659 e-mail: pvilanova@indunor.com.uy VENEZUELA GEMSCO, C.A. (I) Calle 8, Edif. PLC de Venezuela Piso 3, La Urbina, Caracos Venezuela, 1071 Tel: +58-2-242-7555/7591 Fax: +58-2-242-2803 Fax(US): (305) 513-5819 e-mail: gesmco@telcel.net.ve gfuzy@gesmco.com.ve www.gesmco.com.ve PLC de Venezuela (U) Calle 8, Antiguo Edificio Marcos Y Arte La Urbina, Petare 1073, Caracos, Venezuela S.A. Tel: +(582) 243-6055 Fax: +(582) 243-6064 e-mail: edspangher@plc.com.ve
Latin American Regional Sales Offices

LATIN AMERICA GE Power Management 790 NW 107th Avenue, Suite 206 Miami, Florida 33172 Alberto Bernardes (U) Tel: +305-551-5110 e-mail: alberto.bernardes@indsys.ge.com Bruno Doerwald (I) Tel: (305) 551-5178 Fax: (905) 201- 2098 e-mail: bruno.doerwald@indsys.ge.com
22
ARGENTINA Artec Ingenieria (I & U) King 386-(C1199AAB) Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +00-54-11-4-958-2583 Fax: +00-54-11-4-958-3961 e-mail: artec@datamarkets.com.ar BOLIVIA Kemar Ltda. Empretec S.R.L. (U) Av. Sanchez Lima N 2626 P.O. Box 9326, La Paz, Bolivia Tel: +591-243-1955 Fax: +591-243-1955 e-mail: gmorriso@dima2.dimanet.com.bo BRASIL General Electric do Brasil Ltda. (U) Rua Miguel Angelo, 37 Rio de Janeiro RJ 20785-220 Brazil Tel: 55-21-582-6429 55-21-261-3508 Fax: 55-21-261-2660 e-mail: gepm.brasil@indsys.ge.com RTR-Renn Tecnologia e Representaes Ltda (I) Av. Pedro Lessa, 1111-CJS 43/44/51 CEP 11025-001-Santos/SP, Brasil Tel: +55-13-227-8484 Fax: +55-13-227-4244 e-mail: rtr@iron.com.br
CHILE PLC International (I & U) Av. Salvador #1476, Providencia, Santiago, Chile Tel: +56-2-269-8727 Fax: +56-2-269-8728 e-mail: plci@ctcinternet.cl COLOMBIA Aplitecnia Ltda. (I) Avenida Suba, No 106A-28, Oficina 203, Bogota, Colombia Tel: +57-1-613-9880 +57-1-624-9268 Fax: +57-1-613-9746 e-mail: aplitec@andinet.com K&V Ingenieria Ltda. (U) Calle 95, No. 35-56 Bogota, Colombia Tel: +57-1-218-8288 Fax: +57-1-218-7560 e-mail: j-vargas@colomsat.net.co ECUADOR Formutech, S.A. (U) 9 de Octubre 1911 y Los Rios Edificio Finansur Piso 16, Oficina 2 Guayaquil, Ecuador Tel: +593-4-453110 453886, 284263 Fax: +593-4-452502 e-mail: hcanarte@gye.satnet.net
Latin American Sales Leader

GE Power Management Mike Coleman 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 294-8512 e-mail: mike.coleman@indsys.ge.com
+ insert international call access number (011 from North America)
432
Asia / Latin America
GE POWER MANAGEMENT RECOGNITIONS

DESIGN ENGINEERING
Special Recognition for Modularity
The Universal Relay Family is a modular platform that allows users to conveniently optimize their individual system needs. The critical specification behind the UR was to develop a flexible framework to meet the needs of industrial and utility users while facilitating technological and future system requirements.
FROST & SULLIVAN

Brand Awareness Development Award
FROST & SULLIVAN

Internet Marketing Strategy Leadership Award
GE Power Management received the award for its efforts within the U.S. motor protection market, where Frost & Sullivan says it is known for producing innovative motor protection devices with features beyond those of their competition. Its products represent the most advanced microprocessor-based motor protection available.
Frost & Sullivan selected GE Power Managements website for its use of innovative and user friendly tools. Designed to help users make the most informed decisions regarding product selection, the website features an electronic newsletter, email subscriptions, online ordering, detailed product information including brochures and schematics, and interactive multimedia content.

Catalog

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Catalog

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Table of Contents

INDEX PAGES .................................................1

GENERAL INFORMATION .............................7

Motor Protection ...........................199

Special Functions. .............................263

Product Families ..............................47

MULTIFUNCTION RELAYS ..........................61

Power Quality ................................294

Generator Protection .......................61

SINGLE FUNCTION RELAYS .....................305

Overcurrent Relays ...................................................... 306

Synchronizing Relays ............................................... 326

Voltage and Frequency Relays .................. 331

Differential and Timing Relays .................. 346

Transmission Line Protection ........103

Directional Relays.......................................................... 355

Generator Protection Relays......................... 362

Auxiliary Relays ................................................................ 367

Distribution Feeder Protection ......141

Sensors, Accessories and Services ........ 415

SALES OFFICES ..........................................426

Sales Offices .......................................................................... 427

LPS-O 489 DGP

T60 745 DTP DTR

L90, L60, D60, ALPS, LPS-D, DLPD, MLP

T60 745 DTP DTR

DRS Reclosing Sync. Check

MCP, 750/760, PQM, PPQM, SMOR-B, F60

469, 369, RRTD

Alpha Numeric Index

Pullout Fuse Blocks ..................................................419 Motor Protection ......................................................239

Alpha Numeric Index

IAV IBC ICR ICW IFC IFCV IFV IJD IJS

MID Family Overview......................................................................58 MIF MIV MLJ MLP MM2 MM3

Single Function Index

2 8 21 25 27 30 32 37 40 46 47 49(+) 50 51 50/51 50/51(+) 50BF 59 60 61 64 67 68 69 74 76 78 79 81 85 86 87 87(+) 94 ( )

From Electrical Equipment to Enterprise Systems

GE Power Management... Part of GE Industrial Systems

Plastics Transportation Systems Power Systems Industrial Systems

Medical Systems Capital Services Lighting

Systems/Drives Motors Components

Power Equipment GE Fanuc Power Controls

Markham, Ontario, Canada Bilbao, Spain Aasco, Puerto Rico

Utilities Industrial facilities OEMs Consultants Contractors

Design & Manufacturing

HALT enables us to: I Determine operating and destruct

RTDS - Real Time Digital Simulator

I Identify weak links of design I Improve design margin by rapid

New Product Introduction

A wealth of information is conveniently available from our website.

Scalable Substation Automation Offerings

Be sure to visit our website at: www.GEindustrial.com/pm

CALL CENTER TECHNICAL SUPPORT

For other GE products and services contact:

Maximize product and application knowledge quickly and thoroughly.

Visit www.GEindustrial.com/pm or contact us for the current course schedule.

Protection Relays Course: TRNG-7602

I Questions to ask I Demo labs on the installation and

Motor Management Relays with Metering: TRNG-4691

Feeder, and Generator Transformer Management Course: TRNG-7601

Custom Course Matrix

do you get from here...

Enter your customer code and PIN